Welcome to Tialuxe Tech Portfolio – where creativity meets functionality. As a Lagos-based graphic designer, video editor, and web and app developer, I bring a unique perspective to every project. With expertise in a variety of design and development tools, I'm confident in my ability to bring your vision to life. Take a look around and let's chat about what I can create for you.
In today’s digital age, a strong online presence is essential for businesses of all sizes. A well-designed website is not just a digital business card; it’s a powerful tool that can transform the way you operate and connect with customers. In this comprehensive guide, we’ll delve into the 10 ways a website can benefit your business, exploring each point in-depth to provide a thorough understanding of its importance in the modern business landscape.
1. 24/7 Accessibility
A website provides round-the-clock accessibility to your business. Whether it’s the middle of the night or a public holiday, potential customers can access information, make purchases, or contact you. This constant availability can lead to increased sales and customer satisfaction.
2. Expanded Reach
One of the most significant advantages of a website is its ability to transcend geographical boundaries. It empowers your business to reach a global audience, opening doors to new markets and customers you may have never reached otherwise. This expanded reach can fuel business growth and diversify your customer base.
3. Credibility and Trust
A professionally designed website enhances your business’s credibility and trustworthiness. It’s the digital face of your brand, where customers can learn about your products or services, read testimonials, and get a sense of your company’s values and ethos. A well-crafted website establishes trust, making visitors more likely to engage with your business.
4. Cost-Effective Marketing
Websites offer a cost-effective platform for marketing your business. Online marketing strategies, such as search engine optimization (SEO), content marketing, and social media promotion, allow you to reach and engage your target audience without incurring the high costs associated with traditional advertising. You can tailor your marketing efforts to fit your budget and see a substantial return on investment.
5. Data Collection and Analysis
Websites are powerful tools for collecting and analyzing valuable customer data. Through analytics tools, you can track user behavior, preferences, and demographics. This data is invaluable for making informed decisions, refining your products or services, and creating tailored marketing campaigns that resonate with your audience.
6. E-commerce Opportunities
For businesses in the retail sector, a website can serve as an additional sales channel. By setting up an online store, you can accept payments and reach a broader customer base. E-commerce capabilities provide convenience for your customers and can significantly boost your revenue.
7. Customer Support
Websites aren’t limited to selling products or services; they can also enhance customer support. Features like FAQs, live chat support, and contact forms create avenues for customers to seek assistance or have their questions answered promptly. Excellent customer support through your website can lead to higher customer satisfaction and loyalty.
8. Brand Consistency
Consistency is a fundamental aspect of branding. Your website enables you to control and maintain brand consistency in the digital realm. Through careful design and content management, you can ensure that your brand’s image, messaging, and user experience are aligned across all online touchpoints.
9. Competitive Advantage
In today’s competitive market, having a website is often expected by consumers. By having one, you can gain a competitive advantage over businesses that have not embraced the digital landscape. A well-optimized website can set you apart from the competition and attract more potential customers.
10. Scalability and Growth
Your website can evolve with your business. As you expand, you can add new features, expand your product line, and accommodate more visitors without significant structural changes. This scalability ensures that your website continues to support your growth and adapt to your changing needs.
Getting Started with Your Business Website
Now that you understand the numerous benefits of having a website for your business, it’s time to take action. Here are some steps to get you started:
1. Define Your Goals: Determine your website’s purpose, whether it’s to inform, sell, or provide support.
2. Choose a Domain: Select a memorable and relevant domain name that reflects your brand.
3. Design and Development: Hire a professional web designer and developer or use user-friendly platforms like WordPress, Wix, or Shopify to create your site. Speaking of expert, I’m one, and It take less effort from you to actually contact me. You can reach out to me through my email: contactme@tialuxetech.com, or via any of my social media link on the footer of this post, or you can as well quickly and easily direct message me via my WhatsApp, click here
4. Content Creation: Populate your website with engaging, informative, and SEO-optimized content that speaks to your target audience.
5. Marketing and Promotion: Utilize digital marketing strategies, including SEO, social media, and email marketing, to attract visitors to your website.
6. Regular Updates: Keep your website up to date with fresh content, new products or services, and additional features that enhance the user experience.
7. Analyze and Improve: Use analytics tools to monitor your website’s performance, identify areas for improvement, and make necessary changes to enhance user engagement and conversion rates.
In Conclusion
Your website is more than just a digital asset; it’s a vital component of your business strategy. It opens doors to new customers, enhances credibility, and offers cost-effective marketing opportunities. Embrace the digital era and harness the power of a well-crafted website to drive your business forward.
By implementing these 10 benefits, your website can become a dynamic tool for business growth, a source of trust and credibility, and a means to connect with a global audience. The time to create or enhance your business website is now; it’s a smart investment that can transform your business’s success in the digital age.
How to Display Different Sidebar for Each Post and Page in WordPress
Do you want to display different sidebars for certain posts and pages on your WordPress site?
A lot of the time, you will want to show the same sidebar across your entire website or blog. However, sometimes you may need to show different sidebar content on some of your posts and pages.
In this article, we will show you how to create and display different sidebars for each post and page in WordPress.
When Would You Need Different Sidebars in WordPress?
Many WordPress themes have a sidebar where you can add useful widgets and content. For example, many sites add a search bar to the sidebar or show a list of recent posts.
If your WordPress theme has a sidebar, then by default, it will look the same on all your posts, pages, categories, and archive pages.
However, you may want to display different sidebar widgets on certain posts and pages.
For example, you might show different content in the sidebar of your most popular posts or display ads that are more relevant to a particular page.
Having said that, let’s see how to create and display a different sidebar for each post and page in WordPress. Simply use the quick links below to jump straight to the method you want to use:
Method 1: Displaying Different Sidebars for Each Post and Page in WordPress (Easy)
If your theme supports sidebar widgets, then you can easily create multiple sidebars using Lightweight Sidebar Manager. This plugin lets you build as many custom sidebars as you want and then assign them to different posts and pages. You can also add them to custom post types or assign a sidebar to all the pages or posts that have a specific category.
The first thing you need to do is install and activate the Lightweight Sidebar Manager plugin. For more details, see our step-by-step guide on how to install a WordPress plugin.
Upon activation, you need to go to Appearance » Sidebars. To create the first sidebar, click on the ‘Add New’ button.
You can now type in a title for the sidebar. This is just for your reference, so you can use anything you want.
With that done, open the ‘Sidebar To Replace’ dropdown menu and choose the location where you want to show the sidebar. The options you see may vary depending on your WordPress theme.
Now, you can control where the sidebar appears by creating inclusion or exclusion rules.
To create an inclusion rule, just open the ‘Display On’ dropdown and choose the pages, posts, custom post types, or categories where you want to use the sidebar.
For example, you might add the sidebar to a specific page, such as your 404 error page or the author archive.
Another option is using the sidebar for a particular page, post, or category by selecting ‘Specific Pages/Posts/Taxonomies.’
This adds a box where you can type in the page, post, or category.
To create more inclusion rules, simply click on the ‘Add Display’ Rule button.
This adds a section where you can create the new inclusion rule.
If you prefer, then you can create exclusion rules instead. For example, you may want to show the sidebar on every page except the homepage.
You can also combine inclusion and exclusion rules to control exactly where the sidebar appears on your WordPress website.
To create an exclusion rule, just click on the ‘Add Exclusion Rule’ button.
In the new ‘Do Not Display On’ section, open the dropdown menu and select the page or post that shouldn’t use this sidebar.
You can also exclude the sidebar from pages that have a specific category by following the same process described above.
After deciding where the sidebar will appear on your WordPress blog, you may want to show different content to different users.
For example, if you have a membership site, then you might use a different sidebar for visitors compared to logged-in members.
To do this, open the ‘User’ dropdown and choose a role from the dropdown menu. Now, only people with this specific user role will see the sidebar.
Finally, you may want to type in an optional description. This will only appear in the WordPress dashboard, so it’s a good way to share information with other admins or users on a multi-author WordPress blog.
If you are going to create lots of sidebars, then you can also use this field to leave yourself notes and helpful reminders.
When you are happy with the information you have entered, simply click on ‘Publish.’
With that done, go to Appearance » Widgets. You will now see all the widget-ready areas that your theme supports by default, plus the new sidebar you created in the previous step.
You can now go ahead and add widgets to the sidebar, just like any other widget-ready area.
SeedProd is the best landing page builder plugin for WordPress. With this plugin, you can create any type of custom page without writing any code. It also has dozens of professional site kits and templates that you can easily edit and fine-tune using the drag-and-drop builder.
When designing a custom page, you can choose a layout that has a sidebar.
You then simply find the blocks you want to show in that sidebar and add them using drag and drop.
SeedProd has all the blocks and features you’d expect from a powerful page builder, such as optin forms, social profiles, countdown timers, contact forms, buttons, various content blocks, and more. This makes it easy to create powerful and unique sidebars for your WordPress blog.
Weglot Translate Offers Fast and Powerful Website Translation
The Internet has opened the doors to global opportunity for anyone with an online presence. And when it comes to breaking the language barrier to a worldwide audience, WordPress users generally have two choices.
One option is creating separate websites for each language we want to translate. The other option is to explore the offerings of translation plugins and services, such as Weglot.
Weglot Translate, a WordPress plugin and API-based translation service, promises to turn your website into a multilingual powerhouse with just a few clicks of a button.
Instead of having to deal with the expense and administrative headaches of maintaining multiple websites, it aims to provide WordPress users with an easy-to-use and feature-rich alternative for all of their website’s translation needs.
Weglot’s Main Features
Weglot Translate has a lot to offer. Here are its main features:
Fast, simple install & setup (without any code)
Automatic content detection and instant translation
Content is automatically displayed under language subdirectories.
Compatibility with all WordPress themes, plugins, and add-ons, including page builders, Yoast SEO, WooCommerce (e.g., product pages, SEO, checkout page, and more)
Works with WordPress cache plugins for fewer database calls and faster response times
Choose from 110+ languages
Supports machine and human translations (including access to professional translators)
Translations are hosted by Weglot, helping to speed up your site and avoid slowdowns due to overloaded databases.
Tools for easy editing of translations (e.g., Translations List, Visual Editor, Glossary)
Rule creation to include or exclude specific URLs or parts of pages for translation
Search and Replace for easy translation of words and phrases across your site.
Multilingual SEO-friendly, as Weglot automatically adds hreflang attributes that make it easier for search engines to index multi-language content
Customize the appearance and placement of the language switcher button without custom code.
Emails and PDFs translatable
Supports RTL and LTR customization
It supports the ability to add different images and videos for different languages.
There is no need to bother with translation files (e.g., .po or .mo) or other WordPress source files.
Premium features include translated URLs, multiple websites, multiple project members, and custom languages.
Translated content is stored on dedicated and secured AWS servers.
Setting Up Weglot Translate
The Weglot plugin is easy to set up and only takes a few minutes. Here’s how to do it:
Installing Weglot
1. In WordPress, go to Plugins. Then, click ‘Add New’ and type Weglot into the Keyword search field. Alternatively, you can go directly to the plugin page.
2. Click the ‘Install Now’ button for the Weglot result, and then click ‘Activate’.
3. After the plugin is installed on your WordPress site, you’ll see a new Weglot tab in your WordPress dashboard. Click on your Weglot tab to finalize the process
Obtaining Your API key
4. In the API Key section, click the link that says Log into Weglot to get your API key. You’ll be taken to Weglot’s website.
If you haven’t already done so, you will create an account with Weglot to connect your WordPress site to the Weglot API.
5. In the Create an Account box, enter your email address and a password. Then, click the ‘Sign up’ button. Weglot will send you an email to confirm your account.
The 10-day free trial that Weglot offers here is quite limited. It allows you to translate up to 2000 words on your website into one other language. Realistically, this is only enough to accommodate websites with minimal content. However, it allows you to test the plugin and service.
Selecting Languages
6. Once you’ve confirmed your account, go back to Weglot’s Let’s Get Started page, copy the API key and paste it back into WordPress.
7. Next, select the Original Language of your site, and choose the language (or languages, if you have a premium plan) that you want to translate your site into.
8. Click the Save Changes button below.
By the way, some premium plans for Weglot include support for multiple websites. If you plan on using Weglot on multiple sites, you need to install the plugin on each site the same way you did here.
Using Weglot To Translate Your WordPress Site
Now that you’ve done the basic setup for the plugin (we’ll look at other options later), let’s run through a simple translation of your site.
Now that Weglot has been added to your WordPress site, you’ll see a language button at the bottom right (its default position) on the front end of your website. Switch between the languages to see Weglot in action!
By default, every page on your website is translated by Weglot, but as you’ll see later, the service gives you options for choosing what’s considered for translation.
Through your Weglot Dashboard, you get complete control over your translations and can choose to make edits and manage them how you like. You can manually edit translations, order professional translators, or add team members depending on your plan.
Here’s a tip: Translating webpages results in API calls to Weglot. Because of that, using a cache plugin on your WordPress site can help reduce API calls and potentially lower the cost of their service. That’s because when you use page caching, you’ll only get charged for the API call on the initial visit that generates the cached page.
Weglot Translate Language Button
The language button allows your visitors to see your site in their desired language. With the Weglot plugin, you can easily customize its appearance and location on your website without any custom code.
To change the appearance of the language switcher, click the Weglot menu item in the WordPress sidebar and go to the Language button appearance section.
You can choose from several options for the language button’s appearance, including:
With or without flags
Horizontal or drop-down menus
Display of full language name or two-letter country code
CSS for custom displays
You can also see a preview of the button for the choices you make.
Just below the appearance settings are the settings for the language button position.
You have four options for the positioning of the language button’s location. The default button location is at the lower right position of your website’s page.
Other positioning options for the language button include:
• Navigation menu placement
For button placement in the menu, click the Weglot link in the WordPress sidebar, and then check the box next to In Menu.
• Button placement using the Weglot Translate widget
Go to Appearance… Widgets, and drag the Weglot Translate widget to your desired location.
• Shortcode
For button placement using shortcode, add [weglot_switcher] wherever you want to place the button on your posts or pages.
• Source code
You can also position the language button by adding simple code to the source code of an HTML page.
Translation Exclusion and Other Options
Below the Positioning settings are the optional Translation Exclusion settings. You can exclude URLs and HTML block elements from being translated here.
To exclude specific posts or pages, enter their relative URLs with no spaces between each entry, separated by commas, as in the example above.
To exclude specific HTML blocks from being translated, enter their CSS selector with no spaces between each entry, separated by commas.
Visitor Language Redirection
The Other Options section below the Translation Exclusion options, including Auto Redirect. With this option turned on, your visitors will see translated pages that are based on their browser language.
All of the premium Weglot plans come with Visitor Language Redirection. This is a great feature for improving the user experience of your visitors.
Visitors whose language is not supported on your site will be redirected to your website’s original language.
SEO Friendly
Weglot Translate follows Google’s best practices for multilingual sites and is SEO compatible for proper detection and indexation by search engines.
Weglot’s SEO features include:
• Unique URLs for translated pages, with subdirectories for each language version (i.e., websitename.com/es for Spanish)
The automatic addition of Hreflang tags in the page source code tells Google you have different language versions of your pages.
SEO tag translation, including meta titles and meta descriptions
Content translations in source code
Translation of the image ALT attribute
The Weglot Dashboard
Weglot provides amazingly fast and impressive machine translation with the assistance of neural and statistical algorithms.
However, even with the state of today’s language technology, machine translations can’t be expected to surpass human translation. The people behind Weglot understand that, and that’s why they provide different tools and services to help you further edit and manage your translations.
To access the Weglot dashboard for your account, you need to select the Weglot menu in the WordPress sidebar and then click on the red Edit my translations button. If requested, log in with your email and password.
The first page you enter on the Weglot dashboard is the Home page.
From the top menu bar on the dashboard, you can (from left to right):
Switch between projects and create new projects (each source website is considered a project and uses one API key)
View notifications
Get support (including a knowledge base and FAQ).
Check out your account settings, get billing information, and logout.
The Home page shows key information about your project(s), including:
Your current Weglot plan (you can change plans here)
The number of translated words that you’ve used for your plan
The percentage of translation requests you’ve made
The number of users in your workspace
A list of recent activities you’ve made with your Weglot account, like adding languages to a website, creating a project, and changing your plan
When you click on a project on the dashboard, you’ll see links to several sections, such as:
Languages
URLs
Visual Editor
Translation Exclusions
URL Slugs
Glossary
Professional Translations
and many more.
We’ll take a brief look at these sections now.
Languages
In this section, you’ll see a list of language pairs you’ve chosen to translate your website, the total translated words, and the percentage of manually translated words. You can also view your inactive translations and add new languages to make your website available in. If you have pre-existing translations, you can import them by going to Actions > Import.
Here, you can access all translations per language pair and edit and manage them accordingly.
URLs
You can also manage the translations of your URLs through your dashboard. There’s also the option to mass-select all the URLs and sync the content, order professional translations, or even export the content of them.
Visual Editor
The Visual Editor of the Weglot Dashboard lets you edit your translations directly on the front end of your site’s pages. That means you can edit your translations in a live preview of your website, allowing you to see the context of each sentence.
You can use the Visual Editor in either your original language or one of your translated languages.
To begin using the editor, click on Projects. Navigate to the Visual Editor link on the left side and click the Start Editing button.
You’ll be taken to your website’s homepage.
To edit, click the pencil icon that appears to the left of the content you wish to change. A pop-up will appear, allowing you to choose among the languages you used to translate your site. You make your changes in this pop-up window. When you’re satisfied with the changes, click OK.
There are two ways to navigate the Visual Editor. You can move around as you normally would within any website, like clicking on navigation links and then editing accordingly. Another option is to input a specific URL into the bar on the upper left of the Editor.
You could even toggle the SEO view of the Editor, which will show you the different meta descriptions and the existing translations.
Translation Exclusions
The Translation Tools section of the dashboard allows you to set rules for including or excluding the translation of different parts of your site content.
This is divided into two sections: Excluded URLs and Excluded Blocks.
There are several options here when customizing the rules for your excluded URL. You can even hide the language button on these URLs through this setting or delete translations linked to specified URLs.
You could add blocks to exclude from Weglot’s automatic translation if needed.
URL Slugs
Weglot also gives you the option to manage the translations for your URL slugs. To make things easier, you can auto-translate each one, then edit them as you see fit. To organize the slugs better, you can toggle “Hide not translated slugs” under the “Filter” dropdown menu.
Glossary
Through the Glossary, you can see an overview of the translation rules you’ve approved and set in place. It consolidates the rules implemented across all languages, making it incredibly useful for fine-tuning your localization efforts and ensuring consistency throughout your website.
It will specify whether the rules are case-sensitive and to what languages they apply. You can add new rules directly from this page by clicking “Add glossary rule”.
Similarly, if you want to import existing rules onto the Weglot plugin, click on the Actions drop-down menu > Import.
Professional Translations
The subtleties of language often require a human touch. With that in mind, Weglot allows you to order translations for pages and text strings from professional agencies from within your user dashboard.
Pricing for professional translation starts at €0.13/word, depending on the language pair. Weglot estimates 24-48 hours for professional translations. Once finished, they are automatically added to your Weglot Dashboard and website.
To order professional translation services, go to Languages on the left side of your dashboard (under the Projects view). Select your language pair, then tick the box next to the text strings you’d like to translate. Then, click the basket icon on the lower right to add them to your cart.
Fill in the right information, then proceed to payment. It’s that easy!
Support & Documentation
Weglot is easy to set up and use, and you may not need much documentation in order to get up and running with it. Still, if you need a little guidance on setting up some things, Weglot’s Help Center is full of incredibly useful documentation. These include onboarding documentation to get you going.
Weglot offers the following support and documentation:
Weglot currently supports 110+ languages for translation. If you need a language that’s not yet supported, don’t hesitate to email their support team for more assistance.
When I contacted their support with questions for this review, they responded quickly and courteously.
At the time of this writing, the free Weglot plugin from WordPress.org has an average rating of 4.8/5, 50,000+ active installs, and over 1400 five-star ratings.
Pricing
Weglot comes in both free and premium versions, with the main pricing criteria based on the total number of translated words and the number of languages you need.
The free version of the plugin won’t be enough for most websites. But if you have minimal content, such as a simple one-page or basic static site, it may do the job. You can try their service with a 10-day free trial, with no required credit card.
Premium plans include features like unlimited languages, visitor language redirection, subdirectories, multiple sites, team members, and dedicated support. Purchase of premium plans comes with a 15-day refund policy.
Weglot plan prices are listed in euros and dollars, and you can pay with other currencies. For your convenience, you can find a currency converter here.
Here’s how the different plans break down (yearly plans give you two months free):
Free
2000 translatable words (sitewide) 1 extra language 2,000 translation requests Visitor language redirection Basic support
Starter Plan (€150 yearly or €15 monthly)
10,000 words sitewide 1 extra language 20,000 monthly translation requests Access to pro translators Visitor language redirection Premium support
Business Plan (€290 yearly or €29 monthly)
50,000 words sitewide 3 translated languages 50,000 monthly translation requests Access to pro translators Visitor language redirection
Pro Plan (€790 yearly or €79 monthly)
200,000 words sitewide 5 translated languages 200,000 monthly translation request Access to pro translators Visitor language redirection 3 projects (websites) 5 team members Translated URLs Page view statistics Premium support
Advanced Plan (€2,990 yearly or €299 monthly)
1,000,000 words 10 translated languages 1,000,000 monthly translation requests 10 projects (websites) Statistics (translation requests and page views) Translated URLs Custom languages Export and import Top-level domain +++ and more
Extended Plan (€6,990 yearly or €699 monthly)
5,000,000 words 20 translated languages 5,000,000 monthly translation requests 20 projects (websites) Statistics (translation requests and page views) Translated URLs Custom languages Export and import Top-level domain +++ and more
Weglot also offers Enterprise plans with tailored support, a dedicated contract, and more. You can inquire about the price on request here.
According to Weglot, translations are no longer displayed on your site if you cancel their service. Users will thus lose all access to their translations.
Conclusions & Recommendations
The Internet provides us with a global marketplace. Yet, most of us never seriously consider the opportunities beyond our borders.
As WordPress users, we basically have two options for making our websites multilingual: create a dedicated site for each language or give a translation plugin/service a try.
The latter option is generally less expensive, less time-consuming, and much easier from an administrative and maintenance standpoint. And that’s where Weglot comes in.
Weglot is a very impressive WordPress plugin and SaaS for quickly and easily translating your website’s content into 110+ languages.
Machine-based neural and statistical algorithms automatically translate your website content (including menus, SEO, metadata, widgets, comments, and source code). The plugin also allows you to easily select content that you wish to be ignored for translation. It even automatically detects and translates new content.
With just a few clicks of a button, you can create localized websites and speak to a global audience.
But that’s just the first layer of its translation capabilities. It also provides human translation editing tools and professional translators for handling your most critical pages (e.g., sales and landing pages).
It essentially provides a complete website translation service that can scale to your needs.
Weglot isn’t cheap. But if you’re an individual or organization that can truly benefit through multilingual expansion, it’s likely that it will more than pay for itself over the long run.
If you’re looking to increase your traffic and improve your conversions by communicating with a more global audience, Weglot Translate may be your answer. To find out more, you can visit their website here.
How to Make a Logo for Your Website (Beginner’s Guide)
Do you want to make a custom logo for your website?
Maybe you can’t afford a professional designer, but you are worried that your graphic design skills aren’t up to the task. Your logo is a very important part of your brand’s identity. You want it to not only look high quality but also communicate your brand’s identity and values.
In this article, we will show you how to make a logo for your website. We will go through several different solutions so you can pick the one that suits you best.
To help you easily navigate the post, you can click the links below to jump ahead to the section you want to read:
Why You Need to Create a Logo for Your Website
Many people around the world can recognize big-name brands from their logos. When you see the iconic Golden Arches of McDonald’s anywhere in the world, you instantly recognize the brand and know what will be on the menu there.
That’s the power of branding, and a logo plays the most important role in building that reputation.
Whether you are creating a blog, making a website, or starting an online store, having a unique logo makes your brand look legitimate. It helps you build trust, recognition, and promote your business.
Often, when users want to start working on an online business idea, they start by thinking of business names and go straight to designing logos.
But before you do that, you need to make sure that your brand name idea is not already registered by someone else. See our guide on how to check domain name availability.
Once you have ensured that your business name idea is available, make sure to go ahead and register your domain so that no one else takes it (trust us, this happens more often than you think).
After you have registered your domain name, you are ready to start designing your logo. We have some excellent free logo-maker tools for beginners.
Tips for Making a Custom Logo for Your Website
Creating a custom logo for your website requires some understanding of design. However, as a beginner, you can follow these best practices to make sure that your logo looks polished and professional:
Keep your logo design simple and clean. This makes sure that your logo will look good even at a small size. Think how tiny the profile images are in your Facebook or Twitter feed.
Use a transparent background for your logo. That way, you can put it anywhere, not just on a white area of your website.
Get the highest quality file you can for your logo. You want it to look great in a large size or in print, too. You can copy it and make smaller versions for social media, blog posts, and website pages.
Use your brand and website colors in your logo to help it harmonize with the rest of your website.
There are different types of logo designs commonly used by businesses. When making your own logo, you may want to experiment with some of these.
Wordmark Logo
A wordmark logo is a distinctive text-only logo. Your unique brand name set with specific fonts and colors can make an excellent logotype.
If you are making a custom logo for your WordPress website by yourself, this is a great option as it’s simple and straightforward.
Pictorial Mark Logo
A pictorial mark is usually a brand image using an illustration or icon to represent an organization.
Famous examples of this kind of logo include Apple, Nike, Audi, and more.
Combination of Both
These types of logos are the most common ones you will see around. They combine words or letters presented in an iconic layout.
Famous examples of such logos include Dell, Pizza Hut, Doritos, and more.
Choosing the Right Style for Your Logo
If you are making your own logo, then you will need to be realistic about your design skills first. Using a wordmark might seem very simple, but it needs to be unique so that you can easily register your logo as a trademark if needed.
You can also draw an icon to be used as your logo. However, you will need strong design skills to come up with a unique idea for your brand image.
For our own brands, we use a combination of both wordmarks and icons. For example, our sister company OptinMonster’s logo has a mascot placed on a wordmark.
Let’s take a look at a few different ways to create professional-looking logos for your websites (without hiring a designer).
1. Make a Logo Using Tailor Brands (Best for Customization)
Tailor Brands’ Logo Maker is easy and straightforward to use. You also get access to a lot of customization options when creating a custom logo for your website.
It’s one of the best logo makers and is free to use. However, note that you will need to pay to download your finished logo. The minimum you can pay is $9.99 for 1 month.
To begin, go to the Tailor Brands Logo Maker and type in the name of your company. Then, click the ‘Get Started’ button.
Next, Tailor Brands will launch a logo builder that asks a series of questions.
First, you will need to select what your brand is offering. For instance, is your brand selling physical goods, services, technology and software, original content, or other products?
Simply select an option and move to the next step.
After that, you will need to enter some details about your industry. You can start by selecting an industry from the dropdown menu and briefly explaining your business.
Next, Tailor Brands will ask what your biggest motivation is for starting a business.
You can select from the options and add more details.
After that, you will need to select which stage your website or brand is in right now.
For instance, it is just an idea, you are getting ready to launch, or it’s already in business?
In the next step, you can choose which service you’d like to focus on.
Go ahead and select the ‘Logo & Branding’ option.
After that, you’ll need to select what you need for your brand.
Simply select the ‘Logo’ option.
Next, you will need to choose how you discovered Tailor Brands.
You can select any option or simply click the ‘Skip’ button at the bottom.
Tailor Brands will now process the information and show you an option to create your custom logo.
Go ahead and click the ‘Create’ button.
Next, you will need to sign up for a free account.
You can use your Facebook or Google account or simply enter an email address and password to get started.
After creating an account, you can build a new logo.
First, you will need to choose the type of logo you’d like to create. Tailor Brands lets you choose an icon-based, name-based, or initial-based logo.
You can only select one option, although you can always restart the logo maker again if you want to try out other possibilities.
If you select ‘Icon Based’ here, then you will be prompted on the next screen to choose an icon type. You can pick a geometric shape or search for an icon.
For this tutorial, let’s select the ‘Search For Icon’ option.
Next, you can choose up to 5 icons for your logo. There is also an option at the top to search for different icons.
When you are done, simply click the ‘Next’ button at the bottom.
After that, you will need to select 3 styles for your logo.
You can click the ‘Next’ button after selecting the styles you love.
Once you have completed this process, you will see a short animation while your logo is being created.
Next, you will be able to see your logo.
You can click ‘Love it’ to be taken to the pricing plans, ‘Customize’ to start editing it, or you can scroll down the menu on the left-hand side for more logo options.
If you choose to customize your logo, then you can pick from different styles, fonts, layouts, and more.
As you select different options, the logo will update on the right.
There are also options to change the color palette and edit the shape of your logo.
Once you are happy with your logo, you can click the ‘Finish’ button.
A small window will now open where you can review your logo design.
Go ahead and click the ‘I’m Finished’ button.
Once your logo is ready, you will see a download option on the next screen.
You can click on the ‘Download’ button.
Next, you will see a popup asking you to upgrade to a premium plan to download the logo.
Clicking the ‘Upgrade’ button will take you to the pricing page, and you will be presented with a number of different pricing plans.
These plans give you access not just to your logo but also to graphic design and website creation tools. They could be a good option if you want access to things like stock photos.
If you just want the logo, then you can click the ‘1 Month’ tab and select the ‘Basic’ plan. You only need to make one payment for your logo to be yours to keep. You can cancel the plan straight after that.
2. Make a Custom Logo for Your Site Using Looka (Quick and Easy)
Looka is a quick and easy online graphic design tool that allows you to make a logo without any design skills. It was formerly known as Logojoy.
Like Tailor Brands, Looka’s tool is free to use, but you will need to pay to download your logo. Prices start from $20. You don’t get the same level of personalization as you get with Tailor Brands, but it’s a great alternative for creating custom logos.
To get started, simply visit the Looka website and enter your company name in the search box.
Once that’s done, click the ‘Get started’ button.
Next, you need to select your industry from the dropdown menu.
Don’t forget to click the ‘Continue’ button to move on to the next step.
You will then see a number of logos that have been automatically generated for you.
Go ahead and select a few logos you like as inspiration.
Next, you will need to choose some colors that you like. You can pick up to 3 colors and then click the ‘Continue’ button.
After that, Looka will ask you to enter a company and a slogan (optional).
Once you have entered this information, just click the ‘Continue’ button.
In the next step, you will need to select some symbol types for your logo.
For example, we chose different food-related symbols for our food blog logo.
Looka will now start to generate logos for you.
You will then see a bunch of variations that you can use for your website. Simply select a logo to further customize it.
After that, you will see the logo builder offered by Looka.
Using the drag-and-drop logo editor, you can adjust the font size, choose a transparent background, change the font family, add or change your icon, and more.
Feel free to edit the design as much as you like and share it with colleagues for a second opinion. Once you are happy, just click on the ‘Download’ button in the top right corner to purchase and download your logo.
Note that if you want a transparent version of your logo, then you will need to pay $65 for the Premium plan.
3. Create a Custom Logo Using Hatchful by Shopify (Free)
Shopify is a popular eCommerce platform. They also offer a free logo maker tool called Hatchful. It allows you to easily create beautiful logos for your website without any design skills.
Unlike Tailor Brands and Looka, you can download the logo free of cost. Plus, it offers different customization options and will guide you step by step through creating a logo.
First, you need to visit the Shopify Hatchful page and click on the ‘Get Started’ button.
Next, you need to choose your business type.
If you can’t find an exact match, then simply use the closest possible match.
After that, Hatchful will ask you to choose a visual style for your logo.
You need to select a style that matches your business website’s style, look, and industry.
Next, enter your business name and a slogan (optional).
You can skip this step if you want and move ahead.
After that, you will be asked to select where you plan to use the logo.
You can pick the ‘Online store or website’ option to continue.
Finally, the wizard will analyze your answers and show you several logo samples to choose from.
You can select any of these logos to further edit them.
This will launch a simple logo editor where you will see a live preview of your logo with editing tools in the left column.
You can edit the text, add an icon, add symbols, and change the background.
Once you are satisfied with your design, you can click the ‘Next’ button to download your logo files.
You will be asked to create a free account, and your logo files will be sent to your email address. The zip file will include not just your logo but a favicon or site icon and cover images for your social media profiles.
Bonus: Hire Someone to Make Your Website Logo
The online logo maker tools we have covered in this tutorial are made specifically for beginners. You can create a simple and elegant logo for your website using these tools, but they are still limited in design choices.
If you can afford it, the best option is to hire an expert graphic designer to make a logo for your website. There are several places where you can find freelance designers.
There are thousands of people offering graphic design services on these websites. How do you pick the right person for the job?
Sticking to these best practices can help you find the perfect candidate to make a logo for your business.
Look for ratings, reviews, and the number of completed jobs on the designer’s profile. These are good indications of quality services provided to previous customers.
Give a detailed brief to the designer about your specific design requirements.
Set your own price for the logo, but keep in mind that a unique and creative design will cost more than a generic logo.
Make sure that you get the original source files in vector file format. This will allow you to later resize or reuse your logo in other places like business cards, posters, t-shirts, and more.
Have you ever heard of WooCommerce Shortcodes? Think of them as magic keys for your online store. With just a few simple codes, you can make your shop look and work just the way you want. It’s like adding cool features without the hard work.
If you have an online shop or are thinking of starting one, these shortcodes can be your best friend. They make things easy and fun. So, let’s dive in and see how these magic keys can make your shop shine!
What is a Shortcode in WooCommerce?
When it comes to building your WooCommerce shops, Shortcodes do the heavy lifting for you. Just by inserting a small piece of code, your site performs a specific action.
Want to display all your products? There’s a shortcode for that. These are the magic spells of the online store world, from showcasing items to setting up a shopping cart.
For example, let’s say you want to show a list of all the products you’re selling. Instead of adding each product one by one, you can use a shortcode. This shortcode will automatically display all your products for you. Cool, right?
So, in simple words, a shortcode in WooCommerce is a quick and easy way to add awesome features to your online store without the hassle.
Different Types of WooCommerce Shortcodes
From displaying products to managing the cart, WooCommerce shortcodes cater to a myriad of functions. Let’s delve into the various types available:
Source: Elementor
Page Shortcodes
Think of a Page Shortcode as a magic spell. When you use this spell on your website, it instantly creates a specific page for you. Instead of manually setting up pages like your shopping cart, checkout, or account page, you can use a Page Shortcode, and voila! The page appears, fully functional and ready to use.
WooCommerce provides several page shortcodes to help store owners set up essential parts of their online shop. Here are some examples:
woocommerce_cart: This shortcode instantly creates a shopping cart page. When customers add products to their cart, they can visit this page to see what they’ve added and proceed to checkout.
woocommerce_checkout: Do you want a checkout page? Use this shortcode. It sets up a page where customers can provide their shipping details, choose a payment method, and finalize their purchase.
woocommerce_my_account: This shortcode creates an account page for your customers. Here, they can view their past orders, change passwords, and manage other account details.
In most cases, these shortcodes will be added to pages automatically via WooCommerc’s onboarding wizard and do not need to be used manually.
Product Table Shortcodes
Imagine you have a store with hundreds of products. Instead of showing each product one by one, which can be time-consuming for your visitors, you’d want a neat table where they can see all the products at once, right?
That’s where the Product Table Shortcode comes in. It allows you to display your products in a clean, organized table format. This table can show product names, prices, descriptions, and even add-to-cart buttons.
Consider Barn2.com’s WooCommerce Product Table, specifically designed for this purpose. This best-selling plugin lists your WooCommerce products in a searchable table layout with filters. It’s especially popular for:
Quick order forms: Customers can quickly view products and add them to their cart from the table itself.
Large product catalogs: For stores with a vast range of products, displaying them in a table makes navigation easier.
Restaurant order systems: Imagine a restaurant menu where customers can view dishes and order directly.
Wholesale layouts: Bulk buyers can view products at a glance and make their selections efficiently.
How Does It Work?
Once you’ve installed and set up the plugin, you use the provided shortcode product_table in the place where you want the product table to appear on your website. The table will then automatically pull in your products and display them in your chosen format.
Benefits of Using Product Table Shortcodes:
Efficiency: Customers can view more products in less time.
Flexibility: You can customize what information to show in the table.
Enhanced User Experience: A well-organized table can improve site navigation and boost sales.
Product List Shortcodes
A Product List Shortcode in WooCommerce is a piece of code that you can insert into your website’s pages or posts. When used, it automatically displays a list of your products, making it easier for you to showcase what you have to offer without manually adding each item.
You can customize the default product shortcode for specific needs. This shortcode says up to four products will load in two columns, and that they must be featured.
Simplicity: Easily showcase products without the need to add each one individually.
Adaptability: Tailor how products are displayed to fit your store’s style and needs.
Uniformity: Maintain a consistent appearance across your product listings, enhancing the user experience.
Quick View Shortcodes
A Quick View Shortcode allows store owners to speed up shopping as well as create a simple user journey. When a customer hovers over or clicks on a product, instead of being taken to a new page, a small window or pop-up might appear right there, showcasing the essential details of the product. This could include the product image, price, brief description, and perhaps an ‘Add to Cart’ button.
This particular shortcode does not come with the default WooCommerce installation. You will need a plugin such as Barn2’s Quick View Pro plugin. Implemented properly, Quick View is a user-friendly feature that lets shoppers view product details without needing to open the item’s product page.
Quick View Pro helps you integrate a product quick view feature that looks great and follows all user experience (UX) best practices to ensure your shoppers get the most value. Check out the short video below from Barn2.
Potential Benefits of Using Quick View Shortcodes:
Efficiency for Shoppers: Customers can quickly glance at product details without the need to load a new page.
Increased Engagement: By reducing the steps to view a product, customers might be more inclined to continue shopping and exploring more products.
Reduced Bounce Rate: The convenience of quick views might mean fewer customers leave the site out of impatience or navigation issues.
How to Use WooCommerce Shortcodes
WooCommerce shortcodes are like the Swiss Army knives of the e-commerce world. You can include them in your WordPress content in several different ways.
The process you decide to utilize will depend on whether you use a page builder like Elementor or the Gutenberg block builder.
Inserting and Using Shortcodes in Different Editors and Widgets
Additionally, there may be customizations that can be included in the shortcodes, so be sure to check the plugin documentation.
Customizing Your WooCommerce Store with Shortcodes
Adding Quick View Buttons to Product Shortcodes
Once you activate Quick View Pro, it automatically adds quick view buttons to your main shop page and category pages.
In addition, once you have the plugin installed and setup, you can include the Quick View button on any page or blog post by following these steps:
Now, go to the page or post where you want to add a quick view button and add the shortcode [quick_view id="123"] shortcode.
Replace “123” with the ID of the product (you can get this by hovering over a product in the main Products list in the WordPress admin).
The button text will come from the Quick View plugin settings page. You can change this for each individual button by adding the text option to the WooCommerce Quick View Pro shortcode like this: [quick_view id="123" text="Buy Hoodie"]
Source: Barn2
Customizing the Layout with Parameters
WooCommerce offers a powerful yet flexible way to display products on your website using shortcodes. These shortcodes and various parameters allow for a tailored presentation. You can achieve a highly customized product display that suits your needs by combining different parameters.
Below are just a few of the many parameters available with WooCommerce shortcodes.
Basic Product Display: The basic shortcode to display products is products. By default, it will show all products in a grid format.
Limiting the Number of Products: Use the limit parameter.
Example: products limit="4" will display only the first four products.
Displaying Products by Category: Use the category parameter.
Example: products category="shoes" will show only products from the ‘shoes’ category.
Ordering Products: Use the orderby and order parameters.
Example: products orderby="date" order="DESC" will display products in descending order based on the date they were added.
Columns: Use the parameter to specify the number of columns in the grid.
Example: products columns="3" will display products in a three-column grid.
Display Specific Products: Use the ids parameter.
Example: products ids="1, 2, 3" will display only the products with the IDs 1, 2, and 3.
Exclude Specific Products: Use the exclude parameter.
Example: products exclude="4, 5" will display all products except those with the IDs 4 and 5.
Display Products on Sale: Use the on_sale parameter.
Example: products on_sale="true" will display only the products that are currently on sale.
Pagination: If you have many products and want to display them across multiple pages, use the paginate parameter.
Example: products paginate="true" will add pagination to the product display.
Visibility: To display products based on their visibility settings, use the visibility parameter.
Example: products visibility="hidden" will display products that are set to be hidden from the catalog.
Using Product Attributes in Shortcodes
Product attributes are the details that define specific products. For instance, if you’re selling t-shirts, the attributes might include sizes (Small, Medium, Large) and colors (Red, Blue, Green).
How to Use Attributes in Shortcodes:
Display Products of a Specific Attribute:
If you want to display all t-shirts that are available in the color blue, you’d use a shortcode like this: products attribute="color" terms="blue"
Display Products with Multiple Attributes:
To showcase all large, blue t-shirts, you’d combine the size and color attributes: products attribute="size|color" terms="large|blue"
Exclude Products with a Specific Attribute:
If you want to display all t-shirts except the ones in small size: products attribute="size" terms="small" operator="exclude"
Examples:
Showcasing Summer Collection: If you’ve set an attribute for the season, you can display all products from the summer collection with: products attribute="season" terms="summer"
Highlighting Organic Products: If you have an attribute indicating whether products are organic or not, you can showcase all organic products with: products attribute="type" terms="organic"
Most Powerful WooCommerce Shortcodes to Use in 2023
WooCommerce shortcodes are a powerful tool that can significantly enhance the customization and functionality of your e-commerce store. As we head into 2023, there are several key shortcodes that have been highlighted as particularly impactful:
Display by Category: products category="shoes" This will show only products from the ‘shoes’ category, helping to segment your offerings.
Limit Number of Products: products limit="4" This displays only the first four products, allowing for a more curated showcase.
Order Products: products orderby="date" order="DESC" This arranges products in descending order based on the date they were added, ensuring that the newest products are seen first.
Specific Product Display: product id="99" This displays a specific product by its ID, which is useful for highlighting a particular item.
Cart Display: woocommerce_cart This shortcode displays the shopping cart page, essential for the checkout process.
Checkout Page: woocommerce_checkout Displays the checkout page, a crucial step in the e-commerce purchase journey.
User Account Information: woocommerce_my_account This shows the user’s account page, allowing them to view order history, change passwords, and manage other account details.
Product Search Form: woocommerce_product_search This displays a search form that users can utilize to find specific products in your store.
Display Products on Sale: sale_products This showcases all products currently on sale, drawing attention to discounts and promotions.
Common Questions about WooCommerce Shortcodes
How do I find the list of available WooCommerce shortcodes?
WooCommerce provides a list of built-in shortcodes in its official documentation. You can also find them in the WooCommerce settings on your WordPress dashboard or by referring to the documentation of any WooCommerce extensions you’ve installed.
Can I use WooCommerce shortcodes in any WordPress theme?
Yes, WooCommerce shortcodes are designed to work with any WordPress theme that is WooCommerce-compatible. However, the styling and appearance might vary based on the theme’s design.
I installed a new WooCommerce extension. Will it come with additional shortcodes?
Many WooCommerce extensions and plugins do come with additional shortcodes that provide extra functionality. It’s always a good idea to check the documentation of the extension or plugin to see if any new shortcodes are available and how to use them.
I’ve seen recent_products and products shortcodes. What’s the difference?
The recent_products shortcode specifically displays the newest products added to your store. On the other hand, the products shortcode is more general and can be used to display products based on various parameters like category, tag, or specific IDs.
Conclusion: Mastering the Power of WooCommerce Shortcodes
WooCommerce shortcodes are undeniably the secret sauce that can transform an ordinary online store into a dynamic and user-friendly shopping experience. These “magic keys” simplify the process of adding and customizing features and empower store owners to design their shops precisely to their vision.
From showcasing specific products to creating entire pages, these shortcodes offer a range of functionalities that cater to both beginners and seasoned e-commerce enthusiasts.
Embracing WooCommerce plugins and tools can undoubtedly make your online store stand out and provide an unparalleled shopping experience for your customers. Dive in, experiment, and unlock the full potential of your WooCommerce store with these powerful shortcodes!
How to Find and Fix Broken Links in WordPress (Step by Step)
Everyone agrees that broken links are bad for user experience. But did you know that broken links can significantly hurt your WordPress SEO rankings?
Yes, it’s proven that having broken internal links on your website negatively impacts SEO.
In this article, we will show you how to easily find and fix broken links in WordPress so that you can improve your user experience and SEO rankings.
What Is a Broken Link?
A broken link, also known as a dead link, is a link that no longer works.
Broken links can happen for many reasons, but the most common reason is when a page is either deleted or moved to a different location, which causes the server to show a ‘404 not found’ error message.
On WordPress sites, broken links typically occur when moving a site to a new domain name or when deleting a post or page without proper redirection.
Sometimes, broken links can also happen due to a typo, and they can go unnoticed for months, if not years.
This is why it’s extremely important to regularly monitor broken links on your WordPress website and fix them so you can keep them from hurting your SEO rankings.
In this guide, we will share the top 5 methods to find broken links in WordPress. After that, we will show you an easy way to fix those broken links.
Here’s a table of contents for easy navigation:
Ready? Let’s get started.
Method 1: Finding Broken Links in WordPress Using Broken Link Checker (Quick & Easy)
The Broken Link Checker plugin by AIOSEO is an essential tool for making sure all of the links on your WordPress site are functioning correctly.
It regularly scans for broken links on your website, including internal and external links that result in a 404 error.
Unlike some other broken link checker plugins, it’s built as a SaaS service, so it won’t slow your website down. It also won’t be blocked by managed WordPress hosting companies like WP Engine because it uses an external private server to ping for broken links.
Note: The free version of Broken Link Checker allows you to scan up to 200 internal links. You can upgrade to the Pro version to scan more internal and external links.
Upon activation, the Broken Link Checker Setup Wizard will start automatically to help you set up your account.
On the next page, you can choose to create a free account or connect to a plan that you already purchased.
To create a new free account, simply click the ‘Create a Free Account’ button. You will need to fill in your name, email address, and phone number. You will also need to enter your credit card details so you can be upgraded when you go over the free 200 link limit.
If you already purchased the Pro version, then you can click on the ‘Connect to an Existing Account’ button. You will be asked to sign in to your account, and then you can click the ‘Connect’ link next to your plan.
The plugin will now start working in the background to find links in your posts, pages, and custom post types.
You can go to the ‘Broken’ tab to view the full report. The links are categorized into broken, redirects, and dismissed.
If you have been running your WordPress blog for a long time, then this report will include broken links to third-party websites as well.
You can quickly fix any broken links right inside of the plugin by clicking the ‘Edit URL’ link. Or, you can remove the link by clicking ‘Unlink.’ Once you are finished, don’t forget to click the ‘Update’ button.
Broken Link Checker will also give you ‘Status Details’ about each link when you click the Information ⓘ icon.
The information displayed includes how long the link has been broken, its HTTP status code, response headers, and more.
The plugin’s Settings tab lets you control which post types (posts, pages, custom post types) and statuses (published, draft) you want to monitor or exclude.
Broken Link Checker by AIOSEO will automatically scan your site every 3 days, so you won’t have to worry about broken links in the future.
Method 2: Finding Broken Links Using Semrush (Full Site Audit)
Semrush is one of the best SEO tools on the market. It allows you to easily monitor your website’s SEO rankings and overall health.
It also includes a powerful site audit tool that crawls your website to find common errors and prepare a detailed report for you.
It is a paid service, but they offer a limited free account that allows you to crawl up to 100 pages on one domain name. Paid plan limits start from 100,000 pages a month.
Once you are logged in, you need to click on the ‘Site Audit’ link from the left menu.
This will bring you to the Site Audit page. From here, click on the ‘Create project’ button at the top to add your website.
You will be asked to enter the domain name you want to audit, and then you need to click the ‘Create project’ button.
After that, you will be asked to configure the site audit settings.
Semrush will now begin crawling your website for the site audit. This may take a few minutes, depending on how many pages you selected for the crawl.
Once finished, you can click on your domain under the ‘Site Audit’ section to view your report.
Notice that the number of broken links is written in blue. That’s because it’s a link you can click to see more information.
You will see a list of broken links found on the crawled pages of your domain.
You can now click on the ‘Export’ button at the top right corner of the screen to download your crawl report. You will need it when fixing broken links on your website.
Method 3: Finding Broken Links Using Ahrefs (Complete Backlink Profile)
Ahrefs is an excellent all-in-one SEO tool for marketers, businesses, and SEO professionals. It offers detailed SEO insights into your own website or any of your competitors.
You can use it for keyword research, competition analysis, organic and paid keyword ideas, and site health monitoring, including broken links. With the Site Explorer tool, you will get a complete backlink profile of your website.
First, you will need to sign up for an Ahrefs account. Note that it is a paid service.
Once you are logged into your Ahref’s dashboard, you need to enter your domain name into the ‘Site Explorer’ tool.
The Site Explorer tool will now crawl your website to prepare reports. This may take some time, depending on how much content you have on your website.
Once it is finished, you will see an overview of your Site Explorer results. From here, you need to click on the Pages » Best by links menu and then sort your report by 404 status.
You can now export your report in CSV format to find and fix the broken links on your WordPress website.
Method 4: Finding Broken Links Using MonsterInsights (Advanced Tracking)
Using the plugin, you can set up Google Analytics without editing code. It also lets you set up link and button click tracking, eCommerce tracking, author tracking, and more.
To start, you will need to sign up for a Google Analytics account and connect it with your WordPress website using MonsterInsights. For more details, you can follow our detailed guide on how to install Google Analytics in WordPress.
Note: MonsterInsights is a premium WordPress plugin, but we will be using the free version for this tutorial. However, you can upgrade to its Pro version for advanced tracking features, dashboard reports, popular posts features, and more.
Once MonsterInsights is active on your website, the plugin will start to track broken links and show you a report in Google Analytics. However, it might take up to 24 hours before you see any data.
To find broken links, you need to create an Exploration report in Google Analytics. This will take information about your broken links from MonsterInsights and display them in a list.
Once you log in to Google Analytics, you will need to navigate to the ‘Explore’ tab and choose a Blank report.
Now, under Exploration Name, you can type a name for the report, such as ‘Broken Links’.
Next, you need to click the ‘+’ button next to Dimensions.
You will see a full list of the available dimensions for your report.
You need to search for the ‘Page title’ dimension and check its box. After that, you should do the same thing for the ‘Page path + query string’ dimension.
Once you’ve done that, just click the ‘Import’ button at the top right of the screen.
Next, you need to import a metric. This time, you should click on the ‘+’ button next to Metrics and import the Sessions metric.
Now, you can add the items you imported to your report.
First, you need to drag both Dimensions to the Rows box in the second column. After that, drag the Sessions metric to the Values box.
Next, scroll the second column down to the Filters section.
You need to click the box that says ‘Drop or select dimension or metric’. After that, click on ‘Page title’ from the menu.
Now, under Conditions, you need to select ‘contains’ from the dropdown menu and then type the page title for your website’s 404 page, such as ‘Page not found’.
Tip: If you are not sure of the title of your website’s 404 page, then type a random URL after your domain name, such as https://example.com/xyz and then check your browser’s tab for the title.
Once you’ve done that, you can click the ‘Apply’ link.
On the right of the page, you will now see a report of all of the 404 errors that occurred during the report’s time frame. However, in most cases, the ‘Page page + query string’ column will be cut off so that you can’t see the full URL.
To see the URLs, you will need to download the data. Simply click the ‘Download’ icon at the top right of the page.
When you view the downloaded data, you will see that most of the URLs look like this:
The part of the URL that shows your broken links comes after ?page=. In the example above, this is https://example.com/error-page-url.
The part of the URL that shows the page containing the broken link comes after &from=. In the example, this is http://example.com/page/.
You can use this information to fix the broken links. We show you how to do that in the last section of this article.
To see this report in the future, simply visit the ‘Explore’ tab in Google Analytics.
Method 5: Finding Broken Links in WordPress Using Google Search Console (Free)
Google Search Console is a free tool offered by Google to help webmasters manage their sites’ visibility in search results. It also notifies you about errors, including 404 errors that are caused by a broken link.
First, you will need to set up Google Search Console for your website. For step-by-step setup instructions, see our ultimate Google Search Console guide.
After you have logged in to your Google Search Console account, just click on the ‘Pages’ link from the left menu.
Next, make sure the box next to ‘Not indexed’ is checked.
This will make sure that you will see any 404 errors that were encountered by users when visiting your website.
When you scroll down to the section titled ‘Why pages aren’t indexed’, you will see one reason listed as ‘Not found (404)’.
When you click on this item, you will see a list of all broken links that caused a 404 error.
How to Properly Fix Broken Links in WordPress
We have shown you 5 different methods to find broken links in WordPress. Now, let’s talk about how to easily fix broken links in WordPress.
The best way to fix a broken link is to redirect it to another page.
For example, if you moved the contents of an article to a different address, then you will need to redirect it to the newer article.
Similarly, if an article does not exist anymore, then you will want to point users to a similar page that is closely related to the contents of the old article.
You can do this by setting up 301 redirects.
The easiest way to fix broken links and set up redirection is by using the All in One SEO (AIOSEO) plugin for WordPress. It offers a powerful redirection manager that helps you track 404 error pages and create 301 redirects.
Note: We will be using the AIOSEO Pro version because it includes the redirection manager addon and offers multiple types of redirections.
First, you will need to install and activate the AIOSEO Pro plugin. For more details, see our step-by-step guide on how to install a WordPress plugin.
Upon activation, you need to visit the All in One SEO » Redirects page and then click the ‘Activate Redirects’ button.
Next, you will need to go to the ‘Settings’ tab under Redirects and enable 404 logs. You can find the option in the ‘Logs’ section.
AIOSEO will also let you set the time period to record your 404 logs using the dropdown menu. We suggest that you select no longer than one month for smooth and optimal performance.
After that, go ahead and click the ‘Save Changes’ button.
You will now see a ‘404 Logs’ tab appear in the Redirects section in AIOSEO. Go ahead and click on the tab.
When you first enable the 404 logs option, there will be no data on this page. The plugin will only start to monitor and record 404 pages after enabling the settings.
However, once it’s active, AIOSEO will show a list of broken links on your website under the ‘URL’ column. It will also show you how many people visited the link under the ‘Hits’ column and the last accessed date.
You can now click the ‘Add Redirect’ button for any broken link you want to fix. When you click the button, you’ll see redirection options for your 404 error URL.
Simply enter the Target URL where you’d like to redirect your visitors and select ‘301 Moved Permanently’ as the redirection type from the dropdown menu. Once you’ve done that, you should click the ‘Add Redirect’ button.
You can now test this by visiting the old broken link, and you will be redirected to the new page.
Just repeat the process for all broken links on your website.
Now that you have found and fixed the broken links on your WordPress site, you may be wondering about other ways to use internal links to improve your site’s SEO. Here are our best guides on internal links:
Build Your WaaS Empire with Dollie: A Comprehensive Guide
Websites as a Service (WaaS) bundles web design, maintenance, and development for a fixed monthly fee, and you can find lots of WaaS solutions on the market.
Dollie could be ideal, as it uses the power of the number one Content Management System (CMS), WordPress, to help you grow your business using dependable, open-source technology. The revolutionary “Dollie Hub Builder” enables you to build your entire WaaS using WordPress without any scalability and security issues that Multisite or building your own infrastructure presents.
This post will highlight one specific option among a wealth of WaaS solutions – Dollie. Throughout this guide, we’ll look at the services’ key features and what you could do with them. Let’s begin!
Much like SaaS, WaaS is a distribution model that provides cloud services and websites to customers as a turnkey product. Dollie is a market leader in the field:
Dollie offers a suite of tools that provide you with the unparalleled ability to sell white-label websites, existing WordPress products, or even a Minimum Viable Product (MVP) from your WordPress website, making it a standout player in the WaaS market.
Overview of Dollie’s Features
We’ll look at Dollie’s functionality and feature set in detail later on, but for now, here’s a quick overview of what it provides:
The core service is a set of three tools to help you sell recurring cloud services to your customers (Hub Builder), manage sites (Control HQ), and offer cloud hosting (Private Cloud).
Each site gets an individual custom dashboard that gives you analytics, performance metrics, and handy site management tools.
The Done For You service lets you delegate your cloud services’ development, customization, and scaling to Dollie’s team of experts. They’ll create your professional, white-label platform based on your specific requirements. This includes consultation, full setup, design, and even performance reviews on a regular basis.
As such, Dollie offers a lot inside the box. It means the solution can adapt to the needs of many different types of businesses. We’ll look at this in more detail next.
Who Can Benefit from Dollie?
In a nutshell, anyone who wants to deliver professional and exemplary cloud services to customers will benefit from Dollie. However, there are specific niches the service caters to that other WaaS solutions can’t provide. We’ll talk about this in detail later.
However, if your budget is tight, Dollie will definitely appeal. It uses a hybrid approach of an annual fee ($50–200) coupled with billing based on use. This means you can scale when you’re ready, without fear.
Exploring Dollie’s Key Features
In this next section, we’ll look at what Dollie offers. There are three parts: The Hub Builder, Control HQ, and Private Cloud. Let’s begin by discussing what the Dollie Hub Builder provides.
Dollie Hub Builder
If you want to sell WordPress products from your site, what better way to do it than with the number one e-commerce plugin for the platform, WooCommerce?
This is what the Hub Builder lets you do. It is the heart and soul of Dollie’s offering for WaaS builders.
You connect your WordPress site to Dollie using the Hub Builder plugin. The Hub Builder plugin allows you to create a WordPress site, turn it into a Blueprint, and then sell sites under your brand from your domain. There are myriad options here to help you tailor the sales process to your needs.
There are also comprehensive options to customize user roles and permissions, client dashboard settings, and plenty more:
From here, you can use WordPress’s functionality and plugins to build your sales hub. Whether you are building a support site, a membership site, or an affiliate e-commerce site, Dollie allows you to install all the plugins you need to create your vision.
Integrations with your favorite plugins such as MemberPress, Easy Digital Downloads, ACF, Elementor, Gravit Forms, and more are not limited or restricted when building with Dollie.
In addition to unparalleled freedom to install the plugins you need, you also maintain full control over design, branding, pricing, and ownership of customer data.
On Dollie’s dashboard, you can get an overview of your customer numbers, sites, and total monetary sales.
This is in addition to all of the tools you get within Control HQ to manage sites. There’s so much in the box that we can’t cover it all in one article. However, you get a complete solution in Dollie to help with site management. We will be expanding on this in our next article.
Dollie Private Cloud
In our opinion, one of the key selling points of Dollie is how fast it takes to launch a site. This is thanks to the Private Cloud tool. It obfuscates almost all of the technical considerations in three clicks. This is where your customer websites are hosted. Your WaaS is fully white-labeled. Here are the top features:
Seamless Scalability: Whether you’re managing 10 sites or 10,000, Dollie’s Private Cloud adjusts effortlessly, ensuring your WaaS platform can grow without limitations.
Peak Performance & Security: Harnessing next-gen container technology, every site enjoys its own dedicated environment, guaranteeing swift load times and robust security against threats.
Smart Caching for Dynamic Sites: With features like Redis Object Caching at your disposal, Dollie ensures both static and dynamic sites (like eCommerce platforms) are served with unrivaled speed.
Unyielding Resource Allocation: Every site benefits from dedicated PHP workers, RAM, CPU, and an isolated MySQL container, ensuring consistent high performance and responsiveness.5. Proactive Security Protocols: With a built-in web firewall, daily backups, and vigilant security monitoring, Dollie offers a fortified haven for every site in your Private Cloud.
How to Get Started Building Your WaaS
You first click the Add Site button on the main dashboard page, then choose how you’d like to launch or connect a site:
From there, add a name for your site, and click to choose either a clean install or a ‘Blueprint’ for a specific type of site:
From here, click the Create button, and Dollie will create your site and launch it:
It’s important to note that Dollie gives you enterprise-grade performance for each and every site you launch. You also get a Web Application Firewall (WAF) as a first, rock-solid layer of protection against malicious attacks on your server.
While Dollie does hide away lots of the technical underbelly when creating a site, you can still customize the setup to your liking.
The Developer Tools include all of the goodies you need here, such as PHP choices, tools for file permissions, log viewers, WP-CLI integration, and more.
Combine this with object and smart caching and a whole host of impressive technical ‘specs’, and you have one impressive platform to build from.
Dollie Control HQ
In a nutshell, Control HQ is your command center where you can see all your customer sites in one place. Its key features are:
Bulk Update Manager: Update the plugins and themes of WordPress itself across your entire WaaS in seconds.
Support Tools: Uptime monitor, backup manager, page speed insights, and an overview dashboard for each site.
Bring Your Team. Your entire team can use control to run your day-to-day operations. Build new WaaS templates, provide support, and use powerful add-ons like Atarim.
This provides a gorgeous third-party dashboard to help you manage all of your WordPress sites from one place and simplify your daily workflow.
You can import sites from many other site management or WaaS solutions, such as WPMUDev, ManageWP, WP Umbrella, and more. Even better, managing as many sites as needed is free.
When it comes to managing your site, you have a plethora of options. You can access practically every metric you need from Control HQ, such as uptime monitoring, Google Lighthouse reports, activity reporting, and more.
However, you can also look to manage the themes and plugins of each install from Control HQ:
If you need to add new plugins or themes, there’s integration with the WordPress Plugin Directory, and an uploader to help you install premium plugins:
It could be that you never need to log directly into a WordPress site to make necessary changes. This is excellent news for you, your clients, and your overall security.
The Power of WaaS with Dollie
In our opinion, Dollie is number one among WaaS solutions for a few reasons. Not only does it use WordPress, but it’s super flexible too. Next, we’ll look at a few ways businesses leverage Dollie, starting with arguably a primary use case.
Benefits for WordPress Agencies
An agency will have a lot of moving parts, and you’ll often work on multiple projects at once. Dollie can be perfect here. For example, you can offer clients site care plans or enterprise-grade hosting under your own brand and domain.
Using the Hub Builder, you could even create your client portal on your WordPress website:
Existing WordPress product creators can also use Dollie’s Hub Builder to turn-key products into hosted solutions. This is where the companion Hub Builder plugin shines. For example, you can customize the dashboard for your customers and set default user roles.
Blueprints will help you create a starting point for client sites, and you can also customize this experience too:
Of course, you also get to manage sites from ‘afar’ using Control HQ. The combination of Dollie’s tools gives you full control over your service.
Advantages for WaaS Builders
Dollie gives SaaS and WaaS builders flexibility, dependability, and performance to launch a platform that can prosper and scale using WordPress.
If you already have a WaaS setup using a solution such as ManageWP or WP Umbrella, you can migrate those customers over using Control HQ and the Migrate Guru plugin. What’s more, there are full instructions to do this on the dashboard.
When it comes to setting up products, you’ll do this within WordPress using WooCommerce:
This gives you a familiar and fast way to set up your product lines. Once you connect a product to a Blueprint, customers will be able to use your product hub as your main storefront.
Potential for Startups & Entrepreneurs
Dollie will also be ideal for startups that want to create an MVP fast. You achieve this without code and with help, thanks to the Done For You service. This provides a turnkey service that includes the following:
Consultation, including growth strategies, pricing, and more.
Design and setup encompassing domain setup, full hub design based on your branding, testing, and other business-critical tasks.
Regular code performance reviews to make sure your products are optimal, performant, and fast to launch.
With Done For You, you also have priority support – valuable if you want to ask questions and get help in a flash.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
If you need a quick summary of what Dollie is and its offerings, look no further. Here are some quickfire questions and answers to help you understand the leader among WordPress WaaS solutions.
What sets Dollie apart from other WaaS solutions?
Dollie offers a unique blend of power and flexibility by harnessing the capabilities of WordPress. With tools like the Private Cloud, Control HQ, and Hub Builder, Dollie provides a comprehensive suite for businesses to white-label, sell, and manage their cloud services. The platform’s adaptability caters to a wide range of business needs, making it a standout choice in the WaaS realm.
How does Dollie enhance the WordPress experience for WaaS businesses?
Dollie elevates the WordPress experience by offering a seamless way to sell cloud services directly from a WordPress website. Users can maintain full control over design, branding, pricing, and customer data. With Dollie’s Hub Builder, the familiar WordPress environment becomes a powerful sales hub.
Can Dollie handle the scalability needs of growing WaaS businesses?
Absolutely. One of Dollie’s standout features is its scalability. Whether you’re starting out or managing thousands of sites, Dollie’s infrastructure ensures optimal performance. The platform’s “pay as you grow” billing model ensures that businesses can scale without financial strain.
How does Dollie ensure the security and performance of sites under its WaaS umbrella?
Dollie places a high emphasis on-site security and performance. Every site launched benefits from enterprise-grade performance and a dedicated Web Application Firewall (WAF) for protection. The platform’s Private Cloud tool ensures that each site gets dedicated resources, isolating it from potential threats and ensuring peak performance.
What kind of support and resources can WaaS businesses expect from Dollie?
Dollie’s “Done For You” service is a testament to its commitment to users. This service allows businesses to delegate their cloud services’ development, customization, and scaling to Dollie’s expert team. From consultation to regular performance reviews, Dollie ensures that businesses have all the support they need to thrive.
Conclusion: Why Pick Dollie Over Other WaaS Solutions?
In short, Dollie is a leader among WaaS solutions because it not only offers the best in functionality, features, and support, it also runs on WordPress.
No matter what cloud services you’d like to sell – custom hosting, maintenance, and more – Dollie’s turnkey solution provides scalability and can integrate with WordPress while also helping you control your income and scalability.
Do you agree that Dollie is a leader among WaaS solutions? Share your thoughts with us in the comments section below!
7 Best Google Reviews Plugins for WordPress (Expert Pick)
Are you looking to display Google reviews on your WordPress website or online store?
Adding reviews from genuine users to your website can help win the trust of your potential customers. Google reviews are a great source of customer feedback, and you can automatically display them on your website using a plugin.
In this article, we will share some of the best Google reviews WordPress plugins.
Why Display Google Reviews on Your Website or Online Store?
Google reviews are feedback about businesses, services, or places that are found on Google. They are left by genuine customers and may include comments and star ratings.
Potential customers may see Google reviews of your business or products on Google search results pages. Positive reviews and ratings can give them the confidence they need to click the link and visit your website, increasing your traffic and sales.
But did you know you can also display Google reviews on your WordPress website?
For example, you could show positive reviews on your landing pages, WooCommerce product pages, checkout page, and About page.
These reviews will be automatically pulled from Google, saving you the work of manually adding them to your site.
But first, you will need to choose a Google reviews plugin and create a Google API key. You can learn more in our guide on how to show Google reviews in WordPress.
Once your customers see Google reviews on your site, they may go on to leave their own positive feedback. This can improve your Google rankings, especially in local search, and the overall star rating for your business.
Now, let’s take a look at some of the best Google reviews plugins for WordPress.
It allows you to easily display Google reviews on your website, as well as reviews from Yelp, Facebook, WordPress.org, Trustpilot, and TripAdvisor. This can save you from having to install multiple plugins.
The reviews will be displayed in a design and format that matches your WordPress theme. This will make sure that the testimonials look like a natural part of your website.
Smash Balloon’s easy-to-use editor allows you to customize how the reviews are displayed. You can decide what content will be displayed with each review, change the layout of the feed, and even add a call to action button asking users to leave their own feedback.
Plus, you can use the plugin’s moderation tools to automatically filter out content you don’t want to display, such as the names of your competitors or offensive words.
You can then add the feed to any post, page, or widget using a block or shortcode. New reviews will be pulled in automatically so that your visitors always see the latest customer feedback.
Pros:
Easy to set up
Automatically shows the latest Google reviews
The reviews will match your WordPress theme
Also supports Yelp, Facebook, WordPress.org, Trustpilot, and TripAdvisor
Display reviews anywhere on your site using blocks or shortcodes
Moderation features allow you to filter unwanted review content
Cons:
Why we chose Smash Balloon Review Feeds Pro: This plugin does everything you need to display Google reviews anywhere on your site. It is easy to set up and use, and it updates the review feed automatically to always display the latest customer feedback.
Widgets for Google Reviews is a popular and free Google reviews WordPress plugin. It doesn’t include any additional features, so it’s fast, streamlined, and easy to use.
While the plugin is lightweight, it offers plenty of options for displaying Google reviews. The plugin has 40 widget layouts and over 25 designs, and you can display the reviews in a carousel, grid, list, and more.
You can use filters to hide the reviews you’d prefer not to see and display them anywhere on your website using shortcodes.
Pros:
Shows the latest reviews automatically
40 layouts and 25 designs
Displays Google reviews in a carousel, grid, list, and more
Filters out negative reviews
Free
Cons:
Does not support any other review platforms
Does not offer any additional features
Why we chose Widgets for Google Reviews: This is a free and user-friendly plugin, making it a great choice for beginners and small business owners. It has everything you’ll need to set up a basic Google reviews feed on your website.
WP Business Reviews lets you showcase your customer reviews from Google, Facebook, Yelp, and Zomato on your website. You can mix up the reviews from different platforms into a single feed or display them separately.
You can also manually add additional reviews that you receive. This will make sure that valuable, positive reviews are not missed.
Additionally, you are able to choose a light, dark, or transparent style to match your website’s theme. You can also display the reviews in a gallery, carousel, or list, control the length of each excerpt, and tag your best reviews to make sure they are seen.
The plugin’s advanced filters allow you to make sure that spammy reviews are not displayed and filter out negative reviews that have a low star rating.
You can also organize the reviews using the plugin’s tagging and grouping system. For example, you can tag your best reviews to make sure they are displayed at the top.
Pros:
Shows the latest reviews automatically
Also supports the Facebook, Yelp, and Zomato review platforms
Display reviews from different platforms together or separately
Tag your best reviews to make sure they are displayed
Multiple formats, including gallery, carousel, and list
Filter out negative reviews
Cons:
TripAdvisor and Trustpilot are not supported
The light, dark, and transparent styles may not look good with every theme
No free version
Why we chose WP Business Reviews: This plugin can combine reviews from multiple platforms in a single feed. And the inclusion of Zomato reviews makes this plugin perfect if you run a restaurant, cafe, pub, or bakery.
WP Review Slider Pro is a WordPress plugin that focuses on showing off your social media reviews on your website. It supports the most popular review platforms, including Google, Facebook, Yelp, TripAdvisor, Amazon, and 90+ others.
The reviews can be displayed in a grid or slider. You can choose from 12 different templates, which can be customized to match your WordPress theme.
You can choose which reviews are displayed using filters based on length, rating, source page, and more. This will make sure that your most positive reviews will be seen on your website.
You can place the reviews anywhere on your site using a shortcode. The plugin will then automatically keep your reviews up to date using the WordPress Cron system.
Pros:
Over 90 review platforms supported
Shows the latest reviews automatically
12 customizable templates are available
Display reviews anywhere on your site using shortcode
The included templates may not match every WordPress theme
Why we chose WP Review Slider Pro: This plugin supports more review platforms than most other plugins. That means that besides Google reviews, you can include testimonials from other platforms that are popular in your niche.
Google My Business is a tool that lets you add your local business information to Google and display it in search results. You can combine this with the Local SEO features from AIOSEO to further enhance your local business listings in Google.
This plugin will collect your location’s data using your Google’s Place ID and transform it into a block of reviews that you can display on your website.
You can show these reviews in a list, carousel, column, or tiles, selecting from a range of templates to match your website design. Then, you are able to customize your reviews using 150 variations that include dark and light versions and 14 color schemes.
You can easily sort and filter reviews to display just the content you want. For example, star rating filtering lets you show only the most positive reviews, and you can include or exclude reviews by their word content.
When you are ready, you can display the reviews anywhere on your website using a shortcode or widgets.
Pros:
Displays Google reviews and ratings from your Google My Business account
Shows the latest reviews automatically
250 designs and themes
Display reviews anywhere on your site using shortcodes or widgets
Control the content displayed using filters
Free
Cons:
Does not support any extra review platforms
Why we chose Reviews and Ratings – Google My Business: If you simply want to display reviews and ratings from your Google My Business account, then this plugin will do it without any extra complexity.
Business Reviews Bundle is a highly-rated plugin that allows you to display reviews from Google, Facebook, and Yelp on your website. You are able to combine reviews from different platforms in a single feed and even merge the ratings from each platform into a single score.
You can select from 5 different layouts to display the reviews as a slider, grid, trust badges, or list. Additionally, you can make sure your visitors see the most positive reviews by using exclude/include words and hiding reviews with lower ratings.
A trim feature allows you to collapse very long reviews and add a ‘read more’ link so they don’t take up too much space on your site.
You can then display the reviews on any post, page, or widget using a block or shortcode.
Pros:
Shows the latest Google reviews automatically
Also supports the Facebook and Yelp review platforms
Reviews from multiple platforms can be displayed in a single feed
5 layouts are available
You can filter reviews by rating and keywords that are included or excluded
You can use blocks or shortcodes to display reviews anywhere on your site
Free version available
Cons:
TripAdvisor and Trustpilot are not supported
The free version only allows you to display 5 Google reviews
Why we chose Business Reviews Bundle: This plugin could be a good fit if you are looking to show reviews from multiple platforms, including Google and Yelp.
WP Review Pro is one of the best product review plugins for WordPress. While it allows you to display reviews from Google, Facebook, and Yelp, it is primarily designed to let you add your own product reviews with star ratings.
So, while it has useful features such as templates, a WooCommerce integration, and shortcodes, Google Reviews support is more limited than with other plugins in our list.
In particular, the plugin will only display 5 Google reviews at a time. Besides that, you can’t control the content that is displayed, such as filtering out negative reviews.
That means that this plugin is best for users who mostly want to add their own reviews to their websites.
Pros:
Has many features for adding your own reviews to your website
WooCommerce integration
There is a free version that supports Google reviews
Cons:
No spam or moderation features
You are limited to displaying 5 Google reviews
TripAdvisor and Trustpilot are not supported
Why we chose WP Review Pro: This is the best product review plugin for online stores and integrates well with WooCommerce. It can also be used to make a niche review site in WordPress.
It also supports other popular review platforms such as Yelp, Facebook, WordPress.org, Trustpilot, and TripAdvisor, and the reviews will automatically match your WordPress theme.
On the other hand, if you need a simple free plugin that’s fast, easy to use, and doesn’t offer additional features that you don’t need, then we recommend Widgets for Google Reviews.
Or, if you need a WooCommerce integration to display reviews on the product pages of your online store, then you can use WP Review Slider Pro instead.
FAQs About Google Reviews WordPress Plugins
In this guide, we compared some popular Google review plugins for WordPress. You may still have questions about adding reviews to WordPress, so here are the answers to some of our frequently asked questions.
How do I add Google reviews to my WordPress website?
Once you choose a Google reviews plugin for your WordPress website, you will need to install, activate, and configure it.
Is it possible to filter or moderate Google reviews before displaying them?
Yes, most of the WordPress Google reviews plugins we recommend allow you to choose the types of reviews that will be displayed on your website using filters.
For example, you might like to filter out negative reviews that have a low star rating or choose not to display reviews that mention your competitors.
Are there any free plugins for displaying Google reviews?
Yes, we recommend a number of free Google reviews plugins in this article, and some of the premium plugins offer free versions.
Besides Google, what are some other popular review platforms?
Google is an excellent review platform for website owners because your reviews may appear on search engine results pages, especially when your customers are searching for local businesses.
Other popular review platforms include Yelp, Facebook, Trustpilot, G2 Crowd (technology-related), TripAdvisor (travel-related), Angie’s List (service-related), Zomato (food-related), and Glassdoor (employment-related).
Best WordPress Guides for Customer Reviews
We hope this tutorial helped you find the best Google reviews WordPress plugins. You may also want to see our guides on how to use reviews, ratings, and testimonials in WordPress.
If you liked this article, then please subscribe to our YouTube Channel for WordPress video tutorials. You can also find us on Twitter and Facebook.
Nowadays, the digital landscape of the retail market is growing more rapidly. According to the Forbes report, around 20.8% of retail product purchases are expected through online stores in 2023. Furthermore, it will increase to 24% by 2026, which suggests rapid digitalization.
Also, according to Statista, eCommerce sales exceeded 5.7 trillion USD in 2022. So, it is a golden opportunity for anyone to build their eCommerce store to take their business online.
The initial step for building the eCommerce store is choosing the right platform. Below, we will compare Shopify and WooCommerce when building an online store. We will compare the cost of creating a website, ease of use, third-party add-ons, and more. Revealing which is the best for your 2023 projects.
Overview: Shopify vs. WooCommerce
Before we move further, let’s briefly understand what Shopify and WooCommerce are.
Shopify
Shopify is a fully hosted eCommerce platform allowing people to build and manage online stores. Shopify lets you manage the inventory, payment, dropshipping, etc. Allowing you to customize an interactive e-store for your business.
Also, you don’t need any technical knowledge since the Shopify stores are very easy to manage. Shopify has a team that manages hosting, security, backend operations, etc.
WooCommerce
On the other hand,WooCommerce is an open-source WordPress plugin that allows business owners to convert their WordPress website into an eCommerce store.
WordPress is a well-known CMS (content management system) that allows users to manage websites without coding or technical knowledge. You can install the WooCommerce plugin with a single click. As WooCommerce is open-source, any technical person can customize the plugin code according to their requirements.
Factors to Consider While Choosing an eCommerce Platform
There are a few factors that you should consider before choosing an eCommerce platform for your online store. Some of the essential factors are
Business size and scale
The first thing you should consider is the scale and growth of your business. Also, you can choose the eCommerce platform based on whether your business is a small, medium, or well-developed enterprise.
Budget and long-term investment
Also, consider thecost of creating a websitewhile choosing the eCommerce platform. Other costs, like domain costs, hosting, special features, etc., add to your budget.
Specific feature requirements
Before choosing any eCommerce platform, it is necessary to shortlist the features that you want compulsorily in your platform to meet your business goals. For example, you need multiple payment options like PayPal, Stripe, etc., for your eCommerce store.
Technical expertise
Some eCommerce platforms require technical knowledge to manage the online store. So, choose the platform based on your technical expertise.
Service Cost of Shopify vs. WooCommerce
As a business owner, you should consider the cost of creating a website and its maintenance. It may vary based on your business needs. Let’s look at some cost factors of both platforms.
Service cost of Shopify
Here is the pricing structure of the Shopify eCommerce platform.
Basic Shopify: $39 per month
Advanced Shopify: $399 per month
Shopify provides web hosting services and SSL certificates in all the above plans. Furthermore, It also provides the domain of your choice with the extension of the shopify.com subdomain.
The domain cost can vary from $6 to $20 based on the plan you buy. Each subscription plan provides various functionality and scalability for your store.
If you are a small business owner, you can start with the basic Shopify plan, which can cost you around $39/month for the platform, an average of $12/year for a domain name, and 2% transcription charges for Shopify. You should also consider the third-party charges if you have any.
Service cost of WooCommerce
WooCommerce is a free, open-source WordPress plugin, so you don’t need to pay a single penny to use WooCommerce with your WordPress website.
You must have a domain and WordPress hosting to create a website. The domain may cost you around $14/year and $70/year for hosting. You should have your WordPress website set up and ready to customize WooCommerce.
Also, if you need to buy premium themes or any third-party plugin subscription, you can count it as an extra expense.
Overall, you can start the eCommerce store with WooCommerce with a limited budget.
Ease of Use: Shopify vs WooCommerce
Most business owners are not coders or technical people. So, anyone with basic knowledge should be able to start using and managing the eCommerce platform.
How is Shopify easy to use?
Shopify is a hosted eCommerce platform. So, business owners don’t need to deal with the headaches of installation, security, backup, or any other technical issues.
You need to sign up to the Shopify platform to get started, customize the dashboard according to your feature requirements, and start listing the products. Also, Shopify allows you to drag and drop custom elements like product name, color, description, price, size, etc. to build the product pages.
How is WooCommerce easy to use?
WooCommerce is different from Shopify. You need to install the WooCommerce plugin on your website. Also, you need to manage your WordPress website, provide security, and update the WooCommerce plugin. However, most hosting services provide SSL certificates with hosting and auto-updation of plugins. So, you don’t need to be concerned about website security and plugin updation.
You can also customize the theme of your WordPress website using plugins from its 60,000+ repository. If you are a technical expert, you can create your own WordPress plugin for your specific requirements and use it with your website.
It is important to look into the payment options provided by the eCommerce platform and check whether they provide particular payment methods used by your buyers. Sometimes, buyers prefer only regional payment; if your online store does not provide it, you may struggle to grow your business.
Shopify – Payment methods
Shopify provides their payment solution known as Shopify payments. However, you can integrate the popular third-party payment gateways with your online store.
The drawback of using the third-party payment gateway is that Shopify charges 2% flat on each transaction over the fees of the payment gateway. Upgrading the subscription plan may reduce the charges from 2% to 0.5%.
WooCommerce – Payment methods
WooCommerce comes with built-in PayPal and Stripe payment gateways. However, you can also integrate regional payment gateways if your buyers are from a specific region.
One of the main benefits of WooCommerce over Shopify is that you don’t incur any fees over payment gateway fees.
Integrations in Shopify vs. WooCommerce
If you want to scale your business, you may need to use third-party tools. For example, Shopify and WooCommerce may provide basic analytics reports, but if you need advanced and customized analytics reports, you can use third-party add-ons.
Third-party add-ons with Shopify
Shopify has its own Appstore that includes a variety of apps, providing various features.
You can install the application into your store and customize it according to the features you need. However, there are some paid apps also available in the store. The drawback is that it contains fewer add-ons than WordPress plugins.
Third-party add-ons with WooCommerce
WordPress offers a variety of WooCommerce plugins to customize your online store. You can find multiple plugins providing the same functionality so you can choose the most suitable ones for your distinct needs.
Also, you can develop a customized WordPress plugin if you require it or hire a WordPress plugin developer to create some.
Conclusion
We’ve outlined the key considerations business owners should bear in mind when selecting an eCommerce platform for their online shop. The primary consideration is the cost of website development. Additionally, the choice of platform can be influenced by its user-friendliness, scalability, features, and the payment options it offers.
While Shopify is user-friendly, WooCommerce offers a more cost-effective starting point. If you’re seeking greater customization for your online store, WooCommerce might be preferable due to its flexibility with custom plugins. Start your eCommerce store in 2023 by selecting the ideal platform for your eCommerce venture.
How to Appear in Google Answer Boxes with Your WordPress Site
Do you want your articles to appear in Google answer boxes?
Google uses answer boxes to answer questions directly on the search results page. Getting featured in them can help you get more organic clicks and boost website traffic.
In this article, we will explain how to make your WordPress website’s content appear in Google answer boxes.
What Is a Google Answer Box?
The Google answer box is part of Google’s knowledge graph. It is an algorithm that tries to answer user’s questions right on the search page like a featured snippet, and it appears at the top of the page.
Google uses carousels, side boxes, lists, tables, and answer boxes to display the most relevant information at the top. This information is gathered from various sources, and the algorithm decides which results should be displayed inside an answer box.
According to research done by Advanced Web Ranking, answer boxes have an average click-through rate of 32.3%. This makes them extremely important for your WordPress SEO strategy.
How Google Displays Information in the Answer Box
The purpose of answer boxes is to offer instant information to users. This works particularly well when people are looking for factual data like public figures, distances, conversion rates, scores, and similar information.
If users get the exact information they need, then they can move on and search for something else. For many queries, Google can just display a sidebox from the web’s most reliable knowledge sources, like Wikipedia.
In a way, it might sound like Google is trying to keep all the traffic for itself. However, not all users are looking for information that Google’s knowledge graph can answer with accuracy.
If a user’s keywords require an opinionated, well-thought-out, or research-based answer, then Google relies on other web sources.
If you are among the top 10 results for a keyword, then you are already closer to appearing in a Google answer box.
Google answer box results change quite often, and you can easily appear as the best answer by simply improving your WordPress website content.
Let’s explore a number of content optimization steps that you can take to appear in the answer box. You can click the links below to jump to our different tips:
1. Add Short and Helpful Answers in Your Content
The purpose of answer boxes is to provide quick answers to users.
To help grab a Google answer box, you will want to make sure that your article answers a specific question as early in the article as possible. You also need to make your answer short, concise, and easy to understand.
You can also add a frequently asked questions (FAQ) section to your blog post and pages. This will allow you to answer as many questions as possible for a particular topic and increase your chances of getting featured in an answer box.
If you are using All in One SEO for WordPress (AIOSEO), then it is super easy to add a FAQ section to your content. AIOSEO is the best SEO plugin for WordPress, and it automatically optimizes your site for featured snippets.
Another advantage of using AIOSEO is that it lets you easily add FAQ schema in WordPress. FAQ schema is a smart markup code that allows Google to identify a FAQ section in your content.
As a result, Google may reward you by listing your site in answer boxes, people also ask sections, and other rich results.
2. Include Keywords in the Form of Questions
It also helps to include your keywords in the form of a question followed by a short answer. After that, feel free to add as much detail to your answer as you want.
Adding more information will allow you to use the keyword throughout the article. You can even use the article to answer other questions your users may have about the same topic.
To find keywords that are in the form of a question, you can use any keyword research tool.
For instance, we recommend Semrush as it shows a lot of information about a search term. This includes questions about the topic, which you can include while writing the article.
Users love properly formatted content because it helps them quickly get the information they need. You can publish informative content in a viral listicle format that is easier for visitors to consume and share.
For example, here’s how Google picked numbered bullets from OptinMonster’s exit-intent popup hacks article and showed it as an answer box / featured snippet in the search results.
Google understands that list and table formatting makes content easier to read and tends to highlight the websites that use this formatting.
This does not mean that you must always use one of these formats to write your articles. However, if using formatting can help your users get to the information quickly, then it’s a good idea to use it.
In other cases, Google will use descriptions from your list post and show them in answer boxes.
For example, Google picks small details from our article about WordPress form plugins and displays them in the search results.
4. Optimize Content With Data-Driven Decisions
Data is the most important thing you need if you want to create an effective content strategy. Without knowing information about your visitors, you won’t be able to write content that they want to read.
This is where Google Analytics comes in. Its detailed data helps you understand your audience and plan accordingly.
You will need MonsterInsights to properly track user engagement in WordPress. It is the best Google Analytics plugin on the market, and it will help you learn where your users are coming from and what they do while they are on your site.
These stats provide you with a clear picture of what’s already working on your website. You can then expand on it and make informed decisions for better SEO.
5. Optimize Your Page’s Meta Description
A meta description is a brief description explaining what your page is about. It is added in the <head> section of your site’s HTML. At times, Google will use it as an answer and show it in its answer boxes.
You can easily add meta descriptions to your articles by using the All in One SEO plugin. When you are in the content editor, simply scroll down to the AIOSEO Settings meta box and enter a meta description.
Make sure that your meta description includes your target keyword. It also needs to explain what questions or topics this particular page or post will be answering.
6. Follow SEO Best Practices
Apart from answering user questions, you also need to make sure that Google can find your content and understand it easily.
This means you still need to optimize your posts for SEO just like you would normally do:
Include your keywords in the SEO title, description, and keywords.
Add your focus keyword in the content and sub-headings in your article.
Yes, absolutely. As we mentioned earlier, the click-through rate for results in the answer box is way higher than other content. Depending on the topic and your content, it could go as high as 51.2%.
However, we do not recommend you overthink it. The purpose of answer boxes is to help users find information quickly. If you focus on answering questions through helpful and informative content, then search results will start picking up your content.
Google’s search features are always changing. There are no shortcuts that will help you win forever. But building your website as an authority/reliable source of useful information will help you win in the long run.
Multichannel customer support is arguably essential for modern businesses. If you engage with your customer base across social media sites, you must be ready to act. If you can meet your users where they like to ‘hang out’ online, you will be more effective and able to resolve their issues. Implementing Crisp on your site is one of the best ways you can offer multichannel support to your users.
In this post, we’ll look at implementing Crisp into your business through WordPress. We’ll cover e-commerce integration, customizing the chat window, and more.
A Quick Overview of Crisp
We don’t have to spend too long talking about what Crisp is – we give it a full review elsewhere on the blog. However, in a nutshell, the app lets you deliver multichannel support using a centralized inbox. This lets you collate all of your conversations in one place.
You have much more on offer, though:
One of the core features of Crisp is its chatbox, which is quick and painless to integrate into your site.
You can connect Crisp to WooCommerce, along with many other third-party apps and services.
We encourage you to read the full Crisp review, as it will give you insight into its possibilities, pricing, and much more. However, none of these aspects are the focus of this article. Instead, we’ll show you how straightforward implementing Crisp is and look at what’s possible with the app.
Implementing Crisp: A Setup Guide for WordPress Websites
For WordPress, Crisp is as painless an installation as you’d expect, even for other platforms. The process is the same as almost every other WordPress plugin available. While the plugin itself is free, you’ll need a suitable Crisp plan to complete the integration.
To start, head to the Plugins > Add New page in WordPress, and search for Crisp:
Next, locate the card for the Crisp plugin and click the blue Install Now button. After a few seconds, you’ll see a white Activate button. If you click this, WordPress will complete the installation on your site. This should show a screen to help you connect WordPress to Crisp:
Once you click the blue link here, Crisp will install the live chat box on your site. Later on, we’ll show you how to customize this to your liking. In fact, we’re going to show you a lot of different aspects of Crisp over the next few sections.
Implementing Crisp: How to Integrate It Into Your Business in 3 Steps
Across the rest of this article, we’ll show you how to achieve a few key tasks with Crisp. While we present them in a logical order, you can jump around if there’s a specific feature you’d like to implement on your own site.
However, one of the crucial implementations is the centralized inbox – we’ll look at this first.
1. Set Up the Centralized Inbox
The centralized inbox is where you’ll spend the majority of your time. As such, you make this area of Crisp feel like home. One of your first tasks is to add team members. You can find these settings on the Settings > Website Settings screen, then click through to your website.
Here, scroll down to the Operators in your team section and expand the box:
The Add Operator button lets you select a user role and enter your colleague’s email address to invite them. From here, your team can interact with customers. However, you can also receive email notifications within the inbox on the Crisp Pro plan using typical forwarding.
The Crisp Unlimited plan also lets you route conversations to the right team members. This is essential functionality, as you can assign or unassign conversations to your team. You’re able to assign an ‘operator’ from the right-hand sidebar for a conversation:
However, you can set up specific rules in order to auto-assign conversations. This is something we won’t cover here, but it’s a straightforward way to make your support process more efficient.
Finally, you can also access your social media engagements within Crisp’s shared inbox. There are plenty of integrations for all of the major social channels:
Each social media site will have its own method to integrate with Crisp, although the process will be similar. We (of course) can’t cover them all here, but the Crisp documentation covers the steps for each and every channel.
2. Customize the Chat Widget and Developing a Chat Scenario
It’s fair to say that the shared inbox and chat widget are the two ‘marquee’ features of Crisp. As such, you’ll want to turn to customizing the chat window once you finish with the inbox. There are some straightforward options available on the Settings > Website Settings > Chatbox and Email Settings screen:
Here, you can tweak color settings, the default language the chatbot operates in, and much more. There are lots of options here, but the Chatbox Behavior and Chatbox Restrictions sections offer you myriad ways to tailor the chat widget even further:
At some point, you should also set up your ‘scenarios’. These are ultimately the processes a chatbot should follow once it engages with a user. The Chatbot Builder is a drag-and-drop editor that helps you create your scenario without code.
However, it’s likely that you’ll spend a lot of time creating your scenarios – this is necessary for the User Experience (UX). Our advice is to take your time and consider how you’ll engage with the customer, understand their needs, and convert them.
The Bot plugin is available on the Unlimited plan and includes a number of templates for all sorts of use cases. There are also example chatbot scenarios on the Crisp blog, which will be essential reading.
Once you finish your customization, you’ll want to explore concepts such as creating and managing a helpdesk, or triggers. The latter gives you a way to automate certain events within the chat window. For example, you can send an automated message referencing the current page the user is on.
This is a big topic, and if you’d like to see a full tutorial on using triggers in Crisp, let us know in the comments section at the end of the article!
3. Integrate Crisp with WooCommerce
WordPress and WooCommerce users will also want to make the most of what Crisp has to offer. The official WooCommerce extension lets you integrate live chat with your website but also access customer data within Crisp.
This is a big deal, as Crisp will sync customer order histories, order updates, and more – all of the information will be visible in the Crisp CRM and shared inbox. However, you’ll need to install this within WordPress to utilize it.
Once you make the connection though, you can access your customer’s WooCommerce data within Crisp. This includes order data, order histories, and almost anything else relevant within WooCommerce:
For WooCommerce stores, the extension is a vital cog in the wheel when it comes to offering stellar support. Coupled with Crisp’s live chat and engagement functionality, you’ll have all the power at your fingertips.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
It’s time for some quick questions and answers about aspects of implementing Crisp on your website. Remember, if you have any further questions that we don’t cover here, ask us within the comments section at the end of the post!
Is the Crisp WordPress Integration Available on Every Premium Plan?
Every Crisp premium plan includes the ability to connect to WordPress using the plugin. This includes the free tier too, which means you can install the chat widget without fuss for your site.
What If I Don’t Want to Set Up a Scenario From Scratch?
The Bot plugin includes a number of chatbot templates that you can import into Crisp. Moreover, the Crisp blog includes plenty of examples you can copy, tweak, and use for your needs.
Can I Add Crisp to Multiple Facebook Pages at Once?
Linking Crisp to Facebook Messenger is only possible for one page at a time as part of your plan. However, if you’d like to utilize Crisp on another Facebook page, it costs $20 in addition to your subscription.
What Is a Good Setup for a Typical WooCommerce Store?
While there are a lot of potential paths you can follow with Crisp for WooCommerce. We recommend that you install the chat widget as a matter of course. The WooCommerce extension is perfect for WordPress e-commerce. This gives you all of the functionality of Crisp, and lets you integrate your WooCommerce data too – this includes order histories within the centralized inbox.
Wrapping Up
There’s a good reason why we love Crisp at WP Mayor. It lets you easily set up multichannel support and collates all of the activity inside a centralized inbox. You can set up triggers to assign conversations to the right team members from there. What’s more, you have the tools for implementing Crisp with your WordPress website, e-commerce platform, social media channels, and more.
Is there any aspect of implementing Crisp you still need help with? Ask us in the comments section below!
Introducing Reseller – Automate Your Digital Agency
Today we are officially releasing our new Reseller platform, the end-to-end way to sell hosting, domains, templates, support and services through your own white-label portal, on your own domain.
Exclusively available for WPMU DEV Agency members, we’ve built this platform from the ground up to make selling-sites-while-you-sleep a reality.
Read on to see how you can use Reseller to create your own Squarespace, GoDaddy, or to just automate your web development business.
Manual no more
Our members have always resold WPMU DEV plugins, hosting and services and we’ve always done whatever we can to make that happen by making it easy to white-label everything we do.
But that’s always been a manual process, your customers have had to contact you, you’ve set stuff up and emailed them back, and so on.
Well, that ends today, because with Reseller you can offer your site visitors a hosting plan, a choice of templates and any services you care to add on, and they can purchase it and create a subscription, without you having to lift a finger.
They’ll be able to manage their site and their subscription using your professional custom portal, get support, and purchase other services as you define them.
And shortly, you’ll be able to package domains with that too.
Reseller tools
To get started, just visit the new Reseller icon in The Hub and follow the instructions, as part of this you’ll set up:
White-label billing, powered by Stripe
Easily manage your clients, invoices, and recurring revenue from one place.
Our client billing platform has already processed over $5 million in subscriptions and invoices for our members, and it powers Reseller, allowing you to easily let your customers set up subscription packages and make one-off payments.
Even better, we charge 0% commission, so you get to keep the entire fee.
White-label client portal, at your own domain
Create a branded portal where clients can check out, log in, and manage their sites.
The Hub Client is already used by thousands of WPMU DEV members to provide a professional portal for their clients, and now you can also use it to create elegant product and pricing tables that allow your users to check out directly to their new site.
And you can control exactly what they see there.
FREE EBOOK
Your step-by-step roadmap to a profitable web dev business. From landing more clients to scaling like crazy.
FREE EBOOK
Plan, build, and launch your next WP site without a hitch. Our checklist makes the process easy and repeatable.
Hosting and template packages
Add your products, create bundled plans, and set your pricing/subscription terms.
It’s easy with Reseller to create as many packages as you like, combining templates (use ours or create your own) and whatever hosting packages you choose. Then, simply add prices and advertise them on your site.
We’ll only ever charge you, at our normal rates, for the hosting your customers buy.
Coming soon…
Reseller is ready to go now. In fact, it’s already being used successfully by a number of members, but there are some core integrations coming soon that we think you’ll enjoy.
Domain automation
Full domain reseller automation is on the way next!
Allow your customers to search for and purchase a domain with their package, this will automatically map the domain to their site and set up a subscription for them too. Domain transfers will also work just fine.
In the interim, you can encourage customers to bring their own domains or let them know you’ll arrange that shortly (and you can use the billing platform for that).
White-label support
Brand our highly-rated 24/7 expert support as your own!
Are you concerned about not being able to support your clients 24/7? We know exactly how you feel and that’s why we’re going to offer white-label support to help you run your round-the-clock business, with a platform that integrates your support with ours.
Of course, you can already provide your own integrated support right now as part of The Hub Client.
Let us know how you go
We’re really looking forward to seeing how you use Reseller and developing the platform to help you succeed, so please let us know through the feedback tab how you go, and what we can do to help you succeed.
And, of course, we’re interested in your impressions here too 🙂 So feel free to leave a comment below!
The ABC Classification Method for Inventory Management
Inventory control: That is, knowing exactly what products you have on the sales floor and in your stockroom (and how many you have) is the foundation of operating a retail store.
Knowing how much inventory on hand you have is critical for every aspect of inventory management: meeting customer demand, reordering and replenishment, inventory counting and ultimately, your net profits.
When inventory is disorganized, the risk of discrepancies between stock levels in your POS system and what you can actually account for in-store or in your stockroom increases.
Although it’s easy to overlook, systematic inventory classification is vital to retail operations.
Today, we’re going to look at how you can develop and implement a system for organizing inventory on your sales floor and storing inventory in your stockroom. With it, you’ll have move accurate and efficient stock counts, fewer preventable discrepancies and more accurate stock replenishment.
In this post, you’ll learn:
Let’s get started!
Get your free inventory management spreadsheet
Our experts have put together a template spreadsheet with built-in formulas. Just enter your data and watch it calculate everything for you.
What is ABC inventory classification?
Many retailers categorize their inventory using the ABC classification method, which is based on the Pareto principle, which states that 80% of your results come from 20% of actions. When applied to the context of inventory, it means that 80% of revenues are generated by 20% of your products.
With ABC classification, inventory is classified according to the value of the product unit. For most retailers, the classification structure looks like this:
Group A inventory: The 20% of SKUs that contribute to 80% of revenue.
Group B inventory: The 30% of SKUs that contribute to 15% of revenue.
Group C inventory: The 50% of SKUs that contribute to 5% of revenue.
How to calculate the ABC inventory classification
To implement the ABC inventory classification method, you need to calculate each SKU’s contribution percentage to your total revenue. The formula for this is:
Contribution Percentage (%) = (Revenue from SKU / Total Revenue) * 100
Here’s a step-by-step guide on how to use this formula so you can classify your inventory correctly.
Determine your total revenue: Calculate the total revenue generated by each SKU (Stock Keeping Unit) over a specific period, typically a year. If you’re using a modern POS system or accounting solution, you should be able to find your total revenue easily.
Calculate the Contribution Percentage: Use the formula above to calculate how much revenue each SKU contributes.
Categorize your SKUs based on the ABC method: Assign each SKU to one of the following three categories:
Group A (top 20% of SKUs that contribute to approximately 80% of your total revenue)
Group B (the next 30% of SKUs that contribute to about 15% of your total revenue)
Group C (remaining 50% of SKUs that contribute to approximately 5% of your total revenue)
The advantages of ABC inventory classification
Using the ABC inventory classification can give your business a number of advantages. Consider the following.
More efficient inventory counts and stock ordering
The main benefit of classifying your inventory using the ABC method is that it leads to more efficient inventory counts and assures that inventory levels of your highest value items are consistently maintained.
Closely monitor the inventory levels of products that belong to group A with routine cycle counts. If you use Lightspeed, setreorder points and desired inventory levels for products belonging to group A. When a particular SKU falls below your set threshold, you know it’s time to submit a purchase order (PO) to your supplier, and you know what quantity you need to order to maintain your desired amount of inventory on hand.
You can apply the same procedure to inventory belonging to group B and C, but with less frequent cycle counts. When combined, both groups account for 80% of your inventory on hand. For most retailers, cycle counting that much inventory on a weekly basis simply isn’t feasible. Just be sure to periodically review inventory levels periodically to maintain as close to 100% inventory accuracy as possible.
You’re able to make smarter inventory decisions
The ABC inventory classification method paves the way for more informed (and accurate) stock control decisions. as you’re able to implement different inventory control strategies for each group. For example, Group A items may require tighter control, frequent monitoring, and smaller safety stock levels, while Group C items can have more relaxed controls and larger safety stock levels.
What’s more, the ABC method helps you better understand the demand patterns of different categories so you can forecast accordingly.
Better time and resource management
The ABC classification shows you which products to prioritize, so you can then allocate time and staffing resources more effectively. Your team can concentrate their efforts on managing Group A items, while ensuring they’re spending just enough time on Groups B and C.
The disadvantages of ABC inventory classification
While ABC inventory classification certainly has a lot of things going for it, there are some drawbacks to be mindful of.
It’s not perfectly accurate
The disadvantages to the ABC method of inventory classification are that, while it does give visibility on the total sales value of an item, it doesn’t indicate how many times you turn a particular SKU.
It’s entirely possible that some low-revenue items turn quickly and require more frequent reorders. The revenue they bring your business doesn’t necessarily reflect how popular that item is.
As such, you should complement the ABC inventory classification with additional inventory management techniques to account for the turnover rate and demand patterns of individual SKUs.
Doesn’t consider seasonality
This inventory classification method primarily focuses on item value or importance but may not take into account seasonal variations in demand. Relying solely on the ABC classification method could result in overstocking or understocking certain items during specific periods.
You can overcome this challenge by being mindful of seasonal stock fluctuations. For example, you can adjust the ABC classification periodically based on seasonal variations. Items that are typically Class C during non-peak times may become Class A or B during peak seasons due to their increased importance. The key here is to be flexible with the classification to reflect changing demand patterns.
Over-reliance on the ABC inventory classification might curb innovation
The ABC classification method encourages you to focus on existing stock—which is generally a good thing. Just be careful not to be too hyper focused on your current inventory that you neglect exploring new product categories or innovations.
Inventory classification best practices
Along with classifying your inventory using the ABC method, it’s important to have an organizational methodology for inventory both on your sales floor and in your stockroom.
When everyone knows where certain products are located, it makes replenishing shelves, counting and selling inventory much easier.
There are two tried-and-true methods for organizing a store’s inventory:
Map out your store and stockroom
Clearly label stockroom shelves
Categorize your store and stockroom’s layout
The first step to an organized sales floor and stockroom is to create dedicated sections for different product categories.
Create a labeled floor plan for both your sales floor and stockroom that clearly identifies sections by product type. Place a copy in your break room, back office, stockroom and anywhere else where employees congregate. It will be a useful navigational tool for the whole team.
A classic example of a categorized store layout is footwear stores, where there are clearly labeled sections for men’s, women’s and children’s footwear. In each section, the footwear is further categorized by function (lifestyle, running, training, and so on).
The same goes for the stockroom. Dedicate certain areas to specific product types to make it easier for your staff to find additional sizes, replenish shelves and count inventory when the time comes.
Clearly label stockroom shelves
It’s also a retail best-practice to clearly identify which products are stored on stockroom shelves and to adhere to an organizational methodology.
Let’s go back to our footwear store example. In their backstores, men’s, women’s and children’s footwear each have a dedicated section (Tier 1). Within each of those sections, shoes are organized by type (Tier 2). In that section, shoes are classified by the SKU (Tier 3).
Clearly categorize and label your backstore’s sections in the map of your store to assure that each employee adheres to it. If you lay out the plan and everyone follows it, you lower the risk of stock discrepancies due to lost or misplaced products.
Store your products in defined areas and assure that your staff places products in the appropriate section, never placing an item where it shouldn’t be.
How to measure inventory accuracy
The end goal of inventory classification is to have 100% inventory accuracy, meaning that you find no discrepancies to reconcile when you perform inventory counts. But how do you measure what your inventory accuracy is? For starters, you need to count 100% of the inventory you have on hand in a physical inventory count.
Use the floor-to-sheet method during your stock take: First, count the amount of inventory you have on hand per SKU on your sales floor and in your stockroom. Make sure you’ve counted accurately and register your results using a pen and paper or with an Excel spreadsheet (download this free inventory counting spreadsheet if you need a starting point). Next, compare the results of your inventory count to what your POS system thinks you have.
If your count and your POS system’s inventory record don’t match, you have a discrepancy and your inventory isn’t 100% accurate. If your count has fewer counted items than your POS, you’ve lost items to shrinkage. If your count has more items than your POS, its possible that a sales associate accidentally scanned an item twice while processing a payment.
In any case, you’ll need to balance your inventory on hand and the inventory levels registered in your point of sale system. Once you complete a full physical inventory count, you now have a 100% accurate starting point.
Cycle count your Group A inventory regularly to assure you stay as close to 100% accuracy as possible. Remember, that’s the inventory that accounts for 80% of your total revenue.
You should still cycle count group B and C inventory but, since both groups account for a combined 80% of your total SKUs, it’s likely to be a more time-consuming process. With that in mind, cycle count them less frequently than you do group A inventory.
Cycle counting will increase the likelihood of attaining 100% inventory accuracy (that is, no discrepancies) during your next full inventory count. To make full inventory counts less time-intensive, many retailers like to schedule physical inventory counts for the last weekend of January (during the post-holiday lul) or at the end of July because that’s typically when SKU levels are at their lowest.
Classify your inventory to prevent discrepancies
There’s no one way to classify and organize inventory on your sales floor or in your stockroom. Some merchants may prefer to organize SKUs by season, brand, product type, or a number of other characteristics.
What’s important is the underlying problem that inventory classification solves: Having a logical and systematic method for categorizing different SKUs and product types helps retailers:
Routinely track inventory levels of their most profitable SKUs
Have accurate physical inventory counts
Maintain ideal inventory levels across all SKUs
Minimize discrepancies resulting from lost or misplaced items
Increase employee efficiency
Maintain an organized sales floor
Consider trying some of the methods we’re outlined here and see which method of inventory classification works best for your retail store.
How to Integrate Zoom Meetings & Webinars in WordPress
Are you looking for a way to integrate Zoom meetings and webinars in WordPress?
Integrating WordPress with Zoom allows you to automatically enroll customers, visitors, and new members into Zoom video calls and webinars. This can improve user engagement and help build a community around your brand.
In this article, we will show you how to easily integrate Zoom meetings and webinars in WordPress, step by step.
Why Integrate Zoom Meetings and Webinars With WordPress?
Integrating Zoom with WordPress lets you easily automate your meeting and webinar registration process. This can save you a lot of time that you can spend on other business tasks.
Zoom is one of the most popular meeting, webinar, and video conference call software in the world, used by over 300 million people every day.
It’s a must-have tool for businesses with remote teams or WordPress website owners who need to get in touch with customers and clients virtually.
For instance, if you have an online store, then you can use Zoom for live product demos, customer support, online training, and even host webinars with your customers to promote upcoming products on your site.
That being said, let’s take a look at how you can easily integrate Zoom meetings and webinars in WordPress. Here’s a quick overview of the topics we will cover in this guide:
Install and Activate the Uncanny Automator Plugin for WordPress
The easiest way to connect Zoom with WordPress is by using Uncanny Automator.
It’s the best WordPress automation plugin that helps you create automated workflows in WordPress without writing any code. The tool lets you easily connect your WordPress site with external apps like Zoom, Slack, and Asana.
It’s like Zapier for WordPress websites but without the high costs.
To connect Zoom with WordPress, you will first have to visit the Uncanny Automator website.
From here, click the ‘Get Uncanny Automator Now’ button to continue.
This will take you to the ‘Pricing’ page, where you can select a plan of your choice.
Keep in mind that Uncanny Automator also has a free version, but it has limited features. That is why we are using the premium plan for this tutorial.
Upon purchase, you must install and activate the Uncanny Automator plugin on your WordPress website. For detailed instructions, you may want to see our beginner’s guide on how to install a WordPress plugin.
Once you have done that, visit the Automator » Settings page from the WordPress admin sidebar to enter the license key for your pro plan. You will find this information in your account on the Uncanny Automator website.
After that, don’t forget to click the ‘Activate license’ button.
Now that Uncanny Automator is installed and activated, let’s set up your Zoom account.
There is a free version of Zoom, but you will need a paid account to set up the integration. First, head to the Zoom website and sign up for the plan that best suits your needs.
If you want to integrate webinars on your website, then you will also have to buy the Zoom Webinars addon.
Once you have a premium account, you need to go to the Zoom App Marketplace and sign in to your account. Here, you will create an app that sends data between Zoom and WordPress.
To do this, click the ‘Develop’ menu item and select the ‘Build App’ option from the dropdown menu in the top right corner of the screen.
This will bring you to the ‘Choose your app type’ page, where you must select the type of app you want to build.
From here, you have to find the ‘Server-to-Server OAuth’ app type and click the ‘Create’ button under it.
Next, you can name your app in the popup. The name is to help you remember the purpose of the app and won’t be visible to your visitors.
Simply enter your app name and click the ‘Create’ button to start the process.
This will take you to the ‘Connect Zoom with WordPress’ screen, where you will see the app credentials listed.
From here, you must copy the ‘Account ID’, ‘Client ID’, and the ‘Client Secret’ credentials and paste them into a text editor for now.
These credentials will be used to connect Zoom with your WordPress website. Next, click the ‘Continue’ button.
You’ll now be taken to the next step, where you have to provide basic information for your app, including the app name, company name, short description, developer name, and email address.
Once you are done, just click the ‘Continue’ button to move to the next step.
After that, you’ll be taken to the ‘Feature’ screen, where you don’t have to configure any settings, so you can click ‘Continue’ on this screen too.
This will direct you to the ‘Scopes’ screen, where you have to select at least one scope for your app to be able to activate it.
These scopes provide a way to limit the amount of access granted to an app. To set a scope, click the ‘+ Add Scopes’ button.
This will open a prompt on the screen where you can select scopes for Zoom meetings and webinars that will be hosted on your website using this app.
For example, if you want the app to be able to view live streaming token information or all user meetings information, then simply check the boxes next to these options.
You can also configure the scopes for Zoom webinars here by simply switching to the ‘Webinar’ option from the left column. After that, click the ‘Done’ button to move forward.
Next, click the ‘Continue’ button to move to the next step.
On the ‘Activation’ page, you will now see a message informing you that your app is ready.
From here, simply click the ‘Activate your app’ button.
Create a New Zoom Meeting
Now, you can create a new Zoom meeting that you will connect to your WordPress site.
To do this, visit your Zoom account to click the ‘Schedule’ link, and then fill in your meeting details.
You can even set a recurring Zoom meeting for your users by checking the ‘Recurring meeting’ box in the ‘Timezone’ section.
Once you are done, don’t forget to click the ‘Save’ button to store your settings.
Create a New Zoom Webinar
To create a new Zoom webinar, click the ‘Webinars’ menu option in the ‘Personal’ tab inside your Zoom account.
After that, just click the ‘Schedule a Webinar’ button.
On the next page, you can enter all of your webinar information.
After that, you need to make sure the ‘Required’ box is checked in the Registration section.
After that, simply click the ‘Save’ button at the bottom of the page.
Connect Zoom Meetings and Webinars With WordPress
Once Uncanny Automator is activated and Zoom is set up, you need to connect both of these apps to each other.
For this, head over to the Automator » App Integrations page from the WordPress dashboard.
Next, click the ‘Zoom Meetings’ tab in the left column and then add the ‘Account ID’, ‘Client ID’, and the ‘Client Secret’ credentials that you copied earlier into the fields.
Finally, click the ‘Connect Zoom Meetings Account’ button.
If you want to integrate Zoom Webinars, too, then just click the ‘Zoom Webinars’ menu option.
Then, paste the same ‘Account ID’, ‘Client ID’, and ‘Client Secret’ credentials that you used above.
Once you are done, go ahead and click the ‘Connect Zoom Webinars Account’ button.
Now that we have set up Zoom and integrated it with WordPress, let’s look at some of the cool things that you can do with this Uncanny Automator integration.
Register Users for a Zoom Meeting After Form Completion in WordPress
This integration will automatically register users for a Zoom meeting when they fill out a form on your website. This can be used to onboard new clients, schedule coaching calls, and more.
If you don’t have an active WordPress form on your website, then you need to create one now.
Uncanny Automator works with all major forms solutions, including WPForms, Formidable Forms, and more.
For this tutorial, we will be using WPForms because it’s the best contact form plugin for WordPress, used by over 6 million websites. There’s also a webinar form template in the form templates pack addon that makes form creation easy.
Now, you are ready to connect your WordPress form with Zoom.
To do this, you will be creating what’s called a ‘recipe’. In Uncanny Automator, recipes are the automations that link different plugins and apps together.
To get started, navigate to the Automator » Add new page from the WordPress admin sidebar and click the ‘Everyone’ option as the recipe type.
The Everyone recipes can be triggered by any user, while logged-in recipes can only be activated by users logged in to your website.
After that, click the ‘Confirm’ button.
Next, you have to provide a name for your recipe. This will help you remember the recipes you create without the name being visible to your users.
Keep in mind that each recipe has two different parts: the trigger and the action. The trigger is the event that will start the recipe, and the action is the task that runs after the trigger takes place.
For your first trigger, you need to select ‘WPForms’ in the ‘Trigger’ meta box.
After that, you have to choose a specific trigger related to WPForms.
For example, if you want your users to be added to a Zoom meeting once they submit a contact form, then you can select the ‘A form is submitted’ option.
If you have multiple forms on your WordPress blog, then you will also have to select the form where the submission will trigger the action.
To do this, simply select a form of your choice from the ‘Form’ dropdown menu.
Once you are done, don’t forget to click the ‘Save’ button to store your settings.
Next, you will need to add an action for your automation.
To do that, scroll down to the ‘Actions’ sections and click the ‘Add action’ button under the meta box.
This will open a list of all the integrations available in the Uncanny Automator. From here, you need to pick the ‘Zoom Meetings’ option.
This will open the ‘Zoom Meetings’ action settings on the screen.
From here, you must choose the action that Zoom will perform upon form submission.
If you want to add a user to a Zoom meeting after they fill out a specific form on your website, then you need to select the ‘Add the user to a meeting’ option.
Then, you can choose the Zoom meeting you want users to register for in the ‘Meeting’ box.
Once you are done, don’t forget to click the ‘Save’ button to store your settings.
Now, it’s time for you to finally publish your Uncanny Automator recipe. To do this, all you need to do is toggle the switch in the ‘Recipe’ box to ‘Live’.
Now, when your users fill out the form, they will automatically be registered for your Zoom meeting.
Register Users for a Zoom Webinar After Form Completion in WordPress
Another popular integration is registering users for a webinar when they fill out a form on your website.
To do this, you will follow the same steps as above. However, you will select ‘Zoom Webinars’ instead of ‘Zoom Meetings’ in the actions section.
First, follow the same initial ‘Triggers’ section as above. This means that you will have to choose WPForms as the integration for the trigger.
After that, you can select the ‘A form is submitted’ option as the trigger.
Next, scroll down to the ‘Actions’ section and click the ‘Add action’ button to expand the menu.
Then, simply select the ‘Zoom Webinars’ option as the integration.
This will open up the actions settings for the Zoom webinar.
From here, you can select the ‘Add the user to a webinar’ option from the dropdown menu. This will automatically add a user to your Zoom webinar after they fill out a specific form on your website.
Next, you will also have to choose a Zoom webinar from the dropdown list.
Once you are done, don’t forget to click the ‘Save’ button to store your settings.
After that, you must make your recipe live so that new users will automatically be enrolled in your webinar.
To do this, simply click the toggle in the ‘Recipe’ box so it says ‘Live’.
Register Customers for a Zoom Webinar After They Make a Purchase in WordPress
Another way to connect WordPress with Zoom is to enroll new customers in a product webinar after they make a purchase in your WooCommerce store.
Keep in mind that the WooCommerce plugin and store must be set up before you start creating a recipe with Uncanny Automator.
First, you need to visit the Automator » Add new screen from the WordPress dashboard and click the ‘Everyone’ option.
After that, click the ‘Confirm’ button to move forward.
Next, you have to provide a name for your recipe. This name won’t be displayed to your customers on the front and is only for your identification.
Once you have done that, choose WooCommerce as the integration in the ‘Trigger’ meta box.
This will open the list of WooCommerce triggers in the dropdown menu. From here, you can select any trigger that suits your needs.
For example, if you want customers to be added to your webinar after they buy a product, then you can select the first option.
After that, select the ‘completes’ option in the ‘Trigger condition’ box to start the automation when a customer completes a purchase.
Then, just click the ‘Save’ button to store your settings.
Now, you can choose a specific product in your store or have the automation run when a customer purchases any product.
Simply select the ‘Any product’ option if you want all of your products to be included in the automation, and then click the ‘Save’ button.
Next, scroll down to the ‘Actions’ section and click the ‘Add action’ button to expand the menu.
Then, choose the ‘Zoom Webinars’ integration from the list.
This will open the Zoom webinar action settings on the screen, where you can select the ‘Add the user to a webinar’ option.
This will automatically register new customers for your webinar once they make a purchase.
After that, select the webinar of your choice from the dropdown list in the ‘Webinar’ box.
If you have multiple webinars running, then make sure to choose the webinar that’s associated with your WooCommerce products.
The last thing you need to do is make your recipe live.
To do this, simply click the toggle in the ‘Recipe’ box so it says ‘Live’.
Now, when your customers purchase a product, they will automatically be registered for your product webinar.
Register Members for a Zoom Meeting After Sign Up in WordPress
When running a membership site, registering new members for a Zoom call can be a great way to welcome them into your community.
QR Code Ordering: How to Run your Restaurant with Limited Staff
Running a restaurant looks a little different now. While restaurants around the world have quickly jumped back into the culinary hustle, many have also realized it’s not as simple as picking back up where they left off. Diners have been aching to return to dining rooms, with many restaurants functioning at full capacity, but staffing is an entirely different story. An industry once filled with eager applicants is now plastered with job ads, as restaurateurs try to keep their businesses running at full speed. It’s safe to say that the age of staffing abundance is currently on pause.
While it’s too early to tell if and when the industry will get back to its usual rhythm, restaurants are now settling into new challenges and scrambling to figure out solutions. For many, the solution is clear: automation. Using technology like online and QR code ordering is proving to be a lifesaver for restaurants trying to keep serving amidst a labor shortage. So much so that 87% of respondents from our Hospitality State of the Industry Report agree that new technology adoption over the last two years has been critical for their business’ survival.
Finding new ways to automate certain tasks is proving essential for restaurants working with limited staff. In this article we’ll cover the benefits of automating the ordering process and how to use QR and online ordering to keep serving with limited staff.
2021 Global State of the Hospitality Industry Report
We surveyed over 2,000 restaurantt opereators and guests to find out how this year has changed operations and consumer preferences. Find out more about the hospitality industry today.
What is QR code ordering?
QR code ordering is a method of digitizing your menu and ordering process. Restaurants use QR codes by placing them on tables or counters, allowing customers to access the menu with their smartphones. While QR codes in restaurants originally took off in 2020 as a way to reduce customer touchpoints, they have now become key ordering tools for restaurants with limited staff. Restaurants usually place QR code images on tables, doors, cards or in strategic areas around the dining room.
How does online ordering work for restaurants?
Online ordering allows customers to place orders for pickup, tableside and even delivery on their phones, computers or any device with an online connection. When integrated with a point of sale, online ordering lets restaurants see their orders in one place and manage them as part of their regular operations.
How to use online and QR code ordering to manage the labor shortage
Cut out third party fees
Let customers order from their phones
Serve more customers with limited staff
Focus on customer service
Offer contactless payments
Cut out third-party fees
Third-party service providers can have steep fees when it comes to delivery and pickup. Opting for an online ordering system that’s integrated with your restaurant platform cuts out the middleman and reduces your costs substantially, letting you make more money on your added revenue streams. With staffing competition at an all-time high, reducing costs in other areas of your business will help you offer more interesting wages to attract talent.
Having your own online ordering system also gives you more control on the look and feel of your ordering platform. The right online ordering system allows you to create your own branded ordering system, so your brand stays consistent across all platforms.
Let customers order from their phones with QR code ordering
For dine-in customers, QR code ordering lets customers place orders directly from their phones. With a QR code menu, tableside ordering is easy, letting you serve customers in your dining room with limited staff. This gives customers the flexibility to order what they want, when they want, without having to wait for a server. Customers will also be able to place their orders faster since they won’t have to wait for staff to check in on them.
Serve more customers with limited staff
Offering online and QR code ordering lets you handle more orders, even if you’re low on staff. With online ordering, customers can place orders wherever they are. If you have too many delivery or pickup orders coming in and not enough staff, you can even manage when you can receive orders. An online ordering system lets you adjust prep and pick-up times during peak hours and busy shifts. As customers handle the actual ordering themselves, you’ll need less staff on the floor.
Focus on customer service
Now that your staff doesn’t need to worry about taking orders or payments, they can focus on stepping up customer service, and improving the overall experience for your customers. Since orders come in directly from customers, there is also less room for human error that might take place during a busy shift. QR code ordering makes sure that the orders that get to the kitchen are exactly what your customer ordered. This means less back and forth for your limited staff. Available staff will have more time to check in on customers, make sure orders are coming out in a timely manner, or lend a hand wherever needed.
Offer contactless payments
With QR code and online ordering, customers can also pay directly from their phones. Staff will no longer need to bring in a payment terminal as customers can complete the ordering process themselves. Offering contactless payments from their phone means less staff running around, or customers waiting for bills. Contactless payments also add a layer of safety between your customer and employees, as it removes surface touchpoints and limits interaction between staff and customers.
Beef up your staffing with Lightspeed Order Ahead
While nothing beats having a fully staffed front and back of house, having an integrated restaurant platform and online ordering system helps you better manage your operations no matter what the future brings. With Lightspeed Order Ahead, customers can take control over their ordering experience and order online for delivery, takeout and tableside. Whether you’re fully staffed or short-handed, Order Ahead lets you automate your ordering process, freeing up staff to perform key functions that focus on the customer experience, rather than order taking.
Are you trying to choose between WP Engine and GoDaddy to host your WordPress website?
When it comes to WordPress hosting, there are a lot of different factors that matter. But the most important thing is, is it the right host for your website?
Your WordPress site has unique needs, and you’ll want to find the host that caters to these the best. In your search, you’ve come across WP Engine and GoDaddy. Two of the most well-known hosts across the internet.
Both of these hosts are well-suited to help your WordPress grow and thrive. But, after all the marketing fades to the background, what are the tangible features that these hosts bring to the table?
That’s what we’re here to guide you through. In this WP Engine vs. GoDaddy review, we’ll compare the core features, the pros and cons, and show you real-time speed data, plus a look at each hosting dashboard.
Ready? Let’s dive in!
Introducing WP Engine and GoDaddy Managed WordPress Hosting
WP Engine is one of the longest-running WordPress hosting companies in the game. They power over 1.5 million WordPress sites around the world. They only offer WordPress-managed hosting, so you know they’re experts on the platform.
Because of this, the servers and platform are custom-tailored to WordPress websites and their unique needs. Right out of the gate, this means a solution that’s engineered to help you get the most out of your WordPress site.
GoDaddy is one of the most well-known web hosting companies in the world. It’s often one of the first hosting providers people come across when they’re getting started online. This wide reach can be attributed to their prevalence as a domain name registrar and Super Bowl commercials.
GoDaddy offers nearly every kind of hosting, including shared hosting, VPS, dedicated, and of course, WordPress hosting. Over time, GoDaddy has improved its WordPress hosting offerings, including acquiring Pagely (the first host to offer WordPress-managed hosting). Today, the feature set is pretty close to other managed WordPress hosts on the market.
Now, let’s take a look at the core features of these two managed WordPress hosts.
Key Features Comparison: WP Engine vs GoDaddy
Here’s a quick breakdown of the top features these hosts offer, so you can quickly see how they stack up.
For the sake of this review, we focused on GoDaddy’s managed WordPress hosting plans, not their shared hosting plans. Although you can easily install WordPress on shared hosts, it’s not as direct a comparison to WP Engine’s managed WordPress hosting.
Now, let’s get into the comparison and see how these WordPress hosts stack up when it comes to the most important aspects of hosting: performance, security, support, ease of use, and cost.
Pros and Cons of WP Engine
Pros
Delivers incredibly fast page speeds
Incredibly helpful customer support team and additional resources
Free bundled premium WordPress themes
Cons
Hosting plans are expensive
Add-ons make hosting prices even higher
Pros and Cons of GoDaddy
Pros
Fair pricing for managed WordPress hosting
Solid performance for the price you pay
Continually adding new features to improve their hosting
Cons
Customer support chat could be improved
Performance isn’t the best
User Experience and Interface Comparison
With the WP Engine dashboard, you’ll see a quick overview of all the sites you manage, along with information like the number of visits, resources consumed, and the WordPress and PHP versions you’re running.
You’ll also be able to see if your themes, plugins, and WordPress core are up to date, at a glance.
There are many different settings and tabs within the dashboard to navigate, we won’t cover all of them here. But there’s a lot you can do, like:
Add and manage domain names
View website error logs
Manage your website backups
Clear your website cache
Enable WordPress multisite
Create new site staging and development environments
For even more details about the ins and outs of WP Engine and what you can do on the platform, check out our in-depth WP Engine managed hosting review.
GoDaddy
Now, let’s see how GoDaddy stacks up. With GoDaddy managed WordPress hosting the dashboard is quite beginner friendly and pretty intuitive.
Launching a WordPress site is simple and you’ll find a helpful setup wizard that walks you through the steps. All you need to do is answer a few questions and the tool will get to work. There’s even an AI generator that’ll create your website content for you.
When you log in to the dashboard, you’ll see a menu of actions you can take like launching your site, or checking for theme and plugin updates.
The main hosting dashboard focuses on site management. You can add content, photos, and see if your site needs any theme or plugin updates.
The Backups tab lets you manage your existing backups. Backups occur automatically and you can also restore a previous site backup from this screen too.
Next, you can manage your hosting settings by clicking the Settings tab.
Here, you’ll see relevant server and site information at a glance, like your WordPress and PHP versions, data center location, and enable the built-in CDN.
You can also add domains, upgrade your plan, and flush your server cache. If your plan allows it, you can create and manage staging sites too.
That’s really about it. It’s not the most advanced hosting dashboard out there. But it’s beginner-friendly and lets you do just enough to launch a site.
Speed and Performance Test Results
Now, let’s take a look at how these two WordPress hosts perform in real-time.
I used the Astra theme with the same image-heavy imported demo content to compare these two hosts.
I used GTMetrix, with the server location in Vancouver, CA, to test. Then, I ran five separate speed tests spread across a few hours and averaged the results.
WP Engine
Based on the average, the WP Engine test site had a Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) time of 364 ms, which is very fast.
GoDaddy
For GoDaddy, the average Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) time was 562 ms, which comes in second to WP Engine.
Security and Reliability Breakdown
With the number of online threats only growing by the day, you want to not only make sure your site is secure but your server too. Let’s see how these two hosts handle WordPress security.
WP Engine
No matter which WP Engine plan you choose, you’re going to get a robust set of security features. You get things like threat detection and site monitoring, along with automated WordPress core and theme updates.
Every plan includes a free SSL certificate along with the WP Engine custom firewall that automatically directs bad traffic away from the server.
You also have the option to upgrade your security even further with the Global Edge Security add-on. This takes security to the next level and includes a WordPress-specific WAF, advanced Cloudflare protection, and smart routing features.
You don’t need the upgrade for rock-solid WordPress security, but if you have the budget it’ll make your site basically impenetrable while giving you a speed boost.
GoDaddy
GoDaddy doesn’t have as robust security features as WP Engine, but there are regular malware scans and removal, a Web Application Firewall (WAF), and automated website backups. Plus, they disallow certain WordPress plugins that open your site to security risks. Every plan also includes a free SSL certificate.
Since GoDaddy acquired Sucuri, you get free access to this plugin. It gives you more control over your website and can be managed within your WordPress dashboard. Although you’ll have to do more on your own to harden your security, it’s a nice add-on feature.
Customer Support Experience
No matter your level of tech skills, there will probably come a time when you need to rely on customer support. You want to be sure they’re both knowledgeable and responsive so you can lean on them when it matters most.
Here’s how both of these host’s customer support stacks up:
WP Engine
First, with WP Engine the support channels you get will depend on your tier of hosting. The lowest tier of hosting only offers live chat support, while in all other tiers, you get phone and live chat.
There’s also an in-depth knowledge base you can search through that’ll walk you through solving most of your website issues.
Overall, the support team was very fast and thorough with their responses. I pinged live chat during different times of the day and the response was the same. You can reach the live chat tool directly from your hosting dashboard.
GoDaddy
GoDaddy offers 24/7 support via phone and live chat support Monday through Friday. To get in touch with customer support you can click the Contact Us button and message their support team.
When chatting with a support agent, they were very fast with responding, but their responses were not always accurate, or they didn’t quite understand the questions I was asking. The phone support was much better, and the support team was able to answer questions quickly.
There is an option to pay for additional premium WordPress support. For a monthly fee, you’ll get a team of WordPress experts who can fix site problems, manage admin tasks, and optimize your site for performance.
Pricing Breakdown and Value for Money
Now, you’re probably wondering: Which managed WordPress hosting platform is going to be right for my budget?
Below, we take a look at their pricing options:
WP Engine
To start, WP Engine is going to be the more expensive of the two options. Especially, when you consider the add-ons that will up the monthly (or yearly) price you pay.
WP Engine has five different pricing tiers. Every plan includes 24/7 support, an SSL certificate, backups, a CDN, and caching. You also get access to 10 premium WordPress themes.
The big differences between each plan are the number of sites and visitors, and the total amount of storage and bandwidth you get.
Here’s what the full pricing breakdown looks like:
For this WP Engine vs GoDaddy comparison, we used the Startup plan, which starts at $20 per month when paid yearly.
The Professional plan will probably be the best for most users since it supports higher levels of traffic, sites, bandwidth, and storage. This gives you more flexibility when growing your site.
Finally, there are a variety of add-ons you can purchase to improve your WordPress hosting experience. You can add high-level site monitoring and alerts, automated plugin updates, advanced security, and even more premium WordPress site-building tools.
These range from $50 per site per year all the way up to $300 per year.
GoDaddy
The pricing for GoDaddy managed WordPress hosting is much cheaper across the board. Even the most expensive plan is still going to be cheaper than the Startup plan offered by WP Engine.
However, before you scroll to the prices below, keep in mind that it’s for a single site. So, if you’re hosting multiple sites, then the price will increase.
Most of the plans offer similar features. The biggest difference is the higher plans offer more storage, plus one-click staging, and a WordPress code optimizer on the highest plan.
Here’s how it breaks down:
The only add-on during checkout is a free Microsoft Office 365 email, but this is only included if you pay on a yearly basis.
Conclusion and Final Verdict
Now comes the question of the day: Which should you choose WP Engine or GoDaddy?
Ultimately, it comes down to how big of a budget you have for hosting. Because, WP Engine simply offers higher-quality hosting, built for WordPress sites.
You have better performance, more advanced developer features, bundled caching and CDN, free SSL certificates, and free StudioPress themes.
However, you will end up paying more for all of these features. The cheapest WP Engine plan is $20 per month (with yearly plan), while the cheapest GoDaddy plan is $8.99 per month (when paid yearly). If you don’t have much to invest into hosting, you can always get started with a cheaper shared host, then upgrade to WP Engine’s managed WordPress hosting once your site gets traffic and earns money.
Keep in mind, that no matter which plan you choose, you can always take advantage of the money-back guarantee if it’s not the right fit. WP Engine gives you 60 days, while GoDaddy has a 30-day money-back guarantee (if you’ve paid for the yearly plan).
WP Engine vs GoDaddy Managed WordPress Hosting FAQ’s
What are the main differences between WP Engine and GoDaddy?
At the core, WP Engine and GoDaddy both offer WordPress hosting. The biggest differences are price, performance, security, and quality of support. GoDaddy is going to be the cheapest option, however, WP Engine has better performance, security options, and support options.
How does the performance of WP Engine compare to GoDaddy?
WP Engine and GoDaddy are both very fast hosts. However, our speed tests found that WP Engine had superior performance.
Which provider offers better security features for WordPress sites?
Both offer features that protect your WordPress site and keep you safe. However, WP Engine nudges out GoDaddy with its built-in security functionality and Global Edge Security add-on.
How does the customer support of WP Engine stack up against GoDaddy?
Overall, WP Engine’s support team was able to answer questions more effectively and was very helpful. Although, GoDaddy does offer phone support for its lowest pricing tier.
Are WP Engine’s plans more cost-effective than GoDaddy’s?
GoDaddy’s plans are cheaper than WP Engine across the board. WP Engine’s cheapest plan costs $20.00 per month, while with GoDaddy a similar plan will be $8.99. So, GoDaddy does provide a solid value for the money, but WP Engine has higher quality hosting.
Which hosting provider offers a better user experience and interface?
Overall, they’re both pretty equal in terms of user experience. Both dashboards are easy to navigate and find what you’re looking for. WP Engine offers more options and greater control, while GoDaddy lets you do less and is more oriented towards beginners.
Which hosting provider is recommended for different types of WordPress users?
In most cases, WP Engine will be the superior WordPress hosting provider. If your site gets a good volume of traffic, security and speed are a concern, or you’re hosting multiple sites, then WP Engine is a great choice. While, GoDaddy can be a solid host for those who are on a budget or just getting started growing their WordPress sites.
How to Create Linkable Content to Attract Backlinks
Nothing converts like search traffic. And the best way to get more of it is to create linkable content that attracts backlinks organically!
Backlinks have been at the core of Google’s algorithm from day 1. And they are still the most powerful ranking signal.
So no digital marketing strategy can ignore that. This webinar goes into all kinds of content creation and marketing tactics that can attract backlinks naturally without running into any risks with Google.
Join us as our guest expert Ann Smarty shares how to create linkable content to attract backlinks. Register here now!
DATE: Wednesday, Sep 20, 2023
TIME: 2 p.m. Central
Who is Ann Smarty?
Ann Smarty is the founder of SEOsmarty and Viral Content Bee. She is an author for and the former editor-in-chief of Search Engine Journal and a contributor to prominent publications, including Make Use Of and Mashable.
Her popular X / Twitter chat #VCBuzz. Started in 2012, loyal fans meet every Tuesday at 11:00 a.m. Central. Sometimes there are guest experts.
More recently, #VCBuzz has been focusing on encouraging stronger collaboration and monetization methods.
Ann is also an active member and regularly mentors other members of the BizSugar Mastermind Community. Also, she has been in the SEO industry for two decades.
The Webinars she has done with BizSugar are available online:
Ann is one of our most popular experts, so even if you can’t make the live event, register here to be notified when the video replay is available.
What Does SEO Smarty Offer?
Through her site SEOSmarty, Ann offers SEO consulting services. They include:
Infographic Link Building
Content Marketing and PR Services
Guest Blogging Consulting
Ann has contributed content on dozens of major sites as you can see in her portfolio. She’s been a major presence on social media, often from the time a new platform appears.
And she is well known as a speaker at SEO events. You can see her interviews across the internet.
Ready to Find Out How to Create Linkable Content?
This is a webinar you won’t want to miss, so why not register here now?
Why Challenges, Chats and Webinars?
Every month, the BizSugar Mastermind has a challenge which is the theme for the chats and webinars that month. For September 2023, our them is Unleashing Proven Strategies.
42 Extremely Useful Tricks for the WordPress Functions File
Are you wondering what you can do with the WordPress functions file?
All WordPress themes come with a functions.php file. This file acts as a plugin, allowing theme developers and general users to add custom code in WordPress easily.
In this article, we will show you some useful tricks for the WordPress functions file.
It acts as a plugin and allows theme developers to define theme features. Users can also use it to add their custom code snippets in WordPress.
However, keeping custom code in your theme’s functions file is not the best way to save your customizations. If you update your theme, then the functions.php file will be overwritten, and you will lose your custom code snippets.
Instead, we recommend everyone use WPCode, a free plugin that lets you insert code snippets into your WordPress website without editing any theme, plugin, or core WordPress files.
The best part is that all your custom code is saved separately, so any WordPress updates won’t remove them.
As a bonus, the WPCode plugin has an extensive library of pre-configured code snippets (including many on this list). You can deploy these code snippets with a few clicks.
Having said that, here is a list of items we will cover in this article. You can jump to one that interests you or simply follow along:
How to Add These Code Snippets to Your Website
Before we begin, let’s look at how to add the code snippets in this article to your WordPress functions file.
1. Add Custom Code to Functions File Using WPCode (Recommended)
Upon activation, go to Code Snippets » + Add Snippet page. You’ll see WPCode’s code library with many helpful custom code snippets already added.
If your code snippet does the same thing as of the snippets in the library, then you can try out the one already added there.
Alternatively, click the ‘blank snippet’ link to continue adding your custom code snippet.
On the next screen, provide a title for your custom code. This could be anything that helps you identify what this code snippet does.
Next, you need to choose the ‘Code Type’. If you are adding a code that works in the functions.php file, then you must select ‘PHP Snippet’.
Below that, you need to copy and paste your custom code into the ‘Code Preview’ box.
Finally, you need to set your snippet as ‘Active’ and click the ‘Save Snippet’ button.
Your saved snippet will now run like it would if you had added it to the functions.php file.
You can repeat the process to add more snippets when needed. You can also deactivate a snippet without deleting it.
2. Add Custom Code Directly to the Functions File
The WPCode method is always better than adding code to the theme’s functions file.
However, some users may be writing code for a client’s custom WordPress theme or simply prefer to add code to the functions.php file.
In that case, here is how you can add code to your WordPress theme’s functions.php file.
First, connect to your WordPress website using an FTP client. Once connected, navigate to the /wp-content/themes/your-wordpress-theme/ folder.
There you will find the functions.php file. Simply right-click and select to edit or download the file to your computer for editing.
You can edit it using any plain text editor like Notepad or TextEdit.
Then, scroll down to the bottom of the functions.php file and paste your code snippet there. You can save your changes and upload the updated functions.php file to your theme folder.
You can now visit your WordPress website to see your custom code in action.
Now, let’s take a look at 42 different useful tricks for the WordPress functions file.
Want to white-label your WordPress admin area? Adding a custom dashboard logo is the first step in the process.
First, you’ll need to upload your custom logo to your theme’s images folder as custom-logo.png. Your custom logo should be in a 1:1 ratio (a square image) in 16×16 pixels.
After that, you can add this code to your theme’s functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
The footer in the WordPress admin area shows the message ‘Thank you for creating with WordPress.’ You can change it to anything you want by adding this code:
function remove_footer_admin () {
echo 'Fueled by <a href="http://www.wordpress.org" target="_blank">WordPress</a> | WordPress Tutorials: <a href="https://www.wpbeginner.com" target="_blank">WPBeginner</a></p>';
}
add_filter('admin_footer_text', 'remove_footer_admin');
Feel free to change the text and links that you want to add. Here is how it looks on our test site.
4. Add Custom Dashboard Widgets in WordPress
You probably have seen the widgets that many plugins and themes add to the WordPress dashboard. You can add one yourself by pasting the following code:
add_action('wp_dashboard_setup', 'my_custom_dashboard_widgets');
function my_custom_dashboard_widgets() {
global $wp_meta_boxes;
wp_add_dashboard_widget('custom_help_widget', 'Theme Support', 'custom_dashboard_help');
}
function custom_dashboard_help() {
echo '<p>Welcome to Custom Blog Theme! Need help? Contact the developer <a href="mailto:[email protected]">here</a>. For WordPress Tutorials visit: <a href="https://www.wpbeginner.com" target="_blank">WPBeginner</a></p>';
}
You can simply add a copyright date by editing the footer template in your theme. However, it will not show when your site started, and it will not automatically change the following year.
This code can add a dynamic copyright date in the WordPress footer:
After adding this function, you’ll need to open your footer.php file and add the following code where you would like to display the dynamic copyright date:
<?php echo wpb_copyright(); ?>
This function looks for the date of your first post and the date of your last post. It then returns the years wherever you call the function.
Tip: If you are using the WPCode plugin, then you can combine the two code snippets. After that, choose the ‘Site Wide Footer’ location in the ‘Insertion’ section of the snippet settings. This will automatically display the copyright date in the footer without editing your theme’s footer.php file.
One way to do this is by using the wp-config.php file. However, if you do that, then you cannot set the correct address on the settings page. The WordPress URL and Site URL fields will be locked and uneditable.
Instead, just add this code to your functions file to fix this:
Don’t forget to replace example.com with your domain name.
Once logged in, you can go to the Settings page in the WordPress admin area and set the URLs.
After that, you should remove the code you added to the functions file or WPCode. Otherwise, it will keep updating those URLs whenever your site is accessed.
9. Add Additional Image Sizes in WordPress
WordPress automatically generates several image sizes when you upload an image. You can also create additional image sizes to use in your theme.
Simply add this code to your theme’s functions file or as a WPCode snippet:
Do you want to add extra fields to your author profiles in WordPress? You can easily do that by adding this code to your functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
12. Adding Widget-Ready Areas or Sidebars in WordPress Themes
This is one of the most used code snippets, and many developers already know about adding widget-ready areas or sidebars to WordPress themes. But it deserves to be on this list for those people who don’t know.
You can paste the following code in your functions.php file or as a new WPCode snippet:
Have you seen blogs that add their advertisements in their RSS feeds below each post? You can accomplish this easily with a simple function. Just paste the following code:
function wpbeginner_postrss($content) {
if(is_feed()){
$content="This post was written by Syed Balkhi ".$content.'Check out WPBeginner';
}
return $content;
}
add_filter('the_excerpt_rss', 'wpbeginner_postrss');
add_filter('the_content', 'wpbeginner_postrss');
The post thumbnail or featured images are usually only displayed within your site design. You can easily extend that functionality to your RSS feed with the following code:
Hackers can use login errors to guess whether they entered the wrong username or password. By hiding login errors in WordPress, you can make your login area and WordPress website more secure.
Simply add the following code to your theme’s functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
function no_wordpress_errors(){
return 'Something is wrong!';
}
add_filter( 'login_errors', 'no_wordpress_errors' );
Now, users will see a generic message when they enter an incorrect username or password.
WordPress allows users to log in with their username or email address. You can easily disable login by email in WordPress by adding this code to your functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
Pro Tip: Instead of giving up on WordPress search, we recommend trying out SearchWP. It is the best WordPress search plugin on the market that allows you to add a powerful and customizable search feature to your website.
Sometimes you may publish an article with a grammatical error or spelling mistake.
The mistake goes live and is distributed to your RSS feed subscribers. If you have email subscriptions on your WordPress blog, then those subscribers will also get a notification.
Simply add this code to your theme’s functions file or as a new WPCode snippet to delay posts in your RSS feed:
function publish_later_on_feed($where) {
global $wpdb;
if ( is_feed() ) {
// timestamp in WP-format
$now = gmdate('Y-m-d H:i:s');
// value for wait; + device
$wait="10"; // integer
// http://dev.mysql.com/doc/refman/5.0/en/date-and-time-functions.html#function_timestampdiff
$device="MINUTE"; //MINUTE, HOUR, DAY, WEEK, MONTH, YEAR
// add SQL-sytax to default $where
$where .= " AND TIMESTAMPDIFF($device, $wpdb->posts.post_date_gmt, '$now') > $wait ";
}
return $where;
}
add_filter('posts_where', 'publish_later_on_feed');
In this code, we used 10 minutes as $wait or delay time. Feel free to change this to any number of minutes you want.
19. Change Read More Text for Excerpts in WordPress
Do you want to change the text that appears after the excerpt in your posts? Simply add this code to your theme’s functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
function modify_read_more_link() {
return '<a class="more-link" href="' . get_permalink() . '">Your Read More Link Text</a>';
}
add_filter( 'the_content_more_link', 'modify_read_more_link' );
Not all websites need RSS feeds. If you want to disable RSS feeds on your WordPress site, then add this code to your theme’s functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
function new_excerpt_more($more) {
global $post;
return '<a class="moretag"
href="'. get_permalink($post->ID) . '">Your Read More Link Text</a>';
}
add_filter('excerpt_more', 'new_excerpt_more');
If you have forgotten your WordPress password and email, then you can add an admin user by adding this code to your theme’s functions file using an FTP client:
If you run a multilingual website, then WordPress displays a language selector on the login page. You can easily disable it by adding the following code to your functions.php file or as a new WPCode snippet:
24. Show the Total Number of Registered Users in WordPress
Do you want to show the total number of registered users on your WordPress site? Simply add this code to your theme’s functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
function wpb_user_count() {
$usercount = count_users();
$result = $usercount['total_users'];
return $result;
}
// Creating a shortcode to display user count
add_shortcode('user_count', 'wpb_user_count');
This code creates a shortcode that allows you to display the total number of registered users on your site.
Now you just need to add the shortcode [user_count] to your post or page where you want to show the total number of users.
Do you want to exclude specific categories from your WordPress RSS feed? You can add this code to your theme’s functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
function exclude_category($query) {
if ( $query->is_feed ) {
$query->set('cat', '-5, -2, -3');
}
return $query;
}
add_filter('pre_get_posts', 'exclude_category');
26. Disable URL Links in WordPress Comments
By default, WordPress converts a URL into a clickable link in comments.
You can stop this by adding the following code to your functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
27. Add Odd and Even CSS Classes to WordPress Posts
You may have seen WordPress themes using an odd or even class for WordPress comments. It helps users visualize where one comment ends and the next one begins.
You can use the same technique for your WordPress posts. It looks aesthetically pleasing and helps users quickly scan pages with lots of content.
Simply add this code to your theme’s functions file:
28. Add Additional File Types to Be Uploaded in WordPress
By default, WordPress allows you to upload a limited number of the most commonly used file types. However, you can extend it to allow other file types.
Just add this code to your theme’s functions file:
On the other hand, if you want to quickly change this to a real email address, then you can add the following code in your functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
// Function to change email address
function wpb_sender_email( $original_email_address ) {
return '[email protected]';
}
// Function to change sender name
function wpb_sender_name( $original_email_from ) {
return 'Tim Smith';
}
// Hooking up our functions to WordPress filters
add_filter( 'wp_mail_from', 'wpb_sender_email' );
add_filter( 'wp_mail_from_name', 'wpb_sender_name' );
Don’t forget to replace the email address and name with your own information.
The problem with this method is that WordPress is still using the mail() function to send emails, and such emails are most likely to end up in spam.
If you run a multi-author site and want to showcase author bios at the end of your posts, then you can try this method.
Start by adding this code to your functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
function wpb_author_info_box( $content ) {
global $post;
// Detect if it is a single post with a post author
if ( is_single() && isset( $post->post_author ) ) {
// Get author's display name
$display_name = get_the_author_meta( 'display_name', $post->post_author );
// If display name is not available then use nickname as display name
if ( empty( $display_name ) )
$display_name = get_the_author_meta( 'nickname', $post->post_author );
// Get author's biographical information or description
$user_description = get_the_author_meta( 'user_description', $post->post_author );
// Get author's website URL
$user_website = get_the_author_meta('url', $post->post_author);
// Get link to the author archive page
$user_posts = get_author_posts_url( get_the_author_meta( 'ID' , $post->post_author));
// Get User Gravatar
$user_gravatar = get_avatar( get_the_author_meta( 'ID' , $post->post_author) , 90 );
if ( ! empty( $display_name ) )
$author_details="<p class="author_name">About " . $display_name . '</p>';
if ( ! empty( $user_description ) )
// Author avatar and bio will be displayed if author has filled in description.
$author_details .= '<p class="author_details">' . $user_gravatar . nl2br( $user_description ). '</p>';
$author_details .= '<p class="author_links"><a href="'. $user_posts .'">View all posts by ' . $display_name . '</a>';
// Check if author has a website in their profile
if ( ! empty( $user_website ) ) {
// Display author website link
$author_details .= ' | <a href="' . $user_website .'" target="_blank" rel="nofollow noopener">Website</a></p>';
} else {
// if there is no author website then just close the paragraph
$author_details .= '</p>';
}
// Pass all this info to post content
$content = $content . '<footer class="author_bio_section" >' . $author_details . '</footer>';
}
return $content;
}
// Add our function to the post content filter
add_action( 'the_content', 'wpb_author_info_box' );
// Allow HTML in author bio section
remove_filter('pre_user_description', 'wp_filter_kses');
Next, you will need to add some custom CSS to make it look better.
XML-RPC is a method that allows third-party apps to communicate with your WordPress site remotely. This could cause security issues and can be exploited by hackers.
To turn off XML-RPC in WordPress, add the following code to your functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
WordPress uses a modern and intuitive editor for writing content and editing your website. This editor uses blocks for commonly-used content and layout elements, which is why it’s called the Block Editor.
However, you may need to use the older Classic Editor in some use cases.
The easiest way to disable the block editor is by using the Classic Editor plugin. However, if you don’t want to use a separate plugin, then just add the following code to your functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
WordPress switched from classic widgets to block widgets in WordPress 5.8. The new block widgets are easier to use and give you more design control than classic widgets.
However, some users may still want to use classic widgets. In that case, you can use the following code in your theme’s functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
When visitors view a post or page on your WordPress blog, your WordPress theme will show the date the post was published. This is fine for most blogs and static websites.
However, WordPress is also used by websites where old articles are regularly updated. In these publications, displaying the date and time the post was last modified is essential.
You can show the last updated date using the following code in your theme’s functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
$u_time = get_the_time( 'U' );
$u_modified_time = get_the_modified_time( 'U' );
// Only display modified date if 24hrs have passed since the post was published.
if ( $u_modified_time >= $u_time + 86400 ) {
$updated_date = get_the_modified_time( 'F jS, Y' );
$updated_time = get_the_modified_time( 'h:i a' );
$updated = '<p class="last-updated">';
$updated .= sprintf(
// Translators: Placeholders get replaced with the date and time when the post was modified.
esc_html__( 'Last updated on %1$s at %2$s' ),
$updated_date,
$updated_time
);
$updated .= '</p>';
echo wp_kses_post( $updated );
}
By default, WordPress displays the admin bar at the top when a logged-in user views your website.
You can disable the admin bar for all users except site administrators. Simply add the following code to your functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
/* Disable WordPress Admin Bar for all users */
add_filter( 'show_admin_bar', '__return_false' );
WordPress displays a ‘Howdy Admin’ greeting in the WordPress dashboard. ‘Admin’ is replaced by the logged-in user’s name.
You can change the default greeting to your own by adding the following code in your functions file or as a new WPCode snippet:
function wpcode_snippet_replace_howdy( $wp_admin_bar ) {
// Edit the line below to set what you want the admin bar to display intead of "Howdy,".
$new_howdy = 'Welcome,';
$my_account = $wp_admin_bar->get_node( 'my-account' );
$wp_admin_bar->add_node(
array(
'id' => 'my-account',
'title' => str_replace( 'Howdy,', $new_howdy, $my_account->title ),
)
);
}
add_filter( 'admin_bar_menu', 'wpcode_snippet_replace_howdy', 25 );
WordPress comes with a built-in editor where you can edit plugin files. You can see it by going to the Plugins » Plugin File Editor page.
Similarly, WordPress also includes a file editor for classic themes at Appearance » Theme File Editor.
Note: If you use a block theme, then the theme file editor is not visible.
We don’t recommend using these editors for making changes to your theme or plugin. A tiny mistake in code can make your website inaccessible to all users.
To disable the plugin/theme editor, add the following code to your functions file or as a WPCode snippet:
// Disable the Plugin and Theme Editor
if ( ! defined( 'DISALLOW_FILE_EDIT' ) ) {
define( 'DISALLOW_FILE_EDIT', true );
}
Managing events and workshops in my undergrad days was quite an adventure. I still recall the hours I spent struggling with different tools, trying to make the event management smoother. We relied on WordPress to handle our websites and Notion to manage event vendors and speakers.
Getting that data to work seamlessly on WordPress was a real challenge. It involved a lot of manual work, copying, and pasting, and usually ended up causing mistakes or duplicated info. Every new event meant a trade-off between getting the right data or spending endless hours tweaking things. Neither option was ideal, and it was taking a toll on the quality of our events.
But then, I learned about Notion WP Sync, a plugin that integrates with WordPress and Advanced Custom Fields. These tools claimed they could bridge the gap between Notion’s flexibility and WordPress’s power, making event management a breeze. The idea of effortlessly syncing participant data sounded like a dream.
This blog post will explore how I tackled event planning with Notion and WordPress. We will use the following tools:
Notion WP Sync – You must have the Notion WP Sync Pro+ version.
These tools help streamline your event management process, automate data synchronization, and provide a seamless experience for event organizers and attendees. So, let’s dive in and discover how you can take your event sign-ups to the next level!
Setting Up Notion
Within the Notion platform, a database serves as a versatile tool that empowers users to systematically arrange, store, and oversee information. In contrast to conventional textual documents, Notion’s databases offer a more engaging and visual approach to managing data.
These databases can be displayed in diverse formats, including tables, boards (similar to those found in Trello), calendars, galleries, or lists.
To initiate your journey with Notion, it is advisable to establish your data within a table structure. Notion has provided a tutorial on crafting a Notion database if you haven’t done this yet.
The Manage Event Vendors database with the fields shown below was created and used for this study.
Setting Up The Advanced Custom Fields Plugin
ACF allows you to add custom fields to your WordPress edit screens. These custom fields can be used to collect and display more specific information than what is typically allowed by WordPress’s default post editor.
ACF is particularly useful for developers looking to create more complex websites requiring unique data forms.
Before you set up your connection to WordPress, you will need to create the CPT and any fields that will be mapped. Here, you can find tutorials for setting up your CPT and custom fields.
For this article, we created a field group, “Event Vendors,” with the fields “Vendor Name,” “Vendor eMail,” “Vendor URL,” and “Vendor Specialty.”
Connecting Notion to WordPress with Notion WP Sync
Notion WP Sync allows you to connect your Notion workspace to a WordPress website. The main purpose of this tool is to sync content between Notion and your WordPress site so you can create, edit, and manage content on Notion and have it automatically updated on your WordPress website.
You will need to purchase Notion WP Sync Pro+. Notion WP Sync allows mapping fields from Notion to Field Groups set up in WordPress by ACF.
Mapping your database to WordPress
Once you create your connection, you will map the fields in your Notion Database to the ACF custom fields as well as post fields in your WordPress site.
Sync your connection; navigate to the post type setup, and you will see the new content shown.
Displaying your content can be achieved by integrating your fields and data into your site’s templates.
Tip: Before you can apply an Elementor Template to a content type, you must select the post type in your Elementor Settings.
Now that you have activated your page builder for your Post Type, you can begin building your templates.
At this point, you’re set up to watch the automation between Notion and WordPress make some magic!
Team members who use Notion to maintain their lists and project information now have a work area that they are comfortable moving around in, while your front information that is relevant for visitors is easily and automatically shown on your WordPress site.
Conclusion
Efficient vendor management is essential for event organizers to ensure a smooth and successful event. You can handle vendor applications, collect relevant information, and organize the data for easy access for later use.
Notion WP Sync and ACF provide event organizers with a streamlined solution for managing vendors and speakers. Event organizers can centralize and automate vendor and speaker management by integrating Notion with WordPress, a popular content management system.
FAQ’s
How can I use Notion to enhance event sign-ups?
Notion WP Sync is a powerful integration that bridges the gap between your WordPress website and Notion workspace. It allows seamless synchronization of event data, enabling you to manage event sign-ups and details in Notion while displaying them on your WordPress site. This integration streamlines event management, enhances data accuracy, and provides a centralized platform for efficient event sign-ups.
Is this integration suitable for both small-scale and large-scale events?
Yes, the synergy between Notion WP Sync and Advanced Custom Fields is adaptable to events of various scales. Whether you’re organizing a small workshop, a medium-sized conference, or a large-scale festival, this integration offers flexibility in designing tailored sign-up forms and managing event-related data. You can customize the ACF fields based on the complexity of your event, ensuring that the registration process aligns with your unique requirements, regardless of event size.
How to Boost Customer Retention with SMS Marketing – Blend Commerce
Imagine this: You’ve built an online empire, offering a diverse range of products that captivate your target audience. Your website is polished to perfection, your product selection is unparalleled, and your commitment to customer service is unwavering. Yet, despite your best efforts, customer retention seems to be slipping through your grasp. You’ve tried everything, from thousands of email campaigns to even hiring a full time TikTok reel maker, and still, your customers remain elusive. It’s a clichéd millennial love story.
But, fear not, your failed attempts at love are over. Today, we’re here to introduce you to a game-changing solution: SMS marketing. This is not just another shiny trick up our sleeves; it’s a practical and data-driven approach that has proven to deliver remarkable results.
No more relying solely on conventional methods or praying for a stroke of luck. It’s time to rewrite the script and turn your tale of fleeting customer loyalty into a captivating, long-lasting connection. With its power to reach customers directly and create personal, engaging experiences, SMS marketing becomes your most powerful tool in the battle for customer retention. So, if you’re ready, join us as we guide you through practical techniques, industry insights, and real-life examples that empower you to optimise customer retention using SMS!
SMS marketing has become a popular and effective method for businesses to connect with their customers on a personal level. By leveraging the power of SMS, you can communicate directly with your audience, ensuring your message gets noticed in a cluttered digital landscape. Unlike other marketing channels, SMS offers an unparalleled level of immediacy. With high open rates and quick response times, SMS messages have the power to capture your customers’ attention in real-time. Whether it’s delivering time-sensitive offers, important updates, or personalised recommendations, SMS allows you to engage your customers at the right moment, ensuring your message doesn’t get lost in the noise.
So, how do you do this? Well, luckily for you, there are many platforms and integrations that help you connect with your customers in this way. Let’s explore how KlaviyoSMS, a powerful SMS marketing tool, can help you create a cohesive and impactful customer retention strategy.
KlaviyoSMS, offered in both the UK and the US, is a powerful tool that allows you to leverage the benefits of SMS marketing in conjunction with your existing email marketing strategy. Rather than viewing email and SMS marketing as competing channels, it’s important to recognise their synergistic potential. By integrating KlaviyoSMS with your email marketing efforts, you can create a cohesive and holistic approach that maximises customer engagement and retention.
KlaviyoSMS can be used seamlessly within Klaviyo flows, enabling you to incorporate SMS messages into your automated workflows. This integration opens up a world of possibilities to deliver timely and personalised SMS messages based on customer behaviour, preferences, and lifecycle stages. By combining the power of email and SMS, you can create a multi-channel experience that keeps your customers engaged and connected at every touchpoint.
Even if you’re not using KlaviyoSMS specifically, the principles of SMS marketing can still be applied in conjunction with your email marketing strategy. By strategically incorporating SMS messages into your customer journey, you can enhance the effectiveness of your campaigns and flows and deepen customer relationships.
To maximise the impact of SMS marketing on customer retention, it’s essential to implement effective strategies and flows. Let’s explore some tried-and-true techniques that can help you keep your customers engaged and coming back for more:
Welcome Series
The first impression matters! Create a warm and engaging welcome series to introduce new customers to your brand. Craft a personalised SMS thanking them for choosing your store and provide a special incentive to encourage their next purchase. This not only makes a positive impact but also sets the stage for a long-lasting customer relationship.
Abandoned Cart
Turn abandoned carts into completed orders! Set up automated SMS reminders for customers who left items in their carts. Craft persuasive messages that highlight the benefits of the products and include a limited-time incentive to entice them to return and complete the purchase. This gentle nudge can significantly increase your conversion rates and revenue.
Order Confirmation & Shipping Updates
Waiting for an order can feel like watching paint dry. But with SMS, you can keep your customers in the loop every step of the way with timely SMS notifications. Send them order confirmations that make them feel confident about their purchase, shipping updates that build anticipation, and delivery notifications for when their package finally arrives.
Don’t forget to include tracking links so they can track their parcels right from their fingertips. Oh, and here’s a sneaky tip: Encourage them to share their excitement on social media too. That way, you not only keep them in the loop but also boost your brand visibility and create a buzz that can’t be ignored!
Personalised Recommendations
We all love that warm, fuzzy feeling of being understood, don’t we? Well, get ready to make your customers feel like you’ve got a sixth sense for their preferences. Utilise the power of customer data to send targeted SMS messages with personalised product recommendations!
Based on a customer’s purchase history, browsing behaviour, and preferences, you can deliver tailored SMS messages suggesting related products that are so spot-on, it’s almost like you’re reading their minds.This level of personalisation not only boosts customer engagement but also drives cross-selling opportunities.
Back in Stock
There’s nothing worse than finding out your favourite product is out of stock. Your customers feel the same, except you can give them what you never had – a timely message that lets them know their desired items are back in action. By showing them that you care about their needs and keeping them in the loop, you’ll keep them engaged and eager to hit that “Add to Cart” button as soon as their items make a return.
Loyalty Programs and Exclusive Offers
Who doesn’t love feeling special? Spoil your loyal customers with exclusive SMS offers and early access to sales that make them feel like they’re part of an elite club. Think of it as rolling out the red carpet for your most dedicated fans. By rewarding their continued patronage, you’ll create a sense of exclusivity and make them feel appreciated.
And why stop there? Consider implementing a loyalty program that showers them with perks and rewards for their unwavering loyalty. It’s like a virtual hug that says, “Thank you for being awesome.” And trust us, that kind of love goes a long way in fostering a long-term relationship that keeps them coming back for more of what you have to offer.
Multi-Channel Flows
SMS doesn’t have to exist in isolation. It can be seamlessly integrated with email in a single flow to ensure ultimate personalisation and engagement. Imagine a scenario where a customer receives an email highlighting a new product, and shortly after, they receive an SMS with a limited-time discount for that product. By combining the power of email and SMS in one flow, you create a cohesive customer experience that reinforces your message and encourages action.
Additionally, you can incorporate SMS as a trigger within your email flows to enhance the effectiveness of your campaigns. For example, after a customer makes a purchase, you can send a follow-up email to thank them and include an SMS with a special offer for their next purchase, like a free product. This integrated approach keeps customers engaged across multiple touchpoints and maximises the chances of conversion and retention.
To make the most of your SMS marketing efforts and boost customer retention, it’s essential to follow some best practices. Here are key guidelines to keep in mind:
Permission-Based Marketing
Always obtain explicit consent before sending SMS messages to your customers. Implement a double opt-in process to confirm their interest and avoid any potential complaints. Respecting their privacy builds trust and strengthens the relationship.
Timing is Everything
Respect your customers’ time and space by scheduling your SMS messages at appropriate times. Avoid sending messages during late-night hours or at times when they are unlikely to engage. By choosing the right timing, you increase the chances of your message being seen and acted upon.
Concise and Engaging Content
Create SMS messages that are short, to the point, and attention-grabbing. With limited character space, every word counts. Inject a touch of creativity and personality into your messages to make them memorable and enjoyable to read. Engaging content stands out and keeps customers interested.
Opt-Out and Opt-In Options
Make it easy for customers to unsubscribe from your SMS marketing list if they no longer wish to receive messages. Similarly, provide a clear and straightforward opt-in process for new customers to join your SMS list. Honouring customer preferences builds trust and shows that you value their choices.
Ready to turn your relationship history with customers around? You’re in the right place.
With our industry expertise and creative approach, we’ll help you develop a winning SMS strategy that keeps your customers engaged and loyal. We understand the power of SMS marketing as a valuable tool in your customer retention arsenal. Whether you’re using KlaviyoSMS or another platform, we’ll show you how SMS can complement your existing email marketing efforts and create a seamless, multi-channel customer experience.
Ready to supercharge your customer retention efforts? Partner with Blend and, together, we’ll create a powerful strategy that keeps customers engaged, loyal, and coming back for more! Get in touch today.
It’s one of the most common questions I hear small business founders and marketers ask. The answer, though simple, might not be that apparent to you if you’re looking at it from a traditional marketing perspective.
Launching, managing, tracking, and growing a company blog – large or small – takes effort and dedicated resources. But there’s a huge value in that when you do it right.
Becoming a content destination adds tremendous value to your web presence. I highlight below some of the requirements and reasons to have a great blog.
People Are Supposed to Read Your Content
The whole point of creating a blog is to attract people to read your content. But are they? And if they aren’t, does that mean you’re doing it wrong and wasting your time?
In order to gauge this, you have to answer this question first: How much time do people spend reading your content?
Your time on a page should average at least 30 to 45 seconds. Anything less means people are barely skimming the content and moving on quickly.
This could be because the content is subpar, poorly formatted, or – possibly the worst offense of all – overly self-promotional.
If your blog content is all about you and your company, your audience won’t want to spend their valuable time reading it.
This information can be found using your GA4 dashboard (inside the “Events” report):
Mind that time-on-site may dramatically change based on the traffic acquisition channel. People coming from social media may be in a hurry to go back to their browsing feeds.
But people coming from search are more likely to read carefully because that’s exactly the answer they were looking for when searching Google.
Great Editorial Content Owns Organic Search
A strong blog can draw hundreds of thousands or even millions of visitors to your website each month. In fact, I’d be hard-pressed to name another cost-effective strategy that has the reach and consistency to drive this volume of top-of-the-funnel, yet still relevant traffic.
Of course, you can do this with paid channels, but you’re going to pay out the nose, and it’s an ad. That’s no fun. Becoming a content destination might be the single best organic search strategy now and in the future.
Google is the king of the world they literally have the highest market cap of any company on the planet as of the date this article was written. Just about any company relies on its precious referral traffic.
And, we’ve all tried to find a way to increase that traffic, sometimes through any means necessary. Text Optimizer is a solid tool to help you improve content quality. It helps you understand the context behind each search query, allowing you to create content that meets your audience’s needs:
Google is constantly challenged to give its users the best possible experience. That’s why they want to rank the best content first. Great pages contribute to a website’s overall ranking credibility.
Google looks at multiple content quality factors including original content quality, page experience, trustworthiness, and even page security (they prefer HTTPS).
They look at content validation factors like who wrote the content (yep, the people creating your content matter) and who linked to the content.
Subject Matter Experts Amplify
When creating a content destination to attract and retain your consumer audience (which can be B2B as well, of course), you should strongly consider the voice behind that content.
Using internal experts is great, and should be part of your strategy. But you can get a tremendous amount of value out of assembling a high-quality external team of contributors.
I’m not talking about low-quality guest posts. It is important to utilize skilled subject matter experts when executing your thoughtful content strategy.
You can transform your brand by leveraging experts to educate your audience. So, I’m talking about aligning yourself with trusted content producers.
It is also a good idea to become a niche authority and contribute to your own blog. Rand Fishkin is a great example of a leader who never stops making their company blog content better.
Another great example is Hari Ravichandran. He keeps investing time in writing books and doing interviews on podcasts and videos. These represent his company’s value proposition and raise his visibility as a thought leader.
Content Destination Results
When you work on becoming a content destination, the result will be:
Better content engagement
More social shares and followers
Earned links and increased rankings
And finally, your brand will become to be regarded as a legitimate content destination / brand publisher, earning the attention of not just your audience but also the media at large.
The digital age has redefined how businesses approach marketing and outreach. In this dynamic landscape, content is not just the king but the entire kingdom.
Small businesses and enterprises alike stand to gain significantly by establishing themselves as a “content destination”.
In essence, becoming a content destination is more than just a marketing strategy; it’s a commitment to excellence and a mission to be at the forefront of thought leadership within your industry.
The question now is not if you should become a content destination but rather when you’ll start.
Unleashing Proven Strategies
This is just one of the Proven Content Strategies our BizSugar Mastermind members are sharing for our Unleashing Proven Strategies Challenge. Ann Smarty is a member and was our guest expert for the Forming Strategic Partnerships and Alliances TipTalk text chat.
Ann is also our Webinar expert on September 20, 2023 at noon Central for How to Create Linkable Content to Attract Backlinks. Register here now.
Put Your Forms On The Map with New Forminator Geolocation Add-On
Our formtastic team’s done it again! Forminator’s new Geolocation Add-on with Google Maps API integration lets you effortlessly gather geolocation data from your form submissions and provide address auto-completion for a smoother user experience.
See where form users are located with Forminator’s new geolocation feature.
After releasing the highly anticipated PDF Generator Add-on, we’re proud to announce another powerful addition to our form-building plugin…Geolocation add-on!
If your business needs to collect location information from users, Forminator Pro with Geolocation Add-on is the only form-building plugin you’ll need.
In this post, we’ll look at:
Key Benefits of Using Forminator’s Geolocation Add-on
With Forminator’s Geolocation Add-on enabled, you can enhance forms on your site in the following ways:
Accurate Location Detection
Forminator can precisely pinpoint the user’s location by harnessing the device’s GPS or IP address.
This information is seamlessly integrated into your forms, giving you real-time access to where your users are located.
Moreover, the Geolocation feature includes a convenient address lookup function, allowing users to search for and select their location using postal addresses, city names, or zip codes.
See the user’s location in your form submissions.
Interactive Map View
One of the standout aspects of the Geolocation feature is its map view. Not only can users see their location on a map but also interact with it.
Users have the option to manually input their location or select it directly from a map marker. This dynamic map view enhances user engagement and makes it easy for users to provide accurate location details.
Customization Options
Forminator’s Geolocation offers a range of customization options to suit your needs. You can configure the display of Google Maps next to your address field, choose whether to position the map above or below the address field, and even adjust the map’s size, ensuring a responsive or custom fit for various devices.
Additionally, you have the flexibility to set a default map location based on specific latitude and longitude coordinates.
You can easily customize your map’s geolocation options.
Seamless Integration
To utilize the Geolocation feature, simply enter your Google Maps API key in the Geolocation settings, ensuring a seamless and reliable experience for your users.
Global Settings
For ease of use across all your forms, you can enable Geolocation as a default setting on all address fields throughout your site. This simplifies the process of collecting location information from your users.
Enable Geolocation as a default setting on all new forms.
User-Friendly Configuration
If you require users to provide location access before submitting a form, the “Require access to users’ location” option can be enabled. Additionally, you can customize the error message displayed if users choose not to provide location access.
How To Use Forminator’s Geolocation Add-on
To install and use the Geolocation Add-on, you’ll need to have Forminator Pro installed and activated on your site.
Forminator Pro is included in all paid memberships, so if you’re not a WPMU DEV member yet, consider becoming one by choosing one of our risk-free membership plans.
With Forminator Pro installed, go to the Add-Ons section of the plugin’s menu and click Install.
Install Geolocation in the plugin’s Add-Ons screen.
Once the plugin has been installed, click Configure.
You’ll need to configure the Add-On before you can use it.
You’ll need to add a valid Google Maps API key to enable and set up geolocation on your forms. Refer to our Forminator Docs for instructions on obtaining this key if you need help with this step.
FREE EBOOK
Your step-by-step roadmap to a profitable web dev business. From landing more clients to scaling like crazy.
FREE EBOOK
Plan, build, and launch your next WP site without a hitch. Our checklist makes the process easy and repeatable.
Enter your key into the Google Maps API field, switch the toggle on to enable geolocation as the default option for all your new forms (optional), and click the Save button to continue.
Enter your Google Maps API key.
Once the API key has been validated and the configuration has been successfully saved, a confirmation message will display briefly on your screen letting you know that you’re all good to go.
Note: You can access additional Geolocation configuration settings for individual forms (e.g. disabling geolocation or making it mandatory for users to provide their location details in order to submit a form) in the Forms > Edit Form > Settings section.
Configure additional Geolocation settings in the Form Settings section.
With the addon configured, let’s go through an example of adding Geolocation field to a form.
Adding Geolocation Fields To Forms
In the Forms section, select a form or create a new form and select Edit > Fields.
Click on the Insert fields button to add Geolocation to a form.
Select the Address field and click the Insert Fields button.
Add an address field to your form.
The Address field is highly customizable and includes a Geolocation tab with advanced options for configuring maps, such as:
Autocomplete: Provides real-time suggestions as users enter an address into the field.
Display address in Map: Displays a map next to the address fields
Map Position: Choose whether to display the map above or below (default) the address field.
Map Size: Set a responsive or custom size for your map.
Default Map Location: Set a default of custom location for your map.
Forminator Address field settings include advanced Geolocation options.
Configure the above settings to suit your needs and to facilitate user interaction with your form maps and a great user experience.
For example, enable autocomplete to display matching locations as users start typing and to fill in the address fields automatically when an address is selected from the options displayed.
Enable autocomplete for a smoother and more interactive user experience with form maps.
Once the browser loads the form page, it will prompt users to give access to their location. Allowing this access will then show the user’s current location on the map and auto complete the address fields.
Enabling autocomplete also prefills all address details on the form.
By simply clicking on different points on the map, users can also change their location and update address fields.
Clicking on different points on the map changes the address on the form fields.
All form information including the user’s geolocation details and a map will also display on Forminator’s submission page.
An example of a Forminator form submission showing a map with the user’s location and coordinates.
It’s All About Geolocation, Geolocation, Geolocation
Forminator’s new Geolocation feature empowers you to collect and leverage location information from your form users, gain valuable insights into your audience, whether they are customers, employees, or suppliers, and make more informed business decisions.
Check out this feature in Forminator Pro and if you need any help, see our documentation or contact our expert 24/7 support team.
Shopify named a Leader in the 2023 Gartner® Magic Quadrant™ for Digital Commerce
Industry analyst firm Gartner has published its annual report evaluating digital commerce solutions, the 2023 Gartner Magic Quadrant for Digital Commerce, and we’re thrilled to announce that Shopify has been named a Leader and placed highest in our ability to execute. We’re honored by the recognition from Gartner and believe this is an acknowledgment to our innovation and unique vision for commerce.
Earlier this year, we kicked off an initiative to transform our partner program and give Shopify partners a competitive advantage to build for the long term. We have since exploded into leading enterprise commerce through Commerce Components by Shopify, a modern composable stack that provides retailers with the flexibility to integrate and innovate without restrictions.
Our product teams continue to fuel commerce innovation for businesses of all sizes, breaking the boundaries of what’s possible—just check out Shopify Editions to see our hundreds of recent product releases.
We’re thrilled to have a diverse partner network including thousands of leading development and digital marketing agencies, system integrators, and technology partners around the globe to provide insights and feedback to continually improve and drive our innovation forward. Here’s what this new recognition from Gartner means for you as a Shopify Partner.
Building the future of commerce for enterprise retailers
Shopify addresses the clear demand for modularity, flexibility and advanced development capabilities in the ever-evolving enterprise landscape—and we continue to innovate. We partnered with Google Cloud to address search abandonment, extended the availability of Shop Pay to enterprise retailers outside Shopify for the first time, and upgraded our integration with Adyen to offer even greater payment gateway choices. But we’re not stopping there.
Our commitment to innovation is crucial for the industry. From handling colossal product catalogs, limitless order volumes, multi-channel selling, or complex inventory management, Shopify’s infrastructure scales seamlessly to exceed the demands of enterprise-level operations.
Take Shop Pay as an example. Because we’ve made it available to enterprise businesses off Shopify, any retailer can get the best converting accelerated checkout on the internet. In a recent study, one of the big three global management consulting firms found that Shopify’s overall conversion rate outpaces the competition by up to 36%. The same study found that Shop Pay can boost conversion by as much as 50%, outperforming other accelerated checkout solutions by up to 10%.
Why does that matter? Enterprise retailers have distinct requirements that demand tailored solutions. Instead of imposing off-the-shelf or difficult-to-integrate options, we think outside the box and provide businesses with the optionality and flexibility they need. This means we’re a more valuable partner in their success.
“Enterprises are re-evaluating their digital commerce strategies to provide faster, more innovative and frictionless experiences that meet the high expectations their customers need. We believe this recognition reinforces Shopify’s ability to deliver high-quality, on-time and on-budget solutions for enterprise clients.” – Travis Hess, Managing Director, Accenture Song
The new possibilities for your clients
Legacy enterprise SaaS was once the default choice for these businesses. Whether they opted for custom-built or off-the-shelf, they were often locked into one option — regardless of any issues that arose.
We believe our recent recognition by Gartner reinforces Shopify’s ability to deliver best-in-class solutions for your clients, but we also believe it underscores the market’s strong demand for flexible and customizable solutions that are quick to implement. As builders of technology that contributes to growth, job creation and profitability, we have a responsibility to continuously innovate. We are driven to do more and achieve greater things, and our teams worldwide are committed to challenging the status quo and delivering transformative solutions that give your and your clients a competitive advantage.
“As companies increasingly move to improve their digital commerce experience, it becomes even more important that they implement a robust platform with the flexibility and innovation to scale. By partnering with Shopify, we’re able to support our client ambitions with a powerful platform that provides the flexibility to integrate and innovate without restrictions, while offering trusted infrastructure components that help their teams move faster. ” – Benjamin Crudo, CEO of Diff Agency
What this recognition means for Shopify Partners
As a Shopify partner, this report can help you drive greater profitability by taking advantage of Shopify’s innovation, speed, and scale to win deals and identify new opportunities.
“With this recognition from Gartner, we believe it’s clear that there has never been a better time to partner with Shopify. With the highest converting checkout on the internet and hundreds of product releases and major enhancements every year, we’re committed to continuing to provide a best-in-class product to help our partners grow their business.” – Ritu Khanna, VP, Global Partnerships at Shopify
Shopify Partners can share this report with their customers to:
Serve as an essential report to make informed decisions when evaluating digital commerce solutions
Discover transformational technologies that help organizations deliver great buying experiences
Learn more about the technology and market trends driving digital commerce buying decisions
Showcase the value that Shopify will bring to their business
Gartner, Magic Quadrant for Digital Commerce, 21 August 2022, Jason Daigler, et. Al.
Gartner does not endorse any vendor, product or service depicted in its research publications, and does not advise technology users to select only those vendors with the highest ratings or other designation. Gartner research publications consist of the opinions of Gartner’s research organization and should not be construed as statements of fact. Gartner disclaims all warranties, expressed or implied, with respect to this research, including any warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
GARTNER is a registered trademark and service mark, and MAGIC QUADRANT is a registered trademark of Gartner, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and internationally and are used herein with permission. All rights reserved.
9 Best WPForms Alternatives Compared (Free and Paid)
Are you looking for the best WPForms alternatives?
WPForms is the powerful drag and drop WordPress forms plugin out there. It lets you quickly create contact forms, payment forms, surveys, and more without any coding at all. However, there are a lot of other forms plugins out there, and we want to help you find the one that works best for your site.
In this post, we’ll explore some of the best alternatives to WPForms.
Is There a Free Alternative to WPForms?
Yes, there’s a free version of WPForms! WPForms Lite gives you the most important features you need to get started with creating forms.
With WPForms Lite, you can access ready-made templates and create unlimited forms right in the form builder.
That said, let’s look at the best WPForms Pro alternatives.
We do think that WPForms is the best form builder available, and if you’re not ready to purchase a license just yet, we suggest that you give WPForms Lite a shot.
It is the best alternative WordPress form plugin to WPForms Pro and offers plenty of features for free. With over 6 million professionals using the product on their websites, it’s one of the most popular plugins available.
You can use WPForms Lite to:
Build unlimited forms without writing a single line of code
Get unlimited responses
Protect your forms against spam
Receive entry notifications by mail
Create payment and subscription forms with Stripe integration
Building forms only takes a few minutes, too. WPForms Lite lets you build many types quickly with its user-friendly drag and drop interface.
Simply choose your template and drag any field you want from left to right.
The Lite version alone has plenty of field options, including multiple choice, dropdown, reCAPTCHA, payment fields, and a GDPR agreement.
Also, with the free version, you can email users when forms are completed for confirmation or direct them to the next steps.
WPForms Lite can connect with Constant Contact for lead generation, too. Once users submit their information through a newsletter form, the new contact will be added to your email list. Newsletter signup and user registration forms are a powerful way to get more leads from your WordPress site.
You will want to use WPForms Pro to connect with other email marketing services like Mailchimp, GetResponse, AWeber, Drip, and others.
WPForms Lite also easily integrates popular page builders SeedProd and Divi so that you can create and embed contact forms without complex shortcodes.
But what if you want to connect your forms to a service that doesn’t have an addon? WPForms Lite connects with Uncanny Automator, which allows you to send WPForms submissions to other plugins and services.
Unlike most free plugins which lack proper customer support, WPForms Lite provides support in the WordPress.org forums, and you can expect a typical response time of 1 to 3 business days.
If you’re a Pro member, you get help even faster since you can open a support ticket and expect a response within 1 business day.
While it’s missing some advanced features like conditional logic and multi-page forms, WPForms Lite is the perfect tool for freelancers, creatives, or other business owners who only need simple forms.
Pricing: WPForms Lite is completely free to use. If you want to upgrade to the Pro version, WPBeginner users can enjoy an exclusive 50% OFF discount on all plans by using our WPForms coupon.
Formidable Forms is an advanced WordPress form builder and a great alternative to WPForms if you’re looking to create complex forms.
WPForms and Formidable Forms share many similarities. For instance, both have user-friendly drop form builders to create forms.
That said, Formidable Forms tends to favor developers and brands requiring complex forms with advanced functionality, while WPForms specializes in powerful forms that are easy to design and embed.
Formidable Forms lets you create calculation forms, which is very useful for businesses like real estate or finance businesses.
You also get unique templates like car payment, paycheck, and mortgage calculations (along with many others), making Formidable Forms really stand out.
Besides that, you can turn your form results into user-generated content. They create eye-catching reports, graphs, and charts using form submission data. The plugin can also export the data into many different formats, such as proposals, invoices, certifications, and more.
Pricing: Formidable form plans start at $39.50 per year. However, you can also use the free version of the plugin as an alternative to WPForms.
WP Simple Pay is a plugin that makes creating and accepting payment forms on your WordPress site super easy.
Your forms can capture one-time payments or recurring subscriptions to fit your needs. This is perfect for business owners, freelancers, and agency owners who want to accept payments on their site without the fuss of creating an online store.
With WP Simple Pay, you can accept over 10 different payment methods, including credit or debit cards, ACH, Google Pay, Apple Pay, and other payment methods. This is more than just any other payment form builder, including WPForms.
If you need to take payments or donations on your site, then WP Simple Pay is a great alternative to using WPForms payment forms.
Pricing: Pricing plans start at $49.50 per year, giving you access to unlimited payment forms and no monthly fees. Higher plans offer features like Buy Now, Pay Later installment plans, and dedicated landing pages to help boost conversions.
WP Charitable is the best plugin for building non-profit donation forms and fundraising campaigns.
Collecting and managing donations in WordPress can be difficult since most donation and fundraising plugins are either too pricey or too limited. Expensive platform fees can quickly add up and eat into your fundraising efforts.
If you’re building donation forms, WP Charitable is the best choice. Since the platform doesn’t charge transaction fees, you can be assured that your donors’ generous donations won’t be taxed on your website.
With WP Charitable, you can create unlimited fundraising campaigns and set goals for each cause.
The free version of WP Charitable supports PayPal donations and offline payments. With the paid plans, you can add other payment gateways like Authorize.net and Stripe.
Pricing: Plans start at $99 per year with access to unlimited campaigns and donors. With higher plans, you will get addons such as recurring donations, peer-to-peer fundraising and crowdfunding, and newsletter software integration.
Typeform is a popular form builder that allows you to create forms, applications, quizzes, and even surveys or polls.
Like WPForms, there’s no coding involved. There are over 120+ integration options, and everything from logos to videos can be edited in the Typeform software, so you can build an appealing form.
You can also choose from 100+ templates based on different industries and use cases, including ecommerce sites, medical institutions, and more.
That said, Typeform does have some drawbacks. The biggest downside is the cost. The Basic plan starts from $25 per month to create unlimited forms. That’s something WPForms Lite can do for absolutely free.
There’s also a cap on how many monthly responses you can receive based on the type of plan you choose. The Basic plan only captures a mere 100 responses, which isn’t enough for most small businesses.
Plus, the most expensive plans run $996 USD per year, which drives up the cost of running a website by a lot.
Also, it’s a SaaS (software as a service) tool, meaning it stores data onto external services. This can be a security threat since you’ll be leaving your customer’s personal data in someone else’s hands.
Pricing: Typeform’s Basic plan starts at $300 per year with a small limit of 100 responses. The most advanced plan costs $996 per year and gives you extra features like conversion tracking, custom branding, and priority support.
HubSpot Form Builder allows you to create simple contact forms. It is a great alternative to WPForms if you already use other HubSpot products like the HubSpot customer relationship management (CRM), email marketing, or live chat tool.
What’s unique about HubSpot Form Builder is that you can create custom forms that meet your website need and automatically sync your new contacts collected from your forms into the HubSpot CRM.
You can create embedded forms, popup box forms, forms as standalone pages, or as dropdown banners. As a result, you can place lead generation forms at the right time and place in the customer journey.
Also, the plugin has an automation feature, allowing you to send emails to the user once they’ve submitted your forms. However, it’s only available as part of paid plans.
One of the biggest disadvantages is that the HubSpot Form Builder is quite limited in form templates, giving users only a handful of templates to work with. So if there isn’t a template to match your needs, you’ll have to create the form from scratch.
HubSpot Form Builder is part of a larger ecosystem of tools, meaning you don’t have to use third-party tools like Google Analytics for insights. You will have a built-in analytics dashboard to see how your forms are performing. And best of all, you can create a HubSpot form right in WordPress.
Pricing: The HubSpot Form Builder is free. However, if you want to access some of the other tools along with the form builder, pricing starts at $216 per year.
Gravity Forms is a powerful solution to create custom forms in WordPress.
With this plugin, you can build contact forms, surveys, and quizzes for your website with ease.
It comes with plenty of advanced features like conditional formatting, which shows or hides certain questions based on the user’s previous answer.
Gravity Forms also offers many addons to help you get the most out of the plugin. You can track users by geolocation, allow signatures, and collect partial form entries.
That said, Gravity Forms does fall short when compared to WPForms. It only comes with 15 templates and lacks a free version. If you’re using Gravity Forms on multiple sites, the licenses still provide a decent value for money.
Pricing: The Basic license starts at $59 per year, providing only access to 1 site and a few integrations.
Ninja Forms is another WPForms alternative you can start using for free. It features a drag and drop form builder so you can build interactive online forms without coding.
The plugin offers a wide range of addons for purchase, such as conditional logic, file uploads, Excel export, and multi-step forms. Unfortunately, you have to buy each one separately, which can quickly rack up, especially when buying more than one or two addons.
Out of this list, Ninja Forms offers some of the most integrations out of any tool. For example, you can connect them with different payment apps like Stripe and PayPal, CRMs like Salesforce, and other tools like webhooks and Slack.
Pricing: The base plugin is free to download in the official WordPress repository. However, you can buy a subscription with additional features starting at $99 per year or purchase individual addons.
Contact Form 7 rounds out our list because it is the oldest and most downloaded contact form plugin in the official WordPress plugin directory.
It is a WPForms alternative, but we don’t recommend that you use it. The only real benefit of using Contact Form 7 is that it’s free to use, and you can create simple forms. WPForms Lite does everything it can and more.
That said, Contact Form 7 is not user-friendly. There are no drag and drop builders or templates to use. Instead, you have to copy shortcodes to embed forms and toggle with dynamic merge tags to build the most basic contact forms.
Additionally, all forms are styled plainly. You can’t customize the style of your forms, making it hard to match the form’s design to your WordPress theme.
If you’re looking for a free WordPress contact form plugin, then WPForms Lite, Ninja Forms, and Formidable Forms Lite are all considerably better solutions than Contact Form 7.
Pricing: It’s a free plugin. However, it lacks many basic features, no real customization is available, and you get limited support.
What to Look for in an Online Form Builder
When you’re on the hunt for an online form builder for your WordPress website, there are many features and factors to consider.
Fortunately, WPForms offers all of these features and then some. This makes it the most comprehensive form builder plugin on the market.
Let’s look at a few of them.
Pre-built Templates
The best online form builders have pre-built form templates, allowing you to set up the forms you need in minutes. You never have to start from scratch as you do with plugins like Contact Form 7.
Instead, look for a form builder with a template gallery that includes the most popular forms needed for WordPress websites, like contact forms, newsletter signup forms, application forms, donation forms, order forms, and more.
In fact, the WPForms Lite version alone has 900+ form templates, meaning there’s a form to fit almost anything you could need.
Conditional Logic
In some cases, you may want to show or hide specific fields to users based on their responses.
That way, your visitors won’t see tons of empty fields that don’t apply to them.
You can use conditional logic to create dynamic forms that adapt as your visitor fills out the form. For example, you may want to:
Filter your survey questions based on a demographic question
Process payments only when certain conditions are met
Provide customized support based on the type of issues your customers are experiencing
Surveys & Polls
A good form builder should also include the ability to create survey forms, polls, and quizzes.
Unlike most professional survey tools, WPForms Pro lets you easily embed surveys and polls onto your site. This helps you share and distribute them to a wider audience.
Everything is housed and stored within WordPress, meaning all your survey responses will be stored on your website, so you don’t have to log into different platforms and you can ensure your users’ data is secure.
Also, you’ll see survey charts to visually see how responses are segmented. You can also download MonsterInsights, the best Google Analytics plugin, to measure your form completion rates as well.
Conversational Forms
Static forms can feel plain, which increases the likelihood of form abandonment. Online form builders should be able to create conversational forms.
This is a more interactive layout that only focuses on one question at a time rather than showing all of the questions at once.
Also, conversational forms can be completed using a keyboard only, making them more suitable for mobile users.
Multi-Page Forms
Long forms can be overwhelming, causing users to abandon the form altogether. However, creating multi-page forms splits your single-page form into smaller sections with a progress bar to help reduce fatigue.
Respondents are more likely to finish the form when separated into pages rather than seeing one long form.
Spam Protection
Online forms are vulnerable to spam bots that crawl through websites to find ways to email you through a non-secure form.
Since website owners often don’t give out their email addresses, forms are an easy way for hackers to add spam comments, send phishing links, and spread malware.
That’s why you need built-in security features in your online form builder to prevent spam emails.
WPForms features the latest spam defense methods. For example, you can add a CAPTCHA to bypass spambots so that only humans can submit your forms.
Which WPForms Pro Alternative is the Best?
In our experience, the best alternative to WPForms Pro is WPForms Lite. For many users, the options in the free version can get them started with their website or business.
It is a powerful and easy-to-use plugin that lets you build just about any type of form. The Lite version can do all of the basic functions users need without any of the bloat other contact form plugins have.
There simply is no other free forms plugin that has the same ease of use and number of features as WPForms Lite.
However, if you need direct CRM integration, HubSpot Form Builder is the way to go.
For more complex forms or calculations, Formidable Forms is the clear winner.
If you want to be able to choose and pay for only the features you will use the most, then we think that Ninja Forms is your best option.
7 Proven Ways to Increase Retail Customer Lifetime Value (2023)
A common misconception for consumer brands is that the marketing process ends at the point of purchase.
Instead, smart brands recognize that acustomer’s lifetime value—or the net profit that you’ll take in over the course of your entire relationship with a customer—is far more important than any singular purchase in terms of revenue and influence over others.
But that customer lifetime value will continue to stay low if they only shop in your store once and never return. The subject of luring customers into your storefront over and over again has become a hot topic in recent years for several reasons.
What is retail customer lifetime value?
Customer lifetime value (CLV) is the total amount of money a customer is expected to spend in your business over the course of their relationship with you. The formula tocalculate customer lifetime valueis: CLV = (Average Value of a Sale) x (Number of Repeat Transactions) x (Average Retention Time in Months or Years for a Typical Customer).
On average, a good CLV is around three to five times your customer acquisition costs. So, if it costs you $100 to acquire a customer, aim for a CLV of at least $300.
Why retail customer lifetime value is so important
Intense competition for consumers’ disposable income
With direct-to-consumer brands popping up daily, and the side hustle economy enabled on platforms like Shopify, brands may only have one chance to capture the loyalty of customers before they move on to the next retailer.
Capturing a sizable portion of market share is more difficult these days, regardless of your product or service. With so many options available for consumers, stores and brands have to work hard to rise above the noise.
Proliferation of social networks
Historically, a customer that had an issue with a brand’s product or service had very little external recourse. They could tell their families, friends, and colleagues, but their reach was limited.
Today, they can share their frustration with millions of other potential customers, and negatively rate brands on third-party sites such as Amazon or Yelp, which can have an exceedingly detrimental impact on sales.
In fact, a2022 eye-tracking studyfound that when consumers pay more attention to negative comments, they tend to give up on buying a product. When they pay more attention to positive comments, they choose to buy.
As such, brands have a powerful opportunity to engage consumers post purchase, improving not only the likelihood of return business, but the chance that they will share their positive experience with other potential customers.
Shifting consumer behaviors
Today’s consumers expect more from brands. It’s no longer enough to convey the function of a product or service in marketing efforts; instead, consumers want to feel as if they are part of something bigger.
Brands like Toms Shoes and Warby Parker have gained massive, loyal followings, at least in part because their products are closely aligned with philanthropic causes. Certainly, customers will still make impulse purchases, and will still consider price and convenience for specific buying decisions.
How to increase retail customer lifetime value
Create a community around your brand
Provide utility for customers beyond the purchase
Involve shoppers in your marketing efforts
Provide great customer service
Offer loyalty programs
Make it easy for customers to buy again
Follow up with email marketing campaigns or retargeting ads
1. Create a community around your brand
Modern consumers want to shop with brands that align with their values and lifestyle choices. They believe there is power in the insights of their peers, and are more comfortable gaining product inspiration from one another than from brand messaging.
With the advent of ad-blocking, especially, there is a need for better marketing and ecommerce experiences. Instead of resisting this trend, brands can lean into it by helping enable these experiences through curated consumer communities.
Such communities can help forge an ongoing emotional connection with your customers. This is crucial, because feelings drive buying decisions. Research shows thatemotions fuel customer choices before, during, and after purchases. Retail expert Georganne Bender ofKizer & Bendersays, “People’s buying decisions are influenced daily, and emotions play a huge impact on these decisions.”
Your customers are included in that group that makes spending decisions based on their emotions, and they’d likely spend more with your brand if they felt emotionally charged to do so.
2. Provide utility to customers beyond the purchase
As we’ve established, the belief that the pursuit of a customer ends after thepoint of saleis largely outmoded. Brands that are only focused on a singular selling opportunity are missing the bigger picture and leaving a ton of revenue potential on the table.
By engaging customers post-purchase with education, value-add services, and complementary product offerings, brands can re-engage customers and drive additional purchasing behavior.
Keep the conversation going with customers after they leave your store.Post-purchase communicationis a vital step that keeps merchants and consumers connected.
Much of this effort is enabled through intelligent data collection and segmenting. If you can create personas and audiences based on demographic data and prior purchasing behavior, you can serve up relevant messaging to entice repeat business.
3. Involve shoppers in your marketing efforts
In the retail sector, specifically, many brands are turning to consumers’ own content as a way to better understand their target markets and provide them with incentives to repeat purchase behavior.
With consumers sharing over 95 million photos per day on Instagram alone, many of which feature brands and products, there is an enormous amount of insight that can be gained by viewing how consumers are considering brands and utilizing products in their day-to-day lives.
Fashion Nova shares user-generated content to support its Instagram marketing campaigns.
Brands that re-share this content and encourage users to create using hashtags, through contests, or via other messaging, are seeing a wealth of high-quality visual content that helps to enhance the communal feel.
Additionally, this content can be used to connect otherwise disparate marketing channels, such as display advertising, social media, and ecommerce, and even offline in print, direct mail, and outdoor activations.
4. Provide great customer service
An important part ofcustomer serviceis helping customers get the value they paid for, and quickly. In arecent HubSpot report,60% of respondents said they will be more loyal to a brand with a fast customer service response time.
Great customer service means exceeding expectations and making sure every interaction is positive. Retailers can mitigate negative experiences and build long-term relationships through trust.
If you’re a retailer selling online, you can have a live chat option on your website like Uoma Beauty. This provides immediate assistance and personalizes the shopping experience for browsers. Tools likeShopify InboxandGorgiasare perfect for website live chat.
Uoma Beauty uses live chat to answer customer questions quickly.
In-store, you can provide great customer service by:
Ensuring staff members are well-trained about products, store policies, and procedures
Conducting regular training sessions on soft skills like communication, empathy, and active listening
Making sure staff can make recommendations based on customer needs
Offering an easy return and exchange policy
Addressing issues right away
At the core, great customer service is having empathy and genuine concern for customers’ needs. When your team cares and goes the extra mile to make customers feel valued, you’re on your way to providing exceptional support.
5. Offer loyalty programs
Loyalty programs are a win-win. Customers get free stuff and fun rewards, and you get to sell more and understand what their customers like. The average American consumer belongs to 16.7 customer loyalty programs, according to a report byBond Brand Loyalty.
With its loyalty program,Blumetopia, bodycare retailer Blume offers a points system called Blume Bucks. To earn Blume Bucks, customers follow Blume on Instagram, place orders, or refer friends. Customers can redeem their Blume Bucks for merch, free products, and other cool gifts from Blume.
Customers can earn Blume Bucks easily with Blume’s loyalty program.
When a store knows what you love, it can offer you better deals and products, making you want to shop there even more. It’s like a circle of trust and rewards between the store and the customer.
There are plenty of apps available to run your loyalty program in-store and online. A few top options for Shopify merchants areSmileandJoy.
6. Make it easy for customers to buy again
Retailers that prioritize customer experience stand out, whether online or in-store. Customers that have an easy time shopping with your brand over and over are more likely to return.
One way to make it easy for customers to buy again is through simple returns. This makes customers feel secure in their purchase, and if the product doesn’t fit or work, it’ll be easy to swap or buy something else.
Apps likeAfterShipmake it easy for customers to exchange items or get a refund. You can build branded returns pages that recapture revenue and provide a seamless experience online.
A customer exchanges items easily through AfterShip’s returns page.
Another tactic is usingShop Pay. Once a customer makes a purchase, Shop Pay remembers their details. So the next time, instead of tediously typing out a shipping address and payment details, Shop Pay has it ready to go. It’s convenience at its best, guaranteeing faster and hassle-free checkouts.
Using Shop Pay while checking out at S’wheat’s online store.
7. Follow up with email marketing campaigns or retargeting ads
Reach out to customers after they’ve visited or shopped from your store. Using email or retargeting ads, you can remind them about the brand or show them things they liked.
Say someone was viewing a popular moisturizer but didn’t buy it. You can use Facebook retargeting to send them a little reminder, like BOOM! By Cindy Joseph does below.
A good retargeting ad includes social proof, compelling text, and a good CTA.
If you’re keen on email, there are plenty of campaigns you can send. For example, if you know a customer likes a particular product line, you can send them a reminder when a new product is about to drop. Melt Cosmetics does this with its Slick Waterline Pencil line announcement email.
Melt Cosmetics informs customers about new products through email.
Brands like BOOM! By Cindy Joseph and Melt Cosmetics use these tactics to keep their products front of mind. By reminding customers of the items they are interested in, they are more likely to follow through and make a purchase.
Create more loyal customers for your business
Improving average customer lifespan is critical for retailers. It can lead to higher average order value, more profitability, and more loyal customers. Getting there involves more than just plugging numbers into the customer lifetime value formula.
If a modern brand wants to engage and convert a potential customer, it needs to look at the relationship beyond the point of purchase and consider the deeper desires of the consumer. Doing so will help convert one-time shoppers into repeat customers.
Fuel your retention marketing with Shopify
Only Shopify lets you create customer profiles that unify online and in-store order history, preferences, and contact information. Use tags to build segmented mailing lists and increase customer lifetime value, make more relevant product recommendations, and more.
Retail CLV FAQ
What is the lifetime value of a customer for retail?
Retailers talk about a customer’s lifetime value when they think about how much profit they’re going to make over the long run. It takes into account both the revenue and costs of acquiring and serving the customer.
What is LTV in retail business?
LTV in a retail business is a metric that quantifies the projected revenue an existing customer will generate for the business during their entire duration as a customer, minus the costs of acquiring and maintaining that relationship.
What is an example of a customer lifetime value?
An example of a customer lifetime value might be: If a customer shops at a clothing store and spends an average of $100 annually for 10 years, with the company’s net profit margin being 20% and a $50 acquisition cost, the LTV would be (10 years x $100 x 20% – $50) = $150. .
Your inventory management is an integral part of your business and one of the processes you have the most control over. Lax inventory control can lead to stockouts, over-ordering and a dent in profits. Therefore, taking the time to optimise your current workflows will lead to increased efficiency and, in many cases, a boost in sales.
Overhauling your inventory management can seem daunting, but it doesn’t have to be. We’ve identified five easy-to-implement tips that you can use to optimise your current inventory management processes so you can save time, improve productivity and increase sales.
If you’re serious about optimising your inventory management, starting with a clean slate is essential. While you might believe your inventory levels are correct on paper, it’s vital to sense-check your current stock numbers by conducting a physical stocktake.
Orchestrating an inventory audit can be time-consuming, but ensuring your numbers are accurate is crucial and will provide a solid foundation to successfully optimise your inventory processes.
Once you’ve conducted your inventory audit, you’ll be in the perfect position to optimise your inventory management – but this shouldn’t be the only physical stocktake you do.
Setting time aside to conduct physical inventory counts throughout the year is crucial to ensure your data reflects what you have in stock. This reduces the likelihood of discrepancies, which can lead to overstocking or understocking, impacting customer satisfaction and profitability.
Regular physical inventory audits foster a culture of continuous improvement within your business. They provide an opportunity to identify areas for enhancement in inventory management processes, technology, training, and overall operations.
Aside from these benefits, how else will regular inventory audits help your business?
Validate your data
Regular physical audits help validate the accuracy of data recorded in your inventory management software. This ensures that decisions based on this data, such as reorder points, safety stock levels, and demand forecasting, are reliable and effective.
Uncover process inefficiencies
Physical audits can uncover process inefficiencies within the inventory management system. For example, if certain items are consistently misplaced or missing, it could indicate issues with inventory tracking, employee training, or stocking procedures. Identifying these inefficiencies will allow you to implement corrective measures.
Another example is identifying shrinkage. Shrinkage refers to losses in inventory due to theft, damage, or administrative errors. You can identify and quantify shrinkage accurately by conducting regular physical audits and then implementing strategies to minimise losses and improve profitability.
Optimise replenishment strategies and strategic decision-making
Accurate inventory audits will empower you to fine-tune your replenishment strategies. With exact numbers, it will be easier to avoid over-ordering, which ties up capital and storage space, or under-ordering, which leads to stockouts. This optimisation will improve your cash flow and enhance the customer experience by ensuring your products are available when customers want them.
Plus, accurate inventory data provides insights into product performance, demand trends, and seasonal fluctuations. This information is vital for making informed strategic decisions about product assortment, pricing, promotions, and discontinuations.
In a nutshell, a physical inventory audit is the first fundamental step for any retail store seeking to optimise its inventory management processes. Accurate inventory data serves as the cornerstone for efficient operations, better decision-making, improved financial management, and enhanced customer experiences.
2. Optimising reporting
How well do you know your inventory?
While many retailers can give a ballpark estimate of their stock levels and what sells well, relying on educated guesses can lead to trouble down the track.
To really understand how your inventory is performing, you need analytics. Most POS systems contain a wealth of information on your products, so harnessing this data to optimise your inventory management is crucial.
Diving into your data can be overwhelming, but understanding your analytics often isn’t as difficult as you might think. Your POS is already tracking a lot of your inventory and sales data; you just need to ensure you’re capturing and utilising it in a meaningful way.
Must-have inventory reports
Inventory reports are crucial for retail businesses because they provide valuable insights into the status of their inventory, sales, and overall operations. These reports help retailers make informed decisions, optimise inventory management strategies, and enhance business performance.
Here are ten inventory reports your retail businesses might find helpful:
Stock report: provides a snapshot of the current stock levels for each product, helping you understand what items are in stock, on order, and backorder.
Sales analysis report: analyses sales data alongside inventory levels to identify trends, fast-moving items, slow-moving items, and potential stockouts.
Stock turnover report: calculates the rate at which inventory is sold and replenished. It helps assess inventory management efficiency and identify which products contribute most to turnover.
ABC analysis report:categorises items into A, B, and C groups based on their contribution to revenue. It guides focus on high-value products and efficient management of lower-value items.
Reorder point report: determines the inventory level at which a new order should be placed to prevent stockouts before the next order arrives.
Safety stock report: calculates a buffer for unexpected demand fluctuations or supplier delays. This report estimates the ideal safety stock levels for different products.
Deadstock report: highlights items that have not sold within a specified period. It helps identify products that need to be marked down or removed from inventory.
Supplier performance report: evaluates the performance of suppliers based on factors like lead times, order accuracy, and product quality.
Forecast accuracy report: if retailers use demand forecasting, this report assesses the accuracy of forecasts compared to actual sales. It helps refine forecasting methods and improve inventory planning.
Stock ageing report: useful for products with expiration dates; this report categorises inventory by age, helping manage items that need to be sold or disposed of soon.
By utilising these inventory reports, retailers can gain insights into their inventory processes that support informed decision-making, streamline operations, minimise costs, and enhance customer satisfaction.
Remember: your business may only need to use some of these reports. The exact reports your store might need will depend on the specific requirements of your business and the types of products you deal with.
Why are inventory reports important?
Inventory reports provide accurate and up-to-date information about stock levels, turnover rates, and demand patterns. In turn, this information empowers you to make data-driven decisions regarding purchasing, pricing, restocking, and inventory optimisation.
Inventory insights are also essential to identify potential risks, such as overstocking, understocking, or slow-moving items. By recognising these risks early on, you can take corrective actions to prevent financial losses and maintain healthy inventory levels in your store.
As well as ensuring a smoother inventory management workflow, inventory reports can help you pinpoint sales trends, seasonal variations, and customer preferences. This information will guide your inventory planning and help align your product offering with customer demands.
3. Sync product data directly from suppliers
One of the main benefits of optimising your inventory management is boosting efficiency so you can save time on menial tasks and reinvest these hours into your business.
A great way to do this is to sync your product data from your suppliers to your POS. This will make adding new inventory to your POS faster and ensure accuracy as you’re pulling information directly from a centralised supplier database.
Lightspeed’s B2B Catalog makes updating product information quick and easy, allowing you to access thousands of brands across numerous categories to automate your product information.
From apparel and footwear brands to bikes, sporting goods and toys, the B2B Catalog makes it simple to import product data supplied from the brand, including UPC, MSRP, description, image and name.
Thanks to the B2B Catalog, you’ll no longer have to type in product data for all your items manually. Instead, you can simply search for a product in the B2B Catalog and add it to your system.
Automatically syncing your product data makes your inventory management more efficient and has several other benefits for your business.
Easy-to-use search tools built into your POS make it quick and easy to search products by names, keywords or UPC and add them to your system – saving you and your team time and effort.
Digitally adding new products that automatically sync with your POS means you’ll never miss a sale, as you can quickly add new inventory to your system in just a few clicks.
Syncing product data directly from your suppliers to your POS ensures accuracy, so you always have confidence in your product information.
Eliminating the need to manually manage data or stock orders will boost your team’s efficiency, and they can reinvest their time focusing on your customers or other areas of your business.
4. Set reorder points for all your inventory
Setting reorder points for your inventory is a surefire way to make your life a whole lot easier. After all, optimising your inventory management is all about saving you and your team time by making your current processes more efficient.
With reorder points, you’ll assign every item in your store a minimum threshold. Once you’ve sold enough of a particular item and hit the minimum threshold, your POS will alert you that you’re running low, prompting you to place a purchase order.
How will implementing reorder points benefit your business?
Setting up reorder points for your products offers several benefits that contribute to efficient inventory management and smoother operations. Reorder points help ensure you have the right amount of inventory to meet customer demand while minimising stockouts and overstocking.
But that’s not all; there are several other key benefits of using reorder points:
Maintain optimal inventory levels: Reorder points are usually calculated based on factors like lead time and sales velocity to ensure you have enough inventory to cover the time it takes for a new order to arrive. This means you’ll avoid accumulating excess inventory by ensuring that new stock is ordered only when needed.
Streamline purchasing: Reorder points provide a clear trigger for when to initiate a purchase order, reducing the need for manual intervention, as orders are automatically generated when inventory levels reach the reorder point.
Reduce wasted space: By maintaining inventory levels based on reorder points, you can optimise your storage space and make better use of available resources.
Setting up reorder points for your inventory helps strike a balance between supply and demand. It allows you to optimise your inventory levels, reducing costs and improving overall operational efficiency in the process.
5. Use inventory management software
Choosing the right inventory management software is one of the most important things you can do to reduce the complexity of your inventory management.
Inventory management software provides the tools to optimise your inventory processes, reduce costs, improve customer service, and make informed decisions that contribute to your business’s success.
Plus, having an all-in-one solution like Lightspeed means you can manage everything from your day-to-day sales to payment processing and inventory management from one centralised system.
What are the benefits of using inventory management software?
There are several reasons why a retail store should use inventory management software, as it offers a range of benefits that significantly improve efficiency, accuracy, and overall operations.
Accurate inventory tracking and in-depth analytics
Manual data entry isn’t foolproof. Even the most meticulous staff make mistakes and are prone to human error. Therefore, inventory management software eliminates the risk of data entry errors and ensures that information is recorded accurately.
As all of your inventory is logged in the system, you’ll also be able to track inventory levels in real-time, ensuring you know exactly how much stock your store has at any moment. This accuracy reduces the risk of overstocking, stockouts, and discrepancies between records and actual stock.
With all this information in one place, it’s easy to generate various reports that provide insights into sales trends, stock performance, supplier performance, and more to guide your strategic decision-making.
These insights also empower you to continually optimise your inventory management processes, as it’s easy to identify fast-moving items, slow-moving items, and those that require attention.
Efficient order management
Inventory management software enables streamlined order processing, from order creation to fulfilment. It helps automate the order workflow, reducing manual errors and ensuring that orders are fulfilled accurately and on time.
As we touched on earlier, it’s also possible to set up and manage reorder points and automatically generate POs when inventory levels drop to a specified threshold – saving you time and minimising the risk of your products being out of stock.
Many software solutions also offer demand forecasting capabilities by analysing historical data and trends. This helps retailers make more accurate predictions about future demand, allowing for better inventory planning.
Features to look for
To ensure you’ll get the most from your inventory management software, ensure it has the following features.
Real-time visibility of all inventory, so staff can accurately see your inventory on hand even through heavy sales days.
Easy inventory transfers between locations (bonus points for tracking inventory in transit) so that you can easily move products between your stores.
Comprehensive stock reporting that can break down sales by location so you can make informed buying decisions.
Alert notifications when an item is running low or if there is a much higher sell-through rate than usual, so you don’t need to monitor your inventory constantly.
Reorder points and amounts for staple items when they hit a certain low point to save time and prevent those popular seasonless items from going out of stock.
These days, the right inventory management system can take on the brunt of your inventory-related tasks, no matter if you’re managing one store or many. With inventory monitoring and some re-ordering taken care of, what remains is for you to make merchandising decisions based on your inventory reports and manage your stock on the ground.
Understanding and Optimizing the WooCommerce Sales Funnel
Understanding how your customers navigate their buying journey is not just a luxury – it’s a necessity. This is especially true for businesses using WooCommerce, a powerful, customizable platform built on WordPress. With its flexibility comes the need for targeted strategies to guide potential customers from mere awareness of your brand to making a purchase and, eventually, becoming brand advocates.
But before you can start fine-tuning your strategies, it’s crucial to have a foundational grasp of your sales funnel. This funnel is a visualization of the journey your customers take, starting from the point they become aware of your product or service, all the way to the post-purchase phase, where they become potential brand advocates.
In this article, we’ll walk you through the various stages of a WooCommerce sales funnel and provide you with a comprehensive view of how to optimize your WooCommerce sales funnel, enriching the customer experience while also boosting your sales.
Certainly! Here’s the next section, which focuses on defining and describing each stage of the WooCommerce sales funnel without getting into optimization tips:
The Stages of a WooCommerce Sales Funnel
Understanding the steps your customers take, from initial awareness to making a purchase and beyond, is crucial for any e-commerce business. Here, we break down these steps in the context of a WooCommerce store, so you can better understand the flow your customers are likely to follow.
Awareness
The starting point of any sales funnel, the Awareness stage, is where potential customers first come across your brand. This could happen through social media, online advertisements, word-of-mouth, or search engine results. At this stage, customers are generally looking to solve a problem or fulfill a need, and they’ve just discovered that you might offer a solution.
Interest
Once customers are aware of your brand, they move on to the Interest stage, where they start actively looking into your products. This may involve reading blog posts, browsing product categories, or signing up for newsletters. At this point, they’re not just seeking a solution; they’re identifying whether you are the right fit for them.
Consideration
This is a critical juncture where customers are weighing their options. They’re likely to look at multiple products, read reviews, and even compare prices or features. This is where tools like the WooCommerce product search come in handy, allowing customers to find exactly what they are looking for among your offerings.
Intent
In this stage, potential customers show a direct intention to buy. They may add items to their cart, check out product warranties, or review return policies. It’s not a guaranteed sale yet, but they’re on the cusp of making a decision.
Purchase
This is the moment of truth; the customer has decided to buy and is ready to complete the transaction. They’ll finalize their selection, enter payment information, and confirm the order.
Retention
Once the sale is made, the funnel isn’t over. Retention involves keeping the customer engaged post-purchase. They might create an account on your website, join a loyalty program, or follow you on social media for updates.
Advocacy
The final stage turns satisfied customers into brand advocates. If they’ve had a positive experience, they’re more likely to leave reviews, recommend your products to friends, and share your content, creating a cycle that drives more potential customers to the Awareness stage.
How to Optimize Each Stage
Knowing the different stages of your sales funnel is just the first step. The next crucial part is optimizing each stage to ensure not just a smooth customer experience but also to maximize conversion rates and boost your sales. Below, we offer actionable strategies to enhance each stage of your WooCommerce sales funnel.
Optimizing Awareness
To maximize your reach during the Awareness stage, employ an integrated SEO and Social Media strategy.
SEO: Start by conducting keyword research to identify terms your target audience uses when looking for products or information. Incorporate these keywords into your website’s meta descriptions, product descriptions, and blog posts. Internal linking within your website can also improve SEO, guiding search engines and users to relevant content.
Social media marketing: Social media platforms offer powerful tools for targeting specific demographics. Create content calendars for each platform and maintain a consistent posting schedule. Paid advertising, such as Facebook ads, can also be a strategic investment for driving initial traffic to your WooCommerce store.
Optimizing Interest
Once a potential customer is aware of your store, the next step is to pique their interest and guide them to explore further.
Visuals: Invest in professional photography or even 3D imaging for your products. Consider A/B testing different images to find the most engaging visuals. Virtual tours or augmented reality experiences can also deepen engagement.
Limited-time promotions: Use urgency tactics wisely. Incorporate countdown timers next to promotional offers and consider using push notifications or targeted emails to remind users about expiring deals.
Optimizing Consideration
At this stage, potential buyers are comparing, contrasting, and considering their options, so the goal here is to provide all the information a shopper might need to make an informed decision.
Informative descriptions: Beyond listing features and specifications, explain how the product solves a problem or improves the customer’s life. FAQs can be a great way to address common questions directly on the product page.
Comparison tools: Offer the ability to compare different products side-by-side. This not only aids the customer in their decision-making but also keeps them engaged within your store instead of going elsewhere for comparisons.
Optimizing Intent
Customers in the Intent stage are ready to make a purchase but might need a final nudge. Luckily, you can use a couple of techniques to smooth the transition from intent to purchase.
Checkout simplification: Use a single-page checkout if possible and offer multiple payment gateways. Display a progress bar to show customers where they are in the checkout process and what’s left to complete.
Guest options: For customers who prefer not to create an account, offer a guest checkout option and simplify the data you collect from them to only what’s necessary for the transaction.
Optimizing Purchase
This is the stage where a transaction happens, and it should be as seamless as possible. Security is a critical element here, as customers are sharing sensitive information like credit card details and addresses. Utilizing WordPress intrusion prevention methods can reassure customers that their data is safe, ultimately contributing to a smoother transaction process.
Print order plugin: Integrate a print plugin that automatically generates invoices, packing slips, and even shipping labels. This speeds up your internal processes, making it possible to ship products quickly and keep customers informed about their order status.
Notification plugin: Use a plugin to automatically keep customers in the loop about where their order is up to with order notifications, from being processed to being sent out for delivery. Notification plugins often allow you to communicate through different communication channels, including email, SMS, and WhatsApp.
Optimizing Retention
Retaining customers is key, as 70-90% of revenue comes from renewals and upsells. Post-purchase, your goal is to keep the customer engaged to convert one-time buyers into repeat customers.
Algorithmic suggestions: Use machine learning algorithms to analyze buying habits and browsing history. Then, deliver personalized product suggestions through post-purchase emails or directly on your website.
Multi-channel support: Utilize chatbots for immediate queries and offer in-depth support via email. A 24/7 support hotline can also be a valuable asset.
Optimizing Advocacy
Finally, you want your satisfied customers to become vocal advocates for your brand. This requires you to continually nurture customer relationships.
Referral incentives: Develop a robust referral program that offers tangible rewards for both the referrer and the referred.
User-generated content: Create a branded hashtag and encourage satisfied customers to share their own photos or videos of your product in use. Feature the best contributions on your own social media channels or even on your product pages.
How to Measure Success
Optimizing your WooCommerce sales funnel is a continual process that requires regular monitoring and adjustment. To truly understand if your strategies are effective, it’s important to measure their impact.
Remember, In the quest to measure success, it’s important to balance quantitative data—numerical indicators like conversion rate or page views—with qualitative data. Qualitative data might include customer testimonials, reviews, or feedback received through surveys. While quantitative metrics offer measurable and actionable insights, qualitative data provides context that can help you understand customer sentiment and experience more deeply.
Be cautious, however, of “vanity metrics”, which are numbers that look good on paper but don’t necessarily translate to real business value. For example, having a large number of social media followers is nice, but if those followers aren’t engaging with your content or converting into customers, then the impressive numbers may not be contributing to your business goals. Always strive to focus on metrics that align with your specific objectives, and that can give you actionable insights for optimization.
Here are some ways to gauge the success of your WooCommerce sales funnel at each stage:
Awareness metrics
Traffic volume: Keep an eye on the number of visitors coming to your site. A steady increase indicates growing brand awareness.
Source of traffic: Analyze where your visitors are coming from — be it social media, search engines, or direct links — to understand which channels are most effective.
Interest metrics
Page views per visit: If people are viewing multiple pages during a single visit, they are likely interested in your offerings.
Time spent on site: The longer visitors stay on your website, the more engaged they are likely to be.
Consideration metrics
Cart abandonment rate: If customers are adding products to their cart but not making a purchase, this could indicate friction at the Consideration stage.
Conversion rate: This key metric indicates the percentage of visitors who have taken a desired action, such as signing up for a newsletter or making a purchase. Use a tool such as Conversios for even more granular data on your conversion data.
Intent metrics
Checkout abandonment rate: If customers reach the checkout page but don’t complete the purchase, investigate potential causes, such as a complicated checkout process or hidden fees.
Purchase metrics
Average Order Value (AOV): A higher AOV often indicates that customers find enough value in your products to spend more.
Customer Lifetime Value (CLV): This measures the total value a customer brings over their entire lifecycle and is a critical metric for long-term success.
Retention metrics
Repeat purchase rate: The percentage of customers who return to make another purchase.
Net Promoter Score (NPS): Measures customer loyalty and satisfaction.
Advocacy metrics
Customer reviews and ratings: The number and quality of reviews can be a good indicator of brand advocacy.
Social shares: How often your content or products are shared on social media can indicate customer engagement and advocacy.
By carefully analyzing these KPIs, you can refine your WooCommerce sales funnel to better meet the needs and expectations of your customers. This will lead to improved conversion rates and increased revenue.
Conclusion
Optimizing your WooCommerce sales funnel is not just a one-off effort; it’s an ongoing process that necessitates keen observation, adaptation, and strategic planning. From creating brand awareness to turning satisfied customers into vocal advocates, each stage of the funnel presents unique challenges and opportunities.
Employ a blend of both quantitative and qualitative metrics to gauge the effectiveness of your strategies, but steer clear of vanity metrics that do not align with your business goals. Through meticulous planning, analysis, and optimization, you can refine your WooCommerce sales funnel for increased customer satisfaction and, ultimately, greater revenue growth.
Ecommerce Pro and Ontario Business Central Collaboration
Ecommerce Pro, one of Shopify’s foremost Experts Agencies has partnered with Ontario Business Central, Canada’s top-rated business registration company. Ecommerce Pro, a highly regarded Shopify Expert Agency specializing in building and designing high-powered Shopify online stores, has long since established itself as a trusted provider of intuitive Shopify solutions and services. With a strong reputation across Canada, the USA, and beyond, Ecommerce Pro offers a comprehensive list of Shopify expertise and services, including new Shopify store launches, complete store redesigns, and seamless ecommerce platform migration to Shopify and Shopify Plus.
Ontario Business Central, a renowned provider of business registration and incorporation services, joins forces with Ecommerce Pro. With a customer-centric approach and a track record of delivering exceptional and quick results, Ontario Business Central has become the go-to choice when it comes to registering a startup business in Canada.
This partnership presents exciting opportunities that extend beyond Ecommerce Pro and Ontario Business Central, as the affiliation will enable startups to accelerate their growth and success.
Please get in touch with us at Ecommerce Pro for more information on how Ontario Business Central and Ecommerce Pro can support your business. We look forward to hearing from you!
Whether you love to check boxes and make lists, or organizing things is the bane of your existence, one thing is for certain: an unorganized inventory is like a lead weight on your retail business. Love it or hate it, you need to keep on top of your inventory management to run your business optimally and—crucially—to make more money.
We’re inventory management pros here at Lightspeed. It’s why we built our retail POS system with robust ordering and organizational tools you can take advantage of to make your inventory work for you. And it’s why we’re excited to share some of our knowledge with you so you can get your inventory in order without stress.
In this post, we’ll go over:
Need a hand managing your inventory?
Download our free inventory spreadsheet template to help you better manage your inventory, purchases and sales.
What is inventory management?
Inventory management is every step involved in ordering, organizing, storing and selling inventory.
You know what your inventory is: it’s the products you stock to sell to your customers. And you know inventory management is keeping that stock in order.
But inventory management is much more than just good organization. It also helps you manage the ordering, storage and carrying costs of your inventory, so you get a better ROI from your stock.
Airtight inventory management gives you the information you need to:
Increase your profit margins
Decrease excess stock
Cut down on your inventory costs
Work in a better, more efficient way
Effective inventory management processes can also help you answer these questions:
How much of each item is in stock?
What and when do you need to reorder?
Are you ordering too much or too little inventory?
What are your best and worst selling items?
Should you stop selling something completely?
Is your inventory storage sufficient?
This information can help you with everything from your next stock order to planning your spring promotional campaign.
Efficient inventory management is a cornerstone of any successful wholesale and retail relationship. Inventory Management Systems (IMS) are vital, monitoring inventory quantity, location and status, as well as associated shipping details. These systems automate and streamline inventory processes, reducing human error and enhancing efficiency.
Warehouse management vs. inventory management: what’s the difference?
If you’re a retailer who operates a warehouse, you’re going to need to approach your warehouse inventory differently than you do your in-store inventory.
Your in-store inventory exists to be sold. When you’re managing it, you’re looking to set it up in such a way that you can examine sales data and see what your customers are responding to and what they aren’t.
Warehouse management is about tracking and controlling the storage of inventory in a warehouse, and while there are some overlapping functions with inventory management, they’re just different enough to require separate systems. Your warehouse inventory exists to be sent to stores (or to be mailed to eCom customers)and must be set up and managed in a way where you can track exactly where it is at all times.
If you’re operating a warehouse, you can make your life easier and use a warehouse management system to integrate your warehouse with your POS. While you’ll still need to keep the different needs of each kind of inventory in mind, integration means less potential for human error in the numbers and details.
What are the four common types of retail inventory?
Not all inventory is the same. Inventory can be classified as raw materials, work in progress, finished goods and maintenance and repairs. Depending on if you primarily resell products, produce your own or offer customers a mix of both, you might have a mix of the following inventory types you’ll need to account for.
Raw materials
Raw materials are just that: raw materials. If you’re at all involved in the production of your inventory, you’ll likely have some of this on hand. Not all retailers will deal with raw materials, however.
If you have raw materials in your inventory, you’ll want to keep them separate from your finished goods’ inventory hierarchy. Goods that might be considered raw materials—lumber, for example—that you have in stock because you intend to sell them to customers are technically finished goods.
Work in progress
Like raw materials, you might have work in progress inventory on hand if you’re involved in the production of the goods you sell. If you do deal with work in progress inventory, your goal should be to ensure items don’t stay at this stage for long.
These items should also be kept separate from your finished goods’ inventory hierarchy. They’re not for sale to customers. If you have inventory in your store that you’re working to update, repair or tune up for customers, that should be classified separately from work in progress goods.
Finished goods
Finished goods are anything you have for sale in your brick and mortar store or on your eCom site. These may be goods you’ve been involved in the production for or goods you’ve ordered from a vendor.
This is the inventory that you’ll be focusing on for your retail inventory management plan.
Maintenance and repair
Say you’re a bike retailer. In addition to selling bikes and bicycle parts, you repair and upgrade bikes for your customers.
The inventory involved here isn’t the bikes themselves, though you will need a clearly defined workflow for handling and storing them to keep your customers’ goods from being damaged. It’s the tools and labor needed to work on the bikes your customers bring you.
Why is inventory management important?
Good inventory management helps you…
Maximize profits
Let’s cut to the chase: better inventory management means more money in your pocket. That’s because using inventory management techniques to increase your ROI means you always have an eye on what is going on with your inventory performance. You end up stuck with less dead stock and you can lean into what products are resonating with your customers, so you purchase more inventory that you know will return a profit.
Inventory management also helps maximize your profits by giving you the information you need to manage your expenses. Knowing your sell-through rate means you can cut down on purchasing costs, for example.
The economic order quantity formula
By taking what you learn from tracking your inventory and applying it to the economic order quantity (EOQ) formula, you can determine exactly how large an order should be to minimize storage and ordering costs.
Q=√[(2DS)/H]
Q stands for quantity. This is your EOQ-optimized order size
D is the annual demand for the product you’re measuring. You can check this data by running a report in your point of sale system
H is your yearly holding costs per unit√
You might not evaluate your optimal EOQ for every single order, but having the data you need to calculate it on hand is important for doing spot checks on your expenses.
Avoid excess stock
Dead and slow-moving stock are both a drain on your resources.
Dead stock doesn’t bring in a profit, which means you can’t replace it. It just stuffs your shelves and storage full of what your customers don’t want.
Slow-moving stock still brings in a profit, but slowly. You can replace it with new stock because it’s still bringing in cash flow, but it’s more akin to a trickle than a steady stream, and it’s in danger of becoming dead stock if customers stop resonating with it altogether.
With an optimized inventory management system, you can catch slow-moving stock before it becomes dead stock. That means you can switch promotional strategies to move that stock before it becomes a problem for your business.
Just-in-time stock management
Just-in-time (JIT) stock management is a method by which businesses time their orders so they always have just enough stock on hand to meet demand without excess or empty shelves.
You need a robust inventory management system to make a JIT method work. Without access to integrated tools and data, you could easily end up ordering too much or too little, defeating the purpose.
How does just in time inventory management improve business?
Avoiding excess stock helps your finances in two ways—you’re not tying up your cash flow in unsold stock, and you can cut down on inventory storage costs. When a significant portion of businesses are all using the method, JIT management can also have a positive environmental impact by reducing waste, as the manufacturing demand can shift at least in part to only filling what’s needed.
However, JIT inventory management can prove a liability during unexpected events. If you suddenly experience a slowdown in deliveries due to shut-downs, JIT stock management can leave you with bare shelves. If you decide to work with JIT stock management, research local suppliers you can switch to, either in a pinch or permanently.
Save time
An ideal inventory management system makes use of technology. No more pen and paper guesswork. That means you save time on your stock management tasks.
Saving time on your regular inventory management tasks means you’ve got room to launch an eCom store. And with an integrated system, you won’t even add a lot of extra inventory management work to your plate.
What are some inventory management techniques retailers should know?
Inventory management is more than just setting your categories and letting things run. There are a number of tools in your toolbox to keep things as efficient as possible.
Inventory valuation
Inventory management is also inventory costing. Knowing how much your inventory is costing you is crucial to making the right purchasing decisions. Attentive inventory management doesn’t leave this unchecked.
The retail method was designed for retailers, exactly as you’d expect. It’s the least accurate individual costing method you’re likely to use, but has value in measuring your cost to retail price ratio. It provides an approximation of your ending inventory balance by comparing the cost and price of your stock.
Because the retail method assumes all of your inventory has a consistent markup, it’s easy to calculate. You just take the total value of what you have for sale and subtract the markup: that’s the approximate cost of your inventory.
You can probably see the downsides to this method, though. If you have products with different markups (and you most certainly do) you won’t get an accurate picture of your inventory’s cost.
Weighted average method
The weighted average method is useful when the prices of the products you buy don’t change often or that much. To calculate it, you use a pool of costs for all units of a particular product. When you make a purchase, it’s added to the pool of cost and then divided by all units you have on hand.
Let’s say, for example, you bought two batches of a product in a given period. One batch cost $50.00 per unit, and the other cost $53.00
You purchase 10 of the product in each batch, so in total, you spent $1030.00 on this product’s inventory levels
In the weighted average method, you’d divide the total cost by the number of units, so you’d have purchased 20 units worth, on average, $51.50
If you sold three units, regardless of which batch they came from, you’d assume you sold three units that cost you $51.50 each to acquire
This method’s simplicity is both its greatest strength and weakness. It makes costing easy to track, because you don’t need to pay attention to which batch a unit was sold from.
But it can be less accurate than other more specific costing methods, such as FIFO and LIFO, because of the assumptions you make using it while blending your costs together.
FIFO and LIFO
FIFO stands for first in, first out. If you have a batch of sweaters, and you sell one, FIFO assumes you sold the oldest sweater from that batch you had in stock.
Let’s say you bought two batches of product in a given period. Again, one batch cost $50.00 per unit, and the other cost $53.00. You bought 10 units in each batch, so you spent $1030.00
You sell 11 units. In FIFO, you assume you sold these units from the older batch first, the one that cost you $50.00 per unit
10 of the units sold cost you $50.00 each. One cost you $53.00. In total, you sold inventory that cost you $553.00 to acquire
LIFO, on the other hand, stands for last in, first out. It’s the opposite of FIFO—for costing purposes, it assumes that the last stock you purchased is the first you’ll sell. LIFO is rarely used in retail as it doesn’t present as accurate valuations as FIFO for most retailers. In fact, the LIFO method is banned in most of the world under the International Financial Reporting Standards.
What are the advantages of FIFO?
For most retailers, FIFO offers the most accurate representation of your inventory. While you might not be selling the oldest item in a batch every single sale, you are likely to be moving older inventory before newer inventory.
Regular reconciliation
Regular inventory reconciliation means you’re always on top of what’s going on with your stock. You can catch shrinkage before it gets out of hand, giving you the chance to better pinpoint the cause before it gets out of hand.
Physical inventory counts
A full physical inventory count means counting every single unit you have on hand. While this gives you the most accurate possible picture of your inventory levels, full counts take a prohibitive amount of time to complete to do that often.
You should perform a full count at least once a year. It’s best to do them when your SKU levels are lowest, typically during the last weekend in January or the end of July.
The main problem with physical inventory counts is how long they take. That means you need to close the store or keep employees after hours, and long, boring counts can lead to errors as people (understandably) start to drift off. To speed up how long full counts take, have multiple employees counting at once using an app like Lightspeed Scanner, which automatically updates quantities in your POS to reduce errors.
Cycle counts
You can bridge the gap between your full inventory counts by cycle counting, wherein you count a smaller amount of inventory more frequently. That way, you still have an eye on your inventory levels without needing to go through your entire stock, something that’d be prohibitively time consuming to do often.
To effectively cycle count, pick a section or two of your inventory to focus on. A bookstore, for example, might decide to count all of their children’s books for a count, but leave the non-fiction books for a different cycle count.
Spot checking
When you spot check, you count the same portion of your inventory for multiple weeks in a row. This helps you find patterns—are any inventory levels experiencing more or less movement than you’d expect? Is there any unexplained shrinkage in a particular kind of product?
You might want to consider doing regular spot checks on your high-risk inventory, such as low-cost accessories that aren’t locked behind a case.
ABC analysis
ABC inventory classification—the ABC stands for activity based costing—is based on the idea that 80% of your revenue will come from the top 20% of your products.
If you were using ABC analysis, you’d sort your inventory into three buckets:
Group A: the 20% of SKUs that generate 80% of revenue
Group B: the 30% of SKUs that generate 15% of revenue
Group C: the 50% of SKUs that generate 5% of revenue
These three categories shouldn’t be customer-facing—they’re for your backend management purposes.
How is ABC analysis useful in inventory management?
ABC inventory classification can help you take more efficient inventory counts.
If you’re employing cycle counting to keep an eye on your inventory, you can use your ABC categories to ensure you’re monitoring the inventory levels of your top performers closely. While your B and C inventory is still generating revenue, they’re not your superstars. These products will need to be counted less often, though they’ll still need counting.
When selecting the products for your inventory counts, you’ll want to focus on frequently counting your group A inventory, and semi-frequently counting your B and C inventory.
Tips for an optimized POS inventory system setup
As a retailer, inventory management is the core of your business. Your POS’ inventory system should be set up in such a way that you can get information from it, not just move products. It should work for you and make your life easier instead of being an extra complication in running your business.
Here are some inventory management best practices you can follow.
Create an optimal hierarchy for your categories
Your categories should follow a consistent internal logic that doesn’t change much over time so you can get the most actionable data possible. This means you shouldn’t be overly specific with your categories—if they’ll only work for very specific products, they’re not the optimal hierarchy.
For example, let’s take an apparel retailer who sells sweaters, both turtleneck and v-neck, from three different brands.
Your top-level category should be sweaters
Your sub-categories should be turtleneck and v-neck
You do not need to make brands a category. Your POS software should track the brands for you
As a rule of thumb, never put more than 10 sub-categories under a single top-level category.
Keep your top-level categories consistent. If one category is sweaters, another could be t-shirts or skirts.
Having an optimal hierarchy for your categories means you can better compare patterns in your sales data going forward, so spend the time to set up a system you could use for years.
Count your inventory
We’ve mentioned the importance of counting inventory a few times in this guide—and that’s because we can’t emphasize it enough. Do cycle counts consistently and often. Keep an eye on your shrinkage.
Set reorder points for all your inventory
A POS like Lightspeed will store reorder points so you only need to run a report to see what products are below their desired inventory level.
Setting your reorder points means you need to spend less time trying to manually monitor what needs to be reordered for every purchase period.
Manage your purchasing from your POS system
When you use inventory management software to manage purchase orders instead of relying on pen and paper or spreadsheets, you’re less likely to make human entry errors, and you save valuable time.
Built-in purchase ordering means your inventory data is easily accessible, which means when it comes time to order you can track important information at a glance, such as:
Current inventory levels
Cost per unit
Open orders and inventory on order
Inventory in transit to your store
A platform like Lightspeed can go even further by dynamically recommending what products you need to reorder based on reorder points and historical sales volume.
In other words, it can do the forecasting for you.
Inventory management examples
Not all verticals have the same needs. Here are some examples of how different kinds of retail stores might start thinking about their most pressing inventory management needs.
Inventory management for a golf pro shop
Golf pro shop inventory management means keeping an eye on what is, ultimately, ultra-specialized sporting goods store stock.
A pro shop owner might prioritize classifying their inventory with the ABC method. Pro shop customers rarely visit the shop for the shop’s sake alone—they’re around because they’re here to play golf on the course. The pro shop needs to have their top performers on hand at all times, because if they’re sold out of something, it’s much easier for the customer to stop at a different store on their way home than to come back to the course solely to shop.
Once the inventory is classified into groups, the pro shop owner will know to keep a close eye on the reorder points of their A group inventory to prevent stockouts.
Inventory management for a fashion retailer
Stockouts are bad for any kind of retail—but a fashion retailer might approach the problem differently than a pro shop. They could use fashion retail inventory management software to monitor their turns and sell-through so they know how often to make purchases to avoid empty shelves.
Speed is also important in fashion inventory management. The quicker you can get new pieces onto the sales floor, the more you differentiate yourself from your competitors. Fashion giant Zara, for example, uses just-in-time stock management to get new pieces out fast without gambling on excess inventory.
Putting it into practice: buying inventory
So what happens once you’ve got an optimized inventory management setup?
Well, for one, buying inventory is simpler and more streamlined. You’ll have clean, actionable data on hand to make more informed decisions.
You’ll be able to check what categories and products are performing well—and which aren’t—at a glance.
Take Art for the People, an art gallerypowered by Lightspeed in Austin, Texas.Art for the People showcases 100+ artists at any given time, which means they have a complex inventory that requires careful planning.
Thankfully, they have an automated inventory management system on hand, letting them know what commission details they need to watch out for and how different artists and categories of art–and more–are performing. “We can also see if there’s a certain color, fabric or style that sells better and adjust things accordingly,” says Hallie Rae Ward, Art Business Director for Art for the People.
Like with Art for the People, setting up and maintaining your inventory through technology means having a better picture of your inventory sell-through rate. Your sell-through rate helps you predict demand; measuring it means you can build an effective ordering plan.
A high sell-through rate means your inventory is selling quickly, so you should keep an eye on products with a high rate when it comes time to put in your next order
Products with a low sell-through rate, however, need new promotional plans, be that through a focus on upselling, discounts, product bundles or otherwise
With inventory performance data on hand, you can set a budget that makes sense. You can more accurately predict demand, so you have a better picture of the ROI of your inventory.
Step 2: buy
Once you’ve planned your budget and taken a look at what inventory is performing well, it’s time to purchase stock.
Look to your point of sale system for help. A POS like Lightspeed has built-in purchase orders so you can manage this step from the same place you manage your inventory. When your stock arrives, you just need to scan it to add it to your management system.
Be sure you create any new categories you might need for your stock under the same optimal hierarchy that you established earlier!
Step 3: manage
Now that you’ve planned, purchased and received your inventory, it’s time to manage it.
Here’s how:
Set time once a week to check your inventory performance and sell-through rate. Using retail analytics software will help you out here
Make adjustments to your selling strategy as needed if your sell-through rate isn’t where you want it to be
Adjust your reorder points as needed based on how quickly or slowly your inventory is selling
Perform regular cycle counts and spot checks on your inventory to monitor levels and shrinkage
Ideally, you don’t need to be in the store to make quick adjustments. Imagine Exhibitions, a traveling exhibit company whose gift shops are powered by Lightspeed, has managing their inventory from anywhere down to a science. “If we notice a trend or something happens the day before and we’re like, ‘what happened on that?’ We can find out quickly with the system, ” says Michael Slagle, Vice President of Retail Operations at Imagine Exhibitions.
He adds, “We can get that data fast without having to go into a broader, bigger analysis. That’s one of the things that we all like about Lightspeed. That, in my opinion, is better than any of the other POS that we’re using right now. I can go on my phone and get what I need to do. I can be in an airport or something and I can just get onto my phone and see things immediately. And that’s pretty cool.”
What is the future of inventory management?
Inventory management technology looks set to evolve to be more automated and more connected.
Sales associates selling stock and managers ordering inventory will be able to do their jobs more efficiently thanks to wider adoption of tools and technologies like RFID, IOT and automation.
RFID and the Internet of Things for inventory management
RFID, or Radio Frequency Identification, is a way of locating objects (or people or animals) through radio waves. BLE, or Bluetooth Low Energy, works similarly to RFID, but is powered by a low-energy form of Bluetooth. BLE is also called active RFID, because RFID doesn’t use as much energy.
These sorts of technologies power the Internet of Things (IOT), where devices can communicate with each other through networks (either local or connected to the wider internet).
So what do these concepts have to do with the future of inventory management?
RFID and BLE already have their place in warehouses for retailers around the world. They help speed up packing and shipping by helping employees find products quicker. Some retailers are even experimenting with robotics and fully automated warehouses using RFID and similar technology.
In the near future, expect to see:
Wider adoption of RFID technology in warehouses, even for smaller businesses
The use of RFID to manage stock in stores, free up space on the sales floor for more experiential retail without sacrificing time at checkout
Automation for inventory forecasting
Many businesses already rely on some form of automation, but expect automated forecasting based on bespoke data to become more commonplace very quickly.
Demand forecasting based on seasonal fluctuations and average vendor lead times helps retailers strike a balance between lean shelves and too much stock. Expect more and more businesses to automate this forecasting to gain an edge without sacrificing time that could be spent elsewhere.
Planning for the future: creating a business continuity plan
Robust inventory management means you’re less likely to be surprised—you have a better handle on your expenses and costs, can keep an eye on your shrinkage and optimize the inventory you have on hand. You know what sells and what doesn’t, so you’re always prepared to serve your customers.
Carry that preparation forward by using what you’ve learned to start your business continuity plan. While you can’t account for everything in your forecasting, you can get yourself ready for the unexpected.
If you’re interested in learning how Lightspeed can help you manage your inventory better, let’s talk.
Prevent Accidental File Deletion and Site Downtime With New Defender Safe Repair
All new Safe Repair feature makes repairing and quarantining malicious files with Defender Pro smoother and safer than ever before for WordPress users!
View quarantined files using Defender’s Safe Repair feature from The Hub.
Defender, WPMU DEV’s powerful WordPress security plugin, recently launched its all new version 4.1, which ensures maximum compatibility with the latest version of WordPress, and — more importantly for Pro users — is designed to streamline the process of repairing and quarantining modified files, suspicious files, and offer users a safer alternative to deleting files.
In this post, we’ll focus on this new feature and cover the following areas:
Let’s jump right in…
What is Defender’s Safe Repair Feature?
As a user-driven company, we listen to what our members and users want. Especially when it comes to addressing issues, as outlined in the comments below from our Defender plugin users:
“I was running a malware scan with Defender Pro, and I think I accidentally deleted a file which I shouldn’t have. Now the website is down with a critical error.”
“Our website is currently down after removing two attached files that Defender Pro recommended removing.”
“It would be wonderful if Defender Pro allowed us to quarantine a file in addition to the options of deleting a file or ignoring it. That way if the suspicious file breaks the site, it can be restored easily instead of having to restore the entire site from a backup.”
Using the above feedback, our developers decided to improve our security plugin and add the following options to avoid serious issues and errors on users’ WordPress sites:
Repair and Quarantine/backup suspicious files so these can be restored if necessary.
Repair and Quarantine/backup modified files so these can be restored if necessary.
Defender Malware Scanning scans your entire site for suspicious code or modified files and published vulnerabilities in plugins, themes, and WordPress core.
The new Safe Repair feature applies to reported suspicious and modified files, allowing these to be quarantined, deleted, or replaced with the latest file copies from their official plugin repository.
Defender detects and warns users of plugin, theme, and core vulnerabilities. Note: the plugin shown in the above screenshot was modified for illustrative purposes.
How Does Safe Repair Work?
As explained earlier, Defender Pro’s Safe Repair feature within the Malware scanning section is designed to streamline the process of quarantining files before repairing or deleting them, offering a safer alternative to outright suspicious or modified file deletion.
Here’s how Defender Pro handles these requests from version 4.1 onward:
Suspicious Files
Defender flags PHP functions, code, and files when they vary from what is expected or when they match known issues.
Defender detects and flags files with suspicious code.
Once a flagged function or suspicious code has been verified as suspicious, Defender presents you with three actions: Ignore, Delete, or Safe Repair (note: you may need to deactivate the plugin for the ‘Delete’ option to become active).
Prior to v4.0, deleting suspicious files would occasionally cause a plugin, theme, or even the entire website to break. Often, this is caused by code from the plugin or theme itself being flagged by Defender as being suspicious.
The problem, however, appears when it’s a false positive, meaning that the flagged file isn’t malicious per se, but part of the plugin’s (or theme’s) core files and contains risky code added by the theme or plugin developer. Hence, deleting this file could cause errors on the site, break functionality, or even break the entire site.
From Defender Pro v4.1 onward, users can now opt to repair and quarantine/back up suspicious files for 30 days or more, instead of deleting the file right away. Files are stored under the new quarantine tab, allowing you to restore these if needed, including restoring files manually. This provides a fail-safe method to handle suspicious files and offers a restoration option if things go wrong or return false-positives.
Note: The Safe Repair option becomes available only if the suspicious code found differs from the plugin’s original code. Also, Safe Repair only works with WordPress.org plugins currently.
Modified Files
If code in a plugin, theme, or WordPress core file doesn’t match what is found in the official WordPress repository. Defender will flag the file as a Modified file. Restoring the original file fixes this issue.
Earlier versions of Defender (and Defender Free plugin) feature a “Restore” button in the plugin’s Malware Scanning section, which fetches a fresh file from the WordPress repository and replaces the existing file in the server directory.
Earlier versions of Defender offer only the option to restore modified files with a fresh version of the file.
However, when a file has been modified by an admin or site developer (e.g. by adding a custom code for a certain functionality), deleting or replacing the file with its original can result in the loss of custom code or functionality, and in some cases, lead to sites breaking.
In Defender Pro, Restore is now Safe Repair. This new feature not only replaces the modified file with the original file from the WordPress repository, it also adds an option to quarantine the modified file before replacing it, allowing users to restore the file if required.
The new Safe Repair feature of Defender Pro allows users to restore replaced files.
Repairing Files
Repair is a handy feature to have when a file in the server directory gets modified for any reason. It smartly fetches a fresh file from the WordPress repository and swaps it with the current file in the server directory. (See below for more details on how to use this feature.)
FREE EBOOK
Your step-by-step roadmap to a profitable web dev business. From landing more clients to scaling like crazy.
FREE EBOOK
Plan, build, and launch your next WP site without a hitch. Our checklist makes the process easy and repeatable.
Quarantined Files
Modified and/or suspicious files on your server are quarantined and moved to a remote directory (/wp-content/.defender-security-quarantine), allowing you to restore the files if needed (explained in more detail further below).
Also, make sure that you have enabled the plugin’s settings as shown below for the Safe Repair feature to work.
The above settings must be enabled for Safe Repair to work.
With Defender Pro v4.1 (minimum) installed and the above settings configured, run a fresh Malware Scan by going to Defender > Malware Scanning > New Scan…
Run a malware scan in Defender.
Once the scan is completed, check for modified or suspicious files.
A malware scan showing modified files and suspicious code detected.
Next, click on the Malware Scanning > Issues tab.
Select a file and click on the Safe Repair button.
You will be given the option to repair and/or quarantine the selected file.
We recommend quarantining files before repairing them.
Note that by default, quarantined files will remain isolated for 30 days before being automatically deleted. You can configure quarantine duration in the Malware scanning settings if you want to change this default period.
You can change the quarantine period in the Malware Scanning settings section.
Restoring Quarantined Files
You can restore quarantined files in one of two ways:
Via WordPress Admin: Go to Defender > Malware scanning > Quarantined section.
Via The Hub: Use the Quarantined Hub widget under the Security tab.
Restoring Quarantined Files Via The WordPress Admin
Quarantined files are listed under the new quarantine tab.
Defender stores all of your quarantined files in the Quarantined section.
To restore quarantined files from your WordPress admin, log into your WordPress site, and go to Defender Pro > Malware Scanning > Quarantined.
View all of your quarantined files in the Malware Scanning section.
This section lets you go through your quarantined files and choose to either restore or permanently delete these.
Restore or delete your quarantined files.
Files can also be restored manually by downloading them from /wp-content/.defender-security-quarantine.
Restoring Quarantined Files Via The Hub
The Hub’s Security tab lists your most recent quarantined files (up to a maximum of 5 files) and provides the following options, depending on whether the website is running or not.
If the website is up – files can be restored from the Hub.
If the website is down – instructions will display on how to restore the quarantined file(s) manually using FTP/SSH
Monitor quarantined files in The Hub’s Security section.
Repair Files Safely Using Defender
Defender 4.1 now lets you apply a powerful combination of quarantining and repairing modified or suspicious file threats and isolating files instead of deleting these entirely, lessening the risk of breaking your site, as quarantined files can be restored if required.
For full details on using the new Safe Repair feature and all of its options, see the Defender plugin documentation section.
Have you ever wondered how to turn more visitors into loyal customers for your Shopify store? You’re not alone! In the bustling world of eCommerce, every store owner strives to increase conversion rates and boost sales. The key lies in understanding what drives visitors to complete their purchase journey and how to optimise your Shopify store to cater to their needs.
This blog will unlock the secrets to skyrocketing your conversion rates with Shopify. From creating an irresistible shopping experience to leveraging cutting-edge tools, we’ll explore ten tactics to transform your online store into a conversion powerhouse. So, if you’re ready to take your eCommerce game to the next level, let’s dive in!
Understanding Shopify: The All-in-One Ecommerce Solution
What Is Shopify?
Shopify is a leading cloud-based eCommerce platform that empowers entrepreneurs and businesses to build, customise, and manage online stores. With its user-friendly templates and themes, Shopify simplifies the process of creating visually captivating storefronts, even for those without extensive coding knowledge.
The platform offers a comprehensive suite of features that cover every aspect of running a successful online business. From streamlined product management to ensuring secure checkout processes, mobile responsiveness, and efficient order and shipping management, Shopify provides the tools to optimise the eCommerce experience. Additionally, its integrated marketing and SEO tools, complemented by an extensive app store, open doors to further customisation, allowing businesses of all sizes to thrive in the highly competitive digital landscape.
Why Should You Use Shopify?
Choosing Shopify as your eCommerce platform has many benefits tailored to your business needs. The intuitive interface guarantees a smooth and hassle-free setup process, while Shopify’s emphasis on security and reliability ensures a safe and stable shopping environment for your customers. By offering a wide range of professionally designed templates, Shopify enables you to create visually stunning storefronts that captivate your target audience, setting your brand apart from the competition.
Moreover, Shopify’s scalable infrastructure accommodates businesses at any growth stage, allowing you to expand as your online presence flourishes seamlessly. With built-in marketing and SEO tools, you can optimise your store’s visibility, reach a broader audience, and foster brand awareness. The platform’s 24/7 customer support ensures you receive timely assistance whenever needed, making Shopify a trusted and dependable partner in all your online business endeavours.
Optimise Website Speed for Seamless Shopping
Website speed not only affects user experience but also impacts search engine rankings. Google considers page load times a ranking factor and faster sites rank higher in search results. To improve website speed, you can:
Optimise images: Use image compression tools or plugins to reduce file sizes without sacrificing quality. Smaller image files load faster, leading to quicker page loading times.
Enable caching: Utilise browser caching to store static resources like images, CSS, and JavaScript on users’ devices. When visitors return to your site, these resources are retrieved locally, reducing the need for repeated downloads and improving load times.
Content Delivery Network (CDN): A CDN consists of servers distributed across different locations worldwide. When a user accesses your website, the CDN serves content from the server nearest to their site, reducing latency and improving load times.
Mobile Responsiveness for On-the-Go Shopping
Mobile commerce is rising, and more customers are shopping on smartphones and tablets. To cater to this growing segment, ensure your Shopify store is fully responsive:
Responsive design: Use a responsive theme or template that automatically adjusts the layout and design based on the user’s screen size. This ensures a consistent and user-friendly experience across various devices.
Mobile-friendly navigation: Simplify navigation menus and buttons for easy tapping on touchscreens. Avoid pop-ups or elements that may obstruct the view on smaller screens.
Craft Compelling Product Descriptions for SEO and Sales
Product descriptions serve as a sales pitch to potential customers and play a role in search engine optimisation:
Unique and detailed: Write original product descriptions highlighting each item’s special features and benefits. Avoid using generic manufacturer descriptions. Message mining can be a powerful technique to enhance product descriptions and boost conversion rates on Shopify. Message mining involves analysing customer feedback, comments, and reviews to extract valuable insights about preferences, pain points, and desires.
Keyword research: Conduct keyword research to identify relevant search terms. Incorporate these keywords naturally into your product descriptions to improve SEO and increase the chances of your products ranking higher in search results.
Implement Customer Reviews and Testimonials for Trust
Social proof is a powerful tool for building trust and credibility:
Display reviews prominently: Showcase customer reviews and testimonials on product pages where potential buyers can easily see them.
Encourage reviews: Send follow-up emails to customers after purchasing, requesting them to leave a review. Offer incentives, such as discount codes or loyalty points, to encourage more feedback.
Streamline Checkout Process for Higher Conversions
The checkout process is a critical stage where cart abandonment often occurs. To streamline the process and boost conversions:
Guest checkout option: Provide a guest checkout option so customers can purchase without creating an account. Requiring registration may deter some users from completing their purchases.
Progress indicators: Display a progress indicator or steps in the checkout process, showing customers how many steps are left before completing the order.
Autofill and autocomplete: Implement autofill for shipping and billing addresses to save users time and reduce friction during checkout.
Utilise Abandoned Cart Recovery for Recapturing Sales
Cart abandonment is a common occurrence, but you can recover some of those lost sales by implementing an abandoned cart recovery strategy:
Automated email reminders: Set up automated email sequences to remind customers about their abandoned carts. To entice them back, personalise these emails and consider offering incentives, such as discounts or free shipping.
Exit-intent pop-ups: Use exit-intent pop-ups to capture visitors’ email addresses before they leave the site. This way, you can follow up with personalised cart recovery emails.
Create Urgency with Limited-Time Promotions and Discounts
Limited-time promotions and discounts can create a sense of urgency and encourage immediate action from potential buyers:
Flash sales: Offer time-sensitive discounts for a few hours or a day to create a sense of urgency and drive quick purchases.
Countdown timers: Use countdown timers to display the time left for a special offer or promotion. This can motivate customers to act before the deal expires.
Display Trust Signals for Enhanced Credibility
Trust signals reassure customers that your store is safe and trustworthy:
SSL certificates: Secure your website with an SSL certificate to encrypt data and provide a secure connection between your server and customers’ browsers. This is particularly important for protecting sensitive information during the checkout process.
Security badges: Display security badges from reputable providers, such as Norton Secured or McAfee Secure, to convey that your site is regularly scanned for malware and is safe to use.
Accepted payment logos: Show logos of well-known and trusted payment methods to instil confidence in customers during checkout.
Personalisation and Targeted Recommendations for Tailored Shopping
Personalisation enhances the shopping experience and increases the likelihood of conversions:
Personalised product recommendations: Use data on customers’ past purchases and browsing behaviour to offer tailored product recommendations. These recommendations can be showcased on the homepage, product pages, or email marketing.
Dynamic content: Utilise dynamic range that changes based on the user’s preferences and behaviour. For example, you can display different homepage banners or offers depending on the customer segment they belong to.
A/B Testing and Continuous Optimisation for Ongoing Success
A/B testing is a data-driven approach to optimise your website for higher conversions:
A/B testing elements: Experiment with different variations of components such as headlines, button colours, and call-to-action text to see which version performs better.
Analyse results: Monitor the results of A/B tests and use analytics tools to understand how changes impact user behaviour and conversion rates.
Continuous optimisation: Implement the findings from A/B tests and refine your website regularly. eCommerce is a dynamic environment; ongoing optimisation is vital to staying competitive.
Elevate Your Shopify Store and Convert Visitors into Loyal Customers!
Unlock the secrets to skyrocketing your Shopify store’s conversion rates with these ten tips. As the all-in-one eCommerce solution, Shopify empowers you to build visually captivating storefronts. At the same time, its integrated marketing tools and extensive app store enable you to customise and optimise your online business. From optimising website speed and mobile responsiveness to utilising customer reviews, implementing abandoned cart recovery, and creating urgency with limited-time promotions, these strategies will turn more visitors into loyal customers.
Ready to take your eCommerce game to the next level? Implement these tactics and watch your sales soar! If you have any questions or need further assistance, feel free to contact us here at Blend.
Want to soar above your competitors?
CVO is the way to do it. As CVO and Shopify experts, we work with large eCommerce brands like yours, increasing their metrics and revenue. Enquire today to find out how we can help you.
How to Host Multiple Websites on One Server (Beginner’s Guide)
Do you want to host multiple WordPress websites on a single server?
You can easily manage multiple domains from a single place by hosting them on one server. Plus, it helps save costs as you won’t need to purchase separate servers for each website.
In this article, we will show you how to host multiple websites on one server.
Why Host Multiple Websites on One Server?
If you’re planning on expanding your business from one website to more, then it’s a feasible option to host them on a single server.
That’s because it is easier to manage them from a single place. It can be time-consuming and inconvenient to log in and out of multiple WordPress websites on different servers. If all your websites are on one server, then you can simply switch between them from the same dashboard.
Hosting multiple sites on a single server will also help save and be more economical for your business.
Many hosting providers offer dedicated hosting where you have full control over the server and allow you to set up more than 1 website.
Instead of purchasing individual hosting plans for each site, you can choose a plan that allows multiple WordPress sites on one server. This will also allow you to fully utilize your server resources.
That said, let’s see how you can host multiple websites on one server.
Select a Hosting Service and Buy Domains
Before you can add any website to a server, the first step is to purchase a hosting service and domain names for your websites.
Choosing a WordPress Hosting Provider
There are many services to choose from, but we recommend Hostinger. It is a fast-growing web hosting provider that offers different types of hosting options.
For instance, you can get premium shared hosting, WordPress hosting, VPS hosting, cloud hosting, managed hosting, and more.
In the Hostinger WordPress Starter plan, you can add up to 100 websites, get free email, an SSL certificate, unlimited bandwidth, managed WordPress, and more. You also get 1 free domain name, but you’ll need to purchase other domains.
The best part is that WPBeginner users can get up to 81% OFF on WordPress hosting plans. Simply click the link below to claim the offer.
Another advantage of using Hostinger WordPress plans is that WordPress comes pre-installed. You don’t have to manually install WordPress for your websites.
If you’re looking for alternatives, then you can also use Bluehost or SiteGround to add multiple sites to one server.
Purchasing Domain Names for Your Website
After choosing a web hosting platform, the next step is to purchase domain names that you’ll need to host on a server.
Hostinger lets you buy a new domain or transfer an existing domain. To purchase a domain, simply go to the ‘Domains’ tab from your Hostinger dashboard.
From here, simply select the ‘Get a new domain’ option.
Next, you can search for a domain name.
Go ahead and enter a keyword or brand name in the search bar.
From here, you’ll see a list of URL options along with different domain extensions and prices.
Simply select an option you want and click the ‘Buy domain’ button.
Next, a popup will open with different billing periods for your domain name.
Go ahead and choose a billing period.
After that, you can complete the checkout process by choosing a payment method and purchasing the domain name.
You can repeat this process to purchase as many additional domains as you’d like.
Alternative Method: If you don’t want to buy a domain from Hostinger, then there are many domain registrars that allow you to register a domain name with ease. For instance, you can use Domain.com as it offers top-level extensions, an easy domain registration process, and a bunch of features.
Adding Multiple WordPress Sites to One Server
After selecting a hosting provider and buying domain names, you can add multiple sites to one server.
From your Hostinger dashboard, you can go to the ‘Websites’ tab and click on the + Create or migrate a website option.
Next, Hostinger will walk you through the process of creating a new website on the same server.
For instance, you can select a website type. This includes an online store, blog, business, portfolio, and other types.
After that, you’ll need to select whether you’d like to create or migrate a website.
If you already have a website on another hosting platform, then you can transfer it to Hostinger. Simply select the ‘Migrate my website’ option and follow the steps.
For this tutorial, we will select the ‘Create a new website’ option.
Next, you can select a platform to build a new website. Hostinger will offer 2 methods, where you can use WordPress with artificial intelligence (AI) or use Hostinger’s website builder with AI to create a site.
Go ahead and choose the ‘WordPress with AI’ option.
From here, you’ll need to enter login details for your account.
Simply choose a language, select an administrator email, enter a password, and click the ‘Continue’ button.
In the next step, Hositnger will ask you to add WordPress plugins to your site.
You can simply select the plugins you want to install and click the ‘Continue’ button.
After that, you will need to select a website design.
Hostinger will load the default theme, but you can click the ‘Browse more templates’ option to view more designs.
From here, you can choose a different theme for your website.
You can also click the ‘Show More’ button at the bottom to load more templates.
Once you’re done, simply choose a design and click the ‘Select’ button.
Next, Hostinger will ask you to enter a brand name and a description of your business.
It uses ChatGPT to generate a few pieces of content for your website. Once you are done, simply click the ‘Continue’ button.
You can also skip this step by entering a name and brief description and then clicking the ‘Skip, I will write content later’ option at the bottom.
After that, you’ll need to enter a name for your website. Hostinger will show 2 options, you can either select the ‘buy a domain or ‘use an existing domain’ option.
If you haven’t purchased a domain name yet, then you can select the ‘Buy a Domain’ option and get one with Hostinger.
However, if you already have multiple domains on another provider, then you can select the ‘Use an Existing Domain’ option.
For this tutorial, let’s choose the ‘Use an Existing Domain’ option.
Next, you will need to enter the domain name and click the ‘Continue’ button.
A popup window will now open with details for pointing the domain to Hostinger nameservers.
You can see your domain’s existing nameservers and the required nameservers you’d need to change in the domain registration service. The instructions will vary depending on the domain registrar you’re using.
If you need help with domain transfer, then Hostinger offers step-by-step guides and documentation. You can also reach out to their support for further assistance.
Note: You’ll also need to ensure that the domain you’re transferring is not locked by the current registrar and that 60 days have passed since initial registration.
After noting down the nameservers, you can click the ‘Continue’ button.
Hostinger will then start to set up your website. It will take a few minutes for the setup to complete.
The final step is to click the ‘Connect’ button under the Connect Your Domain option after you’ve set nameservers in your domain registrar.
Once connected, you can view your website from the Hostinger dashboard.
Simply visit the ‘Websites’ tab to see your newly added site.
You can now repeat these steps and click the ‘+ Create or migrate a website’ option to add as many websites as you want to a single server.
Bonus: How to Create More Sites Using WordPress Multisite
A WordPress multisite allows you to run and manage multiple websites from a single WordPress installation. You’ll see multisite networks used by large corporations that need separate domains for each department, universities and schools, news outlets, online businesses, and more.
There is a slight difference between hosting multiple sites on a single server and a WordPress multisite.
In a multisite, you have the same parent domain (example.com), and the new sites are subdomains (blog.example.com). They can share plugins, users, and other elements based on your settings.
On the other hand, hosting multiple sites on a single server means you have different domain names for each website. They’re all completely separate from one another.
You can easily set up a WordPress multisite using any web hosting service, including Hostinger. Once it’s set up, you’ll be able to add multiple sites to the network and manage them from the same dashboard on one server.
A Web Designer’s Guide to Project Schedules (2023)
Planning is an essential part of any successful web design project. By outlining the scope of your project at its onset, you will be better equipped to identify and avoid roadblocks that would otherwise steer your progress off track.
One of the most effective tools for planning your project is the schedule. A project schedule allows you to outline, assess, and communicate the essentials of a job, and includes its deliverables, timeframe, and the resources allotted to individual tasks.
While several automated project planning tools exist, they often have expensive monthly fees. If you don’t want to spend your hard-earned revenue on automated software, you can easily create project schedules with any basic worksheet software you may already have access to.
This article will walk you through the importance of project scheduling, offer you a few tips for creating your own schedule, and share some scheduling templates that you can start using in your web design or development projects today.
The importance of project schedules
Before we dive into the how-tos of scheduling, I want to stress the influential role that scheduling plays in the success of your web design projects.
Scheduling is all about keeping your workflow as organized as possible. At its core, it allows you to define your project’s final deadline and determine the individual milestones that must be met in order to hit that deadline. Identifying these key dates from the start will help keep you and your team accountable for the delivery of all project components. As you progress through these milestones, you’re able to track, evaluate, and reforecast the timeline and budget associated with your project.
Schedules aren’t only valuable for internal usage either — they also play an important role in client management. These planning documents help you establish clear expectations with your clients about the anticipated milestones and workflow of their project. Plus, getting client buy-in on your schedule means you can more easily anticipate overrun costs or scope creep.
Now that we’ve covered why schedules should become a critical part of your team’s project management workflow, let’s dive into some tips for creating your own project schedule.
Want to spruce up your mockups? Check out our list of funny lorem ipsum generators.
How to create a project schedule
Regardless of how excited you are to jump right in, you should always start your new projects by creating a comprehensive schedule. Not sure where to start? I’ve outlined a seven-step framework for creating your project schedules below:
Identify individual deliverables — Begin by writing down your final deliverable (i.e. a website or app) then work your way down and create a list of all sub-deliverables that need to be built to complete the final deliverable. For example, if your final deliverable is a website, your sub-deliverables could include wireframes, high-fidelity prototypes, copy, mobile designs, and more. Listing out your individual project components will help you get a better sense of the scope of your project.
Define the sequence of activities — For all the deliverables you listed, identify their immediate predecessors and successors. Using the same example as above, we know that before we can start development, we need approved high-fidelity prototypes and before we can prototype, we need approved wireframes. This sequential organization will help you define the flow of the project and give you an idea of when you need to loop in certain members of your team.
Determine the resources required — Now that you have listed out the flow of your project, it’s time to forecast the amount of resources you need to accomplish the project. This includes the time needed to complete each deliverable of the project, as well as the individual contributors or teams you’ll need to complete specific elements of the project.
Identify external factors that could influence your project — While you are outlining your resources, you should try to identify any external factors that could influence the flow of your project. These factors will range from client to client but could include other projects you or your team members are working on, or upcoming vacations.
Establish key milestones and final deadlines — After compiling your deliverables and resources, it’s time to start scheduling the activities of your project. Using the sequence of activities and the timeframes previously defined, you should try to identify key milestones for your project. These milestones should range from the dates you intend to complete specific deliverables, to the periods when you check in with your client and your own team to solicit feedback.
Create your schedule — Once you’ve mapped out all of the above, you should have enough information and details to create your schedule(s). In the following section, I’ll go over how you can use this information to create your work breakdown schedule and your Gantt chart.
Monitor and reforecast — Creating your schedule is just the first step of project planning. You should be consistently monitoring the progress of your project and assessing that progress against what you have in your schedule. Doing this will allow you to stay on top of your workflow and reforecast your deadlines if needed.
3 web design project schedule formats
There are a few different templates you can use when scheduling your web design projects. Below, I’ve included three schedule formats and explained when it’s best to use each.
1. Work breakdown schedule
A work breakdown schedule (WBS) is an outcome-oriented planning tool that can be used to visually organize the scope of a project into manageable chunks. That means rather than focusing on the actions needed to be taken, this scheduling tool focuses on the end deliverables. The layout of a WBS is very similar to your standard wireframe, but rather than the pages and folders of a website, you will map out the project by its individual components.
A typical WBS starts at the top-level deliverable (a finalized website in our example above) and is broken down into individual sub-deliverables. Sub-deliverables should be organized into what are called “work groups,” which can be defined categorically by discipline (if you work solo) or department (if you work in a team environment). As you can see above, one of the project’s work groups is “design assets,” and sub-deliverables include product page layout, collections page layout, and homepage layout.
The structure of a WBS relies on something called the 100% rule. Under this rule, the final deliverable represents 100% of your work and costs. For each subsequent sub-deliverable, you should apply a percentage value associated with the total amount of work and the budget. The value of all sub-deliverables within a work group should add up to the total percentage of that work group, while all work groups combined should add up to 100% together.
The WBS is largely used for internal purposes and is great for strategically defining and organizing your project from a high-level. It provides a detailed overview that can help you identify risks in your workflow before they happen. For example, if a sub-deliverable is running behind schedule, you just need to look at your WBS to identify what other components of the project will be impacted by that delay. Since the WBS allows you to categorically estimate the cost and effort associated with all facets of your project, it should only be used internally (unless you want your client to be privy to your margins).
The insight you get from mapping out your entire project with a WBS will put you in a better position to accurately build out your project timeline in a Gantt chart.
The Gantt chart is one of the most popular scheduling documents for managing projects in the creative industry. If you’ve never used one before, a Gantt chart is a simple two-dimensional schedule that outlines the anticipated timeline of your client’s project. They are most suitable for jobs spanning a few months.
Unlike the WBS, Gantt charts are generally used for client-facing situations as they only showcase project deliverables and timeframes for completion, with no mention of cost information. The structure of a Gantt chart is relatively simple: deliverables are organized across the left-most column of the chart, while the top row is used to illustrate the timeframe of the project across those deliverables. The timeframe is organized by deliverable, using the sequential order we defined above. This will help you organize the flow of the project and give you an idea of when you need to loop in certain members of your team.
Here’s a quick breakdown of the components that should always be included in your Gantt chart:
Individual deliverables, their progress, and their corresponding deadlines
Owners/contributors of those deliverables
Timeframes for individual deliverables
Key milestones like deadlines, approval dates, and feedback period
Progress note and updates section
Once you and your team feel comfortable with the schedule, you should send it over to your client for final approval before starting any work. They will review it and let you know if any problems exist. Once they’ve signed off on the schedule, keep their approval email in your records to safeguard you from any clients demanding additional work not included in the schedule.
While Gantt charts can be your go-to schedule for client-facing emails, they also play an important role internally for tracking the progress of sub-deliverables and anticipating cost overruns. To make your Gantt chart more useful for cost-tracking, add an additional column beside your sub-deliverables to show the total amount of billable hours used thus far by you or your individual contributors. From there you can simply compare the total billable hours column against the forecasted schedule and budget to identify any risk of cost overrun.
3. Simple update schedule
Clients are busy people and they don’t want to spend their time digging through an email chain to find the schedule that you attached twelve emails ago — and, as their consultant, you shouldn’t force them to. That’s why it’s your job to proactively update them regarding the progress of their project on a regular basis.
When giving these updates, whether to show headway or reflect scheduling changes, you might feel required to provide them with a new version of the Gantt chart you created at the project’s onset. While updating the Gantt chart is vital for your internal records, it isn’t necessary to share that document for simple scheduling updates or check-ins.
Instead of sending them your revised Gantt chart every time it is updated (which can lead to version control issues), it’s good practice to simply include a barebones version of your schedule within the email itself. That way your client can easily review your schedule updates and reply to your message, regardless of where they are or what device they are using.
Here’s an example of a simple email you could send your client when you’ve updated your project schedule:
Hey CLIENT,
Just wanted to touch base with regards to our project. Given the progress we’ve seen over the last couple of weeks, I’ve included an updated schedule for you to review and approve.
PROJECT NAME SCHEDULE
Line Item
Delivery deadline
Wireframe v1
EOD, May 14
Client review/feedback
May 15
AGENCY revises WF, sends v2
EOD May 16
Client review/approval
May 17
AGENCY to create copy
EOD May 18
AGENCY designs v1
EOD May 22 (2 days)
Client review/feedback
May 23
AGENCY revises design, sends v2
EOD May 24
Client review/feedback
May 29
AGENCY finalizes design, sends v3
EOD May 30
Client review/approval
May 31
AGENCY code v1, send preview link
June (2 days)
Client review/feedback
June 5
AGENCY revises, sends v2 (FINAL)
June 6
Let me know if the revised timeline looks good to you. Otherwise, do not hesitate to contact me if you have any questions regarding the updates above.
Thanks,
YOUR NAME
Take your website project plans to the next level
Now that you’ve seen the value that a comprehensive schedule can bring your web design and development projects, you’re free to take your project planning to the next level.
We’ve put together a project planning toolkit that includes templates of the schedule styles covered above. Feel free to download and use our project planning templates to help you create project schedules of your own. And as always, let us know what you think in the comments below!
Discover the top managed WordPress hosting solution for your website. This comprehensive WP Engine review provides insights into the features of this renowned managed WordPress host.
WP Engine is one of the longest-running WordPress hosts in the game. Although not the first, they are one of the first names that comes to mind when you think of managed WordPress hosting.
WP Engine is dedicated to providing fast speeds, tough security, and helpful support. We take a detailed look at these offerings to see how they stack up.
Keep reading our in-depth WP Engine review to learn more about what this host offers, see its dashboard in action, and look at some real-time performance data.
Let’s dive in!
WP Engine Review: What Does This Managed WordPress Host Offer?
WP Engine is exclusively a WordPress hosting provider. This means they only offer hosting services to WordPress sites, including eCommerce sites that use WooCommerce.
Not only is there a team of WordPress experts that always have your back, but the hosting is fine-tuned to help you get the best performance and security out of your site.
Before we dive deep into our hands-on look at WP Engine’s managed WordPress hosting, let’s do a quick overview of some of the most important features this host offers.
24/7 customer support from WordPress experts
An extensive WordPress knowledge-base
Free SSL, firewall, and global CDN
Staging and development environments (including local development)
Automated website backups
Beginner-friendly website migrations
Free StudioPress WordPress themes
It’s also worth mentioning how easy it is to grow your site with WP Engine. Since they offer WooCommerce and dedicated WordPress hosting, you can grow with them as your website evolves without having to go through the hassle of a migration.
WP Engine: The Core Features
Now that you know a little bit about what WP Engine offers, let’s explore some of their main offerings in depth.
24/7/365 Customer Support
Every WP Engine plan comes with 24/7 support from their team of WordPress experts.
The support channels you get access to depend on the plan you choose. With the lowest tier, you only get chat support, while every other pricing tier gets you live chat and phone support. Enterprise-level users get access to priority support and typically have a dedicated support agent.
If you’re the kind of person who prefers to do things on your own, then you can take advantage of the extensive support resources available on the site. There’s a searchable database of articles to help you do everything from setting up your site to troubleshooting common issues.
Overall, their support team was fast, helpful, and provided in-depth responses to the variety of questions I asked. I also pinged the support team at different times of the day and night, and they were always ready with a response.
You can access support directly from your hosting dashboard. Live chat is available through the support chatbot, or you can opt to chat directly with an agent by typing support.
Proactive and Enhanced Security Measures
WP Engine offers a robust set of security features on all plans, from continuous monitoring, to threat detection, and automated updates. Their goal is to make sure an attack never reaches your site in the first place.
Here are some of the security features across all plans:
Automated PHP and WordPress core and theme updates
Free SSL certificates
Multi-factor authentication for users
Real-time security threat monitoring
WP Engine custom firewall to automatically direct traffic (good and bad)
Disallowed plugins that open your site to vulnerabilities
Beyond the standard WordPress security best practices, WP Engine includes a premium add-on called Global Edge Security. Think of this like standard WordPress security on steroids.
Here’s what it includes:
WordPress-specific Web Application Firewall (WAF): A firewall completely tailored to the needs of WordPress, while keeping you safe from new security risks.
DDoS attack mitigation: Uses Cloudflare’s Global Anycast network absorbs any attacks to keep your site online.
Cloudflare CDN integration: This premium version of Cloudflare’s CDN caches your content across their entire global network for improved performance and security.
Argo Smart Routing: Real-time detection of network congestion, so your traffic is always routed through the most efficient network path.
There’s an overlap with both speed and security with Global Edge Security active, which can be a nice benefit.
Automated WordPress Website Backups
WP Engine also includes daily automated website backups. You can find all of your backups within your hosting control panel, so you can easily restore your site to a previous version.
There’s also the option to back up your site manually. If you want to use a third-party WordPress backup tool to have even more control over your backups.
Site Staging and Local Development Tools
WP Engine offers a variety of tools and features that make site building fast and efficient. Whether you’re launching a new WordPress site, or migrating a site over, there are a ton of tools to help manage your workflows.
You’ll find support for staging sites, even on the cheapest plan. You can test new site changes with the staging environments before pushing them to your live site.
Another development option available is independent environments. Here, you can copy a version of your live site (or create a new site from scratch), to make changes. Since this isn’t connected to your live site, it offers a creative playground for development and testing.
The only thing you can’t do with staging is upload a non-WordPress site.
Another unique tool offered by WP Engine is their local WordPress development tool. You install it locally on your computer and can create and build staging sites online or off. It also lets you deploy your new changes in a single click without having to install WordPress again.
Beginner-Friendly Website Migrations
If you’re bringing an existing WordPress site over to the platform, then there’s a free WordPress plugin you can use to automate the migration.
Once installed, this plugin will do all of the technical migration work for you so that you can focus on other more fun parts of the migration. This tool even supports multiple migrations.
Free WordPress Themes
One unique feature that WP Engine offers is free WordPress themes with every plan. When you sign up, you’ll get access to 10 free WordPress StudioPress themes powered by the Genesis framework.
These themes are already optimized for high performance and SEO the moment you install them. Plus, the designs are modern and can be customized to suit almost any site you can think of. StudioPress was already one of the top WordPress theme shops out there until they were acquired by WP Engine.
If you want access to even more site-building features, you can opt for the Genesis Pro add-on during sign-up. This gives you access to Genesis blocks and even more premium themes.
WP Engine Speed and Performance Stack
WP Engine is known for its high speeds and website performance. Their goal is to help your site run at peak performance; nothing less will do.
A lot of this starts at the foundation. They partner with both Google Cloud Platform and Amazon Web Services for web servers. Plus, every server utilizes their use proprietary caching technology called EverCache.
On top of that, every plan gets access to a global CDN, along with a network of data centers around the world.
Real-World Performance Metrics
All of that is great, but how does WP Engine perform in real time?
To see how WP Engine performs, I used the Astra theme with an image-heavy demo site imported.
I used GTMetrix with the server location in Vancouver, CA to test. Then, I ran five separate tests and averaged the results.
Based on the average, the test site had a Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) time of 364 ms, which is very fast.
WP Engine Pricing and Plans: Choosing the Right WordPress Hosting Package
WP Engine has five different pricing tiers for its WordPress hosting.
Each plan offers similar features but caters to different website owner needs, so you’ll want to make sure you’re choosing the right plan for your website or websites.
Every plan includes must-have features like 24/7 customer support, auto-renewed SSL, automatic backups, a global CDN, and caching. Plus, you get access to 10 premium WordPress themes and one-click staging environments.
Essentially, you get everything you need for a fast and secure WordPress site, no matter which hosting plan you choose.
The main differences between the plans are the number of sites and visitors supported, and the amount of storage and bandwidth you get.
There’s really no “right” plan for everyone, but instead, the best plan is based on how many sites you manage and your traffic needs.
For most users the Professional plan will probably be the best option, since it supports more traffic and offers higher levels of bandwidth. Note there is an additional $1-2 cost for every 1,000 visits over your plan.
Full WP Engine Pricing Breakdown
Keep in mind that for our WP Engine hosting review, we’ve been using the Startup plan, which starts at $20 per month when paid yearly.
When you sign up for a plan, there are also additional add-ons you can purchase for your hosting plan. These costs can add up quickly, so make sure you’re aware when completing your purchase.
A lot of these add-ons pack some great features, so we’ll highlight each one.
First, you have the site monitoring add-on. This gives you real-time updates on your site’s performance and will give you alerts if any errors are detected on your site. Without this add-on, you still have standard monitoring features that monitor for things like security threats.
Next, you can choose to add plugin management. Automated core and theme updates are already included without this add-on.
After that, you can add Global Edge Security. Essentially, this makes your site impenetrable. You get additional DDoS protection, app-layer protection, and a performance booster through the CloudFlare CDN. Without this, your site is still very secure with the included WordPress-specific security measures.
You can also add additional sites to your plan and add even more site-building features with the Genesis Pro add-on. This gives you access to Genesis Blocks Pro, the Genesis Framework, and a larger collection of StudioPress themes. If you’re going to be building multiple sites from scratch, then this can be very useful.
Getting Started with WP Engine: Step-by-Step Guide
Even with the extensive feature set that WP Engine offers, getting started with WP Engine is quite easy. After you’ve selected a plan and have an active account, you can create your new WordPress site directly from the hosting dashboard.
Click Add now under the Add New Site section
Click Get Started in the Build a new site section
Choose a blank install or a Genesis starter site
Name your site and click Add site
If you’re building a site using a temporary domain name, you can start building your new site immediately. Once it’s finished, all you need to do is add the domain to your site and point it at your registrar to your server.
Migrating an existing WordPress site will follow a similar process as above. But, you’ll also be using the free WP Engine migration plugin on your existing website. The entire process is fairly straightforward and you’ll be guided through every step.
Navigating the WP Engine Dashboard: An In-Depth Look
When you log in to your hosting dashboard, you’ll see a quick overview of the sites you manage and general site information like the bandwidth consumed, the number of visits, and the WordPress and PHP versions you’re running. If any updates are needed, you can click over to the Needs updates tab to quickly update your site, themes, or plugins.
For individual site management, all you need to do is click on one of the sites you manage.
Here you’ll be able to do things like:
Check if your themes and plugins are up to date
Add new domains to your site
Create and manage redirect rules
Restore, manage, or manually create backups
View your website error logs
Create SFTP users to let users securely connect to your server
Enable developer GitPush access
Manage your site SSL certificates
Password protect your WordPress site
Reset your file permissions
Activate WordPress multisite
Clear your website caches
Create new staging and development environments
For those who are launching a WordPress website for the first time, there’s a useful checklist that’ll walk you through the process of getting your site ready for launch. Even seasoned WordPress pros might find the checklist helpful.
Many of your dashboard’s other sections are dedicated to exploring other WP Engine offerings.
For example, you can upgrade to WooCommerce-specific hosting if you’re moving into the eCommerce space. You can also explore the add-on library to purchase add-ons you didn’t add to your plan during sign-up.
WordPress Developer Tools
In the developer tools section, you’ll find a variety of tools to help speed up your development workflows. These tools help with SSH access, staging environments, GIT connections, and more.
Account Management
WP Engine keeps regular logs of your account activity and active user accounts. This helps you see any changes that were made, along with what users made those changes.
They also support Single Sign-On (SSO) and Seamless login, which is useful if you want to quickly and securely log in to your WordPress dashboard.
Final Thoughts on WP Engine Managed WordPress Hosting
Overall, WP Engine is a great choice for your website as long as you have the budget.
Their performance is rock solid, site security is a priority, and building out new websites is a breeze with the bundled StudioPress themes, as well as staging and development environments.
The main drawbacks are the added costs for all the hosting add-ons. Now, you don’t need these to run a successful site. But, some other managed WordPress hosts do bundle things like plugin updates and site monitoring into their regular plans.
With that said, WP Engine does offer a 60-day money-back guarantee. This gives you ample time to see if this host meets your website needs.
Every savvy retailer knows reducing risk is as important as growing sales. But what shields your business from unexpected mishaps while you focus on online sales and in-store foot traffic? Enter retail insurance.
Think of retail shop insurance as your business’s safety net. It’s there to catch those unexpected challenges before they threaten your business revenue.
Whether you host occasional pop-up shops or run a thriving ecommerce store, the right retail insurance helps your business run smoothly.
Here, we’ll demystify retail store insurance, outline its key components, and explain why it’s essential for every retailer.
What is retail insurance?
Retail insurance is a type of commercial insurance designed for retail businesses.
Retail insurance helps protect businesses from risks that can range from property damage to legal liabilities.
Some standard insurance for a retail store includes:
Workers’ compensation insurance
Business interruption insurance
General liability insurance
Cyber liability insurance
Property insurance
Crime insurance
The specific coverage a retail business may need depends on several factors, including:
Physical business location
Type of products sold
Size of the business
It’s best to work with a licensed retail insurance agent to identify a policy that fits your unique needs.
Why retail insurance is important
Retail business insurance is important for managing risk and safeguarding the financial health of your business.
Here are seven reasons why retail business insurance is important:
1. Protection from financial losses
Whether it’s damage to property, theft, or a lawsuit, insurance covers these costs and prevents a business from facing crippling expenses.
2. Legal requirements
In some states, certain types of insurance, like workers’ compensation, are obligatory for businesses. Noncompliance may lead to fines, penalties, or legal consequences.
3. Improves credibility
Insurance makes a business look more legitimate and trustworthy in the eyes of stakeholders, customers, and suppliers. It shows a business is prepared to handle unexpected events properly.
4. Protection from lawsuits
Legal disputes are common in retail. Whether it’s an on-site injury or an issue with the product sold, insurance can cover legal fees and potential settlements, protecting the business from costly settlements.
5. Business continuity
If an unexpected event like a fire or flood prevents your business from operating as usual, you’ll receive compensation for lost income.
6. Employee protection
If employees suffer a work-related injury, there’s coverage for medical costs and lost wages. This not only protects employees but also shields the business from potential lawsuits from injured workers.
7. Peace of mind
Running a retail business means managing multiple tasks and responsibilities. Knowing that potential risks are covered gives entrepreneurs peace of mind so they can focus on growth and operations.
While retail insurance involves an upfront cost, the potential financial, legal, and reputational damages it prevents make it an essential investment.
What insurance is needed for a retail store
Retail store owners need to choose insurance that matches their unique needs and requirements.
Here’s a breakdown of 11 different types of retail insurance that a retail store may need:
1. General liability insurance
This is one of the most basic types of insurance all businesses should consider. It protects against bodily injury, property damage, and personal injury claims. For instance, if a customer slips and falls in your store, general liability insurance can cover their medical expenses and legal costs if they sue.
2. Property insurance
This covers damage to or loss of business property, which includes the physical building (if you own it) and its contents, such as inventory, fixtures, and equipment. It protects against perils like fire, storms, theft, and vandalism.
3. Business interruption insurance
This coverage, often a part of property insurance or a business owners policy, compensates for lost income and fixed expenses if you cannot operate due to a covered event like a fire or natural disaster.
4. Workers’ compensation insurance
If you employ staff, you’ll likely need workers’ compensation insurance. It covers medical expenses and a portion of lost wages if an employee gets injured or sick due to their job.
5. Commercial auto insurance
If your store owns and uses vehicles for business purposes, like delivery, you’ll need a commercial auto insurance policy to cover potential liabilities from accidents involving those vehicles.
6. Crime insurance
This protects your business from losses due to business-related crimes such as theft, fraud, or forgery.
7. Cyber liability insurance
If you conduct sales online or store sensitive customer information electronically, this insurance can cover costs related to data breaches, including notification costs, public relations efforts, and legal fees.
8. Equipment breakdown insurance
This covers the repair or replacement of equipment that breaks down, such as point-of-sale systems, refrigeration units, or other machinery.
This protects your business from claims made by employees related to discrimination, wrongful termination, harassment, and other employment-related issues.
10. Product liability insurance
If you sell products, there’s always a chance they might cause harm or injury. Product liability insurance can cover legal fees and damages if someone claims a product you sold injured them or caused property damage.
11. Tenants legal liability insurance
If you lease your retail space, this coverage can protect you if you’re found responsible for causing damage.
Types of retail business insurance
The format and environment of your retail business influence which is the right type of insurance for you.
Here are three types of retail businesses and the specialized retail business insurance they may need.
1. Brick-and-mortar retail insurance
Brick-and-mortar stores are physical retail stores that customers visit in person. These retail spaces have comprehensive insurance needs:
Crime insurance
Property insurance
General liability insurance
Business interruption insurance
Workers’ compensation insurance
When it comes to commercial insurance for your physical retail store, the biggest difference in your approach will depend on whether you lease or own the building, says Dave Zappacosta, principal agent at Bridge First Insurance.
“You either need to insure the building because you own it, or most leases have a built-in insurance requirement and may require more insurance than necessary.”
Different policies cover each scenario.
While your space may be one of your most valuable assets, the lifeline of your business is your product.
“The biggest concern for most [store] owners would be their inventory, especially in a store,” says Dave. “You want to make sure you know your numbers and purchase the correct amount of business personal property coverage.”
2. Pop-up shop retail insurance
Pop-up shops are temporary retail spaces that operate for a short period, often in rented venues or shared spaces.
Their unique nature requires specialized coverage:
Short-term general liability insurance
Tenant’s legal liability insurance
Event cancellation insurance
Property insurance
Remember how protecting your product is one of the most important considerations when shopping for commercial insurance? If you open a pop-up shop, that coverage doesn’t always carry over.
“For pop-ups, your inventory isn’t automatically covered,” says Dave. “Most business personal property coverage has a restriction of 1,500 feet within the main premises.”
The location of the pop-up, the means of travel, and who’s working it determine what types of additional commercial insurance are needed.
“If you’re traveling with your inventory, then you need to purchase an inland marine policy which covers business personal property away from the premises,” Dave says. “Most policies will have a small amount built in, but if you’re regularly with $5,000-plus worth of inventory at an off-premises location, you need the inland marine coverage.”
3. Event sales commercial insurance
Retailers who sell products at events, fairs, or markets need insurance tailored to these environments:
Product liability insurance
Event liability insurance
Stallholders insurance
Property insurance
Transit insurance
If you sell at trade shows, festivals, markets, and other events, you might be covered by the event host or venue.
“Offline selling at trade shows [may] use the insurance provided by the venue, as they’re liable for situations that occur on their property,” says Vince Lefton, CEO of Bulldog Adjusters.
Always do your homework and check out your unique situation. Again, because you’re traveling and not selling at your primary location.
You can choose short-term coverage periods to accommodate your event schedule.
How to get retail business insurance
Now that we have a rough idea of the types of insurance you’ll need (remember: always research your unique circumstances), the next step is to get it.
Before you get a quote, have the following information handy:
Business location(s)
Gross annual sales
Types of products sold
Number of employees
Details about your property (owned or leased, square footage, type of construction)
Vehicle information (if applicable)
Past insurance claim history
Retail insurance providers
There are numerous insurance providers, each with its strengths and specialized services. Consider both national carriers and local agencies. Look for agents with experience in retail insurance, as they’ll understand your specific needs.
Walt Capell, president and owner of Workers Compensation Shop, recommends finding an insurance agent you can trust and having an in-depth conversation about your business needs.
“Work with an independent agent who can quote multiple insurers and play them against each other to get the best possible value (coverage + price),” recommends Matthew A. Struck, partner at Treadstone Risk Management.
You’ll also want an agent who can “provide risk management advice to help prevent claims from happening, to make your business a more attractive one to insure and drop future insurance costs.”
Walt agrees that working with an independent agent will help retailers get the best coverage and value.
They can shop your policy around to multiple carriers, and they also have the knowledge about which carriers are actively looking to quote the coverages you’re looking for,” he says. “This can help you get bigger discounts.
It’s best to shop around for the best policy. Here are some retail insurance providers you can explore:
Choosing your insurance policy
Once you’ve gotten your quotes, you’ll need to compare policies and choose the best one.
“A good agent isn’t going to recommend coverage unless your business is truly at risk,” says Walt. “Insurance agents interact with people who are filing a claim on a daily basis. They know what it feels like for a business owner to have a fire or some other disaster and not have enough insurance coverage. When they recommend additional coverage, it’s usually because of one of these experiences.”
While shopping around, ask insurance agents about the following:
Discounts: Some providers may offer discounts for bundling policies or implementing certain safety measures.
Claims process: Understand how they handle claims and if the provider has a good reputation for fair and timely claims processing.
Optional coverages: Inquire about additional coverages that might be beneficial, such as cyber liability or equipment breakdown insurance.
Retail insurance tips
Remember to never undervalue your inventory in hopes of getting a better deal.
“Insurance companies usually have endorsements that say if you were knowingly underinsuring, they could partially deny claims,” says Dave. “Look for insurance companies that will base your liability off square footage and number of employees rather than sales and payroll.”
Once you have your policy in place, you’ll want to make sure you’re making the best use of it—and that you stay protected.
“Confirm with your insurance company that they received the premium so that you know that your coverage has started,” says Lefton. “And don’t let your policy lapse.”
When purchasing your retail insurance policy, follow these four best practices:
1. Review policy details
Once you’ve selected a policy, review it thoroughly before signing. Ensure your business details are accurate and you understand the policy’s terms, including deductibles, coverage limits, and exclusions.
2. Keep it up to date
Regularly review and update your policy, especially when there are significant changes to your business, such as expansion, increased sales, or the addition of new products.
3. Maintain proper documentation
Keep a copy of your insurance policy and any related documents in a safe and accessible place. It’s also a good idea to digitally back up these documents.
4. Reevaluate annually
Business needs can change over time. Annually review your insurance coverage to ensure it remains adequate for your business. This is also an opportunity to see if better rates or more suitable policies are available in the market.
How much is retail insurance?
The cost of retail insurance varies based on several factors. Sharing an exact amount without specific details is difficult, but some providers offer rough estimates.
Retail insurance provider Insureon says retailers pay a median premium of about $65 per month, or $790 per year, for a business owner’s policy (BOP). This policy includes general liability insurance and commercial property insurance, usually at a lower rate than if the policies are purchased separately.
Annual retail business insurance costs vary by sector, too:
Retailers must remember that the cost of retail insurance may change based on the product types they sell. Insureon
The cost of general liability insurance depends on a retail business’ risks. For example, smaller stores with fewer customer interactions face lower risks and pay less for this policy.
Larger retailers with more stores may pay more for their annual general liability insurance. Insureon
Insurance provider Progressive says the 2022 national median monthly cost of a business insurance policy for new Progressive customers ranged from $42 for professional liability insurance to $70 for workers’ compensation or a business owners policy (BOP).
Progressive highlights varying costs between business insurance policies.
Seven key factors influence the cost of retail insurance:
1. Type of coverage
A comprehensive insurance package that includes various coverage types such as general liability coverage, property insurance, workers’ compensation, and cyber liability may be more expensive than a basic general liability policy.
2. Size and location of the business
A large retail store in a high-rent, high-traffic urban area typically has higher insurance premiums than a small shop in a rural location.
3. Type of products sold
Selling products with higher potential risks, such as electronics or jewelry, may have higher premiums than low-risk items like books or clothing.
4. Business history
If your retail business has a history of frequent claims, your premiums might be higher. On the other hand, a clean claims record can result in discounts.
5. Number of employees
For coverages like workers’ compensation, the number and type of employees you have will play a role in determining the premium.
6. Deductibles
A higher deductible typically means a lower premium, but you’ll pay more out of pocket if you need to make a claim.
7. Security and safety measures
Implementing security systems, surveillance cameras, and safety measures can reduce the risk of theft, vandalism, and accidents, potentially lowering your insurance premiums.
Reduce risk with retail insurance
Retail insurance isn’t just a safety precaution; it’s an investment in the stability of your business.
Whether you run a bustling brick-and-mortar store or manage an expanding online retail shop, unforeseen challenges will arise. Equipping yourself with the right retail shop insurance will safeguard your business assets and secure peace of mind.
Get started with Shopify POS
Only Shopify gives you all the tools you need to manage your business, market to customers, and sell everywhere in one place. Unify in-store and online sales today.
What is retail insurance?
Retail insurance is a specialized type of business insurance tailored to the unique needs of retail businesses.
Whether you run a brick-and-mortar shop, an online store, or a mix of both, retail insurance helps protect your business from various risks associated with selling products to the public.
What kind of insurance do I need for my retail business?
The kind of insurance you need for your business depends on multiple factors, including the:
Location of your business
Type of products you sell
What are the 4 most common types of retail insurance?
The four most common types of retail insurance are:
Property insurance
General liability insurance
Business interruption insurance
Workers’ compensation insurance
Retail business owners should consult with an insurance agent to understand their business risks and the policy best suited to them.
Best AI Writer Software in 2023 For Small Business
Best AI writer is a software program that uses natural language processing (NLP) and machine learning algorithms to generate written content. AI writers have been developed in recent years to automate the process of creating written content, and they have seen increasing adoption in various industries, including journalism, marketing, and content creation.
The evolution of AI writers can be traced back to the early days of computer science when researchers first started exploring the use of computers to process and analyze natural language. In the 1960s and 1970s, researchers developed the first AI language processing systems, which were able to perform simple tasks like translation and language understanding. However, these early systems were limited in their capabilities and needed to be able to generate high-quality written content.
In the 1980s and 1990s, researchers made significant advances in the field of natural language processing, which allowed for the development of more sophisticated AI language processing systems. These systems were able to perform more complex tasks, such as summarization and text generation, and they began to be used in a variety of applications, including language translation, content creation, and customer service.
In the past decade, there has been a significant increase in the use of AI writers in various industries. Many companies have adopted AI writing software to automate the process of creating written content, and there has been a rise in the use of AI writers for tasks such as generating news articles, creating marketing copy, and producing social media posts.
The market for AI writers is expected to continue to grow in the coming years, as more and more companies adopt these technologies to automate the process of creating written content. A number of companies offer AI writing software, including OpenAI, Articoolo, and Wordsmith. There are a variety of applications for AI writers, including content creation, marketing, and customer service.
Advantages of AI Writer Software
There are several advantages to using AI writer software:
Efficiency: AI writing software can quickly generate written content, allowing companies to produce a large volume of content in a short amount of time.
Cost-effectiveness: AI writing software can reduce the cost of creating written content, as it does not require the time and effort of human writers.
Consistency: AI writing software can produce content that is consistent in tone, style, and language, which is important for maintaining a consistent brand image.
Versatility: AI writing software can generate content on a wide range of topics, making it a versatile tool for businesses that need to produce content on a variety of subjects.
Improved accuracy: AI writing software can generate content that is free of errors and grammatically correct, which is important for businesses that need to produce high-quality written materials.
Personalization: AI writing software can generate personalized content based on the specific needs and preferences of the target audience, which can help to increase engagement and conversion rates.
OutreachWriter is one of the best AI Writer content creation tools that aims to help businesses and organizations create high-quality, SEO-optimized content for their websites and online marketing efforts.
Features
AI Email Writer
AI-powered personalized outreach that creates customized emails based on a prospect’s digital footprint.
AI LinkedIn Outreach
Prospect’s LinkedIn profile and activity are analyzed to draft personalized messages that get read and replied to.
Backlink Email Writer
Generate personalized email content for SEO backlinks in minutes using our AI platform and a diverse set of templates.
Sales Pitch Writer
Scrape LinkedIn profiles of prospects using bots and write personalized LinkedIn messages and cold emails mentioning the prospect’s recent activity, company, and designation.
AI-Writer for Recruitment
Send personalized responses to your applicants without having to write anything manually, and use AI to craft responses based on candidates’ application status.
Opening Line Writer
Create custom opening lines for emails, that can easily grab the reader’s attention with a catchy beginning.
Jasper AI is an artificial intelligence platform and one of the best AI Writers designed to provide knowledge-driven solutions for businesses. By leveraging machine learning and natural language processing, Jasper AI is able to analyze customer data and generate actionable insights. The platform is designed to provide an intuitive user experience, allowing users to quickly and easily access actionable insights from their data.
Features
Natural Language Processing: Jasper AI uses natural language processing to analyze customer data and generate insights. This allows it to capture and interpret customer feedback, delivering actionable insights that can be used to improve customer experience.
Machine Learning: Jasper AI leverages machine learning to identify patterns in customer data, allowing it to make predictions and provide actionable insights.
Automated Analysis: Jasper AI automatically analyzes customer data and generates insights, eliminating the need for manual analysis.
Visualizations: Jasper AI provides visualizations of customer data and insights, allowing users to quickly and easily access actionable insights.
Intelligent Dashboards: Jasper AI provides an intuitive user experience, allowing users to access their data and insights from a single dashboard.
Customization: Jasper AI allows users to customize the platform to meet their specific needs, providing an experience tailored to their business.
CopyAI is an AI-based one of the best AI Writers and editors that enable users to quickly and easily produce high-quality, engaging content. It is powered by an advanced AI engine that uses natural language processing (NLP) and machine learning (ML) to analyze inputted text and suggest improvements to grammar, spelling, clarity, and overall tone. It was designed to help content creators save time, increase productivity, and produce more engaging content.
Features
AI-Powered Text Editor: CopyAI utilizes an AI-powered text editor that is able to detect errors in grammar, spelling, clarity, and tone within the inputted text. It then suggests improvements to the text so that users can quickly and easily produce high-quality content.
Natural Language Processing: CopyAI’s NLP capabilities allow it to understand the meaning of the inputted text and suggest changes accordingly.
Machine Learning: CopyAI’s ML algorithms are used to continually improve the accuracy of suggested changes over time.
Customizable Suggestions: CopyAI allows users to customize the types of suggestions they receive based on the type of content they are producing.
Automated Content Creation: CopyAI is able to automatically generate content based on user-defined parameters, making it easier to produce engaging content quickly.
Multi-Platform Support: CopyAI is available on Windows, Mac, iOS, and Android devices, making it accessible to a wide range of users.
The Rytr AI Writer Tool is a powerful artificial intelligence-based writing assistant and one of the best AI Writers that helps users write better content faster. It utilizes natural language processing, machine learning, and deep learning algorithms to provide automated writing assistance. Rytr AI Writer Tool can help users save time and effort by quickly generating well-written content without the need for manual editing. It also comes with a variety of features to help users customize their writing experience.
Features
• Auto-Correct: This feature uses advanced algorithms to identify and correct spelling, grammar, and punctuation errors in real-time.
• Contextual Suggestions: This feature uses natural language processing to suggest relevant words and phrases as you type.
• Word Prediction: This feature uses machine learning to predict the next words you are likely to type.
• Text Summarization: This feature uses deep learning algorithms to summarize long pieces of text into shorter, concise summaries.
• Cloud Storage: This feature allows you to store your writing projects in the cloud for easy access.
• Export Options: This feature allows you to export your writing projects in various formats such as PDF, Word, or Text.
Grammarly is one of the best AI Writers for anyone looking to improve their written communication skills. With its top 6 features, it can help you write with confidence and accuracy.
Features
Grammar and Spelling Check: Grammarly’s AI-powered writing assistant quickly checks your writing for grammar, spelling, and punctuation errors, as well as provides suggested corrections.
Advanced Vocabulary Suggestions: Grammarly suggests synonyms and words to improve your vocabulary and make your writing more engaging.
Plagiarism Detection: Grammarly can detect plagiarism in your writing and provide citation suggestions to help you avoid accidental plagiarism.
Writing Style Checker: Grammarly’s writing style checker helps you identify if your writing is too wordy, if you’re using too many passive voice constructions, or if you’re using too many cliches.
Readability Score: Grammarly’s readability score helps you identify if your writing is at an appropriate reading level for your intended audience.
Writing Insights: Grammarly’s writing insights provide you with helpful feedback on your writing habits, such as which words you use the most and how you use punctuation.
Another fantastic all-in-one option for prospective content developers is INK. It comes as a package that includes planning, content creation, and SEO. INK is a tool that generates fresh and distinctive content that is search engine friendly.
Features
Easy to Use: Ink’s intuitive interface makes it easy to learn and use, even for beginners.
Collaborative: Ink allows you to collaborate with your team in real-time, so you can work together on documents, presentations, and more.
Secure: Ink keeps your documents safe and secure, with password protection and encryption.
Customizable: Ink allows you to customize your documents with various themes and styles, making them look professional and polished.
Cloud-Based: Ink is cloud-based, so you can access your documents from anywhere, at any time.
Cross-Platform: Ink is compatible with both Mac and Windows, so you can share and collaborate with anyone, regardless of their device.
The tool includes features such as a content editor, keyword research and analysis, and a real-time content analysis feature that provides recommendations on how to improve the readability, formatting, and SEO of a piece of content. Surfer can be a valuable asset for content creators, marketers, and professionals looking to improve their content and achieve higher search rankings.
Features
Content Editor: The content editor allows users to create and edit their content directly within the Surfer platform. It includes features like a word count, readability analysis, and a thesaurus to help users craft high-quality content.
Keyword Research and Analysis: Surfer’s keyword research and analysis tools allow users to identify relevant and popular keywords to include in their content. The tool provides data on search volume, competition, and the cost per click of each keyword, helping users make informed decisions about which keywords to target.
Real-time Content Analysis: Surfer’s real-time content analysis feature provides users with recommendations on how to improve the readability, formatting, and SEO of their content as they write. This includes suggestions for alternative words and phrases, as well as tips on how to improve the structure and formatting of the content.
Competitor Analysis: Surfer’s competitor analysis tools allow users to see how their content compares to that of their competitors. The tool provides data on the keywords, length, and readability of competitors’ content, helping users create content that is better optimized and more effective.
WriteSonic is one of the best AI Writers software that aims to help writers improve their craft by providing a variety of tools and features.
Features
Word processor: WriteSonic includes a full-featured word processor with all the basic features you’d expect, such as font and paragraph formatting, spell check, and the ability to insert images and tables.
Writing prompts: WriteSonic includes a library of writing prompts to help spark creativity and inspire new ideas. These prompts cover a wide range of genres and themes and can be a useful tool for writers who struggle with writer’s block.
Thesaurus: WriteSonic includes a thesaurus that provides synonyms and related words to help writers expand their vocabulary and improve their writing.
Outliner: WriteSonic includes an outliner tool that helps writers organize their ideas and plan their writing. The outliner allows writers to create an outline of their document, rearrange and move sections, and easily add new ideas.
Research tool: WriteSonic includes a research tool that allows writers to easily find and incorporate information from the web into their writing. The research tool includes a built-in search engine, as well as the ability to save and organize sources.
Collaboration: WriteSonic includes tools that allow writers to collaborate with others on the same document. Writers can invite others to edit and collaborate on their work, and see each other’s changes in real-time.
Articoolo is a content creation tool that uses artificial intelligence (AI) to generate articles and other written content.
Features
AI-generated content: The main feature of Articoolo is its ability to generate written content using AI. Users can input a keyword or topic, and Articoolo will generate an article or other written content related to that topic.
Multiple languages: Articoolo supports multiple languages, including English, Spanish, French, and German. This makes it a useful tool for content creators working in a variety of languages.
Customization options: Articoolo allows users to customize the generated content by adjusting the length, tone, and style of the output. This allows users to fine-tune the content to better fit their needs.
Plagiarism check: Articoolo includes a plagiarism checker that compares the generated content to other sources on the web to ensure that it is original and not copied from elsewhere.
SEO optimization: Articoolo includes features that help optimize the generated content for search engines, such as keyword density analysis and the ability to add alt tags to images.
API integration: Articoolo offers an API that allows developers to integrate the content generation tool into their own applications and websites. This allows users to generate content on demand without the need to visit the Articoolo website.
Scalenut is a powerful and one of the best AI writing tool that helps users create professional-looking content quickly and easily. With Scalenut, users can generate high-quality content from scratch, and edit existing content.
Features
Automated Content Generation: Scalenut automatically generates content from scratch, allowing you to quickly create content without having to spend hours researching and writing.
AI-Assisted Writing: Scalenut uses AI-assisted writing tools to help you refine your work and make it more accurate and engaging. You can use the AI Writer tool to generate content suggestions and edit your work for grammar, spelling, and style.
Automated Editing and Proofreading: Scalenut offers automated editing and proofreading tools that check your work for grammar, spelling, and style errors, while also suggesting improvements.
Automated SEO Optimization: Scalenut can analyze your content and suggest SEO improvements to help optimize your content for search engines.
Collaborative Writing: Scalenut allows you to collaborate with other writers and editors, allowing you to quickly create and refine content.
Data-Driven Insights: Scalenut provides data-driven insights that can help you better understand how your content is performing and how to improve it.
Having a sales suite and lead generation software can be a great benefit for businesses. Sales suite helps businesses to keep track of the sales process, such as creating sales orders, tracking delivery, and invoicing. Lead generation software helps in generating leads and managing customer relationships. Both of these tools are essential for any business to succeed. They can help businesses to increase their sales, manage their customer relationships, and provide better customer service.
Having Hr, Marketing, and support suites along with a sales suite would be very beneficial for businesses. HR suite will help in hiring and managing the staff, the marketing suite will help in marketing and creating awareness about the business and its services, and the support suite will help in providing customer service and helpdesk services. All these suites combined will help in making the sales process smoother and easier. Moreover, it will help in gaining a competitive edge over other businesses and will ensure that the business is running optimally.
Conclusion
In conclusion, it is clear that AI writer software has the potential to revolutionize the way businesses create content. These tools offer numerous benefits, including increased efficiency, improved accuracy, and the ability to generate high-quality content quickly. As AI technology continues to advance, it is likely that these tools will become even more sophisticated and widely adopted in the business world.
In 2023, it is important for businesses to carefully consider their options and choose the best AI writing software that meets their specific needs and goals. Whether you are a small startup or a large corporation, investing in AI writing software can help you stay competitive and improve your content marketing efforts in the long run. Ultimately, the best AI writer software for your business in 2023 is OutreachWriter by 500apps. You may manage and expand your business successfully with the help of these tools, which will boost your success and income.
For just $15 per user, 500apps applications can give your business a real boost. With these tools, you can take your business to the next level, improving your success and your income.
12 WordPress Search Plugins to Improve Your Site Search (2023)
Are you looking for the best WordPress search plugin to improve your site search?
The default WordPress search feature is quite limited and ignores a lot of the content on your website. Thankfully, there are several WordPress plugins that can help you improve the default search experience.
In this article, we will highlight the best WordPress search plugins to improve your site search.
Why Use a WordPress Search Plugin?
WordPress comes with a built-in search feature that can help visitors easily find what they are looking for.
However, it is quite basic and doesn’t search all your site’s content, including comments, files, and products.
The good news is that there are several search plugins that can help you improve the built-in WordPress search feature. Some of these plugins are built for specific purposes, like searching WooCommerce products, while others improve the search experience across your entire WordPress blog or website.
That being said, let’s take a look at some of the best WordPress search plugins. Simply use the quick links below to jump straight to the plugin you want to learn more about:
SearchWP is one of the best search plugins for WordPress. It is very easy to use and provides much more accurate search results compared to the built-in WordPress search.
SearchWP can search content that WordPress ignores by default, including custom post types, WooCommerce products, comments, PDFs, and more.
You can create a completely custom search algorithm, similar to the algorithms used by search engines such as Google. This allows you to assign a weight (importance) to each attribute.
Content that matches an attribute with high relevancy will appear higher in the search results. By contrast, content with an attribute that has less relevancy will appear lower in the user’s search results.
For example, if you have uploaded your menu as a PDF on your restaurant website, then this is important content, and you will typically want to show it high in the search results.
With that in mind, you can simply assign this content a higher attribute relevance so that matches appear high in the search results.
You can even include product attributes, tags, reviews, and custom fields and taxonomies in the WooCommerce search results.
In the following image, we have added ‘color’ and ‘size’ as searchable custom fields and added product tags and categories in the taxonomies field.
After creating a custom search algorithm, you can then create an unlimited number of custom search forms.
For example, if you sell digital downloads like eBooks, then you might make a search form that searches content with the ‘ebook’ tag. In this way, you can help shoppers find new books that they may want to buy.
Automatically integrates with the built-in WordPress search.
Looks great with any WordPress theme.
Built-in search statistics.
Integrates with many popular WordPress plugins, including WooCommerce, Easy Digital Downloads, and bbPress.
Cons:
Doesn’t include live Ajax search. However, you can add this missing feature by installing the free SearchWP Live Ajax Search plugin.
No free plugin, so you’ll need to purchase a license to try SearchWP.
Why we chose SearchWP: SearchWP is a complete search toolkit that integrates perfectly with the native WordPress search. Simply create a search algorithm, and all the search fields and forms across your website will use SearchWP automatically.
ElasticPress is a hosted WordPress search service built on ElasticSearch.
Instead of running on your WordPress site, it runs the search queries in the cloud and shows results at lightning speed. It is extremely easy to integrate on any WordPress site and works with all the best WordPress hosting providers.
ElasticPress can search content that the default WordPress search ignores, including custom fields, tags, PDF files, Microsoft Office documents, metadata, and more.
ElasticPress has built-in live Ajax search, so you can show instant results as the user is typing. It also works well with WooCommerce, so shoppers can quickly find products they are interested in buying.
You can create your own search algorithm using the Weighting dashboard and can even customize the top search terms to display your most popular WooCommerce products or top-performing content first.
Pros:
Built-in autosuggest.
An advanced connector that can handle almost any search query.
Shows related posts and document content in the search results.
A hosted service, so ElasticPress won’t slow down your WordPress website.
Cons:
ElasticPress is a hosted service and is a lot more expensive than any other search solution on this list. This means it may not be the best choice for beginners, personal blogs, or anyone who is working with a smaller budget.
Why we chose ElasticPress: By offloading search to an external server, you can improve your WordPress search without slowing down your website. This may not be the cheapest search plugin on our list, but it’s a great choice for business websites or enterprise sites that need lightning-fast search.
Ivory Search is another excellent WordPress search plugin that replaces the default WordPress search.
To improve search results, Ivory Search looks at post types, image metadata, custom fields, shortcodes, attachments, and more.
You can also use Ajax to show live search results without reloading the page.
The plugin also integrates with the WordPress theme customizer, so you can change how the search form looks using the tools you are already familiar with.
With Ivory Search, you can create an unlimited number of forms with unique settings.
You can then add these forms to different areas of your site using a shortcode that the plugin creates automatically.
You can also add an advanced search form to any widget-ready area, such as the sidebar, using the Ivory Search block. This makes it easy to show the same form across your entire WordPress website.
Another option is to add the search bar to any navigation menu. In the Ivory Search settings, you can simply enable the toggle for the menu where you want to show the search field.
Studying the way that people use your website’s search can also help you learn more about your users. This includes finding any content gaps where visitors are searching for content that you don’t already have on your website.
To provide this data, Ivory Search integrates with Google Analytics. However, before you can use this feature, you will need to install Google Analytics in WordPress.
Easily change search form colors and messaging using the WordPress Customizer.
Add an advanced search field to any WordPress menu with the click of a button.
Supports multilingual search.
Integrates with popular plugins, including WooCommerce, Weglot, Polylang, and WPML.
Cons:
Ivory Search’s interface can be overwhelming and confusing to navigate, particularly for first-time users.
Why we chose Ivory Search: Although there’s a premium version, the free version is where Ivory Search really shines. If you are looking for a free WordPress search plugin that has everything you need to improve the default search, then the free download is a great option.
Pricing: The base plugin is free, while Ivory Search premium starts at $19.99 per year.
The free Advanced Woo Search plugin can look for matches in the product title, content, excerpt, categories, tags, ID, and SKU.
This can help shoppers find what they are looking for, including products they may not have found using the built-in WordPress search.
Advanced Woo Search has a straightforward settings page where you can toggle the different settings on and off, often with the click of a button. This makes the plugin very easy to set up and use.
Advanced Woo Search also shows some useful extra information inside the search results, including the product image and price. It also integrates the results into your current layout, so it will look great with any WordPress theme.
Once you have set up the plugin, it will synchronize the product data automatically. This means you won’t need to spend time manually re-indexing every time you update the product catalog. You can also add the search form to any page, post, or widget-ready area using a shortcode or widget.
Pros:
Supports stop words, synonyms, and plurals.
Supports multiple currencies and variable products.
Orders search results based on where they were found.
Easy-to-understand settings.
Cons:
The free plugin is missing some of the more advanced search features, including the ability to search product attributes and custom taxonomies.
Why we chose Advanced Woo Search: If you are looking to improve the default WooCommerce search but don’t have the budget for a premium plugin, then this is a great option. It also supports live Ajax search out of the box, so shoppers can see relevant results without waiting for the page to reload.
Pricing: You can download Advanced Woo Search for free from the official WordPress repository.
SearchWP Ajax Live is an addon plugin for SearchWP, but it works with any WordPress search form that uses the built-in WordPress template tags.
This addon enhances your existing WordPress search with live Ajax search results that show up as soon as the user starts typing. This provides a better user experience and can return accurate results without even reloading the page.
Live Ajax search can improve the search experience for all visitors, but it’s particularly useful if you are selling online courses, membership subscriptions, and other digital products. By helping visitors find relevant content faster, you can often get more sales.
After activating the plugin, every search bar on your site will use live Ajax search automatically. You can also add a live Ajax search bar to any page, post, or widget-ready area using a block provided by the plugin.
This includes areas you can’t edit using the standard WordPress content editor, like your site’s 404 page template.
Pros:
Works out of the box with minimal settings to configure.
Adds live Ajax search to your WordPress blog, website, or online store, similar to the live search feature used by search engines like Google.
Works perfectly with the default WordPress search or the SearchWP plugin.
Cons:
This plugin works out of the box with very few settings. While this makes the plugin easy to set up, it may feel limiting if you want more advanced customization options.
Why we chose SearchWP Ajax Lite: Live search can help visitors find what they are looking for, fast. This free plugin works out of the box and automatically adds live Ajax search to all your search fields without you having to configure any complicated settings.
Pricing: Free to download from the official WordPress repository.
YITH WooCommerce Ajax Search is a great WooCommerce product search plugin that helps customers quickly find products in your store.
It allows customers to search products by SKU, search within specific categories, and filter the results without reloading the page.
This plugin can also search content that WordPress ignores by default, including the product excerpt, product categories and tags, and variable products.
YITH WooCommerce Ajax search is highly customizable. You can include thumbnails, badges, prices, and promotions in the live search results. This can provide shoppers with useful information, which will help them decide which product pages they want to visit.
Both the free and premium versions of the plugin also allow you to customize how the search bar looks to better suit your online store.
The plugin works with WooCommerce stores in any language and is fully compatible with multilingual WordPress sites and stores.
Pros:
Shows results in real time.
Filter the results using categories and tags.
Search by SKU, which is perfect for stores with big product catalogs.
Highlight sales and promotions inside the search results.
Cons:
Although there is a free version of the plugin, it’s quite limited compared to other live Ajax plugins. For example, the free version doesn’t look for matches within product tags and categories.
Why we chose YITH WooCommerce Ajax Search: If you run a WooCommerce store, then live search can help customers find interesting products faster. With that being said, a live Ajax search plugin is a must-have, and this plugin integrates perfectly with WooCommerce. It’s also fully compatible with multilingual websites, which is perfect if you sell to an international audience.
FiboSearch is another excellent WooCommerce search plugin. It allows you to instantly fetch search results using Ajax without reloading the page.
FiboSearch can search for matches in the product description, short description, SKU, attributes, custom fields, product categories and tags, and more.
You can also exclude out-of-stock products from the search results. This can get you more sales since you are not distracting shoppers with products they can’t currently purchase.
You can also show more content as part of the live Ajax search. For example, you might add the product image, description, and pricing to provide shoppers with detailed product information without them even having to reload the page.
When the visitor hovers over an item in the live Ajax search, you can show an add to cart button along with a quantity field and extended product description. In this way, visitors can start the purchasing process without even visiting the product’s page.
The live Ajax search bar is also fully customizable, so you can add your own messaging, change the submit button, and choose different search bar layouts.
As you make changes, the plugin will show a preview of how the search bar will look on your online marketplace or store. In this way, you can easily try different settings to see what looks the best.
When you are happy with how the search bar is set up, you can add it to any page, post, or widget-ready area using either a shortcode or block.
Another option is adding the search bar to any menu in your WordPress theme. Simply go to Appearance » Menus and then add the new ‘FiboSearch bar’ item to any navigation menu.
Pros:
Integrates with the default WooCommerce search results page. This means that shoppers will see exactly the same results in both the live Ajax search and the standard search results page.
Support for many popular multilingual plugins, including WPML, Polylang, and qTranslate-XT.
Support for Google Analytics.
Advanced search settings, including synonyms and fuzzy search.
Cons:
Even if you upgrade to pro, FiboSearch doesn’t offer live chat or telephone support.
Why we chose FiboSearch: This plugin allows you to show detailed information in the live Ajax search results and even include an ‘Add to Cart’ button. In this way, you can show helpful, informative results to shoppers without them ever having to reload the page.
Pricing: The base plugin is free. The premium version starts at $49 per year.
It allows your customers to filter products by category, attributes, tags, taxonomies, meta fields, and price.
Husky’s filters generate SEO-friendly links that you can add to your sitemap file. In this way, Husky can help improve your WooCommerce SEO.
The Husky search form is fully customizable, so you can display the different options as radio buttons, checkboxes, multi-dropdown menus, and more.
You can add search and filtering options to any page, post, or widget-ready area using a shortcode that the plugin creates automatically. Even better, Husky supports live Ajax search, so you can show live results anywhere on your online store.
Husky is easy for beginners to set up but also offers tons of customization options for developers who want to use the plugin in custom product templates. For example, you can create a custom woo-products loop template and html-items for the search form.
Pros:
Advanced WooCommerce search.
Built-in live Ajax support.
See the products your customers are looking for with built-in search statistics.
The option for more advanced users to create custom layout templates.
Cons:
Although the plugin offers live Ajax search, according to the WordPress.org listing, this feature isn’t guaranteed to work with all WordPress themes.
Why we chose Husky Products Filter for WooCommerce: This plugin allows you to replace the limited built-in WooCommerce search, no matter what your budget is. Although the live Ajax search isn’t guaranteed to work with all WooCommerce themes, this is still a generous feature to include in a free plugin.
Relevanssi is another popular WordPress search plugin that improves WordPress search by fetching more relevant results.
Relevanssi adds PDF indexing and searching in WordPress, so visitors can search the contents of your site’s PDF files. Relevanssi can also search shortcode outputs, custom fields, user profiles, categories and tags, WooCommerce products, and more.
Relavanssi also supports fuzzy matching and exact matches and can highlight the search terms in the results page.
All of this can help visitors find what they are looking for, faster.
Pros:
Cons:
Relevanssi has compatibility issues with some page builder plugins, BuddyPress, NextGen Gallery, and a few more. If you do run into problems, then you can see our step-by-step guide on how to properly ask for WordPress support and get it.
Relevanssi may take up lots of database space. With that in mind, it’s not recommended if your WordPress hosting has limited space for database tables.
Why we chose Relevanssi: Many of the free search plugins on this list are designed for use with online WooCommerce stores. However, Relevanssi is a free plugin that’s a great fit for all kinds of WordPress blogs and websites. If you run a membership website, then Relevanssi also integrates with many of the top membership plugins.
Pricing: The base plugin is free. You can upgrade to the premium version for $109 per year.
WP Extended Search is a lightweight and simple WordPress search plugin that allows you to easily extend the default WordPress search.
You can just go to the plugin settings and select the options you want to include in the search results. For example, you can search in the author name, taxonomies, post types, meta data, and more.
The plugin extends the default WordPress search, so you don’t need to add any shortcodes or widgets. As long as you are using the built-in WordPress search, you simply need to install and activate the plugin, and you are good to go.
If you want to offer a more advanced search, then you can create multiple custom search forms with unique settings. You can then add these search forms to any part of your site using a widget, shortcode, PHP function, or HTML.
Pros:
Automatically improves the default WordPress search.
Create an unlimited number of custom forms.
Optionally exclude old content from search results.
Show partial matches or exact matches only.
Compatible with WooCommerce.
Cons:
Missing some more advanced features, particularly live Ajax search.
Why we chose WP Extended Search: If you are looking for a quick and easy way to enhance the standard WordPress search, then this plugin works out of the box. Although there are some more advanced settings you can explore, this is a very lightweight plugin that’s easy to set up.
Better Search is another free WordPress plugin that automatically replaces the default WordPress search.
This plugin allows you to search across all post types, including custom post types. It will also look for matches in the title, post content, excerpt, meta fields, authors, tags, and comments.
You can also change the weight of either the title or the content based on what better suits your website.
This plugin has a unique search heatmap feature that shows the most popular searches. You can add this widget to an area, such as the sidebar or footer, to encourage visitors to explore your site’s most popular search terms and content.
Pros:
Automatically integrates with the default WordPress search. If your WordPress theme doesn’t have a built-in search form, then you can add one by using widgets in WordPress.
The option to use your own template file or custom CSS.
Create a list of stop words that Better Search will filter out of search queries.
Cons:
No option to search based on category or product attribute.
Doesn’t support live Ajax search.
Why we chose Better Search: Better Search provides a good range of features for a free plugin, plus some unique functionality. In particular, their heatmap is an innovative way to encourage visitors to explore more search terms and content and may make this a stand-out plugin for some website owners.
Sometimes, you don’t want to include all your content in the search results. For example, if you are running an online store, then you may want to hide pages like your account page, custom checkout page, thank you page, and more.
Search Exclude allows you to exclude content that you don’t want to show in the WordPress search results. You can simply check a box to exclude pages, posts, WooCommerce products, and more.
Even better, this plugin doesn’t hide your content from search engine crawlers. This means the hidden content will still show up in search engines like Google.
If you want to hide lots of different pages, posts, and other content, then this plugin also integrates with the bulk edit feature.
You can go to the plugin’s settings at any point to see all the items that you have excluded from the search.
Pros:
A simple plugin that allows you to exclude content from the search results.
Doesn’t affect your WordPress SEO.
Cons:
This plugin simply hides items from the search results. This means you will likely still need to install extra search plugins.
Why we chose Better Search: This plugin does one task, and does it well. If you are happy with the default WordPress search, but simply want to hide a few pages, then this plugin is the perfect solution.
Pricing: Free.
Which Is the Best WordPress Search Plugin?
We believe that SearchWP is the best WordPress search plugin for most websites. It allows you to search all the content types that the built-in WordPress search ignores by default and makes it easy to create a custom search algorithm.
After that, you can create an unlimited number of unique search forms and add them to any page, post, or widget-ready area.
Although the core SearchWP plugin doesn’t offer live Ajax search, you can easily add this feature using the SearchWP Live Ajax Search.
FAQs About WordPress Search Plugins
In this guide, we have covered all of the best WordPress search plugins. If you still have questions, then here are our FAQs about improving the built-in WordPress search.
Does WordPress have a search feature?
Most WordPress themes have a built-in search feature. However, the default search is typically quite limited and doesn’t provide accurate search results.
For that reason, we recommend installing an advanced search plugin like SearchWP.
Is the default WordPress search good enough for my website?
Although WordPress has a basic built-in search, we don’t recommend relying on it. By default, WordPress doesn’t search widgets, user comments, categories, tags, WooCommerce products, or PDF documents. It also doesn’t search image gallery titles, captions, or alt text.
When creating the search results page, WordPress will start by displaying any posts that have the search term in the post title, arranged in reverse-chronological order, meaning that the newest entries will be displayed at the top of the results.
After that, it will show any posts that have the matching term in the post content.
This may not be a problem for blogs that only have small amounts of content. However, this ordering logic can often show inaccurate or confusing results when you have lots of content.
The best way to improve the default WordPress search is by using an advanced search plugin like SearchWP. These plugins allow you to search content types that WordPress ignores by default and may even add useful features such as live Ajax search.
How do I add live search to my WordPress website?
The best way to add live search to your website is by using SearchWP Live Ajax Search. This free plugin instantly adds live search to all the forms and search bars across your entire WordPress website.
How do I make my WordPress website a search engine like Google?
You can create your own custom search algorithm using SearchWP. This allows you to assign weights to different attributes, such as the post’s title or its tags. In this way, you can control exactly where your content appears in the WordPress search results.
After that, you can add live search to your site using SearchWP Live Ajax Search. This plugin suggests results as the visitor is typing, just like search engines such as Google.
The Top Social Media Marketing Trends Today [2023]
As we continue through 2023, it’s safe to say that the social media marketing boom is a staple that is here to stay and that it’s simply always best to stay on top of trends. Social media has absolutely engulfed traditional marketing, and if your Shopify online store isn’t engaging with its audience across social media platforms, you’re missing out.
Social media marketing has repeatedly demonstrated its value in promoting and marketing small businesses. It is a dynamic area, and marketers must stay current on the newest social media marketing trends to stay ahead of the competition.
Today, 77% of businesses use social media to reach customers, as businesses are often the first to leverage the power of new technology, using social media to connect with their audience and customers. More than just for building brand awareness, social media is also used as a revenue driver, helping you reach more people and increase profitability.
In this article by Ecommerce Pro, we’re helping you stay current, going into the latest trends and marketing strategies we’ve been seeing in 2023 so that you can better reach and connect with your audience across multiple social media platforms.
Here are the top Social Media Marketing Strategies & Trends in 2023:
Need a Shopify Expert to help you build your Shopify website? You can view our Shopify Experts profile here to see our work or reach out to us by filling out this form.
1. Short Form Video is Here to Stay
In 2023, reels and video shorts will continue to triumph as consumers continue to show an overwhelming preference for short and easy-to-digest content from their favorite businesses and influencers. You’ll be able to easily spot this trend by the sheer popularity of TikTok, Instagram Reels, and YouTube Shorts. Coupled with infinite scroll, these short-form videos are downright addicting.
Micro-stories like these are a great hook when it comes to interacting with customers and getting your marketing message across. By creating short-form videos, you’ll be able to interact with customers where they are currently spending much of their time.
Short-form video isn’t an emerging trend any longer, it already captured the attention of millions of people, becoming a part of their daily lives.
Now is the time for forward-thinking Shopify brands to invest more time and thought into short-form video production so that your brand stands out on social media and beyond. Another great thing about this type of media it’s a great way to get new followers since reels and TikToks are presented to other users and not just followers.
Hot tip: To seize a user’s attention, you need to be aware of the ever-increasing short attention span, and capture the viewer within the first 3 seconds of your video.
2. Hooked on Edutainment Content
An emerging trend, social media is not only a medium for amusement and distraction anymore, but also for education. More and more social media users are becoming drawn into content that teaches them something new, is helpful, or delves into intriguing facts. This trend is called “Edutainment”, or entertaining educational content.
Edutainment is gaining popularity because it is an enjoyable approach to help your audience learn more about your brand or products while having fun. Popular edutainment content on social media includes health, beauty, fitness, science, history, culture, finance, and business, but there are really no limits to the forms edutainment content can take, and we’re sure your Shopify business can come up with educational video content as well as blog content that will draw in user’s interest to your brand.
Relating to short-form videos, much of Instagram Reels and TikTok content today consists of edutainment material. The bottom line is that it might just pay off to keep your customers entertained by educating them on how your brand and its products might add value to their lives, thereby adding to your business success.
3. Sell More With Social Commerce
If you’re sleeping on social commerce, it’s time to wake up to a whole new source of revenue. Social commerce is what happens when you take ecommerce and social media to create a new sales platform for your brand.
For years businesses and social media platforms have worked to figure out how to transform social media networks into powerful sales platforms, allowing brands to sell products and services directly through social media.
This is a powerful marketing and sales tool to tap into because, with social commerce, the entire shopping experience takes place right on social media—from product discovery, and research, to checkout—effectively removing friction from the customer journey.
Popular among Millennials and Gen Z, 81% of online shoppers research brands and products on Instagram, Facebook, and Pinterest. Ultimately, what’s great about social commerce is that you can give consumers the option to proceed directly to checkout without leaving the social network, speeding up the process and lowering the possibility of shopping cart abandonment.
Today, social apps that also house built-in native social commerce features include Instagram, Pinterest, Facebook, and TikTok.
While Facebook continues to reign supreme as the most popular social media platform to date, YouTube is catching up and is right on its heels. An interesting trend, YouTube might have the momentum to depose Facebook in a few years with its 2.3 billion active users. For now, Facebook is still ahead with its 2.9 billion users.
YouTube happens to also be the 3rd most visited website in the world today, and with Shopify’s new YouTube integration through the Google & Youtube App, you’ll be able to get your products in front of shoppers who are looking for what you’re selling.
While short-form video is top at the moment, the long-form video content found on YouTube is just as compelling and captures the attention of all generations, including Baby Boomers who are less likely to be on TikTok or Instagram. So if you’re targeting an older demographic, YouTube is where you should be.
It’s obvious that YouTube’s growth isn’t about to slow down as it keeps coming up with new ideas, adjusting to trends, and incorporating ecommerce functionalities. It will be exciting to see how online brands on Shopify will use YouTube integration to interact with their target audience in fresh and original ways.
5. Micro-influencers are Still Influential
Using micro-influencers is by no means a new trend, but it’s here to stay in helping brands reach more people through social media in 2023. For small businesses, micro-influencers are far more attainable, budget-friendly, and effective in terms of putting your products in front of a large audience.
Unlike big-time famous influencers, micro-influencers work with brands at far more reasonable prices, which is great for brands on a budget. Micro-influencers also have a specific group of followers and you can find influencers whose followers match your target demographic, making it easier and more effective as you’ll be showing ads to the right group of people.
Another reason why micro-influencers are great and here to stay is because they often come across as genuine and honest—their audience tends to trust them and their options, and this effect carries over to the brands that they collaborate with, making people trust you in turn.
If you decide to work with a micro-influencer to promote your business on Shopify, it’s best to look for influencers whose followers are the same kind of people you wish to reach, ensuring a far more effective campaign.
6. AI Generated Content
It’s hard to ignore AI and the role it has been playing in the digital space, across ecommerce and even social media. AI and the mass adaptation of the technology are fairly new, so it’s unclear what the drawbacks may be and there are already some ethical and creative concerns regarding the booming trend. However—it is trending and being used across Shopify and social media, helping merchants and marketers churn out content faster than ever, whether that’s social media copy, image generation, or video creation.
While AI content across social media and ecommerce is handy, it’s not perfect. One rather big concern is the lack of creativity. Plus, sometimes AI makes mistakes and shows biases. There is, however, a novelty aspect to AI on social media, and it captures the attention and imagination of its audiences.
In the end, AI-generated content will carry on after 2023, and we’ll probably see further integrations and uses across online business and social media marketing. Even though there are some issues, the benefits like quicker content creation, personalization, and saving time and money can’t be ignored. It’s best to adopt AI as a helpful tool rather than a crutch to assist you in social media marketing, content creation, and running a better ecommerce Shopify business.
Conclusion
The world of social media is quick and dynamic, always changing and expanding to accommodate new trends and new ways to help you increase your bottom line when you know how to use these platforms well.
From the rather predictable continued reign of short-form videos and the rise of “edutainment” content to the fusion of ecommerce and social media, the opportunities for brands to engage and connect with their audience only get deeper. Moreover, the ascent of YouTube as a formidable platform, the enduring influence of micro-influencers, and the fascinating turn of mass adoption in AI are set to reshape the internet as we know it.
Now that you know some of the biggest trends in social media and ecommerce, incorporating these trends effectively into your social media marketing strategy can set you on a path to success. However, it’s crucial to balance innovation with authenticity. Social media, at the end of the day, is about forging meaningful connections with your target audience, and these trends should serve as tools to enhance and deepen that connection.
At Ecommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful Shopify businesses. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
The Ultimate Guide To Image Personalization Tool: FAQ Edition –
The tools and techniques used to engage customers and increase conversions are continuously changing along with the world of digital marketing. One such technology that has become very popular recently is the image personalization tool. With the use of this software, businesses may dynamically add unique components, such as names, photos, and offers, to already-existing images and graphics, providing customers with a more tailored experience.
This blog aims to answer the most commonly asked questions about this technology and provide actionable insights for businesses looking to implement image personalization into their marketing strategy. Whether you’re a seasoned marketer or just starting out, this will help you understand the benefits of image personalization software, and give you the knowledge you need to choose the best solution for your business.
1. What is image personalization software?
Software for creating custom, tailored images based on the tastes or traits of the target audience is known as image customization software. This software creates personalized images that are catered to the interests or wants of a certain client or group using a variety of approaches, including data analysis, machine learning, and image processing.
2. How does image personalization software work?
Software for image customization allows users to interact with and change images using a graphical user interface. The software typically includes tools for adding text, adjusting colors, applying filters, and making other adjustments. The program might also employ machine learning and artificial intelligence strategies to suggest adjustments and improve user experience. The user can then see the edits in real time and make further adjustments to reach the desired result.
3. Is the image personalization tool easy to use?
Depending on the specific product and the user’s prior experience with the image personalization tool, using picture personalization software might vary in terms of how simple it is to use. Some hyper-personalization tools might have a steeper learning curve and demand more technical skills, but others might be more approachable and user-friendly for people with little to no design experience. Many picture customization software applications typically offer tutorials, support resources, and user-friendly interfaces to make the process of creating customized photos as straightforward as possible.
4. What features does image personalization software offer?
Software for picture personalization often provides a number of tools to assist users in modifying and customizing photos. Typical characteristics include:
Text editing: Including and modifying text, including changing the font’s style, size, and color.
Image editing: Change the saturation, contrast, and other aspects of the image.
Filter application: Adding effects and filters to photographs to alter their appearance.
Graphic elements: Shapes, lines, and other graphic elements can be added to images.
Templates: Creating customized pictures rapidly using pre-made templates.
Layer management: Layer management is the process of controlling and arranging an image’s various layers to facilitate editing.
Export options: Images can be saved and exported in a variety of file formats.
5. How much does image personalization software cost?
Depending on the particular product and its capabilities, image personalization tool prices might vary greatly. While some picture customizing software is free, others might cost hundreds of dollars. Numerous image personalization software packages also provide a variety of price options, including free basic plans with constrained functionality and paid premium plans with more comprehensive features. In general, the price of picture customization software can range from free to several hundred dollars, and the precise cost will depend on the features and capabilities provided by the software.
6. What are the benefits of using image personalization software?
Increased Engagement: By delivering a more individualized experience, image personalization software can aid in boosting customer engagement with your brand. When customers feel heard and seen, they are more willing to interact with your brand.
Increased Conversion Rates: Image personalization tools can increase conversion rates by producing unique images for clients that are catered to their interests, preferences, and requirements. This may improve the likelihood that people will buy your goods and services.
Increased Brand Visibility: Image personalization tools can assist enhance brand visibility by producing distinctive graphics that are customized to meet the specific requirements of each customer. Customers may be better able to recall your brand as a result, helping to build a more distinctive brand identity.
Enhanced Customer Experience: By producing graphics that are customized to each customer’s specific requirements, image customization software can assist improve the customer experience. Customers may feel more connected to your brand and have a more seamless experience as a result of this.
7. What tools are needed to use image personalization software?
Depending on the software you use, you may require particular tools to use picture customizing software. A computer with enough memory and processing power to support the software, an internet connection, and an image editing tool like Adobe Photoshop or GIMP are typical requirements. Additionally, you might require templates or access to a bank of pictures, as well as knowledge of basic graphic design principles like color, composition, and typography.
8. Can I create custom templates with an image personalization tool?
Yes, you can create distinctive templates using image personalization tools. The software frequently includes a library of templates that may be customized with text, graphics, and design elements. In some cases, depending on the program, you can even create your own templates from scratch.
9. What platforms can I use to run image personalization software?
Depending on the particular program you’re using and your preferences, you can run an image personalization tool on a variety of systems. Some of the most popular choices are listed below:
Desktop software: You can download picture customizing software to your laptop or desktop computer and utilize it right from your device. Adobe Photoshop, GIMP, and CorelDRAW are a few examples of desktop programs for picture customization.
Cloud-based software: Using cloud-based software, you can access a distant server and perform picture modification programs from there online. If you wish to work from several devices or collaborate with others, this can be a suitable alternative. Canva, PicMonkey, and Adobe Creative Cloud are a few examples of cloud-based tools for image customization.
10. Is image personalization software compatible with other applications?
Yes, image personalization tools can be linked to other applications and platforms like eCommerce sites, content management systems, and CRM tools. Additionally, some image-personalization software has APIs that facilitate connections to other web-based applications.
Winding Up
An efficient strategy to boost your marketing efforts and consumer engagement is to employ an image personalization tool. Businesses may tailor pictures depending on consumer behavior and preferences with the correct tools and techniques, increasing conversion rates and improving customer happiness.
Whether you are new to image personalization or have been using it for a while, Personalize.cc by 500apps is the best image personalization tool for businesses looking to add a personal touch to their marketing efforts. Its advanced features and user-friendly interface make it a great choice for companies of all sizes. Whether you’re looking to improve customer engagement, increase brand loyalty, or simply enhance your marketing strategies, Personalize.cc has got you covered. Give it a try and see the results for yourself!
In the world of online content, the tools we use really matter. I’ve seen the challenges that can be encountered when handling a mix of articles, reviews, and other content. This is where the blend of Notion and WordPress comes into play.
Notion offers a great space for planning and teamwork. Its flexible templates and team features make it a top choice for content groups, big or small. Meanwhile, WordPress is a trusted platform for publishing, known for its user-friendly nature and wide range of add-ons.
Using Notion WP Sync to integrate Notion and WordPress, we’ve created a method to build and monitor your content hub. The result? We can plan content smoothly in Notion and then easily publish it on WordPress.
Notion WP Sync – You must have the Notion WP Sync Pro+ version.
Set Up Your Notion Database
In Notion, a database is a dynamic tool that allows users to organize, store, and manage information in a structured manner. Unlike traditional text documents, Notion’s databases provide a more visual and interactive way to handle data.
They can be presented in various formats, such as tables, boards (similar to Trello boards), calendars, galleries, or lists.
You’ll want to set up your data in Notion to get started. You will want to make sure that the data is in a table. If you haven’t done so already, here is a tutorial on creating a Notion database.
Setting Up Notion WP Sync
When working with Notion WP Sync, it’s crucial to understand the complexities of its connection system. Every type of content import requires a dedicated connection.
Plan accordingly and make the most of your synchronization efforts.
Installing And Activating Notion WP Sync
It is important to note that you can not have both the free version of Notion WP Sync, shown as WP Sync for Notion in the WordPress repository, and one of the paid versions of Notion WP Sync installed and activated. In fact, you will receive an error, and one version will be automatically deactivated.
Install and activate the plugin on your WordPress site to begin utilizing Notion WP Sync. Follow these steps:
Download the plugin file to your computer.
Log in to your WordPress dashboard.
On the left side menu, click “Plugins” and “Add New.”
Click the “Upload Plugin” button at the top of the page
Click the “Choose File” button and select the plugin file you downloaded in step 1.
Click the “Install Now” button.
Wait for the plugin to be installed, and then click the “Activate” button.
Creating the Database Connection
Next, we want to set up the workflow between the Notion database and the WordPress site. Precision is key when importing a database from Notion into WordPress.
You may think, “I do not want to import every article at once.” or, “I think importing a lot of content at once could be overwhelming for the team,” or the content is in various stages of implementation, as seen in the screenshot below. This is where the filter option in the connection setup comes into play. Let me explain.
Filtering Your Data
By using the Post Status column in the Notion database, we can select which items to import during the Connection setup.
You can even set up a set of conditions using the + Add Filter Group option. This is useful when your workflow requires multiple team members to interact with the project before importing is set up.
Next, we want to map all fields to be used in the actual post. This is where we utilize the Advanced Custom Fields integration.
In this tutorial, we set up a custom field to provide the assigned author with additional research information or specific tasks related to the content.
In addition to mapping contextual information for the author, we will also map all of the Yoast SEO data that we have stored in the Notion database and the proposed content brief.
Now click on Publish.
Once you have published the connection, you will need to create the initial sync by clicking the Sync Now button.
Navigate over to the Posts menu and check out your mapping setup. Here, you can see the content instructions for the author and the imported Yoast Meta in the post editor.
Putting the pieces together
Thanks to Notion WP Sync, You can seamlessly import all the pieces of your workflow from Notion into your WordPress site.
You have the ability to map fields to your page builders’ templates or simply publish the content as seen in Notion.
Once your document has been published, you can see that all markup, such as headings, has been imported into your content.
Final Tips
There are a couple of things that are worth noting. Understanding each of these helped create a simplistic and stress-free integration between Notion and WordPress.
Creating connections: Notion WP Sync needs one data connection per import task.
Tip for assigning authors: Currently, in order to sync intended authors to new content assignments automatically, you will need to create a data connection for each author. You would then filter each connection based on who the assignment is delegated to. This setup uses the author column to filter when assignments are imported and to which author the assignment is given.
Notion database setup with author columnNotion WP Sync filtering options: Filtered on Author Column
Post Status: If you set your post to pending, your content will be unpublished and reset to pending with each subsequent update. If you set your post to publish, the content will immediately be live to the public. This is important when considering your workflow process.
Page Content: The actual database column in Notion does not allow for CSS or HTML markup, such as H2 and H3 headers. However, if you click open on the page entry you are working on, you can actually create your page to be imported below the fields you have set.
Click the OPEN link for page content.Create page content below comments.
Important: When mapping the information below the comment section, you are going to choose “Page Content” from Notion and “Content” within your WordPress connection.
In Summary
Notion and WordPress can be seamlessly integrated using Notion WP Sync, allowing users to plan content in Notion and publish it on WordPress. This integration requires setting up a Notion database, installing specific plugins, and understanding data connections and content mapping. The process ensures efficient content management, bridging the planning phase in Notion with the publishing capabilities of WordPress.
Welcome to your ultimate guide on cohort analysis!
Let’s face it, cohort analysis is the unsung hero of data analysis. It’s like the Batman of customer behaviour, working behind the scenes to save the day for your business.
If you’re reading this blog, there’s a good chance you already know that understanding customer behaviour and continually optimising your strategies are critical for success. Among the various analytical techniques available, cohort analysis stands out as a powerful (and, in our opinion, under-utilised) strategy that allows you to gain meaningful insights into how different customers are behaving. It can provide valuable actions to increase customer retention and reduce that all-important churn, which in turn, helps keep acquisition costs down.
We’ll dive into what a cohort analysis actually is, what insights you can expect to gain, and how we go about conducting this for our clients at Blend. Get ready to unlock valuable customer insights and make data-driven decisions that drive your success.
What Is Cohort Analysis?
Let’s start with the basics. Cohort analysis is a quantitative analytical technique that involves segmenting customers into groups (or cohorts) based on shared characteristics or behaviours. These cohorts are typically defined by a specific time period, such as the month or quarter of a customer’s first purchase or registration. By tracking these groups of customers over time, you can gain a deeper understanding of customer trends and make data-driven business decisions.
Cohort analysis goes beyond surface-level analysis and allows you to dive into the nitty-gritty of customer behaviour. It’s a great activity to undertake if you’re looking for next-level insights into customer retention, engagement and lifetime value. In short, it can provide a granular understanding and reveal hidden patterns you can learn and grow your business from.
If you want to reduce churn and improve your customer lifetime value (CLV), listen up. Here’s why you should be excited about diving into cohort analysis and conducting this regularly:
Uncover Retention Insights:
Cohort analysis allows you to assess customer retention rates over time. By comparing the behaviour of different cohorts, you’ll be able to discover trends, patterns, and factors influencing customer loyalty. This information is invaluable for developing strategies to enhance your customer experiences, tackle churn, and build long-term relationships.
Optimise Customer Acquisition and Retention:
Through cohort analysis, you can identify cohorts that show higher customer lifetime value, discover when and how they reached your site, and any additional factors that give you a clear view of why that cohort is more engaged than others. It doesn’t stop at just the identification of these cohorts: once you’ve discovered trends, patterns and factors that influence your customer loyalty, you should then focus your resources on acquiring or retaining customers from these high-value cohorts.
By tailoring marketing efforts and personalised experiences to specific cohorts, you can optimise your strategies and drive long-term profitability.
Evaluate Marketing Campaigns and Initiatives:
Say goodbye to guesswork and one-dimensional analytics! Cohort analysis provides a means to evaluate the effectiveness of marketing campaigns, product launches, and other initiatives. By tracking the performance of cohorts exposed to different strategies, you’ll gain insights into the most successful approaches and can then refine your future efforts (and maximise impact!) accordingly.
Here’s What You’ll Gain, and How You Can Utilise Cohort Analysis to Grow
Cohort analysis generates a wealth of valuable information, so prepare to be empowered with new insights. You can create a confident, data-driven strategy. Here are some key types of information derived from cohort analysis and how you can leverage this data:
Retention Rates: Cohort analysis helps you understand how well your business retains customers over time. By comparing retention rates across cohorts, it’s easy to identify which cohorts have the highest and lowest retention. Armed with this knowledge, you can focus on improving customer experiences, addressing pain points, and implementing strategies to increase overall retention.
Customer Lifetime Value: Cohort analysis enables you to calculate the CLV for different customer segments. By understanding the CLV of specific cohorts, your business can allocate resources effectively, prioritise high-value customer segments, and tailor marketing efforts to maximise returns. This data is invaluable when it comes to shaping customer acquisition and retention strategies.
Behaviour Patterns: Cohort analysis reveals behavioural patterns within customer segments. By analysing the behaviour of different cohorts, you’ll identify preferred channels, product preferences, and engagement patterns. Armed with this information, you can personalise your offerings, optimise customer experiences, and enhance overall customer satisfaction.
Seasonal Effects: Cohort analysis helps you identify seasonal trends and understand how cohorts respond to them. By recognising the impact of seasonality on customer behaviour, you’ll be able to plan promotional activities based on data, inventory management, and customer support strategies accordingly. Aligning your strategies and capitalising on the most relevant seasonal opportunities for your customer base, you’ll be able to optimise resources and drive exceptional results.
How We Conduct a Cohort Analysis Report at Blend
Now, let’s dive into the step-by-step process of conducting a cohort analysis report. There are plenty of different ways to do this (and some are more effective than others). At Blend, we regularly conduct cohort analysis for our clients, and it must be your lucky day as we’re sharing our playbook on how we achieve these super-powered insights.
We recommend following these steps to unlock valuable data:
Define the Cohort: Choose the specific characteristic or behaviour that will define your cohorts. Examples include signup date, first purchase date, acquisition channel or product category preference. Ensure that the chosen criteria are relevant to your business objectives.
Set the Time Period: Choose the time intervals for your analysis, such as monthly, quarterly, or annual cohorts. The selection depends on the nature of your business, the available data, and the insights you seek.
Gather Data: Collect the necessary data for each cohort, including customer information, purchase history, engagement metrics, demographics, and any other relevant data points. Ensure the data is accurate, complete, and well-organised – trust us, it’ll make the analysis so much easier.
Calculate Metrics: Calculate the key performance metrics for each cohort, which may include things such as retention rate, average revenue per customer, CLV, and engagement metrics. We recommend using appropriate formulas and statistical techniques to discover meaningful insights.
Visualise and Analyse: Present your findings using visualisations like line graphs, bar charts, or heatmaps. Analyse the trends, patterns, and anomalies within cohorts to gain actionable insights. Look for significant differences or similarities between cohorts and identify factors driving those differences.
Draw Conclusions and Make Recommendations: Based on the cohort analysis, draw meaningful conclusions about customer behaviour, preferences, and retention patterns. Identify opportunities for improvement, develop data-driven recommendations for marketing strategies, product development, customer retention efforts, and customer experience enhancements.
There are a wealth of tools and apps available to make this information easier to gather and analyse. We recommend utilising Peel, our go-to all-in-one data solution to conduct a cohort analysis. With Peel, you can manipulate the data with a few clicks and visualise the data easily.
You’re Ready to Go!
Congratulations! You’ve now unlocked the power of cohort analysis. Armed with this knowledge, you can now make informed decisions and optimise your business strategies accordingly, like never before.
By conducting thorough cohort analysis and leveraging the insights it provides, you can unravel the complexities of customer behaviour, unlock opportunities for improvement, and drive long-term success in today’s competitive marketplace.
Don’t know where to start? No worries. That’s why we’re here. Contact us today if you’re serious about using cohort analysis to deliver exceptional customer experiences, outshine your competitors and achieve your business goals.
The 16 Licenses and Permits Needed to Open a Restaurant
Opening a restaurant is a dream come true for owners, managers and chefs alike, but there’s a lot of paperwork that needs to be filled before that dream becomes a reality, specifically, all the licenses and permits needed to open a restaurant and ensure it’s legally compliant.
Surely you knew you needed a liquor license, but did you know that to open a new restaurant you need dozens of restaurant licenses and permits before you can welcome guests?
Applying for and acquiring each of these restaurant licenses and permits involves a lot of paperwork and patience, but it’s absolutely necessary.
That’s why we’ve put together a list of the 16 licenses and permits you need to open a restaurant the right way and avoid any penalties in the future.
Let’s dive in!
The restaurant permits and licenses you need: an overview
Register your business name
Business license
Certificate of occupancy
Sign permit
Foodservice license
Employer Identification Number (EIN)
Food handler’s permit
Building health permit
Liquor license
Live entertainment and music license
Resale permit
Sales tax license
Dumpster placement permit
Seller’s permit
Valet parking permit
Foodtruck permit
The POS for modern restaurants
Lightspeed is a complete technology suite for modern restaurants, from quick service to full service and everything in between.
Think of this as identity protection for your restaurant. You’re ensuring that no other business can operate using your name. There are three ways you can do this:
File a DBA
The easiest way to register your business name is to file for a DBA (Doing Business As).
What is a DBA?
A DBA is the operating name of a company, as opposed to the company’s legal name. Some states require DBA or fictitious business name filings to be made to protect consumers who do business with the entity.
How do you file for a DBA?
Procedures to file for a fictitious name vary from state to state. In many cases, you have to go to your county office and pay a registration fee to the county clerk. Depending on your jurisdiction, filing for a DBA can take anywhere between 1 to 4 weeks.
How much it cost to file for a DBA?
The cost to file a DBA varies by state, but for it generally costs between $10 to $100.
Create a business structure
This is the most common path. Here is where you decide the type of business you will run. There are three business structures to choose from: a sole proprietorship, Limited Liability Company (LLC) or corporation.
What is a sole proprietorship?
A sole proprietorship is the simplest type of business under which one can operate. It’s not a legal entity, it’s simply a person who owns a business and is personally responsible for its debts. Income and losses are taxed on the individual’s personal income tax return.
A sole proprietorship can operate either under the name of its owner (like freelancers, for example) or under a fictitious name, such as Johnny’s Burger Bar.
What is a Limited Liability Company (LLC)?
Unlike a sole proprietorship, an LLC is a corporate structure in the U.S. where the owners are not personally liable for the company’s debts or liabilities. LLCs are hybrid entities that share characteristics of a corporation, partnership or sole proprietorship.
To see whether or not an LLC is right for you, we suggest checking out this informative blog from Investopedia.
What is a corporation?
Almost all of the biggest, most well-known companies in the world are corporations, like McDonald’s and Starbucks.
A corporation is a legal entity that is distinct and separate from its owners. Corporations benefit from many of the rights and responsibilities of an individual person: they can enter contracts, loan and borrow money, own assets and pay taxes. A corporation’s most important aspect is its limited liability.
File a trademark application
This third option requires you to file a trademark application with your state or country to prevent others from using your business name.
Many business owners mistakenly think that filing incorporation papers for your restaurant automatically extends some sort of trademark protection for that name in the process. However, this isn’t the case. While it is true that your incorporation request will be denied if you try to incorporate “Jackson’s Country Cooking, Inc.” in your state but another business is already incorporated with that name, it is completely separate from the trademark process. An approved state incorporation request does not mean that you have free and clear rights to the business name—it simply means that no other business in your state may incorporate with that name. Businesses in your state can incorporate with similar names, and businesses in other states can incorporate with the same exact name.
The reality is that the incorporation and trademark processes are two completely different processes. For the greatest level of protection for your restaurant, file for trademark protection from the USPTO or CIPO for your name.
What is a trademark?
A trademark protects anything used to identify your business from others (words, names, symbols, devices or any combination of these). Trademarks indicate the source of the goods and services produced.
Filing for federal trademark protection for your name not only gives you recourse if a competitor opens a similarly named business just down the road from yours, but it also gives you (and anyone who may want to buy your successful restaurant) the option to grow locally, regionally and even nationally, with the confidence that another brand won’t be able to benefit from your hard work.
Arbitrary or fanciful names offer the greatest level of trademark protection, while names that are generic or merely descriptive may not qualify for trademark protection at all. For example, if you’re opening up your new barbecue restaurant, naming it “Blue Moon Bar-B-Que” or “Holy Smokes Barbecue” is more likely to obtain trademark approval than a name like “Best Barbeque” or “Texas Barbecue.” As you’re considering name choices for your restaurant, work with a trademark attorney to ensure that the names are available and have a good chance of receiving trademark protection.
2. Business license
To operate a business, no matter where you live, you need a business license.
A business license is one of the most important restaurant licenses and permits. It gives you legal permission to operate a business. The process of acquiring a business differs depending on which country or state you live in.
In the United States, the license has to be based on your restaurant’s address.
How do I get a restaurant business license?
You need to visit your city or county’s license center and register for your business license on the state level. You can visit the U.S. Small Business Administration (SBA)’s website to find out the state and city-specific rules for obtaining a business license.
Fundera also put together a comprehensive blog covering how to apply for a business license in each state.
In Canada, you can incorporate your business federally and/or provincially.
How do you decide? Think about the future of your restaurant. If you’re only planning to operate in one province, incorporate with your provincial government. If you plan to open multiple locations across the country, you may want to incorporate on both the provincial and federal level.
How much does a restaurant business license cost?
The cost to obtain a restaurant business license varies by province or city and state, though it is generally around USD$50 for most applications. However, other costs associated with obtaining your business license can vary from as much as USD$25 to $7,000.
3. Certificate of occupancy
As soon as your restaurant’s commercial space has passed its final building inspection, your local building or zoning department in your city will issue you a certificate of occupancy.
What is arestaurant certificate of occupancy?
A certificate of occupancy certifies that your building has been properly constructed and maintained.
How to get a certificate of occupancy for your restaurant
The procedure for getting a certificate of occupancy varies depending on the jurisdiction in which your business operates, as well as the building’s structure.
In order to obtain a certificate of occupancy, your restaurant’s building must pass a series of inspections. These inspections can include plumbing, electrical, fire safety and general building inspection.
To start the process of obtaining your certificate of occupancy, contact your local government (usually the county or province’s building department).
4. Sign permit
Before you put up signage of any kind to draw attention to your restaurant, you need a sign permit from your city government. The standards around acceptable size, location and lighting vary by city. If you’re renting or leasing your restaurant space (rather than purchasing it outright) it’s also a good idea to get written approval from your landlord to go along with the official sign permit.
How to get a sign permit
Typically, outdoor signs must be approved by your local government. Be sure to look into your city’s specific requirements and don’t make any assumptions.
5. Foodservice license
In order to serve food in a restaurant, you need a food service license, which is generally issued by the city or county health department.
The health department will visit your establishment in-person to ensure that you are adhering to all restaurant food safety regulations. Once you acquire your food service license, the health department will continue to regularly inspect your restaurant. If you fail any of their inspections, you risk losing your food service license—so it’s important that you’re always prepared.
How to get a foodservice license
You can acquire a food service license either online or in-person from your local health department. You have the option of applying for either a temporary, fixed or mobile food service license.
When you apply, you need your restaurant name, address for a permanent kitchen facility (even if you’re operating a food truck) and the restaurant owner’s personal information.
In some instances, your foodservice license may expire automatically, so it’s important to read the fine print concerning your license renewal.
In the United States, you should start by reviewing the food vendor’s application requirements for your specific state with the U.S. Food and Drug Administration.
In 2019, Canada released the Safe Food for Canadians Regulations. You’ll want to be sure you read up on these new requirements and ensure your foodservice licenses are up to date.
How much does a foodservice license cost?
Foodservice license fees are often based on the classification and size of the restaurant, as well as your location. As a rule of thumb, you should expect a food service license to cost between USD$100-1,000 depending on your location.
6. Employer Identification Number
Similar to a business license, all businesses need to acquire an Employer Identification Number (EIN) to operate in the U.S. and Canada. This nine-digit number is a tax ID that enables you to properly file your taxes.
As far as your employees go, this is the single most important thing you can do for them.
What is a food handler’s permit?
A Food Handler’s Permit (also referred to as an Employee Health Permit) is a permit that ensures your staff members individually have completed a food safety certification. This permit ensures your restaurant meets very important regulations for food sanitation, storage, protection and preparation.
How to get a food handler’s permit
Every state and province has different requirements for what certifications and courses are required.
In the United States, ServSafe is a good resource to learn the requirements and take the courses online. Once you pass, you can print the certification for a fee. While that fee varies from state to state, it typically falls between $100 to $500.
In Canada, it varies by province. In Vancouver, for example, you could try FOODSAFE as a resource. The process is similar to the U.S.: take the course online or in a classroom, print the certificate for a fee and get to work.
8. Building health permit
Similar to how your restaurant had to pass an inspection for its food service license, your building may also need to pass an inspection for its building health permit.
Normally, you can obtain a building health permit from your city or county health department at the same time as when you apple for a business license.
How to get a building health permit
Unlike a food service license, however, not every state or province requires a building health permit. Google your state + building health permit to learn about your state’s policies.
Keep in mind that your restaurant will be inspected for this the same way as your health permit and after passing, must be prepared for periodic inspections as well.
9. Liquor license
The food service license you have won’t cover any liquor you choose to serve in your restaurant. To legally serve alcohol at your restaurant, you need a liquor license.
How to get a liquor license
In the United States, every state has it’s own Alcohol Beverage Control (ABC) Board. To start the process of obtaining a liquor license, you’ll want to contact them to learn your state’s laws and processes. They’re in charge of regulating the sale of alcohol.
In Canada, you must own and operate the business and then apply for a license with your province’s Alcohol and Gaming Commission. You’ll fill out forms on their website and submit fees and also have to meet and local requirements for health and safety.
What type of liquor license do I need?
A good background to know is that there are two main types of liquor licenses: on-license and off-license.
You will need an on-license liquor license if the alcohol you sell is intended to be consumed on the premises of your business—for example, a bar or restaurant.
You will need an off-license if the alcohol you sell is intended to be consumed off the premises—for example, a liquor store or grocery store.
As a bar or restaurant owner, you’ll always be looking to obtain an on-license liquor license. Nonetheless, most states have several classes of liquor licenses so you’ll want to go over all of these requirements.
Other types of liquor licenses
When you’ve determined whether you’ll need an on-premise or off-premise liquor license, you’ll need to obtain the right permit for the type and/or amount of alcohol you want to serve.
Restaurant liquor license. a general liquor license that allows you to serve all types of alcohol (also referred to as an “all liquor license”).
Beer and wine liquor license. this will suffice if you plan to serve only beer and wine, but no hard liquor or spirits.
Tavern liquor license. for an establishment whose sales are more than 50% liquor, but also offers food.
10. Live entertainment and music license
Restaurants and bars need a license from performance rights organizations such as BMI, ASCAP or SESAC to avoid copyright infringement, which can cost between $250 and $500 for background music. Rates vary further depending on if the music is live or recorded, as well as the number of nights music is playing per week and whether or not there’s an entrance fee, amongst other factors. Playing copyrighted music without a license can cost anywhere from $750 to $30,000 in fines.
How to apply for a live entertainment or music license
ASCAP can help you in the United States and SOCAN in Canada.
To make this easier for small businesses, Spotify has created a service called Soundtrack Your Brand, which includes pre-licensed soundtracks that you can play in your business, all covered by the monthly subscription fee. However, before signing up, we still recommend checking in with your state laws to ensure that this service has you completely covered.
11. Resale permit
A resale permit enables your restaurant to make specific nontaxable purchases (like wholesale food, for example) if they are to be used for manufacturing products for resale (like your meals).
Resale certificates avoid the double collection of sales tax on those purchases. What that means is that, rather than collecting sales tax on the product when you first buy it, it’s only collected when your customer buys it.
How to get a resale permit
Whether or not you need a sales permit depends on your state and your annual sales. Depending on whether your business is located in the U.S. or Canada, you simply need to apply via your government website.
12. Sales tax license
Sometimes also called a sales tax license, this allows you to legally collect sales tax in your state. This can also be called a sellers permit or sales tax license.
13. Dumpster placement permit
A dumpster permit enables your restaurant to place a dumpster outside your kitchen, where your chefs can dispose of food waste.
How much does a dumpster placement permit cost?
The cost of a dumpster permit varies based on the size of the dumpster, its placement and your restaurant’s location.
14. Seller’s permit
In the United States and Canada, a seller’s permit (also referred to as a Sales Tax Permit) allows your state or province to identify a business as a collector of sales tax. Most businesses in the food and beverage industry need a seller’s permit, along with a resale permit.
How to get a seller’s permit
You can get a seller’s permit by visiting your local government’s website.
How much does a seller’s permit cost?
There’s no cost associated to applying for a seller’s permit, but you may need to leave a security deposit in the event that your restaurant closes and you have unpaid taxes (but let’s work together to increase your restaurant’s profit margins and make sure that doesn’t happen). The amount of that deposit will only be determined once you formally apply.
15. Valet parking permit
If you’re planning to offer valet parking to your guests, you may need a permit to do so.
How to get a valet parking permit
To apply, you generally need to supply a detailed plan of the designated pickup and drop off area as well as the number of parking spaces you need. You’ll also need a letter of agreement between you and your preferred vendor.
16. Foodtruck permit
Food trucks have their own unique sets of licenses and permits. They are a unique type of restaurant, after all!
They generally need all the same licenses as any other restaurant, with the exception of one: mobile food vendor permits. Depending on the city or province, there can be year-long waitlists. It’s best to do a Google search and learn the process for your state or province early on.
What are your next steps?
If you’re anything like us, you’ve been adding up the costs of all the restaurant licenses and permits you’re going to need, along with how long it’s going to take you to apply and all the paperwork involved.
If you’re operating in the United States, we suggest visiting the U.S. Small Business Administration’s website or a local government site (see below for more info) and getting started as early as possible.
Restaurant license resources, by state
As you may have noticed, the one common theme of restaurant licenses and permits is that “it varies by location.” To make your life easier, we’ve compiled a list of all 50 state food service codes and regulations from the U.S. Food and Drug Administration so you have a jumping-off point on your journey to obtain all the restaurant licenses and permits you need.
But don’t forget to do your homework! If you’re feeling overwhelmed while applying for restaurant licenses and permits, consider hiring a restaurant consultant or an attorney with experience in the food and beverage industry to guide you through the process. Not being compliant can come with some hefty fines, so you’re better off doing things right the first time.
Here are a few other things you should take care of prior to your restaurant’s grand opening:
Build your employee handbook so that your staff are brought up to speed on your restaurant’s guidelines, procedures and workflows as fast as possible.
Attract qualified candidates for each position you need to fill. The first step to attracting great candidates is to put together a killer job ad.
Hire the right people for the right job. We’ve talked with successful restaurateurs to find out exactly what personality traits and skillsets you should look for each position you fill.
Find a point of sale that will support your restaurant’s current needs and support your business as it grows and your needs change. Consider it’s inventory, customer and employee management capabilities, hardware, reporting and customer support.
Why is it important for a restaurant to have all the necessary licenses and permits?
More than just paperwork or documentation, restaurant licenses and permits are essential to maintaining safety in your restaurant, as well as protecting your business from legal headaches and liabilities.
Consider the following.
They ensure legal compliance
When you operate your restaurant without the required licenses and permits, you violate laws and thus can face fines, penalties and even the closure of the restaurant.
Having the right licenses and permits ensures that your restaurant can operate without interruptions.
They help promote the safety of your customers, staff and the general public
Many licenses and permits are designed with safety in mind—for your customers and employees. For example, health permits ensure that the restaurant meets sanitation and food safety standards, reducing the risk of foodborne illnesses. Building safety permits ensure that the establishment is safe in case of emergencies.
They enable you to have the right insurance coverage
Insurance companies often require proof of proper licensing and permitting before providing coverage. If you don’t have these documents, you likely won’t be able to obtain insurance.
And even if you were to get insurance and something were to happen, your provider likely won’t provide the necessary coverage if your licenses and permits aren’t up to snuff.
They help with quality control
Many licenses and permits require inspections and adherence to specific quality standards. These audits and checks ensure that you maintain a certain level of quality in terms of food safety, cleanliness, etc.
Where should you keep or display restaurant licenses and permits?
Where to keep or display your restaurant permits and licenses depends on each document. Some permits—e.g., your health permit and food service license—may need to be displayed where customers can see them. As such, you’ll need to hang them on a wall, ideally near your entrance so customers and inspectors can see them.
Some licenses and permits don’t need to be displayed prominently, but they should still be accessible. It’s best to use a designated binder or folder in which to keep all your restaurant licenses and permits. Keep them in a filing cabinet or the manager’s office.
You should also consider creating digital copies of these documents. Store them in the cloud so you can access them from anywhere. Taking this step provides an additional backup and allows for quick access if needed during inspections or inquiries.
What happens if you don’t have the right restaurant permits and licenses?
Not having the right permits and licenses can have serious legal, financial, and operational consequences, including:
Fines and penalties
Suspension or closure
Criminal charges
Loss of trust
Increased expenses
Insurance issues
That’s quite a list of unnecessary and avoidable headaches, so do yourself (and your entire business)—obtain the right restaurant permits and licenses, and ensure they’re valid at all times.
Grow your business with powerful tools and insights Starting your restaurant is a big undertaking. Luckily, there’s software that can make your day-to-day operations much easier and more efficient. Start a conversation with one of our in-house restaurant experts to learn more about how Lightspeed can give you the tools your restaurant needs to thrive in today’s economy.
How to Add a Cookies Popup in WordPress for GDPR/CCPA (2 Ways)
Do you want to add a cookies consent popup in WordPress?
Your WordPress site may be setting cookies on your visitors’ browsers. However, the European Union’s law requires websites to get user consent before setting any cookies on their computers.
In this article, we will show you how to add a cookies popup in WordPress.
Why Are Cookie Popups Necessary?
Browser cookies are small files containing data sent by a website to store in a user’s browser. Most WordPress websites set cookies for various purposes.
For example, by default, WordPress uses cookies for authentication purposes to store session information for logged-in users. It also sets a cookie when someone leaves a comment on your site.
Apart from these, WordPress plugins can also set their own cookies to store different information or recognize repeat visitors.
While cookies are extremely useful, they can also be used to collect information about a user and share it with third-party advertising platforms.
That’s why in Europe and a few other countries, website owners are required to let users know about their usage of cookies. If your website targets audiences in those regions, then you need to show a cookie consent disclaimer.
The easiest way to do that is with a WordPress GDPR plugin. Cookie Notice and Cookiebot are two of the most popular cookie notification plugins and are compatible with many other popular WordPress plugins.
That being said, let’s take a look at how to easily display a cookie consent popup in WordPress.
Method 1: Add a Cookie Popup with Cookie Notice (Easiest)
Upon activation, the plugin will start to display a basic cookies popup to your visitors right away without any additional configuration. The default message is suitable for most websites.
If you’d like to customize the notification, then you need to visit the Cookies menu item in your WordPress dashboard.
From here, simply scroll down to the Notice Settings section.
On this page, you can customize the popup message and button text.
While it’s not as easy to set up as Cookie Notice and won’t work unless you sign up for a free Cookiebot account, it does offer some additional customization options.
Once activated, a new Cookiebot section is added to your WordPress dashboard. You’ll need to navigate to Cookiebot » Settings in your WordPress dashboard to configure the plugin.
If you don’t already have a Cookiebot ID, then you’ll need to sign up for one by clicking the ‘Create a new Account’ button.
Next, the Cookiebot website will open in a new tab on your browser.
Go ahead and enter your email address and password. You’ll also need to click the terms of service, privacy policy, and DPA checkbox.
Once that’s done, you can click the ‘Create Account’ button.
Next, you’ll see Cookitbot settings. Go ahead and add your website URL under the Domain name field. In the free version, you can only add 1 domain name.
After that, you’ll need to switch to the ‘Your scripts’ tab.
From here, simply copy the ‘Domain Group ID.’
Next, you can head back to the Cookiebot settings in your WordPress dashboard.
Under the General Settings tab, scroll down to the Connect your Domain Group section and enter the ID under the ‘Add your Domain Group ID’ field.
Once that’s done, don’t forget to click the ‘Save Changes’ button at the top.
If you scroll down, you’ll see more settings. For instance, the plugin lets you select a language. By default, it will be set to ‘Autodetect,’ but you can click the dropdown menu to change it.
You can also select Cookie-blocking mode. We recommend using the ‘Automatic cookie-blocking mode’ as the plugin will block all cookies except those that are strictly necessary until a user has given consent.
You might like to check ‘Auto-update Cookiebot’ option in the Advanced Settings tab.
This way, the plugin stays up to date with any changes in GDPR legislation.
For testing purposes, you should also enable the ‘Render Cookiebot CMP on front-end while logged in’ option.
If you leave it disabled, then you won’t see the popup when you’re logged into your WordPress site.
After you’re done with the settings, don’t forget to click the ‘Save Changes’ button at the bottom.
Customize Your Cookie Popup Notice
We’re not finished yet, but we’re getting close. To finish configuring Cookiebot, you now need to return to the Cookiebot website.
Next, you’ll need to navigate to the Banner tab on the Cookiebot website.
Here, you can choose a template, edit the position, and appearance of the popup.
You’ll be able to see the changes by clicking the Preview button or returning to your website.
If you notice that the wording used in the popup doesn’t match the reasons your website uses cookies, then you can change it.
You’ll find the settings to do this by navigating to the Content tab on the Cookiebot website.
You might also want to add a cookie declaration to your website’s privacy policy. If you haven’t already created a privacy policy page, then you can follow our guide on how to create a privacy policy page in WordPress.
You need to start by navigating to the Declaration tab on Cookiebot’s website. By default, the cookie declaration uses Cookiebot’s default wording.
If you need to customize the message because your website uses cookies for a different reason, then you need a premium Cookiebot subscription.
Alternatively, you can just type your own declaration into your privacy policy, but you’d miss out on features such as links where visitors can change or withdraw their consent.
In this tutorial, we’ll add the default declaration to our privacy policy. You just need to edit your privacy policy and insert the shortcode[cookie_declaration] where you want to display the cookie declaration.
To see the declaration you need to save and preview the page.
This is how the first few paragraphs look on our test website.
Bonus: Improve GDPR Compliance with MonsterInsights
MonsterInsights is the best analytics solution for your WordPress site. It’s also the simplest way to improve your compliance with GDPR and other privacy regulations.
That’s because MonsterInsights offers an EU Compliance addon that works out of the box. It will automatically change your analytics settings to help you stay in compliance with privacy laws.
The EU compliance addon is included in the premium plan. The best thing is that it automatically integrates with both Cookie Notice and Cookiebot.
Once MonsterInsights is installed and set up, you’ll need to install and activate the EU Compliance addon.
You can do that by navigating to the Insights » Addons page in your WordPress dashboard. Next, find the EU Compliance addon and click on the ‘Install’ button.
The addon will be automatically activated.
You can check this by going to the MonsterInsights » Settings page and switching to the ‘Engagement’ tab.
When you look at the EU Compliance section, you will see that the addon has been turned on.
If you click the down arrow on the right side of the screen, then you can see a detailed list of the configuration changes the addon has made to your website.
For instance, you can see that it automatically anonymized IP addresses in Google Analytics, disabled demographics, and interest reports, disabled UserID tracking, and much more.
Next, you can scroll down to see MonsterInsights compatibility with different cookie plugins like Cookie Notice and CookieBot.
MonsterInsights will automatically make changes to the Google Analytics tracking code if any of the plugins are installed on your site. This way, it will wait for consent before tracking users in Google Analytics.
We hope this article helped you add a cookie consent popup to your WordPress site.
It’s evident that brands and retailers that effectively create personalized shopping experiences for individual customers can drive customer loyalty and increase sales. Customers are 76 percent more likely to consider buying from brands that personalize the consumer experience, according to a 2021 report by McKinsey & Company.
There are many ways to help your merchant clients personalize shopping experiences for their customers—but what strategies are actually successful? And, crucially, what mistakes should brands avoid when incorporating personalization into their ecommerce strategy?
For this article, we quizzed leading Shopify Partners and personalization experts for their insights into the biggest personalization pitfalls you should avoid and what to do instead to create more engaging digital customer experiences on your clients’ ecommerce stores.
Let’s start with a look at how segmentation can help tailor the shopping experience to specific customer groups and increase your client’s conversions.
Build apps for Shopify merchants
Whether you want to build apps for the Shopify App Store, offer custom app development services, or are looking for ways to grow your user base, the Shopify Partner Program will set you up for success. Join for free and access educational resources, developer preview environments, and recurring revenue share opportunities.
1. Focusing personalization only on the core customers
One of the biggest mistakes Francis Pilon, director of sales at LimeSpot, sees brands make when approaching personalization is to assume that a baseline implementation targeting their core customers is sufficient and will have a positive impact on all shoppers on their site.
“Even within a common demographic or a targeted product set, visitors have different needs, shopping goals, and buying behaviors,” Pilon explains. “The impact of only targeting that baseline user is that other segments of visitors do not connect with the brand experience and remain unengaged.”
The impact of only targeting that baseline user is that other segments of visitors do not connect with the brand experience and remain unengaged.
Pilon suggests considering a skincare brand whose primary target market is women: The core demographic is women aged 25-40, however there are others who come to the site. For example, there may be a strong segment of older women, with different needs and different buying criteria, who want to be acknowledged with a customized experience. Understanding how to effectively tailor their shopping experience and delight them can have a huge impact on a brand’s bottom line.
So what steps should you take to more effectively personalize your merchant clients’ shopping experience for these audiences?
Pilon recommends starting by defining key segments based on their lifecycle stage, affinity, and context, such as first-time visitors, collections, and geolocation. Using a platform that provides real-time segmentation can both help you identify what these segments are, and give you the ability to target them.
“For instance, if a majority of first-time shoppers show interest in sustainable practices you may want to show them social proof on the homepage for validation,” Pilon suggests. “Whereas returning customers who are already knowledgeable about the brand may want to easily find related items to what they’ve purchased in the past.”
Once you have your hypotheses, Pilon advises beginning with some basic customization—as few as two to three components of the shopping experience, such as product recommendations, category merchandising, and content, can make the difference. Then A/B test to measure effectiveness; adjust, expand, and repeat.
Begin with some basic customization, then A/B test to measure effectiveness. Adjust, expand, and repeat.
Most brands already understand the benefit of segmentation-based customizations, Pilon says. However, until recently, only larger brands had the resources required to turn such knowledge into actionable insights. Fortunately there are now powerful, affordable, low-effort personalization solutions for brands of all sizes—and using a one-size-fits-all model is leaving money on the table.
LimeSpot enables you to transform any element on an ecommerce site into a targeted message with personalized images, text, and CTAs (Source: LimeSpot).
2. Limiting personalization to just one area of your store
Kate Collinson, an ecommerce consultant and growth marketer specializing in Shopify and Shopify Plus, warns against just focusing on one area of a store when implementing personalized experiences.
“Think about how it can provide a customer value throughout every touchpoint with your business,” she advises. “Personalization is a value exchange—the customer needs to see value in handing over their private information.”
Collinson points to her client, Shopify merchant Kat The Label, as a best practice example. The Australian lingerie store uses a quiz to help customers to find their size in a product, and then remembers it throughout the browsing experience, so the customer is reminded of their relevant size throughout the entire journey.
Collinson takes it a step further by syncing this data with the CRM in combination with what is received from other platforms such as Okendo reviews and back-in-stock notifications to segment communications with customers.
Lingerie store Kat The Label helps customers find their right product size and then remembers it throughout the customer journey (Source: Kat The Label).
3. Not tracking data from the experience itself
Another common mistake Collinson sees merchants make is investing a lot of time and energy in using the data from their CRM or survey to create a personalized experience for their customers, but then not setting up data points to assess how it impacts the business’ bottom line.
As a Shopify Partner you can guide merchants on this to demonstrate the return on any work. Focus on the metrics that are going to move the needle, not just vanity metrics of what’s been achieved.
“Whether it’s using Google Tag Manager or an in-built analytics platform, identify the metrics that would prove something is working. And ensure you set up any relevant tags upfront so you can analyze how customers are responding to your personalized experience,” Collinson suggests.
For example, if you’re using custom CRM data to trigger an automated series to guide the customer, this may be built into the platform you’re using. But Collinson recommends that if you’re customizing what the customer interacts with on the homepage through something like Shopify Scripts, you’ll need to set up custom tags to analyze this data in Google Analytics or a similar platform.
The biggest errors stores make can be easily fixed with developer support.
Meanwhile, Freddie Wynne and Adam Goodman, product managers at LoyaltyLion, believe the biggest errors stores make can be easily fixed with developer support. They suggest avoiding the following four personalization pitfalls and advise on what to do instead to drive a better digital customer experience:
4.Not pre-filling fields where possible
This one is simple: don’t make your customers do any extra work, especially if you want to provide a seamless, personalized shopping experience. Pre-populating information for customers removes friction and improves conversion rates.
5. Not showing prices or shipping rates in local currencies
Research shows that 76 percent of consumers prefer making payments in their local currency, and they certainly don’t want to be surprised with generic shipping rates. Reduce basket abandonment by delivering on the details and localizing their shopping experiences.
6. Not creating a sense of urgency
Notifications around limited stock or back-in-stock alerts can prompt shoppers to make their next purchase sooner, or prevent them from dropping off completely. Applying order cut-off times for next-day delivery can also help to move them through their transaction faster.
7. Not capitalizing on the integrations between Shopify apps
Tools should be set up to talk to one another so that data points can be passed from one to another to deliver more personalized and engaging experiences. This can include, for example, passing loyalty data points from LoyaltyLion into emails or SMS sent from Klaviyo, or enabling support teams to see loyalty statuses and points balances as they work within Gorgias.
It’s essential to keep in mind that personalization can also lead to negative outcomes if not executed correctly, warns Juan Manuel Gonzalez, founder and CEO of strategy retail consulting firm G & Co.
Personalization can also lead to negative outcomes if not executed correctly.
Specifically, Gonzales points to three critical mistakes:
8. Invading customers’ privacy by collecting too much personal information
Brands should only ask for information that is relevant to the shopping experience and avoid using data for purposes other than enhancing the customer experience. Moreover, companies should implement robust security measures to protect customers’ sensitive information from data breaches.
9. Over-personalizing the experience
While personalization is meant to improve the shopping experience, bombarding customers with too many personalized recommendations and advertisements can quickly become overwhelming and alienating. Companies should strive for a balance between personalization and a customer-friendly experience.
10. Personalizing experiences based solely on demographic information or past purchases
Personalization must go beyond this and take into account customers’ current context and behavior. For example, if a customer is browsing on a mobile device, they may have different needs and preferences than if they were browsing on a desktop computer, vice versa.
Ross Beyeler, the chief operating officer at Trellis Commerce, meanwhile thinks brands should also consider the following seven mistakes when incorporating personalization into their ecommerce strategy:
11. Limiting product recommendations to the PDP
A product detail page (PDP) will likely have a “recommended products” section below the “add to cart button.” While this is a great starting point for providing product recommendations and upselling customers, there are many other areas within your website that you should consider.
Tools like Nosto make adding product recommendations to search results, collection pages, landing pages, and the shopping cart easy and personalized based on customer behavior and shopping history.
12. Missing out on empty search results
If your company sells more than a handful of SKUs, customers will likely search for something that leads them to a “dead end.”
Instead of giving them a “No results” message, tools like Algolia allow you to take note of these searches and set up custom redirects or product recommendations that might be a close match to what customers are seeking.
13. Forgetting to do retargeting
Retargeting customers already engaged with your brand is one of the most turnkey ways of personalizing your interaction with them.
Tools like Yotpo allow you to capitalize on products viewed, products added to cart, etc., which can be a valuable way to convert visitors into buyers.
14. Discounting low margin products
Promotions such as discounts and offers are essential in driving sales, particularly for value-minded customers. However, failing to keep an eye on product margins can lead to significant losses. You’ll want to make sure whatever promotions you’re running consider the “landed cost” of products (i.e. COGS, shipping/handling, return rates, etc.).
15. Overlooking first-party data
Personalization is about using what you know about customers to inform how you engage with them. Since iOS14, much of the previously procured data from social media platforms is no longer accessible.
That change has given rise to “first-party data,” where merchants introduce tactics such as post-purchase surveys using tools like Fairing to build their own set of customer data.
16. Giving away more than you need to
Pricing discounts are a great way to drive conversion, but you should consider testing “how much is enough” to ensure you’re not giving away more margin than you need to.
Apps like Dexter allow you to run A/B tests on product prices, and platforms like Talon.One will enable you to personalize and test your promotional campaigns as a whole.
17. Failing to differentiate by customer journey
Not all visitors are created equal. You’ll want to offer different promotions and recommendations based on where they are in their “customer journey.” Consider whether they’re a new vs. returning customer, first-time or repeat visitor, someone who has spent a lot of time on the website, etc.
Tools like Bloomreach allow you to incorporate this content into content, promotion, and product personalization.
Bloomreach’s integration with Shopify enables the introduction of data-driven personalization into an commerce experience regardless of whether it’s a headless or traditional online store.
18. Forcing brands to work with disconnected tech stacks
Christina Donati, content and partner marketing lead at Alloy Automation, explains that at one point in the past few years the SaaS companies that power ecommerce tech stacks deprioritized integrations. And she understands why:
“It was difficult for these startup companies to balance building integrations while improving their product,” Donati points out. “One of these things had to give. Unfortunately, building out core product features takes priority. So, many companies put integrations on hold to increase market share and reach more customers. Because of this, we see more siloed tools than ever.”
According to Donati, however, brands need integrations, and as more siloed tools enter the market, brands are left with disconnected tech stacks—and lots of manual work completing time-consuming tasks.
“This is a recipe for churn for SaaS companies that aren’t offering integrations,” Donati cautions. “For brands, this means they can’t automate specific tasks and are left spending hours every week on manual work, or they’re forced to pay agencies a lot of money for custom integrations.”
Donati therefore believes that tech companies need to get back to also prioritizing integrations for their customers: “It helps with product retention and enables your partnership team to go to market with other platforms in the space strategically.”
19. Not using automation to work smarter
Every ecommerce business has finite resources, time, and cost when it comes to producing quality products along with a quality customer experience. Donati argues that to improve any area, others must take a hit:
“Launch a new project improving quality? Cost, resources, and time will increase. Try to reduce the budget? Increase the time needed on projects. Reduce time on a project? Increase cost and resources.”
This resource, time, and cost trade-off is true for every business owner. Everyone is juggling their balance of resources, time, and cost to operate. As businesses grow, the pressures of daily operations can become overwhelming, however. Time that could be used for key tasks like refining a product offering and engaging with customers is often sucked up by urgent but mundane details such as restocking materials or navigating customer service issues. It’s easy to get bogged down in all these small challenges.
So how do you help your clients stay on top of it? Donati believes the answer is investing in automation tools, which can help manage these repetitive tasks across marketing, customer support, and back-office operations (like shipping and order fulfillment).
20. Thinking there’s still an “ecommerce growth playbook” that will guarantee success
In the past, it was easier to funnel money into paid advertising and see an ROI. This isn’t the case anymore—there’s no single blueprint for growth.
These days there are many different ways to grow a business. Here are three Donati recommends you should make your client aware of:
Focus on providing value to your target customers on the channels you enjoy creating content for the most. If you prefer to write, start a blog and focus on SEO. If you like being on video, get on TikTok. Build an organic engine early and consistently.
Determine how to cut costs without impacting your product quality or customer experience. For example, change your packaging to a cheaper, sustainable option. Or, automate your operations tasks so you waste less time on repetitive day-to-day things.
Build true connections with your customers—not a transactional relationship. If we head into a potential recession, people will be cautious about where they spend their money. Deeper connections mean customers feel comfortable supporting your mission and values, even during a downturn.
All of these mistakes feed into whether the personalized shopping experiences you create for your client’s customers will be successful. Some mistakes can be easily avoided while others can take some time to undo if they’re already embedded practices in your client’s online store. But personalization doesn’t have to be complicated. There are some simple ways to integrate personalized shopping into the customer experience.
One easy way to introduce product personalization
To offer shoppers a personalized shopping experience when they’re browsing your client’s store, you could start with something as simple as offering color, flavor, fabric, and texture variants on the product page based on the type of customer who visits that page.
Deb Mecca, director of marketing at Shopify app In Cart Upsell, points to two examples:
On Olipop’s product pages, a shopper can click on a specific flavor variant to see the exact product they’re interested in, showcased on the left.
To start small when implementing personalization on an online store, consider offering flavor variants on a product page, as done here by soda brand Olipop.
And bridal boutique Gigi & Olive offers available color swatches for products to allow the shopper to personalize their garment. When considering a color, the shopper can choose from a drop-down menu of color options based on the color scheme of their wedding.
Allowing your client’s customers to personalize their products makes them feel more connected with their decision and the item they decided to purchase (Source: Gigi & Olive).
“This makes the customer feel more connected with their decision when purchasing the product because they are viewing what they will be receiving when their order arrives,” Mecca explains.
Differentiate your clients’ stores with careful personalization
Personalization has become a critical component of ecommerce success. It’s a relatively straightforward way to offer shoppers what they want when purchasing from an online store.Personalization is a powerful tool for brands and retailers but it must be executed carefully to be most effective.
If done well (and this means unobtrusively and throughout the customer journey), personalization poses a huge opportunity to really connect with each type of customer within your client’s audience. This is especially true for smaller merchants who can make fast decisions and are flexible to experiment.
So, keep the above advice in mind when supporting your merchants on their personalization journey and you’re well on your way to helping them increase their conversions.
Stress Management Techniques That Could Save Your Life
Stress has become an inevitable part of modern life, affecting people of all ages and backgrounds. As we navigate the demands of work, family, and personal responsibilities, the pressure can often become overwhelming.
In this article, we will explore a comprehensive stress management plan that incorporates practical techniques to help you regain control and find balance in your life.
In today’s fast-paced world, the ability to effectively manage stress is crucial for both our physical and mental well-being.
Stress management techniques can empower individuals to cope with life’s challenges, reduce the negative impact of stress on health, and ultimately lead to a more fulfilling and harmonious life.
The Science of Stress
Stress, in its various forms, is a common physiological response that has evolved to help us survive in threatening situations.
Acute stress resulting in the body’s “fight or flight” response is a short-term reaction to immediate stressors. It can be triggered by situations like narrowly avoiding a car accident or giving a presentation at work.
On the other hand, chronic stress is a persistent, long-term form of stress that can develop over weeks, months, or even years.
This type of stress often results from ongoing issues such as financial troubles, relationship conflicts, or prolonged work-related pressure.
Unlike acute stress, chronic stress can have severe and lasting effects on our health and well-being.
The Impact of Stress on Health
The detrimental effects of stress on our health are significant and far-reaching. Chronic stress can take a toll on our physical well-being, increasing the risk of various health problems.
One of the most concerning aspects is its impact on cardiovascular health. Prolonged stress can lead to elevated blood pressure, increased heart rate, and a higher risk of heart disease.
Stress also wields a potent influence over our mental health. It’s often a precursor to conditions like anxiety and depression, both of which can be debilitating.
Persistent stress can lead to cognitive impairment, affecting memory, concentration, and decision-making abilities.
Recognizing these health implications underscores the importance of effective stress management techniques in our lives.
The Secret Stress Triggers
Before you can effectively manage stress, you need to identify its sources. Self-assessment techniques, like keeping a stress journal or using surveys, can help pinpoint your stressors, which can be external, such as work-related pressure, or internal, such as self-doubt and perfectionism.
Effective Stress Management Techniques
Here are some techniques you can use no matter how much daily stress you need to manage.
Mindfulness and Meditation
Mindfulness involves being present in the moment, helping reduce stress and anxiety. To practice mindfulness, find a quiet space, focus on your breathing, and observe your thoughts without judgment.
Breathing Exercises
Deep breathing techniques, like diaphragmatic breathing, can calm your nervous system. Try the 4-7-8 technique: inhale for 4 seconds, hold for 7, and exhale for 8.
Physical Activity
Regular exercise is a natural stress reliever. Find an activity you enjoy, whether it’s a brisk walk, yoga, or a gym session. Exercise releases endorphins, which improve your mood.
Time Management and Organization
Prioritize your tasks and set achievable goals. Using tools like to-do lists and calendars can help you stay organized and reduce the feeling of being overwhelmed.
Social Support
Building a support system of friends and family can provide emotional assistance during stressful times. Don’t hesitate to reach out and share your feelings.
Relaxation Techniques
Progressive muscle relaxation involves tensing and relaxing different muscle groups to release physical tension. Visualization exercises can also help you relax by mentally escaping stressors.
Other Considerations
Other factors impact the amount of stress in your daily life whether personal or professional. Consider how better nutrition and sleep can help. Also think about how other resources can be used to manage stress.
Nutrition and Stress
The food you eat can influence your stress levels. Omega-3 fatty acids found in fish, nuts, and seeds can reduce stress. Complex carbohydrates like whole grains stabilize blood sugar, promoting emotional stability.
Sleep and Stress
Sleep and stress are closely linked. Poor sleep can increase stress, and increased stress can lead to poor sleep. Establish a relaxing bedtime routine and maintain a consistent sleep schedule to improve your sleep quality.
Technology and Stress
Technology, while useful, can also contribute to stress. Setting boundaries and practicing mindful tech use can help prevent technology-related stressors from taking over your life.
Professional Help
In some cases, stress may become too overwhelming to manage on your own. Don’t hesitate to seek professional assistance from therapists or counselors. They can provide valuable guidance and coping strategies.
Incorporating Stress Management into Daily Life
Creating a personal stress management plan is essential. Set realistic goals, track your progress, and make adjustments as needed. Consistency is key to long-term stress reduction.
Conclusion
Stress is an unavoidable part of life, but it doesn’t have to control you. By understanding stress, identifying its triggers, and implementing effective management techniques, you can regain control and find balance in your life.
Notion and WordPress for Enhanced Community Engagement
As the project manager for a local charity, organizing events and workshops is a collaborative effort involving team members with varying skill sets.
Our event organizers, adept at managing details and schedules, relied heavily on Notion as a comprehensive database for tracking event tasks and attendee sign-ups. However, they did not have the skill set to update or create event posts in WordPress.
On the other hand, our web developer, tasked with bringing this data to life on our primary outreach platform, WordPress, sought a seamless way to integrate this wealth of information. In addition to being seamless, there needed to be some stable automation features between Notion and WordPress.
Enter the Notion WP Sync plugin, coupled with the power of Advanced Custom Fields. This combination promised a harmonious collaboration between the organizer’s meticulous data management in Notion and the web developer’s need for easy integration into WordPress.
By bridging these two platforms with Notion WP Sync, we ensure that our event details are consistently updated and our community can easily engage with us. The team no longer needs to grapple with manual data transfers or risk discrepancies.
Dive into our journey of harmonizing Notion and WordPress, creating a unified solution for event management and community outreach.
Notion WP Sync – You must have the Notion WP Sync Pro+ version.
Set Up Your Data in Notion
In Notion, a database is a dynamic tool that allows users to organize, store, and manage information in a structured manner. Unlike traditional text documents, Notion’s databases provide a more visual and interactive way to handle data.
They can be presented in various formats, such as tables, boards (similar to Trello boards), calendars, galleries, or lists.
You’ll want to set up your data in Notion to get started. You will want to make sure that the data is in a table. If you haven’t done so already, here is a tutorial on creating a Notion database.
Event Database in Notion
Set Up Your Custom Post Type (CPT) Using ACF
Using Advanced Custom Fields (ACF) in tandem with Notion WP Sync offers a seamless integration experience between Notion and WordPress. This combination ensures that teams remain on the same page, as content updates in Notion are effortlessly synchronized to their WordPress site.
Before you set up your connection to WordPress, you will need to create the CPT and any fields that will be mapped. Here, you can find tutorials for setting up your CPT and custom fields.
We created a CPT called Events and a field group called Events for this tutorial.
Custom Post Type: Events
When creating the ACF field group, make sure to assign the post to the correct post type.
ACF Field Group: Events
Once your ACF setup is completed, a new menu will appear in the admin sidebar. This is the new custom post type and where newly created Event posts will be found.
Installing and Activating Notion WP Sync
Connecting your Notion account to your WordPress site can offer multiple benefits, depending on your specific needs. There are several reasons why you might want to integrate Notion with WordPress.
Collaboration In Notion – You can collaborate with your team members, generate ideas, gather feedback, and make revisions in Notion. You can export the final content to WordPress, limit who has access to your WordPress admin dashboard by having a separate work and collaboration area, and streamline publishing workflows.
Tracking Changes In Notion – Notion keeps a detailed version history of your databases and pages. That means you can track changes and revert to previous versions if necessary. When you sync your Notion account to your WordPress site, you can maintain a centralized record of your content’s revisions and updates, which can be helpful when many people are involved.
Working Offline With Notion – Notion allows you to work on your content even without an internet connection. Once you’re connected and you integrate Notion with WordPress, you can continue writing or organizing your content in Notion offline and then sync it with WordPress once you’re back online.
Let’s move on to installing the correct version of Notion WP Sync. You will need to install the Notion WP Sync Pro+ for this tutorial.
Install and activate the plugin on your WordPress site to begin utilizing Notion WP Sync. Follow these steps:
Download the plugin file to your computer.
Log in to your WordPress dashboard.
On the left side menu, click “Plugins” and “Add New.”
Click the “Upload Plugin” button at the top of the page
Click the “Choose File” button and select the plugin file you downloaded in step 1
Click the “Install Now” button
Wait for the plugin to be installed, and then click the “Activate” button
How to Connect and Sync Notion to WordPress with Notion WP Sync
Once you have activated the plugin, you need to connect your Notion workspace with WordPress. Follow these steps:
Go to the Notion WP Sync settings in your WordPress dashboard.
Click on the Add New button next to “Connections.”
You’ll see various fields to set up the sync between Notion and WordPress.
Start by adding a title for this import.
You will need the Internal integration token. You can follow Notion’s guide on how to generate this token. Once you have generated it, paste it into the respective field.
Choose the type of content you will be importing
Page(s) – Pages that consist of a table are considered a database
Database
In the next section, “Import As…“, you will set up the type of content that will be imported.
Consider Destination or how you will import your data
Creating your shortcode content will create a Custom Post Type: “Notion Content.” Developers can use this Notion Content CPT in blocks and page builders.
Shortcode is not an option when importing a Notion database.
Chose Post Type
Choose the Event Post Type that you set up.
Set Post Status
Published
Draft
Scheduled
Pending
Private
If you are using a plugin such as PublishPress that allows for custom post status, those statuses’ are also available.
Post Author
Mapping Notion Fields to WordPress Post Fields
Below the “import as” section, you will set up field mappings, which lets you map the data from your Notion database to fields in WordPress.
Notion WP Sync Field Mapping
This includes support for core WordPress fields – e.g., post title, post content, categories, etc. It also includes support for custom fields, including Advanced Custom Fields integration (ACF). The ACF integration is only available with the Notion WP Sync Pro+ plan.
To get started, you can click the Add Field button.
Then there are only two parts:
Notion Field – Choose a column from your Notion base.
Import As – Choose which WordPress field to which you want to add the data from that column. You can also create new custom fields as part of this.
For example, to set the event name as the title of the post, you would map it like so:
Once you have filled in all the relevant sections, you will need to choose the Sync settings.
Add mode will only add new content to your website and not affect existing content.
Add/Update mode will add new content and update any existing content if it has been edited in Notion.
Add/Update/Delete mode will add new content, update any existing content if it has been edited in Notion, and remove any content that has been deleted in Notion.
Now click on Publish.
Once you have published the connection, you will need to create the initial sync by clicking the Sync now button.
How to Display Posts Created with Notion WP Sync
Once the content is seamlessly imported from Notion to WordPress using ACF and Notion WP Sync’s combined power, the next crucial step is displaying it.
This phase involves optimizing the layout, ensuring that the content aligns with the website’s design, and making certain that it’s accessible to all users.
Using a page builder to create a template
Using a page builder such as Elementor, you can easily map fields to create a page or post with imported content.
Single Post Template for Event Import
In fact, you can create multiple templates, such as an archive page for the post type.
Archive Template for Event Import
Updating Posts Created with Notion WP Sync
Understanding how the content displayed is updated once the field mapping and integrations are complete is important.
Newly created events in Notion will be created within the WordPress site at the next sync.
Any event changed or updated within Notion will be updated within the WordPress site at the next sync.
Any event that has been deleted from the Notion database will also be deleted from the WordPress database, thereby removing the event from the posts.
Conclusion
This integration ensures that event planners, developers, and community outreach teams can manage and promote events collaboratively. By centralizing event data in Notion and reflecting it on WordPress, team members, regardless of their technical expertise, can seamlessly work together, ensuring consistent updates and efficient community engagement.
The Ultimate Guide to Curbside Pickup (+ Examples)
Curbside pickup lets your customers make an order online and pick it up at your store, warehouse, or designated pickup location. It’s similar to buy online, pickup in-store (BOPIS), except the customer never has to leave their vehicle. When they arrive, you or your sales staff bring the order out to their car.
Due to its convenience and consumer demand, curbside pickup is likely here to stay. In fact, according to OnlineDasher, there was a 66% increase in online shoppers using curbside pickup in 2022.
Curbside pickup helps you bridge the gap between online and in-person shopping by giving customers the option to choose local pickup as a delivery method at checkout.
But how can you execute curbside pickup at your retail store?
In this article, you’ll discover what curbside pickup is, how it works, and its advantages. Plus, you’ll see examples of local retailers making curbside pickup work for their business.
What is curbside pickup?
Curbside pickup is a service offered by retailers where a customer places an order online and drives to their local store to pick it up. The customer parks in a designated area near the store entrance, and when the order is ready, a store associate brings the customer’s order out to them.
The convenience curbside pickup provides for shoppers has turned this option into a powerful way for retailers to strengthen their omnichannel retail sales strategy.
Adoption of curbside pickup was accelerated by the pandemic, but the popularity of this service continues to grow.
“Adoption of curbside pickup was accelerated by the pandemic, but the popularity of this service continues to grow,” says Jonathan Roque, digital marketing and content strategist for Zapiet. “This is thanks to the incredible convenience it provides both merchants and their customers.”
This order fulfillment service is a way to increase sales and customer satisfaction. It might be easier for retail giants like Target and Walmart to implement, but if you’re starting out or expanding into more locations, there are also solutions you can use to offer your customers curbside pickup.
How does curbside pickup work?
For customers who don’t want to wait for delivery or prefer not to pay for shipping, curbside pickup is a great alternative. After the customer completes their order online, they can drive by your storefront, warehouse, or pickup point to pick it up—and they can remain in their car the entire time. It helps reduce shipping costs, saves time, and is convenient.
Here’s how curbside pickup might look in your retail store:
The customer shops via your website, and during the checkout process they have the option to select curbside pickup.
You receive a notification for the order and can prioritize packing it.
Once you’ve confirmed that the inventory is in stock, you send a notification to the customer letting them know it’s ready for curbside pickup. At this time, you also tell them what to do once they arrive. For example, if they should call or text you when they’re at the curb.
When the customer arrives to pick up their order, you or your staff go out to their car to hand it over.
The customer drives off feeling instant gratification because they didn’t have to wait for delivery. You’re done!
Setting up curbside pickup services may feel overwhelming, but it doesn’t have to. That’s why we make it quick and easy for local retailers to implement this order fulfillment service—follow the steps below to set up curbside pickup for your store.
The operations of curbside pickup—how to get it right
Curbside pickup can make online ordering easier and more efficient, and reduce shipping costs for customers. But if you don’t execute it properly, it could lead to a disappointing experience for shoppers and lost sales for you.
Let’s look at the operational aspects of curbside pickup.
Manage curbside pickup with the right people and space
Whether it’s you or your sales staff, assigning curbside pickup management to one (or a few people) is crucial. Someone needs to be there to review and pack orders, notify customers that they’re ready for pickup, and hand off the items at the curb.
Make a dedicated space in your retail store for pickup orders to stay organized.
“Make a dedicated space in your retail store for pickup orders to stay organized,” says Allison Mistakidis, co-founder of Whiskeyjack. “Also, use the Shopify POS app to manage and mark orders available for pickup once they’re packed and ready to go. This way, the customer gets a notification that it’s ready.”
Track inventory
If you don’t sync your online and offline inventory, curbside pickup could be a disaster. The last thing you want is to disappoint a customer who makes an order online for curbside pickup and then receives a notification that the item isn’t actually in stock.
“Our number one tip is to make sure your inventory is correct, because having a customer order a product that’s not physically in the store would be a bummer,” says Allison.
Notify customers once their order is ready
Manually reviewing online orders and sending emails or texts to customers letting them know it’s ready for pickup is time-consuming. That’s why we’ve created a curbside pickup feature for Shopify POS that lets you efficiently manage and track all pickup orders placed online and notify customers when they’re ready.
Make it easy for customers to notify you when they arrive for pickup
The whole idea behind curbside pickup is that your customers can wait for you in their car. If you don’t know they’ve arrived, they might get impatient and come inside to let you know they’re curbside. To avoid this, you’ll need a way for customers to notify you once they arrive. After a customer places an order online and pulls up to your store, you can have them call or text you and then you can bring their order out to their car.
For example, when you send them a notification telling them their order is ready for pickup, include a note saying, “Let us know once you’ve arrived by calling or texting 555-555-5555 with your order number.”
Allocate a designated place where customers can wait for their order
Depending on where your store is located, you may be able to reserve a parking spot close to your store for curbside pickup. Or if it’s not a high-traffic area, customers can line up in front of your store. The key here is to make sure the pickup location is explained and easy to find when they arrive. You also want to make sure you’re not blocking traffic.
Advertise, advertise, and advertise some more
Spending time and energy devising a curbside pickup plan won’t be worth it unless you also create a marketing and advertising strategy to build awareness for pickup availability. You can spread the word via your newsletter, social media, or website, and by including the details on your checkout page.
Be vocal on social media about the option for curbside pickup to ensure customers know when you’re available.
“Be vocal on social media about the option for curbside pickup to ensure customers know when you’re available,” says Allison. “Include details that indicate pickup options on your checkout page, in your order confirmation emails, and in general marketing emails. Customers will use this service if they know it’s available!”
Retailers who offer curbside pickup and how they do it
Large retailers like Nordstrom, Walmart, and Target may have been the first to offer curbside pickup, but this order fulfillment option is vital for retailers of all sizes.
Today, smaller retailers are gradually embracing this service. They make it work by advertising curbside pickup options via their ecommerce website and social media.
Clothes Mentor
Clothes Mentor sells gently used name-brand and designer clothing. The brand offers shipping and curbside pickup options. When customers get to the checkout page, they see an option to ship or to pick up.
Whiskeyjack Boutique
Whiskeyjack Boutique sells Canadian-made gifts and is currently only offering curbside shopping and pickup.
We use the Shopify POS to manage all of our online orders and curbside pickups.
“We use the Shopify POS to manage all of our online orders and curbside pickups,” says Allison. “We’re able to print the delivery slips to attach to the orders, which makes them easy to find when the customer arrives for pickup.”
Whiskeyjack Boutique also advertises its curbside pickup options via Instagram and provides clear details about what customers can expect from its curbside pickup services. This includes the days and hours it will be available and where customers can pick up orders.
True North Yarn Co.
True North Yarn Co. advertises curbside pickup on its website and via Instagram. Customers who live locally can select “free curbside pickup” at checkout and a staff member contacts the customer when their order is ready.
Caboose Boutique
Caboose Boutique offers free shipping if you spend more than $100, but curbside pickup is free, no matter how much you spend. Customers go through the usual checkout experience, but they can choose curbside pickup instead of shipping.
What are the advantages of curbside pickup?
It’s easy to see why curbside pickup was a safer option for you and your customers during the pandemic. But even without the need for social distancing, this trend is continuing to grow for a range of reasons.
Here are a few benefits of offering curbside pickup:
Faster and more convenient order fulfillment
Providing more choices for order fulfillment allows customers to enjoy (almost) instant gratification in the same way they would if they were shopping in-store. And with curbside pickup, you can meet this demand so customers can get their orders faster.
Better customer experience and satisfaction
By adapting to changes in consumer behavior and offering more delivery and pickup options, you’ll satisfy more customers. Happy customers are more likely to come back again and also tell their friends and family about your store. So, in theory, curbside pickup can also lead to customer loyalty and brand advocacy.
Guaranteed delivery
We all know how frustrating it is when you’re waiting in excitement for a package and then you either miss the delivery or it’s delayed. With curbside pickup, this obstacle is eliminated. Customers can pick up their order at a time that works best for them, without having to wait at home so they don’t miss a delivery.
No shipping fees
When it comes to shipping fees, curbside pickup is advantageous for both you and your customers. There are no shipping costs for shoppers, and you may also save on the cost of packaging.
It’s better for the environment
The added bonus of offering curbside pickup services is that this order fulfillment option is environmentally friendly—it reduces carbon emissions caused by delivery and shipments.
It encourages customers to shop locally
Many people are realizing the value of shopping locally. In fact, our research shows that 65% of consumers support small businesses. Their main reasons for buying locally are strengthening the local economy (57%), helping support local job creation (41%), and investing in their community (35%).
Offering curbside pickup at your local retail boutique gives your community more options to fulfill their desires to shop locally.
Will curbside pickup last?
While curbside pickup began as a safety measure to keep staff and customers safe, it’s growing in popularity due to the fact that it makes the shopping experience more convenient for customers. As consumer behavior continues to evolve, customers are continuing to appreciate the flexibility and ease that comes with curbside pickup services.
Zapiet, a Shopify partner app that helps merchants offer curbside pickup, believes this order fulfillment option is here to stay, and its steady growth in monthly installs proves it.
From a purely economic point of view, curbside pickup can save merchants money by eliminating shipping and delivery costs as well as reducing their returns.
“It has rapidly become an option customers expect to see at checkout, thanks to its convenience, environmental benefits, and adoption by all major retailers,” says Jonathan.
“From a purely economic point of view, curbside pickup can save merchants money by eliminating shipping and delivery costs as well as reducing their returns. Also, by allowing customers to schedule pickups ahead of time, it is possible for merchants to increase their order volumes without having to increase their retail space or team size.”
Retailers including Whiskeyjack Boutique will continue offering this service post-pandemic. “We’ll definitely continue offering curbside pickup. We love the option it gives our customers to shop online and pick up if they prefer,” says Allison.
There are a handful of Shopify partner apps available to help you offer curbside pickup so you can keep up with consumer demand.
Should you offer curbside pickup at your retail store?
If you’re considering setting up curbside pickup order fulfillment options at your retail store, you can start by asking yourself the following questions to decide if it’s right for your business:
Do you have the resources to offer curbside pickup? Will your staff manage it or will it be your responsibility?
Is there curb space or parking near your store for customers to wait while you or your staff bring out their orders?
Are you using a POS that provides the right technology to synchronize your inventory and keep track of omnichannel orders?
If you feel confident that you can accomplish the above and successfully manage curbside pickup services, it’s worth trying it out. Giving your customers the option to shop online and pick up at the curb can help you build strong customer relationships and give your retail business an edge over your competitors.
When you’re ready to get started, try Shopify POS to provide a seamless shopping experience for your customers both in-store and online, and you’ll be all set to manage local pickup for online orders.
Unify your sales channels with Shopify
Only Shopify unifies your sales channels and gives you all the tools you need to manage your business, market to customers, and sell everywhere in one place.
Retail curbside pickup FAQ
How does retail curbside pickup work?
The customer orders and pays for their items online or over the phone. They schedule a time for pickup and drive to the store at that time. A retail employee brings the items out to the customer’s car.
What is curbside pickup mean?
Curbside pickup is a service offered by some businesses that allows customers to order and pay for items online or over the phone and then pick them up at the curb outside the store.
What is the difference between in-store and curbside pickup?
In-store pickup is when you go into the store and pick up your order yourself. Curbside pickup is when you have your order brought out to your car by an employee.
What are the benefits of curbside pickup?
There are several benefits to curbside pickup, including convenience, time savings, and avoiding crowds.
A Comprehensive FAQ On Video Conferencing Software –
Video conferencing software has grown in importance as a business, educational, and personal tool in recent years. The need for video conferencing software has only grown as a result of the COVID-19 pandemic forcing many people to work and study from home. However, choosing the best video conferencing software for your purposes might be overwhelming given the abundance of possibilities.
We’ve created this in-depth FAQ on video conferencing software as a result. Whether you’re new to video conferencing or seeking to transition to a different platform, this guide will provide you with all the information you need to make an informed choice. Let’s start by learning everything there is to know about video conferencing software.
1. What is video conferencing software?
Users can connect and speak with one another in real-time through voice and video using software called video conferencing. Without physically being present in the same place, online meeting enables people or groups to hold meetings, debates, and presentations.
2. Can video conferencing software be used across multiple platforms?
Yes, a lot of video conferencing programs can be utilized on many platforms. In fact, many of the most widely used video conferencing tools, like Zoom, Microsoft Teams, Google Meet, and Skype, are built to function flawlessly across a variety of gadgets and operating systems.
For instance, this video conferencing software is often compatible with Windows, macOS, and iOS mobile devices as well as desktop and laptop PCs. They can be utilized on a range of various platforms and devices because they can also be used through web browsers.
3. Can video conferencing be used to conduct interviews?
Yes, using video conferencing to conduct interviews may be quite effective. In reality, a lot of businesses are increasingly conducting job interviews remotely utilizing video conferencing software, especially when candidates are unable to attend in-person interviews.
Video conferencing makes it easier and more affordable for both parties allowing interviewers and candidates to connect from various locations. Additionally, it can aid in the removal of geographical boundaries, making it simpler for businesses to hire candidates from other regions of the world. Furthermore, it is important to ensure that the green light is on indicating that the camera is turned on, during video interviews. this ensures visual communication and adds an important level of engagement to the interview process.
4. How easy is it to set up and use a video conferencing system?
Depending on the particular platform and technology you choose to utilize, setting up and operating a video conferencing system can be challenging. However, generally speaking, setting up and using video conferencing systems has gotten simpler in recent years.
Many systems for video conferencing are created to be user-friendly and require little technical know-how to set up and utilize. Popular services like Zoom, Microsoft Teams, and Google Meet, for instance, provide simple setup instructions and tips. It is simple for consumers to try the system before committing to it because the majority of platforms offer a free trial or a free version.
5. How many participants can join a video conference at once?
Depending on the video conferencing platform and the package you have subscribed to, a video conference’s maximum number of simultaneous participants can change.
Zoom, Microsoft Teams, and Google Meet—some of the most widely used video conferencing platforms—offer several plans with differing capacities for the number of participants. For instance, Zoom’s free plan permits up to 100 users to attend a video conference simultaneously, whereas the subscription plans offer higher capacity, with up to 1,000 users on a single call. Similarly to this, Google Meet’s free plan permits up to 100 people to join a video conference, while the subscription plans permit up to 250 people.
6. What features are included in most video conferencing software packages?
The following characteristics are present in the majority of video conferencing software packages:
Communication via video and audio: Video conferencing software normally provides real-time, high-definition audio and video communication for participants.
Participants can present their ideas, work on projects together, and edit documents by sharing their screens with one another using this function.
Chat and messaging: Participants can converse via text in addition to audio and video using the chat or messaging tool that is frequently included in video conferencing software.
Video conferencing software that allows for recording and playback enables users to save meetings for later review or sharing with others.
File sharing: The ability to share papers, presentations and other files is a feature that many video conferencing software packages offer.
Virtual backgrounds: With this feature, participants can alter their backdrops during video chats, maintaining their privacy and adding a little bit of fun to meetings.
Calendar integration and meeting schedule: Many video conferencing programs make it simple to arrange and join meetings by integrating with calendars like Google Calendar, Microsoft Outlook, or Apple Calendar.
Security and privacy: Security and privacy features, including password protection, waiting areas, and end-to-end encryption, are frequently included in video conferencing software packages to guarantee that sessions are private and safe.
Support for many devices: Users may attend meetings from any location thanks to video conferencing software’s support for a variety of devices, including desktops, laptops, smartphones, and tablets.
Participant management: Using this feature, the host can control the participants on the call, such as by muting or unmuting them, removing them from the call, etc
7. How secure is video conferencing software?
The use of particular software, how it is configured and utilized, as well as the security procedures of the users, all affect how secure video conferencing software is.
Use the most recent version of the program, use strong passwords and other authentication methods, and only share meeting links with people you can trust to join you in the conference to increase the security of video conferencing software.
8. How much does it cost to set up a video conferencing system?
The price to set up a video conferencing system can vary significantly based on a variety of variables, including the number of participants, the desired features, and the quality of the video and audio. The following items could raise the price of installing a video conferencing system:
Hardware: This consists of the microphones, speakers, and video cameras required to record and transmit audio and video. Depending on the equipment’s complexity and quality, costs can range from a few hundred to several thousand dollars.
The software that enables participants to connect and work together during video conferences falls under this category. While some systems are accessible without charge, others could need a membership or per-user license.
Internet bandwidth: A solid and dependable internet connection is essential for a seamless video conferencing experience, and you may need to upgrade or raise your internet package to account for the additional usage.
Setting up the room: If you need to set up a special video conferencing room, you may need to spend money on furniture, lighting, and other accessories to make the room ideal for video conferencing.
9. Is video conferencing software compatible with mobile devices?
The majority of software is compatible with smartphones and tablets as well as other portable electronics. Most software companies have mobile apps available for download from Google Play or Apple App Store. The ability to attend or host meetings, share displays, and interact with participants are just a few of the features and capabilities that these apps often offer.
10. Is video conferencing software compatible with mobile devices?
Yes, software for video conferencing frequently integrates with other programs to offer a smooth and effective communication experience.
To make scheduling and joining meetings simpler, video conferencing software, for instance, may link with calendar programs like Google Calendar or Outlook. Through this connection, users will be able to plan a video conference straight from their calendar and have the video conferencing URL instantly included in the calendar invitation.
Users may be able to start or attend video meetings straight from within messaging platforms like Slack or Microsoft Teams thanks to the integration of video conferencing software with these tools.
Wrap Up
In today’s digital age, video conferencing has emerged as a crucial tool. Choosing the best software to fit your needs might be overwhelming with so many alternatives available. An overview of the most significant features of video conferencing software is given in this extensive FAQ on the subject.
500Conference from 500apps is one program that stands out from the competition. A number of capabilities are available, including high-definition audio and video, screen sharing, recording, and more. It is also simple to use and reasonably priced, making it a fantastic choice for both individuals and small organizations.
Video conferencing software is a necessary tool whether you’re hosting a virtual meeting, conducting remote interviews, or just keeping up with friends and family. You should be able to select the program that best meets your needs using the information in this FAQ. Additionally, we heartily endorse 500Conference from 500apps if you’re seeking a top choice.
If you are one of the many beginners who want to customize your WordPress site design without touching CSS, then you are in luck.
The CSS Hero plugin for WordPress allows you to customize the design without touching a single line of code.
In this updated CSS Hero review, we will show you how to use CSS Hero to customize your website and why we believe it’s one of the plugins every WordPress beginner should try.
Our CSS Hero Review
CSS Hero is a premium WordPress plugin that allows you to design your own WordPress theme without writing a single line of code (no HTML or CSS required).
You can undo changes quickly, which is extremely helpful for beginners. All changes are saved as an additional stylesheet, so you can update your WordPress theme without worrying about losing the changes.
If you are a designer or developer, then you will find CSS Hero equally as good. It works well with all popular WordPress themes and frameworks. You can quickly change a theme or child theme and export it to a client’s website.
CSS Hero can save you time and frustration when making design customizations.
CSS Hero vs. WordPress Page Builders
CSS Hero is a design tool and not an ideal solution for creating landing pages or making a custom WordPress theme from scratch. It works along with your WordPress theme and allows you to customize CSS without writing CSS code.
On the other hand, a WordPress page builder plugin allows you to create landing pages and customize your WordPress layout regardless of which WordPress theme you are using.
Pro Tip: If you want to make landing pages, sales pages, product pages, and more, then we recommend using SeedProd. It is the best WordPress page builder plugin, allowing you to quickly design high-converting and beautiful pages for your website.
How to Use CSS Hero to Customize Your WordPress Theme
It is a premium WordPress plugin with pricing starting from $29 for a single site (totally worth the investment, considering the time and hassle it will save you).
You can use the CSS Hero coupon code: WPBEGINNER to get a special discount of 34% Off. If you are buying the PRO plan, then the same code will get you a whopping 40% discount.
You will be redirected to get your CSS Hero License key upon activation. Simply follow the on-screen instructions, and you will be redirected back to your site in a few clicks.
CSS Hero aims to provide you with a WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) interface for editing your theme.
Simply visit your WordPress website while logged in, and you will notice the CSS Hero button in the WordPress admin bar.
Clicking on the button will convert your site into a live preview.
You will now be able to see the CSS Hero editor. It has a top and bottom toolbar, a left column, and a live preview of your website.
Next, take your mouse over to an element that you want to edit, and CSS Hero will highlight it to indicate where you are.
Clicking on it will select that element and show its properties in the left column.
These will include common CSS properties for the selected element, like the background, typography, borders, spacing, and more.
You can click on any item to expand it and then edit the CSS properties using a simple user interface.
As you make changes, the custom CSS magically appears below.
If you are learning CSS, then you will find it helpful to see how different CSS changes are applied with the result in the live preview.
CSS Hero also has a built-in Unsplash integration, allowing you to browse, search, and use beautiful photographs in your website’s design.
CSS Hero also comes with some ready-made snippets that you can apply to different elements on your website.
Simply switch to the ‘Snippets’ tab in the left column. You will see a bunch of column elements listed there.
Click to select an element, and CSS Hero will show you different style variations.
Click on the ‘Set Params’ button to edit a style that you like, and then click on the ‘Apply’ button to add it to your theme.
As you make changes to your website, CSS Hero will autosave those changes but not publish them.
To apply these changes to your live website, you need to click the ‘Save and Publish’ button in the bottom right corner of the screen.
How to Undo Changes in CSS Hero
One of the best features of CSS Hero is the ability to undo any changes you make at any time.
CSS Hero keeps a history of all the changes you make to your theme. Simply click on the history button in the CSS Hero toolbar to see the list of changes. This button looks like a small clock.
You can click on a date and time to see what your site looked like at that time. If you want to revert to that state, simply save or resume editing from that point.
This doesn’t mean that changes you made after that point will disappear. They will still be stored, and you can also revert to that time. It doesn’t get any simpler than that.
But what if you only want to revert changes you made to a particular item?
In that case, you don’t need to use the history tool. Simply click on the element you want to revert to an earlier version and then click the ‘Reset’ button.
This will change the item back to the default settings defined by your WordPress theme.
Customizing Your Site for Mobile Devices in CSS Hero
The most challenging aspect of web design is device compatibility. You need to make sure that your site looks equally impressive on all devices and screen sizes.
Web designers use various tools to test for browser and device compatibility. Lucky for you, CSS Hero comes with a built-in preview tool.
Simply choose from mobile, tablet, and desktop devices in the top toolbar. The preview area will change to your selected device. You can also toggle between ‘Edit’ and ‘Navigate’ modes to hide other toolbars.
Switching to the ‘Edit’ mode will allow you to edit your site while previewing it for mobile devices. This tool is handy for tweaking your theme’s design for mobile and tablets.
CSS Hero Theme Compatibility
The official CSS Hero website has an ever-growing list of compatible themes. This list includes many of the best free WordPress themes.
What About Themes Not on the Theme Compatibility List?
CSS Hero comes with a feature called Rocket Mode Auto-detection. If you use a theme not included in the theme compatibility list, then CSS Hero will automatically start using Rocket Mode.
Rocket Mode tries to guess the CSS selectors from your theme. This works perfectly most of the time. If your theme follows WordPress coding standards, then you will be able to edit almost everything.
You may also want to contact your theme developer and ask them to provide compatibility with CSS Hero.
If you are using a WordPress plugin that generates an output not editable by CSS Hero, then you can ask the plugin author to fix that. They don’t need to do much to provide compatibility with CSS Hero.
Shopify, one of 2023’s top ecommerce platforms, continues to stay ahead of the curve in building the features and functionalities that ecommerce merchants need to run and manage successful online businesses with relative ease.
Recently, Shopify has introduced an innovative new feature called “Shopify Functions” to the ecommerce platform. This potent new feature on Shopify seeks to give merchants a greater amount of control, by enabling online sellers to increase the functionality of their online stores through custom code.
In this article by Ecommerce Pro, we are tackling Shopify Functions, going into how it works, and exploring how you can apply and use Shopify’s new feature to run a better Shopify online store in 2023.
Understanding Shopify Functions
Shopify understands just how important it is for online brands and businesses to have unique shopping experiences for their customers, and to feature powerful promotions on their websites that make a brand stand out from the competition. And that’s why Shopify introduced Shopify Functions, to enable merchants and developers to build custom functionality onto Shopify stores.
Shopify Functions lets business owners give their online stores more functionality than the platform’s standard built-in features, by allowing developers the ability to create and run custom code and make changes to the backend logic. Shopify Functions offers a versatile solution to meet the needs of various stores, whether it be by implementing unique business logic, developing sophisticated workflows, or integrating with external services.
Shopify functions custom functionality can be reflected on the storefront on any Shopify 2.0 theme.
How does Shopify Functions work?
Shopify has unlocked its backend to allow developers to extend or even replace parts of Shopify’s backend logic with their custom code.
Shopify Functions enables Shopify developers to create serverless functions using programming languages of their choosing, like JavaScript, TypeScript, and Python.
After which, these functions may be uploaded to AWS Lambda, an event-driven, serverless computing platform provided by Amazon, which is designed to execute code in response to specific events or triggers. These responses then run in reaction to various events like a new order creation or when a customer updates their information and other relevant events within the store.
How to Apply Shopify Functions?
Functions are installed similarly to other apps and configured in the Admin along with Shopify’s built-in features.
To illustrate, consider discounts. You may use Discount Combinations to combine Shopify’s default product, order, and shipping discounts with custom discounts that you’ve generated with Functions to make effective promos. Using the built-in free shipping discount in the discount settings, for instance, you might combine a custom spend $X get $Y volume discount that was installed via an app.
Not only that, but any discount created using Functions will be visible in Shopify Analytics’ sales reporting, including the report on sales by discount.
What else can you do with Shopify Functions? Here is a short overview of other practical applications of Shopify Functions:
Discounts
Use Shopify Functions to create a discount type known as “Volume Discount”. This feature allows merchants to offer a certain percentage off when a customer purchases more than the minimum quantity for each product.
Payment Customizations
Creating a Payment Customization function allows you to customize payment to hide, reorder, and rename the payment options available to a customer during checkout. This function allows Shopify merchants to hide payment options offered to buyers at the checkout stage, based on the total value of their order.
Delivery Customizations
Similar to Payment Customization, this function allows merchants to hide, reorder, and rename the delivery options available to customers during checkout.
Cart and Checkout Validation
Create cart and checkout validations to make sure that a customer’s purchase meets the criteria before checking out. With this feature, you can enforce an order maximum for buyers who do not have sufficient order history, preventing them from proceeding through the checkout process. This function deploys a validation error message in checkout.
Order Routing Location Rules
Create location rules to rank the possible locations for a line item during checkout. This Shopify function allows merchants to prioritize locations.
Custom Bundles
Create and offer custom bundles or kits for customers, grouping different products and offering them as a single package to customers and enhancing the overall shopping experience.
Fulfillment Constraints
Use fulfillment constraints to create custom fulfillment and delivery strategies. The function ensures that certain items that a customer purchases together are fulfilled from a specific store location or warehouse location of your choosing.
Conclusion
As a whole, the launch of Shopify Functions marks the beginning of a new age in which Shopify is giving customers more control over the backend operations of the checkout process.
In the long run, this provides users with an ecommerce platform experience that has become more adaptable and potent for brands to utilize as they require. The complete list of Function APIs, and tutorials is available on Shopify’s Functions API reference page, which you can check out here. Ready to create a more customized shopping experience on Shopify?
Hire Shopify Plus Experts Ecommerce Pro
Ecommerce Pro can help you leverage Shopify Functions to create the best Shopify online store that meets the needs of your brand. Our team consists of highly experienced and top-rated Shopify Plus experts, with a track record of world-class results. We specialize in new store launches, complete redesigns, migrations, and overall development services that cab help you leverage custom Shopify Functions for your store.
Reach out to our team of Shopify Plus experts to learn about how we can help you build and improve your Shopify online business.
Get in Touch
At Ecommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful Shopify businesses. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
Screen recording chrome extensions are tools that allow users to record their screen activity and save it as a video file. These extensions can be installed on web browsers such as Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox, and are typically used for creating tutorials, demonstrations, and other types of video content.
There are many screen recording chrome extensions available, each with its own unique features and capabilities. Some popular options include Screencastify, Loom, and Nimbus Screenshot & Screen Video Recorder. One of the key advantages of using a screen recording extension is the ability to easily capture and share screen activity without the need for specialized software. These tools are often user-friendly and provide a range of customization options, such as the ability to record audio and add annotations to the recording.
However, some screen recording chrome extensions may have limitations or drawbacks. For example, some extensions may only support recording a specific portion of the screen, or may only be compatible with certain operating systems. Additionally, some extensions may require a subscription or payment to access advanced features.
Overall, screen recording chrome extensions can be a useful tool for creating and sharing video content, but it’s important to carefully consider the features and limitations of different options before choosing a specific extension.
Source: Transparency Market Research
Benefits of using screen recording extensions
There are several benefits to using screen recording extensions, which allow users to record the activity on their computer screens. Some of the potential benefits include:
Improved communication and collaboration: Screen recording chrome extensions can be useful for recording and sharing information with others, such as giving a presentation or demonstrating how to use a particular software. This can help improve communication and collaboration within a team or group. Increased productivity: Screen recording chrome extensions can save time by allowing users to create visual aids and tutorials that can be easily shared and accessed by others. This can help increase productivity by reducing the need for repetitive explanations and allowing users to focus on their work. Enhanced learning and training: Screen recording chrome extensions can be used to create instructional videos and other learning materials, which can be a valuable tool for training and educating others. These recordings can be used as a reference or study guide, making it easier for people to learn and retain new information. Improved customer support: Screen recording chrome extensions can be used to create videos that demonstrate how to troubleshoot common problems or answer frequently asked questions. This can be a useful tool for providing customer support and improving the overall user experience. Enhanced accessibility: Screen recording chrome extensions can be used to create videos with closed captions or other accessibility features, making it easier for individuals with disabilities to access and understand the content.
Ninja Capture Screen Recording is a powerful tool for capturing and recording video from your computer screen. It allows you to easily capture high-quality video of your desktop, applications, and games, as well as audio from your microphone or system sound.
One of the standout features of Ninja Capture is its ability to record video in multiple formats, including MP4, AVI, and GIF. This means you can choose the format that best suits your needs, whether you’re looking to create a video tutorial, showcase a new game, or simply record some gameplay footage for later viewing.
Features of NinjaCapture:
Screen Recorder:
The Ninja Capture Screen Recorder is a feature-rich tool that allows users to record their screen activity with high-quality audio and video. It is a powerful tool for creating video tutorials, presentations, and demos.
Webcam Support:
one of the standout features of Ninja Capture Screen Recorder is its webcam support. This allows users to seamlessly incorporate their webcam footage into their screen recordings, making it easier to create more engaging and interactive videos.
Audio Recording:
One of the key features of Ninja Capture Screen Recorder is its ability to record audio along with the screen recording. This is a particularly useful feature for those who need to capture audio for a tutorial or demo, or for anyone who wants to record a video call or conversation.
Security:
Ninja Capture Screen Recorder is a feature that allows users to record their screens and audio for various purposes such as creating tutorials, capturing gameplay, or sharing presentations. One important aspect of this feature is security.
Awesome Screenshot is a powerful and convenient screen recording tool that allows users to capture, annotate, and share their screen recordings with ease. With this tool, users can easily record their desktop, browser, or application activity and share it with others in a matter of seconds.
Features of Awesome Screenshot:
Capture screen activity: The tool should be able to capture and record all screen activity, including mouse movements, keyboard actions, and any other on-screen activity. Audio recording: The tool should have the ability to record audio from the microphone or other audio sources, allowing users to narrate their screen recordings. Video editing: The tool should have basic video editing capabilities, such as the ability to trim, crop, and add annotations to the recorded video. Hotkey support: The tool should allow users to set up hotkeys to start and stop the recording, as well as to access other features and settings.
A screen capture tool is a type of software that allows users to record their screen activity and save it as an image or video file. These tools are commonly used for creating tutorials, demonstrations, and other types of visual content.
Features of Screen Capture:
Recording Capabilities: One of the main features of a screen capture screen recorder is its ability to record the screen and audio of your computer. This can be useful for creating tutorials, demonstrations, or just capturing a specific moment on your computer. Editing Tools: Many screen capture screen recorders come with built-in editing tools, such as the ability to trim and cut footage, add text or annotations, and adjust the audio levels. Multiple Output Formats: Another useful feature of screen capture screen recorders is the ability to save your recordings in various formats, such as MP4, AVI, or GIF. Recording Scheduling: Some screen capture screen recorders also have the option to schedule recordings in advance. This can be useful if you want to capture something on your computer at a specific time, such as a webinar or live stream. Multiple Device Compatibility: Many screen capture screen recorders are compatible with multiple devices, such as laptops, desktop computers, and tablets.
Fire shot screen recorder is a free and powerful tool that allows users to capture and record their screen activity. This includes everything from presentations and tutorials to gameplay and streaming sessions.
Features of fireshot:
Record screen and audio: Fire Shot allows users to record their screen and audio simultaneously, making it easy to create video tutorials or capture video call conversations. Edit recordings: The software comes with a built-in editor that allows users to trim, crop, and add annotations to their recordings. Share recordings: Fire Shot allows users to easily share their recordings with others via a variety of methods, including email, social media, and cloud storage platforms like Google Drive and Dropbox. Customizable recording options: Users can customize their recordings by setting the frame rate, quality, and resolution of their recordings. They can also choose to record the entire screen or just a specific window or area. Scheduled recordings: Fire Shot allows users to schedule their recordings to start and stop at specific times, making it easy to capture recordings while they are away from their computer.
Nimbus Screenshot is a screen recorder that allows users to capture and record their screens in high-quality video format. It is a useful tool for creating instructional videos, demonstrating software or presenting presentations to a larger audience.
Features of Nimbus Screenshot:
Easy to Use:Nimbus Screenshot is easy to use and intuitive. It has a simple interface that allows users to start recording their screen with just a few clicks. The tool also offers various customization options to tailor the recording to specific needs. Record Audio:Nimbus Screenshot allows users to record audio from their computer’s microphone or system audio. This feature is useful for creating video tutorials or demonstrations that require narration or commentary. Edit and Annotate:Nimbus Screenshot provides various editing tools that allow users to annotate their recordings with text, shapes, and arrows. These tools are useful for highlighting specific areas of the screen or providing additional explanations. Multiple Output Formats:Nimbus Screenshot supports various output formats, including MP4, AVI, and GIF. This allows users to choose the format that best suits their needs and share the recording with others.
In case you are looking for a simple and convenient screenshot Chrome extension, LightShot will be the best match. You can capture any part of an individual page and share the same in a few clicks.
Features of Lightshot:
Simple and easy to use interface: The interface of LightShot is user-friendly and easy to navigate, making it suitable for users of all skill levels. Customizable screen recording: LightShot allows users to choose which area of their screen they want to record, whether it be the entire screen, a specific window, or a selected region. Image editing tools: LightShot comes with a range of image editing tools, such as the ability to add text, shapes, and arrows to the recorded video. Video conversion: The screen recorder allows users to save their recordings as video files in popular formats such as MP4, AVI, and GIF. Shareable recordings: LightShot makes it easy to share recorded videos with others by allowing users to save the video to their computer or upload it to the cloud.
Scribe is a popular screen recording software that allows users to capture and edit video footage of their computer screen. It offers a range of features that make it easy to create high-quality videos for various purposes, including training, presentations, and tutorials.
Features of Scribe:
Recording Capabilities: Scribe allows users to record their entire screen, a specific window, or a selected region. It also offers the option to record audio from the system or from a microphone. Editing Tools: Scribe offers a variety of editing tools to help users enhance their videos. These include the ability to trim and split clips, add annotations and callouts, and insert text and images. Sharing Options: Scribe makes it easy to share videos with others through various platforms. Users can export their videos as MP4 files and upload them to YouTube, Vimeo, or other video sharing sites. Security and Privacy: Scribe ensures that users’ recordings are kept secure and private. It offers password protection and the ability to set expiration dates for shared videos.
Movavi Screen Recorder is a powerful and easy-to-use tool for capturing video from your computer screen. It offers a wide range of features that make it easy to capture high-quality video and audio, edit your recordings, and share them with others.
Features of Movavi Screen Recorder:
Record video and audio from your screen: With Movavi Screen Recorder, you can capture video and audio from your computer screen, as well as from your webcam and microphone. Edit your recordings: Movavi Screen Recorder includes a simple and intuitive video editor that allows you to cut, trim, and split your recordings, as well as add text, captions, and stickers. Share your recordings with others: Movavi Screen Recorder makes it easy to share your recordings with others. You can save your videos in a variety of formats, including MP4, AVI, and MOV, and share them on social media platforms such as YouTube, Facebook, and Instagram. Use keyboard shortcuts to control your recordings: Movavi Screen Recorder includes a variety of keyboard shortcuts that make it easy to start, pause, and stop your recordings.
The Loom Chrome extension is a screen recorder that allows users to record their screen, audio, and webcam simultaneously. It is a simple and easy-to-use tool that can be used for various purposes such as creating video tutorials, recording meetings, or sharing presentations.
Features of Loom Chrome extension:
Quick and easy recording: Simply click the Loom icon in your browser and start recording within seconds. Customizable recording options: Choose to record your entire screen, a specific window, or just a portion of your screen. High-quality video: The Loom Chrome extension uses advanced technology to ensure that your recordings are of the highest quality. Edit and trim recordings: After recording, you can edit your video by trimming sections or adding text and annotations.
Vmaker is a powerful and robust screen recorder that can be used to capture your screen, camera, voice, and computer audio. It can be added as a free Chrome extension to your Google Chrome Browser.
It’s watermark-free and comes with an in-built editor that makes it easy for you to trim and polish your recordings before you share it with others.
It also provides secured cloud storage and allows you to record unlimited videos for free.
Features of Vmaker Chrome Extension:
Mouse Emphasis & Annotations: It will help you highlight your mouse clicks and annotate important sections of your screen.
AI-powered Virtual background: It lets you customize your webcam background with an AI-powered virtual background of your choice.
Screen Blur: You can choose to blur or hide sensitive data by enabling the screen blur feature.
Screen & Webcam Recording: lt allows you to customize your recording mode according to your own preference. That means, you can choose to record your screen separately, webcam separately, or both your screen and webcam simultaneously.
Video Editing: It has a built-in video editor that lets you trim, flip, rotate, and resize your recordings effortlessly. You can also merge external videos and music tracks to your recordings to make them more engaging.
As soon as you’re done editing, you are allowed to export your recording at HD quality in MP4 file format.
Advanced Security & Privacy: It allows you to make your videos private and disable download to ensure your videos aren’t misused.
The Vidard Chrome Extension Screen Recorder is a powerful tool that allows you to record your screen and audio while using Google Chrome. It is perfect for creating video tutorials, presentations, or demos.
Features of vidyard:
Easy to use: The screen recorder is easy to install and use, with a simple interface that allows you to start and stop recording with just a few clicks. High-quality recording: The screen recorder captures high-quality audio and video, so your recordings will look and sound great. Customizable recording options: You can choose to record your full screen, a specific window, or a selected area of the screen. You can also choose to include audio from your microphone or system audio. Edit and share your recordings: The screen recorder includes basic editing tools, such as the ability to trim and crop your recordings.
Having suites that cover specific business domains, such as marketing, HR, and sales, can be beneficial for a number of reasons. For example, the 500apps suite offers a range of tools and applications that are specifically designed to help businesses grow. These tools can help companies streamline their operations and improve their overall efficiency.
In the marketing domain, the 500apps suite includes tools for email marketing, social media management, and website analytics, among others. This allows businesses to easily create and manage campaigns, track their performance, and gain valuable insights into their target audience.
Overall, the 500apps suite is a valuable resource for businesses looking to grow and succeed in today’s competitive marketplace. By providing a range of tools and applications that are tailored to specific business domains, the 500apps suite can help companies improve their operations and achieve their goals.
Conclusion
In conclusion, screen recording chrome extensions are useful tools for capturing and sharing screen activity as video content. One of the best screen recording chrome extensions in 2023 is NinjaCapture screen capture extension by 500 apps, which is available for just $14.99 per user and includes 49 other apps. This screen recording extension offers a range of useful features and is user-friendly, making it a great choice for creating tutorials, demonstrations, and other types of video content.
Personalized Marketing: Tailoring the WooCommerce Experience
In an era where technology increasingly influences how we buy and sell, personalized marketing has rapidly transformed from a luxury to a necessity. It is no longer sufficient to offer a one-size-fits-all customer experience; instead, businesses must strive to understand individual customer needs and tailor their marketing strategies accordingly. This article focuses on WooCommerce, one of the most popular eCommerce platforms worldwide, and the various strategies to implement personalized marketing within this platform.
WooCommerce, with its highly customizable nature and extensive feature set, is a particularly potent tool for personalized marketing. The platform offers numerous ways to tailor customer experiences, from individualized product recommendations to personalized invoices. By leveraging these features strategically, businesses can forge deeper connections with their customers, ultimately boosting customer satisfaction, retention, and revenues.
Throughout this article, we will explore several aspects of personalized marketing within WooCommerce. By understanding and implementing these personalized marketing strategies, businesses can effectively customize the eCommerce experience for each customer, leading to a more engaging and profitable online store. Let’s begin our journey toward personalized marketing excellence.
Importance of Personalization in WooCommerce
As the digital marketplace continues to evolve, personalization has emerged as a key differentiator. Personalized marketing on WooCommerce does more than just add a unique touch to customer interactions—it fosters a deep connection that drives customer loyalty and increases sales. By understanding and addressing individual customer needs, businesses can craft an experience that feels uniquely tailored to each visitor, giving them a sense of being valued and understood.
From a financial perspective, personalization has proven its worth many times over. According to a study by Epsilon, 80% of consumers are more likely to make a purchase from a brand that provides personalized experiences. Furthermore, a Boston Consulting Group study found that retailers who excel in personalization can boost their sales by as much as 10%, a rate of growth two to three times faster than those that don’t personalize.
On a WooCommerce platform, these benefits can translate into tangible features such as personalized product recommendations, targeted promotions, or customized content. This degree of personalization can be a game-changer, impacting not just conversion rates but also the average order value and repeat purchase rates.
In summary, personalization in WooCommerce has the potential to significantly enhance customer experience, deepen customer relationships, and ultimately bolster bottom-line results. As the world of e-commerce grows increasingly competitive, these benefits make personalization an essential strategy for any business aspiring to succeed in today’s digital marketplace.
Content Strategy for Personalized Marketing
In the realm of personalized marketing, content strategy plays a pivotal role. Personalization is not just about showing the right products to the right people but also delivering the right content at the right time. A robust content strategy can enhance the overall WooCommerce experience by creating meaningful connections between a brand and its customers, strengthening customer relationships, and driving engagement.
Developing a content strategy that aligns with personalization goals starts with a deep understanding of your customers. Who are they? What are their interests, needs, and challenges? How does your product or service fit into their lives? By answering these questions, businesses can tailor content to resonate with different customer segments. This could involve creating buyer personas, segmenting the audience based on their behavior or preferences, and developing content that caters to each group’s unique needs and interests.
Data plays an instrumental role in shaping this strategy. By analyzing customer data, businesses can gain insights into their audience’s behavior, interests, and preferences. This could include tracking which blog posts or videos attract the most attention or which email newsletters get the highest click-through rates. These insights can guide the development of future content, ensuring it aligns with what customers want and need.
In essence, a strong content strategy is a cornerstone of personalized marketing in WooCommerce. By delivering content that resonates with each customer, businesses can build stronger relationships, foster customer loyalty, and, ultimately, drive sales and growth.
Leveraging Email Marketing for WooCommerce Personalization
In the toolkit of personalized marketing strategies, email marketing holds a prominent position. With its high degree of personalization and direct reach to customers, email marketing can significantly enhance the WooCommerce experience. It allows businesses to share personalized content, product recommendations, and exclusive offers directly with customers, creating a consistent, tailored experience across all touchpoints.
Integrating email marketing with WooCommerce is facilitated by several plugins and third-party email marketing services. These tools can synchronize customer data from your WooCommerce store with your email marketing platform, allowing for personalized campaigns. For instance, you can set up automated emails based on customer behaviors, such as abandoned cart reminders or product recommendation emails based on recent purchases.
To optimize your email marketing for customer engagement and retention, a few key strategies stand out. Personalization is a must – this could involve using the customer’s name, sharing content based on their interests, or offering products based on their browsing history. Moreover, segmenting your email list can help deliver more relevant content to each group. Regularly analyzing campaign results can provide valuable insights, informing your future strategies for maximum effectiveness.
The Power of Marketing Automation in WooCommerce
In the quest to provide personalized experiences at scale, marketing automation emerges as a game-changer. Marketing automation refers to the use of software to automate repetitive marketing tasks, freeing up time for more strategic initiatives. By automating tasks like email marketing, social media posts, or ad campaigns, businesses can deliver consistent, personalized experiences to their customers without the need for manual intervention.
In the context of WooCommerce, marketing automation can be applied in numerous ways to enhance personalization. For instance, automated email sequences can be set up to engage customers at various points in their buying journey, such as welcome emails for new subscribers, reminders for abandoned carts, or personalized product recommendations based on browsing history. Additionally, marketing automation can assist in segmenting your customer base, allowing for more targeted and personalized marketing campaigns.
When implementing marketing automation in WooCommerce, several best practices can guide your approach. Firstly, defining clear goals is crucial—knowing what you want to achieve will guide your automation strategy. Secondly, make sure your automation efforts are driven by data. The more you understand your customer’s behavior and preferences, the more effectively you can automate personalized experiences. Finally, remember the importance of testing and optimization—what works today may not work tomorrow, so continuous monitoring and tweaking are crucial for success.
One of the effective ways to personalize the shopping experience in WooCommerce is by setting up related products or bundling products. This allows businesses to showcase products that are similar, complementary, or often bought together with the item currently viewed by a customer. By tailoring these recommendations based on individual customers’ browsing or purchase history, businesses can create a uniquely personalized shopping journey.
Utilizing related products serves a dual purpose: enhancing the customer experience and driving incremental sales. It supports upselling—encouraging customers to purchase a higher-end product than the one in consideration and cross-selling—prompting customers to buy related or complementary items. These tactics not only increase the average order value but also contribute to a more satisfying and intuitive shopping experience for customers as they discover products that align with their interests or needs.
To effectively utilize the related product feature for personalized marketing, a few strategies come into play. First, leveraging data analysis can help determine which products are often viewed or purchased together, allowing for more accurate recommendations. Second, understanding your customer’s needs and preferences is crucial. This can be done by tracking customer behavior, segmenting customers based on their shopping habits, and tailoring the related product suggestions accordingly.
Membership Websites as a Personalization Strategy
As businesses explore deeper avenues for personalization within WooCommerce, the concept of membership websites stands out as a powerful strategy. A membership website is a section of your online business where only subscribed members can access certain content or benefits. The exclusivity and personalization that memberships provide can foster loyalty, heighten customer engagement, and generate consistent revenue streams.
The benefits of creating a membership website are multi-dimensional. It not only allows for more personalized content, such as members-only articles, videos, or webinars, but it also offers the opportunity for exclusive promotions and product offers. By understanding the needs and interests of your members, you can tailor these exclusive materials to resonate with each individual, creating a deeply personalized experience that enhances the value of membership.
Creating a membership website on WooCommerce is made accessible with various membership plugins available. When setting up, it’s essential to be clear about what your members will value most, whether that’s exclusive content, special promotions, early access to new products, or all the above. Furthermore, the user experience should be smooth and intuitive, ensuring members can access their exclusive benefits easily. Tailoring the member experience might involve customization of their dashboard, personalizing their communication, or even offering members the ability to customize their own experiences within the site.
Personalizing Invoices: VAT and Custom Tax Fields
Personalization in WooCommerce is not only about the products or content your customers see but also extends to administrative aspects like invoicing. Different customers may require different tax information on their invoices, such as Value Added Tax (VAT) or other custom tax fields. Depending on a customer’s location or business status, providing the necessary tax details on invoices becomes a legal requirement and a key component of customer service.
Adding VAT and custom tax fields to invoices in WooCommerce can be achieved with the help of various plugins or by customizing invoice templates in WooCommerce settings. Through these tools, businesses can tailor the tax information presented in their invoices, ensuring the document meets each customer’s unique needs and legal requirements. The ability to accommodate different tax requirements and preferences can leave customers feeling understood and catered for, building trust and fostering a positive relationship.
A personalized invoice is not merely an administrative necessity but an opportunity to enhance the customer experience and trust. It shows that a business cares about the minutiae of its customer interactions and is willing to go the extra mile to meet their individual needs. Moreover, invoices can be an additional touchpoint for personalization – incorporating the brand’s tone of voice, including a thank you note, or offering personalized discounts for future purchases.
Embracing the Power of Personalized Marketing
In a competitive digital marketplace, personalized marketing has evolved from being a mere luxury to an absolute necessity. By implementing personalized marketing strategies in WooCommerce, businesses can connect with their customers on a deeper level, driving engagement, loyalty, and, ultimately, profitability.
From content strategy and email marketing to membership websites and personalized invoices, every aspect of WooCommerce can be tailored to provide a unique and engaging customer experience. It’s clear that the path to success in the evolving world of eCommerce lies in understanding and catering to each customer’s individual needs.
The journey toward personalized marketing excellence may require investment and experimentation, but the rewards it brings in terms of customer satisfaction and business growth are undeniably worth the effort.
How to Boost Your AOV for Your eCommerce Business – Blend Commerce
In the vast world of eCommerce, businesses are constantly seeking ways to maximise their revenue and enhance customer satisfaction. One of the most effective approaches to achieving your goals is by boosting the Average Order Value (AOV). While we’ve spoken AOV before, we’re taking another in-depth look at what you can do as an eCommerce leader to boost these numbers.
But first, why is a higher Average Order Value important? A higher AOV not only increases your bottom line but also indicates that customers are making larger purchases. While this is great for increasing profits, it also indicates that customers trust your brand enough to throw more money at you.
Let’s dive in.
A Quick: What’s Average Order Value?
Average Order Value is the average amount of money customers spend per order.
What is the goal of increasing your AOV? Getting your customers to spend more money per order (or cart).
Told you that was quick. Moving on.
5 Strategies to Improve Your Average Order Value
1. Upselling and Cross-Selling Techniques
Would you like fries with that?
One tried-and-true method to increase AOV is through upselling and cross-selling. To implement upselling effectively, you should present customers with compelling reasons to upgrade to a more expensive option. For instance, highlighting additional features, superior quality, or exclusive benefits can entice buyers to consider the upgrade.
Cross-selling is on the other side of the spectrum and involves stealthily recommending relevant products that enhance what the customer already has in their cart. If they’re purchasing a camera, suggesting a tripod, memory card, or camera bag would increase their overall Average Order Value. If done right, this strategy will not only increase the profits you get from one order but will significantly impact the customer’s satisfaction with their order and your brand as you’re providing a complete solution to their problem.
2. Free Gift with Purchase
Discounting immediately stifles the Average Order Value and doesn’t provide your brand with any value either. Customers who arrive from discounts don’t often lead to loyal customers. And loyal customers don’t need discounts to stick around. If they do, they’re called discount hoppers, and they’ll drop you for the next brand with a better offer.
That being said, a free gift with purchase can often increase the AOV of an order, especially if the gift only comes when customers hit a certain order cost. People love receiving extra goodies for free, and this tactic will allow you to tap into that innate desire.
By setting a minimum order value or specific product threshold, you can entice customers to spend a little more to qualify for a free gift. Not only does this increase the AOV, but it also creates a sense of excitement and value for the customer, enhancing their overall shopping experience with your brand.
3. Limited-Time Promotions and Bundled Offers
Creating a sense of urgency and scarcity through limited-time promotions and bundled offers can significantly impact AOV. By showcasing time-limited deals, flash sales, or limited edition product bundles, you create FOMO (fear of missing out) in your customers. The fear of losing out on a great deal or unique product encourages them to make larger purchases to take advantage of the offer.
Everyone knows that pushing buttons on customers’ emotions is one way to gain their attention. Bundled offers that provide a discounted price for purchasing multiple items together can lead to increased AOV as customers see the value in acquiring the bundle rather than individual products.
4. Loyalty & Rewards Programs
Implementing a loyalty and rewards program like with LoyaltyLion is another powerful way to boost AOV. By providing incentives and exclusive benefits to repeat customers, you encourage them to spend more with each purchase.
If you offer point-based systems where customers earn rewards based on their spending, customers are more likely to spend. Creating rewards that can be redeemed for discounts, freebies, or even VIP sales, early access, and events will not only increase loyalty and Customer Lifetime Value but will also give the customer a sense of community within your brand. By enticing customers to reach higher spending tiers to unlock greater rewards, you can motivate them to increase their order value and build loyalty to your brand.
5. Rebuy Smart Cart
Another clever tactic to boost AOV is by implementing a Rebuy Smart Cart. This innovative feature is an AI-powered app that allows customers to easily repurchase frequently bought items without going through the entire shopping process again. Think of it as a “one-click reorder” button that saves time and effort for your loyal customers. By streamlining the repurchasing process, you encourage customers to add more items to their carts and complete additional transactions, resulting in a higher Average Order Value.
Moreover, the Rebuy Smart Cart presents an opportunity to upsell and cross-sell related products (remember, we just spoke about how important this is?) For instance, if a customer previously bought a set of kitchen knives, you can display an option to upgrade to a knife sharpener or a knife block with their next purchase. This seamless integration of upselling and cross-selling within the Rebuy Smart Cart feature not only boosts AOV but also enhances the overall shopping experience.
With Rebuy Smart Cart, you’ll be able to build a shopping cart that shoppers won’t abandon. You’ll be able to use one-click widgets to easily add features, optimise their experience, and drive performance with the following features:
✔️ Discount widgets
✔️ Accelerated checkouts
✔️ Intelligent upsells
✔️ Gift with purchase
✔️ Tiered Progress Bar
✔️ Switch-to-Subscription
In essence, the Rebuy Smart Cart can cover every strategy mentioned above and push your AOV to the next level.
Blend & Increasing AOV
By incorporating these strategies, you can give your eCommerce business the edge it needs to boost AOV and thrive in the competitive online marketplace. Remember, understanding your customers’ preferences, providing exceptional value, and creating a sense of excitement and exclusivity are key factors in increasing Average Order Value and building a loyal customer base.
Looking to increase your AOV with tried and tested strategies easily? Get in touch with Blend today.
What are the Front of House Positions in a Restaurant?
Every successful restaurant needs a top-notch front of house restaurant staff to ensure that everything is running smoothly and guests are leaving happy. Your front of house (FOH) team should be composed of workers with a variety of skills and talents, so finding the best person for each of these front of house positions is absolutely crucial to your success.
In addition to technical skills like being able to work the restaurant POS, every front of house employee should be friendly, outgoing, customer service-oriented and able to handle situations on the fly. However, each role has specific responsibilities, so let’s delve deeper into these front of house positions.
In this article we’ll cover:
Restaurant Employee Handbook Template
Standardize your restaurant’s policies, guidelines and processes with your custom restaurant employee handbook.
Standard front-of-house positions in a restaurant
General manager
It is likely that the owner will not be available to handle the restaurant’s day-to-day operations, so a general manager is hired to be their voice and act as a liaison between them and the rest of the staff.
The daily tasks of the general manager include:
Delegating roles and tasks among staff
Creating schedules for staff members
Hiring and training staff
Establishing customer service protocols
Making administrative decisions
Setting up business technology
Creating a good restaurant flow
Overseeing front of house guest services
Ensuring exceptional guest experiences
Reporting progress and issues back to the restaurant owner
Qualifications: Most restaurateurs will want to hire GMs with at least a Bachelor’s Degree in hospitality, business or management who also have 5-10 years of experience in the industry. GMs should have expert-level knowledge of driving sales and meeting targets, as well as top-notch customer service and interpersonal skills.
Shift supervisor
Because many restaurants are open long hours, it’s usually impossible for the general manager to be there at all times. This is where a shift manager comes in to take on some of the managerial responsibilities. Their tasks usually include:
Supervising front of house employees and operations
Ensuring that restaurant staff complete the required tasks
Mediating staff disputes and conflicts affecting service
Handling guest complaints
Training front of house staff and providing feedback
Reporting back to the general manager
Qualifications: A shift supervisor should have at least a high school degree or equivalent, as well as industry and leadership experience. Like the general manager, their interpersonal and customer service skills need to be top-notch and they should be goal-driven. They’ll probably need to be comfortable pulling double duty and be able to help out the front of house staff during peak hours.
Server
Arguably the most visible FOH staff members in a restaurant, servers are responsible for ensuring guests have a great restaurant experience. Most restaurants assign each server a station to prevent them from getting overwhelmed and ensure things run smoothly. Server tasks include:
Taking guests’ food and drink orders
Ensuring that water glasses are always filled
Providing guests with insights on the menu or daily specials
Qualifications: Because of their extensive face time with the guests, servers need to be friendly, accommodating and have great customer service skills. Since most full-service restaurants prefer to hire servers with industry experience, many servers start out as hosts or food runners, or have prior experience in retail or quick service.
Bartender
Bartenders are responsible for bar upkeep, managing and restocking inventory, making and serving drinks, checking IDs to confirm guests are of legal drinking age, and ensuring safe alcohol service. A bartender’s tasks include:
Setting up the bar at the beginning of their shift
Taking inventory and restocking wine, beer and spirits
Serving guests seated at the bar
Making drinks for servers to bring to tables
Ensuring the bar is kept clean and tidy
Billing and taking payments at the bar
Shutting down the bar at the end of the night
Qualifications: Bartenders should have good knowledge of wine, beer and cocktails and they need to have the same customer-facing skills that servers have. Bartenders need to know how to serve alcohol responsibly, be aware of how much alcohol guests are consuming and be able to recognize the signs of intoxication. They must also have the communication and problem-solving skills necessary to keep guests safe.
Host
Often the first point of contact for guests, the host maintains an important role in establishing guests’ needs and expectations and conveying that information to their server. The host is also responsible for:
Taking guest reservations
Organizing seating charts
Accommodating guests as they wait to be seated
Seating guests as tables become available
Making sure that servers are aware of any food allergies or restrictions
Letting servers know if their guests are celebrating a special occasion
Qualifications: Since they are the first point of contact for guests, a host should be high energy, have great people and communication skills, be organized and have good attention to detail. This is one of the more entry-level front of house positions, so it’s a great option for anyone trying to break into the industry.
Busser / Food runner
Bussers and food runners perform simple tasks like clearing tables and running food so servers can spend more time focusing on guests. Their tasks may include:
Running food to tables
Refilling water glasses
Clearing glassware and tableware throughout the meal
Wiping down and resetting tables between seatings
Ensuring server stations are clean, organized and well-stocked
Qualifications: Busser or food runner is an entry-level front of house position. They need to have good attention to detail and be able to move quickly to clear the tables for servers and guests. They should also be good communicators and multitaskers.
Barback
Barbacks support bartenders and waiters during their shift, and may also assist with bar opening and closing procedures. Barback responsibilities include:
Collecting glassware and running it through the dishwasher
Clearing and wiping down the bar
Restocking beer, wine and spirits during peak service hours
Changing beer kegs
Refilling ice bins
Qualifications: Barback is a junior role and a great way for aspiring bartenders to get their foot in the door. Barbacks need to be able to work well in a fast-paced environment, should be motivated and proactive, and they need to be physically able to lift heavy items like beer cases and kegs.
How to write a killer restaurant front of house job description
Each FOH position has its own set of duties and required skills, but front of house employees tend to share similar profiles and traits. Not every server and bartender is going to be fun and outgoing, but they need to be friendly and efficient. Every employee who’s in contact with your guests needs to possess certain skills and qualities.
Here’s how to craft a compelling front of house job description that will attract the right people and clearly communicate your needs and expectations.
Step 1: Describe your ideal front of house employee
Your job description is where you want to talk about general skills and qualities this candidate should possess. Think of it as your wish list. Use adjectives that describe your ideal front of house employee and what it takes to succeed in the role.
Here’s an example:
We are looking for friendly, service-oriented FOH staff who are quick on their feet! To be successful in the role, you’ll need good customer service skills, a positive attitude, good organization and multitasking skills.
Our ideal candidate is comfortable meeting and interacting with new people, is sympathetic and professional when handling complaints, and is able to remain calm under pressure. Training will be provided to get you up to speed on our menu, steps of service and restaurant POS.
Step 2: Fill out the job responsibilities
After the job description, list the specific job responsibilities and tasks the front of house team member will be expected to do in a bulleted list. Of course, when the restaurant is slammed, everyone chips in to get the job done, but these are the tasks for which this specific front of house employee will have ownership. Keep it simple, but be specific.
You may want to include any training or resources they’ll be expected to use on a daily basis, and put the most important duties and responsibilities at the top of the list. We’ve listed out the typical tasks for each FOH position in the section above, so you can simply copy and paste, but be sure to customize it to your specific needs and expectations.
Step 3: Outline the job requirements
List the job requirements for the front of house position in a separate bulleted list. Job requirements are what candidates need to have to be considered for the role, and may include (but are not limited to):
schedule availability
education or qualifications
previous experience
key skills and attributes
physical abilities essential to the job
List the most important ones—the must-haves—at the top and the nice-to-haves near the bottom, or consider splitting these into two separate lists. Your list should be short, sweet and to the point, while also clearly stating the conditions for employment. Here’s a good example of job requirements for a server in a fine dining restaurant:
Job Requirements:
Must be available for evenings, weekends and holidays
High school diploma or equivalent
Minimum two years experience in fine dining
Excellent communication and interpersonal skills
Willingness to perform additional duties as required
Bonus points if you have:
Food handler certificate
SmartServe certificate or equivalent
Basic beer and wine knowledge
How to set your FOH staff up for success
Give them easy-to-use restaurant technology
Old tech and awkward workflows slow your front of house employees down, especially your servers, bartenders and managers. It shouldn’t take a rocket scientist to place an order—your restaurant POS should be easy to use, easy to navigate and so intuitive that your FOH staff need very little training to understand how it works. For Andrew Ketcham, Associate Director of Operations at Atomic Hospitality, Lightspeed’s restaurant POS has been “a gift”.
We added it when we started with one location and we’ve since added two more across our portfolio. If we expand again, we’ll add it again [because] being able to have that user-friendly nature, it makes speed of training efficient and quick. It’s priceless. — Andrew Ketcham, Associate Director of Operations at Atomic Hospitality
Speed makes a big difference, too. Nothing is more frustrating for a server or bartender who’s been working their tail off to keep up than to be dragged down by a sluggish payment terminal. When you have to process six different credit cards to close out one table, slow-performing technology can quickly land you in the weeds.
A unified POS and payments system automatically records transactions in your POS system, which speeds up the payment process, eliminates the need for manual entry and reduces the risk of human error. And at the end of a long day, the last thing your managers want to do is manually reconcile POS sales with credit card statements.
Give them continuous training and coaching
The importance of front of house employee training cannot be overstated, as your guests’ impression of your restaurant is often defined by the service they receive. Your new hire training should be thoughtful and thorough, but even your veteran staff members need continuous training and coaching to be their best.
There are many ways to advance your front of house employees’ knowledge and skills, including quick coaching sessions you can easily fit into the day. You could register your FOH staff for courses (in-person or online), host wine and beer training sessions on off days, or simply gather the FOH staff together pre-shift to go over new products, menu items or service issues you want them to concentrate on.
Give them reference materials
From your steps of service to your menu, there’s a lot to learn and remember as a front of house restaurant employee, especially your servers who field the most questions from guests. Make life easy for them with a training manual or quick reference guide they can rely on when they don’t have the answer.
Imagine what a game changer it would be, if rather than having to interrupt the chef in the heat of service—and they can get salty when you do that—your server could easily access a document that clearly lists the ingredients and any food allergies in each dish.
Specialty front of house positions
While the standard FOH positions can be found in most restaurants, there are other front of house restaurant positions that will only exist in certain kinds of establishments. Some involve aspects of fine dining, while others support an event or catering side of the business.
Here are some examples of specialty front of house positions.
Sommelier
A sommelier is responsible primarily for the restaurant’s wine list. They have earned their title from studying wine at an academic level so their taste is to be respected as they craft a wine list that perfectly complements the restaurant’s dishes. They are also on hand to offer wine recommendations to guests.
Banquet and private events coordinator
When special events are held at the restaurant—or VIP guests are in attendance—a banquet and private events coordinator is necessary to make sure everything runs seamlessly from start to finish. They are the guest’s first point of contact and will take in all of the guest’s special requests for their visit. The banquet and private events coordinator also coordinates with the general manager and head chef to ensure that the event is executed perfectly and feedback is well received.
Catering coordinator
Some restaurants may choose to also operate off-site catering services, in which a catering coordinator is most definitely useful. They will connect with guests, plan and organize the event with them and then ultimately execute the event flawlessly. When the catering is complete, the coordinator will take in all feedback and implement it for future success. This role can also include marketing the restaurant’s catering service, in particular, with the hopes of drumming up more business.
Final thoughts
If you’re a restaurant owner or GM getting ready to ramp up your hiring, be sure to consider the unique attributes that each front of house restaurant position requires.
Looking for a technology partner to help you and your staff streamline front of house staff training and operations? Learn how Lightspeed can help.
How to Fix the WordPress White Screen of Death (Step by Step)
The WordPress white screen of death is one of the most common WordPress errors. It is also a frustrating error because there is no message, and you are locked out of WordPress.
Another problem with the white screen of death error is that sometimes, it only affects a certain part of your website. For example, you may only see the white screen of death inside the WordPress admin area, while everything else works fine. In other cases, you might only see it on a specific post.
In this article, we will show you how to fix the WordPress white screen of death by looking at different solutions.
Why Do You See the White Screen of Death in WordPress?
The majority of the time, when you see a white screen of death when trying to visit your WordPress website, it means that a script on your website exhausted the memory limit.
The unresponsive script either gets killed by your WordPress hosting server or simply times out. This is why no actual error message is generated, and you just see a plain white screen.
However, sometimes, you may see an error message.
For example, you might see a critical error message instead of a plain white screen.
Whether you are seeing a blank screen or the message ‘There has been a critical error on your website’, it’s the same error.
This error can also happen due to a poorly coded theme or plugin installed on your site. Sometimes, it can happen if there is an issue with your web hosting server.
Since the white screen error can be caused by any number of things, it requires methodical troubleshooting to fix it. Here are the steps you should try:
Video Tutorial
Subscribe to WPBeginner
If you’d prefer written instructions, then just keep reading.
1. Check Whether the Problem Happens on Your Other Sites
If you have other WordPress sites installed on the same hosting account, then you want to start by checking if the problem is happening on other sites as well.
If it is, then that’s a strong indicator that something is wrong with your WordPress hosting service. This could be a temporary issue affecting their service, and you need to reach out to their support for more help.
On the other hand, if the issue is only happening with one website or a specific part of that site, then you know that the problem is with that particular website.
2. Fix the White Screen Error With WordPress Recovery Mode
If the white screen of death error is caused by a WordPress plugin or theme, then WordPress may be able to catch it.
The new fatal error protection feature introduced in WordPress 5.2 can sometimes catch the error, so you may not even see a white screen. Instead, you will see a message that the site is having technical difficulties.
WordPress will also send an email about the problem to your admin email address.
The email will have the subject ‘Your Site is Experiencing a Technical Issue’.
This email message will point out the plugin or theme causing the error, and it will also contain a special link.
This link will allow you to log in to the WordPress recovery mode and deactivate the faulty plugin.
However, if you are seeing the plain white screen of death with no email or recovery mode option, then you need to manually fix the error.
3. Increase the Memory Limit
Usually, this error happens because a script has exhausted your web server’s memory and quit in the middle.
To fix this, you need to increase the PHP memory available to WordPress. This will allow the script to use more memory to finish the job it was supposed to do.
You will need to edit the wp-config.php file on your WordPress site or use a code snippet plugin like WPCode.
4. Fix the White Screen Error by Disabling All Plugins
If increasing the memory limit did not help, or if you have a high memory limit, like 256M or 512M, then you need to start troubleshooting.
In our experience of troubleshooting this issue, we have always found that the issue is either with a specific plugin or a theme. Let’s go ahead and disable all the plugins.
If you can still access the WordPress admin area, then you can simply go to the Plugins » Installed Plugins page. Select all the installed plugins and then select ‘Deactivate’ under the ‘Bulk actions’ dropdown.
However, if you don’t have access to the WordPress admin area, then you will need to deactivate all plugins via FTP.
First, connect to your WordPress site using an FTP client. Once connected, go to the wp-content folder, where you will see the plugins folder.
Now, you need to right-click on the plugins folder and then select ‘Rename’. You can rename the plugins folder to ‘plugins-deactivated’.
WordPress looks for a folder named plugins to load all plugins. When it cannot find the folder, it simply deactivates all plugins.
If this fixes the issue, then enable one plugin at a time to get to the bottom of the issue. Once you find the plugin causing the issue, you can replace it with an alternative or report the issue to plugin authors.
5. Activate the Default Theme
If the plugin troubleshooting doesn’t fix the issue, then you should try replacing your current theme with a default theme.
First, connect to your website using an FTP client and go to the /wp-content/themes/ folder. It contains all installed themes on your website.
Right-click to select your current WordPress theme and download it to your computer as a backup.
Next, you need to delete your current theme from your website.
Simply right-click on your theme folder and select ‘Delete’. Your FTP client will now delete the theme from your website.
Now, if you have a default WordPress theme like (Twenty Twenty-Two or Twenty Twenty-Three) installed on your website, then WordPress will automatically start using it as the default theme.
If this fixes the issue, then you should look at your theme’s functions.php file. If there are extra spaces at the bottom of the file, then you need to remove those, and sometimes that fixes the issue.
If you are using a poorly coded function in your theme’s functions.php file, then it can cause the white screen of death error as well.
Consider downloading a fresh copy of your theme from its source and then installing it manually using FTP.
6. Enable Debug Mode to Catch Errors in WordPress
If nothing has helped so far, then the next step is to turn on debugging in WordPress. This will allow you to see what type of errors are being outputted.
Once you add this, the blank screen will now have errors, warnings, and notices. These may be able to help you determine the root cause.
If you don’t see any errors, then you may still want to check the debug log.
Simply visit the wp-content folder on your website using an FTP client. There, you will find a new debug.log file containing a log of all errors, notices, and warnings.
7. Clear the WordPress Cache
Sometimes, you may have access to the backend, but the front end of the site has the white screen of death.
This can happen because of a caching plugin. In that case, you simply need to empty your WordPress cache.
If you have a white screen of death only on a very long post or page, then this method might work.
This trick basically increases PHP’s text processing capability by increasing the recursion and backtrack limit. You can paste the following code into your wp-config.php file:
/** Trick for long posts */
ini_set('pcre.recursion_limit',20000000);
ini_set('pcre.backtrack_limit',10000000);
We understand that this is a very frustrating error, and we hope that one of the tricks above has fixed the issue for you.
Shopify’s Checkout is the Best in the World (2023)
Checkout is the foundation of commerce, and we can now definitively say that Shopify’s is the best.
A new external study conducted by a leading global management consulting company analyzed the conversion performance of major commerce platforms as well as custom builds and showed that Shopify’s overall conversion rate outpaces the competition by up to 36% and an average of 15%.
It also showed the power of Shop Pay, Shopify’s accelerated checkout offering. When used, it can lift conversion by as much as 50% compared to guest checkout, outpacing other accelerated checkouts by at least 10%. The mere presence of Shop Pay, according to the study, can increase lower funnel conversion by 5%.
This data is a powerful tool to use with prospective clients, reinforcing Shopify’s four unique checkout advantages: our massive identity network, unmatched scale, consumer trust, and velocity of innovation.
When leveraging like-to-like samples, Shopify outperforms the competition by up to 36% and by 15.2% on average. Some of those peers are depicted here.
Identity network
The future of commerce is identity-driven, and digital wallets are the vehicle.
More and more brands are realizing the conversion benefits of removing friction and reducing the overall steps required at checkout, and no other wallet does this better than Shop Pay, in large part due to its massive identity network.
Over 100 million high-intent, high-value buyers are pre-opted into one-click checkout with Shop Pay. It’s the single most popular and trusted digital wallet on Shopify.
When a prospective customer with a Shop Pay account hits a storefront, Shopify can recognize them with one click. At checkout, it can even recognize the majority of them without any user action if they’ve used Shop Pay recently. That enables Shop Pay to pre-fill customer information for a seamless one-click checkout, which means a 4x faster experience than a guest checkout.
When a prospective customer with a Shop Pay account hits a storefront, Shopify can recognize them with one click.
Brands that provide personalized experiences to their customers, including a checkout they know and trust, are able to remove some of the friction within the buying journey to ensure higher conversion. Shop Pay is an ideal solution for these retailers and a proven way to increase conversion.
The massive identity network, ease of use, and extensibility of Shop Pay is even more powerful with the support of Shop Pay Installments and Shop Cash. They create a win-win checkout experience for shoppers and merchants alike—and ultimately increase conversion by as much as 50% compared to guest checkouts.
Scale
For Shopify, scale is both an asset we use to improve checkout and something we can handle with ease. It’s what allows us to power millions of brands and build with the largest enterprises in the world.
Shopify currently powers approximately 10% of U.S. ecommerce, has processed over half a trillion dollars of GMV, and supported 561 million unique online shoppers in 2022. We leverage this unmatched volume of data to improve checkout at an amazing pace. This includes smaller changes, like optimizations in button display and field order, as well as bigger changes like our recent introduction of one-page checkout.
Our customers’ experience is the most important thing to us. They need to trust our checkout as much as they trust our products—and recognize the path to purchase as easily as they recognize our brand.
Shopify Checkout also handles the most important annual sales events with throughputs that would take down most commerce platforms and custom builds, but shine on Shopify. Our peak holiday sales event in 2022, for example, netted $7.5 billion in total sales, with Shopify Checkout processing $3.5 million in sales per minute. We’ve even seen a brand have more than 40,000 buyers checking out at the same time, continuously for a few minutes, without so much as a hiccup. If it’s reliable for the largest flash sellers in the world, it’s reliable for all sellers.
As a partner, you can have confidence knowing the customers who hit your client’s checkout are going to have a great buying experience, for the big moments that count and every moment in between.
Consumer trust
Hundreds of millions of people use a Shopify Checkout every year. The look, feel, and flow of our checkout has become highly recognizable, and therefore trusted.
But Shopify Checkout isn’t just a familiar experience, it’s a delightful one. It’s seamless, fast, and unfussy—and built to deliver what your clients need to meet customer expectations, like delivery promises, BOPIS, tax and duty calculation, post-purchase expectations, discounts, and more.
The seamless experience of Shopify Checkout is the byproduct of many features working together in perfect harmony and the perfect foundation for you to build a standout checkout experience for brands.
Consumers know, trust, and love Shopify Checkout. It’s no wonder its conversion rate outpaces the competition by up to 36%.
Innovation
At Shopify, we have larger teams working just on innovating checkout than some other platforms have on their entire commerce solution. Building on our platform ensures your clients are always on the cutting edge of checkout technology.
But checkout isn’t a walled garden—what makes it so innovative is that it enables you to innovate.
Shopify provides all the essential components while allowing businesses to innovate and customize to fit their needs. The toolkit of options is endless, depending on what’s most important to your clients. You can mix and match bespoke code written in custom apps with no-code, easily configurable apps for your Shopify store to lower total cost of ownership, increase speed to market, and pivot to shifting buyer demands quickly. This is the power of checkout extensibility.
But it doesn’t stop there. Checkout extensibility is fully compatible with Shop Pay, making it the only fully customizable one-click checkout. You can customize Shop Pay’s look and feel, and add functionality either through click-and-configure apps or by building bespoke apps for your customizations.
Shopify’s Checkout allows us to build exactly what our clients want without sacrificing performance or innovation. This is critical for us when making recommendations on which platform clients should use, and a main reason we continue to recommend Shopify.
New sales enablement resources for partners
We’ve been working on our checkout for nearly two decades, and we’ve learned a lot. When you’ve got 10% of all ecommerce orders in the U.S. going through the platform, there are compounding effects and improved efficiencies that every one of your clients will benefit from.
To learn how to leverage this new research in prospect conversations, check out the sales enablement toolkit now live in your partner dashboard. The toolkit includes specific conversion benchmarks across platforms and accelerated checkouts, as well as more details on the methodology used.
Switching to Lightspeed: Why Borrego Outfitters Chose to Level Up Their Retail Platform
Picture this: you’ve been in business for about 20 years, and you find out that the point of sale system you’ve been using from the very beginning is being discontinued. Now you’re faced with the task of finding a new POS and migrating two decades worth of data onto the new platform.
Ben Nourse, the Co-owner of Borrego Outfitters, found himself in this exact situation a few months ago when he learned that QuickBooks Desktop POS was being discontinued.
Borrego Outfitters, which was founded over 20 years ago, is a casual lifestyle store that has something for everyone. From clothing and footwear to wine and gourmet food, Borrego Outfitters has made a name for itself as a retail destination that provides a rich and varied shopping experience.
The business has built up a large database of products, customers and vendors over the years. They also have an online presence, selling products via their WooCommerce store. As such, Borrego Outfitters needed a retail management system that could handle all their data while ensuring the business runs smoothly across multiple channels.
As Ben puts it, “It’s not trivial when you have over 20,000 products that you’re trying to manage in your point of sale system.”
Choosing Lightspeed over Shopify
Borrego Outfitters first looked at Shopify but faced challenges with catalog migration and the platform’s capabilities.
“We began to go down the path with Shopify. But very quickly, we realized that while they were strong online, Lightspeed’s POS for brick and mortar retail is more fleshed out,” explains Ben.
They explored Shopify for about 30 days, but ultimately decided to switch gears because Shopify “wasn’t really gonna cut it.”
“We tried to do an initial migration of our product into their platform, and ran into some issues. We started looking harder at the entire purchasing part of it and realized there were [also] some issues,” he adds.
It was at this point when Borrego Outfitters looked into Lightspeed Retail. By exploring Lightspeed’s capabilities, Ben and the team discovered that Lightspeed is a much better fit for a business of their size.
“Intuit is really pushing everybody to Shopify. But our experience has been good enough with Lightspeed that we’ve said, ‘You really should look at Lightspeed because it’s probably more mature than you would discover from Shopify,” adds Ben.
Implementing a structured migration process
As a business that’s been around for decades, Borrego Outfitters had a lot of data to migrate. Ben was apprehensive about switching, but his systematic approach—backed by Lightspeed’s customer support—allowed him to make the switch with relative ease.
Some of the key parts of migration process involved:
Transferring their data
Testing the system
Staging the system
Training the team
Ben worked with Sophie Price, a Senior Implementation Consultant at Lightspeed, to facilitate the migration process.
“Sophie was really good and helpful. She went above and beyond in responding to my specific questions, in addition to the overall training” shares Ben.
With the migration complete, Borrego Outfitters was able to streamline their back office operations, while improving the customer experience.
From on-premise to the cloud
For starters, Borrego Outfitters no longer had to maintain servers and backups for their POS. Unlike QuickBooks Desktop POS (an on-premises solution), Lightspeed Retail runs in the cloud, which means the data is automatically synced and accessible from anywhere. This not only reduces the risk of data loss but also simplifies the IT infrastructure, leading to cost savings and enhanced operational efficiency for Borrego Outfitters.
“We’ve been able to essentially move all of that stuff to the cloud. So that’s a big cost and complexity saving—at least at some level, getting rid of all the desktop hardware, the servers and things that were needed to be sure we had enough reliability. That’s been another plus for us,” says Ben.
Better inventory management features
By adopting Lightspeed, Borrego Outfitters also elevated their inventory management practices. Ben highlights how Lightspeed’s catalog tools outshine QuickBooks Desktop POS.
“Across the board, what we really like about it is the fact that we’re able to arrange our products and organize our products nicely in Lightspeed,” shares Ben.
With their previous POS, Borrego Outfitters faced rigid word count limits for product names and descriptions. Lightspeed, on the other hand, offers more flexibility, so the Borrego Outfitters team no longer has any constraints when adding and managing products to their catalog.
A seamless ecommerce integration
Switching to Lightspeed allowed Borrego Outfitters to unify product management across ecommerce and brick and mortar.
Previously, they had to use middleware to connect their POS with their website—a suboptimal solution that required some manual entry. Lightspeeed eliminated the need for that extra layer, simplifying the process.
“One of the strong selling points of Lightspeed for us was that it had WooCommerce integration. It’s actually proved to work out pretty well,” comments Ben.
A better checkout experience
Finally, Lightspeed Payments streamlined Borrego Outfitters’ checkout process, particularly when it comes to hardware. Their previous equipment, says Ben, was unreliable and created hiccups at the point of sale, where customers had to tap their card again.
Lightspeed Payments eliminated this issue, offering a smoother, more consistent transaction experience.
According to Ben: “What’s been really positive for us about Lightspeed has been that the selling process works great. The pin pads tap when you’re supposed to tap ’em. The loyalty program is simple and easy to explain.”
Ready to make the switch?
For Borrego Outfitters, switching to Lightspeed wasn’t just about finding a new point of sale system—it was about elevating their retail operations.
From efficient catalog management to unified multichannel retailing, Borrego Outfitters’ story highlights the importance of choosing a system that aligns with your operational needs and business growth.
See what Lightspeed Retail can do for your business. From easy-to-use POS and ecommerce tools to advanced reporting, Lightspeed is here to help you scale and succeed.
Design Stunning Single-Page WordPress Portfolios for Freelance Writers
Single-page WordPress portfolios are the perfect option for freelance writers looking to advertise their services and showcase their expertise. Both visually impressive and user-friendly, these simple one-page websites can feature interactive portfolios, galleries, and testimonials on a single scrolling page.
In this article, we will focus on how to design highly visual and easy-to-use single-page WordPress portfolios for freelance writers, from choosing the right theme to key page elements to include, as well as the best marketing plugins to stand out from the competition.
What Makes WordPress The Best Choice For Single-Page Portfolios?
If you plan to create a single-page portfolio website for your freelance writing business but are still undecided on what website builder to use, then you may find it useful to know the key benefits of WordPress and what gives it an edge.
Intuitive design – Like popular social media platforms, a single-page portfolio is based on infinite scrolling which research shows to be the preferred way to view content online.
Tell a story – With WordPress, a single-page design can effectively tell a story using interactive elements in a grid-based layout, similar to that of a comic book. This can keep the audience engaged while sending them on a user journey to learn more about you, as a writer.
More conversions – Single-page websites have a simple user journey, allowing page elements to be sequenced to generate more conversions without requiring numerous actions and clicking various links to reach the intended goal. This linear design is proven to result in more conversions, on average, than multi-page websites.
Easy to manage – A busy freelance writer is likely to have very little time to manage and maintain a complex website, equally, they may also not have the budget to hire an administrator to manage it for them. This is why a clean, simple, and low-maintenance single-page website is preferable for so many freelancers.
Furthermore, thanks to WordPress, the majority of updates can be installed automatically, further reducing maintenance requirements.
Designing A Single-Page WordPress Portfolio For A Freelance Writer
Once you have purchased a domain and hosting package for your website. You must install WordPress, and then you can begin to think about the design of your new single-page portfolio. New to the WordPress world? You may want to consider a managed WordPress hosting solution to simplify the process.
With this setup, let’s consider the key elements your website will need to have.
The Key Elements of a Single-Page Portfolio
A lot of thought needs to be put into what your single page needs to include. You will not have the luxury of including vast amounts of text, images, and videos to cover all bases. Focus on the information you feel the audience needs to know and how this can be succinctly delivered. Each piece of content and page element should have a clear purpose if it is to be included.
Below is a list of elements that all single-page portfolios should have.
Branding, such as a logo, unique color scheme, and tagline.
An about section describing who you are and what you can offer your unique selling point.
Details about your services and what you can offer.
Testimonials and links to external content to showcase your capabilities.
Contact information or a contact form to allow users to get in touch.
Links to your social media pages or external websites relating to your business.
The order of these elements is also a key consideration, with the most important information and CTA shown as early as possible and with contact information and links to social media pages located towards the end of the page.
NB – Although your portfolio will be kept to a single page, it doesn’t mean your website cannot feature a blog, which can be an excellent tool for search engine optimization purposes. WordPress allows you to easily add a blog page to your portfolio, which users can reach with a simple link click.
Choosing The Perfect WordPress Theme
There are a number of free and premium WordPress themes that were specially developed for single-page websites and freelancer portfolios. This makes designing and building your portfolio much easier as opposed to adapting a theme designed for standard websites to suit your needs. By using a purpose-built theme, you can fit all the content and elements you need on a single page while maintaining a sleek design.
When choosing your theme, important things to consider are whether it has a design that breaks up the page so each section is distinguishable from another and if it includes pre-built elements such as a contact section and an area to add testimonials.
Important Design Tips
Once you have chosen your perfect theme and decided what needs to be included on your portfolio website, it is time to think about its overall design and how the end product will look. Think about who your audience is, how it will be branded, the page style, and how the website can be optimized to meet your conversion goals.
For example, as a freelance writer, you may specialize in tech, meaning your website should probably adopt a modern look and style with concise content to convey your message as quickly as possible. However, no single winning formula can be applied; therefore, you need to consider your brand and what your customers want.
Here are five quick tips to follow when designing your single-page portfolio:
Keep it simple and avoid unnecessary elements and content.
Include a navigation that allows users to jump from one section to the next.
Include your primary CTA near the beginning of the page and make it stand out.
Consider a grid-based layout and interactive content for your portfolio to tell a story and engage the user.
When building your portfolio, you can use an intuitive page builder like Elementor, which allows even a person with no coding experience to create an eye-catching and fully functional website. Free and easy-to-use page builder tools are another reason why so many freelancers turn to WordPress to create their business websites and portfolios.
Marketing Your Single-Page WordPress Portfolio
Once your portfolio has been created, and you are ready for launch, it is time to consider what plugins can boost your marketing efforts and increase search visibility. Competition in the writing industry is fierce, with experienced freelance writers often offering their services for very affordable prices at around $10 to $25 per hour on average, which is why your website needs to set you apart from your rivals.
Below is a list of some of our favorite SEO and marketing plugins.
HubSpot provides valuable SEO insights that can be viewed directly on the WordPress dashboard, helping to monitor traffic and page performance.
Yoast SEO has a range of features to improve SEO, such as XML sitemap creation and assisting with writing page titles and meta descriptions.
SEMrush Writing Assistant analyzes your content and recommends improving readability and targeting relevant keywords.
SpotlightWP allows you to display content from your social media pages on your website, helping to increase followers, monetize your site, and show that you are an active business.
Groundhogg adds a signup form to your page so users can easily subscribe to mailing lists so they can receive newsletters or be informed of offers and discounts.
Conclusion
If you want a portfolio website that is user-friendly, low-maintenance, and proven to increase conversions, then a single-page WordPress website is the perfect choice. Thanks to the WordPress platform’s specially designed themes, straightforward page builders, and advanced marketing plugins, even a person with zero coding knowledge can build an impressive portfolio website that can take their business to the next level.
How To Source Fabric for Your Clothing Line in 3 Steps (2023)
Starting a clothing line involves countless moving parts. Beginning with a great foundation and high-quality materials can set you apart from other fashion brands. But fabric sourcing can be overwhelming. There are various types of fabric qualities—knit, woven, yarn dyed, and printed—as well as many techniques for knitting, weaving, and printing. Where do you start?
For many fashion designers, sourcing fabric is the first step of the design process. The next step is designing garments around that fabric. Choosing the right materials for your products can make an impact on your sales and customer satisfaction—no one wants a scratchy t-shirt or pants that shrink in the wash.
In this article, you’ll learn how to source the right fabrics in a few steps, the different types of fabrics and suppliers, and the right questions to ask when you’re choosing fabrics for your clothing line.
What is fabric sourcing?
Fabric sourcing is the process of finding a supplier who produces the fabric you need and managing the supply chain and delivery to get the required goods on time, within budget, and without any damage.
Unify your sales channels with Shopify
Only Shopify unifies your sales channels and gives you all the tools you need to manage your business, market to customers, and sell everywhere in one place.
Knitted fabrics are usually lightweight, comfortable, and don’t require much care to keep up their appearance. Knits tend to resist wrinkling making them a more popular fabric choice. Knitted fabric is used when designing soft, comfortable tops, bottoms, and undergarments. Their elastic nature also works well for active clothing.
Today, knits are available in various fibers, such as linen, silk, wool, Tencel, polyester, cotton, and cotton blends.
There are two fundamental ways that knits get made:
A weft knit or hand-knitted fabric is constructed with a single yarn that’s looped to create horizontal rows. Each row gets built on the previous row.
A warp knit is made with multiple parallel yarns that are simultaneously looped vertically to form the fabric.
This article in Threads Magazine gives you an in-depth look at knit fabric construction. Real Simple’s glossary of t-shirt fabrics is a helpful resource to learn more about knit fabric types that brands use for t-shirts.
Woven fabric
Woven fabrics are made with two or more sets of yarns interlaced at right angles to each other and are constructed on a machine called a handloom or power loom. Frequent characteristics of woven fabrics are opacity, abrasion resistance, and pill resistance. The higher the thread count, the higher the quality and strength. Uses for wovens include denim and formal pants, button-down shirts, and jackets.
Two classifications of woven fabrics are:
Basic or simple weaves. This includes plain weave, twill weave, and satin weaves.
Complex or novelty weaves. This includes dobby weave, jacquard weave, pique (like a men’s polo tee shirt), and more.
2. Understand the different types of fabric suppliers
Finding reliable fabric suppliers is a critical step in starting a clothing line. It’s best to find partners that can guarantee the stock you need as well as on-time delivery.
There are three different types of fabric suppliers that are defined based on how they operate and what kind of fabric they stock.
Fabric mills. These suppliers provide made-to-offer fabrics and often have substantial minimum order requirements (MOQs).
Converter. A company that purchases unfinished or greige goods from the fabric mill. Then they proceed to finish the fabric by dying, printing, or washing the goods before they sell it to you.
Jobbers. Jobbers typically carry a limited stock of fabric that was left over from converters and mills. They may sell it at reduced prices and don’t usually restock a fabric, color, or print once they sell out. Take caution with this type of fabric supplier, as you may not be able to order the same fabric twice.
3. Visit trade shows and source fabric online
Sourcing fabric in person at fabric trade shows allows you to see and touch the materials. However, you can also find fabric suppliers online and order fabric hangers (a.k.a. swatches or samples) that you can review at your studio or office. Depending on the fabric mill, they may charge you a fee, usually around $5 to $10 for each fabric hanger.
Source your fabric at trade shows
Fabric trade shows can be overwhelming. Rows and rows of supplier booths, sometimes hundreds, are a lot to look at in a few hours. You can research the exhibiting fabric mills before the trade show and make a list of your top 10. Leave yourself a few extra minutes, just in case you discover fabric suppliers that you didn’t find during your online search.
Two fabric trade shows that you can start with are:
The Fabric Shows. The Fabric Shows is better for small quantity fabric orders, and many of the fabric suppliers that exhibit are based in the US or have showrooms in the US.
Texworld. Texworld is a more significant trade show with more exhibitors. Many of the fabric suppliers that exhibit at Texworld have mills overseas in China, India, and elsewhere.
If you can’t make it to a fabric trade show, searching trade show websites for fabric suppliers that meet your criteria is the next best option. These days, many fabric suppliers, if not all, have a fabric catalog on their website. You can peruse at your leisure and then request fabric headers (sometimes called hangers) that you can review in the comfort of your office.
10 questions to ask fabric suppliers
Knowing the right questions to ask and what to look for when sourcing fabric for your clothing line is crucial. Many brands create a spec sheet template, a form that lists specific information about each fabric quality. In some cases, the fabric supplier may already have a spec sheet that they can share with you.
Here are 10 questions to ask fabric suppliers while you’re sourcing fabric for your clothing line.
1. What is the fabric article or item number?
Just like finished products that you sell through your ecommerce store, fabric suppliers create article or item numbers for each fabric quality that they sell. The fabric article number is usually found on the fabric hangers. Take note of this number, as you’ll need it when you order the sample and bulk fabric yardage.
2. What is the fabric weight?
It’s important to think about the fabric weight of each garment you are designing. You most likely will not use the same fabric weight for every product in your collection. Often, bottoms use a heavier-weight fabric than tops. However, it depends on each specific garment and how you want the fabric to drape or lay over the wearer’s body.
Fabric weight gets listed in grams per square meter (GSM or GR/M2). Below are a few examples of fabric weights used for different types of knit garments.
Activewear leggings and sports bras are about 200 GSM to 300 GSM
Lounge pants are about 180 GSM to 250 GSM
Standard t-shirts are about 130 GSM to 180 GSM
Lightweight t-shirts are about 130 GSM and less
Please note, these fabric weights are suggestions based on experience. The fabric weight you choose may vary for your clothing line.
3. What is the fabric content?
Fabric content refers to the makeup of the fibers that are used to knit or weave the fabric. Commonly used fibers are rayon, cotton, polyester, and silk.
4. What is the fabric construction?
Fabric construction involves the conversion of yarns and sometimes fibers into a piece of fabric that is then used to make an end product. Fabric characteristics are determined by the materials and methods used to construct the fabric. Presently, most fabric production uses interlacing methods, such as weaving or knitting.
5. What’s the fabric width (total and cuttable)?
Fabric width is the measurement across the width of the fabric roll from edge to edge. Fabric suppliers will provide you with two points of measurement (if they don’t, ask for it).
The two measurements to consider are the total width and the cuttable width. The edges of the fabric can be skewed or damaged during production and transportation, so it’s best to refer to the cuttable width for a more precise measurement of fabric that is usable.
6. How much does the fabric cost per yard/meter (sample yardage and bulk yardage)?
Depending on your target retail price for the garments that you will sell to consumers and the fabric yield for each garment, you can determine your target fabric price per yard or meter for each fabric. Keep this target price in mind when you are sourcing new materials to ensure that you are within your budget.
Typically, fabric pricing per yard or meter can change from year to year, depending on the market and the cost of resources to make the fabric. Also, buying fabric in bulk usually costs less than purchasing sample yardage. You can ask the fabric supplier for their sample and bulk price per yard. The cost per yard for sample fabric can be $3 to $5 more, and in some cases double the bulk yardage price.
7. What is the minimum order quantity (MOQ)?
MOQ refers to the minimum amount of fabric yardage that you must buy per order from a supplier. In most cases, fabric mills have an MOQ for sample yardage, usually at least five yards, and a different MOQ for bulk yardage. Depending on the supplier you are working with, bulk fabric yardage MOQs vary.
For example, if a supplier requires an MOQ of 500 yards, you must purchase at least 500 yards to be able to deal with that supplier. In some cases, the fabric supplier will allow you to order less than the MOQ by applying a surcharge to the price per yard.
You can ask if you can apply the bulk MOQ across multiple colors of the same fabric quality or if it’s per fabric, per color. Applying the MOQ across more than one color is a way to maximize your buying options if you are unable to buy 500 yards of one color.
8. How long is the fabric delivery lead time?
The time between the initiation of a fabric order and the completion of a production and delivery process is the fabric delivery lead time. Some fabric suppliers keep stock of the fabric that they sell, resulting in quick turnaround time from the moment you place your order to the delivery at your factory. Other suppliers have delivery lead times ranging from four weeks to eight weeks. You can ask for fabric delivery lead times for sample yardage and bulk yardage. Sample yardage usually has a shorter delivery lead time.
The recommended method for washing fabric varies for each fabric type and depends on the fabric content and construction. Fabric care instructions are provided to uphold fabric integrity over time. Some fibers get damaged in high heat, or they have higher shrinkage rates than others when placed in the dryer. Other fabrics, like silk, are often dry clean only. Here is an overview of care symbols and what they mean.
Additional fabric sourcing terms defined
Like most industries, the fashion industry has its own language for sourcing and manufacturing. These nine terms can help you navigate fabric sourcing like a pro.
Fabric hand
Fabric hand refers to the way the fabric feels when you touch it with your hand. There are no definitive fashion industry terms for fabric hand, but commonly used words to describe fabric hand are soft, cool, dry, and silky.
Selvage
The selvage is the finished edge of the fabric. It keeps it from unraveling and fraying. The salvage runs the entire length of the material.
Fabric grain
The grainline of the fabric is broken up into three options:
Lengthwise grain (warp) refers to the threads that run parallel to the salvage.
Crosswise grain (weft) refers to the threads that run perpendicular to the selvage or along the cut edge of the fabric.
Bias grain is technically not a “grain.” It’s the 45-degree angle between warp and weft grains. Cutting your fabric on the bias results in more stretch and can be used anywhere that you need the material to drape more smoothly over a curve.
Fabric drape
Fabric drape is one of the most important factors to consider when constructing a garment. Drape refers to how the fabric hangs or falls on the body. You can decide whether you want a dress to hug the body or hang away from the body.
Fabric hanger
A fabric hanger, also referred to as a fabric header, serves as a fabric sample. It’s a small cutting of the fabric so buyers can see and feel the material firsthand. You can also use the swatch as a reference during the design process.
Sample yardage
Sample yardage is the fabric that you order when designing and developing samples. Typically it costs more than bulk fabric yardage that you buy for production. Most fabric suppliers require a five-yard minimum order for sample yardage.
Bulk yardage
Bulk yardage is the fabric that you order after you have designed, developed, and approved your garments. Bulk yardage refers to the more significant quantity of fabric yardage that you buy to manufacture your products. Depending on the supplier, there may be sizable minimum order requirements, or you can order a small quantity at a higher price per yard.
Greige goods
Greige is an unfinished woven or knitted fabric in its raw state, before being bleached, dyed, or printed.
Shrinkage
Shrinkage is the process in which a piece of fabric becomes smaller than its original size, usually through the process of laundry. Typically represented as a percentage, it’s up to you to decide what your tolerance level is for fabric shrinkage. Confirming the shrinkage rate before you go to production can help you determine if you need to adjust the fit specifications of a garment to account for shrinkage.
Sourcing fabric that fits your business
Now that you have a better idea of the fabric sourcing process and commonly used terms, it’s time to visit trade shows, order samples, and look at what other comparable retailers are using for their products to spark ideas and inspire your next collection.
Get started with Shopify POS
Only Shopify gives you all the tools you need to manage your business, market to customers, and sell everywhere in one place. Unify in-store and online sales today.
Fabric sourcing FAQ
What is fabric sourcing?
Fabric sourcing is the act of finding fabric or a fabric supplier that helps you gather the best fabric options for your clothing line.
How does fabric sourcing work?
To source fabric for your clothing line, you’ll need to attend trade shows or look online to find the best fabric supplier to fit what you’re looking for. Then, you’ll reach out to create a partnership and add them into your supply chain so you’ll have a steady supply of stunning fabrics.
Why is fabric sourcing important?
Fabric sourcing and ensuring you have a wide variety of fabrics available helps to ensure that your clothes are unique, comfortable, chic, and appealing to your target audience.
Where do designers source their fabrics?
Many designers source their fabrics directly from manufacturers. They’re able to view a collection once it’s been created and choose the fabrics they want to use in their next line.
In today’s fast-paced world, the ability to manage stress is more crucial than ever. Unmanaged stress can take a toll on both our physical and mental well-being. So what can we all do to just relax a bit?
This article aims to provide you with a detailed stress management plan that can help you navigate life’s challenges while maintaining a sense of balance and well-being.
Understanding Stress
Stress takes on various forms and impacts everyone at some point. Our bodies respond to stress with the ‘fight or flight’ response, affecting us both physically and emotionally.
Common stressors include work-related pressures, relationship issues, and financial concerns. Recognizing these triggers is the first step toward effectively managing stress.
Recognizing the Benefits of Managing Stress
Effective stress management positively influences many aspects of our lives, from cognitive functions to relationships. This guide presents a holistic stress management plan that encompasses various areas of life.
Creating Your Personalized Plan
Of course, just as every person is different, every plan must be tailored to individual needs. Still, following the steps below will give you the general framework to build a plan that suits your particular situation.
Discovering Self-Awareness and Identification
Embrace Self-Reflection: Dedicate time daily to ponder your emotions and stress responses. Self-reflection enhances awareness.
Adapt as Needed: Be flexible with goals. Adjust them based on changing circumstances or new insights.
Engaging in Physical Activities
Choose Enjoyable Activities: Select physical activities you enjoy, such as dancing, hiking, or swimming. Enjoyment increases the likelihood of consistency.
Schedule Regular Exercise: Allocate time for exercise in your routine. Regularity is key for reaping stress-reduction benefits.
Try Mind-Body Practices: Incorporate yoga or Tai Chi for their holistic benefits. These practices combine physical movement and mindfulness.
Use Mindful Movement: Practice mindful walking or jogging. Focus on sensations and breath to enhance stress relief.
Take Outdoor Breaks: Spend time outdoors. Nature has a calming effect and promotes stress reduction.
Cultivating a Balanced Lifestyle
Create a Routine: Design a daily routine with time for work, relaxation, and sleep. Routine brings stability to your life.
Prioritize Sleep: Set a consistent sleep schedule. Aim for 7 to 9 hours of quality sleep to rejuvenate your body and mind.
Take Mindful Meals: Eat mindfully. Pay attention to your meals, savoring each bite. Avoid rushing through eating.
Practice Digital Detox: Unplug from screens for a set time daily. Disconnecting promotes relaxation and reduces digital-related stress.
Engage in Recreation and Hobbies: Engage in recreational activities or hobbies. These pursuits provide a creative outlet and stress relief.
Practicing Effective Time Management
Make a To-Do List: Outline tasks for the day. A list clarifies your focus and prevents tasks from piling up.
Prioritize Tasks: Determine task importance. Tackle high-priority tasks first to minimize stress accumulation.
Use the Pomodoro Technique: Set a timer for 25 minutes of focused work, followed by a 5-minute break. This boosts productivity and reduces stress.
Limit Multitasking: Focus on one task at a time. Multitasking can lead to overwhelm and heightened stress.
Delegate When Possible: Delegate tasks when feasible. Sharing responsibilities reduces stress associated with excessive workload.
Nurturing Social Connections
Reach Out Regularly: Stay in touch with loved ones. Regular communication strengthens connections and provides emotional support.
Listen Actively: Practice active listening in conversations. Empathetic listening deepens relationships and alleviates stress.
Engage in Shared Activities: Participate in group activities or hobbies. Shared experiences foster a sense of belonging.
Join Support Groups: Consider joining support groups related to your interests or challenges. Shared experiences provide a support network.
Express Gratitude: Show appreciation for your relationships. Expressing gratitude reinforces positive connections and reduces stress.
Recognizing The Role of Nutrition
Adopt a Balanced Diet: Prioritize a balanced diet rich in fruits, vegetables, whole grains, lean proteins, and healthy fats.
Get Proper Hydration: Drink adequate water throughout the day. Hydration supports bodily functions and reduces stress-related symptoms.
Practice Mindful Eating: Eat slowly and savor each bite. Mindful eating enhances the enjoyment of meals and reduces stress-related overeating.
Reduce Stimulants: Limit caffeine intake, especially in the afternoon. Excessive caffeine can contribute to heightened stress.
Moderate Sugar: Consume sugary foods in moderation. Stable blood sugar levels support emotional well-being and stress management.
Learning Mindfulness and Relaxation Techniques
Practice Mindful Breathing: Practice deep, mindful breathing exercises. Focusing on your breath calms the mind and reduces stress.
Use Progressive Muscle Relaxation: Tense and release muscle groups systematically. This technique promotes relaxation and reduces tension.
Try Guided Visualization: Imagine calming scenes or scenarios. Visualization engages the mind and eases stress.
Make Time for Meditation: Dedicate time to meditation. Start with short sessions and gradually extend the duration.
Keep It Consistent: Consistency matters. Regularly engage in mindfulness and relaxation techniques for sustained stress reduction.
Putting Your Plan into Action
Consistency is the cornerstone of effective stress management. Implement your plan patiently. Embrace setbacks as learning opportunities on your stress management journey.
Monitoring Progress and Seeking Help
Regularly assess your stress levels and adjust your plan accordingly. If you find yourself dealing with chronic anxiety or depression, consider seeking professional assistance to navigate these challenges.
Final Thoughts
Incorporating this comprehensive stress management plan into your daily life empowers you to take control of your well-being.
By effectively managing stress, you can improve your health and cultivate a life of balance and fulfillment.
Remember that the journey toward mastering stress management is a gradual and enriching process, leading to a healthier and more fulfilling life.
Meet Academic Standards With These Essential WordPress Plugins For Scholarly Content
Do you manage a WordPress site for researchers, scholars, or educators? Use these plugins to easily add footnotes, citations, a table of contents, or a glossary to academic or research content.
WordPress offers many plugins that make it easier for sites publishing academic content, scientific research, technology papers, or even instructional courses online to adhere to scholarly standards.
In this guide, we’ll cover useful plugins that will help you establish authority, enhance credibility, provide additional context and information, improve user experience, and aid in knowledge dissemination.
We’ll look at plugins for:
Note: scholarly or technical content also often requires presenting data visually. See our WordPress data visualization plugins article for help with this.
Let’s get right into it…
In addition to being an academic writing requirement, footnotes can be used for:
Clarification: Provide additional explanations, definitions, or background information on specific terms, concepts, or data mentioned on your website.
Source Attribution: Cite sources and give credit to external references, studies, or research to support the content you are presenting online.
Legal Compliance: Certain industries or topics may require you to provide proper attribution and references to comply with legal and ethical guidelines.
For example, if you work in or run a technology company, you may want include footnotes in articles about your products to reference scientific studies or industry reports that support your product’s claims and features. Or, you may want to publish an excerpt of a book, ebook, or research that includes footnotes and reproduce these footnotes on your excerpt.
WordPress Footnotes Plugins
One of the most time-consuming aspects of academic writing is manually creating footnotes. Fortunately, WordPress offers plugins that automate this process, allowing you to focus more on your research and writing.
The plugins below provide simple and intuitive interfaces for adding footnotes, and they will automatically format and number them correctly on your site:
CM Footnotes
CM Footnotes
With the CM Footnotes plugin installed, you can effortlessly add footnotes to any page or post on your WordPress site.
An example of a page with footnotes generated by the CM Footnotes plugin.
The plugin has a user-friendly interface that allows you to add footnotes with just a few clicks. You can also customize the styles and designs of the footnotes and use a shortcode to place footnotes anywhere in your content, with unique link symbols for each definition.
CM Footnotes – General Settings tab.
Additionally, you can enable autoscrolling from the footnote link to the definition at the bottom of the page.
Modern Footnotes
Modern Footnotes
Modern Footnotes is another plugin that lets you easily insert footnotes into your posts. The plugin offers two methods of displaying footnotes: tooltips and expandable footnotes.
On desktop, footnotes will appear as a tooltip when the user clicks on the number, while on mobile, footnotes will expand as a section below the current text.
With Modern Footnotes, you can display footnotes differently for desktop and mobile users.
You can also customize the styles of your footnotes by overriding the default footnotes styles in the custom CSS of your site.
Modern Footnotes Settings screen.
This plugin makes adding footnotes to your content straightforward and is compatible with Gutenberg/block editor as well. You can easily insert footnotes using a simple shortcode or the Gutenberg block. Sequential numbers are automatically associated with each footnote.
Easy Footnotes
Easy Footnotes
The Easy Footnotes plugin lets you add footnotes into your website’s content without requiring any coding skills.
Clicking on the footnote label will take the user down the page to the corresponding footnote at the bottom of the WordPress post. Each footnote at the bottom of the post has a icon that can be clicked to return to that particular footnote within the post copy.
Add footnotes with tooltips.
The plugin has very minimal settings and is quite easy for any beginner to use.
Easy Footnotes settings panel.
You can set a custom footnote label and can even display footnotes on the front/home page of your site. Footnotes are inserted using a shortcode.
Blank Footnotes
Blank Footnotes
Blank Footnotes lets you create footnotes using markdown notation.
It’s important to note that only footnotes are recognized with this plugin, and no other markdown tags will be taken into account.
To add footnotes, simply add a shortcode to your content and customize the styles and designs to fit your preferences.
The footnotes will appear in the exact location where you’ve inserted them, and users can easily navigate back to the text mode by clicking on the footnote number.
Enter reference numbers in the popup to create footnotes.
This plugin is compatible with the Gutenberg editor as well as the Classic Editor and doesn’t require any additional configuration, but it’s recommended to use a caching plugin (e.g. Hummingbird) to improve the overall site speed and performance.
Footnotes Made Easy
Footnotes Made Easy
With Footnotes Made Easy, you can add footnotes to posts and pages and restrict displaying footnotes on specific page types.
The plugin is very user-friendly and a footnote can be added just by inserting double parentheses within a sentence. The inserted footnotes are displayed at the bottom of the page or post.
Add footnotes and tooltips easily to content with Footnotes Made Easy.
Footnotes can also be displayed in the form of tooltips using jQuery. The plugin has many configurations that make it easy to customize the footnotes according to your needs from the WordPress admin panel.
Footnotes Made Easy settings panel.
Generally, inserting footnotes in paginated posts is quite hard. But this plugin makes it easy. But this plugin makes it easy. You can start the footnotes numbering at any number using a tag. And referencing an already-added footnote is quite simple as well.
You can also combine several identical footnotes into one single note.
Adding Citations in WordPress
Citations are used by content publishers to give credit to the original sources of information, ideas, or content included in their work. Whether you’re quoting directly, paraphrasing, or summarizing, giving proper credit through citations is a fundamental aspect of responsible content creation.
Citations can serve multiple purposes. For example:
Academic and Professional Standards: In academic and many professional settings, proper citation is required. It showcases the writer’s ability to engage with and contribute to the existing body of knowledge.
Credibility: Citations add credibility by showing that the writer has conducted research to present content based on reliable and reputable sources of information.
Ethical Use: Properly citing sources is an ethical practice that shows respect for the intellectual property of others. It shows readers that your site values and honors the work of other researchers, writers, and creators.
Transparency: Citations allow your readers to verify the accuracy and authenticity of your information and delve deeper into subjects they are interested in.
Avoiding Plagiarism: Plagiarism, which is using someone else’s work without proper attribution, can have serious consequences. Citations help to avoid accidentally using someone else’s work without permission.
Citations can also be used in a variety of business applications. For example, a financial consulting firm may write a blog post on their website about investment strategies and include citations from well-known economists, financial institutions, or academic research to support their recommendations.
Citations typically include information such as the author’s name, the title of the work, the publication date, and relevant publication details like the name of the book, journal, or website.
Also, the format of the citation can vary depending on the style being used (e.g., APA, MLA, Chicago), so it’s important to be consistent and follow the guidelines of the chosen style.
WordPress Citations Plugins
Maintaining accurate and consistent citations is essential for academic writing. However, manually managing citations can be a tedious and error-prone task.
The WordPress plugins listed below offer solutions that simplify the process of adding and managing citations, allowing you to import bibliographic information from various sources, automatically format citations according to different citation styles (such as APA or MLA), and even generate bibliographies or reference lists with just a few clicks:
Zotpress
Zotpress
Zotpress lets you add in-text citations and display bibliographies and searchable libraries from Zotero, a free cross-platform reference manager that lets you collect, organize, annotate, cite, and share research with others online.
Zotpress lets you display items from Zotero libraries on your WordPress site.
Zotpress offers different styling options and you can select the style of your choosing. The plugin also provides a widget you can insert in any page or post type. Thumbnail images from the media library and open library are also supported.
Citations can be easily inserted into content by simply pasting the shortcode generated. The plugin lets you search for items using the autocomplete search bar. Visitors can browse your citation library by collection or tag and download citations from your pages/posts.
You can also customize citations and other items using custom CSS in the plugin’s Options screen.
Zotpress Options screen
WP-BibTeX
WP-BibTeX
With WP-BibTeX, you can easily generate a bibliography-style text for your publications by inputting all the relevant details through a shortcode.
WP-BibTeX output preview.
Additionally, you also have the option to customize the links displayed on the page for every citation, including the ability to add a new link for downloading code.
Using the new “highlighted” format, the plugin lets you create an item with a featured image on the left. And by adding the overlay attribute to the shortcode you can create overlaid media like a GIF or video that appears when the mouse hovers over the item.
Bibtex Opyions screen
The plugin supports BibTeX entry types such as articles, books, inproceedings, mastersthesis, phdthesis, and unpublished.
Adding A Glossary in WordPress
A glossary can be valuable for sites publishing content with technical or industry-specific terminology. A glossary can help to define, clarify, and explain specialized terms or jargon used within the business’s industry and improve user experience by providing definitions within the site’s content itself, so users won’t need to leave the page or site to conduct separate searches.
An example of a site that could benefit from using a glossary would be a healthcare website focused on medical conditions. Including a glossary section to explain medical terms, symptoms, and treatment options would help site users to better understand complex medical information.
WordPress Glossary Plugins
Here are some useful plugins for adding and managing a glossary in WordPress:
Glossary
Glossary
Glossary for WordPress automatically generates word lists and styled tooltips using the content provided. The generated terms and definitions are grouped in a glossary or dictionary section and are linked automatically to corresponding words within posts and pages.
Glossary automatically links every instance of a term (or set of terms) to a predefined list of definitions.
The plugin is compatible with both the classic WordPress editor and the Gutenberg editor. The free version of the plugin offers a range of features, including automatic linking of every instance of a term to a predefined list of definitions.
You can group terms by category and create vertical archives of terms through shortcodes.
The plugin also allows you to activate its features in specific pages, archives, taxonomies, and custom post types, among other options.
You can apply a highlight or a tooltip on hover to linked terms, style tooltips by choosing from three templates, and link terms to internal or external locations.
Other features include the ability to add a dedicated icon to highlight external links and integration with Gutenberg blocks and ChatGPT.
CM Tooltip Glossary
CM Tooltip Glossary
CM Tooltip Glossary automatically identifies glossary terms in your posts or pages and then adds links to a dedicated glossary page, which contains the respective term’s definition.
Hovering over the linked glossary term will display a tooltip containing the definition of the term.
Hover over linked terms to view glossary definitions as a tooltip.
You can filter and limit the length of words displayed on the tooltip. Instead of displaying the glossary definition, excerpts can also be displayed on the tooltip.
The plugin also generates a glossary index that contains a list of all of the terms used across your website along with their definitions for easy access. You can even control the location and area where the tooltip appears, as well as limit its length and appearance.
In the free version, the glossary index is limited to a maximum of 500 terms.
Encyclopedia Lite
Encyclopedia Lite
Encyclopedia Lite allows you to create and manage a knowledge base, dictionary, glossary, or wiki. It offers a range of features, including automatic indexing, unique URLs for every content, SEO-friendly URL structure, and the ability to classify items by tags and categories.
You can also filter items by letter and cross-link them throughout your site.
Encyclopedia Lite is more than glossary. It’s also a Wiki, Knowledgebase, and more!
The plugin is compatible with various languages and content types, supports user rights and capabilities, has a clean and intuitive user interface and supports multimedia elements and shortcodes, and integrates with WordPress menus and RSS feeds.
Additionally, it offers a search function, auto-complete and item suggestions, and widgets for displaying items, tags, and categories in your sidebar.
WordPress Tooltips
WordPress Tooltips
WordPress Tooltips is a powerful and easy-to-use jQuery tooltip solution that allows you to add text, images, videos, audio, and social links to tooltip boxes.
You can add tooltips to post titles, content, excerpts, tags, archive, menu items, and gallery images.
WordPress Tooltips detects and adds tooltip effects on tooltip terms automatically.
The plugin supports a glossary too. A glossary can be inserted with a simple shortcode and it has a dedicated glossary settings panel where you can configure various styles for your glossary.
You can manage all the tooltip keywords and content from the WordPress admin panel.
You do not need a tooltip shortcode as the plugin will detect and add tooltip effects on tooltip terms automatically. The plugin is also compatible with most of the gallery and slideshow plugins as well.
Adding a Table of Contents in WordPress
Long academic articles can sometimes overwhelm readers, making it difficult for them to find the information they need.
A table of contents (ToC) provides a concise overview of your content’s structure and allows readers to jump to the sections that most interest them. By incorporating a table of contents in lengthy articles, guides, comprehensive user manuals, or technical documentation, you enable readers to navigate through your content more easily and improve readability, comprehension, understanding, and engagement.
WordPress Table of Contents (ToC) Plugins
The WordPress plugins below will automatically scan your content and generate an organized table of contents based on your headings and add anchor links that allow readers to jump directly to specific sections, eliminating the need for manual updates and enabling your readers to navigate through your content more easily:
Joli Table Of Contents
Joli Table Of Contents
Joli ToC is a performance-friendly, user-friendly plugin that runs incredibly fast without relying on jQuery or bloated code. The ToC can be inserted using a block in the Gutenberg editor.
It has plenty of customization options. You can hide or edit specific headings from the ToC. The plugin by default picks up headings generated by third-party shortcodes and blocks, this includes the headings that don’t appear in the editor but are available in the front end.
Joli Table Of Contents
The plugin offers two variants of toggle: a classic Text toggle and a modern Icon toggle to give your website a modern look.
It also includes pre-defined CSS variables that can be used to override the plugin’s default styles to create unique styles.
Easy Table of Contents
Easy Table of Contents
Easy ToC automatically creates a table of contents for your posts, pages, and custom post types by scanning the page/post content for headings.
It works with the Classic Editor and Gutenberg editor and is compatible with other popular page builders like Divi, Elementor, WPBakery Page Builder, and Visual Composer.
Easy Table of Contents
You need to select the post types in which the table of contents should appear and the plugin will automatically insert the table of contents into the page.
The plugin offers a variety of customization and multiple built-in ToC themes that you can choose. You can customize the appearance of the ToC either using the built-in themes and can create your own from scratch.
You can also choose between several bullet formats, and hierarchies, and can even selectively enable or disable ToC on a post-by-post basis.
If you prefer not to insert the table of contents in the post content, you can use the widget and place the table of contents in the sidebar of a page. The widget highlights the sections currently visible on the page.
Table of Contents Plus
Table of Contents Plus
Table of Contents Plus automatically creates a table of contents for long pages, posts, and custom post types.
It not only inserts a ToC but also generates a sitemap that lists pages and/or categories across your entire website. By default, the table of contents block appears before the first heading on a page, enabling you to add a page summary or introduction.
Table of Contents Plus lets you add a page summary or introduction before inserting a ToC.
You can customize settings such as display position, the minimum number of headings before an index is displayed, and other appearance options from the WordPress admin panel.
It offers other advanced options to further tweak behavior, such as excluding undesired heading levels like h5 and h6 from being included, disabling the output of the included CSS file, adjusting the top offset, and more.
Customizations can also be added to the shortcodes to override the default behavior, such as special exclusions on a specific page or to hide the table of contents block.
This plugin is suitable for both beginners as well as advanced users.
Simple ToC
Simple ToC
Simple ToC lets you easily insert a Table of Contents for your posts and pages by adding the SimpleToC block. The block provides a nested list of links to all the headings found in your post or page.
You can also configure the maximum depth of the table of content in the blocks’ sidebar and customize it to your liking, and even add your own heading by using a normal heading block and hiding the default “Table of Contents” headline.
Simple TOC
This plugin works with the Gutenberg editor and requires zero configuration. It produces minimal HTML output and does not add any JavaScript or CSS unless you activate the accordion menu.
You can style SimpleToC with Gutenberg’s native group styling options and it will inherit the style of your theme. You can also customize it with background and text color, choose between an ordered or bullet HTML list, and control the maximum depth of the headings.
The plugin is also compatible with many popular plugins and themes, including AMP plugins.
Publish Smarter, Not Harder
If you publish scholarly research or educational content, incorporating footnotes, citations, indexes, table of contents, or glossaries will enhance credibility, improve user experience, provide access to valuable information faster, and help to establish your site as a reliable source of knowledge in your industry or field.
Every website has its own unique design and branding, so it’s important that the footnotes, citations, glossaries, and tables of contents match the overall style of your website to ensure a cohesive and visually appealing presentation.
The plugins listed above will allow you to transform your content into professionally structured and SEO-optimized articles and present information in your WordPress site in an organized and reader-friendly manner by automating the generation of footnotes, glossaries and tables of contents, simplifying citation management, and offering customizable styles to align with your website’s design.
If you’re looking for a solid, fully managed, and expertly-supported platform to host sites and/or content for an educational institution, check out CampusPress. It’s the WordPress platform many of the world’s largest and well-known academic institutions choose to host their WordPress sites and blogs.
CampusPress will not only manage all the technical aspects of hosting your site securely and reliably, they also include many pre-installed and useful plugins for higher education and schools.
12 New Apps Released on the Shopify App Store in 2023
Always up-to-date and on top of ecommerce trends, the Shopify App Store continues to publish new apps to help businesses get the functionality they need to run their online stores the way they want and need to.
There are thousands of apps available in the Shopify App Store today that can assist you with just about everything— from shipping and customer support to marketing and sales, apps that help you customize your store and do more with your online business.
In this article, we are going to go over the newly published apps available on the Shopify App Store in the summer of 2023, so you can navigate the new trends in Shopify and ecommerce. By exploring the recent advancements in ecommerce, you’ll be better equipped to maneuver the latest trends that are shaping Shopify and the ecommerce landscape, keeping you on your toes and up to speed on how to manage a better ecommerce business.
Without further ado, here are the 12 apps that have freshly debuted on the Shopify App Store this summer 2023:
Have a question about Shopify and the best Shopify apps for your online store? Reach out to us for expert advice.
Price: Free
Launched: August 17, 2023
Overview: A hassle-free PayPal payment processing app, w | pay with PayPal is a breeze to set up and comes at an unbeatable price for merchants: it’s free. The app is fresh off the press, so it stands at zero reviews, much like the rest of the apps we will discuss here. But don’t let this deter you.
The app was developed by Wall AG, and it seamlessly integrates with the Shopify Admin, allowing customers to smoothly checkout with PayPal, one of the safest options for online customers. While there are many payment provider apps available on Shopify, w | pay with Paypal enhances your payment options. Its strong points lie in its easy and efficient integration. Not to mention that it enables your store to handle one of the most preferred and safest online payment methods, PayPal.
w | Pay with Paypal is free to download and use, gaining you unrestricted access to all the app’s functions.
Price: Starts at $199/month
Launched: August 17, 2023
Overview: Influencer marketing has always been one of the most effective ways of getting your products out there and reaching a wider audience. But, it can be challenging to find the right influencer whose brand matches your own.
With Influencify, you get access to a wide range of social media influencers through their influencer marketing platform, built specifically for ecommerce. Starting at $199 per month, with a 14-day trial to kick things off, Influencify is “reinventing” influencer discovery by using the latest tech in Al, making it easy to find influencers with an audience who match your campaign goals. They have a database of over 34 million influencers whom you can potentially connect with to help you grow your brand and your bottom line. So, if you’re looking for influencers to help you reach your business goals and get your products out there, Influencify may be worth the shot.
Influencify offers three tiers of payments: Starter at $199/month, Business at $499/month, and Agency at $799/month.
Price: Free Plan Available
Launched: August 18, 2023
Overview: Every brand and merchant on Shopify wants to customize the look and feel of their website—creating something that resonates with your brand and the soul of your business. With apps like Layout Genie, you get a go-to solution to effortlessly enhance the design of your store with customizable sections and more. The app was developed by Abloom AI, and it is tailored to empower Shopify business owners by granting them the ability to transform their store’s layout without coding.
The app seamlessly integrates with the Shopify admin, and whether you are a coding pro or not, Layout Genie lets you easily modify text, change button attributes, and change colors with flexibility. With features like this intuitive Page Builder, you’ll also enjoy regular updates to theme sections from the app creators’ database. Layout Genie ensures your store’s design stays fresh, engaging, and dynamic— just how you like it.
You can choose between the Free Plan or the Monthly Plan at $19/month (or $144/year with a 37% savings), offering unlimited sections, update features, and premium support.
Price: Free
Launched: August 18, 2023
Overview: Creating a personalized shopping or gift-giving experience is a sure way to increase customer satisfaction, and LDT Gift Wrap and Options is a new Shopify app that lets you add that much-needed personal touch that all customers can appreciate.
This new Shopify app, developed by LDT Soft, is the ultimate gifting solution that offers a range of options to elevate each customer’s purchases. The app allows customers to choose from a variety of options to gift wrap items and to include heartfelt, personalized messages. You can even choose from a variety of gift sets, and schedule the delivery date so it’s perfect for customers celebrating a special occasion.
Customers will love the personalized touch, helping you improve engagement and increase customer loyalty.
LDT Gift Wrap and Options is free to download and use, gaining you unrestricted access to all the app’s functions.
Price: Free
Launched: August 16, 2023
Overview: Another app that helps you find and connect with the most well-suited social media influencers out there, Kristagram has an advantage over Influencify— in that it is free to download and use.
Kristagram is actually more than just a Shopify app, it’s a platform in its own right, where users can connect with brands, influencers, and customers.
The developers of Kristagram, AppMixo®, understood the importance of word-of-mouth marketing and see influencer marketing as the clear modern manifestation of that traditional, older approach. This prompted its developers to go on a mission to create an extensive database of social media outstanding influencers.
Their directory could potentially help you connect and get in touch, facilitating meaningful collaborations and interactions based on shared interests and expertise.
The Kristagram app is free to download and use, gaining you unrestricted access to all the app’s functions. You can also sign up to join the platform through their site.
Price: Free
Launched: August 17, 2023
Overview: Operating your online business across a multi-state level can get overwhelming when dealing with local taxes. With Kinsugi, you can say goodbye to manually looking up tedious tax rules with the app’s automated nexus tracking across all US states.
Kintsugi presents a hassle-free solution for tax tracking so that you can focus on what truly matters—growing your business.
The Kinsugi app calculates your total sales and transactions in every state and shows when you reach economic nexus, allowing you to save precious time and money. In other words, The Kintsugi app figures out how much you’ve sold and done business in each state. It tells you when you’ve done enough business in a state to have to pay taxes there. Kintsugi streamlines state taxes for you, so you’ll worry less about taxes and can enjoy the ease of doing business.
Kinsugi is free to download and use, gaining you unrestricted access to all the app’s functions.
7. Joovii Multi-Carrier Shipping
Price: Starts at $14.95/month
Launched: August 18, 2023
Overview: Simplify shipping with Joovii Multi-Carrier Shipping. This newly published Shopify App seamlessly integrates with multiple carrier services, streamlining your shipping process by allowing merchants to effortlessly book shipments with Sendle, My Post Business, eParcel, or Startrack directly within the Shopify admin.
That app features a shipping rate calculator, taking details from your customer’s orders, like size and weight, and providing real-time quoting during checkout, and also auto-fills booking information. It’s an overall comprehensive solution to shipment rate calculation and could save you time while ensuring accuracy in shipping fees.
The app costs $14.95/month, which is its all-inclusive plan. You can also enjoy their 30-day free trial to see if the app suits your online business’s needs.
Price: Free
Launched: August 16, 2023
Overview: Set to empower your online business, Intelligence Bank has published its own app on Shopify called IntelligencBank Assets app. IntelligenceBank developed this Shopify app to help marketing teams manage campaign production, approvals, digital assets, and brand governance.
This app’s purpose is to streamline your asset management, collaborating seamlessly with IntelligenceBank, and allowing you to easily attach approved DAM assets to your Shopify products and variants directly.
The app uses the help of AI to simplify the authentication process, efficient asset access, and direct attachment, bridging the gap between asset management and product integration.
The IntelligenceBank Asset app is free to download and use, gaining you unrestricted access to all the app’s functions.
Price: Free
Launched: August 15, 2023
Overview: Being able to track and monitor the behavior of your customers as they navigate your website and go through the conversion process can offer merchants a wealth of information, information that will help you improve how you run your business overall. The app was developed by GrowCommerce, with the intent of helping you easily and accurately track your site visitors’ behavior, with Google Analytics 4 via Google Tag Manager.
This GA4 app also automates ecommerce events and processes, likebrowsing product lists, adding items to carts, and completing checkouts. This helps you understand your user site behavior and marketing channel performance so that you can make better data-driven decisions for your Shopify business.
When it comes to owning an online business, analytics is everything in monitoring your site’s performance and finding areas to improve.
GrowCom Google Analytics 4 is free to download and use, gaining you unrestricted access to all the app functions.
Price: Free Plan Available
Launched: August 17, 2023
Overview: Many of the new additions to Shopify’s App Store include AI functions. Developed by aarzoo, Inc., MagicStudio is set to be a groundbreaking tool that harnesses AI to turn your product photos into something more extraordinary in minutes.
The app is supposed to do away with long and expensive photoshoots and Photoshop. With MagicStudio, you can start with any product image and transport your product into any setting you can imagine. It can help you edit backgrounds and help you incorporate different themes to match your brand or the shopping season, e.g., Christmas-themed product backgrounds. The app is going to revolutionize the quality and style of your product page, making everything look more harmonized and professional.
You can embrace the free plan with up to 40 image generations or go for the unlimited plan at $29.99 per month or $179.99 per year, giving you unrestricted access to photo generations, storage, styles, and resolutions.
Price: Free
Launched: August 18, 2023
Overview: We all need a little help sometimes when it comes to grammar and in writing content for our websites and online stores, and an AI assistant or program can really help you recognize and correct the little mistakes we are bound to make now and again. Grammar—Content Assistant is a Shopify App that does just that.
The app assists you in checking and correcting the grammar, spelling, and punctuation of your store content. The app works across all store pages, correcting grammar mistakes in product titles and descriptions, email and SMS notifications, theme content, shop policies, navigations, collections, blogs, and articles. Overall, this AI-powered grammar-checking app on Shopify helps your shop appear more professional and polished and improves SEO as search engines are in favor of high-quality text.
Grammar—Content Assistant is free to download and use, gaining you unrestricted access to all the app’s functions.
Price: Starts at $14.99/month
Launched: August 16, 2023
Overview: It’s important to stay in touch with your customers to keep them coming back to your shop to get the latest deals and explore new launches. That’s what the new Shopify GhostApps Social Sender is for. Developed by GhostApps themselves, the app allows merchants to send marketing messages and promotional offers to their followers via Facebook and Instagram.
With this app, you can build up your subscriber list and send targeted messages directly to customers and potential customers alike. You’ll be able to reach an even wider audience and drive traffic, sales, and engagement by promoting your brand directly to your followers and online subscribers.
GhostApps Social Sender is priced at just $14.99 per month, but you can go for their 14-day free trial to start things off and see how the app performs with your brand.
Shopify offers a wide variety of premium and free applications that can expand the functionality of your store and improve your operations, so it’s crucial to choose the best ones for your business.
In this article, we’ve presented 12 new app launches to the Shopify App Store platform released in the summer of 2023. The apps mentioned here feature several promising functions set to help you run a better online business overall. We encourage you to visit the Shopify App Store or our Shopify App Comparison tool to explore the brand new app releases and to check out some of Shopify’s most highly rated apps to discover functions you would like to integrate into your Shopify store as well.
Need help finding the best apps for your Shopify store? visit our Shopify App Comparison tool.
Get in Touch
At Ecommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful Shopify businesses. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
10 Most Common Questions about Live Chat Tool Answered
Customer success is key to the growth of any business, especially for those who deeply depend on website sales growth. The need for live chat tool in the current industry is driven by the growing demand for delivering efficient and convenient customer service. It has become inevitable for many businesses in the modern industry. It enables customers to quickly and easily get the information they need without having to wait for long periods of time or having to leave a message and wait for a representative to respond.
In today’s fast-paced and competitive business world, customers expect quick and personalized responses to their questions & concerns. Live chat software does this with ease by communicating with customers in real time, providing quick and efficient customer support. This application has become important in the era of e-commerce, where customers may have questions about products or services before making a purchase.
1. What are Live Chat Tools?
It is a tool that allows real-time communication between businesses and customers to upscale their business. This type of software is typically used on websites, where customers can connect with customer service representatives in real-time. Live chat app allow customers to ask their queries, get answers, and even get support with application troubleshooting. Live chat apps are very crucial for those businesses that truly want to provide excellent customer service and boost customer satisfaction.
2. What are the Benefits of using Live Chat Tools?
Here are some of the advantages of using a website live chat app:
Increased Customer Satisfaction: These allow customers to get answers to their questions quickly and comfortably. This can result in increased customer satisfaction, loyalty, and a better customer experience overall which leads to more conversions.
Cost-Effective: Live chat tool is a cost-effective solution to providing customer service, as it requires fewer resources than other customer service channels.
Increased Efficiency: Live chat application is faster and more efficient than traditional customer service methods. Customers can get answers to their questions quickly and easily, leading to higher customer satisfaction levels.
Automation: Live chat solutions can automate certain tasks, such as providing canned responses to frequently asked questions. This can help to save time & resources for customer service teams.
3. Is Live Chat Tools Ideal for Sales and Customer Service?
Live chat is a great tool for businesses to generate sales. It gives customers access to immediate responses to their questions and gives sales staff the chance to connect quickly with potential customers.
Live chat tool permits businesses to allow more close relationships with their clients which may increase client loyalty & increase revenue.
4. Can the Live Chat Tool be used for Lead Generation and Market Research?
This can be used for generating quality leads, and market analysis. A live chat platform is a great way to interact with customers and get feedback on products & services in real-time. Live chat software also allows businesses to collect information from their customers in order to better understand what they need or looking for from their products or services.
Live chats are also excellent for market research because they allow businesses to gather information about their customers’ needs and opinions on different topics. This helps them tailor their services so that they best meet the needs of each individual customer.
5. Can a Live Chat Tool Track Customer Behaviour and Integrate it with Other Tools?
Live chat tools can be used to track customer behaviour and integrate it with other apps for better tracking. A live chat app’s goal is to show the precise wants of clients and the manner in which they desire assistance. This can be achieved by posing queries, seeing how they interact with the website, and monitoring their social media profiles. The data acquired from this method may be utilized to build the website’s user interface or content readability based on what’s working for them. By ensuring sure you are giving the appropriate information at the appropriate moment, you may greatly improve the experience your customers have with you.
6. How do Live Chat Tools Handle Multiple Chats and After-Hours Support?
The live chat application is designed to handle multiple chats and midnight support. The software will give you access to live chat 24/7, so you can respond to questions as they come up. The software also has features that allow you to see which users are currently logged in, so you can organize your responses to those users first. You can also allot tasks and follow up on them later if necessary.
7. How do the Live Chat Tool Improve Customer Satisfaction and Response Times?
The live chat tool improves response times by providing customers with an immediate response to their queries. With live chat, customers can ask questions & receive answers in real-time without having to wait or hold for an email response. This can drastically reduce customer wait times and provide better customer service.
Moreover, live chat applications can be used to provide customers with proactive support, such as personalized suggestions or product tips. This can help to increase customer satisfaction by providing customers with the information they need in a timely manner.
8. How Does Live Chat Tool Improve Team Productivity, Website Conversion Rates, and Customer Retention?
Team Productivity: Live chat apps can help teams stay connected and collaborate more effectively. By having an easier way to communicate with each other, teams can save time and resources as they work together to complete tasks.
Website Conversion Rates: Live chat tool helps to increase website conversion rates by providing customers with quick and helpful customer service. The potential user who is visiting the website can get their questions answered quickly and easily, making them more likely to convert into paying customers.
Customer Retention: Live chat tool will help increase customer retention by providing customers with more personalized and helpful customer service. When customers feel like they’re being heard & their questions are being addressed quickly, they’re more likely to remain loyal to the company.
9. Can the Live Chat Tool be used on Mobile Devices for Remote Teams, Account Management, and Team Collaboration?
A live chat tool is an important tool for remote teams and account management. With its ability to promote communication among teams, live chat applications can be used to quickly send messages, share files & relevant information, create group chat rooms & more. The great news is that the live chat system can also be used on mobile phones, allowing team members to stay connected and collaborate no matter where they are.
With live chat apps on mobile devices, remote teams can use important information, ask teammates questions and find answers quickly. Account management teams can use live chat apps to observe customer relations and provide support, while team collaboration is simplified with the ability to create and share documents on the go. Live chat software can also be used for customer support & customer engagement.
10. Can the Live Chat Tool be used to Gathering Customer Feedback?
A live chat tool is an excellent approach to obtaining customer feedback. Customers are able to immediately express their thoughts and experiences with a company’s goods and services, giving valuable information that might enhance the customer experience. Additionally, live chat offers a useful method for clients to contact businesses for customer care, making it simpler for businesses to reply to inquiries from customers and offer prompt assistance.
Applications for live chat also contain features like sentiment analysis, which can help companies assess consumer sentiment in real-time and learn more about their clientele. Live chat is the ideal technique for gathering client feedback due to all of these advantages.
Summing Up
Live chat tools are an online customer service and marketing solution that enables businesses to communicate with customers in real-time. It typically includes features like automated greetings, canned responses, and data collection.
NinjaChat is a unique live chat tool that stands out from the competition. Unlike other live chat solutions, NinjaChat is designed to be a full-fledged customer service platform that comes with 49 other marketing apps for 500apps for only $14.99 per user.
How to Add Additional User Profile Fields in WordPress Registration
Do you want to add extra profile fields for users to fill in when they register on your WordPress website?
Maybe you want to allow users to submit their social media profiles. Or you might want them to submit their business phone number when registering. This can all be done by adding additional profile fields.
In this article, we will show how to easily add additional user profile fields in WordPress registration forms.
Why Add Additional User Profile Fields in WordPress Registration?
By adding more user profile fields to your WordPress website’s registration form, you can collect extra information from users to improve your marketing campaigns, personalize content, or simply learn more about your audience.
For example, you can ask your users to provide their phone numbers or social media profiles when registering on your WordPress site.
All of these extra fields can be handy if you run a membership website or allow users to sign up as subscribers to your blog. They can also be helpful if you want to store extra contact information for the other writers on your multi-author blog.
That being said, let’s see how to easily add additional user profile fields in WordPress. For this tutorial, we will be discussing two methods, and you can use the links below to jump to the method of your choice:
Method 1: Add Custom User Profile Fields Using Advanced Custom Fields (Recommended)
The best way to add extra user profile fields in WordPress is to use the Advanced Custom Fields plugin. It lets you choose from multiple fields and customize them to fit your needs.
Upon activation, you need to head to the ACF » Field Groups page from the WordPress admin sidebar and click the ‘+ Add Field Group’ button.
This will take you to a new page where you can start by typing a name for the field group.
Keep in mind that this will be the name of the entire field group and not the individual user’s field.
After that, scroll down to the ‘Fields’ section and choose a field type from the dropdown menu.
For example, if you want users to provide their phone number upon registration, then you can choose the ‘Number’ option. Alternatively, if you want users to provide their social media profiles, then you can pick the ‘Text’ option.
Once you have done that, just type the name of your field into the ‘Field Label’ option. For instance, if you want users to provide their Twitter handle before registering, then you can enter that into the field.
The plugin will then automatically generate a field name according to your label name.
Next, you must switch to the ‘Validation’ tab from the top. From here, you can make the field required by toggling on the switch. This way, users won’t be able to register on your WordPress site without filling in the additional field.
After that, you can even set a character limit for your custom field.
Now, switch to the ‘Presentation’ tab from the top.
Once you are there, you can add placeholder text, instructions, and wrapper attributes for your additional user profile field.
Next, scroll down to the ‘Settings’ section and make sure that the ‘Location Rules’ tab is selected. From here, you must set up conditional logic for your custom field so that it will only be displayed for your WordPress site registration.
To do this, select the ‘User Form’ option from the dropdown menu in the left corner of the screen. After that, choose the ‘Register’ option from the dropdown menu in the right corner.
Finally, click the ‘Save Changes’ button at the top of the screen to store your settings.
If you want to add another additional field, then you can also click the ‘+ Add Field’ button.
Now visit your user registration page to view the additional user profile field in action.
This is how it looked on our demo website.
This method allows you to quickly and easily add extra fields to user profiles and user registration forms in WordPress. It is a little less flexible, but it gets the job done.
Once the plugin is activated, it’s time to create some additional user profile fields to use on your registration forms.
We are going to create a phone number field as an example, but you can add as many of these fields as you want.
First, visit the Profile Extra Fields » Add New page from the WordPress admin sidebar. From here, type the name of the field next to the ‘Name’ option.
For example, if you are creating a field for users to submit their phone number, then you can type ‘Phone Number’ as the field name.
After that, select a field type from the dropdown menu. If you are adding a social media profile field, then you can use the ‘Text Field’ option.
However, if you want a field for phone numbers, then you need to select that option from the dropdown menu.
After that, you can also type a pattern for your phone number field or add a description for it.
Next, scroll down to the ‘Field Properties’ section and check the boxes for the user roles that you want this field to be displayed for.
For instance, if you want this field to be displayed for all the authors registering on your WordPress site, then you can check the box next to this user role.
You can choose as many user roles as you want.
Next, you can also check the ‘Required’ box if you don’t want users to register without filling in this field in the form. Make sure that the ‘Always Show in User Registration Form’ box is checked so that your user field will be displayed in the form.
Finally, click the ‘Save Changes’ button to store your settings.
Now, you will need to go into your WordPress dashboard to change some settings for new registrations.
Head to the Settings » General page in your WordPress admin area and then check the membership box so that anyone can register on your website.
Next, you need to make sure that the default role is set to the role which you have added extra fields for. After that, click the ‘Save Changes’ button to store your settings.
This way, you can control the level of access new users have, and this will force the registration form to show the fields you selected earlier in this tutorial.
Here’s what the default registration form looked like on our demo website.
Bonus: Make a Custom User Registration Form in WordPress
The methods in this tutorial have shown you how to add extra user profile fields to the default WordPress registration form.
However, if you would like to create a custom user registration form in WordPress, then you can also easily do that by using the WPForms plugin.
It is the best WordPress form plugin that allows you to design your own user registration form using drag and drop. It also integrates seamlessly with plugins like Advanced Custom Fields, so you can easily insert additional user profile fields.
Communication plays a pivotal role in engaging with customers in the digital age, and it’s crucial for businesses to understand the impact of their messages. This is where message mining comes into play. We’ll be exploring what message mining is, why it is important, how to run it effectively, the significance of A/B testing the copy on your website, and what you can achieve by implementing message mining techniques.
What is Message Mining?
Message mining refers to the process of analysing and extracting valuable insights from a range of communication with customers, like social media conversations, surveys, polls, one-on-one interviews, reviews, and more. It involves using natural language processing (NLP) and data mining techniques to uncover patterns, sentiments, and trends within textual data.
In layman’s terms, you’re scouring the internet for anything on your brand that others are talking about (like gossip). Using that, you can discover certain patterns, both good and bad, in how your users perceive your brand and/or product/s from which you can take actionable insights. You essentially want to know how customers talk about your brand and how your products have impacted their lives.
Why is Message Mining Important?
As we said, effective communication is the backbone of any successful business, whether eCommerce or brick-and-mortar. With eCommerce, message mining allows businesses like yours to gain a deep understanding of your customers’ preferences, pain points, and expectations. Analysing these messages exchanged with customers helps to identify recurring themes, sentiment trends, and areas of improvement.
You’ll be able to refine your messaging strategy, personalise interactions, and enhance customer satisfaction. Not only that, but you’ll be able to use all the good things customers say in your marketing copy.
For example, instead of writing a product description listing all the features of your product or spending hours trying to word the benefits, you’ll be able to find the exact product benefits that customers look for right in your product reviews.
Message mining is an excellent tool for Conversion Rate Optimisation. While many eCommerce businesses focus on design and shade, you’re probably more likely to win over those sales with the correct on-site messaging than you are by changing the shade of your CTA (unless they fail accessibility, but that’s an entirely different conversation).
How to Conduct Message Mining
There are many ways to conduct message mining, and it all depends on the purpose of your data collection. And here are four of them:
1. Conduct Visitor Surveys
These surveys are just for those who simply visit your site. When it comes to conducting a visitor survey, it’s important to implement a strategic and structured approach. Clearly define the objectives of your survey as well as what specific information needs to be collected. Some examples of this would be understanding visitor demographics, their motivations for visiting your site, satisfaction levels, expectations, etc.
You need to design a survey questionnaire that captures this information effectively, utilising a mix of multiple-choice questions, rating scales, and open-ended questions to gather both quantitative and qualitative data. Keep your survey succinct and user-friendly—remember, these customers are just popping into your site. And because they’re visitors, it may be a good place to analyse what these visitors experience and expect from your site.
2. Conduct Customer Surveys
These surveys are generally for customers who have interacted with your brand before and subscribed to your email marketing. Like with visitor surveys, you’ll need to clearly define your survey objectives and what information should be collected.
This survey is sent out through email marketing with a link inviting customers to complete a few (be specific and tell them the number) questions. You’ll want to include, like with the visitor survey, closed-ended and open-ended questions. You should even include comment boxes. You need to clearly communicate the purpose of the survey with your customers, assuring them confidentiality and providing an incentive for participation.
3. Conduct 1-on-1 Interview
This interview is more personal and empathetic. You will need to identify a representative sample of customers based on various demographics and usage patterns, dependent on the insights you’re looking for.
You will need to reach out to these customers individually and explain the purpose of the interview, highlighting how their feedback will contribute to improving products and services. Ensure to create a comfortable, non-threatening environment during the interview and allow customers to express their opinions openly.
Preparing a set of open-ended questions that cover topics such as their experiences, challenges, suggestions, and future expectations, will allow you to gain the necessary data to improve your brand. Remember to respect the customers’ time and privacy and follow up with a thank-you note or token of appreciation for their participation.
Once your surveys are complete, you will need to ‘clean’ the data by removing ‘noise’. Only include relevant information based on the goals of your survey in the beginning. Standardise your format, like in an Excel spreadsheet.
An excellent way to sift through this data is to answer questions like:
What was the main topic of this message? [Comment box]
What aspect of the conversion formula is being addressed in this comment? Motivation, Value, Anxiety
What did they say? [Comment box]
Etc.
While this will take some time, it will bring insights that will prove incredibly valuable to the long-term success of your eCommerce business.
4. Mining Reviews
Another way to conduct message mining is by going through reviews left for your products or even (gasp) your competitors. You can then “mine” for words, phrases, and benefits that your customers talk about and leverage this by mirroring this speech within product descriptions or email marketing copy.
The benefits that you perceive your customers get versus the benefits they actually get can be slightly or completely different—you may even find that your product solves a problem for your customers that you didn’t know existed.
A/B Testing On-Site Copy
A/B testing is a valuable technique for optimising website copy. By comparing two versions of a webpage or specific messaging elements, businesses can determine which variant performs better in terms of conversion rates, click-through rates, and engagement metrics. Incorporating A/B testing into message mining allows you to refine your messaging based on real user data and preferences. By continuously testing and iterating, you can create compelling and persuasive copy that resonates with your target audience.
What You Can Achieve with Message Mining
The goals of message mining vary based on your brand and specific needs. Here are some key objectives you can achieve through message mining:
Enhance customer satisfaction: By analysing customer messages, you can identify pain points and address them proactively. This leads to improved customer experiences and increased satisfaction levels.
Personalise communication: Message mining enables you to understand individual customer preferences, enabling you to tailor your messaging and offers accordingly. This personalised approach fosters stronger customer relationships and increases customer loyalty.
Optimise marketing campaigns: By analysing customer feedback and sentiment trends, you can gain insights into the effectiveness of your marketing campaigns. This allows you to make data-driven adjustments to your messaging strategy and optimise your marketing efforts.
Improve product development: Customer messages often contain valuable insights and suggestions for product enhancements. Message mining helps you to identify these ideas and incorporate them into your product development roadmap, leading to more customer-centric offerings.
What Blend Has Achieved with Message Mining
Blend worked with a Beauty Client whose overall goal was to increase the Customer Lifetime Value in their store. Naturally, we took the opportunity to test-run message mining by conducting interviews and mining reviews to change the copy of their product descriptions. One simple change to each product—shouldn’t make a huge difference, right?
Wrong.
✔ 25.12% increase in Conversion Rate
✔ 6.39% increase in Average Order Value
✔ 33.33% increase in Per Session Value
Blend & Message Mining
Message mining empowers you to gain a deeper and more comprehensive understanding of your customers, refine your messaging strategies, and enhance your overall communication effectiveness. By leveraging NLP techniques, you can uncover valuable insights hidden within customer interactions and use them to drive meaningful improvements across various aspects of your operations.
Contact us at Blend today to embrace the power of message mining and unlock the potential of your communication and propel your business to long-term success.
The market for SEO Software is highly competitive and it is important for businesses to stay up to date with the latest trends & developments. In order to stay ahead of the competition, businesses must invest in the latest tools and technologies.
This blog post is dedicated to answering some of the most frequently asked questions about SEO tools. We will cover topics such as the best SEO tools to use, the best practices of using SEO tools and the advantages & disadvantages of using SEO Optimizer. By the end of this blog, you’ll have a better understanding of SEO tools & how to use them to benefit your business.
1. What is SEO Software?
SEO Software is software programs, applications and services used to optimize website content and increase visibility on search engine results pages (SERPs). SEO tools help users to improve their website’s ranking on search engine results pages by analyzing the website’s content, structure and links. SEO tools can be used to create keyword-rich content, monitor website rankings, optimize images and videos and track website performance.
2. How Does SEO Software Work?
SEO Software is used to help optimize a website’s content and structure for improved search engine rankings. They are designed to help website owners, marketers and content creators better understand how search engines crawl, and index content and how to improve their web pages for higher rankings in the search engine results pages (SERPs).
These tools can be used to identify areas of a website where improvements can be made, such as keyword density, metadata, and link structure. They can also help identify the types of content that can improve the website’s ranking, such as blog posts, infographics and videos. SEO tools can also be used to monitor and track changes to a website’s rankings over time.
3. Does My Business Need SEO Software?
If you are looking to improve your visibility in search engine rankings, SEO Software can help you do this in a cost-effective, time-efficient way. An SEO Software will allow you to track your website’s performance, identify the keywords that are most beneficial for your business and adjust your website’s content to best optimize for those keywords. By optimizing for the right keywords, you can ensure that your website is appearing in the top search engine results for those terms, increasing the chances of higher amounts of website visitors and potential customers.
4. What are Some Common Features of SEO Software?
SEO tools are software applications designed to help businesses improve their search engine rankings & overall visibility online. Common features of SEO tools include:
Keyword Research: This feature allows users to specify the most popular search terms used by users to find their content. It also provides data about the competition for those keywords and how to optimize content to better rank for those terms.
On-Page Optimization: This feature helps users optimize their web pages by providing access to tools such as page titles, meta descriptions, headings and other page elements to ensure they are optimized for search engine crawlers.
Link Building:Link Building feature helps users discover and create high-quality backlinks to their websites. It can also track the performance of those links and provide data about the type of link, how many times it has been used and what sites it links to.
Site Audits: This feature offers users a comprehensive overview of their website’s health and performance. It can scan for errors, broken links and other technical issues that could be controlling the website from performing well in search results.
Reporting: This feature helps users track their performance over time. It can provide data on organic traffic, keyword rankings, backlinks & other important metrics.
5. How do you do Keyword Research using SEO Tools?
Keyword research is an important part of SEO and is the first step in creating a successful SEO strategy. SEO Software are a great way to do keyword research and can provide invaluable insight into the best keywords to target.
Here are some tips on how to do keyword research using SEO Software:
Start with a seed keyword: Choose a keyword that best describes your business or product.
Use the SEO tool to get related keywords: Using the seed keyword, use the SEO Software to get related keywords. The tool should provide you with a list of related keywords that you can use to target your SEO campaigns.
Analyze the keywords: Once you have a list of related keywords, you can use the SEO Software to analyze the keywords. The tool should provide you with data on search volume, competition, and other metrics that can help you determine the best keywords to target.
Create a list of target keywords: Once you have analyzed the keywords, you can create a list of target keywords that you can use in your SEO campaigns.
Monitor performance: Eventually, you should monitor the performance of your target keywords to see which ones are performing the best. This will help you adjust your approach and make sure that you’re targeting the best keywords.
6. How do I Optimize My Website’s On-Page Elements with SEO tools?
Optimizing your website’s on-page elements with SEO Software can help you to improve your website’s visibility on search engine results pages and gain more organic traffic. SEO Software can help you to identify and address any issues that may be preventing your website from appearing in search results.
Perform an SEO Audit: A wide SEO audit will help you to identify any problems that may be preventing your website from appearing in search engine results. SEO tools can help you to analyze your website’s content, page structure & other on-page elements to identify any issues that need to be addressed.
Optimize Your Content: SEO Software can help you to identify specific keywords and phrases that should be used in your content to maximize your website’s visibility in search engine results. You can also use SEO tools to analyze the readability and quality of your content & make sure that it is optimized for search engine rankings.
Optimize Your Meta Tags and Titles: SEO Software can help you to identify the most effective meta tags and titles for your website. Optimizing these elements can help you to improve your website’s visibility in search engine results.
Monitor Your Website’s Performance: SEO Software can help you to monitor your website’s performance over time. This can help you to identify any areas that need improvement & make the necessary changes to ensure that your website is optimized for search engine rankings.
Optimizing your websites: on-page elements with SEO Software can help you to improve your website’s visibility in search engine results and gain more organic traffic. By performing an SEO audit, optimizing your content, optimizing your meta tags and titles and monitoring your website’s performance, you can ensure that your website is fully optimized for search engine rankings.
7. How can I Track My Website’s Search Engine Rankings with SEO Software?
SEO Software is a great way to track your website’s search engine ranking. This tool can provide you with valuable insights into how your website is performing in the search engine results pages (SERPs). It will tell you which keywords your website is ranked for, as well as the position it is ranking for each keyword. It will also provide you with information about the competition such as which sites are outranking yours. With this information, you will be able to make adjustments to improve your SEO & increase your website’s visibility in search engine results.
8. How do I Conduct a Technical SEO Audit using SEO Software?
Research and select an SEO tool that is right for you: Many SEO Software offer a variety of features and services, so make sure to read reviews and compare pricing.
Create an account with the SEO tool: Create an account of your choice and add your website’s URL to the platform.
Set up keyword tracking: Enter the keywords that are relevant to your website and track their ranking in the search engine results pages (SERPs).
Monitor your website’s rankings: Many SEO Software gives you the option to set up alerts that will notify you when your website’s ranking changes.
Analyze the data: Review the data from your website’s rankings to identify areas for improvement and develop an SEO strategy.
Make adjustments: Based on your analysis, optimize your website & content to improve your website’s rankings.
Repeat: Track and analyze your website’s rankings on a regular basis to monitor the effectiveness of your SEO strategy.
9. How do I Find and Fix Broken Links on My Website using SEO Software?
Install an SEO tool: First and foremost, you will need to install SEO Software that can detect broken links on your website. There are many tools available online, some of which are free, while others require a small fee.
Scan our website: Once you have the tool installed, run a scan of your website. The tool will generate a list of all the links on your website, including broken ones.
Identify broken links: After the scan is complete, you can then identify the broken links on your website. This can be done by looking at the HTTP status code for each link. A 404 code indicates that the link is broken.
Replace broken links: Once you have identified the broken links on your website, you can then start to replace them. You can either look for another link to replace the broken one, or you can fix the existing link.
Test the links: After you have replaced the broken links, it is important to test them to make sure they work. This can be done by clicking on the link and seeing if it takes you to the correct page.
Monitor your website: Once you have fixed the broken links, it is important to keep an eye on your website to make sure no new broken links appear. Regular monitoring of your website is essential for keeping your website running smoothly.
10. Can SEO Software help me Identify and Fix Duplicate Content on My Website?
Yes, SEO Software can help you identify and fix duplicate content on your website. Many SEO tools offer features such as content optimization, which can help you find any duplicate content and suggest ways to fix it. These tools can also help you identify any duplicate content that is being indexed by search engines allowing you to make changes to your content to ensure it is unique & original.
11. How do I Optimize My Website’s Images using SEO Software?
Optimizing your website’s images can help improve your website’s search engine rankings. An SEO Software can be used to help you optimize your images for maximum SEO benefit.
Compressing Images: Compressing an image helps reduce its file size which can help the image load faster and improve website performance.
Adding Alt Text: Adding alternative text to an image helps search engine crawlers understand what an image is about. This helps improve your website’s search engine rankings.
Choosing the Right File Format: Different file formats have different advantages. Choosing the right format for your images can help ensure they load quickly and are optimized for search engine visibility.
Resizing Images: Resizing images to the optimal size helps ensure they load quickly & look good on all devices.
12. How can I Improve My Website’s Load Speed using SEO Software?
Optimize Your Images: Optimizing your website’s images can significantly improve its load speed by reducing the file size. You can use SEO Software to analyze the image size and compression level to ensure that they are optimized.
Minify HTML, CSS, and JavaScript: Minifying the HTML, CSS, and JavaScript of your website can reduce the size of the code, making it easier for the browser to load. SEO Software can help you identify and minify the bloated code that is slowing down your website.
Leverage Browser Caching: Browser caching allows the browser to store certain elements of your website so they don’t need to be downloaded again each time a visitor visits your page. SEO Software can help you configure the correct cache settings for your website.
Enable GZIP Compression: GZIP compression can reduce the size of your website’s files, allowing them to be downloaded more quickly. An SEO Software can help you configure GZIP compression for your website.
Optimize Your Database: Optimizing your website’s database can reduce the number of queries that need to be made when a page is loaded. An SEO Software can help you identify and optimize slow queries that are slowing down your website.
Use a Content Delivery Network (CDN): A CDN can reduce the load time of your website by serving the files from multiple locations, reducing the distance between the user and the server. An SEO tool can help you configure a CDN for your website.
Endnotes
SEO (Search Engine Optimization) Software is a software tool that helps website owners and marketers to optimize their website and content for search engines. They provide a variety of functions including keyword research, content optimization, backlink analysis, and reporting.
With NinjaSEO, as well as 49 other applications such as Marketing, Support and Productivity from 500apps, businesses can improve their SEO performance and website rankings while also increasing their productivity and customer service. The comprehensive package is available for just $14.99 per user, making it an excellent value for businesses that want to maximize their SEO efforts and improve their online presence.
Having a good relationship with customers is paramount for success. Communication is key, and one essential way you can do this effectively is with multichannel support – specifically chat. There’s almost no other way to speak one-on-one with a customer than using a chat platform. This means the right solution will become invaluable to your business. Using Crisp for business communications can deliver greater user satisfaction across a number of areas.
For this post, we’ll look at using Crisp for business communications, although the app can do much more than that. First, let’s talk about what Crisp is, then discuss how it fits into your workflow.
Understanding Crisp Chat
Customers ultimately drive business. This much can be obvious, but what might be less so is your communication strategy. In fact, you need to be able to liaise with not only clients but internally too. Crisp packages up a suite of tools to help you handle multichannel support, and internal conversations without a negative impact.
As we go through this article, you’ll find out what Crisp can do for your communications. However, here’s a quick summary of its key features:
Chatbot and widget. You can build a custom chatbot without any code using a visual builder. From there, you can implement it on site using a widget.
A Customer Relationship Manager (CRM). Crisp comes with a full-featured CRM to help you learn more about your customers and provide them a better experience.
An internal shared inbox. Central to Crisp is its shared inbox. This collects all of the conversations you have and lets you team collaborate in an optimal way.
There are lots of things Crisp does that the competition doesn’t (or won’t). For example, popular platforms such as TawkTo and HelpScout can’t centralize your communications from social media platforms.
Others, such as Olark and Front, don’t let you implement a knowledge base on your site. Even HubSpot’s Service Hub can’t offer the co-browsing and live translation options of Crisp.
Crisp offers a free tier. However, a premium plan is where the value lies. The Pro tier is $25 per month, per workspace (with four seats available). For the full Crisp experience, though, the Unlimited tier is $95 per month, per workspace with 20 seats available. Throughout the post, we’ll talk about the features and functionality in the Unlimited tier.
The Power of Real-Time Communication
In a nutshell, real-time business communications accelerate decision-making, collaboration, and your all-around efficiency. It can also enhance your problem-solving strategies and optimize your feedback loops.
With Crisp, customers have multiple ways to connect with greater immediacy. Integrating all of your support channels into the shared inbox is a given. However, there’s more you can do. For example, Crisp’s ‘marquee’ offering is its chat functionality.
Given that nearly three-quarters of people like chatbots due to how instantaneous they are, you should implement it without question.
Crisp gives you a visual builder that doesn’t use code but still provides the power and flexibility you need to create real-time conversational experiences around the clock.
This lets you create optimal conversations on a per-channel basis that answer questions instantly. As such, you can generate more leads without the need for forms, automate specific actions such as calendar scheduling, and offer a seamless experience with a human if you need to escalate an issue.
Enhancing Customer Service with Crisp Chat
Your customer service and support may already be good, but with Crisp, you can turn this into ‘great.’ In fact, plenty of businesses use Crisp for business communications and enhancing customer service.
For example, Tractian provides industrial companies with performance monitoring, asset management, and more. Crisp is central to their workflow:
…using Crisp, we are able to provide a better customer experience…
The company can manage a request internally and send it to the right team depending on the query. This will be easy with the shared inbox (more of which shortly).
The ability to view your customer’s screens using Magic Browse is vital. While passive information gathering is useful, British company Hoxton Mix takes over screens when required:
…Magic Browse is something amazing. Being able to assist customers in real-time is a key asset…
This in non-intrusive and collaborative. For an additional level of support, you could even begin a video call in browser. All of this needs no additional plugins and comes as part of the Crisp experience.
Crisp Chat for Team Collaboration
Although a conversation is one-to-one, handling a customer can be a collaborative effort. The Crisp shared inbox can facilitate this:
For instance, you can assign conversations to the right team member, maybe one with particular skills or knowledge. Crisp also lets you write notes that the customer never sees.
This ‘pre-support’ conversation can be vital for choosing the right way to help customers. Even better, those notes are available for all of the team to see.
Because Crisp can integrate your other platforms, this means you can collaborate in ways you haven’t been able to achieve before. For example, lots of business use WhatsApp or Telegram, but these don’t support collaboration.
With Crisp, you can bring those conversations into the shared inbox and deliver better support with greater efficiency.
Integrating Crisp Chat into Your Business
Crisp is compatible with almost every type of website and Content Management System (CMS). For WordPress users, using Crisp for business communications couldn’t be easier. There’s a dedicated Crisp plugin, and you can find it using the Plugins > Add New screen in WordPress. From here, search for the plugin:
Once the installation and activation process completes, you can begin to set the plugin up using the Crisp Settings screen – the button you want is to Install Crisp on my WordPress:
From here, click to link Crisp to WordPress. After this, Crisp will install the live chat widget on your site.
However, in some cases, you may not see the Crisp live chat widget on your front-end. If this is true for you, it’s a good idea to purge your caching plugin (or equivalent).
The Crisp Settings page includes links to your inbox and settings on the Crisp dashboard. Within these, you can find some handy ways to give users more information about your provision. For instance, the Availability Settings let users see when you have a staffed help desk:
For e-commerce sites, you may also want to consider WooCommerce support. This is something you can set up with a plugin inside of Crisp.
Measuring Success with Crisp Chat
Evaluating the performance of your customer support is a perpetual task. Crisp covers you here, as it includes a full-featured and comprehensive analytics section within its dashboard:
This splits all of the available metrics into six different sections. However, we’d focus on some of this data more than others. For instance, the Support Responsiveness calendar view uses a traffic-light system to show you the relative effectiveness of your provision.
You can combine this with the Mean Response Time metric at the top of the Messaging section:
This gives you two important performance metrics with high-visibility on your dashboard. However, the Rating section shows you arguably one of the most important aspects of your support – whether it succeeds with customers:
Once you resolve a conversation, the user gets the opportunity to rate and review your performance. These collate within the Rating section, and you get to see a mean score, whether the customer left a comment, and how that mean rating changes over time.
From there, you can dig into any rating, comment, conversation, or assigned team member to find out more about the interaction:
This lets you understand how you operate on a user-by-user basis – vital to ensure a personalized customer support service.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
It’s time for some quick-fire questions and answers about obtaining and using Crisp. The below should fill in your knowledge gap, although the comments section at the end of the article is always open!
How Much Does Crisp Cost?
Crisp has two premium plans: Pro for $25 per month, and Unlimited for $95 per month. Both of these are the cost per workspace.
What Is a Workspace?
A Crisp workspace is essentially a team inbox. This isn’t tied to a domain, so you can install the same live chat widget on multiple sites and bring them into a single workspace.
What Does the Free Tier Provide?
Crisp provides a free tier in order to get a feel for the platform. This gives you two seats – so you and a colleague can have separate accounts – along with core functionality. For example, you get access to the shared inbox, a contact form, mobile apps, and an “unlimited” number of conversations. You can also integrate with Shopify and WordPress.
What Types of Business Does Crisp Suit?
In our opinion, any company that needs to communicate better with customers should consider Crisp. It’s a solution that gives you a thoughtful feature set and the ability to integrate multichannel support into your business. However, e-commerce sites will love what Crisp offers, along with businesses with an international customer base.
Does Crisp Support My Device and/or Operating System (OS)?
There are a range of apps to support all types of devices and setups. You can use the web interface regardless of your system. However, there are also apps for Mac, Windows, iOS, and Android too. There’s even support for smart watches!
That’s It!
Multichannel support and general business messaging is a key factor for success. After all, if you can’t communicate with customers and your team, your efficiency and reputation will drop. The right platform is, therefore, essential. In our opinion, Crisp is a chameleon – a multifaceted messaging platform to help across your entire business.
Is using Crisp for business communications going to be something you implement, and if so, how? Let us know in the comments section below!
Build Better Point-of-Sale Apps with POS UI Extensions (2023)
Shopify POS is a flexible, customizable tool for brick-and-mortar retailers, thanks to the support of third-party apps. Apps are an easy and effective way to build and solve essential in-store and omnichannel tasks, and positively impact the merchant experience. Unlike traditional point-of-sale (POS) systems, apps are front and center of the Shopify POS experience, making it easier than ever to customize workflows to suit any business need.
Now, with new POS UI extensions, you have the technology to extend the functionality of the Shopify platform like never before. POS UI extensions enable developers to write simple React or JavaScript/TypeScript code that is translated into native app code, which is seamlessly integrated into the POS experience while preserving performance and rendering native UI.
In this article, we take a look at the details of how POS UI extensions work, and how some app developers are capitalizing on the opportunity of extending into Shopify POS.
Get started with POS UI extensions
With faster load time and powerful capabilities to build custom functions, POS UI extensions build better, faster apps that look and feel native to Shopify, significantly improving the user experience. Get started today by visiting our documentation below.
Using UI extensions to extend apps into the Shopify POS takes the guesswork out of the user experience both for merchants, and for you as a developer. You can now build specific POS workflows using components and libraries built by experienced developers, without sacrificing performance.
The benefits of building with POS UI extensions are:
Improved app performance thanks to faster load times
Higher user engagement in-app through highly-integrated workflows
Easy implementation process so you can capitalize on new opportunities
We have launched two new extension points for the Smart Grid. The Smart Grid is the home screen on the Shopify POS app where you can add different tiles representing frequently accessed products, collections, features and third-party apps. The two new extensions available for the Smart Grid are the Tile and the Modal.
1. The Smart Grid Tile extension
The Smart Grid Tile extension point displays information about the extension and opens the Modal, which contains the primary app functionality.
POS UI extensions applying a discount.
The tile is fully dynamic and can respond to changes in the cart or the backend of your app. For example, using the updated Receive Transfers POS UI extension, the tile could display a subtitle indicating the number of transfers, prompting the user to investigate.
The tile can also be a quick and powerful shortcut on the Smart Grid. For example, a discount app could apply 50% off a purchase when a customer buys five items. The tile could detect the five items in the cart and go from a disabled state to an enabled state, displaying 50% off available.
Barcode Scanner
To continue to enhance in-store experiences, we’ve enabledbarcode scanningfor POS UI Extensions. This powerful tool allows you to seamlessly integrate barcode scanning capabilities into extensions, opening up a world of possibilities for creating highly efficient in-store workflows. Build custom solutions that streamline operations,like scanning loyalty or employee cards for discounts, completing stocktakes or receiving products in store from a transfer or purchase order. This not only optimizes operational efficiency but also elevates the customer experience, making shopping quicker, easier, and more enjoyable.
2. Modal extension
The Modal extension point is a full screen display. Using the Modal extension allows for more space to visualize information and complex workflows, improving the UI experience.
Modal components
Worrying about styling updates and keeping up with Shopify’s design system Polaris meant maintaining a bunch of CSS files. Now, building with POS UI extensions means using modal extension components that mirror the look and feel of the Shopify POS experience. When Shopify makes an update to the component library, the extension is automatically updated.
Figma UI Kit
Building with POS UI extensions comes with access to a comprehensive Figma UI kit that contains styles, guidelines and component building blocks to help you build tailored experiences for POS. Using the UI kit will help you speed up development time and create a consistent customer experience across Android and iOS.
How Shopify developers are already working with POS UI extensions
We opened access to POS UI extensions to a few select developers, to help implement and test how these extensions really worked in retail and omnichannel environments. One such developer was Sammy Isseyegh and the team at Stackable Discounts, a POS app that combines multiple promotions from discounts to manual codes, giving customers the benefits of cost savings and merchants a handy way to apply multiple discounts to the cart. The team at Stackable Discounts rebuilt their app using POS UI extensions.
“Because of the nature of the app opening multiple times during a single checkout, the time it took to load the screen and for our app to do the calculations and apply the discounts was difficult for merchants,” says Sammy.
Stackable Discount was built using POS Link, which responds to changes to the cart. Once items are scanned, users click the Stackable Discounts tile on the Smart Grid to calculate and apply discounts.
“The app is now just a fundamentally better experience,” explains Sammy. “It is ten times faster, consistent across iOS and Android, and solves top pain points for merchants. The code is much cleaner and easier to look after.”
Andrew Cargill and the team at app development company Zapiet agree. Their app helps merchants maximize sales and stay in control of orders and logistics with delivery, pickup, and scheduling functionality. Retail is a priority for them.
“Our app is all about physical retail stores,” Andrew shares. “Merchants are always interacting with Zapiet.”
Zapiet also built their POS app using POS Link. It looked exactly like the desktop version, containing all the features and elements you would expect when administering orders from the Shopify admin.
“When you are at the POS in a busy shop and a customer is standing in front of you, you don’t need all the elements in the admin dashboard. It is a very different customer experience.”
Zapiet’s customers were reporting slow load times, but the development team had limited options due to a long integration authentication process. “We were prepared to build something ourselves just to make it faster and easier for our customers.”
Zapiet joined the early access program for POS UI extensions to jump at the opportunity to solve this challenge. They had the basics of the rebuilt app up and running in two days, plus a few weeks to build out the rest.
“It was super fast to get up and running. You code and instantly see the changes locally in real time,” says Andrew. “It is a huge help. The development speed is significantly faster. We are just writing with React and it’s beautiful out of the box.”
Endear, omnichannel CRM and clienteling app that helps retail teams drive sales through remote channels, rebuilt their existing POS app using POS UI extensions. The new POS extensions helps businesses message customers directly from the Shopify POS app using the Endear tile on the Smart Grid.
Grow your business with POS
Ordergroove, a popular subscription and membership app for enterprise and fast-growing brands, is providing new ways to grow customer lifetime value with the launch of omnichannel subscriptions using POS UI extensions.
With brands looking to offset rising customer acquisition costs by driving repeat purchases, Greg Alvo, Ordergroove Founder and CEO, recognized the opportunity for brands to grow their subscriber base through in-store subscriptions.
“Our merchants are constantly looking for ways to engage with their customers, and building long-term relationships via subscriptions is a critical component of that. Marrying in-store and online experiences with our Relationship Commerce platform takes our vision of turning one-and-done transactions into profitable, recurring relationships a step further.” The new Ordergroove POS extension opens up a new channel for Shopify merchants to offer subscriptions to their customers, bridging the gap between their physical and digital experience while growing customer lifetime value.
Building an app for Shopify POS for the first time, the team experienced a smooth development process thanks to the many components you can render and APIs you can call to customize the POS experience. “The component library made it easy to design and build out our app’s frontend experience for POS in a short period of time.”With a relatively quick turnaround time, Ordergroove was able to launch a brand new app that addressed a feature request for some of their largest merchants and is enabling all retail merchants to generate more foot traffic and recurring revenue.
More flexibility to come with POS UI extensions
While we’re starting with the Smart Grid Tile and Modal, since they’re such an interactive part of POS, we have plans to add new components to continue extending the POS functionality. So, whether you’re getting started with building an app for retail for the very first time, improving the efficiency of a current extension, or building totally new functionality, POS UI extensions will transform app performance using the extensible platform that will power the future of apps for Shopify POS.
Additionally, POS is a growing market with exciting opportunities to grow your business into new spaces. Buyers want a seamless and engaging retail experience, and merchants are looking for opportunities to meet this demand. The opportunity for apps to support these requirements and facilitate these experiences directly from POS is expanding.
Whether you are looking to improve the efficiency of a current extension or build totally new functionality, retail is a green space in the Shopify App Store.
To get started building POS UI extensions, visit our developer documentation. We’ve got everything you need to start building your customized workflows including a step-by-step guide, code snippets, screen shots, and more.
Get started with POS UI extensions
With faster load time and powerful capabilities to build custom functions, POS UI extensions build better, faster apps that look and feel native to Shopify, significantly improving the user experience. Get started today by visiting our documentation below.
International Day of Charity: 4 Ideas and Examples on How Businesses Can Give Back
One of the greatest joys about running a retail store or restaurant is that it gives you the opportunity to serve the community. Whether that means creating meaningful job opportunities at your store, or serving scrumptious food to the locals, your business can become a place for connection and local pride.
Even better, today’s modern business landscape gives merchants the ability to implement initiatives that transcend their local communities.
And with the International Day of Charity coming up, we figured now is a great time to highlight the ways that businesses can amplify their impact and embrace their social and charitable endeavors.
We’ll cover:
Prep for the future of commerce
Download our free playbook and learn how to sell on different channels, boost loyalty and increase foot traffic with technology.
What is the International Day of Charity?
The International Day of Charity is observed annually on September 5th. The United Nations established this day to raise awareness and encourage individuals, NGOs, and stakeholders around the world to help others through volunteer and philanthropic activities.
The date (Sept 5) was chosen to commemorate the death anniversary of Mother Teresa of Calcutta, who received the Nobel Peace Prize in 1979 for her work to overcome poverty and distress, which also constitute a threat to peace.
Why are charitable initiatives important?
Implementing charitable initiatives (not just on the International Day of Charity) can have a profound impact on your business, community, and the greater good. That may sound a bit trite, but it’s true.
Consider the following:
Charitable giving leads to better health
Charitable acts, whether big or small, encourage individuals and organizations to think beyond their own needs and consider the well-being of others. Plus, charitable organizations provide opportunities for individuals to volunteer, which then fosters a sense of community engagement, personal satisfaction and skill development.
These, in turn, can improve people’s personal well-being, mental health and life satisfaction.
Charitable initiatives can have a positive impact on the economy
It’s not just about personal wellbeing and community. Charities often stimulate local economies by providing jobs, purchasing local goods and supporting small enterprises.
Essentially, services and activities funded by donations and carried out by charities lead to additional economic benefits downstream. Every dollar donated to charity can have an impact that is several times its initial value in the form of job creation, improved health outcomes, educational opportunities and more.
Giving back is good for business
Engaging in charitable activities showcases your commitment to ethical practices and contributes to your corporate social responsibility (CSR) goals. This can lead to enhanced brand reputation, employee morale and customer loyalty.
Survey data cited by Statista shows that the majority of consumers (70%) either “totally agree” or “rather agree” that they’re bound to be loyal to a company or product that demonstrates corporate social responsibility.
Ways that businesses can give back
Now that we’ve covered the fundamentals of the International Day of Charity and the benefits of charitable initiatives, let’s look at some of the concrete ways you can give back.
Donate a percentage of your profits to charity
Consider setting aside a percentage of your earnings for charitable endeavors. The amount of your donation and any participating products will depend on your business. For example, if a cause is ingrained in your business, then you can choose to donate a portion of overall profits to select organizations.
Many veteran-owned businesses, for example, donate a percentage of their overall profits to groups that support vets.
Another option is to set up charitable donations for certain products or product lines. Maybe you design an item with a specific cause in mind. In this instance, it makes sense to allocate the proceeds from that particular item directly to the cause, creating a clear and meaningful connection between the product and the mission it supports. This not only raises awareness for the cause but also allows customers to feel a direct impact with their purchase.
The goal is to protect one of Britain’s most endangered bumblebees, the shrill carder bee. As part of their commitment, Neal’s Yard donates 3% of the sales from their Bee Lovely Collection to charities that support bees. Their efforts have culminated in contributions exceeding £250,000 and partnerships with prominent organizations like Friends of the Earth and Bees for Development.
Donate your products
Another effective way to give back is to donate your products to those in need. This type of initiative is well-suited if you sell products that fulfill certain necessities or daily essentials (e.g., socks, food, etc.)
The fashion and accessories brand Bombas, for example, donates clothing items to charity every time customers make a purchase. For every item purchased through Bombas, the company adds to its total items donated tally then gets to work in making those products.
We can see another great example of this in E2-Sport, which has a mechanical workshop for bike repairs. E2-Sport has a policy where any bikes that haven’t been claimed for more than 90 days will be donated to charity.
Host events in your store or restaurant
Hosting events in your store or restaurant can foster community engagement, giving your customers a unique experience while also potentially driving increased foot traffic and sales. For best results, consider implementing a theme or partnering with a charitable organization when hosting your event.
Take, for example, Melissa Joy Manning, owner of the namesake jewelry store. Melissa is a philanthropist and partner to Feeding America.
According to the organization’s website, “Melissa supports and advocates for hunger relief through Feeding America as well as Alameda County Community Food Bank and Food Bank For New York City, both network member food banks that serve the communities where her MJM jewelry boutiques are located.”
To support the cause, Melissa hosts in-store events for Feeding America’s food member banks, along with an ecommerce charity drive to raise funds and awareness.
Beyond that, Melissa also an ecommerce charity drive for Feeding America, donating a portion of each purcahse to NYC food banks.
“I think there is just so much need, and I see it from my own back door in New York. It pains me to think that I am here doing what I love while knowing at the same time that a kid down the street may miss a meal that day. For me, it’s a matter of sharing our blessings with those who are less fortunate,” says Melissa in a quote provided to Feeding America.
She continues, “I create jewelry to create change. All of our jewelry is made in-house by a team of artists who earn living wages and a competitive benefit and retirement package. We spend most of our lives at work and I believe that work should be a culture that embraces and supports every member. It is important to me that I not only take care of those within my organization but other members of my community, which is why I am proud to contribute to my local food banks and nationally through Feeding America.”
Organize employee volunteer programs
Consider getting your staff into the spirit of charitable giving through employee volunteer programs. Aside from empowering them to serve the community, employee volunteer initiatives promote team building, boost morale, and cultivate stronger relationships—with each other and your company.
This is something we regularly practice at Lightspeed. We offer volunteer days for employees, to give Lightspeeders the opportunity to actively engage in community projects and causes they’re passionate about.
Final words
Embracing charitable initiatives isn’t just a nice gesture but a transformative one. These endeavors enrich community ties, boost customers and most importantly, impact lives in tangible ways.
The International Day of Charity serves as a good reminder of this potential, as it urges businesses everywhere to transcend beyond their commercial objectives and channel their resources and influence for the greater good.
Hopefully, the ideas and examples above inspire you to take your charitable initiatives to the next level.
How to Create a Viral Waitlist Landing Page in WordPress
Are you wondering how to create a waitlist landing page for your WooCommerce store or WordPress website?
You can easily generate excitement for a product or service that hasn’t been launched yet by making a waitlist landing page. This prompts visitors to sign up for the waitlist using their email addresses and share the promotion with others.
In this article, we will show you how to easily create a viral waitlist landing page in WordPress.
Why Create a Viral Waitlist Landing Page in WordPress?
Making a waitlist landing page on your WordPress website will allow your visitors to enter their email addresses and join your waiting list.
For example, if you have a WooCommerce store that sells clothes and is about to launch a new collection for summer, then you can create a waitlist for interested users to sign up.
This way, interested users will get an email notification as soon as your new summer clothing collection goes live.
Moreover, it can also create a sense of urgency and excitement among potential customers, making them more likely to sign up for your waitlist.
That being said, let’s see how to easily create a viral waitlist landing page in WordPress.
How to Create a Viral Waitlist Landing Page in WordPress
You can easily create a waitlist landing page in WordPress using SeedProd. It is the best WordPress landing page plugin with a drag-and-drop builder to create themes and landing pages.
First, you need to install and activate the SeedProd plugin. For detailed instructions, you may want to see our step-by-step guide on how to install a WordPress plugin.
Note: You can also use the free version of SeedProd to create a waitlist landing page. However, some of the advanced blocks used in this tutorial will only be available with the paid plan.
Upon activation, you need to head over to the SeedProd » Settings page to enter your license key. You can find this information in your account on the SeedProd website.
Once you have done that, it’s time for you to start creating a waitlist landing page.
Step 1: Create a Waitlist Landing Page
To create a waitlist landing page, head over to the SeedProd » Landing Pages screen from the WordPress admin sidebar.
Once you are there, just click on the ‘Add New Landing Page’ button.
This will take you to the ‘Choose a New Page Template’ screen, where you can select a pre-made SeedProd template for your landing page.
Upon doing that, a prompt will open up on your screen, asking you to enter a page name and URL. Go ahead and enter the details and then click the ‘Save and Start Editing the Page’ button to continue.
This will launch the template in SeedProd’s drag-and-drop builder. From here, you can now start customizing your waitlist landing page as you want.
Step 2: Customize Your Waitlist Landing Page
Once the drag-and-drop builder has been launched, you will notice that all the available blocks are in the left column, with a landing page preview on the right side of the screen.
From here, you can drag any block you want onto your waitlist landing page, including an image, video, button, heading, or text block.
For example, if you want to add a headline for the new product that you are launching in your online store, then you can just drag and drop the Headline block onto the landing page.
Once you’ve done that, simply click on the block again to open its settings in the left column. From here, you can insert dynamic text and change the font size, alignment, color, and more.
Next, scroll down to the ‘Advanced’ section in the left column. From here, you can add a giveaway, optin form, contact form, social profiles, countdown timer, and more.
Since you are creating a waitlist, you should add a contact form to your landing page. That way, your visitors can sign up for notifications when new products are available, and they can also be added to your general email list.
To do this, just drag and drop the Contact Form block from the left column onto the page.
Next, click on the block to open its settings in the sidebar on the left. From here, you can select a contact form that you created with WPForms from the dropdown menu.
After that, you can also add the Social Sharing block to the waitlist landing page so that users will be able to share it with their friends and followers, making your waitlist viral.
Upon adding the block, click on it to configure its settings in the left column. You can now add a social media button from the dropdown menu and configure its size and alignment.
Once you’ve done that, it’s time for you to add the Countdown block from the left column to create a sense of urgency among your customers.
Next, click on the block to open its settings in the sidebar. From here, you can choose an end date, timezone, size, template, and more.
You can also choose an action to take once the countdown on your waitlist expires.
For example, if you choose the ‘Show Message’ option from the ‘Action To Take On Expires’ dropdown menu, then a message will be displayed to your customers upon waitlist expiration.
However, you can also choose the ‘Redirect’ option and add a URL that users will be redirected to if they visit the waitlist page after its expiration. This could be the WooCommerce product page with the items from your new collection.
Step 3: Add WooCommerce Blocks to Your Waitlist Landing Page
If you have a WooCommerce store, then you can also add the WooCommerce blocks offered by SeedProd. Keep in mind that the WooCommerce plugin will need to be activated for these blocks to work.
To add these blocks, just scroll down to the ‘WooCommerce’ section in the left column of the drag-and-drop builder.
From here, you can add the featured products, add to cart, or best-selling products block to your waitlist page to showcase other products from your store.
This way, users visiting your waitlist landing page will also be able to see other products that are currently available and may end up making a purchase.
You will also be able to limit the number of products that are shown and control the block’s alignment, typography, pagination, button color, and more.
Step 4: Connect Your Waitlist With Your Email Marketing Provider
You can also connect your waitlist landing page with an email marketing provider to build your email list and capture leads.
To do this, switch to the ‘Connect’ tab at the top of the landing page builder. Then, simply choose your email marketing provider from the ‘Email Marketing’ section.
Once you have chosen your provider, you will need to provide an API key or account details, depending on the service you chose. You can get this information from the account dashboard of your email marketing service provider.
After that, just click the ‘Connect’ button to move forward.
Upon connecting your SeedProd with an email marketing provider, you will also have to choose the email list that you want to use with your waitlist landing page.
Next, click on the ‘Save Integration Details’ button. You have now successfully connected your landing page with the marketing service.
Step 5: Save and Publish Your Waitlist Landing Page
Now, you need to switch back to the ‘Design’ tab from the top of the SeedProd page builder.
Once you’ve done that, click the ‘Save’ button at the top to store your settings.
Next, open the ‘Save’ dropdown menu and click the ‘Publish’ button to make your waitlist landing page live.
Now, you can visit the landing page on your WordPress site to see how it looks.
Bonus Tips to Build Excitement and FOMO in Your Online Store
Other than designing a great landing page, you can use a few other methods to easily build excitement and FOMO among your customers. This can encourage them to sign up for your waitlist.
Since scarcity is a key element of FOMO, shoppers will now be more likely to sign up for your waitlist.
Other than that, you can also create website banners using Thrive Leads to show users that other visitors are already interested in your product and signing up for it.
Additionally, you can also build excitement and hype around the product or service that you are launching by hosting a giveaway. A viral giveaway can help you can reach a wider audience, increase your conversions, and urge more visitors to sign up for your waitlist.
For example, you can use RafflePress, which is the best WordPress giveaway plugin, to give away a few items from your new clothing collection in exchange for a referral or follow on social media.
Another tip is to run a live blogging session with your customers to further hype up the product/service that will soon be launched. This way, you will be able to interact with your audience and convince them to sign up on your waitlist landing page.
Discovering an issue with your store’s inventory is a headache. That’s why regular inventory audits are worthwhile—even if they’re not the most interesting part of running a retail business.
Audits keep stores operating efficiently and may be legally required. Here’s an overview of inventory management and counting procedures, plus a checklist to follow when performing your next audit.
What is an inventory audit?
An inventory audit is the process of cross-checking your actual inventory levels against financial records. It makes sure that physical inventory matches what’s in an inventory system.
Audits may also look at how a retail business is counting inventory, identifying ways to become more accurate. Audits can be performed by store owners or external auditors.
Auditing your inventory reveals your true inventory levels (the stock you have on hand at your store or in your warehouse) and gives a snapshot of the health of your supply chain.
When you run regular inventory audits, you might spot specific SKU numbers with more frequent issues than others, and catch discrepancies before they can become a bigger problem.
💡 Tip: Shopify POS has tools to help you control and manage your inventory across multiple store locations, your online store, and your warehouse. Count inventory, forecast demand, set low stock alerts, know which items are selling or sitting on shelves, and more.
Importance of inventory audits
Now that you know what an inventory audit is, let’s look at why they’re important for your retail store.
Audits ensure inventory accuracy
The biggest benefit of regular audits is peace of mind. Your business decisions should be driven by data analysis, and every inventory audit adds real-time data for you to analyze.
Data from physical inventory counts can inform:
Inventory audits identify shrinkage
Shrinkage is when a store has fewer inventory items than are listed in its records. Causes of inventory shrinkage include shoplifting, employee theft, administrative errors, vendor fraud, and product damage.
According to the National Retail Federation, shrinkage is a nearly $100 billion problem in the retail industry. When not quickly identified, it can create phantom inventory, or inventory your inventory management system falsely says is on hand.
Noticing shrinkage on time means you can correct records and order new inventory quickly, instead of being forced to display out-of-stock notices. It also gives you an opportunity to investigate and solve the causes of shrinkage.
Inventory audits are required for public companies
Public companies must perform audits if their inventory is material to a company’s financial statements. That means inventory is classified as a current asset on the company balance sheet.
Search for guidance from financial organizations and experts to understand auditing requirements in your location. In the US, for example, you can find up-to-date information on AICPA, the American Institute of Chartered Professional Accountants (CPA).
Manage inventory from one back office
Shopify POS comes with tools to help you manage warehouse and store inventory in one place. Forecast demand, set low stock alerts, create purchase orders, know which items are selling or sitting on shelves, count inventory, and more.
11 inventory audit procedures
ABC analysis
Cut-off analysis
Physical inventory count
Cycle count
Analytical procedures
Overhead analysis
Freight cost analysis
Finished goods cost analysis
Product reconciliation
Match invoices to shipping log
Inventory layers
When it’s time to do an inventory audit, you can combine different counting procedures to fit your company’s needs, industry, and audit frequency.
An ABC analysis shown in a Shopify dashboard.
1. ABC analysis
ABC analysis is an inventory categorization method that groups items based on value:
A = 20% of stock that represents 80% of your revenue
B = 30% of stock that represents 15% of your revenue
C = 50% of stock that represents 5% of your revenue
Products graded as A are high-value items for your store, while C marks low-value items. By knowing which products belong to which category, you can prioritize inventory auditing and organize your backroom or warehouse to facilitate them.
2. Cut-off analysis
Cut-off analysis involves pausing warehouse operations like shipping and receiving while you conduct a physical inventory count. This way, you can ensure all financial reporting is up to date, and no transactions or inventory changes slip through the cracks.
3. Physical inventory count
A physical inventory count involves manually counting the stock in your store, from the sales floor to the back room, and comparing the physical inventory levels to those recorded in your point-of-sale (POS) system or inventory management system. This also takes into account stock levels for different product variants, like colors and sizes.
A full physical count can disrupt day-to-day operations because it counts every item in the store. Still, it’s the most common inventory audit procedure.
4. Cycle count
Cycle count is the process of counting a small group of products at a specific time. It’s done regularly on a predefined number of products, and makes it easier to keep an accurate inventory of valuable products without disrupting business.
Shopify reports dashboard.
5. Analytical procedures
Analytical procedures involve financial and operational metrics like inventory turnover ratio, gross margins, unit cost of inventory from the previous years, and inventory days on hand (DOH).
6. Overhead analysis
Overhead analysis takes into account the indirect costs of running your retail business. This includes rent, utilities, insurance, and other costs, not including salaries and direct materials.
Knowing your overhead costs helps you budget and plan for your store accordingly.
7. Freight cost analysis
Freight cost analysis looks at freight shipping costs, the time it takes for a product to be shipped, and instances of products that are lost or damaged in transport.
This is how you can keep track of your shipping costs and the inventory lead time. Shipping costs are typically part of the value of inventory, so knowing them is essential.
8. Finished goods cost analysis
Finished goods cost analysis is relevant for retailers who manufacture their products. When a product is ready to be sold, its value can be included in inventory for the current financial period to ensure that accounting records are accurate.
9. Product reconciliation
Product reconciliation, or inventory reconciliation, involves making adjustments to discrepancies between your financial statements and the physical inventory you have on hand.
As you reconcile your records, keep track of products that are more likely to divert from the inventory levels in your system. This way, you can monitor them to avoid future issues.
10. Match invoices to shipping log
Matching invoices to shipping logs is about matching the cost and amount of inventory you received with financial records from your invoices. This can be done at random to spot-check inventory for a specific time period.
This procedure confirms that the correct amount was charged at the right time and for the correct inventory.
11. Inventory layers
Inventory layers are the quantities of items received or grouped together that share the same costs. If you’re using FIFO (first-in, first-out) or LIFO (last-in, first-out) inventory management principles, it’s worth looking at the inventory layers you received and making sure they’re correct.
Inventory audit checklist
Create an inventory audit schedule
Prepare your documents and data
Assess and prepare your inventory
Select audit procedures
Choose who’s auditing
Conduct the physical count
Reconcile records that don’t match the physical count
Record inventory audit results
Compare findings with previous audits
Identify potential causes of shrinkage
Look for opportunities to improve inventory methods
When you’re gearing up to conduct an audit, use this checklist to prepare the materials you’ll need, execute the audit, and analyze its results.
The planning stage
1. Create an inventory audit schedule
What is a frequency that makes sense for your store’s size? Which periods are slow enough to minimize disruption to your operations?
Ensure all inventory is unpacked, pallets are accessible, and no items are at risk of being left out or counted twice.
The execution stage
4. Select audit procedures
Does your store need a full physical inventory count? Can you focus on high-value items from your ABC analysis or implement a cycle count? Do you want to include any other parameters, like freight or overhead analysis?
5. Choose who’s auditing
Are you conducting the audit internally or through an external service? Will there be an auditor present to observe and spot-check your process?
6. Conduct the physical count
No inventory should be moved in or out of your store or warehouse during this stage. Take note of your counts using a point-of-sale app with inventory capabilities, like Shopify POS, or use a tool like Excel.
7. Reconcile records that don’t match the physical count
This helps you start your next period fresh and keep track of items that tend to mismatch.
The analysis stage
8. Record inventory audit results
Take note of everything you count, but pay particular attention to products and categories that have discrepancies.
9. Compare findings with previous audits
Are there products more prone to mismatches or suppliers whose products are a frequent issue? Are some periods more of a problem than others (like a busy holiday season)? Products that often cause inventory issues may need more frequent auditing.
10. Identify potential causes of shrinkage
Look at what might be causing shrinkage so you can minimize losses. For example, product damage and vendor fraud might come from supply chain issues, and dead stock could mean you overestimated product demand.
11. Look for opportunities to improve inventory methods
Use your findings to explore ways to manage your inventory more efficiently and organize your warehouse better to minimize shrinkage and discrepancies.
5 Free Templates to Better Understand Your Inventory
Calculate your businesses cost of goods sold, sell through rate, inventory turnover, saftey stock, economic order quantity, or reorder point with ease using these custom templates. (No math required!)
Get your Inventory Templates delivered right to your inbox.
Almost there: please enter your email below to gain instant access.
We’ll also send you updates on new educational guides and success stories from the Shopify newsletter. We hate SPAM and promise to keep your email address safe.
Thanks for downloading. You’ll receive your free templates soon. In the meantime, start building your store with a free 3-day trial of Shopify.
Inventory audit challenges
Audits are time-consuming
Counting every item in your store and stockroom takes time and focused effort. Depending on your resources, you may even need to shut down operations, including closing your store and pausing inventory shipments.
Minimize the burden of audits by scheduling them for natural downtime and using systems that simplify the process. Helpful auditing tools include point-of-sale (POS) systems, bar codes, and radio-frequency identification (RFID) technology.
It’s hard to scale auditing as you grow
Inventory audits become a bigger burden as your store grows and your stock expands from a spare room into a warehouse.
Bigger physical spaces and locations to navigate, plus more SKUs to handle, mean you may no longer be able to perform a manual audit.
When that happens, switch to lighter, more frequent counting procedures, like cycle counts and ABC analysis—or integrate an inventory control system like perpetual inventory.
Audit your inventory with confidence
Inventory audits don’t need to be a draining, overwhelming experience. They’re a useful tool to prevent shrinkage and stockouts, and leave you confident about your store’s capabilities.
Follow these tips and checklist items to prepare your store for a successful physical inventory count. And don’t forget about tools like Shopify POS that automate product tracking for easier inventory management.
Manage all your inventory from Shopify
Shopify comes with built-in tools to help manage your warehouse and store inventory in one place. Track sales, forecast demand, set low stock alerts, create purchase orders, and more.
An inventory audit reviews a company’s inventory and records to check for accuracy and compliance. Inventory and records are cross-referenced to verify the physical count of stock. An audit may also include reviewing a company’s systems, processes, and procedures related to inventory management. Additionally, it might involve an analysis of the company’s inventory policies and procedures.
How do you run an inventory audit?
Start by gathering all relevant inventory records, including purchase orders, invoices, receipts, and other documentation related to the inventory.
Physically count inventory and document the results.
Compare inventory records with physical inventory.
Examine inventory levels to ensure they are sufficient to meet customer demand.
If discrepancies exist between the actual inventory and records, investigate the causes and reconcile the differences.
Document and report the results of the audit to management or external stakeholders.
What happens if you fail an inventory audit?
If you fail an inventory audit, you may face penalties. Depending on the reason for the audit and the applicable laws in your location, you might encounter fines or jail time. Ensure compliance with relevant laws, regulations, and procedures to avoid potential penalties.
When you’re running a food service business, employee turnover and temporary restaurant staffing is something you’re going to need to effectively manage—and that comes with a unique set of challenges.
The way you approach finding, interviewing, hiring and training temporary restaurant workers will determine the quality of your applicants and whether or not they’re successful in their role. Use this guide to ensure that your temporary restaurant staffing hires are a good fit for your business and that they have a positive experience during their time with you.
In this article we’ll cover:
Service at full speed
Empower your staff with the tools they need to give personalized, efficient service to each guest.
Restaurant staffing statistics
Restaurant staffing and turnover has always been a challenge, but now that the foodservice industry is bouncing back after COVID-19, it’s become even more challenging. Take a look at these troubling stats:
By the look of it, owners and operators will continue to struggle with restaurant staffing needs for front-of-house, kitchen and management staff. The good news is, hiring for temporary restaurant jobs may be able provide some relief from restaurant recruiting and staffing challenges.
Pros and cons of hiring temporary restaurant staff
As the name suggests, temporary restaurant staffing refers to hiring restaurant employees on a short-term basis. In hospitality, temporary workers are typically brought in to support permanent staff during peak seasons, cover for staff absences, or to provide extra hands at special events. For example, a ski lodge who needs to hire extra staff for peak winter months, or a restaurant that needs to cover a permanent employee who is injured or needs time off work to deal with a family emergency.
Of course, as with all things in life, there are pros and cons to temporary restaurant staffing.
Pros of temporary restaurant staffing include
Access to a flexible labor pool that can be tapped into as needed
No requirement to offer expensive perks like paid time off or health benefits to temporary workers
Option to outsource temporary restaurant staffing needs to a restaurant recruiting agency (a good option for last-minute and short-term staffing needs)
Cons of temporary restaurant staffing include
Temporary workers may not demonstrate the same level of care and attention to your guests as a permanent employee
You may end up paying high fees to a restaurant recruiting agency
Temporary workers still need training on your workflows and procedures
Training temporary staff can feel like a particularly heavy burden when you’re already in the weeds. This becomes even more frustrating when your restaurant POS isn’t optimized for your workflows or integrated with your payments system.
An easy-to-use and intuitive POS and payments system makes a huge difference when it comes to getting restaurant staff trained and ready for service. Just ask Brodie Somerville—owner and head chef at Maynard in Montreal’s trendy Plateau neighborhood—who saves more than two hours a day with Lightspeed’s integrated payments and out-of-the-box delivery integrations.
“The whole staff finds [Lightspeed] super easy to use. Everyone loves it. And because it’s very simple and very intuitive, it’s very easy to teach. I can get staff trained on how to use the system in, like, 20 minutes.” — Brodie Somerville, Restaurateur and Chef, Maynard
Before we cover how to determine whether or not a candidate is a good fit during the interview, let’s cover how to attract great candidates.
The general rule for hiring temp restaurant staffing is to not start your search too far in advance. Candidates for temporary roles see the role for what it is: temporary. They aren’t heavily invested and won’t be looking for temporary roles months in advance. Start your search no earlier than a couple of months before you need the role filled.
Write a killer job ad
You need to draft a compelling job ad to attract the best possible candidates for your temporary positions. Once you have a decent pool of prospects, you can filter through them and determine which ones will make it to the interview phase.
A good job description should be two things: honest and accurate. Ensure that the job description effectively communicates the role’s responsibilities and the duration of the contract. It should be clear enough that potential candidates know what to expect, but not too long. Here are the basic things you should include in your job ad:
A few sentences that describe your establishment, highlighting what makes it unique
No more than four sentences describing the role
A list (bullet points are easier to scan) of the role’s day-to-day responsibilities
A list of the required qualifications and bonus skills
A link or email address where the candidate can send their resume
Be clear and honest with your job description. This helps candidates make an informed decision, which ultimately increases your pool of serious potential hires.
Be sure to mention if there’s an opportunity to be hired in a full-time role after the contract expires. Great candidates may see a temporary role as a gateway to a permanent position.
Post your job ad
Next, post your job ad on relevant sites. We suggest starting with these:
If your restaurant is on social media—and it really should be—why not publish a post or story to let your followers know you’re hiring. They’re your biggest fans and might be interested or know someone who’s interested. Make sure your posts can easily be shared and let your followers spread the word for you.
Ask for referrals from your employees
Good employees know other good employees. As part of your temporary restaurant staffing strategy, don’t forget to ask your employees if they know people that are qualified and might be interested.
How to screen your temporary restaurant staffing candidates
Posting the ad for your temporary restaurant job is just the first step. The next step is screening your candidates. To find a candidate that’s both competent and a strong cultural fit, you need to formulate a game plan and listen to your intuition.
Look through resumes and applications for relevant work experience and any extracurricular mentions that give you an idea of what kind of person they are. Once you’ve got a list of potential candidates, it’s time to move to the interview process.
Cater your interview to the role you’re hiring for
The personality traits and skills needed vary from role to role in the restaurant industry. Whether you’re hiring a chef, bartender, server, host or manager, you should structure your interview so that you get a clear idea of how the candidate will perform in that role.
For example, servers typically need to be outgoing, strong multitaskers and able to work under pressure with a smile. Ray Camillo, CEO and Founder of Blue Orbit Restaurant Consulting, suggests putting a potential candidate for a server role through a timed assembly test.
“Replicate Friday night pressure and see whether or not they handle it gracefully,” Camillo says. “If they get flustered or frustrated, there’s a chance they can’t handle the role. If they take the pressure in stride and stay positive, they could be a fit.”
Once you think you’ve found the right person, do your due diligence and run a background check. Ask for a few referrals from previous employers to get an idea of how they performed in past roles. If everything checks out, you may have just found your ideal candidate!
Things to do before extending an offer
Figure out the legalities
Each country has its own unique rules, regulations, and laws for restaurant staffing. If you’re not too sure of those requirements, do your research and also check out these resources:
Determine salary
Pinpoint a salary that’s competitive and that you can afford. Consider:
What are other restaurants in your region and category paying employees in similar roles?
What is the tipping structure in your restaurant? Will temporary workers be eligible for tip outs on shifts they worked?
What other benefits or perks could you offer to enhance your offer?
It’s important to offer a wage that’s competitive with what others are offering to maximize how many qualified candidates you attract.
Don’t forget, if you’re using a restaurant staffing agency, you’ll need to consider the agency’s service fees when deciding on the maximum rate you’re able to offer for temporary workers.
Training your temporary restaurant staffing hires
After you’ve extended your offer and the candidate accepts, you need to train them and teach them everything they need to know to be successful in the role. Here are a couple of things to consider:
1. Education and training materials
When it comes to general information about your restaurant, your menu and guidelines, a short pamphlet or cheat sheet that your short-term employees can take home and study is a great tool. This will enable you to standardize staff training and brand messaging. We recommend that you include the following:
Restaurant facts: the type of food you serve, your busiest hours, most popular menu items, most profitable menu items, how and where your food is sourced, as well as the head chef and owner’s information. This helps your staff create a narrative around your restaurant that they can use when serving guests.
Operational instructions: this is where you can explain how the front and back of house communicate and work together, as well as the roles and responsibilities of each team member. This helps new hires know who to refer to when they need something.
2. Demonstration and shadowing
Having one of your top-performing staff members show temporary employees how things are done can go a long way. Assign temporary workers to shadow one of your full-time hires so they can see how things are done and how they work.
Your establishment’s point of sale (POS), payment terminals, and kitchen display system (KDS) are at the heart of your operations, so it’s likely your newcomers will need a crash course in how to use them. For example:
For hosts, consider showing them how to check in a guest that made a reservation and how to pinpoint where they’re sitting in your floor plan. Additionally, show them how to adjust the floor plan to accommodate last-minute walk-ins and reservations.
For servers, show them how to input orders and fire them to the appropriate workstation, check on a table’s status and process payments.
For kitchen staff, teach them how to properly use the KDS. For example, Lightspeed’s KDS uses color codes to communicate the status of orders between the back and front of house. You’ll want to train new and temporary workers to update order statuses right away so that it becomes second nature. Watch this quick video to see what we mean.
One of the best parts about using a restaurant POS system like Lightspeed Restaurant is that it’s so easy to use that even temporary restaurant staffing hires can be up and running in no time.
Support your staff with intuitive, easy-to-use restaurant technology
Creating memorable dining experiences that wow guests starts with a customer-first approach, attention to detail and a positive attitude.
With Lightspeed’s restaurant POS and management system, you can view staff performance reports, offer tableside ordering, start a loyalty program and more. Chat with one of our restaurant experts to see how technology can help your staff work smarter, not harder.
Understanding the Importance of WordPress Page Protection
Protecting and securing your WordPress site’s pages enables you to gate specific pieces of content, prevent certain WordPress security issues, or hide pages while you work on them.
In this guide, I’ll explore the importance of WordPress page protection and provide a few options for effectively password-protecting your site or specific content.
If you’re looking for something more complex, such as using a paywall plugin or setting up membership sites, we’ve written separate tutorials that cover those topics.
Why Password Protect Your WordPress Site?
Password protection is a primary line of defense against unauthorized access to a specific area of your WordPress site.
You might want to do this for a number of reasons:
Privacy: Some content isn’t meant for public consumption. Password protection ensures it remains confidential, whether it’s work-in-progress, premium content, or private data. This is important if you need to share sensitive information with clients or employees.
Control: It allows you to control who can access specific parts of your website. This is particularly useful for membership sites, online courses, or sites that offer exclusive content.
Protection against bots: Password protection can deter automated bots from accessing your content or executing malicious actions. This is crucial for preventing spam, data theft, and other security threats.
SEO Benefits: By password-protecting certain pages, you can prevent search engines from indexing content that you don’t want to appear in search results.
How to Password Protect Your WordPress Content
There are multiple ways to password-protect content in WordPress. Let’s have a quick look at the most common methods.
Protecting a Specific WordPress Page
WordPress offers a simple method to protect specific pages.
Navigate to your WordPress site’s dashboard.
Click on ‘Pages’ and edit the page you wish to protect.
In the right-hand sidebar, click on ‘Edit’ next to ‘Visibility’.
Choose ‘Password protected’ and enter your desired password.
Click ‘Update’ to save changes.
It’s important to note that while the page content will be protected, the title and featured image could still appear in certain places.
Password Protecting Categories
You may be looking to protect entire categories rather than just a single page.
With the Password Protected Categories plugin, you can easily password-protect entire categories, making it ideal for protecting multiple pages or posts at once.
It’s particularly useful for e-commerce sites, membership sites, or sites that offer categorized content.
The Password Protected plugin has an average rating of 4.5/5 stars for a reason. It’s reliable, gets the job done, and it’s free.
It’s easy to set up and allows you to protect your entire WordPress site with a single password.
There are additional options, such as using reCaptcha for additional security, allowing administrators to access the site without a password, as well as allowing access to RSS feeds and the REST API.
It allows you to secure pages, your entire WordPress site, or even partial content with a single password for each.
What’s nice about this solution is that it takes your user’s experience into consideration by letting visitors unlock the password-protected content on your site without refreshing the page.
Aside from that, small touches, such as the option to customize the password-protection form and use cookie-based password protection, will be appreciated by your visitors.
Hide My Site is a free solution that allows you to set a single password for site-wide protection with customizable login pages.
This is a good option if you are setting up a development version of your WordPress site or even if you’re looking to hide your website from search engines.
All it takes is setting up a password on the settings page; your site is hidden.
Best Practices for Password Protection
There are a few important points to keep in mind when using any form of password protection on your site.
Let’s take a look at them:
Regularly Update Passwords: Change passwords every few months to enhance security. This is particularly important for sites that have multiple users.
Use Unique Passwords: Avoid using the same password across multiple sites or platforms. This is crucial for preventing unauthorized access in case one of your accounts is compromised.
Limit Login Attempts: Plugins that limit login attempts can deter brute-force attacks. This is important for protecting your site from hackers who try to gain access by guessing your password.
Monitor User Activity: Keep an eye on who accesses your content and when using activity logs. This is crucial for identifying any suspicious activity on your site.
Implement Two-Factor Authentication: In addition to password protection, consider implementing two-factor authentication (2FA) for an added layer of security.
Here are some tips to keep in mind when creating passwords:
Use at least 12 characters.
Combine uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, and symbols.
Avoid using easily guessable information, like birthdays or names.
Use a passphrase or a combination of unrelated words.
Using a password manager can help you generate and store strong passwords. We love to use 1Password, and it even offers a free password generator.
Dealing with Common Password-Related Issues
Problems are not always avoidable, so here are the three most common issues with passwords and how to deal with them:
Forgotten Passwords: WordPress has a built-in ‘Lost your password?’ feature. Ensure it’s enabled and easily accessible. This is crucial for providing a smooth user experience.
Unauthorized Access: Regularly review user roles and permissions. Revoke access where necessary. This is important for maintaining control over who can access your content.
Password Sharing: Educate your users about the risks of sharing passwords. This is crucial for preventing unauthorized access and protecting your content.
Your Next Steps: Mastering WordPress Page Protection
Now that you’re equipped with the knowledge on how to password-protect WordPress pages, it’s time to act.
Follow these 4 steps to get started:
Evaluate your current protection level.
Decide on the method that suits your needs.
Implement the chosen protection method.
Regularly review and update your security measures.
This isn’t a “set it and forget it” kind of thing, so staying on top of your WordPress site’s security is vital.
Related Questions
Is password protection enough for my WordPress site?
Password protection is a crucial first step, but consider other security measures like SSL certificates, two-factor authentication, and regular backups.
Always keep a backup of your site. If you’re locked out, you can restore from a backup or contact your hosting provider for assistance. They can typically restore your access quite easily.
In the competitive landscape of ecommerce, strategies around customer loyalty have shifted into a sharper focus, becoming more crucial for online brands. As online businesses try to find new ways to retain their customers and build stronger, longer-lasting relationships, loyalty and rewards programs have emerged as some of the most powerful tools to incentivize customers to make repeat purchases.
With the Shopify platform being one of 2023’s top choices for online brands, the ecommerce solution provides merchants with a great variety of choices when it comes to loyalty and rewards apps that you can integrate seamlessly into your stores.
In this article by Ecommerce Pro, we explore the top and best loyalty and rewards apps on the Shopify App Store. We delve into what these apps are, and why they’re important, before revealing our top three loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify in 2023. We’re sure that, whether you’re a small startup or an established ecommerce business, these loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify will help you increase customer loyalty and boost those sales, ultimately driving your online brand forward in the ever-evolving world of Shopify and ecommerce.
As top-rated Shopify Experts, Ecommerce Pro will help you select and integrate the best-suited Shopify apps to help support your business. Get in touch to learn more.
What are loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify?
Loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify are apps you can integrate into the online business that are designed to help you create and manage customer loyalty programs.
These helpful apps are made to integrate seamlessly with your Shopify store, allowing you to incentivize customer loyalty, rewarding them for repeat purchases, engagement, and referring your products to their followers, friends, and family.
Loyalty and rewards apps often have strategic features such as points-based rewards systems, tiered rewards, referral programs, VIP customer programs, and more.
Why are loyalty and rewards apps important?
Loyalty and rewards apps are important for online businesses as they provide a range of desirable business features, such as points-based rewards systems, tiered rewards, referral programs, notifications, and even analytics.
With the right loyalty and rewards app for your brand, online businesses can boost customer loyalty, improve customer retention, and create a positive and rewarding shopping experience for their online customers. This rewarding experience will drive customers to come back and even refer your brand to others.
By using these apps, brands build lasting relationships with their customers, boosting their brand’s reach and success.
Below we highlight the top 3 loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify in 2023 and their key features. Here are our top 3 picks:
Shopify rating: 4.8 stars (19 reviews) – Launched on February 2nd, 2023
Founded by a former Apple-Siri Engineer and an ex-BCG consultant, Appstle has firmly established its position as one of the top Shopify and Shopify Plus app developers in the industry. Appstle has launched a new and highly regarded loyalty and rewards app that you can download on Shopify, known for its excellent set of comprehensive loyalty program features. This app on the Shopify platformand gained popularity because of its innovative and comprehensive set of useful features. What sets Appstle apart is its customizability. The app allows merchants to customize their loyalty programs to meet theirbrand’s specific needs.
Moreover, with a user-friendly interface, it’s easy for ecommerce and online businesses to navigate and make the most of Appstle’s robust features. Whether you’re a startup Shopify store trying to lay the foundations of your brand or a well-established ecommerce enterprise, Appstle Loyalty & Rewards is a valuable app that can help enhance the customer relationship and super-charge the potential of your Shopify store. With its stellar reputation and the app developer’s dedication to helping Shopify businesses succeed, Appstle is at the top of our recommendations for loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify’s app store.
Appstle Key Features:
Customizable Loyalty Programs: Appstle’s loyalty benefits and programs are customizable, allowing brands and businesses on Shopify to create personalized loyalty programs that are fully tailored to your store’s specific needs. With Appstle, you can set up a variety of reward tiers, assign points for purchases, create referral codes, improve social media engagement, and even create exclusive benefits for your VIP customers.
Automated Campaigns: With Appstle, you can automate your marketing campaigns to keep customers engaged. Send personalized and unlimited email notifications, and push notifications to keep customers informed about their loyalty status, any upcoming rewards, and other special promotions.
How much does Appstle cost?
Free to Install: Free forever until your store reaches $500/Mo of subscription revenue
Starter:$10/month or $96/year and save 20%
Business:$30/month or $288/year and save 20%
Business Premium:$100/month or $960/year and save 20%
Shopify rating: 3.7 stars (120 reviews)
The Stamped Loyalty and Referrals app takes the second spot on our list of top loyalty rewards apps on Shopify in 2023. What makes Stamped unique to the list is how they harness and leverage the power of social proof to drive customer loyalty and improve trust. With this loyalty app, you can turn your satisfied customers into brand ambassadors with its customizable referrals program, leading to increased engagement and conversions, as customers are encouraged to refer their friends and family.
Stamped Key Features:
Incentivized Customer Reviews and Ratings: the Stamped app on Shopify allows your customers to leave reviews and ratings of their purchases directly onto your Shopify store. A highly valued feature, authentic user-generated content helps build trust. To encourage your customers to leave reviews, Stamped offers reward points that can be converted into discounts.
Points Program Campaign: This gamified approach to getting rewards motivates your online customers to sign up for an account, follow you on Instagram, share reviews, and more. This app’s approach to gamification makes shopping on your site more fun, as customers complete desired actions and purchases for loyalty rewards and points.
Social Sharing: Stamped works seamlessly with social media, allowing customers to share their purchases and experiences with followers. This in turn helps you extend your brand’s reach, generating organic word-of-mouth marketing and improving your visibility.
How much does Stamped cost?
LITE Free: Free forever with Points Program Up to 100 orders
Premium: $59/month or $588/year and save 17%
Business: $179/month or $1,788/year and save 17%
Professional: $479/month or $4,788/year and save 17%
Shopify rating: 4.7 stars (2467 reviews)
Yotpo Loyalty & Rewards is the third mention on our list of top loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify in 2023. Yotpo is a well-established name in the Shopify app store, offering a suite of customer loyalty tools and features. Yotpo is a rewards app that has a special focus on retention-driving loyalty programs, and with a high Shopify rating with thousands of positive reviews, Yotpo has gained the trust of many Shopify merchants.
Yotpo Key Features:
Retention-Driven Loyalty Programs: Yotpo Loyalty and Referrals places great emphasis on loyalty and retention, with a dynamic loyalty platform that allows customers to earn and redeem points with their 20+ out-of-the-box campaigns. These reward systems are proven to drive repeat purchases, increase the Life Time Value of each customer, and even boost engagement.
Code-free Customization and Launching of Programs: Yotpo enables you to customize, launch, and manage your loyalty and rewards program with no code. Moreover, you can create diverse rewards and VIP tiers, and deploy a program based on points, spending, purchases, or referrals with little technical know-how.
Performance Analytics: Yotpo provides shops with valuable customer insights and analytics to help you understand the performance of your store and its campaigns, including allowing you to monitor and evaluate the effectiveness of your loyalty and referral program ROI, AOV, LTV, and more.
How much does Yotpo Cost?
Free to Install: Plan available to stores with fewer than 100 monthly orders
$199/Mo: $0.20 per order after 500 total orders per month
FAQs
1. What are loyalty and rewards apps for on Shopify?
Loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify are apps and programs that businesses integrate into their Shopify online stores. The apps help create and manage customer loyalty programs, which allows online brands to incentivize customers for their loyalty, rewarding them for desirable actions like repeat purchases, engagement, and referring family and friends.
2. How do loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify improve customer loyalty?
These apps help online brands build loyalty by incentivizing your online customers to keep shopping with you to earn more rewards and discount points, driving loyalty and repeat sales.
3. Can I use loyalty apps with my existing Shopify store?
All three loyalty apps mentioned above—Appstle, Stamped, and Yotpo—can be seamlessly integrated into your existing Shopify store and can work on any Shopify 2.0 theme. These apps are built to work with Shopify, ensuring a smooth setup and compatibility with your store.
4. Q: Are these Shopify loyalty apps suited for small businesses?
These loyalty apps cater to businesses of all sizes, small or large.
5. How much do loyalty and rewards apps cost on Shopify?
The price per month of a loyalty and reward app on Shopify can depend on the app and the plan you select. Prices range from Free to over $479/month, so you can select the plan and app that suits your needs and business size and budget.
Conclusion
For Shopify businesses searching for ways to increase repeat purchases and cultivate long-lasting relationships with customers, loyalty and rewards apps on Shopify have become some of the most valued tools.
Our article “Top 3 Loyalty & Rewards Apps on Shopify in 2023” examines the significance of these apps and focuses on our three top choices: Appstle, Stamped, and Yotpo.
Appstle provides highly customizable loyalty programs and automated campaigns to increase customer loyalty, while Stamped Loyalty & Referrals uses social proof and gamification to turn engaged customers into their brand ambassadors, and Yotpo provides a retention-driven program through its app.
These apps give businesses the freedom to customize loyalty programs to their particular requirements and offer a range of pricing plans to suit different budgets. Integrating these loyalty and rewards apps can boost customer loyalty, drive sales, and advance your brand in the world of Shopify and ecommerce, whether you run a small startup or an established ecommerce enterprise.
Ecommerce Pro, one of Shopify’s top Experts Agencies, specializes in building, redesigning, and optimizing Shopify websites. We understand the importance of customer loyalty in the competitive landscape of online shopping, and that’s why we offer an extensive range of expertise, including helping you choose and integrate the loyalty and rewards apps that best suit your Shopify online store.
Get in Touch
At Ecommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful Shopify businesses. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
Pre-internet, card not present (CNP) transactions were risky for merchants because they couldn’t verify a card holder’s identity as easily as they can online today. Watching out for fishy customers and potentially fraudulent transactions is part of every retailer’s job, and one easy win? Turning down those CNP payments.
These days, CNP transactions are more common thanks to ecommerce, where CNP payments are the default by definition; Visa’s network saw a 55% increase in card not present transactions between 2019 and 2021 thanks to online shopping.
Thankfully, card not present transactions have become a lot more secure, with identity verification and common security practices like two-factor authentication.
But let’s take a few steps back here. What exactly is a CNP transaction?
And even with built-in security features from payment providers, are CNP transactions still risky? If they’re so common, why do they still have higher fees?
Lightspeed Payments: Simple pricing, no hidden fees, and a secure checkout experience.
What is a card-not-present transaction?
First up, a simple definition. A CNP transaction is any transaction using a credit card where the cardholder is not there and cannot physically present their card for payment.
Card-not-present transaction examples:
Online mobile and desktop sales
Mail order and telephone transactions (MOTO)
Transactions where a card number is keyed in (even if the cardholder’s there)
“Card not-present transactions cover any type of card payment where a card payment takes place remotely,” explains Libby James, co-founder of UK-based Merchant Advice Services which helps business-owners understand card payments.
“Basically, that can be any payment without the need for the customer to enter their pin, or verify with face ID, while using a credit or debit card physically or on a mobile phone.”
Why are card not present transaction fees higher?
As a merchant, you have a hard time verifying a shopper’s identity alone. And when accepting payments in person, you can’t count on outdated fraud detection methods for most transactions, since a card’s EMV chip is now what powers fraud detection.
This is partly why banks charge higher processing fees for CNP transactions and they’re more expensive for merchants to process.
Even though card not present transactions are more secure online, they still incur a higher fee thanks to the extra fraud detection risks. Chargebacks are costly, after all, and they’re more likely to happen with CNP payments.
What is a card-present transaction?
A Card Present (CP) transaction is any transaction where the customer physically interacts with a payment terminal using their card.
Card-present transaction examples:
Swiping a card with a magnetic strip
Inserting a card with an EMV chip
Mobile payments (Think Apple Pay, Google Pay or Samsung Pay)
Tap-and-go payments
Any transaction where the card numbers are manually keyed into a credit card machine does not count as a card-present transaction—even when the card is physically present. To qualify as a CP transaction, the merchant must ‘capture’ the card’s stored electronic data.
CP transactions are considered more secure thanks to electronic security data transmitted when the card is used. And EMV cards, sometimes called ‘chip and pin’ cards, help keep CP transactions safe and encrypted.
But …
“Card-present transactions are supposed to be safer because a merchant should check the card for any sort of damage or match a signature on the back of the card to the signature on a receipt,” says Ian. “In practice, card-present fraud is also a major problem. If you accidentally drop your credit card in the mall and someone picks it up, no store clerk will ever actually verify the user’s ID.”
Note: Budgeting for CNP transaction fees is difficult when processing fees are unpredictable, which is why you should always select a payment processor with one rate for all transaction types.
Lightspeed Payments charges 2.9% + $0.30 for all card-not-present transaction types with no hidden fees for Retail POS customers.
Why should merchants accept card-not-present transactions?
As a merchant, you could choose to avoid CNP transactions.
But that would mean you couldn’t open an online store.
Retail ecommerce sales in the U.S. rose by more than 30% to $211.5 billion in the second quarter of 2020. That figure gives you a sense of why sticking to in-store selling can eat into retailers’ sales and revenue potential.
That said, if you’re very risk-averse, you could set up a “reserve online and pay in-store” order fulfillment process. But bear in mind, this will add friction to your customers’ shopping experience. It’s also bound to increase the probability of abandoned carts—a common pain for online sellers.
“For some merchants there is no way not to take CNP transactions,” says Libby. “Lots use telephone booking systems such as interactive voice response (IVR) and for others it isn’t logical for the customer to visit an office or store to complete transactions.”
In 2023, it’s becoming more and more difficult to run a business solely offline. “For these merchants there is no option,” says Libby “CNP transactions are not to be feared as long as you have good security measures in place.”
Here’s an example.
Sophie is out shopping with friends when she sees a handbag she likes in your window display. Your store is closed, so she uses her smartphone to look up the handbag on your website. She finds it, adds it to her cart and checks-out.
To her surprise, the only available method of order fulfillment is to reserve the handbag and to pay and pick up in-store.
Since Sophie will be out of town and unable to pick up the handbag in-store, she holds off on finalizing her order until she gets back. But time goes by, life gets busy, and she forgets.
By refusing CNP transactions, the merchant above has added friction to Sophie’s shopping experience. So they lost the sale.
How to process a CNP transaction
In person, you should always accept card present transactions, and card present only.
For ecommerce (or telephone order) sales, however, you have a few options for processing CNP transactions:
Online checkouts: whether they use their credit card directly, an online-shopping enabled debit card, PayPal or otherwise, all you need to do is set up a secure online checkout. The system will help take care of fraud checks.
Keyed in from over the phone: if a customer is calling in to make a payment, proceed with a sale in your POS like usual. When it comes time to pay, select the option to enter details manually. Your POS will let sales associates know what information it needs to process the sale.
Invoices: if a customer isn’t comfortable with giving your sales associates their card details over the phone, you can use an invoicing tool like QuoteMachine to make them feel more secure.
Keep in mind that while card not present is standard for ecommerce, CNP transactions may put you into a “high-risk” category for card processing if you accept a lot of them offline.
As a high risk merchant, what are my options for merchant accounts?
If you plan to offer CNP transactions, you’ll still be able to obtain a merchant account. However, your rates and terms of your contract may be less desirable in comparison to your low-risk counterparts.
The good news is there are a lot of merchant service providers that specialize in high-risk merchant accounts. While many merchant service providers openly advertise their standard, low-risk merchant rates, high-risk account fees are usually less transparent because there are more variables to take into consideration.
Additionally, if you’re deemed as a high-risk business, your account provider will likely require you to keep a reserve. There are three types of reserve accounts you can expect from merchant service providers, and they are:
Rolling reserve. A rolling reserve is a risk management strategy the acquiring bank uses to protect themselves from potential fraud, chargebacks, or other incidents where the acquirer may lose money. Think of it as a buffer or an insurance policy on the high-risk nature of your business. Based on the terms of your merchant agreement, the payment provider will withhold a percentage of your daily revenue for a specified term, and then gradually release the funds.
Up-front reserve. If you’re a new business or have other less than ideal qualifying factors, some MSPs will require starting with an up-front reserve. Based on expected transaction volume, an up-front reserve is the amount of money that must be placed in escrow at the start of the merchant agreement — or allow the MSP to withhold 100 percent of credit card funds until the reserve balance is met.
Capped or fixed reserve. A fixed reserve is when the acquirer withholds a percentage of every transaction until the reserve reaches the cap agreed upon in the merchant agreement. Unlike a rolling reserve where the acquirer takes a portion of every sale indefinitely, in this model, once the cap is reached the acquirer will not take any additional funds. However, if the MSP needs to withdraw from the reserve for any reason, the withholding percentage will kick in again until the cap balance is replenished.
One last thing to note because of the high-risk nature of your business, you may also be susceptible to account freezes. During this freeze, you cannot continue to process credit or debit cards until the hold is lifted.
If there’s suspicious activity with your merchant account, a payment processor may temporarily freeze your account to analyze your processing habits and decide whether or not you’re operating within the terms of your agreement or are in breach of contract.
If it’s the latter and you’re fulfilling your side of the agreement, expect the MSP to do one of the following:
Rewrite the merchant agreement based on the assessment findings.
The temporary freeze will lead to a permanent termination.
The worst case scenario when a high-risk merchant account provider freezes your account and intentional fraud is found, the merchant can face fines or have criminal charges brought against them.
While account freezes may be unavoidable from time-to-time, the best way to avoid termination is to be honest on your merchant application. Be upfront about the types of products and services you offer and your expectations for credit card volume.
How to accept CNP transactions securely
In theory, card not present transactions are simple. Your sales associate keys in the card number, the payment goes through, and that’s it. But it’s not that simple—that’s a great way to fall victim to fraud, after all.
Here are some best practices you can follow:
Don’t accept card not present transactions in person. If someone is paying in your store, they should have their card with them. Instruct your sales associates to only take card present payments.
Use Address Verification Service. This system checks a customer’s card details against the address they provide. When in doubt, use AVS.
Perform card security checks. If someone is paying by card, they should have the three (or four) digit security code on the back of the card. Ask for it when in doubt—though your POS should require it to process CNP transactions anyway.
Use a PCI DSS level 1 certified payment processor.PCI compliance is required by the credit card industry already, so you might as well look for the highest level of security.
Tip: If you must manually process a card by keying in the number, you can take steps to mitigate the risk of fraud and to prevent chargebacks. Have your customer fill out a credit card authorization form in cases where you do not have an existing relationship with the customer. Doing so will help ensure you have a strong case in the event of any disputes, and will often prevent a dispute from happening in the first place.
Card-not-present fraud is a type of credit card scam where the customer doesn’t physically present a card to the merchant during a fraudulent transaction. Card-not-present fraud typically occurs with transactions online or over the phone.
“CNP fraud happens in a number of ways,” says Ian Sells, CEO of Rebate Key, an ecommerce discount platform for merchants and shoppers. “Scammers steal your information like your name, card number, address, security code and more. The hackers that get this information are sneaky, and they don’t ever need to see your card to steal this information. All of your data can be stolen electronically through phishing schemes.”
Since a merchant can’t physically inspect a stolen card for signs of fraud (like altered account numbers or a missing hologram), card-not-present fraud is considered harder to prevent than card-present fraud.
“CNP transactions are commonly targeted with stolen or cloned credit and debit cards,” says Libby. “This is something for merchants to be aware of. Adding additional levels of security will ensure these fraudulent payments are kept to a minimum.”
How does card-not-present transaction fraud occur?
CNP transaction fraud happens when someone either physically steals a credit card or copies a card’s information manually or with skimmers. Fraudsters then use that stolen information to purchase goods or services without the cardholder’s consent. Increasingly, fraudsters make illegitimate purchases online where they can easily fake an identity.
A merchant’s bank can revoke the funds received from the fraudulent transaction and return them to the cardholder’s account, if a cardholder discovers their card or personal information was stolen and that unauthorized purchases were made.
Example of card-not-present fraud:
Let’s revisit the Sophie example above, but this time your site accepts CNP transactions.
At checkout, Sophie selects regular shipping and pays for her order using her credit card. A week later, you’re notified of a chargeback on Sophie’s order. As it turns out, someone stole Sophie’s credit card to make the purchase. Payment processors like Lightspeed help merchants mitigate risk with built-in PCI compliance and fraud monitoring, as well as advice and assistance if a dispute is filed.
Who is liable for card-not-present transaction fraud?
Fraud liability lies with the merchant for any CNP transaction until the chargeback case proves otherwise.
Because of the risk of accepting these types of payments, a processing bank will not accept liability—and this is clearly covered in terms and conditions, as Libby explains. “Some banks will hold a rolling reserve when businesses process high amounts of these transactions, this acts as a safety net in the event of chargeback or fraud,” she says.
This is generally not the case with CP transactions.
As of October 2015, if a merchant uses EMV protection, they aren’t held liable for CP fraud. If, however, a merchant takes CP transactions without EMV protection for chip cards, the liability for fraud falls on them.
Pro tip: If you must manually process a card by keying in the number, you can take steps to mitigate the risk of fraud and to prevent chargebacks. Have your customer fill out a credit card authorization form in cases where you do not have an existing relationship with the customer. Doing so will help ensure you have a strong case in the event of any disputes, and will often prevent a dispute from happening in the first place. Click here to download our free credit card authorization form.
Five types of card-not-present fraud
Let’s delve even deeper into the kinds of card-not-present fraud you need to know about:
True fraud
Friendly fraud
Triangulation fraud
Clean fraud
Application and identity fraud
What is true fraud?
True fraud occurs when a credit card is used without the cardholder’s knowledge or consent.
“Card not-present transactions are an easy target for fraudulent payments largely because the security checks are less than those of face-to-face payments such as using a chip and pin machine,” says Libby, at Merchant Advice Services. “CNP accounted for 68% of fraudulent card payments in 2019. True fraud is using fake details to complete these types of card payments.”
“Friendly fraud” is also known as chargeback fraud,” explains Libby. “This is where the customer raises a chargeback directly with their bank, receiving a refund. A common reason for this is that the goods/services weren’t delivered. It’s then up to the merchant to prove otherwise, subsequently obtaining reimbursement.”
What is triangulation fraud?
This is when criminals set up a fake website to get customers to buy cheap goods. This is just a ploy. The goods never arrive and the fraudsters steal customers’ credit card details to use for their own ends.
What is ‘clean fraud’?
This may happen shortly after the triangulation fraud has happened. Clean fraud is when transactions look legitimate, but are being made using stolen credit card information to impersonate the cardholder.
What is application and identity fraud?
Just as fraudsters can steal anyone’s private and financial details, to pretend to be someone else to buy goods, so too can they use that information to apply for a card.
What is chargeback fraud?
Chargeback fraud occurs when the true cardholder makes a legitimate purchase and receives the goods or services they bought but still requests a chargeback from their bank.
If you can document that the real cardholder authorized the transaction, you can win these chargeback cases. So make sure you’re keeping accurate transaction records.
When you receive a chargeback, the issuing bank will assign to it a reason code. That reason code has specific compelling evidence requirements to overturn the bank’s decision and close the case in the merchant’s favor.
In any case of chargeback fraud, the merchant needs to prove that the customer who made the purchase is the true owner of the card and benefitted from the sale. In cases where the customer claims they are dissatisfied with the merchant’s product or service, the merchant needs to prove the goods or services were delivered exactly as advertised and the customer agreed to your refund policy prior to the transaction.
Seven examples of compelling evidence for fighting CNP chargebacks:
Customer identifying information (name, address, email, phone number)
Refund and cancellation policy (publicly shown on your site, invoices or receipts)
Shipping policies
Delivery confirmation (tracking number and confirmation of delivery)
A signed contract or invoice (typically used for custom orders)
Photos of items shipped or services rendered
Email communications (save these in case you need to refer back to build a timeline or confirm details)
Reminder: Even customers who present their card to you in person may be subject to chargebacks. How? Say the card’s chip reader doesn’t work and you’re forced to key the number in instead. This automatically qualifies the transaction as Card-Not-Present even if both the customer and card are physically present. Keyed-in transactions have a higher chance of chargebacks than average.
How to handle card-not-present fraud with Lightspeed
Your first step in accepting CNP transactions is to choose a payment processor that puts compliance and security first. It doesn’t hurt to also keep up with the best practices from credit card providers and security companies.
With Lightspeed Payments, we take security seriously—and we help you deal with any chargebacks that occur.
Say you’re notified of a chargeback request. In this case, Address Verification Service (AVS) is one of the most secure tools you have to defend yourself. When a CNP transaction is performed, AVS checks the numeric information (such as a ZIP or postcode) and authenticates it with the providing bank. If there’s a full AVS match, the transaction will go through; if there isn’t a match, the transaction is declined to prevent fraud.
In some cases, AVS may return a partial match result. If that happens, the transaction may still be approved by your processor if other information matches. The information they look for matches for includes:
Email address data
IP address data
The Card Verification Value/Code (CVV/CVC)
In order to dispute the chargeback, the merchant needs to prove that they or their payment processor made attempts to verify a transaction’s validity.
This is where AVS comes in. While a full AVS match doesn’t guarantee that merchants can stop the chargeback, it does greatly strengthen their case.
Accept CNP transactions securely in-store and online
As a web developer working with WordPress, troubleshooting errors is part and parcel of your journey. One common error you might come across is the dreaded “502 Bad Gateway” error.
In this tutorial, we’ll dive into the meaning of a 502 Bad Gateway error, provide examples to help you identify it, and offer step-by-step instructions on how to troubleshoot and resolve this issue efficiently.
We’ll cover the following areas:
Understanding the Error
The 502 Bad Gateway error is an HTTP status code that indicates communication failure between two servers, often a web server (like Nginx or Apache) and an upstream server (like PHP-FPM or a database server).
In the context of WordPress, this error typically arises when your web server cannot receive a valid response from an upstream server. Basically, a 502 bad gateway message indicates that something went wrong while connecting with a device that should fetch all the elements your web page needs to load.
The dreaded 502 Bad Gateway error message.
Common Causes of 502 Errors
Server Overload
When a server is overloaded with too many requests, it can struggle to process them all, leading to delayed or failed responses. This overload could be due to sudden spikes in website traffic, misconfiguration, or inadequate server resources.
DNS Issues
Domain Name System (DNS) issues can lead to a “Bad Gateway 502” error. If the DNS server fails to resolve the domain name, the communication between servers breaks down, triggering the error.
Network Connectivity Problems
Disruptions in network connectivity, such as broken connections or high latency, can also contribute to the occurrence of the “Bad Gateway 502” error.
PHP-FPM or Backend Server Issues
PHP-FPM (PHP FastCGI Process Manager) is a highly efficient and configurable alternative to the traditional way of running PHP scripts on a web server. Instead of having the web server handle PHP scripts directly, PHP-FPM manages a pool of worker processes to handle PHP requests and works as an intermediary between the web server (e.g., Nginx, Apache) and the PHP interpreter.
Handling PHP requests and processing these separately from the web server improves resource management and contributes to better performance and stability in serving dynamic content, such as what’s commonly found in WordPress websites.
If your web server relies on PHP-FPM or any other backend service, issues with these servers can lead to 502 errors.
Database Server Problems
If your WordPress site is connected to a database server (like MySQL), database connection problems can result in a 502 error.
Proxy or CDN Configuration
Incorrect settings or misconfigurations within your content delivery network (CDN) or proxy server can also trigger this error.
Plugins or Themes
Faulty plugins or themes that overload or improperly interact with your server can lead to 502 errors.
Recognizing a Bad Gateway Error
When a 502 Bad Gateway error occurs, users visiting your website might see a message like:
“502 Bad Gateway”
“502 Bad Gateway – nginx”
“502 Proxy Error”
“Bad Gateway: The proxy server received an invalid response from an upstream server.”
Troubleshooting and Resolving Errors
It goes without saying that the best way to prevent most server-related issues is to host your sites with a reliable hosting company.
WPMU DEV not only offers award-winning managed WordPress hosting as voted by users, but all of our hosting plans are also built on a self-healing architecture that proactively attempts to restart hosting services during high server loads to prevent issues and minimize disruptions.
If you are a WPMU DEV member, we also recommend activating Uptime from The Hub. Uptime will alert you if your site goes down for any reason, including issues that can lead to a 502 error.
Uptime alerts you when issues like a 502 error cause your site to go down.
Now, let’s delve into the steps you can take to diagnose and resolve the 502 Bad Gateway error on your WordPress site.
Step 1: Refresh the Page
Sometimes, the 502 error might be transient and can be resolved by simply refreshing the page. This could indicate a temporary server glitch.
Step 2: Check Other Sites
Visit other websites to determine if the issue is isolated to your site or affecting multiple websites. This can help you differentiate between a problem on your end or a more widespread issue.
Step 3: Clear Browser Cache and Cookies
Cached data in your browser might be causing the error. Consider clearing server-side caches (e.g. object cache, static cache etc.), then try accessing your website again.
Step 4: Flush DNS Cache
Flushing your computer’s DNS cache can help resolve DNS-related issues that might contribute to the error. See this guide if you need help.
Step 5: Monitor Server Status
Check the status of your web server, backend servers, and database servers. Look for server load issues or errors in server logs.
Step 6: Review PHP and Backend Configuration
Inspect your PHP-FPM or backend server configuration files. Make sure they are properly configured and functioning as expected.
Step 7: Examine CDN and Proxy Settings
If you’re using a CDN or proxy server, review their settings for any misconfigurations. Ensure that requests are being properly forwarded to your web server. Clearing the CDN cache may also be helpful.
Step 8: Disable Problematic Plugins/Themes
Temporarily deactivate all plugins and switch to a default WordPress theme. Gradually reactivate plugins one by one to identify if any are causing the 502 error.
Step 9: Increase Server Resources
If your server is running out of resources, consider upgrading your hosting plan or optimizing your server settings.
Step 10: Consult Hosting Support
If the error persists and you’re unable to identify the cause, reach out to your hosting provider’s support team. They can provide valuable insights and assistance in resolving the issue.
Preventing and Minimizing 502 Errors
Additional measures to help prevent or minimize potential 502 errors include the following:
1. Optimize Server Performance
Invest in robust server infrastructure and optimize server performance to significantly reduce the likelihood of encountering “Bad Gateway 502” errors.
2. Implement Redundancy
Having backup servers ready to take over in case of failure will help to maintain uninterrupted service and prevent errors.
3. Load Balancers
Implement load balancers to distribute incoming traffic across multiple servers. This reduces the risk of overloading a single server and triggering the error.
4. Content Delivery Networks (CDNs)
CDNs store cached copies of websites on servers located globally. This can enhance website performance and reduce the chances of a “Bad Gateway 502” error. If you’re not using a CDN, consider implementing one in your setup.
5. Regular Server Maintenance
Perform routine server maintenance, including software updates and security checks to prevent unforeseen errors.
6. Monitoring and Alert Systems
Implement monitoring tools and alert systems (e.g. Uptime) to notify administrators of server issues in real-time, allowing for swift intervention and error resolution.
7. Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) Protection
DDoS protection services can safeguard servers from malicious traffic surges, preventing server overload and potential 502 errors.
8. Implement Graceful Error Handling
Graceful error handling refers to the practice of designing a website or application to handle errors and unexpected situations in a smooth and user-friendly manner.
Custom error pages and graceful error handling can enhance user experience by providing informative messages, clear, human-readable explanations of what went wrong and offering actionable steps to resolve the issue instead of presenting users with the standard error codes, confusing error messages, or technical jargon.
Know What To Do When You Get a 502
Facing a 502 Bad Gateway error in WordPress can be frustrating.
If you experience a 502 error, refer to the above information to help you quickly identify possible causes and solutions. Make sure you’re familiar with WordPress troubleshooting tools and our WordPress troubleshooting guide and follow the steps outlined above to identify and address the root cause of the error to ensure your website remains up and running smoothly for your visitors.
And of course, if you are a WPMU DEV member and need additional help troubleshooting errors, you can always access our 24/7 expert support team anytime for assistance with anything WordPress or hosting-related.
Web surveys have become the backbone for eCommerce business success as it’s proven to be an invaluable tool for organisations to gather valuable insights and feedback from their target audience. In an increasingly digital world, web surveys offer a convenient and efficient means of collecting data, enabling businesses to make informed decisions and improve their products, web design, communications, and customer journey.
Want to know how web surveys can work in your favour? Well, let’s get to it then.
What are Web Surveys?
Web surveys are online questionnaires used to gather information and insights from your target audience. They are each designed based on the audience and where they are in their customer journey with the brand. These surveys are tailored to collect quantitative data through closed-ended questions or qualitative data through open-ended questions.
Web surveys can also be used when message mining. However, while message mining comes in many shapes and forms, web surveys are there to gather specific data from the target audience. It’s all based on your goals, whether to improve customer satisfaction, collect product feedback, conduct market research, or even check how users experience your site.
Why Conduct Web Surveys?
We could carry on for hours about the different reasons you should conduct web surveys. But to make your life easier, we’ve put together four reasons why you should conduct web surveys.
1. Customer Feedback
Web surveys allow you to engage directly with your customers and obtain feedback on their experiences. By understanding customer preferences, pain points, and expectations, businesses can make data-driven decisions to enhance their products or services.
2. Market Research
Say hello to a cost-effective and efficient method for conducting market research. They enable you to gather information on consumer trends, preferences, and behaviours, helping you to identify new market opportunities and optimise your marketing strategies.
3. User Experience Improvement
Your customers’ journeys with your store are pivotal to whether or not they will stick around with your brand. Web surveys assist in evaluating and improving user experience and the customer journey. By gathering user feedback, businesses can identify areas of improvement, optimise website navigation, enhance usability, and ensure customer satisfaction, ultimately leading to increased conversions and customer loyalty.
4. Data-Driven Decision Making
Web surveys generate valuable data that can guide strategic decision-making. By analysing survey responses, businesses can uncover patterns, trends, and correlations, helping them make informed choices and allocate resources effectively.
Types of Recommendations from Web Surveys
You may be wondering what types of feedback you may receive when conducting web surveys. Of course, it varies depending on your goal for the survey that was set in the beginning. But if done correctly, you can expect some of the following:
Product Development: Web surveys can provide insights into customer preferences, needs, and desires, helping businesses develop products that align with market demands. These recommendations can influence your product features, pricing, packaging, and even your branding strategies.
Customer Service Enhancement: Using web surveys to enhance customer service will enable you to identify gaps in your customer services process and make necessary improvements. Whether it’s streamlining customer support channels, enhancing response times, migrating customer service tools, or implementing additional support features, you’ll be able to make an impactful change in your customer service.
Marketing Strategies: Web surveys assist in refining marketing strategies by identifying target-audience preferences, understanding their purchasing behaviours, and gathering feedback on marketing campaigns. Recommendations may involve optimising messaging, refining targeting strategies, or leveraging new advertising channels.
Website Enhancements: Web surveys allow you to understand what it’s like to visit your brand’s site from the customer’s point of view. This could lead to website enhancements that you never thought of—leading to an increase in Conversion Rate.
Blend & Web Surveys
At Blend, our web surveys are strategically designed based on many factors, including the brand, its tone of voice, its target audience and where their customers are in their customer journey. First, a goal is determined. Then customers are divided using Omniconvert’s Reveal before we create custom surveys for each group based on their purchasing and engagement behaviour with the brand. We work closely with the brand to ensure questions are clear, concise, and unbiased to maximise the quality and accuracy of responses.
We also make certain that the surveys are on-brand when it comes to the survey appearance—ensuring the brand logo, colours, and fonts are all consistent. This increases brand trust as well as the completion rate.
Once put together, Blend creates email campaigns targeting each cohort with their specific link taking them to their web survey. These surveys are completed on a separate website to ensure customers aren’t distracted. Once surveys are sent out, we wait a select period of time, depending on the brand, before analysing the responses through Omniconvert. Omniconvert provides powerful analytics tools that allow us to analyse survey responses in-depth, so we can easily identify trends, patterns, and correlations, enabling us to generate actionable insights for our clients.
Based on the qualitative and quantitative data collected, we build a list of recommended actions to implement for the client. Whether it’s refining product copy, enhancing user experience, or optimising marketing strategies, we leverage the survey data to drive positive changes for both client and their customers.
One of Blend’s Beauty Client’s, agreed for us to conduct web surveys to source the underlying issues that they may not have known about. We found some points of interest from these surveys that we could make actionable insights.
Beauty Client originally thought that their target audience was price sensitive—often offering discounts and deals to overcome this. However, the truth was quite the opposite. We found that Beauty Client’s customers were happy to pay the necessary prices for the products. We then created a strategy to wean customers from any discounts being offered and replaced these with rewards for loyalty.
We found that the main hindrance for customers with this brand was shipping issues like longer delays. To resolve this issue, Blend encouraged the rule of ‘under-promise and over-deliver’ by updating the messaging surrounding shipping within the client’s website. We also looked into potential delays in fulfilment centres and optimised communication within the Post Purchase Flow to manage customer expectations.
If you’re looking to make the same incremental changes and impacts to your store and need someone on your side, you can get in touch with us at Blend today.
What are Operating Expenses? A Guide for Retail Entrepreneurs and Managers
If you run a retail business, it never hurts to brush up on your understanding of the various expenses involved in running your business. In this article, we’ll focus on operating expenses.
We’ll answer retailers’ common questions about operating expenses. We will cover:
Searching for the right POS system?
Our free guide will help you understand the kind of point-of-sale system you need to run your business efficiently.
What are operating expenses?
Operating expenses are the essential costs you pay to run and operate your business. Most of them tend to encompass short-term or day-to-day expenses.
They include expenditures such as rent, inventory costs, marketing, and payroll, said Hillary Senko Cullum, a wholesale and retail consultant operating at HSC Advisors.
“While these are unavoidable costs to keep your business running it is important to be diligent about the level of expenditures and ensure they are workable within your cash flow,” she said.
Is inventory an operating expense?
This question has a bit of a complicated answer. Once your inventory is sold, it becomes a COGs expense (otherwise known as cost of goods sold). But before that, inventory is reported on your balance sheet as a current asset.
Inventory isn’t all that simple, though: it encompasses raw materials, transportation and delivery, manufacturing, storage and overhead are all essential components of inventory.
Good to know
Operating expenses are what it costs you to run your business. Financial experts and other business owners sometimes use the term OPEX to mean the same thing.
Some common operating expenses in retail include inventory purchases, product shipping, marketing and advertising, and payroll.
Maintaining monthly bookkeeping and reviewing expenses regularly will help retailers manage and control operating expenses.
Capital expenses vs operating expenses: what’s the difference?
Business expenses can be a little confusing, whether you are considering starting a new retail business, or up-and-running but handling your own bookkeeping and accounting.
They fall into two basic categories: OPEX and CAPEX. Here’s how they differ.
Understanding CAPEX
Capital expenses include costs for long-term benefits such as equipment purchases, building improvements, or technology, explains Jessica Distel, a certified public accountant (CPA) and a managing director at Buckingham Advisors. “Capital expenditures are often not effectively budgeted for and can result in unexpected depletions of cash flow,” said Distel.
Examples of capital expenses include:
Expanding your current retail space
Opening a new brick-and-mortar store
Replacing air conditioning or a roof
“Setting aside a percentage of revenue or profit into a savings account specifically designated for capital expenditures is a great way to plan for future costs that may be on the horizon,” said Distel.
Understanding OPEX
To recap, operating expenses are the costs of running a business and may include costs such as rent, utilities, marketing and payroll. “Operating expenses are a necessary component of a business and should be analyzed and budgeted for,” said Distel.
COGS vs OPEX
Your cost of goods sold (COGS) are expenses tied to sourcing or making your products and bringing them to the place where you will sell them. “That usually includes the cost of the inventory, freight, duties, shipping and packaging, said Abir Syed of UpCounting. “Expenses incurred during the process of selling the inventory are usually excluded from COGS, such as rent for a showroom or salaries of the salespeople or marketing.”
How do you calculate OPEX and CAPEX?
Retailers can calculate OPEX and CAPEX using the following formulas.
“Operating expenses are typically more important for a retailer as they are indicative of the health and performance of the business,” said Syed. “Capital expenditure isn’t irrelevant, but in a lot of cases as long as it’s not egregious, strong operations can cover CapEx requirements, or they can be financed through loans or equity.”
Senko Cullum suggests retail businesses carefully evaluate the goals and purpose of any capital expenditure, before spending, to understand the expected value or growth potential.
How to track CAPEX and OPEX
If you’re not already using accounting software for your expenses, now’s the time.
Track all expenses in accounting software like QuickBooks, suggests Armine Alajian (CPA), founder of the Alajian Group. “When you make a purchase from a debit or credit card, categorize that expense in the proper expense account.”
Syed agrees it’s best to regularly calculate expenses by using accounting software, so you know where certain cash outflows belong in the records.
And Distel echoes this advice, adding that tracking and reporting historical costs are integral components of budgeting for (and forecasting) upcoming costs and projected profits. “Performing a routine overhead cost analysis may help a business owner determine ways to reduce costs or make the business run more efficiently,” she said.
We also recommend budgeting for operating expenses and capital expenses separately. That will allow you to be more organized and prioritize each expense separately.
How to track capital expenses
Capital expenditures require a different approach than operating expenses. CAPEX consists of long-term expenses such as maintenance and anything that involves investments for future growth. As a result, capital expenses require long-term budgetary planning. Think of this as tracking future projects for growth.
Tracking CAPEX involves creating deadlines, identifying the scope of the project and accounting for budgetary needs. Include important details such as materials, funding requirements, labor costs, and other necessary information.
Accounting software, rather than manual bookkeeping, will give you more freedom when mapping out your capital expenses.
How to track operating expenses
Operating expenses are the ongoing day-to-day expenses that are involved in keeping your business running. We will discuss more examples later, but they include costs such as utilities, wages and property tax.
Spreadsheets can be a good starting point for tracking business expenses when you first open your business. But as you scale and your expenses become more complicated, you’ll need a more sophisticated way of tracking your expenses.
That’s where accounting software comes in: not only will you save time on bookkeeping, but you’ll get a better overview of your expenses compared to your overall revenue. This can help you understand where you need to cut costs, and how to streamline your expenses to maximize revenue.
If you’re transitioning from Excel spreadsheets to a software that comprehensively tracks expenses, don’t stress about losing data. These sheets can easily be imported to most accounting software.
By eliminating manual entry of your daily and monthly expenses, you’ll reduce the risk of errors and make your life (and your accountant’s life) much simpler when it comes to tax time.
What are some examples of retail operating expenses?
As a retailer, your operating expenses will be much different from other kinds of businesses. Typically, the top retail operating expenses include:
Salaries: Payroll costs typically make up a significant portion of your budget. Your business also has to factor in taxes and benefits for employees here.
Store rent: You might pay more in rent for a prime location with high foot traffic, while an online retailer might not have to think about this expense at all. Renting usually comes with added expenses for maintenance, cleaning, utilities and tax.
Marketing and ad spend: This covers all your spending on traditional channels like television adverts, print coupons, Google Ads, and social media promotion.
Product deliveries: Delivery costs for retailers can vary significantly depending on the size and weight of the product being shipped, as well as the distance it needs to travel.
Like other businesses, retailers are also likely to spend recurring monthly amounts on:
Software subscriptions
Ecommerce platforms
Website maintenance
Merchant and bank fees
Telephone and internet bills
Light, heat, cooling, and energy
Commercial rent
Transport
Consulting
It is easy for operating expenses like marketing to grow quickly, said Senko Cullum. “For this type of expense, it is essential to evaluate the return-on-spend, meaning are you receiving a positive sales impact based on what you have spent?”
“Expenses like marketing have a more direct tie to revenue, making it easier to build metrics around the return on investment. But all OPEX should be evaluated to see if it is positively impacting topline sales while not degrading bottom-line profits,” she said.
What’s excluded from operating expenses?
Operating expenses do not typically include one-time costs such as capital investments or long-term debt payments. These business costs, and a range of others, are what are known as non-operating expenses.
Understanding non-operating expenses
Non-operating expenses are not related to a company’s core business operations. These can include:
Fees for legal services
Charges for interest on loans
Gains or losses from asset sales
Non-operating expenses still need to be monitored closely, so you can make financial decisions and accurately calculate your business’s earnings.
How to manage OPEX
When it comes to managing your operating expenses, one of the most important things to do is manage your budget efficiently.
Senko Cullum believes the best way to manage OPEX is to set quarterly budgets, then evaluate actual expenditures against budget. “This allows you to understand what areas are spending more and where you can potentially cut back,” she said.
Here are a few other ways to effectively manage your operating expenses:
Take advantage of cheaper marketing methods, such as email outreach and social media posts
Remove third-party providers and embrace technology to cut costs by using an integrated POS and payments platform
Assess areas where you can reduce waste
Review all subscriptions and cancel anything redundant or unused
What’s going to happen with retail operating costs in 2023?
It’s expensive to run a retail business right now. Retailers are experiencing a general increase in expenses across the board, said Lee Whitaker, general manager at the Parker Avery Group.
“General global unease related to conflicts in Europe and threats in the Pacific is driving this through price inflation,” said Whitaker. “Interest rate increases have made access to capital more difficult than in recent history.
Both day-to-day expenses and long-term expenses like facilities, equipment and infrastructure are seeing price increases related to supply chain issues and legacy impacts from COVID-related interruptions or delays, he explained.
Preparing for rising retail operating expenses
Amid such rising costs, retail stores may be forced to increase thepricing of their merchandise or recognize a reducedprofit margin, said Distel.
“When making such decisions, I would highly recommend that business-owners research performance metrics andkey performance indicators for their specific industry and market. Doing so can help the business stay competitive,” she added.
What Is Google’s INP Score and How to Improve It in WordPress
Are you wondering what Google’s INP score is and how to improve it on your WordPress website?
Interaction to Next Paint (INP) is a Core Web Vitals metric from Google. Improving this score will make your website feel more responsive to your users.
In this article, we will show you how to improve your Google INP score in WordPress and explain what Google’s INP score is.
Here is a quick overview of the topics we will cover in this guide:
What Are Google Core Web Vitals?
Google Core Web Vitals are website performance metrics that Google considers important for overall user experience. These web vital scores are part of Google’s overall page experience score, which will impact your SEO rankings.
These metrics are useful because, even if your WordPress website loads fast, it may not be fully functional for users. Even if a page has loaded, a visitor might not be able to do what they want or access the information they need.
Core Web Vitals are designed to help with this. They let you measure how quickly your website loads, becomes visible, and is ready for your visitors to use.
However, Google is replacing FID with a new test called INP (Interaction to Next Paint).
This change currently has the status of ‘Pending’ and will be finalized in March 2024. This gives you time to prepare so that your SEO rankings are not impacted, and we will show you how later in this article.
What Is Google INP?
INP stands for ‘Interaction to Next Paint’. It is a new Google Core Web Vital metric that measures the user interactions that cause delays on your website.
The INP test measures how long it takes between a user interacting with your website, like clicking on something, and your content visually updating in response. This visual update is called the ‘next paint’.
For example, a user might submit a contact form on your site, click on a button, or select an image that opens in a lightbox. The INP test will measure the time taken between the user performing these interactions and actually seeing the updated content on your website.
The Google test then comes up with a single INP score based on the duration of most user interactions on your website. The score will either be ‘Good’, ‘Needs Improvement’, or ‘Poor’, depending on how long your website takes to update visually.
Why Is Google Changing the FID Metric to INP?
The current FID test measures how quickly your website responds to the first user input after the page loads, such as a mouse click or keyboard press. It does this by measuring the time between the first input from the user and when your website starts to act on that input.
In other words, it measures how responsive your website is when it first loads and the first impression that it gives to real users.
However, this metric isn’t as helpful as it could be. There are two limitations to the FID test:
It only measures the first user interaction, not all of them.
It only measures until the website starts to process the interaction, not when the user can actually see the visual feedback on the screen.
So Google is changing the test to give a more complete picture of the overall responsiveness of a web page. INP will measure the entire time the user spends there until they leave the page.
How to Measure Google INP Score in WordPress
The easiest way to test your Google Core Web Vitals score is by using the PageSpeed Insights tool. Simply enter the URL you want to test and click the ‘Analyze’ button.
The tool will analyze the web page for a few seconds and then show you the test results.
Now, along with other Google Core Web Vitals, you will also see the page’s Interaction to Next Paint (INP) score.
There will be different scores for mobile and desktop users.
In the screenshot above, you can see the INP score for desktop users viewing this web page on WPBeginner is 47 ms. The green dot means that this is a good score.
Once you can see the score for your own site, you will probably be wondering how it compares with other websites and whether it needs to be improved.
Google has provided some guidelines for interpreting your INP score:
Faster than 200 milliseconds – good responsiveness
200-500 milliseconds – needs improvement
Slower than 500 milliseconds – poor responsiveness
Make sure you check your score for both mobile and desktop users and aim for good responsiveness.
You can then improve your INP score by following the guidelines in the sections below.
Case Study: Finding Slow Interactions on Awesome Motive’s Websites
But first, it may be helpful to look at a case study. We have started measuring the INP scores on our brand sites, including All in One SEO, MonsterInsights, and WPForms.
When our team checked our website’s INP scores, the initial results showed that our most popular pages needed improvement.
12% of our sessions were rated ‘needs improvement’
8% of our sessions were rated ‘poor’
Now, we don’t yet know which specific interactions on our pages are slow and need to be optimized. This information isn’t provided by Google while testing.
That means that next, we will need to run our own tests to find slow interactions on pages with lower INP scores. This is a detailed and advanced task that is best performed by a developer.
It is done by going to each page that needs improvement and then testing each interaction with actual clicks, taps, and key presses. These need to be timed and evaluated using tools.
It’s important to note that the sessions with lower ratings most likely took place on slower devices or connections. That means that while testing, it is recommended to throttle your browser’s speed, or you may not spot the slow interactions.
You can do that using Chrome’s Inspect Element feature by going to View » Developer » Inspect Elements. You can switch to the ‘Network’ tab and select a throttling option from the dropdown menu.
Once you have found the INP scores for your pages, you can use the tips in the next section of this tutorial to improve them.
How to Improve Google INP Score in WordPress
Most of the INP score optimization work will need to be done by developers. That includes the authors of the theme and plugins you use on your website, plus the developers of any custom JavaScript you are running.
That’s because the INP score is mostly related to the time required to perform JavaScript interactions on your website.
For example, when a user clicks a button, some JavaScript code is run to perform the function expected by clicking the button. This code is downloaded to the user’s computer and runs in their web browser.
To optimize your INP score, the delays that happen during JavaScript user interactions must be reduced. There are three components to this delay:
Input delay, which happens when your website is waiting for background tasks on that page that prevent the event handler from running.
Processing time, which is the time required to run event handlers in JavaScript.
Presentation delay, which is the time required to recalculate the page and paint the page content on the screen.
As a website owner, there are steps you can take to improve the first and third delays. We will show you how in the next section.
However, to make real improvements to your INP score, you will need to improve the second delay, which is the processing time of the code itself. That’s not something that you can do yourself.
The developers of your WordPress theme, plugins, and custom JavaScript may need to optimize their code to give feedback to your users immediately. The good news is they are probably already working on this to meet the March 2024 deadline.
We offer some specific tips for developers with examples later in this article.
How Website Owners Can Optimize Their Sites for INP
While the most significant impact on your website’s INP score will come from developers optimizing their code, there are a few things that website owners can do.
In particular, you can make sure that your users’ mouse clicks and keystrokes are recognized as soon as possible by optimizing background processes on your site. Also, you can make sure the response to their input is displayed on the screen as quickly as possible.
Here are some steps you can take to achieve that.
1. Make Sure You Are Running the Latest Version of WordPress
That’s because WordPress versions 6.2 and 6.3 introduced significant performance improvements. These will improve your website’s performance on the server side and client side, which will improve your INP score.
Background processes are scheduled tasks in WordPress that run in the background. They might include checking for WordPress updates, publishing scheduled posts, and backing up your website.
If your website gets too busy running these background tasks, then it may not realize right away that the user has clicked the mouse or pressed a key, resulting in a poor INP score.
You may be able to configure your background scripts and plugins to reduce the amount of work they are doing, placing less strain on your website. Otherwise, you might be able to run them only when they are needed instead of leaving them running in the background.
For detailed instructions, you can see the Optimize Background Processes section of our ultimate guide on how to boost WordPress speed and performance.
3. Check the PageSpeed Insights Performance Recommendations
After you run the PageSpeed Insights test on your website, you can scroll down to the Performance section of the test results.
Here, you will find some opportunities to improve your site’s performance along with the estimated time savings if you follow the advice.
JavaScript needs to be downloaded to the user’s computer before it can be run. By making your JavaScript files as small as possible, you can make some small gains in performance.
Minifying your JavaScript makes the files smaller by removing white spaces, lines, and unnecessary characters from the source code.
This won’t have a dramatic effect on your performance, but if you are looking to shave a few extra milliseconds off your INP score, then you may find it worthwhile.
If you are a developer, then the biggest INP score gains will come from optimizing your code. Here are a few things you can do.
1. Visually Acknowledge User Input Immediately
Here’s the one thing that will make the most difference when optimizing your code’s INP score: You need to give visual feedback to all user input immediately.
The user should see right away that their input has been recognized and that you are acting on it. This will make your code feel more responsive to the user and result in a great INP score.
Here are a few examples:
If a user clicks on an element, then you should display something that shows that the element was clicked.
If a user submits a form, then you need to immediately display something to acknowledge that, such as a message or spinner.
If a user clicks on an image to open it in a lightbox, then don’t just wait for the image to load. Instead, you should show a demo image or spinner immediately. Then, when the image is loaded, you can display it in the lightbox.
More than anything else, this will improve your INP score, especially if you need to do heavy JavaScript processing in response to user input.
Just make sure you update the UI before starting the task. After that, you can do the CPU-heavy work in a setTimeout callback or on a separate thread using a web worker, and then finally present the results to the user.
Once you get that right, there are a few more things you can do to optimize your code.
2. Optimize Where the Browser Spends Most of Its Time
The next thing you should do is investigate where the browser is spending most of its time and then optimize those parts.
In Google Chrome, when you navigate to View » Developer » Developer Tools » Performance, it is possible to inspect the JavaScript functions and event handlers that are blocking the next paint.
With that knowledge, you can see what can be optimized in order to reduce the time until the next paint after user interaction.
3. Reduce Your Layouts
Sometimes, a lot of CPU activity consists of layout work.
When that happens, you should check to see if you can reduce the number of relayout functions in your code.
4. Show Above-the-Fold Content First
If rendering the page contents is slow, then your INP score may be affected.
You can consider showing only important ‘above-the-fold’ content first to deliver the next frame more quickly.
Examples of Good JavaScript Coding Practices for Developers
It may be helpful to show you some examples of how bad code can result in a poor INP score.
We put together an example project on CodePen that you can experiment with. You can examine our sample code, read our short explanations, and see the difference it makes by clicking the buttons.
Here’s an animation from that CodePen project. You can see that the unoptimized sample code results in a poor INP score of 965 milliseconds. The button press will feel laggy to users.
By contrast, the optimized code updates the button text immediately, resulting in the best possible INP score.
Read on to see four examples of how you can improve your code to optimize the INP score.
Example 1: Update the Screen Before Running a Heavy CPU Task
CPU-heavy tasks take time, and this can lead to poor INP scores unless you write good code. In this case, it’s best to update the screen before running that task.
Here is a bad example where the user interface is updated after a heavy CPU task. This results in a high INP:
// Bad example
button.addEventListener('click', () => {
// Heavy CPU task
for (let i = 0; i < 10000000; i++) {
console.log(i);
}
// UI update
button.textContent="Clicked!";});
In this improved example, the user interface is updated immediately when the button is clicked.
After that, the heavy CPU task is moved to a setTimeout callback:
// Better example
button.addEventListener('click', () => {
// UI update
button.textContent="Processing...";
// Heavy CPU task
setTimeout(() => {
for (let i = 0; i < 10000000; i++)
{
console.log(i);
}
// Final UI update
button.textContent="Done!";
}, 0);
});
This allows the browser to update the screen before starting the slow task, resulting in a good INP score.
Example 2: Schedule Non-Urgent Processing
You should also make sure that you don’t run non-urgent or non-essential work in a script immediately when it may delay the response the user is expecting.
You should start by updating the page immediately to acknowledge the user’s input. After that, you can use requestIdleCallback to schedule the rest of the script when there is free time at the end of a frame or when the user is inactive.
This can be useful for animations or visual updates in response to user interactions.
Again, you should give the user feedback by acknowledging their input immediately.
Example 4: Avoid Layout Thrashing
Layout thrashing occurs when you repeatedly read and write to the DOM (Document Object Model), causing the browser to recalculate the layout multiple times.
Here is an example of layout thrashing:
// Bad example
elements.forEach(element => {
const height = element.offsetHeight; // read element.style.height = height + 'px'; // write});
This can be avoided by batching your reads and writes.
How Generated Test Data Accelerates Your Development Workflow (2023)
When building products for Shopify merchants, it’s critical to run thorough tests to ensure features are working as expected, and to understand how your app or theme responds to different conditions. Having a robust test environment is essential for validating functionality and performance, as well as ensuring a seamless user experience.
To help you achieve a realistic testing environment, Shopify has recently launched generated test data for new development stores that contain typical ecommerce primitives, and configured settings that are needed to effectively test an app, theme, or custom storefront. These development stores include demo products, test orders, a theme optimized for the diverse data set, some Shopify Plus-specific features, and more.
In this article, we’ll explore the different types of demo elements available in the generated test data set, discuss the benefits of using generated test data, and highlight the use cases that can significantly speed up your workflow. By using development stores with generated test data, you can create an environment that closely mimics real-world scenarios, making your testing process more efficient.
Types of generated data and potential use-cases
To give you a head start when you’re testing out a feature of your app or theme, we’ve analyzed the most relevant aspects of Shopify for developers and created various data primitives that provide authentic examples you can use during tests.
The full list of commerce primitives and configurations is found in our developer documentation, but in this blog post we’ll highlight some of the possible use cases. By leveraging these different data types, you can quickly simulate specific user interactions, and identify potential issues in your app or theme.
Products
One of the first things you’ll notice when you spin up a new development store with generated data is that the store comes with a set of snowboard products. Each of these snowboards has unique product characteristics, from the Multi-managed Snowboard which is fulfilled by both a fulfillment service and a store location, to the Minimal Snowboard, which only contains required fields, to the Complete Snowboard which is fully stacked with variants, tags, vendor, type, sales data, markets, and more.
The generated Complete Snowboard is fully stacked with variants.
The benefit of having access to a range of products with different attributes is that you’ll be able to see how your app or theme responds to products that are in various states. This set of products will help you identify where potential issues might be encountered with unexpected product-related scenarios.
For example, your app may use theme app extensions to expand the product detail page, so you’ll want to ensure it’s displaying as expected for products in different states. You may find for specific states, such as if a product is sold out and unavailable, your app should react differently. By testing how the app makes changes or reacts to different types of demo products, you can identify when potential bugs and issues could arise.
For developers who are working with integrations related to gifting, we also have sample gift card products that you can test, and you’ll also find metafield definitions on some of the snowboards if you need to work with custom content.
Other use cases that could be applicable for testing with these demo products include:
Inventory management testing
Product content display and rendering 3D/AR models
Search and filtering functionality
Integration with ERPs and fulfillment management systems
Cross-selling and upselling
Bundling and product kits
Management of reviews and ratings
Handling digital products and distribution
Wholesale and B2B functionality
If you’re building on Shopify and interacting with a store’s inventory , you can leverage our sample products to ensure your app or theme is catering to a wide range of potential use cases.
Orders
An essential component for testing, particularly for app developers, is order management and processing. Similar to the demo products, our pre-populated development stores include a set of ten sample orders with various characteristics such as different fulfillment and payment statuses, tags, locations, customer notes, and delivery methods.
The generated test data set includes a range of orders with different properties.
Orders are central to Shopify and the general merchant experience, connecting to many different parts of the admin and beyond. These different orders allow you to test how your app might handle scenarios related to order processing and fulfillment, inventory management, and syncing data between Shopify and other platforms.
For example, you might be building an app that connects Shopify stores with a third-party fulfillment platform, to streamline the shipping and fulfillment process. In this case, the app would need to sync order data, shipping details, and inventory updates between Shopify and the third-party platform. Using demo orders, you could test the flow of data between Shopify and the third-party fulfillment platform to ensure the integration is working correctly by updating inventory levels, sending tracking information, and handling order modifications.
Other use cases that you could use these test orders with include:
Order processing and management
Inventory management and backorder handling
Multi-channel order support
Order analytics and reporting
Returns and refunds management
Tax and currency handling
Discounts, coupons, and gift cards
Custom order workflows
Discounts
If your app expands Shopify’s core offering for discount campaigns, scheduled sales, and promotions, the set of five discounts that are included in generated data development stores will be valuable for testing different discount scenarios. By testing your app with a range of different discounts with various properties, you can ensure there are no checkout issues and that your app handles discounts as expected.
Test out functionality with the range of discounts available in the generated test data.
The discount codes we’ve created as part of the generated data have configurations that capture automatic, buy X get Y, basic coupon code, and free shipping discounts, as well as being connected to specific product variants too. Developers can leverage these pre-configured discounts to test your app’s ability to handle diverse promotional scenarios and ensure that the app correctly applies and manages these incentives.
An example of how these demo discounts could be used might be if you’re creating an app that enforces restrictions on discounts during a flash sale. In this scenario, your app may be creating and updating exclusions on an existing demo discount code. You could test the app’s functionality by checking that changes made via the app are populating across to the correct discount and that the discount is being applied as expected on the checkout.
Other use cases that you could use these test discounts with include:
Handling activating and expiring discount codes
Scheduling promotions
Managing customer notifications with discount information
Syncing discount data with third-party software
Generating advanced analytics related to discount sales data
Analyzing promotional performance
Management of loyalty program discounts
Creation of dynamic discounts that respond to custom conditions
Customers
To test app functionality that is related to customer accounts, the set of generated data on pre-populated development stores includes some customer accounts you can access from the store admin. These demo customer accounts have a range of different attributes, like existing order history, contact information, company, and notes, so you can use them for testing the different states and scenarios that are possible with customer accounts on Shopify.
The generated test data developer stores include three customer accounts with different attributes.
These pre-configured customer accounts can be used to test your app’s ability to handle customer management features and ensure that your app can handle various customer-related scenarios.
For example, your app may help merchants with their marketing strategies, so you would want to test your app’s ability to create targeted customer segments and apply specific marketing strategies to different customer groups. By using these demo customer accounts, you could ensure that your app is effectively creating and managing these segments, based on criteria that maps to available customer attributes.
Other use cases that demo customer accounts would be valuable for include:
Handling personalized product recommendations
Managing customer communication and conditional notifications
Automating customer support interactions
Tracking customer order data and creating reports
Integrating with ERPs and third-party management tools
Creating a referral program for customers
Themes
The new theme architecture that was introduced with Online Store 2.0, and specifically JSON templates, has allowed app developers to easily add dynamic elements to merchant’s stores via theme app extensions. However, not all Shopify merchants use themes that have been updated to use JSON templates, which means many app developers build out logic to support “vintage” themes that are not compatible with theme app extensions.
To help developers test their apps with both new and vintage themes, development stores created with generated data ship with a modified version of Dawn and Debut, which is not compatible with theme app extensions. These themes can be used to verify that your app supports both newer and vintage themes that could be installed on merchants’ stores. You can learn more about how apps can support different themes types in our developer documentation.
The test data theme has been optimized for testing purposes.
The “Test data” theme is the default theme for development stores using generated test data, and contains some modifications to enhance its value to developers. Support for selling plans has been implemented on the product page, which allows you to see how selling plans appear in the storefront. Additionally, we’ve pre-configured theme settings to provide an authentic-looking storefront without having to customize settings yourself.
Some use cases that testing your app with these demo themes allow include:
Analyzing how your app integrates with different design elements
Ensuring an app’s features don’t conflict with a theme’s design or functionality
Maintaining a consistent user experience across desktop and mobile device
Handling potential conflicts or issues that arise due to a theme’s code
Detecting and adapting to the store’s language and currency settings
Optimizing the impact of an app on storefront performance
Ensuring the app’s interface is usable with screen readers and other assistive technologies
Confirming the theme’s functionality and appearance remain unaffected after the app is uninstalled
Other primitives and configurations
This blog post is not an exhaustive list of all the commerce primitives and configurations that are available with generated test data. You can read our developer documentation to view the full set of data.
Some other possible use cases that developers could leverage generated test data for include:
Ensuring payment processes are working correctly by simulating transactions with the automatically-configured bogus gateway
Confirming that an app is able to access metafields correctly with demo metafield definitions
Verifying that B2B-related functionality is working as expected for merchants on Shopify Plus with demo companies
Assessing how your app is transferring data to a custom fulfillment platform with demo fulfillment services
Testing that your POS app is receiving retail store information by demo locations
Ensuring your app is able to manage and organize international markets information with our set of demo markets data
Faster testing, faster development
By using these development stores as your test environment, you can quickly see how your app or theme interacts with specific store data, or reacts to particular scenarios. Using generated data will reduce the time required to set up primitives yourself, and allow you to focus on building the best products for Shopify merchants.
What kinds of Shopify store settings and primitives would you like to see included in the generated data set? Let us know in the comments below!
Given how widely used credit cards are, it’s no surprise that most businesses accept credit card payments. But if you’re opening a business or have recently decided to move away from cash to start accepting credit cards, you may not be sure where to start. This article will give you the information you need to start accepting credit card payments as soon as possible.
Payment processing is integral to running a business. Using our expertise as a payment processor and point of sale (POS) provider, we’ve created a guide to accepting credit card payments. We’ll also talk about key tools and systems you need before you can begin processing credit card payments.
In this article, we’ll discuss:
Looking for the right payment processor?
We put together a guide on how the payment process works, what types of fee structures you’ll see and what to look for in a provider. Equipped with the right knowledge, you’ll be ready to find the right payment processor for your business.
Why your business should accept credit card payments
As an entrepreneur, you’re well aware of the fact that you’ll always be competing with other businesses for the attention of consumers. That’s why it’s crucial to make yourself stand out among your peers and competitors, and accepting a wide range of payment methods—including credit cards—is one way to do that.
Shoppers are more likely to leave your website if you don’t accept commonly used payment methods, including credit cards. Plus, using a third-party service like PayPal to take online payments is less efficient and could ultimately make your store less appealing for potential shoppers.
In store, if you only take cash and debit, for example, the risk of customers leaving your store without making a purchase will increase. Sure, they could pay with debit, but many people have at least one credit card with a loyalty program. These programs incentivize customers to pay with credit cards by offeringrewards and other benefits, unlike most debit cards.
It’s simple: giving your customers several payment options means that more people can shop at your store. Plus, a larger customer base could lead to an increase in sales.
Additionally, when you accept credit card payments, shoppers are more likely to make impulse purchases because they don’t physically see the money leaving their account, as they would with cash.
2. You’ll save time on bookkeeping and see fewer errors
Accepting credit cards through integrated payment processing can make a world of difference when it comes to carrying out daily bookkeeping tasks, including invoices. Integrated payment processing eliminates the need for manual entry and automates tasks related to transaction records and sales. This will reduce errors and save you time.
When you process credit card transactions, the amount of time you spend on manual billing and invoice collection is significantly reduced. You and your employees can instead focus on other tasks and areas of the business.
Take Lightspeed customer Melissa Joy Manning, a New York-based jewelry store. When her business switched to Lightspeed Payments, they saved time on bookkeeping with payment reporting features. Lightspeed Payments gave them the crucial data they needed to simplify bookkeeping.
“Whether it’s sales tax liabilities, performance by door, performance by person, within different quarters, months, days, all of that is easy to find,” says owner Melissa Joy Manning.
3. Quicker processing time could lead to regular cash flow
Since credit cards are a global payment method, banks and payment processors have strong systems in place to process these payments. That means you won’t have to wait long for payments to be processed and sent to your business account, even when accepting payments from international customers.
Consistent cash flow is top of mind for merchants, and accepting credit card payments is one way to secure it. You’ll receive payments faster with credit cards, simplifying the invoicing and accounting process.
What you need to process credit card payments
There are a few things you need before you can start accepting credit card payments. If you run an established business, you may already have these systems in place.
1. POS system
Apoint of sale (POS) system is the hardware and software you use to run your business. A POS system allows you to ring up customers, accept payments, access reports, manage inventory, and view analytics. If you don’t yet have a POS system, do your research to find thekey features you should look for in a POS to most effectively manage your business.
2. Payment processor
A payment processor allows you to process financial transactions made with credit cards, debit cards, digital wallets and more, both online and in-store. There are two types of payment processors: integrated and non-integrated.
Integrated payment processors
An integrated payment processor is the more convenient and widely used option, but it all depends on the needs of your business. Integrated payment processors automate payments and communicate with your POS system to process transactions. They remove the need for manual entry, which reduces human error and allows you to process orders with more efficiency.
Transactions are recorded automatically, saving both time and money. Plus, an integrated payment processor provides helpful data related to reporting, inventory, analytics, and other programs that your POS system includes.
Lightspeed Payments goes one step further as an embedded payments solution, meaning payments are built into the software platform.
An embedded solution like Lightspeed Payments streamlines transactions, speeding up the checkout process for both you and your customers. You can close out your day much faster than you would with an unintegrated payment processor.
Non-integrated payment processors
To put it simply, a non-integrated payment processor is the opposite of an integrated one: it does not communicate with your POS system. Transaction data isn’t automatically recorded, and the checkout process becomes lengthier when your POS and payment processor aren’t communicating. You’ll have to manually add all this information, and valuable data isn’t as easily accessible. It’s generally not worth it to have an unintegrated payment processor.
3. Payment terminal
Payment terminals are the hardware that allow you to process payments made with credit, debit or digital wallets.
Depending on the needs of your business, there are different types of payment hardware that you can use. That includes mobile terminals—likeLightspeed’s Mobile Tap—that allow customers to make contactless payments through tap, Apple Pay, Google Pay, and more. Another option is Bluetooth-based terminals, which allow customers to make payments from anywhere in your store.
It’s important for your hardware to be compatible with your payment processor, otherwise you may be at risk of security issues. Consider purchasing your hardware directly from your payment provider.
4. Merchant account
A merchant account is the bank account specifically established for your business to accept payments and manage funds.
Business owners who use non-integrated payment processors will likely have to open and maintain their own merchant account, which can be difficult and time-consuming. But with Lightspeed Payments, you will become a merchant of record. That means we manage and maintain your merchant account for you, ensuring that funds reach your business bank account efficiently and safely.
How these components work to help you process credit card payments
An embedded financial services provider is your best bet to cover all your bases to process credit card payments. Embedded financial services include a POS and payments solution all in one, meaning all your needs will be covered under one provider. This will streamline your workflows and make it easier for you to process transactions.
An embedded provider comes with built-in payments. That means your POS system and payment processor work together seamlessly to process payments. That removes the need for manual entry, saving time and making checkout simple for customers and employees. Plus, your embedded provider will issue payment terminals that are compatible with their system, checking another item off your list.
A good payment provider will also take care of your merchant account so you don’t have to worry about setting one up yourself. Taken together, an embedded financial services provider can take these components and turn them into one seamless solution for you to process payments with, online and in-store.
How to accept credit card payments
There are a couple of steps to take before you can start processing credit card payments.
1. Select a POS and payment provider
Find the best POS provider and payment processor for your business. Ideally, your POS provider should offer an integrated payments solution. This will simplify the setup process and allow you to start processing payments much faster, both online and in store. Do research and compare the processing rates, pros and cons of each provider you come across to determine what works.
When you have an embedded payment solution, there’s no need to set up a merchant account.
An embedded solution can simplify your every day. UK-based business Philip Morris & Son, operating for over 150 years, transitioned to Lightspeed for their POS and payment processing after outgrowing their previous system. By switching, their day-to-day operations are more streamlined, and taking payments is much faster and less error-prone than it used to be.
“The till operators are only pressing one button, feeding transactions straight through to the card machine. So that makes it quick. It has reduced errors completely,” says Bruce Jones.
Note: For merchants who aren’t using a payment solution that’s integrated with their POS system, get your merchant account up and running through a bank.
2. Set up your software and hardware
Payment providers will typically ship you hardware that’s compatible with the software you purchased.
The recommended payment hardware could range from terminals to mobile card readers. Don’t get roped into purchasing hardware that isn’t compatible with your payment processor–you’ll be at risk of security and technical issues.
Next, your provider should walk you through the setup process to ensure that your hardware and software are working as intended.
When you’re all set up, you can move on to accepting payments both online and in your retail store. In both instances, the general process is the same:
At point of sale, the customer either taps, swipes, or inserts their credit card (card-present transactions) or enters their credit card information (card-not-present transactions).
The payment processor verifies via the card’s issuing bank that there are available funds to process the transaction.
If the sale is authorized, the customer’s account is debited and the funds are sent to the merchant account.
How to accept payments in-store (card-present transactions)
Ring up customers using your POS system and payments hardware. At checkout, order details will appear at point of sale. Then the customer will be prompted to pay via a credit card terminal or card reader.
The customer will either tap, swipe, or insert their card and enter their PIN number to complete the transaction.
A receipt will be generated and printed for the customer. Once the sale is authorized and goes through, the money is sent from the customer’s account through your payment provider to your merchant account.
If you use an integrated payment processor, transaction details will be recorded in your POS.
How to accept payments online (card-not-present transactions)
Accepting credit card payments online starts with a payment gateway. That’s the software that allows the credit card information to be sent from your site to the payment processor.
Another benefit to using an integrated payment processor: they’ll do the work for you and work directly with credit card payment gateways to ensure that funds land safely in your account. That means you don’t have to go out of your way to ensure your online store is compatible with your payment gateway and processor—your payment provider will handle that.
Once all your payment software is up and running, you can accept credit card payments easily. As with in-store transactions, the customer reaches the point of sale online once they’ve finalized their order.
The customer will be prompted to enter their credit card details. After the sale is authorized, the money is sent from the customer’s account through your payment provider to your merchant account.
Did you know? With an integrated payment processor like Lightspeed Payments, it’s easy to accept credit card payments. The checkout process is efficient and convenient for the customer. Lightspeed Payments eliminates the need for third-party accounts that take customers off your site and make it difficult for you to track orders and transaction details.
How to accept credit card payments on a mobile device
If you’re hosting a pop-up booth, for example, or displaying your items at a stand somewhere, mobile payments are a fast and convenient way to take payments. Mobile credit card readers are the most popular method for accepting credit card payments this way.
A mobile credit card reader plugs into your phone using an auxiliary cord so customers can tap to pay. You connect to your payment processor online or through the app. Depending on the type, shoppers can swipe, tap or use their digital wallet to pay. Typically, these terminals connect through a Bluetooth connection. These card readers can connect to both iOS and Android systems.
How to accept credit card payments without a card reader
If you want to accept payments as an individual or don’t want to use a POS system to process credit card payments, it’s possible to accept credit cards without a card reader.
For individuals
You can accept credit card payments as an individual through payment providers like PayPal or Venmo. You can sign up for these online, create an account, and receive credit card payments. This is limited to online or mobile payments.
These service providers accept most major credit cards, including Visa, Mastercard and American Express.
For businesses
If you’re just starting out your business but don’t have the infrastructure in place to commit to payment hardware (including card terminals), you can use PayPal or Venmo to accept credit card payments.
Some providers also offer apps that you can use to accept credit cards on your phone, either through manual input of the customer’s card information or through scanning a QR code.
You can also go the ecommerce route: set up a website, find a POS provider and integrated payment processor that is compatible with your site, and start accepting credit card payments that way. If you don’t want to use an integrated payment processor, keep in mind that payment providers like PayPal or Venmo will take customers off your site and to a third-party application to process payments.
How to accept credit card payments over the phone
The difficulty with taking payments over the phone is security. All businesses must follow PCI DSS requirements and ensure they’re up to standard when taking payments in store, online, over the phone and any other way. As long as your payment provider allows for payments to be taken over the phone and meets all PCI DSS standards in the process, it’s quite simple.
With Lightspeed Payments, for example, you can process payments without a terminal by initiating a sale in the Lightspeed Retail POS and following the steps to create a transaction. When you’re on the phone with the customer, you can follow the steps and enter their credit card information when prompted. From there, you can complete the sale.
The importance of researching pricing, security and support
When selecting a payment processor, take the time to do thorough research. Here are just a fewthings to look out for on your search for a payment processor:
1. Look into pricing structures
Pricing models vary among payment processors, and some are not as transparent as others. Make sure you read the fine print and understand each provider’s pricing structure, and how it will factor into your monthly expenses. If this information is vague or isn’t easily accessible, the payment provider may not be right for you.
Pricing models generally fall into one of the following categories: flat rate, interchange plus, and tiered pricing. You can read more about pricing models inthis article.
Don’t hesitate to contact a payment service provider to learn more about their pricing models, and to ask for quotes so you can compare providers.
2. Check for hidden fees
Payment providers should list all processing fees up-front, but that’s not always the case. Sometimes pricing terms aren’t that clear, and you’ll sign on with a provider who charges you fees you weren’t aware of before you started. This can be upsetting and confusing. It’s best to thoroughly educate yourself on a provider’s exact pricing model and fee structure before you choose a service provider.
There are many different fees, but it depends on the payment provider and the nature of your business. Here are some fees to be aware of:
PCI non-compliance fee: You’ll only run into this penalty if the PCI Security Standards Council determines that you’re not up to standard.
Transaction fees: This is the (typically) flat fee your business pays for each transaction.
Chargeback fee (per occurrence): When a customer disputes a charge, the acquiring bank requires the merchant to pay a fee.
Monthly minimum fee: Some payment providers charge a monthly fee to process credit cards in addition to the transaction fee.
Terminal fee: With some processors, you’ll be asked to pay a monthly fee for use of payment terminals.
Basically, if the pricing rates are particularly low or look too good to be true, it doesn’t hurt to investigate further to get a full picture of what you’ll be paying for payment processing. You can reach out to potential payment providers to negotiate rates and gain a better understanding of associated fees.
Did you know? Lightspeed Payments offers transparent pricing—competitive rates without hidden fees. Per-transaction service fees are taken from your settlements, which means the funds sent to your account are all yours. We operate on a flat-rate structure that makes fees as simple and fair as possible—you pay one predictable processing and transaction fee every time, no matter the card type.
3. Ensure your payment provider is PCI compliant
To accept credit card payments, merchants must abide by a strict set of security measures. You have to follow PCI compliance standards to ensure your customers’ data is protected and to avoid paying fees related to violating these measures.
The PCI SSC (Payment Card Industry Security Standard Council) outlines security requirements that businesses must meet in order for them to accept credit cards as a payment method. These standards ensure that all businesses that accept and handle credit card information maintain security to protect merchants and consumers.
Make sure you’re up to date with these standards. Look for a payment provider that handles PCI compliance on your behalf so you can have peace of mind.
Did you know? Lightspeed Payments is a level 1 PCI compliance provider, offering built-in, premium security features.
4. Look for strong customer support
Payment processing is crucial to the health of a business, meaning providers should offer their merchants strong customer service. If a problem arises, such as an outage or technical issue, you’ll want all the help you can get from your payment provider to solve the issue as quickly as possible.
That’s why customer service is key. Check what kind of support a payment provider offers before you sign on and if it doesn’t seem like enough for you—due to limited hours, few points of outreach, or other factors—continue your search.
For example, Lightspeed customer Simply For Life, a natural food market with over 40 locations, relies on Lightspeed’s best-in-class customer support to further their business.
“Our franchises can attest to Lightspeed’s customer service being huge for us. Lightspeed wants to make sure that you succeed,” says systems coordinator Angela Logan.
Did you know? With Lightspeed Payments, you get 24/7 unlimited customer support.
Start accepting credit card payments today
We hope this article is a helpful resource for you in your pursuit of accepting credit card payments. Now that you know the ins and outs of credit card processing, you can confidently accept credit card payments with a POS provider and payment processor that meet the needs of your business.
If you need more help on finding the right payment processor or want to learn more about Lightspeed Payments, reach out to one of our experts.
Essential Addons for Elementor With 90+ Advanced Widgets
Since its launch in 2016, Elementor has grown from a page-building upstart to one of the most popular visual, drag-and-drop WordPress page builder plugins in existence.
Beyond its own stellar feature list, one of the things that makes Elementor so powerful is that they’ve opened it up so that other developers can easily extend the core Elementor functionality.
That’s what Essential Addons for Elementor does – it adds 90+ new widgets that you can use in your Elementor designs.
Needless to say, all those new widgets give you a ton of flexibility when you’re working with your Elementor designs.
In this Essential Addons for Elementor review, I’ll highlight the full list of widgets, go hands-on with some of the most interesting additions, and run some real performance tests to help you understand what effect (if any) Essential Addons for Elementor will have on your WordPress site.
Essential Addons for Elementor Review: What Does it Add?
According to WordPress.org, it’s active on 1Million+ sites, which is quite impressive for an extension plugin. Beyond that, it’s maintained a 4.8-star rating on over 3,000 reviews.
The concept is simple – across its free and premium versions, it gives you access to 90+ new Elementor widgets divided across seven categories.
The only difference is which widgets you get access to.
The free version gives you access to 29+ widgets, while the premium version unlocks the full collection of 90+ widgets (that number includes the free widgets – so it’s about half/half between free and paid).
There are two ways to get access to the premium version:
1-site license – $39.98. Comes with one year of support and updates.
Unlimited site license – $79.98. Comes with one year of support and updates.
Both plans also offer a 25% renewal discount.
Unless you know you’ll only ever use it on a single site; you obviously get a lot more value from the unlimited plan.
Hands-On With Essential Addons for Elementor
You’ll get a new Essential Addons area in your WordPress dashboard when you install and activate the plugin.
You won’t do much here, but what this area does let you do is enable or disable every single widget.
By default, all of the widgets are enabled, but you can turn some off on a modular basis. If you’re worried about bloat or want to keep your Elementor interface a little simpler, this is a nice feature to have:
You can also clear the cache for Essential Addons’ styles and scripts, which is stored in your uploads folder.
Other than that, you’ll do everything else from the Elementor interface.
I can’t show you every single new element because there are so many, but I will highlight a few of my favorites…
Tons of Ways to Display Posts (or Other Post Types)
One of my favorite additions is all the different ways you get to display posts. You have a ton of options, with everything from a grid, to a block, to a carousel, and even to a content timeline.
For each widget, you’ll get a detailed query builder that lets you target specific:
Post types (so you can use these with any custom post types that you’re using)
Taxonomies
Authors
Etc.
One of the most unique options here is the Content Timeline widget, which lets you display your posts on a timeline. You can also see all the query options in the sidebar:
This widget also lets you add your own static content, too.
Particles
The Particles effect isn’t a widget. Instead, it’s a new option that you get when editing a section.
It’s hard to show the effect in a screenshot – but go here and play around with it. As people hover their mouse over the particle section – the content will “move” around it.
Protected Content
The Protected Content widget lets you restrict specific content by user role or by requiring people to enter a password:
Advanced Accordion and Tabs
The Advanced Accordion and Advanced Tabs widgets let you create some really neat accordion effects (or tab effects):
Filterable Gallery
The Filterable Gallery widget lets you create a custom gallery with Ajax category filters:
Explore all the Widgets for Yourself
With 90+ new widgets, there’s no way I can show you every single one, and it would probably get a little boring.
Suffice it to say, they work just like regular Elementor widgets and generally include plenty of options to let you customize them to your needs.
Again, if you want to see everything, head to this page, where you’ll get interactive demos for every single widget.
With 90+ new Elementor widgets, you might wonder whether Essential Addons for Elementor will slow down your WordPress site.
So…let’s test it…
First, it’s important to remember that everything is modular. So, you don’t need to enable all 90+ new widgets if you aren’t planning to use some of them.
I’m going to push things to the limit, though, and leave all of them enabled.
To find out what kind of effect Essential Addons for Elementor is having, I’m going to run three tests:
A page with core Elementor widgets and Essential Addons for Elementor deactivated. Think of this as the baseline control page.
It is that same page but with Essential Addons for Elementor active (and all the widgets enabled). Even though I won’t be using any of the new widgets in this page, I want to see if Essential Addons for Elementor is automatically loading any resources on every Elementor page.
A similar page but swapping the native Elementor widgets for Essential Addons for Elementor widgets. For example, swapping Elementor’s native Countdown widget with Essential Addons for Elementor’s Countdown widget. For this reason, I’ll try to use widgets on my test page that overlap.
Don’t pay too much attention to the page load times themselves because I’m using cheap throwaway hosting – I think the more interesting thing here is the requests and page size.
1st Test: Just Elementor and Elementor Pro – The Control
Page size: 1.01 MB
Requests: 31
2nd Test: Essential Addons Activated, but No Widgets Used
Page size: 1.01 MB
Requests: 31
3rd Test: Replace Native Elementor Countdown and Price List with Essential Addons
Page size: 1.03 MB
Requests: 33
Okay, so what did we learn?
First, Test 2 showed that Essential Addons does not automatically add its scripts and styles to every Elementor design. It doesn’t seem to add anything if you don’t use any Essential Addons widgets, which is great.
Second, Test 3 shows that there doesn’t seem to be a big difference between using regular Elementor widgets or Essential Addons widgets. While I did not test every widget, the difference between the equivalent core Elementor widgets and Essential Addons’ widgets was very small.
So, based on playing around with things, I don’t think you need to worry about performance (any more than you would with the core Elementor plugin, that is. Page builders are never going to be 100% efficient when it comes to performance).
Can Essential Addons for Elementor Replace Elementor Pro?
The answer to this question depends on what you’re planning to use Elementor Pro for. It’s definitely not a 1:1 replacement for Elementor Pro, but if you only want Elementor Pro for its new widgets, then you might be able to get by with just Essential Addons for Elementor.
However, you’ll be missing out on a lot of helpful functionality, most notably Elementor Pro’s Theme Builder and Popup Builder.
For best results, you can pair Essential Addons with Elementor Pro – it’s definitely not an either/or situation.
Final Thoughts on Essential Addons for Elementor
If you use Elementor, Essential Addons is a great way to expand your library of available widgets without slowing your site down.
The modular approach lets you pick and choose which widgets to enable, and it won’t automatically add its code to every Elementor page, so it’s not going to affect your site’s performance negatively.
You can play around with the free version to get a taste of the widgets, and then the Pro version also gives you a demo of every single widget.
For those reasons, this one is pretty low risk – you’ll know exactly what you’re getting, and if you like how the widgets work, it’s going to help you create better Elementor websites.
How to Grow your Retail Business: 11 Proven Ways (2023)
Retail business growth doesn’t just mean expanding inventory or opening new locations. It involves embracing technology to help you scale and meet changing customer expectations.
While there’s no one-size-fits-all approach to retail business growth, there are tried and tested methods.
Whether you’re just starting out or have been in the game for a while, taking a fresh look at your growth tactics is always a smart move. Here we’ll delve into 11 proven ways to amplify your retail success.
The first step to growing your retail business is understanding your business’s current state to determine the next steps you can take to reach your goals.
You need to get a broad perspective of your business as well as have a more in-depth analysis.
Here are the main areas every retail business owner needs to focus on:
Financial analysis
Take the time to review your cash flow.
Total sales: Measure monthly, quarterly, and annual sales.
Sales by category/item: Identify high performing and underperforming items.
Sales by location (if multiple locations): Determine which outlets are most profitable.
Sales trends: Track sales growth or decline over time.
Operational analysis
Review these key metrics of your operations to unlock opportunities for improvements.
Inventory turnover: Work out the cost of goods sold and average inventory.
Inventory management: Check for stockouts, excess stock, dead stock, and inventory holding costs.
Supply chain efficiency: Assess lead times, supplier reliability, and procurement costs.
Employee performance: Evaluate sales per employee, customer reviews, and overall staff productivity.
Customer traffic: Use foot traffic counters or web traffic tools for online retailers.
Conversion rate: Out of the people who enter your store or website, how many make a purchase?
Customer analysis
Your customer metrics can offer key insights into where your business is falling short.
Customer satisfaction: Use surveys, feedback forms, or face-to-face interactions.
Customer retention: Track repeat customers and determine retention rates.
Customer acquisition: Understand where new shoppers come from and the cost to acquire them.
Customer segmentation: Identify different customer groups and tailor strategies to each segment.
Competitive analysis
New competitors enter the market all the time. Take a moment to analyze your competitors, and see how you compare.
Competitor benchmarking: Compare your metrics against key competitors.
SWOT analysis: Identify your strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats relative to other businesses.
Mystery shopping: Send individuals to assess competitor services and products firsthand.
Strategic review
Ensure you’re following your business strategy and keeping track of your goals by reviewing:
Business goals and objectives: Are you on track to meet them?
Key performance indicators: Monitor KPIs related to sales, customer satisfaction, and inventory management.
By digging into inventory turnover or studying sales trends, you uncover invaluable insights about your current retail business performance and where you can improve.
Analyzing your retail business is an ongoing process, so build it into your schedule. Make time to check in on your business’s metrics on a monthly, quarterly, and yearly basis.
2. Understanding your customers
Every successful retail business has a solid understanding of its customer base. Deeply understanding your customers goes beyond recognizing their buying habits; it means digging into their needs, preferences, and behaviors.
Retail analytics help you understand the challenges your customers face and how your business can solve them.
Start by tapping into data from the following sources:
Point-of-sale system: Your retail POS provides plenty of data on sales, customers, and products to understand consumers better.
Email analytics: Platforms like Shopify Email help you understand order rates, products purchased, and CTRs.
Foot traffic analysis: Foot traffic counters like Dor let you see how many people visit your store. You can then compare this to Shopify POS data. This data will help you better understand why and when customers come to your physical store.
Use the Shopify POS to collect and manage customer data.
Retail analytics can tell you more about why customers choose to shop with you and what else they may need or want from your business.
Once you’ve gathered customer data, sort and segment them by grouping your customers based on similar characteristics or purchasing patterns. This allows you to tailor your retail marketing efforts and product offerings more accurately.
Start by categorizing your customers by:
Age
Gender
Location
Interests
Life stage (single, married, retired, etc.)
Shopping frequency
Average order size
Customer segmentation helps you create more personalized experiences and a better overall customer experience.
Segmenting customers allows you to:
Upsell and cross-sell products of interest
Create targeted marketing campaigns that resonate with customers
Choose the best type of communication for specific customers
Create personalized loyalty programs to boost customer retention
Find ways to improve products or customer service
Tapping into customer data helps you better understand what potential customers and existing shoppers want and need from your business. From there, you can use that information to make strategic changes to improve the customer experience and better target your most valuable customers.
3. Effective inventory management
A retail store’s success is often tied to how well it manages its inventory. Effective inventory management is essential to retail growth, serving as the bridge between supply and demand.
When managed properly, inventory ensures product availability and reduces overhead costs associated with excess stock or emergency replenishments caused by a stockout. Well-managed inventory can help you save on storage costs and improve fulfillment, while also contributing to your business’s cash flow.
To improve your inventory management, adopt best practices such as:
Adopting these best practices can make the difference between a missed opportunity and a sale. In the retail world, where profit margins and customer satisfaction hang in the balance, a solid inventory management system is not just a best practice—it’s a necessity. Improving your inventory management could be the key to growing your business.
4. Improving in-store experience
The physical space of a store remains a cornerstone of retail success. A thoughtfully designed store layout does more than just showcase products; it shapes the customer’s journey, dictating the ease of browsing, the flow of foot traffic, and the likelihood of impulse purchases.
For example, research shows shoppers usually look left first and then right when they enter a store. Customers also like to move right and walk counterclockwise around the store space.
It helps to start observing how customers currently interact with your store layout. You can monitor the customer flow, keeping an eye on how many customers come into the store, where they stop, how they behave and how much they buy.
This can help you identify areas of the store that get the most attention and sales, and those that are avoided.
As you think about adjusting your retail store layout, consider how you can optimize these in-store elements to increase customer flow and sales:
Great store design appeals to you customers in a variety of ways. It:
Has an engaging window display
Avoids key products at the entrance where shoppers will miss them
Incorporates breaks or stopping points
Displays the right amount of product and leaves enough space to browse
Uses cross merchandising
Regularly updated displays
If you want to drive engagement with your brand, try creating memorable shopping experiences with experiential retail.
Some 35% of customers shop in-store because they enjoy the experience, so tap into the desire for better physical shopping with these engagement ideas:
Host masterclasses
Create seasonal pop-up shops
Hold community events
Host interactive workshops
Showcase relevant exhibitions
Alongside this, retail management and excellent customer service play a pivotal role in growing your retail business.
Knowledgeable staff who can assist, advise, and answer questions make shopping more enjoyable. Friendly team members have the power to turn potential returns into exchanges and hesitant customers into confident buyers. Invest in training your staff so they are confident and knowledgeable about your brand, products, and policies.
By optimizing store layout and investing in stellar product and service offerings, retailers can elevate the in-store experience, ensuring customers leave not just with products but with positive memories.
5. Expanding retail locations
It’s not just about having multiple retail store locations but ensuring each one resonates with its target market. Before diving into expansion, you need to assess whether there’s a genuine need for more new stores.
This involves understanding:
Market saturation: Has your product or service reached a maximum level of consumption? Or is there still room for growth in the existing market?
Regional demand: Is there enough demand in the geographical location for your product or service?
The logistical implications of branching out: Can your business reasonably scale without hindering other areas of growth?
Successful retail expansion relies on thorough research, understanding local demographics, and adapting to market changes. You need to consider the different types of retail location and what will suit your business. Types of locations include:
Brick-and-mortar retail
Mall space
Shopping centers
Business parks
Downtown
Home-based
A strategy to consider when opening a new store is choosing a location that can also be used for fulfillment. Consider a location with more storage so it can additionally be used for in-store pickup of online orders, local delivery, and in-person returns. Likewise, you can consider a smaller location to use primarily as a showroom where customers can experience your products, then place orders online.
Another approach to reducing risk is to test demand with pop-up shops. These temporary shops can gauge customer interest and sales potential without the commitment of a full-fledged store.
For example, direct-to-consumer beauty brand Glossier tests out new retail stores with seasonal pop-up shops. In 2020, its London Covent Garden pop-up shop was so successful (100,000 customers came through the doors over two and half months), the brand decided to open a permanent store there.
Glossier’s London pop-up shop was such a success it turned it into a permanent store. Glossier
Previously, Glossier opened seasonal pop-ups in cities like New York and Los Angeles before opening permanent year-round stores.
6. Leveraging ecommerce for retail business
What began as a convenient in-store shopping alternative has morphed into a primary shopping channel for many consumers worldwide.
For brick-and-mortar retailers, it presents a golden opportunity. In 2022, US online sales hit more than $1 trillion, while the only other country to reach the trillion mark that year was China. Retailers who don’t tap into this demand for online shopping risk losing money to their competitors.
Successfully integrating ecommerce into a traditional retail business requires a blend of strategy and adaptability.
This means:
Optimizing mobile platforms for online shopping
Ensuring consistent branding across all touchpoints
Creating a seamless user experience that mirrors in-store shopping
Using tools like integrated inventory systems can help manage stock across both online and physical storefronts. By embracing ecommerce, retailers aren’t merely staying in the game—they’re reaching customers in new markets and tapping into the vast potential of the digital marketplace.
7. Adding a new product or product line
Adding new products or product lines gives customers more choices. Think about how you can better meet different customer needs and preferences with multiple options. Sometimes it isn’t about developing a brand new product from scratch but reworking a current offering to meet shoppers’ needs and provide more value.
For example, bath brand Happy Hippo Bath Co. lets shoppers choose between purchasing one unit of its product or a five-pack for less. Customers can also choose to subscribe for even greater savings.
Happy Hippo Bath Co. makes it simple for shoppers to choose the right pack size.
This might mean adding a new variation to your existing product line. Instead of selling just red shirts, you might start offering blue shirts in the same style, or expand your sizing options.
For example, sock brand Bombas sells the same style of ankle socks in multiple colors.
Bombas is known for offering customers plenty of size and color choice.
You can also create a new product that fits within a popular existing line. For example, wellness brand Olly creates lines of related supplements that complement one another and support customers’ health.
Shoppers can easily purchase similar wellness supplements on Olly.
Some other product ideas include:
Create a new product line to complement an existing one: Start offering quirky pens to go with the quirky notebook you sell.
Create a new product in the same vertical: Start selling casual shoes in addition to formal shoes.
Expand to a new vertical: Start renting out your store space to related groups or businesses as an event venue in the evenings when the shop is closed.
8. Marketing strategies for retail business growth
Social media marketing is an indispensable asset for retail businesses. Platforms like Instagram, Facebook, and Pinterest showcase products and craft a business brand’s story, build community, and drive instant purchases through shoppable posts.
For example, the homeware brand Jungalow promotes its products through shoppable Instagram posts:
Email marketing remains an effective strategy for retailers. Through email marketing, you can offer:
Personalized promotions
Loyalty rewards
New product announcements
Brand updates that foster deeper customer relationships
For example, insole brand Fulton shares a discount via email for first-time shoppers who sign up:
Really Good Emails
By using the combined power of social and email marketing, retailers can craft cohesive strategies across sales channels that drive traffic, boost sales, and elevate their brand in the competitive market.
9. Loyalty programs and customer retention
In the ever competitive world of retail, it’s not just about acquiring new customers but ensuring they keep coming back. Loyalty programs help encourage customers to become loyal fans.
Loyalty programs reward repeat business, fostering a cycle where customers feel valued and are incentivized to continue purchasing.
For example, menswear brand Mizzen+Main has a loyalty program that gives shoppers one point, or company coin as they’re known, for every $1 they spend with the brand.
To get customers excited about the potential rewards, the brand highlights what customers can get in exchange for company coins. It offers a variety of features to appeal to different customers, including birthday gifts, free shipping, and early access to sales and products.
Shopper can quickly see what they need to climb the corporate ladder.
Redeeming points or coins means customers must visit your store for another purchase, which increases the chances they’ll spend again. It also builds customer loyalty, as it incentivises them to choose your business over a competitor, as they’ll earn more reward points.
Loyalty programs can help you grow your business when used as a customer acquisition tool. Offer points for referrals, and encourage loyal customers to act as brand advocates by encouraging them to show off their perks.
An effective loyalty program is only one facet of customer retention.
Strategies like personalized offers, consistent engagement through feedback loops, and quality post-purchase support play equally crucial roles.
By intertwining the allure of loyalty rewards with genuine, customer-focused strategies, retailers can create a magnetic pull that not only attracts customers but keeps them engaged and invested in the brand’s journey.
10. Using data analytics in retail
Retail data analytics provide a clear snapshot of consumer behaviors, purchasing patterns, and market trends. But collecting data is just the beginning.
It’s key to use this data to make informed decisions. By dissecting analytics, retailers can pinpoint what resonates with their audience, tailor marketing campaigns for maximum impact, and forecast future trends.
Whether it’s adjusting pricing strategies, refining product assortments, or enhancing the customer journey, data-driven insights offer a roadmap for growth.
Here are a few places to start with using retail data analytics:
Online retail analysis
Website analytics: Monitor metrics like bounce rate, conversion rate, and user flow to optimize the online shopping experience.
Cart abandonment analysis: Identify reasons customers might be leaving without completing a purchase.
Customer review analysis: Use sentiment analysis tools to get insights from customer reviews and feedback.
Marketing and advertising
Campaign effectiveness: Measure the ROI of marketing campaigns by tracking metrics such as conversion rates, click-through rates, and customer acquisition costs.
Customer retention analysis: Understand which strategies keep customers coming back.
Social media analytics: Analyze engagement, reach, and sentiment on social platforms to refine your social media strategy.
Operational efficiency
Sales performance: Analyze daily, weekly, or monthly sales data to identify trends.
Employee performance: Track employee sales performance to identify training needs or staffing adjustments.
Predictive analytics
Churn prediction: Identify customers who might be at risk of not returning and find ways to re-engage them.
Sales predictions: Use past data to forecast future sales, helping with planning and stocking.
11. Leveraging automation in retail
When you decide to pursue a growth activity, you need to consider how to optimize new product development and production to reduce variable costs while increasing output.
Simple automation is anything that allows you to lower the cost of making decisions. Scaling allows you to increase capacity within a given process while either maintaining or reducing the variable costs of that process.
For example, you might scale your sales by hiring additional floor staff for your store.
As long as those new employees sell at the same rate at the same base salary, your relative costs will remain stable.
You might start ordering your materials in bulk at a wholesale cost. As long as your other production costs don’t increase, your overall cost per unit would be lower because of the discounted rate.
This prevents loss of profit margins, operating at a loss, or increasing waste alongside the increases in revenue and output that come with growth.
Grow your retail business sustainably
Growing a retail business sustainably is not an overnight job. You’ll need a long-term strategy of embracing tech and adapting to evolving consumer behaviors.
Start by thoroughly analyzing your business’s current state and customer expectations. Then, using the strategies in this article, you’ll be on the path to achieving long-term retail business growth.
Try Shopify POS for omnichannel selling
Bring your in-store and online sales together with Shopify POS. Gain insights about your business from one view so you can work smarter, move faster, and think bigger.
New York Fashion Week 2023 | Retailers bring the runway to real-life
A blue sweater is never just a blue sweater. Whether you’re a fashion worshiper or your weekly rotation is whatever is the least crumpled from that chair-pile in your bedroom (you know the one)—The Devil Wears Prada, and more specifically Miranda Priestly, taught us our sartorial selection is connected to a long line of calculated choices.
Starting with world renown designers reading the winds of change through to buyers forecasting trends that feel ‘right now’, New York Fashion Week is the first big domino to fall in a succession of actions resulting in what ends up in your closet.
And if you’re a business owner, fashion week is the perfect sneak peek of what consumer demands and must-haves will look like. This includes the latest inescapable it-color—that will be coveted now and into next year.
Download our free playbook and learn how to sell on different channels, boost loyalty and increase foot traffic with technology.
What is New York Fashion Week?
New York Fashion Week, or NYFW as it is commonly referred to in print, is a biannual event held in February and September of each year in New York City. Combining traditional and non-traditional runway shows, it takes place in and around Manhattan. The week-long series of shows is an opportunity for international fashion collections to be shown to the public and more importantly, buyers and press from around the world. It is one of the “Big Four” fashion weeks along with Paris, London and Milan.
When is New York Fashion Week?
As mentioned earlier, New York Fashion Week happens twice a year in February and September. This fall, NYFW 2023 runs from Thursday September 7th through Wednesday September 13th.
Top trends emerging in 2023
This year, the first of the New York Fashion Weeks landed on February 9-15th, 2023 and showcased a variety of trends that spoke the language—albeit dramatically so—of a “return to normal.”
Feeling somewhat secure that doors are staying open and going out is no longer a fever dream—designers created for our new reality. What’s to come for NYFW 2023 might be a mystery but if the early spring shows are any indication, you can anticipate seeing these five trends on more than a few runways.
Easy being green
You might have been bombarded by Barbie this summer, and more specifically Barbie pink but green is entering the scene. From juicy limes to electric day-glo greens, or what is “unofficially” being referred to as Gen Z green on many a runway, highlighter hues are having a moment. This color is considered a ‘sign of the times’ and is a nod to technology and AI’s influence. So if Barbiecore is not your thing, have no fear because more digitized brights are on the pixelated horizon.
Now you see me
Never nudes beware, the trend for translucent, sheer, and mesh fabrics continues. And now, apparently, it is no longer NSFW. But please don’t quote us, should your HR department contact you. The now-you-see-me, now-you-don’t effect can be used to intriguing effect as a fresh option to layer, as a substitute for texture or add boldness to an otherwise conventional outfit for evening. Illusionist tactics are more than welcome this fall/winter- outside of full on ghosting. That is never fashionable.
Have a knit fit
2020 ushered in the artisanal trend, sometimes falling under the umbrella of ‘twee’, with details of embroidery, crochet and quilting and it seems people have still not had their fill of wovens. Textiles that have a handcrafted touch continue to be popular but it’s no longer a patchy-statement being made. Creative approaches that employ modern technology with old-school techniques serve a broad range of aesthetic outcomes. The most modern incarnations juxtapose hard, futuristic elements with softer craft-core in a way that feels fresh. Think more knotty, less nice.
The 90s returning? As if!
You might be thinking, but aren’t we having a Y2K moment? The answer is, yes. So are the 90s edging in? Yes. If you’ve already lived it, this means digging out and dusting off those overalls, cargo pants and slip dresses. A much more wearable decade than the early aughts, you’ll see styles popularized by the muses of that time: Winona Ryder, Jennifer Aniston, Kate Moss and the Spice Girls. Like all trends, it’s best to approach it with a light touch or risk being asked, “Do you prefer fashion victim or ‘ensembly’ challenged?” (Editor’s Note: Rewatching Clueless is a must.)
Take it to the max
Now that styles have found a middle group between WFH sweats and the reactionary post-pandemic party attire, silhouettes are settling into a happy medium. And that medi turns out to be maxi. Streamlined skirts and body-grazing dresses that end below the knee or are taken to the floor are a trend that will carry into F/W23. So don’t be afraid to go to great lengths this season; long isn’t relegated to after hours.
What to expect at NYFW 2023
This fall, New York Fashion Week will take place at Spring Studios. The opening day will feature heavy-hitters Helmut Lang and Prabal Gurung. Saturday’s standout is Proenza Schouler, which is sadly invite only. However, some shows, including Tadashi Shoji, are open to the public. Iconic brand Ralph Lauren will be making its much anticipated return to NYFW. A NuOrder Lightspeed customer, Ralph Lauren hasn’t hit New York Fashion Week since 2019. The full schedule and line-up can be found here on the official NYFW website. Consider joining the email list to have first access to additional content from the autumn runways.
Many shows will be streamed live and can be viewed online, along with interviews that dig a bit deeper and summarize the key pieces and most wearable garments. For those that can’t attend, look out for publications like Vogue, InStyle and Harper’s Bazaar—as outlets that are reliable sources for zeroing in on versatility and longevity of trends. And no matter the scale of your operations, WGSN and Pantone are two resources to bookmark, as trend touch-points to check in with season to season. Compare a couple of runway round-ups to see what looks are forecasted to have legs as sure to move—from runway to real life.
How can retailers leverage New York Fashion Week?
As a retail owner, there are a variety of approaches to make the most of Fashion Week, even if you’re not a participant. This is a time of year when consumers are excited to be in the know for what’s to come in fashion. As an apparel business, you are perceived as a voice in this space and people will seek out your expertise. Don’t be shy to investigate those trends that speak to your demographic and communicate these through your marketing channels.
Distill what trends seem applicable to your consumers and be creative with incorporating them into your offering. This could mean using the color of the season in your store windows to pull people in from the street with a feeling of newness.
For those that represent a variety of brands, try creating a curated email with the ‘hot’ pieces that echo the direction of the season. You can even test the trend waters by creating a poll on Instagram or TikTok with two different options, for example silhouettes, to see what your customers are most excited to see in-store.
You’re not a fashion victim
As New York Fashion Week 2023 approaches, make an effort to stay in the loop with what the bigger names are putting out on the runway. This knowledge empowers you to approach your buying with an editor’s eye—and to pass along these learning to those that need it to assist your customers. From arming your salespeople with excitement, enthusiasm and insights that support customers, to styling your space in a way that feels modern—your knowledge about major trends in color, fabric, silhouette, shape, pattern and texture means there is no chance you’ll become a fashion victim.
Now go forth. In the words of Miranda Priestly, “That’s all.”
7 Best WooCommerce Point of Sale Plugins (Easy POS Setup)
Are you looking for a point-of-sale plugin for WooCommerce?
WooCommerce isn’t just useful for online stores. By adding a point of sale (POS) plugin to your website, you can also sell your products in a physical store and make more profits.
In this article, we will share the best WooCommerce POS plugins for easy point-of-sale setup.
Why Do You Need a Point of Sale System?
You can think of a point of sale (POS) system as a modern cash register that runs on software. It allows you to take payments from customers in person, like in a physical store, a mobile food truck, or when selling merchandise at an event.
Like a cash register, you and your staff can use a POS system to ring up products, display the total cost to the customer, allow them to pay, and make a receipt or invoice.
But most POS systems don’t stop there. You can choose a system that offers the features you need, such as automatically adjusting your stock levels as products are purchased, keeping sales statistics so that you know what is selling and what isn’t, or working offline.
You might be thinking about purchasing one or more dedicated POS terminals for your business. However, these are expensive, and most require paying for an ongoing subscription for the software you need to run the terminal.
A better choice is to use WooCommerce, the world’s most popular eCommerce platform. It is super-flexible, cost-effective, and easy to manage, even for beginners. It allows you to sell products online from your WordPress website and in-person using a POS plugin.
The best part is that by installing a WooCommerce POS plugin, you have an inexpensive point-of-sale system that can be used at physical stores on any computer or tablet that runs a modern web browser.
Now, let’s take a look at some of the best POS plugins for WooCommerce.
Your cashiers can easily search for products or scan barcodes when checking out customers. They can even add new products when needed.
If you run both an online and physical store, then the product listings, orders, and customers from both stores will be kept in sync. And if you have many stores or a franchise, then there is no limit to the number of stores and registers the plugin can handle.
YITH Point of Sale for WooCommerce comes with layouts for both desktop and mobile devices. Like most POS plugins, the mobile layout is suitable for iPads and Android tablets but not smartphones.
The plugin’s dashboard lets you keep track of useful analytics such as sales trends, the revenue collected by each terminal, the payment methods used, and even the cashier with the highest number of sales.
Pros
Unlimited stores and registers
Layouts for desktop and mobile devices
Useful sales statistics
Cons
Free version is limited to cash payments
Does not work offline
Why we recommend YITH POS: YITH makes powerful plugins that are affordable and easy to use. Their POS plugin includes the features most stores need and supports multiple stores.
Pricing: YITH Point of Sale for WooCommerce (POS) starts at $147.99/year for a single site. There is also a free version of the plugin, but it is limited to cash payments.
Oliver POS is one of the best WooCommerce POS plugins. It is designed to allow physical shops to easily sell products from their online inventory from a single system.
This makes it perfect for people who want to combine eCommerce shops with physical stores. You can easily sync inventory between your online store, retail store, and warehouse.
Oliver POS runs on any internet-enabled computer or device, and apps are available for iPads and Android tablets. You can also purchase hardware POS devices from the official website, including registers, tablet stands, barcode scanners, cash drawers, and printers.
You can quickly look up your customers to see whether they have made a purchase online or in-store. You can track their total spending, order history, store credit, and more.
You can also keep on top of in-store and online transactions. The plugin can generate reports for payments, sales, inventory, and more.
Pros
Easy to set up and use
Can run online and physical stores together
Free version
Cons
Limited customization options
Does not work offline
Why we recommend Oliver POS: With 4.8 stars, Oliver POS is the highest-rated WooCommerce POS plugin in the WordPress Plugin Directory. It’s easy to install and use.
Pricing: A limited free plan is available with enough features to get you started. Paid plans start from $24.99/month per register.
Square for WooCommerce is a free WooCommerce extension that lets you accept payments using Square, a popular payment gateway that makes credit card payments easy.
The Square extension allows your customers to pay using all major credit and debit card types. It also supports digital wallets like Apple Pay and Google Pay.
These payments can be taken from customers both online and in person. However, credit card payments are only available in the USA, Canada, Australia, Japan, the United Kingdom, the Republic of Ireland, France, and Spain.
Square charges a fixed transaction rate, and this varies for each country.
Setup is easy. Your products and payments will be automatically kept in sync between your Square account and your online store. That means that when you add products to your Square account, they will be automatically added to your WooCommerce store as well.
Square also helps protect your business. They provide a dedicated dispute management team as well as fraud protection that uses machine learning to detect fraud before it happens.
Pros
Easy setup
Low cost of entry
Multiple payment options
Free
Cons
Does not work offline
Accepts credit card payments in only certain countries
Why we recommend Square for WooCommerce: Square for WooCommerce lets you easily set up a point-of-sale system without any up-front fees. For that reason, it’s one of the best free WooCommerce POS plugins.
Pricing: The Square for WooCommerce extension is free from the WooCommerce store. However, like most payment platforms, Square charges a fee for each transaction you make.
wePOS is an affordable and attractive POS solution for WooCommerce that is fast and easy to set up and use. However, it lacks some features that other POS systems offer.
For example, wePOS doesn’t directly integrate with retail hardware such as cash drawers. However, it does support barcode readers and printers.
Also, wePOS accepts only two payment methods: cash and credit card. When paying by credit card, the order number and receipt number will need to be inserted into wePOS manually to keep track of the sale.
Currently, you can’t produce daily sales reports for cashiers, generate bar codes, offer gift cards, or customize the user interface.
And like many of the other POS plugins for WooCommerce, wePOS does not work without an internet connection.
Pros
Fast and easy to use
Affordable
Cons
Does not work offline
Only two payment methods: cash and credit card
Limited hardware support
Limited customization
The free version is limited to cash payments
Why we recommend wePOS: wePOS is a popular point of sale for WooCommerce. It will suit users who are after a fast and reliable system rather than lots of features.
Pricing: wePOS offers a free plan with limited features, such as support only for cash payments. Premium plans start at $99/year.
Hike POS is a full-featured, standalone retail POS cloud service that works on PCs, Macs, iPads, and Android tablets. It also offers plug-and-play compatibility with most retail hardware, including scanners and receipt printers.
It offers lay-by sales, returns and refunds, gift cards, quotes, and credit notes. You can also see detailed sales analytics and use the software in multiple stores.
Besides its standalone apps, the service also integrates well with WooCommerce. Your Hike and WooCommerce inventory, orders, and customer profiles are automatically kept in sync.
Even though it’s a cloud service, it does work offline, making it more reliable than many of the other plugins in this list. Once you are connected again to the internet, all data is synced back to the cloud.
Hike POS supports multiple payment options, letting your customers choose their preferred method. Options include PayPal, Square, Afterpay, Tyro, and many more.
Hike POS also offers integrations with other cloud services, like Xero, MYOB, QuickBooks, Mailchimp, and Amazon.
Pros
Works offline
Integrates with many third-party cloud services
Works with or without WooCommerce
Supports multiple stores
14-day trial
Cons
Why we recommend Hike POS: Hike POS is a versatile solution that offers a point-of-sale system using WooCommerce or one of their native apps. It’s a great option if you need to work away from an internet connection.
Pricing: A Hike POS subscription starts at $59/month when billed annually. There is a 14-day free trial and no extra charge for WooCommerce integration.
Vitepos lets you quickly set up a point of sale system for your local store or sell from your existing online store in your physical store.
You can choose one of three different settings for the POS mode: grocery/retail, restaurant (pay first), and restaurant (traditional). Simply pick the option that best matches your store.
Vitepos can handle your inventory and stock management. You can add new products from vendors, transfer stock between your stores, and update prices.
There are also helpful features to help your cashiers, including holding stock, adding discounts or fees, and taking split payments. Your team can add products by scanning their barcodes or by searching for them.
Finally, Vitepos can run without an internet connection. Like Hike POS, once you are online again, your data will be uploaded automatically.
Pros
Works offline
Can run an online store and a local store simultaneously
Free version
Cons
Lacks third-party integrations
Why we recommend Vitepos: Vitepos is an affordable and user-friendly POS plugin for WooCommerce. It gives users a lot of control over their system and works offline.
Pricing: The Pro version starts at $79/year or $299 lifetime for a single site. Vitepos Lite is a limited free version available from the WordPress Plugin Directory.
ConnectPOS is a point-of-sale system that works on multiple platforms, not just WooCommerce. These include Magento, Shopify, BigCommerce, and more.
It is an award-winning POS system and has been used successfully by reputable brands like ASUS, Trinny London, Eyewa, and Lapaire.
The company can build custom POS solutions that don’t rely on any eCommerce platform. Also, they can create custom solutions that integrate your POS with your other business systems like ERP, CRM, and accounting.
Data is automatically updated in real time between your WooCommerce database and the POS system. This includes orders, inventory, customers, and products.
Plus, the software is able to work offline. Data will be saved locally and updated once your internet connection is restored.
The ConnectPOS website maintains a list of compatible hardware, including receipt printers, label printers, barcode scanners, payment terminals, card swipers, and more.
Pros
Works offline
Can meet the needs of large companies and enterprises
Offers a free WooCommerce plugin
Cons
Why we reommend ConnectPOS: ConnectPOS is a highly rated, award-winning POS solution that suits large companies and enterprises.
Pricing: Payment is by subscription. However, pricing information has not been made available. You can request a quote for the Professional and Enterprise versions from the ConnectPOS website.
What Is the Best WooCommerce POS Plugin?
After reviewing all of the popular point-of-sale systems for WooCommerce, we believe that YITH Point of Sale for WooCommerce (POS) is the best POS plugin for most local stores.
However, this choice depends on your needs and budget, so we have a few additional recommendations.
Our top recommendation doesn’t work offline. If you need to take payments at times when there may not be an internet connection, such as on a food truck, then your best options are Hike POS, Vitepos, and ConnectPOS.
Some users prefer to get started with a free solution that’s easy to set up, and in that case, we recommend Square for WooCommerce. But be aware that with fees for each transaction, you may pay more in the long term.
If you have a franchise or chain of stores, then you will need YITH Point of Sale for WooCommerce (POS) or Hike POS. And if you have very specific needs and a budget for complex customizations, then it’s worth considering ConnectPOS.
FAQs About Point of Sale Systems
Our readers often ask us about point-of-sale systems and the best WordPress POS plugins. Here are our answers to some of the most common questions.
Does every WooCommerce store need a POS system?
No, if you are only making sales online, then you don’t need a POS system. They are only needed when your customers make payments in person.
What makes WooCommerce a good eCommerce platform?
WooCommerce is the most flexible eCommerce solution for an online store that sells physical goods. With the right plugin, it is also an excellent point-of-sale system for physical stores.
However, if you are selling digital goods like eBooks, software, or music, then Easy Digital Downloads is a better WordPress eCommerce plugin. And BigCommerce could be the best option if you don’t want to manage all the technical stuff of building an online store.
How to Start an Online Store on Shopify: A Step-by-Step Guide
Entertaining the thought of launching an online store on Shopify? In this guide by Ecommerce Pro, we’ll lead you along with a simple step-by-step guide on how to start, design, and launch an online business on Shopify in no time.
Many people have entertained the thought of starting a business online, and because of intuitive ecommerce solutions like Shopify, building an online business, marketing, and scaling has never been easier.
Starting an online store with powerful ecommerce platforms like Shopify is extremely accessible and straightforward for most—even if you have little technical know-how. So if you’re curious about setting up your online business, you’re in the right place.
Shopify is a leading ecommerce solution that provides brands and entrepreneurs with all the essentials needed for online business, no matter the size of your operations, making it one of the easiest and safest choices for your online venture.
Today, Shopify powers over4,124,890live websites in over 175 countries, having generated over $700 billion in sales in 17 years since its launch.
The primary reason that Shopify makes for a great choice is that the underlying purpose behind Shopify is to help anyone and any business size build a fully functioning online store, even if you have no prior experience in doing so.
Here is a quick list of pros for choosing Shopify to power your website or online store:
You don’t need experience in web design and development.
Many of the details will be taken care of for you, like hosting, site security, and updates.
You’ll get reliable, dedicated 24/7 support for your store.
It’s easy to create a beautiful and customizable store that meets the vision you have for your brand.
However, we at Ecommerce Pro understand that diving right into the world of ecommerce and Shopify can be a little overwhelming, especially if you’re new. But you can rest assured that this guide is designed to give you the roadmap that helps you simplify and visualize the process of building an online store from scratch on Shopify.
Now, without further preamble, let’s get started on our step-by-step guide on how to build an online store on Shopify.
Need help building your Shopify website? You can view our Shopify Experts profile here to see our work or reach out to us by filling out this form.
Step 1: Outline Your Big Ideas
So you’ve decided you want to start an online business and build your store or website on Shopify.
That’s great! Now it’s time for you to make your first big step, and that’s in creating an outline that establishes some of the big ideas behind your online business and brand.
There is little point at all in signing up your store without having the concept behind it established first, and this includes picking a niche and identifying your target market.
Before you can move on to building your store, you must first have these details down by answering these questions:
What product niche will I be working with?
What products should I sell?
What will I name my online store and website?
To whom will I be selling (target audience/market)?
These details will be the foundation of ideas that will help you build your store and brand. Now let’s move forward and finally sign up on Shopify.
Shopify presently offers a 3-day free trial to help business owners get started. After which you get to enjoy Shopify at only $1 per month for 3 months. Depending on your country, prices might vary.
You’ll only need to input your email address and some basic information about your online business and brand to get started. This phase is easy and won’t take long for you to finish. Just follow the prompts that ask you some simple questions about your business including what you would like to sell and what you would like to name your store.
Step 2 should take you no more than a couple of minutes to complete. When you have completed filling out all the necessary details, you will finally be able to enter your store for the first time.
At the end of this step, you will have created your Shopify Account and you will be redirected to the admin panel.
Step 3: Set up Your Store
Once you are done setting up your account, you will find yourself on the Shopify admin dashboard. Here you will find a nicely outlined Setup guide already provided by Shopify, outlining the step-by-step process for you to complete your store. Shopify will first encourage you to “Add your first product ”to your store,but you can always add products at any point in the process.
You will also notice that “Customize your online store” is next in the suggestion, and so forth. You can easily set up your store by following these steps according to Shopify’s guided recommendations. In the next section, we will talk about adding your first product:
Step 4: Add Your First Product
Before you even to select and customize your theme, it’s best to add your products first. This is because the theme you select impacts the way your products are displayed, so it’s best to already have products uploaded before you select a theme that is most ideal for your product lineup.
For you to add your first product, simply navigate and click on the Products section to the left of the dashboard and select Add your products.
Adding products can take time, especially if you have a long list of products to upload. From the add product page, you will have to include the following information and details about your product:
Product Title: The name of your product.
Description: All the relevant details regarding your product.
Media: This includes product images
Pricing: The price of your products
Inventory: You must indicate how many products are available
Shipping: Shipping weight
Variants: This is needed if your product comes in different colors and sizes
Search engine listing preview: SEO meta descriptions and titles.
Tags: Collection creation and organization
Once you input all the necessary information, click on save and your product will be added.
Step 5: Customize Your Theme
Having a beautifully designed website is important. The design of your shop says so much about your business in the eyes of your customer, and you want to come off as professional and worthy of a customer’s trust. When it comes to designing your store, Shopify created a design experience that is easy for anyone to do, with a great theme selection and user-friendly store editor. Here’s what you need to do:
Select a Theme
With Shopify, you don’t need to have any website design and development experience, all you need is to select one beautiful pre-made theme from Shopify’s well-curated Theme Store.
Shopify provides numerous free themes as well as Premium (paid) themes. You can select themes that are based on the ecommerce industry you wish to be part of. Read more about the best Shopify 2.0 themes in 2023.
Once you select a theme, you will be able to customize it in the Theme Editor to suit your vision for your store.
The Theme Editor is a tool that provides you with a preview on how your store will look like. From there, you will be able to make changes to the texts, add images, and adjust the color pallet before publishing your store and taking it live.
Once you have selected your cool new theme, go ahead and customize your store in the theme editor.
Feel free to play around with the images and text you want to add to your store. This is where you get to bring in some creativity into the design process.
Logo
Another design element that your shop cannot go without is your brand’s logo. Your logo is the face of your brand and online business, so do not underestimate its importance and relevance.
Step 6: Domain Name
Once you have your products and store design in place and you like what you see, you should consider buying a domain name for your shop. Without owning a domain name, your current store’s URL will look like this: (your-store-name).myshopify.com.
For the purpose of branding, you want a custom URL that is completely your own, without the “myshopify” bit in it.
From the dashboard go to Settings and click on Domain. From here you will be able to either:
Connect to an existing domain- This option is for those who already have a domain from other providers, and it allows you to connect Shopify to your existing provider.
Buy a new domain- If you don’t already have a domain for your store, it’s as simple as purchasing your domain directly from Shopify.
Step 7: Add Pages to your Store & Navigation
Next up, you will need to create pages for your website to help your customers with navigation. You can add pages to your site by choosing the Add page option, as seen in the image below:
Here are some pages your store should have:
About Page- Your about page tells the story of your store to your customers. It tells them what it is you do, and also conveys your store personality and values.
Contact Page- Your contact page is important because it acts as a channel for your customers to get in touch with you and your store.
FAQ- The FAQ page or Frequently Asked Questions page is a place for your customers to go and help themselves by finding answers to their most common questions.
Policy Pages- These pages are important to both you and your customer. These policies help protect your store and your customers. Policy pages should include website terms of use, cookie use notice, privacy, shipping, and return policies.
Once you have products and store pages, its time to setup your store’s navigation so that customers can easily navigate your shop and find what they need. To add navigation, go to Online Store and click on Navigation. Here you will find and edit two menus, which are the ‘Main menu’ and a ‘Footer menu.’ When you’ve finished creating the navigation for your store using the pages you just created, click on Save Menu.
Step 8:Add a Payment Method
Shopify makes getting paid through your online store easy and provide numerous payment options. Just navigate from Settings on the dashboard to Payments and choose your preferred method.
As a Shopify website, you want to provide your customers with the convenience of multiple payment methods. A simple and popular method is PayPal, but you can also make use of Shopify Payments, which allows you to accept payment from credit cards directly.
Step 9: Complete Additional Setup
Now that we have discussed completing your store’s basic setup, we go into more details that you need to complete before finally testing and launching your store. This includes setting up the following:
Set up shipping: Navigate to Settings and click on Shipping and delivery. From here you must configure your shipping zones, rates, and carriers. You can also determine how you’ll handle shipping fees, whether you will include free shipping, flat rates, or calculated rates based on where shoppers are located.
Configure taxes: From setting navigate to Taxes to set up your tax settings.
Download needed apps: Explore the highly extensive Shopify App Store and find and install apps that can enhance the appearance and function of your store.
Step 10: Test Your Online Store Before Launch
Before you launch your store, its important to run some tests to make sure that everything is running smoothly and living up to a high standard. Once you are done with the basic setup, we suggest making a thorough test of important processes including the purchasing process, from adding products to the cart to completing the checkout.
You must also ensure that all the payment methods and shipping options are functioning correctly. From here, you can make all the necessary adjustments to provide a frictionless shopping experience for all future customers.
Due to its relatively simple setup procedure that can be completed by adhering to a few key steps, Shopify is the platform of choice for many businesses in 2023 to create their online stores or websites. Access to the platform’s many user-friendly tools and features will be available once you have created a Shopify account. You can pick from a variety of themes (templates for your Shopify website), alter them to suit your requirements and brand aesthetics, and add your products and website content. Additionally, you can configure a number of other settings, as well as payment and shipping options.
While creating a Shopify website can be fairly simple, there are a number of reasons you may want to think about working with a Shopify Expert like Ecommerce Pro.
Shopify Experts have a successful track record and are trustworthy organizations and members of the Shopify community; they are not Shopify employees but rather offer merchants valuable services, and they have undergone a thorough screening process by Shopify, which has given them the go-ahead for providing top-notch services.
Shopify Experts assist brands and online business owners in getting the polished results they want for their online stores. The Ecommerce Pro team, a top-rated Shopify agency, is made up of knowledgeable Shopify website designers, developers, and content writers who will help you build the online store you imaged.
Ecommerce Pro can help you stay up-to-date with the latest ecommerce trends, designs, and best practices, ensuring that your website remains competitive and highly effective as an ecommerce site.
Let’s build your Shopify Store. Fill out the contact form to get in touch and receive a quote.
Get in Touch
At Ecommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful ecommerce businesses on Shopify. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
Workplace stress is a prevalent concern in today’s fast-paced professional world. It affects individuals on physical and mental levels, potentially leading to significant health issues.
This article delves into the nature of workplace stress and offers practical strategies for managing and reducing it.
Examining Workplace Stress
Before looking at how to control workplace stress, it might be helpful to first explain what we mean.
Identifying the Stressors
High workloads, looming deadlines, and conflicts with colleagues are common sources of workplace stress. These factors can trigger the body’s “fight or flight” response, leading to various adverse effects.
Diverse Manifestations of Stress
Stress can show up in diverse ways – physically, emotionally, and behaviorally. Individuals may experience headaches, irritability, or changes in eating habits, indicating the presence of stress.
The Mindset Connection
Though stress comes from outside sources that can’t always be easily controlled, the solution comes from within.
Nurturing Resilience
Resilience, the ability to bounce back from challenges, is vital. Developing a resilient mindset involves cultivating positive self-talk, adaptability, and optimism, helping individuals better navigate stressful situations.
The Practice of Mindfulness
Mindfulness, a practice rooted in awareness of the present moment, can effectively combat stress. Breathing exercises and meditation are simple yet powerful techniques to incorporate mindfulness into daily routines.
Mastering Time and Tasks
From here, it’s time to look at how to address the causes of stress in the workplace. And this can start simply by changing your approach.
Prioritizing with Precision
Prioritizing tasks based on urgency and importance prevents overwhelm. Creating a to-do list and setting time limits for each task aids efficient task management.
Embracing the Pomodoro Technique
The Pomodoro Technique, involving focused work intervals followed by short breaks, boosts productivity and concentration. Implementing this technique can alleviate stress caused by constant multitasking.
Building a Supportive Environment
Another important step to managing workplace stress is to realize you cannot do it alone.
Clear Communication Matters
Effective communication minimizes misunderstandings and reduces stress. Openly discussing expectations and concerns with colleagues and supervisors fosters a healthier work atmosphere.
Tapping into Social Networks
Connecting with peers for support can lighten the burden of stress. Seeking guidance and sharing experiences creates a network that helps employees navigate challenges collectively.
Healthy Habits for Stress Relief
Just like with stress in your personal life, workplace stress can be addressed with some important lifestyle changes.
Energize with Exercise
Physical activity releases endorphins, natural mood enhancers. Engaging in regular exercise – be it a brisk walk or brief stretches – can significantly alleviate stress and boost overall well-being.
The Nutritional Connection
Diet plays a role in stress management. When managing a team, think about encouraging better eating habits through healthy snacks in the office and other options.
Effective Breaks and Relaxation Techniques
When addressing workplace stress in your team, do your best to encourage practices that minimize rather than maximize tension.
Breaks: Not Just a Pause
Regular breaks restore mental clarity and prevent burnout. Short walks, deep breaths, or a moment of stretching can rejuvenate the mind during busy workdays.
Unwind with Relaxation
Progressive muscle relaxation entails tensing and releasing muscles, promoting relaxation. Visualization techniques, where individuals imagine peaceful scenes, also aid in stress reduction.
Strategies for Long-Term Stress Prevention
Finally, to create a more stress-free environment in the workplace moving forward, why not look at some big picture solutions.
Goal Setting for Direction
Setting SMART goals – specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound – provides direction and motivation. Achieving these goals fosters a sense of accomplishment that combats stress.
The Power of Learning
Continual learning and skill development enhance job satisfaction. Pursuing growth opportunities boosts confidence and resilience, contributing to effective stress management.
Final Thoughts
Workplace stress is a reality, but its effects can be mitigated through understanding and proactive measures. By nurturing resilience, embracing mindfulness, mastering time, fostering support, adopting healthy habits, and strategizing for the long term, individuals can effectively navigate stress’s challenges. Prioritizing well-being lays the foundation for a more balanced and productive professional life.
Since its inception in 2003 as a blogging platform, WordPress has evolved to power over 40% of websites globally. The growth is attributed to its open-source nature and community support, making it a perfect choice for most website owners.
With many businesses switching to WordPress, web accessibility is crucial to ensure inclusivity to as many users as possible. These include the visually impaired persons relying on assistive technology to browse the website.
WordPress accessibility comprises web design standards and best practices to make your site accessible and address specific concerns with change. Here is all you need to know about WordPress accessibility and the ten steps to make an accessible WordPress website.
WordPress accessibility is important for the following reasons:
Provides Inclusive Experiences for People With Disabilities
As you build your website by focusing on the layout, design, navigation, and content, it is easy to forget the diversity of people who will visit the website, including those with mental and physical impairments. This will result in limiting their use of your site. Therefore, as a WordPress owner or developer, you must ensure that your site is accessible, as this will ensure easy content interaction by your visitors regardless of their challenges.
Enhances User Experience
An inaccessible website makes it difficult for users to perform simple tasks or get the information they need. Therefore, beyond rankings, ensure your website is usable for your audience, as this will likely turn a lead into satisfaction and enhance brand loyalty.
Reduces Risk of Potential Lawsuits
Web accessibility is a requirement in most states, hence the need for WordPress ADA compliance. You will protect your brand from hefty lawsuits and a damaged reputation through compliance.
Improves SEO
ADA-compliant WordPress will impact SEO positively by making it easier for search engines to make your content more visible to users.
Opens Business Up to New Customers
By improving web accessibility, your website will be visible and attractive to more clients and referrals, and as a result, up your business to new customers.
What Is ADA Compliance?
The ADA compliance is a civil law that requires the inclusion of all persons, especially those specially abled, in all aspects of public life. WordPress ADA compliance requires following the WCAG guidelines at least level AA. ADA compliance applies to all electronic technology and information. Failure to oblige puts your business at risk of a hefty lawsuit, even if unintentionally skipped.
Web Content Accessibility Guidelines
According to WCAG guidelines, your website should be operable, perceivable, understandable, and robust to accommodate persons with physical, auditory, visual, and cognitive disabilities.
Perceivable websites feature captions for videos, alternative text for images, and semantic HTML structure, making your WordPress accessible to persons with disabilities. Your website should also feature sufficient color contrast and provide a meaningful reading order.
Operable content provides accessibility interaction. Content must provide keyboard access and adequate time for content interaction as well as avoid seizure-causing flashes.
Understandable content comprises of simple and clear language that is understandable by disabled persons.
Robust content ensures that assistive technology can interact with and present the content of your website through multiple platforms and devices.
Conducting WCAG compliance checks will help you know where your website stands and how to increase your platform’s accessibility.
Is WordPress Accessible by Default?
Every WordPress release features accessibility, but you must do more to ensure your site is accessible. Developers are creating new assistive tools and guidelines about WordPress accessibility in compliance with the W3C’s guidelines, but they do not completely align with them.
10 Steps to Make an Accessible WordPress Website
Accessibility is an increasingly popular topic in people’s minds, and the WordPress community is also vocal about the topic. Read on for the steps to make an accessible WordPress website.
Test Your WordPress Site for Accessibility
Auditing your WordPress site for accessibility during development and maintenance is vital. You can accomplish this through a testing tool like the Chrome extension Google Lighthouse.
Choose a Theme Designed for Accessibility
Through the WordPress.org theme repository, you can get a WordPress-accessible theme for your website. While these themes do not fully comply with the WCAG guidelines, they will give you a good start toward WordPress accessibility.
Write Accessible Code
While you may not be the one coding for your website, your choices can make your website inaccessible, which will negatively affect users. Using clean and accessible HTML code is crucial to WordPress accessibility. With proper header and title tags, bulleted lists, meta descriptions, and alt tags, your visually impaired visitors will easily locate everything on the page.
Create Accessible Content
Creating accessible content means the following:
A descriptive anchor text to enable readers to know where the link takes them
Shorter sentences and paragraphs
Relevant images
Captions for your audio and video
On-page transcripts for audio and video files
Offer Text Alternatives for Non-text Content
Offering text alternatives for images offers a description of the non-text content to users who cannot see it. This is especially useful for readers relying on screen readers as they can easily understand the image content.
Improve Navigational Buttons and Links
When linking to your blog or another site, use a descriptive link to help the reader know where the link will take them. For instance, “Contact me” or “Learn more about my business” is better than “Click here.” Your navigational buttons should also provide keyboard access.
Use Color with Care
Color and contrast affect the clarity and readability of your web content. The WCAG recommends careful use of colors in the following respects.
Using color with care on your WordPress means that your text and other visuals on your website should have enough contrast with the background to enhance readability. The recommended WCAG contrast ratio for normal text is 4:5:1.
Large text that is at least 18.67 px and bold or 24px or larger requires a 3:1 contrast ratio. Form field borders and interactive elements such as buttons also require a 3:1 contrast ratio against their surrounding backgrounds.
Make Your Platform Keyboard Navigable
Another recommendation for WordPress accessibility is making your platform keyboard navigable. Users who cannot use or have difficulties using a mouse should be able to navigate your website menus, homepage, and other elements through keyboard commands.
Offer Text Resizing Capability
Ensure that when the text of your website is resized up to 200% of its original size, the content remains legible and does not overlap or become truncated. It is not required to provide a control to allow users to increase the size of the text. However, if you decide to include a text resizing control, ensure that it is accessible to all users.
Use Clear Layouts
A clear layout will make it easy for visitors to read and process your content. You can achieve WordPress accessibility with a clear layout by using white space generously to rest the eyes of persons with dyslexia as well as breaking up the text with headings and other visual elements.
Make Accessibility a Strategy
Finally, develop a plan describing your steps to making your WordPress website accessible. This way, your employees and developers will contribute to every action towards an accessible site. You can monitor progress to match market demands and WordPress ADA compliance with a strategy in place.
FAQ
Is WordPress ADA-compliant?
While the WordPress.org expectations depict an accessible theme and plugins compliant with WCAG guidelines, it is up to the builder or owner to make their site fully accessible.
How does WordPress help with accessibility?
WordPress helps with accessibility by offering optimized themes to users, ensuring access on multiple devices. The site also features accessible themes, but you must supplement them to ensure full accessibility.
What is accessibility mode in WordPress?
The accessibility mode in WordPress refers to a setting in its older versions that enabled users to add widgets to their pages. This feature was available at the top right corner of the dashboard through the classic editor. However, with the newer updates, this feature has been replaced by the Gutenberg editor.
The Key to Sustainable Profits and Long-Term Loyalty – Blend Commerce
Ever wondered how some companies have customers lining up at the door while others can’t seem to get the turnstiles moving? At Blend, our focus on CLV allows us to grasp the significant importance of customer retention and loyalty. This emphasis enables us to prioritise customer satisfaction, allocate resources efficiently, and foster long-lasting relationships with our valued clients. Get ready to uncover the well-kept secrets that can turn your profits from drab to fab and win the hearts of your customers for life.
Hold tight as we take you on a rollercoaster ride through the captivating world of Customer Lifetime Value (CLV)!
Decoding Customer Lifetime Value: Understanding the Metric
CLV is a fundamental metric that holds significant importance for businesses aiming to optimise their marketing strategies and boost overall profitability. It predicts the net profit a company can expect from a single customer over the entire duration of its relationship with the business. In calculating CLV, several vital factors, such as customer acquisition costs, repeat purchase rates, average order value, and customer retention rates, come into play.
By analysing CLV, businesses gain valuable insights into the long-term revenue potential of individual customers. With this knowledge, companies can identify and prioritise their most valuable customers, tailor marketing efforts to maximise customer engagement and loyalty and allocate resources effectively to drive sustainable growth. Understanding Customer Lifetime Value empowers businesses to make informed, data-driven decisions, fostering strong and lasting customer relationships, thereby ensuring a prosperous future in a highly competitive marketplace.
Mastering the Numbers: How to Calculate Customer Lifetime Value
Calculating Customer Lifetime Value can be approached using various methods, each tailored to the specific data available and the complexity desired. Here are three common ways to master the numbers and calculate CLV:
Historical CLV: This method involves looking back at past customer behaviour. Take a group of customers who have been with your business for a significant period and calculate the total revenue generated from them during that time. Then, divide this revenue by the number of customers in the group to get the average historical CLV. While simple, this approach may not consider future customer behaviour changes.
Cohort Analysis: Cohort analysis groups customers who signed up within a specific time frame, usually a month or a quarter. By comparing cohorts’ spending patterns over time, you can predict future CLV more accurately. For example, you can track the revenue generated by customers who signed up in January over the first six months and project how much they might spend over their entire lifetime.
Predictive Modeling: This approach uses data analytics and machine learning to build a model that predicts CLV based on customer attributes and behaviours. Businesses can create a more sophisticated and accurate CLV estimate by factoring in customer demographics, purchase history, engagement metrics, and other relevant data. Predictive modelling allows for more dynamic insights, considering different scenarios and customer segments.
Harnessing the Power of CLV: Impact on Your Business
CLV has significant relevance in various aspects of business and can influence its success. Let’s discuss some key impacts of CLV on a company:
Strategic Decision-Making: CLV helps businesses make informed strategic decisions. Companies can allocate resources more effectively by knowing the potential value a customer can bring over time. For example, if a segment of customers has a high CLV, the business can invest more in marketing, customer service, and loyalty programs targeting that segment to maximise returns.
Customer Acquisition and Retention: Understanding CLV enables businesses to balance customer acquisition and retention efforts. Instead of focusing solely on acquiring new customers, companies can place equal emphasis on keeping existing customers satisfied and loyal, as they have the potential to generate more revenue over the long term.
Personalisation and Customer Experience: CLV insights can help create more personalised customer experiences. When businesses understand the value of individual customers, they can tailor marketing messages, offers, and products to meet specific needs and preferences, leading to higher customer satisfaction and loyalty.
Pricing Strategies: CLV allows businesses to adopt dynamic pricing strategies. Customers with higher CLV can be offered special discounts or incentives, encouraging repeat purchases and fostering loyalty. On the other hand, customers with lower CLV can be encouraged to upgrade or purchase additional products or services to increase their value.
Customer Segmentation: Businesses can use CLV to segment their customers based on value. This segmentation helps identify high-value, low-value, and potential churn-risk customers. Tailored marketing efforts can then be directed at each segment, maximising the overall return on investment.
Churn Prediction and Prevention: CLV can aid in predicting customer churn. By analysing historical data, businesses can identify patterns or signals that suggest a customer might leave. With this knowledge, proactive steps can be taken to prevent churn, such as targeted retention offers or improved customer support.
Long-Term Business Sustainability: Focusing on CLV ensures a more sustainable business model. By cultivating long-term customer relationships and maximising their lifetime value, companies can reduce reliance on short-term gains and maintain steady revenue streams.
CLV provides evidence of a well-thought-out business strategy considering long-term growth and profitability. Harnessing the power of CLV is relevant and crucial for businesses to thrive in today’s competitive landscape. By incorporating CLV insights into various aspects of decision-making, companies can build stronger customer relationships, increase profitability, and establish a more sustainable and successful business.
Methods for Optimising & Maximising Customer Lifetime Value
Here are five primary methods for optimising Customer Lifetime Value for businesses:
Focus on Customer Experience: Prioritise delivering exceptional customer experiences by providing outstanding service, addressing customer needs promptly, and continuously improving based on feedback.
Customer Retention Programs: To achieve customer-centric goals, implement loyalty programs, VIP tiers, and subscription models that incentivise repeat purchases and encourage long-term commitment. Partnering with companies like LoyaltyLion helps to enhance customer engagement and build enduring relationships based on mutual value.
Upselling and Cross-Selling: Identify opportunities to upsell or cross-sell relevant products or services to existing customers, increasing their CLV through additional purchases.
Proactive Customer Support: Prioritise proactive anticipation and resolution of customer issues to elevate customer satisfaction and cultivate long-term loyalty. By leveraging advanced customer support tools like Gorgias, we ensure swift and efficient handling of customer inquiries, providing a seamless and delightful experience that leaves a lasting positive impression on our valued clientele.
Understanding and optimising Customer Lifetime Value is crucial for businesses aiming for sustainable profits and long-term loyalty. By leveraging CLV insights, companies can make informed decisions, prioritise customer experiences, and implement effective strategies for growth. Embracing CLV empowers businesses to build lasting customer relationships, ensure profitability, and thrive in a competitive market.
Ready to unlock the power of Customer Lifetime Value and take your business to new heights? Don’t hesitate to contact us here at Blend and discover how we can help you.
A Comprehensive Guide To Using An Appointment Scheduling Tool
Whether you manage a legal firm, a medical practice, or a beauty parlor, appointments are a crucial part of managing a successful business. Maintaining a record of client schedules and making sure they are scheduled at the appropriate time can be a difficult chore. Appointment scheduling software is becoming increasingly popular among organizations because of this.
To assist you to understand how appointment scheduling tools may simplify your life and manage your business operations, we’ll address the top 10 questions regarding it in this article. We’ve got you covered on everything from comprehending the advantages of employing this tool to determining the features you require. Let’s look at how appointment scheduling software can make your life easier now.
1. What is an appointment scheduling tool?
A tool used to organize and automate the booking and scheduling of appointments, meetings, or reservations is an appointment scheduling tool. By letting clients quickly book appointments online, minimizing manual scheduling, and preventing conflicts and multiple reservations, it enables businesses and organizations to streamline their scheduling process, enhance customer experience, and increase productivity.
2. How does the appointment scheduling tool work?
Software for scheduling and managing appointments, events, or other interactions between a service provider and customers is known as appointment scheduling. Clients can often arrange appointments through the software, monitor available timeslots, and get reminders. The provider can control their schedules, examine appointment details, and interact with customers. To simplify the process, the tool frequently integrates with calendars, emails, and SMS. Additionally, it offers real-time updates and synchronization, which lowers the likelihood of double booking or other scheduling issues.
3. What features should an appointment scheduling software have?
Online appointment scheduling and booking should be possible for clients via the software’s website or connected widgets.
Calendar management: The program must include a simple and easy-to-use calendar for assigning tasks and controlling availability.
Automated reminders: To decrease no-shows, the program should automatically send customers email and SMS reminders.
Payment processing: Customers should be able to pay for their appointments online thanks to the software. Customer management: the software should store customer information and appointment history for easy reference.
Customizable appointment types: the software should allow businesses to define and offer different appointments and services.
Multi-location support: for businesses with multiple locations, the software should allow appointment scheduling across all locations.
Reporting and analytics: the software should provide reporting and analytics to help businesses understand appointment trends and make informed decisions.
Mobile compatibility: the software should be accessible on mobile devices, allowing businesses and customers to manage appointments.
Integration with other tools: the software should integrate with other devices such as email, calendars, and payment processors.
4. Can appointment scheduling software be used on any device?
It depends on the specific appointment scheduling software you are using. Some appointment scheduling software is cloud-based and can be accessed from any device with an internet connection, while others may require specific devices or operating systems. It’s best to check the system requirements of the appointment scheduling software you’re interested in to determine if it can be used on the device(s) you need.
5. How does the appointment scheduling tool integrate with my calendar?
Your calendar can be integrated with an appointment scheduling tool in a number of ways. Several prevalent techniques for integration include:
Synchronization of calendars: The program can automatically sync your appointments with your calendar, whether it be Google, Outlook, or Apple.
iCalendar Feed: You can add an iCalendar feed from some appointment scheduling applications to your calendar. You may use this to manage and view appointments right in your calendar.
Plugins or add-ons: Some appointment scheduling software offers plugins or add-ons that integrate with your calendar. These allow you to view and manage appointments directly in your calendar.
6. Can appointment scheduling software handle multiple locations and staff?
Yes, most appointment scheduling tool has the capability to handle multiple locations and staff. They usually have features such as team scheduling, resource management, and location tracking, which enable businesses with multiple locations and staff to schedule appointments, manage their resources, and track their locations efficiently.
7. Can appointment scheduling software be integrated with my website?
Yes, you can connect various appointment scheduling tools with your website. You can accomplish this integration by including a widget or a booking form on your website, which will enable your visitors to make appointments right there. In order to further tailor the interaction with your website, a specific calendar scheduler additionally provides API integrations. The appointment scheduling program you use will determine the precise integration process.
8. Does appointment scheduling software have reporting and analytics capabilities?
Yes, most appointment scheduling tool has reporting and analytics capabilities. These features allow you to track and analyze key metrics such as appointment schedules, staff performance, and customer engagement, among others. The specific reporting and analytics capabilities offered by appointment scheduling tool vary, but most offer basic reports such as appointment schedules, staff utilization, and appointment history. Some more advanced software also offers real-time dashboards, custom reports, and data exports, which can provide more in-depth insights into your appointment scheduling data.
9. Can appointment scheduling software handle appointment reminders and notifications?
Yes, most appointment scheduling tools can manage reminders and notifications for appointments via email, SMS, and in-app notifications, among other channels. To make sure that clients and patients remember their forthcoming appointments and arrive on time, these reminders and notifications can be automatically generated and sent to them.
10. Can appointment scheduling software handle appointment scheduling for multiple services and service providers?
The majority of appointment scheduling programs can manage to make appointments for various services and service providers. The software typically enables the setting up of various services, their assignment to particular service providers, and online appointment scheduling for these services by clients. Numerous locations can be managed, service provider schedules can be managed, and appointment availability can be specified in certain appointment scheduling tools.
Summary
Appointment scheduling can be a time-consuming and confusing process. However, with the help of reliable scheduling software, it can become a breeze. Schedule.cc from 500apps is one such software that can make your life easier by providing a seamless appointment scheduling experience. After answering the top 10 questions about appointment scheduling software, it’s clear that Schedule.cc is one of the best options available in the market. It provides all the features you need to manage appointments effortlessly and efficiently. So, if you’re looking for a way to simplify your appointment scheduling process, Schedule.cc from 500apps is definitely worth considering.
How to Easily Add a Coupon Code Field to Your WordPress Forms
Are you looking for an easy way to add a coupon code field to your WordPress forms?
By adding a coupon code field in your forms, you can offer discounts to your customers and increase sales during slow periods.
In this article, we will show you how to easily add a coupon code field in your WordPress forms.
Why Add Coupons to Your WordPress Forms?
Adding a coupon code field to forms on your WordPress website can encourage users to buy from you.
For example, if you have an order form for your restaurant, then adding a coupon code for discounts can help attract new customers and encourage repeat purchases.
You can also use coupons to promote clearance sales or new products in your online store, celebrate events, or reward loyal customers.
Moreover, you can also use a coupon code field to build an email list by offering discount codes to customers who sign up as subscribers.
That being said, let’s see how to easily add a coupon code field in WordPress forms.
How to Add Coupon Code Field in WordPress Forms
You can easily add a coupon code field in a WordPress form using WPForms.
It is the best WordPress contact form plugin on the market that comes with a drag-and-drop builder and makes it super easy to create any kind of form you want.
First, you will need to install and activate the WPForms plugin. For detailed instructions, please see our step-by-step guide on how to install a WordPress plugin.
Note: WPForms also has a free version. However, you will need a paid plan to unlock the Coupons addon.
Upon activation, you need to head over to the WPForms » Settings page from the WordPress admin sidebar and enter your license key.
You can get this information from your account on the WPForms website.
Next, visit the WPForms » Addons page from the WordPress dashboard and search for the Coupons addon.
Once you have done that, just click the ‘Install Addon’ button to download and activate it on your website.
After the addon has been activated, head over to the WPForms » Payments page from the admin area and switch to the ‘Coupons’ tab.
From here, you need to click the ‘+ Add Coupon’ button to continue.
This will take you to the ‘Add New Coupon’ page, where you can start by typing a name for your coupon. Keep in mind that this name won’t be displayed for your users and is just for your reference.
After that, you have to type the code that users will use to get a discount on your website.
If you don’t want to create a custom code, then simply click the ‘Generate Code’ button to let WPForms generate a code for you.
Next, you need to add the percentage or amount of discount that will be given to the customers upon using the coupon in the ‘Amount’ field.
Once you have done that, you can also add a start date and end date for the coupon code. For example, if you want to create a coupon that will only be valid for a week, then you can add those dates into the fields.
After that, you must add the maximum number of times a single user can use the coupon code in the ‘Max Uses’ field.
Now, you have to scroll down to the ‘Allowed Forms’ section on the page. From here, toggle the switch on next to the form where you want to enable the coupon code.
Finally, click the ‘Save Coupon’ button to store your settings.
Add the Coupon Code to a WordPress Form
Now, you need to open the form where you want to add the coupon code field.
To do this, visit the WPForms » All Forms page from the WordPress dashboard and click the ‘Edit’ link under the form where you want to add a coupon field.
This will launch the form in the form builder. For this tutorial, we will be adding a coupon code field to a takeout order form.
Here, you will notice available fields in the left column and a form preview on the right side of the screen. Simply drag and drop the Coupon field into the form.
Once you have done that, you must click on the field to open its settings in the left column.
Next, choose the coupon that you created earlier from the ‘Allowed Coupons’ dropdown menu.
After that, you can add a label or description for the coupon field and also toggle on the ‘Required’ switch.
If you do this, then users won’t be able to submit the form without filling in the coupon code.
Next, switch to the ‘Payments’ tab to configure settings. With WPForms, you can easily accept payments from popular gateways like Stripe, PayPal, Authorize.net, and more.
All you have to do is activate the addon for the gateway of your choice and then toggle the switch to enable it from the form builder.
Next, switch back to the ‘Fields’ tab and drag and drop the field for the payment gateway of your choice into the form.
Now, you will be able to accept payments directly from WPForms after the user applies the discount coupon code.
Once you are done, just click the ‘Save’ button at the top to store your settings.
Add the WordPress Form to a Page/Post
Now, it’s time for you to add the Takeout form with the coupon code to a WordPress page or post. Keep in mind that if the form where you added the coupon code field is already published on a page/post of your website, then it will automatically be updated.
However, if you haven’t added the form yet, then open an existing or new page/post from your WordPress dashboard.
From here, click the ‘+’ button to open the block menu and add the WPForms block.
After that, you need to choose the form with the coupon code field from the dropdown menu inside the block.
Next, click the ‘Update’ or ‘Publish’ button to store your settings.
Now, you can visit your WordPress site to view the form with a coupon field in action.
Add a Message for Coupon Errors
If you also want to display a message to users who enter the wrong coupon code, then you must visit the WPForms » Settings page from the WordPress dashboard.
From here, switch to the ‘Validation’ tab and scroll down to the ‘Coupon Error’ option. After that, type the sentence that will be displayed to users upon entering the wrong code.
Once you are done, just click the ‘Save Settings’ button to store your changes.
Now, if users enter the incorrect coupon code, then they will see your error message.
Track Coupon Usage With WPForms
With WPForms, you can also track the number of times your coupon was used to get a discount. This can help you see if your coupon codes and discounts are effective in driving sales or not.
To view your coupon usage, just visit the WPForms » Payments page from the WordPress admin sidebar.
You will see a summary chart of coupon usage on your WordPress site in the ‘Overview’ tab.
From here, you can also click on the ‘Total Payments’ tab to view individual payments and see which customers used the coupon code on your site.
This will help you decide if adding the coupon code field has helped you generate more revenue and been a successful campaign or not.
Bonus: More Tips for Using Coupons in WordPress
Coupon marketing is one of the most effective ways to get more sales and grow customer loyalty. Apart from adding coupon fields to your WordPress forms, you can also use coupons to promote a new product, clearance sale, special events, or more.
A Guide To Earning Shopify Referral Commission (2023)
As a Shopify Partner, there are multiple ways to earn through your contributions to the Shopify ecosystem. When you build a development store, you can earn up to a 20% recurring referral commission on the Shopify subscriber fees for each client you refer. By consistently referring clients who sign up for Shopify plans, you can earn a steady stream of commission. Highly engaged Shopify partners find referral commissions to be a valuable tool that can be used to hire more staff, expand services, negotiate with clients, and scale business. Learn how to get started.
Step 1: Build A Development Store
To earn referral commissions for the development stores you build, you must refer a client by building a development store in the Partner Dashboard. A development store is a free version of a Shopify store that can be used to design, build, test and optimize stores for your client. You can also leverage it to test themes and apps as you build a store. As a Shopify Partner, you can use our full development store environment to build as many stores, or test as many apps or themes as you want.
Step 2: Client Subscribes To A Full-Price Shopify Plan
After creating a development store, transfer store ownership to your client. When the transfer is complete and your client subscribes to a full-price paid plan, Shopify pays you a recurring commission equal to 20% of the merchant’s monthly subscription fee on Basic Shopify, Shopify, and Advanced Shopify plans. For Plus referrals, you will earn a recurring commission equal to 20% of the Plus merchant’s monthly base platform fee. Note: Stores that are built as part of a Shopify free trialare not eligible for referral commission. You can only earn referral commissions by transferring a development store (not a trial store) to a merchant.
Step 3: Receive Your Recurring Monthly Commission Payment
Upon successfully referring a new client, you’ll receive your referral commission payout on a monthly basis through the Shopify Partner Dashboard. As an active Shopify Partner, you’ll continue to receive your monthly development store referral commission for each client you’ve referred. You must remain an active Shopify Partner to continue earning commissions by referring at least one active merchant to Shopify at least once every 12 months, or by upgrading an existing Shopify merchant to Shopify Plus, as outlined in the Partner Program Agreement. For additional eligibility details, review the Active Shopify Partner requirements.
Grow your business with the Shopify Partner Program
In addition to earning from development store referrals, there are more ways to earn when referring to Shopify Plus and POS. Whether you offer marketing, customization, or web design and development services, the Shopify Partner Program makes it possible for our partners to build and grow their business. Join for free and access revenue share opportunities, tools to grow your business, and a passionate commerce community.
App Integration Tool Made Easy: A List of Commonly Asked Questions
App integration tool is a type of technology that enables companies to link their various applications so they may exchange information and functionality. Due to the fact that more and more businesses are managing their operations by utilising different apps and data sources, this kind of software has grown in importance in the modern corporate climate. App integration tools make it simpler for businesses to obtain and analyse the data they need to make better decisions by enabling multiple applications and data sources to connect & interact.
The demand for efficient and secure connections between various apps and data sources has fueled the development of app integration platforms. To address the needs of various industries and businesses, various types of integration software have been developed over time. Application integration tools are now an integral part of corporate operations as companies rely more and more on digital technologies. By connecting and sharing data between various apps and data sources, this kind of software allows companies to create more practical & secure workflow.
1. What is App Integration Tool?
App integration tool provides automated synchronization between different applications & services. It enables data that needs to be exchanged between applications, allowing users to access data across various platforms. This type of software helps to streamline processes and make data management more efficient. and create a seamless & automated workflow.
2. What types of Apps can be Integrated with Integration Software?
A variety of app types can be integrated with integration software, including customer relationship management (CRM) systems, enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems, accounting systems, eCommerce platforms, marketing automation tools, payment processing systems & more. Each integration solution will offer different levels of integration capabilities depending on the type of app and the specific features or data points that need to be connected.
3. Can Integration Tools be used with Cloud-Based Apps?
Yes, Can cloud-based apps be utilised with it? It can be used to link cloud-based software programmes and services with one another, making it possible for information and files to be transferred between the various apps and services. This can increase workflow, minimise manual labour, and streamline corporate processes. Organizations can build a single data environment and automate procedures to cut expenses and boost productivity by integrating cloud-based apps.
App Integration software can also help to ensure data security and privacy, as data is protected and stored in the cloud. In Addition, cloud-based apps can be integrated with on-premises applications, allowing organizations to leverage the best of both worlds.
4. How Secure is App Integration Tool?
App integration is designed to facilitate the secure and efficient integration of different apps and services into a single system. App Integration Platforms enable an organization to connect various applications and services without the need to build custom software. This is usually secure, as it has built-in security measures to protect user data and ensure that all data is transferred securely.
It also helps organizations ensure that their data remains confidential and is not accessed by unauthorized personnel. App integration tools also often include authentication, authorization and encryption measures to protect user data and prevent malicious attacks.
5. Can the Integration Tool be Customized to Meet Specific Needs?
Yes, most Integration software can be customized to meet specific needs. This customization is typically done through APIs and custom code written by developers. By using APIs, developers can create their own custom code to integrate the software with other applications or databases. Customizations can also include adding new features, such as custom reports or dashboards. This customization allows companies to tailor the software to their own specific needs and use cases.
Some software vendors also offer customization services, which can help companies customize the software to their exact specifications. This service can include customizing user interfaces, integrating the software with other applications, and customizing the data model. This type of customization can be costly, but it can be worth the investment if a company needs a specific feature or integration.
6. How Can App Integration Tool Improve Business Efficiency?
App integration software is an increasingly popular tool used to streamline and automate business processes. It can be used to integrate various business applications and systems, such as customer relationship management (CRM), enterprise resource planning (ERP), and accounting software. By integrating these business applications, organizations can significantly improve their efficiency and productivity.
App integration systems simplify the process of data sharing between different applications. It eliminates the need for manual data entry, which can take up a significant amount of time and resources. This enables businesses to focus more on their core operations and activities.
7. Can the App Integration Tool Automate Repetitive Tasks?
App integration systems can automate repetitive tasks. The app integration tool is designed to integrate different applications to achieve tasks more quickly and efficiently. This type of software can be used for tasks that require multiple applications to be used, such as data synchronization, automation of processes, and other complex tasks.
App integration systems can automate repetitive tasks by allowing users to set up rules and schedules for when certain tasks should be executed. For example, users can set up rules to have data automatically synchronized between two applications, or to have a task run at a certain time of day. This automation removes the need for manual intervention and saves time and resources.
8. Is App Integration Tool Easy to Use?
The app integration tool is designed to make connecting different applications and services easy, allowing data to be shared between them. It is generally quite easy to use and requires minimal setup. The user simply needs to select the applications they want to integrate, configure the settings, and click the “Connect” button. Once the connections are established, the user can then easily share data between the two applications.
App integration software is often designed with a user-friendly interface, making it easy to understand and navigate. It also typically includes helpful tutorials, FAQs, and support resources to help users get the most out of their integration. Furthermore, the software is often designed to be flexible and customizable, so users can tailor it to their specific needs.
Overall, an app integration solution is usually very easy to use and can help users streamline and automate their workflow by connecting their different applications and services.
9. How can App Integration Tool help with Data Management?
App integration systems can help with data management by streamlining and simplifying the process of connecting different applications together. With this type of software, businesses are able to connect their applications, data sources, and databases to each other, allowing for a more efficient and automated flow of data. This integration technology can also provide businesses with the ability to quickly and easily access and analyze data from multiple sources.
It can also help reduce manual data entry and ensure data accuracy by automatically transferring data between different systems. This can help businesses save time, money, and resources while ensuring that data is managed in a secure and efficient manner.
10. What is the Difference between App Integration Tool and Middleware?
The app integration system is designed to enable the integration of different applications, allowing them to work together and share data. It is usually used for specific tasks, such as integrating an order management system with a shipping system.
Middleware, on the other hand, is a layer of software that sits between two applications and allows them to interact with each other. Middleware provides an interface for two applications to communicate with each other and also enables the sharing of data between them. It can also provide additional functionality, such as security, scalability, and reliability.
The main difference between app integration software and middleware is that while the app integration system is targeted at specific tasks, middleware provides a broader platform to enable multiple applications to interact with each other. Furthermore, middleware offers additional features such as security, scalability, and reliability.
Wrapping Up
App integration software is a program that enables the connection between different types of applications. These types of software allow users to transfer data between two or more applications, as well as automate various processes within applications. ZapUp is a unique App integration software that allows users to connect different applications with ease. It allows users to create custom workflows that can be triggered by events, making it possible to streamline processes.
Having a wide variety of marketing applications is essential for businesses to be successful in the modern world. 500apps offers 49 different marketing applications, as well as the ZapUp application, for just $14.99. This is an incredibly cost-effective way to access all of these applications, making it a great deal for businesses looking to expand their marketing efforts.
10+ Ways to Drastically Increase Your WooCommerce Sales
You have the products. You have the WooCommerce site. But your sales just aren’t where you want them to be. These strategies will instantly start to increase your WooCommerce sales!
Every solution recommended in this checklist is based on 3 main principles:
Affordability
Cost-effectiveness
Simplicity
This list won’t cover the obvious “tips” that you may find in other guides. Ideas like improving product descriptions or adding high-quality images are a must.
If you haven’t done those already, start there.
What you really need are solutions that you can implement in minutes for just a few dollars.
Every strategy in this checklist includes helpful information based on our experience using, reviewing, and testing dozens of WooCommerce extensions from trusted developers, including:
We’re not taking into consideration profit margins on products since they can vary drastically across stores. All calculations are based on a $25 product with a 100% profit margin for the sake of simplicity, but they will give you a clear idea of the potential.
Let’s get started and increase your WooCommerce sales today!
Verdict
A simple solution to instantly generate a higher Average Cart Value and better LTV.
Related products, sometimes displayed as “You may also like…”, are a great way to sell more of what you already have by simply recommending other products from your store. Essentially, it’s all about cross-selling, up-selling, and order bumps.
A basic version of this feature is built into WooCommerce’s free plugin. Go to a product’s settings page and find the Linked Products section. From there, you can add related products, up-sells, and cross-sells. They can be added on each product page or even at checkout. But it is a bit limited.
There are premium solutions that add more options when setting up related products. For example, the Growanizer plugin adds conditional rules, giving you more control over which products are recommended across your store.
If you’re after something like Amazon-style product suggestions, there’s also the Recommendation Engine plugin with which you can introduce related products by purchase history or even a “Products purchased together” section.
We personally really like the Sales Booster solution from Iconic. It enables you to use proven techniques such as “frequently bought together” and “order bumps” with just a few clicks.
2. Sell Product Bundles
Verdict
An easy way to sell more of what you already offer, so it’s a no-brainer.
The likelihood is that you’ve experienced this tactic while buying something online yourself in the past. Product bundles offer an incredibly effective way of increasing your sales numbers and average order value (AOV).
Combine two or more of your existing products that are frequently bought together (tactic 1 above can help you figure out which combinations to create), offer a small discount if they are bought as part of your amazing new bundle, and watch that total cart value go up instantly.
Considering how simple it is to implement something like this and the impact it can have on your store, the return on investment will be instantaneous. If you need to sell two products to cover the cost of the plugin recommended below, a single bundle sale will put you in the green!
Bundles are an effective way to sell more, but they’re also convenient for your customers since you’re showing them exactly what they need in one place. Give it a go and see what impact it has on day 1.
3. Simplify Your Checkout Process
Verdict
Reduce friction at the most vital step in the customer’s journey. Stop losing sales.
From your store to their cart, to checkout. That’s the customer’s journey once they’re on your website. Your job is to make that process as seamless as possible with as few required clicks as you can.
You can try to make your cart look better and the checkout page a bit cleaner, but it will be far more effective if you can combine the two and make it one seamless process! That’s where a WooCommerce shopping cart plugin comes into play.
A side cart or popup cart that includes the WooCommerce checkout process is ideal since your customers won’t have to leave the page they’re on. They can go from “Buy now” to “Pay” in seconds.
By taking away as much of the friction a customer comes into contact with as possible, you will have fewer abandoned carts, and your customers will be much happier with their experience, making it more likely that they will come back and recommend you to their family and friends.
4. Make Searching More Convenient
Verdict
An easy recommendation to help your customers find exactly what they need, instantly.
There are two key ways you can help customers find and buy more products from your store. To start off, we’re looking at product search.
The default WooCommerce and WordPress search functionality is limited, so opting for a search plugin that integrates perfectly with WooCommerce will solve this problem with ease. We have a few recommendations for you in our WooCommerce search plugins comparison.
A more robust product search solution can instantly increase your WooCommerce sales. For example, it can add search suggestions as your customers type a product name, offers spelling correction, includes a live search preview as the customer types, and so much more.
Below is our recommended solution for improving the search field in your store, but there’s also another search you can improve – product filtering. Using a solution such as WooCommerce Product Filters can significantly improve customer experience by allowing them to filter through your product archive by price, category, attribute, color, stock, taxonomy, and much more.
5. Simplify Your Shop Pages
Verdict
The easiest way to get more sales, proven on thousands of WooCommerce stores.
The second way you can make it even simpler for customers to find and buy products is by converting your shop pages into an order form using a product table or product catalog.
This may sound too simple to be true, but it works wonders for eCommerce stores. By changing the layout of your shop page or even offering it as an alternative view, you could increase sales and average order value with just a few minutes of work.
Most stores show a standard grid layout with big pictures and not much product data, assuming that the customer is happy to access each individual product page to learn more, choose their options, and add the item to their cart.
What you’re not considering is that this format is not appropriate for a big proportion of products. Many types of items sell better when presented as a quick one-page order form.
Customers are able to see all the product data up-front, choose variations and quantities, then add multiple products to their cart in one go without ever leaving that one shop page.
Using this alongside tactic number 4 – a floating cart – will work wonders for you.
6. Inspire Customers with Instagram
Verdict
If your store has an Instagram account, this is a must-have.
Social proof has so much power nowadays. If you see others raving about a product, you’re far more likely to look for and buy that product yourself. Your customers are no different.
Give them what they’re looking for by posting your products on Instagram, asking customers to tag your brand on their Instagram posts, and then sharing both directly on your website, auto-magically.
There are two ways you can do this. The first is to simply embed an automatically-refreshed Instagram gallery that showcases your Instagram posts and possibly those that your customers post.
The second, and even more effective, is to create a shoppable Instagram gallery so each post link to the product that it features. That way, when a customer clicks on the photo that they like in the gallery, they’ll be taken directly to the product that caught their eye.
Just like that, you can boost your WooCommerce sales by posting product photos to Instagram.
Verdict
Use promotions wisely and you can 10X your sales in a short time-span.
Sales, sales, sales. Some love them, and some love to hate them. The truth is that when it comes to eCommerce, they work.
By creating enticing promotions at the right time of the year, such as holiday periods like the 4th of July, Black Friday or Christmas, you can generate a ton of revenue in a very short period of time.
Combine some of the tactics listed here to make even more of an impact. For example, tactic 5 combined with tactic 11 below can result in a huge increase in website traffic from engaged customers that are looking to save a few dollars during a sale period or while they do their holiday shopping.
Make promotions seasonal. Don’t offer discounts all year round, or you’ll start to devalue your brand. It might work for a few businesses, as we see with online stores such as ASOS, but in the majority of cases, you’re better off sticking to seasonal sales.
8. Recover Lost Customers
Verdict
A lost customer isn’t gone forever. Bring them back with automated cart recovery.
Losing customers is a given in eCommerce, but not all lost customers are gone forever. Some can be brought back and recovered with some very simple automations.
Cart recovery is one of the simplest ways to bring in more revenue. The person who visited your store, added something to their cart, and then left; is ready and primed to buy. You just need to bring them back one more time, perhaps with a small discount to entice them further.
We’ve reviewed a few plugins that can handle cart abandonment in different ways, such as Retainful, Abandoned Cart Pro, and Cartboss. For our own software products, we use Recapture, which has also been quite effective.
As you can see, there are plenty of solutions available for cart recovery. We can recommend any of them, but the truth is that if you invest a little more, you can get a far more robust solution called Autonami which we’ve been really impressed by.
We have written about Autonami on a couple of occasions before – when discussing CRMs and marketing automation, and in our Clickfunnels vs WooFunnels comparion. Our WooCommerce audience loves this tool. It’s well worth the investment considering how much revenue you can recover on a weekly basis.
9. Create a “Best Sellers” List
Verdict
Make your customers’ choice that much easier with your expert recommendations.
How many times have you been on a website like Amazon and looked through the “Best Sellers” or “Recommended Products” sections? We don’t know how truthful those recommendations are, but the fact of the matter is that they convert very well.
Showing your customers what other people are buying will encourage them to look through and add a sense of approval to that product. We all want to be included, and if that means owning something that many others like us also own, we’re likely to go for it.
Creating a “Best Sellers” list on your website or even tagging products as “Best Seller” on the shop page (or using the product filters we mentioned above) is as simple as clicking a few buttons.
Whether you believe in this idea or not, it’s worth a try considering how simple it is to set up (plus, it’s free). The free blocks that are included with WooCommerce include a “Best Selling Products” block that can be added to any page and instantly display your best sellers according to WooCommerce data.
10. Add New Payment Options
Verdict
Not everyone has PayPal or a credit card handy. Give them options and stop losing sales.
You might like using PayPal to buy stuff online, while your friend prefers to use a credit card. Either way, you’re both going to want to use your preferred payment method when the time comes, so why are your customers any different?
They’re not, which is why offering multiple payment methods and options makes the likelihood of converting a customer that much higher.
WooCommerce payment options
There isn’t just one recommendation we can make here. It depends entirely on the most popular payment gateways used by your target audience. If you sell locally, look at what friends and family use most.
If you sell internationally, your best bet is to offer all popular gateways and listen for feedback from customers for any additional payment options they may prefer. This is where your customer support team’s skills will come into full effect.
11. Build Your Email List
Verdict
A long-term strategy that is a must for almost all online businesses to extend their lifetime.
Last but not least, the one thing we recommend that all stores do is set up an email marketing strategy. Despite what you might think, email is still the best way to communicate with your customers and get a huge return on investment.
There are many email marketing integrations and platforms, such as Sendinblue, to consider, so you have to find the one that works best for you. Being able to use these tools to communicate with your customers about sales, cart recovery, and so on can be great for your business.
If you don’t have a list yet, set one up and start collecting email addresses. One way to do this that is very effective is offering first-time visitors a 10% discount if they sign up for your email list. It’s effective since you’re offering people something of monetary value in return for access to their inbox.
Since we mentioned Autonami above, I have to mention it again here. As one of their customers explains:
“Like many people we have used Infusionsoft, ActiveCampaign, MailChimp, you name it, we have tried them all at one point or another, and NOTHING, ABSOLUTELY NOTHING, compares to Autonami. You can now control everything and tie all your marketing in with your WordPress website. Autonami is WONDERFUL and their support is top notch!”
Ready? Get Started Today
Investing in every strategy listed above will cost you the following:
$650 to $1,000 to buy the plugins
9 to 13 hours to implement the solutions
Not every strategy will apply to your store, so pick and choose the ones that apply best. Whether you start small or go all out, the important part is to just get started.
With today’s constantly evolving eCommerce landscape, ensuring that your WooCommerce store remains competitive and appealing to customers is critical to your survival.
The strategies outlined above are proven to not only enhance the user experience but also to drive sales and boost revenue.
Just look at your own online shopping experiences, and I’m sure you’ll come across most or all of these strategies in action on major eCommerce stores.
Whether it’s by harnessing the power of visual storytelling through Instagram, simplifying the shopping journey from product discovery to checkout, or leveraging the appeal of urgency and exclusivity, each tactic serves a unique purpose in enticing more customers.
Plus, the idea of reintroducing lost customers and continuously updating payment methods speaks volumes about the necessity of adapting and keeping up with customer needs and preferences.
As with any business venture, consistency is key. The implementation of these strategies requires commitment, regular review, and fine-tuning based on how your market shifts over time.
But when executed effectively, these tactics can transform your WooCommerce store from a mere online storefront to a thriving digital marketplace.
Have you tried another strategy that worked well for you? Share it below, and we’ll include it in the list so other store owners can reap the benefits!
What Is Buy Online, Pick-Up in Store in Retail? (2023)
You’ve likely heard the term buy online, pickup in-store (BOPIS), or click and collect, but figuring out how to implement this order fulfillment strategy in your retail store can feel like a huge undertaking.
Luckily, with Shopify, you can set up local pickup in a few short steps to start offering BOPIS as a delivery option on your ecommerce checkout page.
Sounds easy, right? Setup may be, but the operations, best practices, and benefits of BOPIS are worth investigating before you wind up with a queue of unhappy click-and-collect customers waiting for their orders because you don’t have the staff to manage it.
On that note, let’s get started.
What is BOPIS in retail?
BOPIS is an ideal strategy for retail stores. Customers can shop from the comfort of their home and go to the store or pickup location once the order is ready.
This strategy is great for retailers who have both a brick-and-mortar store and an ecommerce website and want to offer local pickup as a delivery method at checkout. It lets you optimize the omnichannel retail experience and merge online shopping and physical store experiences. BOPIS makes the buying process more convenient for retailers and customers.
💡 Looking for examples of BOPIS in action? Learn from retailers Gym+Coffee and Earl of East who both launched successful click-and-collect programs.
How does BOPIS/click and collect work?
The BOPIS shopping experience provides your customers with the flexibility to choose how they want to fulfill their order. Convenience is key to improving the customer experience, and click and collect lets shoppers make a purchase and pick it up immediately if they want to.
This is how the BOPIS shopping and order fulfillment process works:
1. Customers buy online, through your website or mobile app
With buy online, pickup in-store, it’s crucial to create a convenient experience by letting customers complete their purchase online. During the checkout process, the shopper needs to be able to select the time and pickup location for the products in their cart. Real-time local inventory updates let the customer know when and where the products will be available for pickup.
2. The retailer fulfills the online order
There are two order fulfillment scenarios with buy online, pickup in-store in retail.
The item is in stock at the customer’s local store. When the order is available at your retail store, you can locate it, pick and pack, and set it aside for the customer to pick up. You can then send a notification via email or text, letting the shopper know their order is ready for pickup.
The item is not in stock at the customer’s local store. If the order is not in stock at your retail store, you can order it from another store location or your warehouse. Once it arrives at your customer’s preferred pickup location, you can send them a notification to tell them it’s available.
3. The customer picks up the order
Depending on your click-and-collect strategy, you may do pickups in-store or at a designated pickup location. Some retailers are making BOPIS even more convenient by offering curbside pickup. The customer can drive up to your storefront and be handed their order while they stay in their car.
Regardless of the pickup strategy you choose, shoppers should never feel confused when they opt for buy online, pickup in-store. It’s important that the process is clear from start to finish. This includes order confirmation and concise instructions about where and how to pick up products.
BOPIS is growing: statistics to prove it
Click and collect is popular and has demonstrated success among consumers. Take a look at these numbers that prove how shoppers are flocking to the BOPIS shopping experience.
According to our data, 59% of consumers are interested in BOPIS-type shopping options.
According to Insider Intelligence, click-and-collect retail sales are projected to reach $154.3 billion by 2025. While its projected growth rate is lower than it was from 2019 to 2022, it’s still going strong.
Insider Intelligence
The benefits of click and collect (for you and your customers)
Consumers are looking for a shopping experience that’s convenient and also saves them time and money. Retailers are noticing the benefits of click and collect and many have adopted this shopping experience to stay competitive.
In fact, research from The National Retail Federation states that 83% of consumers find shopping convenience more important than it was five years ago. In the same study, 70% of respondents said BOPIS improved their shopping experience.
Brick-and-mortar retailers can use BOPIS to compete with Amazon and other ecommerce-only companies that don’t have a storefront. It’s a great way to strengthen your omnichannel selling strategy and customer experience.
Let’s look at the benefits click-and-collect offers retail store owners:
1. Increased store traffic and sales
When customers stop by your store to pick up their order, they might look around and browse for more products. They could also remember something they wanted to buy and spend more money in-store.
According to PYMNTS’ 2022 Global Digital Shopping Playbook: U.S. Edition, 47% of online shoppers say they wind up buying more products on their trip to pick up ecommerce purchases in-store or curbside.
💡 PRO TIP: Set up local pickup in Shopify to start offering in-store pickup as a delivery option at checkout. Pay less on last-mile delivery, speed up fulfillment times on local orders, and drive more foot traffic to your stores.
2. Reduced shipping costs
Shipping orders from your distribution center to your customers’ doors can add up. BOPIS lets you send bulk shipments to your retail store or pickup point. When shoppers pick up orders from your store, you save on last-mile shipping costs.
3. Improved inventory management
With click and collect, it’s important to streamline your inventory management and get real-time stock updates.
Merging online and in-store inventory tracking lets you fulfill orders from your store or distribution center—whatever the faster option is. This gives you more access and control over a larger assortment of inventory. It also gives you better insights into what products are available in real time.
Unless you offer free shipping for online orders, it can be much more expensive for shoppers to have products shipped to them. Conversely, with BOPIS, consumers can save money and time by picking up their purchase in-store or at a pickup point. They can save the $5 they might have spent on shipping, but can still take advantage of ordering online.
2. Speedy service
For shoppers who need an item urgently, it’s faster to buy it online and pick it up an hour later versus waiting one to three days for delivery. People want instant gratification, and providing the option to buy online and pick-up in store is a way to offer it.
3. Guarantee that the item is in stock
With click and collect, you pick and pack the customer’s order before you send them a notification that it’s ready for pickup. This makes it 100% guaranteed that when the shopper arrives, the product will be available.
💡 PRO TIP: With Shopify, you can show shoppers using Google which products your store has in stock. List your products on Google for free, show pickup availability to increase store visits, and measure how your listings impact store sales from Shopify.
4. Quick returns and exchanges
If the product doesn’t fit—or doesn’t meet a customer’s expectations—returns or exchanges are processed immediately rather than having to ship the order back.
BOPIS examples: 6 retailers excelling at click and collect
Want to see the BOPIS model in action? Here are some examples of retailers excelling at click and collect.
Lululemon
Lululemon offers fast and easy click-and-collect pickup for its customers. First you select your preferred store location, then you can choose to pick up your order. Lululemon’s simple BOPIS landing page makes it easy for shoppers to understand the buy online, pickup in-store process.
Tokyobike
Buying a bicycle is an incredibly personal choice. For tokyobike, offering BOPIS allowed it to encourage online shoppers to visit its shop, ensure they made the right choice, and also explore essential accessories like a bike lock and helmet.
For Juliana Di Simone, tokyobike’s partner in America, click and collect helped create a synergy between online and physical stores. “You have to be able to bring the physical into the digital, and the digital into the physical,” she says. “From an experience perspective, but also in terms of systems. Connecting the two is important.”
Outdoor Voices
Outdoor Voices’ BOPIS options are also a good example of how you can test buy online, pickup in-store. When a customer shops online, there’s a note in the order summary letting them know that if shop pickup is available, it will display at checkout.
The goal is to make sure the buying journey is seamless, quick, and friction-free.
TC Running
Throughout the pandemic, Shopify merchant TC Running expanded its online store so customers could order products online for shipping or opt for click and collect. The brand saw a 110% uplift in sales each month after implementing BOPIS.
Nalata Nalata
For Nalata Nalata owners Stevenson Aung and Angélique Chmielewski-Aung, giving shoppers the flexibility to pick up their orders in store or have goods shipped directly to their home aligns their service with what customers expect in a competitive space.
“On our website, [customers] have an option of shipping or selecting the in-store pickup option,” Angélique explains. “It allows us to stay competitive in a world where, with Amazon Prime, for example, shipping is free. [BOPIS] definitely allows us to play in that market.”
GAP
GAP is offering two click-and-collect options:
Buy online, pickup curbside
Buy online, pickup in-store
GAP’s BOPIS landing page provides step-by-step details about how it works, plus an FAQ section at the bottom.
4 BOPIS challenges and best practices to overcome them
BOPIS is a great omnichannel retail strategy that can result in increased sales and happier customers. But it still has its challenges. It’s important to make sure the buy online, pickup in-store model doesn’t create a mind-boggling or disappointing customer experience.
This research from NAPCO confirms that the biggest challenges originate from retail stores themselves
NAPCO
Here, we’ll look at a few of these challenges in more detail and how you can overcome them:
1. Fulfillment speed and in-store space
Many of your customers may suddenly take advantage of your new click-and-collect model. It’s not a bad problem to have, but orders pile up and you could run out of space in-store if numerous shoppers pick up at the same time.
Consider assigning BOPIS orders to specific employees and create a designated area in your store where people can line up to collect their purchase.
2. Inventory synchronization
If your inventory isn’t synced properly with your online store and your brick-and-mortar shop, the BOPIS model could be a nightmare. You want to avoid having to call or send emails telling click-and-collect customers that the item they just ordered is out of stock.
Not only can it take your time away from helping in-store shoppers, it’s also not a great experience for your customers.
3. Investment to set up and manage BOPIS
For the BOPIS model to be successful, someone needs to be available to pick and pack the buy online, pickup in-store orders. Depending on the size of your business, you may want to hire additional staff who focus on reviewing and fulfilling click-and-collect orders.
Of course, this requires a financial investment, but it’s worth it. If your regular staff is constantly tasked with fulfilling online orders for pickup, it can hurt your in-store customer experience.
4. Lack of customer awareness for BOPIS
Spending money on a new sales strategy won’t yield a positive return on investment (ROI) if shoppers don’t know about it.
Boost customer awareness by creating a BOPIS campaign and sharing it across your marketing channels, including email and social media. You can also put up signage in your retail store so customers know they can pick up online orders in the future.
Get started with BOPIS and click and collect
Are you a brick-and-mortar retailer with an ecommerce store but not offering BOPIS yet? It’s time to get started!
Embracing this omnichannel retail strategy gives your customers a more convenient shopping experience and a proven track record of increasing sales.
Getting started isn’t complicated. Make sure you have the following three requirements set up to provide an outstanding click-and-collect experience:
A website or mobile app for online ordering (you can start a free three-day trial of Shopify to build your website today) that can easily sync with your in-store POS system (using Shopify for your ecommerce and in-store selling makes this seamless)
Real-time inventory capabilities so stock is synchronized across all locations
At least one brick-and-mortar location
Shoppers frequently look for convenience, which makes it key to test and implement new customer experiences like buy online, pickup in-store. It lets you compete with the Amazons of the world by using your physical retail store as a fulfillment hub.
With BOPIS, you can put products in the hands of your customers at a faster rate.
Sell the way your customers shop
Only Shopify POS unifies online and in-store sales and makes checkout seamless. Get all the tools you need to break free from the counter and sell wherever your customers are without worrying about your tech stack, integrations, or fragmented sales reports.
BOPIS FAQ
What is BOPIS in retail?
BOPIS is an acronym that stands for buy online, pick up in-store. BOPIS is an ideal strategy for retail stores. Customers can shop from the comfort of their home and go to the store or pickup location once the order is ready.
What is ROPIS?
ROPIS is an acronym that stands for reserve online, pick up in-store. ROPIS is also commonly referred to as BOPIS or click and collect and describes the strategy retailers use to offer in-store pickup for customers.
What is in-store pickup?
In-store pickup refers to a strategy retailers offer that gives customers the option to pick up an item they have purchased in-store, rather than having it shipped to their home. Another form of in-store pickup is curbside pickup, where the customer can pick up their item outside the store, typically in the parking lot or curbside out front.
How does BOPIS work?
The BOPIS shopping experience provides your customers with the flexibility to choose how they want to fulfill their order. The BOPIS shopping and order fulfillment process works as follows: customers buy online, through your website or mobile app, the retailer fulfills the online order, and the customer picks up the order.
What is the difference between BOPIS and curbside pickup?
The main difference between BOPIS and curbside pickup is where the customer picks up their order. BOPIS involves the customer coming to a designated pickup point in the store, whereas curbside pickup invovles a store associate taking the order out to the customers car in a designated zone outside the store.
How do I offer BOPIS?
Make sure you have the following three requirements set up to provide an outstanding BOPIS experience: a website or mobile app for online ordering that can easily sync with your in-store point of sale system, real-time inventory capabilities so stock is synchronized across all locations, and at least one brick-and-mortar location.
Light Source | Pull up a chair for our first industry talk at Brooklyn’s Clover Hill
Lightspeed launches the first of a series of industry table talks
on the future of business at Brooklyn’s Clover Hill restaurant.
Insights and inspiration are both on the menu.
This summer, on a balmy summer evening we headed out for drinks at one of Brooklyn’s most popular spots: Clover Hill. A cozy and inviting 26-seater space, Clover Hill is known for their contemporary cuisine that boasts top-shelf seasonal ingredients, irresistible sauces and unexpected flavor combinations, that have earned partners Clay Castillo, Gabriel Merino and Executive Chef, Charlie Mitchell a Michelin Star. But Clover Hill holds a special place in our hearts as part of the Lightspeed family, and on this particular night— amidst the click of wine glasses and echoes of laughter— we sat to feast on what the future holds.
This Lightspeed industry table talk is the first in a series of upcoming events that will travel the globe. Lightspeed’s mission is to deliver innovation and ease to sophisticated business owners— empowering them to scale, grow and face the future with confidence. Bringing together the best of the best from across different industries in retail, hospitality and beyond— entrepreneurs, operators, media and technology, we’ll explore these big issues together. And as we’ve all discovered from the last few years, nothing beats a dinner with friends—and face to face conversations are where the best of ourselves is revealed. So in this spirit, pull up a chair, you’ve got a seat at the table—and the service is about to begin…
What’s on the menu:
On the growing allure of personalization
Lightspeed CEO JP Chauvet opens the evening’s discussion posing a question to the business owners at the table: has anyone noticed specific trends emerging? Melissa Joy Manning, owner, designer and founder of Melissa Joy Manning jewelry, and a Lightspeed customer, talks about how customization is booming.
Melissa Joy Manning:
“With increased investment in my field… It’s given us an opportunity to see where we can set ourselves apart—that’s come to us in the form of customization. We’ve seen that most people want to design their own piece… It allows customers to be a participant in the brand.
Julie Hyman
“How did you realize that [personalization] is a trend that’s working?”
MJM:
“Correct.”
On the power of unified payments
The conversation pivots to how unified payments is powerful as a means to streamline complicated processes and reduce human error and fraud. By eliminating complications between third parties and reducing backend workloads, embedded payments empower business owners and operators to take back their time and create an elevated experience for their customers.
JH:
“Let’s discuss embedded payments… I want to talk about the difference that it’s making.”
Daniel Keyes
“Absolutely. Technology has caught up to the point where there are opportunities to make payments disappear. I heard you say earlier that the kitchen is the heart of everything. Conversely, payments are unappealing. Payments are friction. We’d all rather acquire something and not have to pay for it. So the more you can make payments disappear [for the customer], the better. And that’s where embedded payments can help with that process. When you book an Uber, you barely notice you’re paying…it’s really kind of an afterthought. And that’s what everyone wants… That’s the goal.”
JH:
“And is there receptivity to embedded payments?”
DK:
“Payments are not something that everyone is knowledgeable about. Merchants have a lot on their plate and payments typically are not their expertise—and that’s where companies like Lightspeed come in and help them deploy those things… Education is really important. You need to see the opportunities and possibilities.”
JH:
“When I think about frictionless payments, the hugest iteration of that is Disney World. When you have a bracelet around your wrist and everywhere you go, you scan the bracelet…You spend more if you’re not really thinking about it. What’s your experience Melissa?”
MJM:
“It was atrocious before [we switched to Lightspeed]. The amount of time that we would have to allocate to our bookkeeper to balance all of it was a pain… even the lag that you take a payment one day and it shows up three days later. I was like, “Why is this so hard?” So when Lightspeed approached me… they did a great job of making it easy to understand, feasible to integrate and that everything is in one place. It’s a no brainer.”
JH:
“When we talk about cost, do businesses see a bump in revenue because there’s that ease of payment?”
JP:
“Convenience is key for the experience. We just launched ‘tap’ for hospitality. There’s no more payment terminal. You tap your card and you’re gone. The process is incredibly efficient, which means waiters can serve more tables. That’s why embedded payments is the way to go. We hear from our customers that they would rather have transparency… It’s a market where there’s been way too much money made for way too little technology given to customers. Those times are changing—now, slicker companies are providing a much better service at a much lower cost.”
Ready to take more payments?
Find out if Lightspeed Mobile Tap is a good fit for your business.
On AI’s impact and potential
Artificial intelligence and language model processing platforms like ChatGPT have been on everyone’s minds this year. The conversation at Clover Hill wouldn’t be complete without our industry leaders giving their impressions of what these tools mean to them and how they see it shaping possibilities for the future. From creating more accessibility and enhancing customer support experiences through to fears of diminishing that unmistakable human touch—there’s no doubt AI’s impact is long reaching and just begun to make waves.
Ryan Tabone
“It’s an amazing time! What’s interesting and why AI is so top of mind today, is with these large language models, [like] ChatGPT…you’re able to approach technology in a way that you couldn’t before. You’ve lowered the bar to entry. Now you can simplify more of what you are doing. This technology can generate language or generate content—and that can be used for any number of things.”
JP:
“I understand there are short term benefits but there’s a piece of me that’s like, what does this mean long term? That’s the scary part. It’s like, what does this mean for the quirkiness of people that everybody loves?”
Phil Wahba:
“Definitely. It’s a central part of going to a restaurant: the waiter… I hate these restaurants where you’re given a menu with a QR code! If you want a wine suggestion, it’s fun to chit chat with the server. That’s part of the experience. I’m not afraid of AI. As somebody who covered retail for a long time, much of what was promised never happened. I’ve been shopping with Nordstrom for ten years and I still get random recommendations. Even though I only buy menswear, they keep sending me dress emails. Let’s not give these robots too much credit.”
John Waldman:
“Long term, I think every company is going to make a choice: are we in the fulfillment business or in the experience business? Technology is going to make a huge impact on both. Every business is going to have to choose.”
JP
“Technology should serve what you hate. I don’t believe AI is going to remove the experience component. For us at Lightspeed, the goal is to enable and empower the person giving you the experience to know enough, so that it can be even better… It’s about bringing to the surface useful information to create an elevated experience.”
What’s next for our Light Source industry table talk series
Still hungry? That’s perfect. We’ve just begun cooking up our industry table talks. From what trends are on the horizon to product updates and new technologies that impact your day-to-day operations, no topic is off limits. Look out for our next industry table talk this Fall23 in Toronto. And we’ll be distilling the very best bites right here. Stay tuned.
Can ChatGPT Build a Useful WordPress Plugin That Actually Works?
Can AI turn non-coders into pro WordPress plugin developers? To find out, we asked ChatGPT to build a custom WordPress plugin from scratch and then had our crack team of developers examine the code…
AI is the world’s most popular two-letter word right now. With all the recent news headlines about whether AI will take our jobs away, we wanted to know… can ChatGPT actually develop a functional and useful WordPress plugin without having to write code from scratch? And does the plugin meet best coding practices?
Fortunately, WPMU DEV builds some of the most robust WordPress plugins in the world, so we have plenty of expert WordPress plugin developers who can put ChatGPT to the test.
In fact, if you take a stroll around our company’s virtual corridors, you can’t help but bump into WordPress coders and developers. It seems everyone around here can look at a WordPress plugin and see PHP the way Neo sees the Matrix’s digital rain code.
What PHP code looks like to experienced WordPress plugin developers. Source: Giphy.com
Everyone, that is …except me!
I’m just a blog writer with no coding skills and a burning desire to add “prompt engineer” to my CV.
So, in this post, we’ll explore how to leverage the power of ChatGPT to build a simple custom WordPress plugin quickly and securely, even if you lack extensive coding skills.
We’ll do this by:
1) Asking ChatGPT to generate the code for a useful plugin that we can test, and
2) Running the code generated by ChatGPT past our team of professional plugin developers so they can review it and provide their honest feedback.
We’ll cover the following:
Step 1 – Define the Plugin’s Functionality
Before using ChatGPT to generate code, we need to have a clear understanding of the functionality we want our plugin to provide.
This starts by outlining the specific features, actions, or modifications we’ll want to achieve with our plugin. This will then help us generate accurate prompts for ChatGPT and ensure that our AI-generated code aligns with our desired outcomes.
Step 2 – Generate Code Snippets with ChatGPT
To generate our code snippets using ChatGPT, we’ll keep things simple (and free) and use the freely available interface provided by OpenAI.
Take #1…
Note: My first attempt at using ChatGPT to create a WordPress plugin from scratch was way too ambitious. I asked ChatGPT to build me a simple WordPress time-traveldummy text generating plugin, using the prompt below…
This prompt will surely kick ChatGPT’s WordPress plugin development tyres.
As someone who spends a lot of time writing WordPress tutorials, I often need dummy content to test plugins, create screenshots, etc.
So, I thought it would be great to model my AI-generated dummy content plugin on a plugin I often use called FakerPress.
ChatGPT pushed back on my request and let me know that creating a fully functional WordPress plugin with all the features I requested was beyond the scope of a single response.
However, it did offer to provide me with a basic template, guide me on how to implement some of the features I mentioned, and even gave me instructions on how to create a plugin directory and file…
Mmm…maybe my first attempt at creating a WordPress plugin was too ambitious!
At first, ChatGPT output code that looked quite impressive…
To someone who knows ‘zip’ about coding, the above code snippet sure looks impressive!
ChatGPT also output all the additional code required to complete the next steps.
Lacking coding skills, I relied on ChatGPT to guide me through each step of the plugin development process.
With the plugin code output, the next step was to upload the plugin to my test site and test it to make sure it works.
Step 3 – Test The Custom Plugin
After uploading the folder containing the plugin code to the wp-content > plugins directory of my test site and activating it inside the Plugins screen…
And now for the moment we’ve all been waiting for [drumroll]…
I got a fatal error!
What an anticlimax…the lowest point of my WordPress plugin development career!
Assuming that maybe I didn’t add the additional snippets that ChatGPT provided correctly, I went back and asked for all the code to be provided as a single file that I could simply copy and paste to overwrite and update the uploaded plugin file…
Why couldn’t it just have given me the entire copy and paste code the first time?
There was a lot of code to output, so whenever the process came to a standstill, I instructed ChatGPT to continue…
ChatGPT sometimes just needs a little gentle encouragement to keep going.
After repeating this process several times, ChatGPT output the entire code and even provided some helpful information.
After waiting a whole 2 minutes…ChatGPT finally output all of the plugin code!
I uploaded the plugin file with the new code to my test site, then jumped into the site’s admin area and activated the plugin.
It worked! Or, so it seemed.
ChatGPT gave the plugin its own menu item…
ChatGPT created all this!
And a settings screen with lots of fancy boxes and fields…
Looks impressive…but will it work?
But I couldn’t see a field to specify how many posts or pages to create, so I simply ticked some boxes, entered some values, and clicked on the “Save Changes” button to see what happens.
And now, for the moment of truth…
And…absolutely nothing happened!
The newest lowest point of my WordPress plugin development career…a plugin that does nothing!
My fancy-ass plugin was all make-believe, just like one of those children’s playground spaceships that’s filled with useless knobs you can turn and buttons you can press while pretending to be flying in outer space.
So, I reached out to one of our developers via Slack and asked them to look at the plugin file.
Some of the comments that came back included the following:
“The plugin tries to generate random content on each and every admin page load”
“It calls a function dummy_content_generator_generate_content_paragraphs which, in turn, attempts to call dummy_content_generator_get_random_paragraph for every paragraph it tries to generate. The problem is that there is no dummy_content_generator_get_random_paragraph function.
“The page loads to a point, then it errors out because there’s more missing stuff”
“Other than all the mentioned issues, there’s no validation whatsoever, and no escaping of the output, which is terrible”
“In terms of having something as starting point, this is a very, very poor one. In terms of having a working plugin, this is nowhere near that”
After some back and forth discussions , it was deemed that there was quite a lot wrong with the plugin, that it would take a lot of work to fix it, and they suggested I scrap the project.
At this point, however, I was too invested in my mission to simply abandon everything and give up. Recalling Sir Winston Churchill’s famous words (“Fetch me another brandy” “Never give in, never give in, never, never, never…”), I decided it was time for…
Take #2…
Ok, so my first attempt to get ChatGPT to build a WordPress plugin from scratch was a dismal failure. This in itself provided some valuable insights into ChatGPT’s ability to perform complex coding tasks (or, as someone in the team put it, “you can’t code using ChatGPT without having extensive coding knowledge.”)
So, for “Take #2,” I decided to try again with a simpler plugin request.
Going back to the drawing board, a genius lightbulb moment lit up in my mind…why not ask ChatGPT to suggest ideas for simple WordPress plugins it could then generate the code for?
So, that’s what I did. Here’s the prompt I promptly engineered…
My genius prompt.
And here’s the list of suggested plugins ChatGPT replied with…
The blueprint of my WordPress plugin empire.
I liked the last suggestion, so I asked ChatGPT to generate the code for a functional content duplicator plugin, and it immediately went to work.
This is what a license to print money looks like!
ChatGPT generated the following code for the plugin in the blink of an eye:
<?php
/*
Plugin Name: Content Duplicator
Description: Allows users to duplicate posts, pages, or custom post types with one click.
Version: 1.0.0
Author: Your Name
Author URI: https://yourwebsite.com
*/
// Add duplicate action links to post row actions
function content_duplicator_add_duplicate_link( $actions, $post ) {
if ( current_user_can( 'edit_posts' ) ) {
$actions['duplicate'] = '<a href="' . wp_nonce_url( admin_url( 'admin-post.php?action=content_duplicator_duplicate_post&post_id=' . $post->ID ), 'content_duplicator_duplicate_post' ) . '" title="Duplicate this item" rel="permalink">Duplicate</a>';
}
return $actions;
}
add_filter( 'post_row_actions', 'content_duplicator_add_duplicate_link', 10, 2 );
// Duplicate the post
function content_duplicator_duplicate_post() {
if ( isset( $_GET['post_id'] ) ) {
$post_id = absint( $_GET['post_id'] );
if ( current_user_can( 'edit_posts' ) && wp_verify_nonce( $_GET['_wpnonce'], 'content_duplicator_duplicate_post' ) ) {
$post = get_post( $post_id );
$args = array(
'post_title' => $post->post_title . ' (Duplicate)',
'post_content' => $post->post_content,
'post_type' => $post->post_type,
'post_status' => $post->post_status,
'post_parent' => $post->post_parent,
'post_author' => get_current_user_id(),
);
$new_post_id = wp_insert_post( $args );
if ( $new_post_id ) {
// Duplicate meta fields
$meta_fields = get_post_custom( $post_id );
foreach ( $meta_fields as $key => $values ) {
foreach ( $values as $value ) {
add_post_meta( $new_post_id, $key, $value );
}
}
// Redirect to the duplicated post
wp_redirect( admin_url( 'post.php?action=edit&post=' . $new_post_id ) );
exit;
}
}
}
}
add_action( 'admin_post_content_duplicator_duplicate_post', 'content_duplicator_duplicate_post' );
It even provided a set of instructions after generating the code.
The code not only comes with instructions, but ChatGPT even says “Please”!
I then uploaded the new plugin file to the wp-content > plugins directory of my test site using The Hub’s file manager.
There’s a lot of action to unpack in this screenshot.
And created a dummy post to test the plugin with…
Did the plugin duplicate this cheesy post? Let’s find out!
Here are the post’s menu options before activating the plugin…
A default post with default options.
After activating the plugin…
“Activate Content Duplicator” – Sounds like a line from a Star Trek movie.
Success!
A gratuitous screenshot proving that the plugin successfully activated.
The plugin activated. But did it actually work?
Here’s my test post again (note that the plugin added a new “Duplicate” item to the menu after activation). I then clicked on “Duplicate” to see what happens…
ChatGPT even added a “Duplicate” menu item tooltip to the code!
And a duplicate post was created!
A duplicate of the original post.
Here’s the table of posts showing entries for the original and duplicated post.
The original post and its cloned version.
I’m sure that with better prompt engineering and some code tweaking, the plugin could have been significantly improved. For example, I would prefer if the plugin set the post status of the newly-duplicated post to ‘draft’ instead of publishing it, but ChatGPT delivered a simple WordPress plugin that worked. It was basic, but it did the job.
The last step was to ask someone who codes WordPress plugins for a living to scrutinize the code and get their opinion about using a tool like ChatGPT to code plugins.
Feedback from Our Expert Plugin Developers
Shortly after uploading the plugin to one of our testing channels, I got a ping from one of our developers. Here are some of the key points provided in their feedback:
“ChatGPT et al are decent at answering questions you already know the answer to.”
“I also used it in the past to build a simple plugin for me, but as long as I was giving more complex prompts, it started to mess things around, so eventually I manually debug the given code to work, cause else it’d take ages for it to actually debug it line by line.”
“Basically, it does what it says. However, it does what it says very literally. As in, it will duplicate a post and its corresponding postmeta (custom) fields. However, it doesn’t seem like it will propagate any taxonomies to the duplicated post (the plugin should copy and assign the same taxonomy terms, such as categories or tags, from the original post to the duplicated post).”
If I was to be super-nitpicky about this, I’d also mention that it’s not L10n-ready – there won’t be an option to translate this plugin. But, that’s just being very nitpicky – I don’t really think, nor would I expect, a prompt-generated plugin to be generic enough to be needing something like that at all. To me, it is more of a “very specific problem domain” kind of a thing, including the language used. At the end of the day, it does do what it says it will, which is very nice.”
In addition to examining the WordPress plugin code generated by ChatGPT and providing feedback as shown above, our developers also agreed with the following key points after assessing ChatGPT’s current capabilities to generate code:
1 – It’s important to exercise caution and not blindly accept ChatGPT-generated code as correct.
ChatGPT can provide answers, but it’s up to the user to assess whether the answer is correct or not.
There is a risk of receiving incorrect or nonsensical answers from ChatGPT, both obvious and subtle.
It’s important to exercise caution and not blindly accept the generated code as correct.
ChatGPT’s output should be treated as autocomplete, making life easier but requiring caution and verification.
The ability to discern good code from bad or nonsensical code, however, implies that…
2 – Users should have sufficient knowledge and understanding of WordPress plugin development to evaluate and modify the generated code as needed.
ChatGPT can help simplify and expedite the process of building simple custom WordPress plugins, generate code snippets, and provide explanations. Anything more complex, however, requires plugin development experience and coding skills.
Using ChatGPT without sufficient knowledge can lead to negative consequences or unreliable code.
Relying solely on ChatGPT without critical thinking is similar to blindly copying the first answer from Stack Overflow (Stack Overflow threads provide more context, multiple answers, and feedback from other users, making it a more reliable resource, but Stack Overflow threads tend to be more generic, whereas ChatGPT can provide specific answers to individual queries).
3 – Utilizing other resources, such as WordPress documentation, tutorials, and community forums, alongside ChatGPT can provide a more comprehensive understanding of WordPress plugin development.
As you explore the possibilities of using ChatGPT for WordPress plugin development, it’s valuable to engage with the WordPress community. Share your experiences, ask for feedback, and seek guidance from experienced developers. Participating in forums, attending WordPress meetups, or joining online communities can provide valuable insights and help you refine your plugin development process.
Additionally, consider following WordPress security best practices to safeguard your website from potential vulnerabilities. ChatGPT can provide recommendations on security measures you can implement to protect your plugin.
It’s also essential to maintain a clear understanding of your desired functionality and thoroughly review and test the generated code and secure your custom plugins before deploying them to a production environment.
Can ChatGPT Turn You Into a WordPress Plugin Developer?
In this article, we’ve explored how you can utilize ChatGPT to build simple custom WordPress plugins, even if you have limited coding experience.
In other articles, we’ve seen that AI-powered tools like ChatGP can streamline your workflow, boost productivity, and unlock new possibilities (check out our recent article on ways that ChatGPT can help you as a WordPress developer).
While there are over 60,000 free WordPress plugins available covering every type of functionality you can imagine, sometimes you may need a custom solution to meet a client’s specific requirements.
Beyond the core functionality of your plugin, you can also leverage ChatGPT to generate code for custom user interfaces. With its ability to understand prompts and generate HTML, CSS, and JavaScript snippets, you can create intuitive admin interfaces, front-end components, and interactive elements that will enhance the user experience and allow you to deliver a polished final product.
By utilizing the language model’s capabilities, you can generate code snippets, optimize functionality, and create user-friendly interfaces. However, it’s crucial to understand the generated code, review and refine it, and thoroughly test your custom plugins before deploying them to your live website.
The generated code may also require adjustments to align with coding standards, naming conventions, or specific project requirements. This requires a certain amount of coding knowledge and skills, as does optimizing the code and ensuring it follows WordPress coding guidelines for better maintainability.
The bottom line:
Here are my findings after trying to get ChatGPT to code me a plugin from scratch:
I couldn’t have gotten this done without the help of our experienced developers.
Using ChatGPT to generate code without coding knowledge is really challenging – it helps to know what you are doing 🙂
While ChatGPT is a powerful and valuable tool, it doesn’t seem like AI will replace skilled coders any time soon.
Interested in Developing WordPress plugins?
Check out some of our tutorials and articles on WordPress plugin development:
Let’s face it, AI or artificial intelligence has revolutionized society and transformed the way we do business— with ecommerce as no exception. While the use of AI has certainly garnered some pushback, the implementation of AI has emerged as a game-changer for many industries.
With AI’s ability to process data at lightning speed, online retailers today can streamline their processes, enhance the customer experience, and drive sales like never before. Even ecommerce platforms likeShopify are integrating AI into their platform to add more value for users and merchants, and many of Shopify’s more popular apps use artificial intelligence to give you the benefit of machine learning, algorithms, and much more.
With its many advantages, Artificial Intelligence tools can help you produce content, manage your workflows, and provide better customer services, saving you time and money needed for arduous tasks.
In this article by Ecommerce Pro, we’re going to explore the top ten AI tools and appsthat we think are worth giving a try in your quest to boost your ecommerce success on Shopify.
Looking to integrate AI tools into your Shopify store? Ecommerce Pro offers expert assistance in optimizing Shopify websites with the power of AI. Reach out to us by filling out this form.
We can’t talk about AI technology without mentioning ChatGPT. Sometimes termed the “Google of AI”, when used correctly, the AI chatbot can be an invaluable AI tool for Shopify online stores.
By leveraging ChatGPT, you can create your own compelling copy, from product descriptions to blog posts. You can even integrate it into chatbots or use it for email marketing which can be used for customer interaction and retargeting.
While AI chatbots and AI-generated content have undeniably come a long way, it’s important that we acknowledge that much of the content generated by ChatGPT can fall a bit flat. Not to mention that you need to fact-check everything, especially when it comes to data that comes after 2021.
If you wish to use ChatGPT effectively, it all comes down to critical evaluation and adding a personal flair to its content to efficiently enhance your Shopify store and online business!
ChatGPT is free to use.
Want to improve your content strategy and recognize the gaps in your existing content? Try Market Muse, an AI solution that was created by SEO specialists, content strategists, marketers, engineers, and data scientists who are on a mission to improve your website’s content with AI SEO and content strategy.
What Market Muse does is that it analyzes your existing website content, and suggests ways for you to improve it for search engines and organic search, and also how to improve content to make it more engaging for your site visitors. Market Muse will help you generate topics customers are interested in (useful if you run a blog with your Shopify business).
Manual content audits can take hours, but with Market Muse, you can automate the process. Market Muse offers a 7-day Standard plan free trial. The Standard plan starts at $149/month.
Want to create surreal images and art? Deep Dream uses AI to create intriguing and surreal images that have a dream-like quality. Created by Google engineer, Alexander Mordvintsev, Deep Dream AI uses a convolutional neural network to create dream-like and mesmerizing visuals.
While Deep Dream AI and similar technology did garner their own pushback from artists, the AI tool gained popularity among graphic artists and designers who are ready to embrace AI to explore new possibilities in their creative process. Creatives use the tool to generate visually captivating compositions and have used it for their inspiration, creating artistic merchandise in the process.
Overall, Deep Dream poses a unique opportunity to Shopify businesses to elevate the visuals of the virtual storefront, helping you stand out from the competition. By incorporating AI-generated images into product listings, banners, and other promotional material, you can create content that captivates potential customers—or simply use it for artistic inspiration as part of your process.
Deep Dream starts at $19/month.
Want to translate your Shopify store into any language and add currency convertors to cater to your worldwide audience? Try Trancy’s AI Language Translate tool.
With this AI tool and Shopify app, you can now effortlessly translate your Shopify store into any language as well as incorporate different currencies to boost your sales worldwide.
What’s great about Trancy and what makes it popular in the Shopify community is that its auto-detect translator has no word limits, and even translates text on images using AI technology. The app also supports many translation methods, whether users prefer manual translations or AI-driven translations. With this AI tool and app, you will enhance the international user experience, with its auto-detect system based on geolocation, making it even more convenient for your international customers to shop with you.
Free to install, with a basic plan at $11.90/month
Thousands of brands on Shopify are using Recart SMS to elevate their marketing strategies by doubling down on email and SMS conversions. The App uses AI to personalize text and email campaigns at a large scale, helping brands welcome their new subscribers, diminish the instance of abandoned carts, and drive reorders effortlessly.
What’s great about Recart and why it has so many high-ranking reviews is that it maximizes your results with the help of AI tools to optimize your SMS and email content like never before, while also determining the best sending times. You’ll also enjoy real-time analytics, making it easier to stay on top of your SMS and email marketing performance. The app also provides a Customer Success Manager (CMS), built-in compliance, and 7-day-click attribution for sales.
It comes with a 21-day free trial!
Another AI tool that can be a tremendous game changer for Shopify online stores is Google Cloud: Recommendation AI, through its personalized and data-driven product recommendations. This tool leverages advanced machine learning algorithms that analyze your target customer’s behavior, patterns, and preferences to then generate relevant product recommendations.
Because of the nature of machine learning, Google Cloud’s AI Recommendation service is made to keep on learning and adjusting, ensuring that the recommendations stay relevant to the customers. As your customer preferences evolve, AI algorithms refine the recommendations, allowing businesses to stay ahead of trends and recommend new products effectively. Shopify online stores can use this AI tool to fine-tune and maximize their revenue potential, increase consumer engagement, and create enduring customer relationships by integrating Google Cloud’s AI Recommendation service into their Shopify stores.
You can get started with Google Cloud: Recommendations AI for free.
Looking to protect your Shopify business from fraud? AI doesn’t just help you generate content and make product suggestions, it can also be used for security and you can look no further than Signifyd.
If you ever find yourself worrying about financial losses because of fraud, this AI app and tool offers users some seriously comprehensive fraud protection tailored specifically for ecommerce businesses, including brands operating from the Shopify platform. With its advanced machine learning technology and extensive data analysis capabilities, Signifyd has been empowering ecommerce merchants to make informed decisions about accepting or rejecting transactions, minimizing risks and losses associated with fraud.
Signifyd works by evaluating orders at checkout. The app delivers instant decisions backed by a financial guarantee against fraud and non-fraud chargebacks on all approved orders. This AI tool effectively shifts the liability for chargeback losses away from Shopify merchants, allowing you to trust customers and grow fearlessly while reducing risk against fraud.
Signifyd starts at $1,500/month and you can contact them directly for pricing and ROI analysis.
Another AI art-generating tool that’s worth checking out is Neural Love, which is free to use. This adaptable AI image creator, though still in its infancy, combines the capabilities of media editing tools and AI generators to create spectacular graphics in the user’s preferred style.
It has a lot of distinctive tools and features, such as an Uncrop tool, Image enhancement, AI avatars, and more. Users can also process and synthesize video, music, and images using an API or proprietary software, depending on the version. It can be used to create an endless supply of art and content.
What makes Neural Love stand apart from other image-generating AI is that it can also be used to process video and audio enhancements, making it a more versatile AI tool.
Neural Love can be tried out for free.
Create a new revenue stream with video. Smarzer is an AI-powered interactive video tool that brands use to enhance the shopping experience and interactivity of websites with the use of videos. It enables ecommerce businesses to create a more dynamic Shopify website through the use of interactive videos that give customers a more immersive, and captivating experience.
Using Smartzer, you may add clickable tags or icons to particular products that are being highlighted in your videos, making them shoppable. By clicking on the tags, viewers can learn more about the products and make purchases from the video.
The Smartzer app on Shopify comes with easy-to-use creation tools and analytics. Brands using the service include Samsung and Bulgari.
It comes with a 7-day free trial, followed by a Mini subscription that starts at $299/month.
Want a virtual customer service assistant powered by AI? Give Watson Assistant a try. This AI-powered chatbot and VA allow businesses to build and effectively deploy AI conversational agents that can interact with customers through text and even voice interfaces. The AI tool boasts the ability to deliver consistent and intelligent customer care across all channels and touchpoints, with AI that uses natural language processing capabilities.
Watson Assistant can not only understand user intents, but it can also differentiate between entities, and even understands context, enabling it to provide accurate and contextually relevant responses—impressive stuff. Watson Assistant can be integrated with Shopify stores.
The Lite version is free, while their Plus plan starts at $140/month.
Conclusion
There you have it, we’ve given you 10 AI tools for Shopify businesses to explore. These AI tools are here to help you succeed in the ecommerce landscape, ranging from content generation to customer engagement, offering innovative solutions to enhance your Shopify business.
Remember that staying ahead in the ecommerce industry means embracing new technologies like Artificial Intelligence, and you should always keep an eye on the trends.
Ecommerce Pro is here to help you navigate the ever-changing landscape and make the most out of these powerful tools.
Optimize your Shopify business with AI. Fill out our contact form to get in touch with Ecommerce Pro.
Get in Touch
At Ecommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful ecommerce businesses on Shopify. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
How TPC Toronto is Building a New Home for Canadian Golf
54 holes, three distinct course layouts, numerous accolades, one exciting path ahead: TPC Toronto at Osprey Valley is already one of Canada’s most acclaimed public golf destinations, and the future only looks brighter.
A background on TPC Toronto
Considering the scope of the property, the quality of the golf and their future plans, TPC Toronto is a facility with humble beginnings. It opened in 1992 as one course—the Heathlands—a fantastic links-style layout that sat off the beaten path and stayed a hidden gem in the Greater Toronto Area for years.
The facility added two more highly acclaimed, highly distinctive 18-hole layouts—the Hoot course and the North course—and in 2018, it became the only Canadian facility to join the TPC Network: a collection of courses across North America that are closely partnered with the PGA TOUR.
Bold new renovations, amenities and accommodations
In 2021, TPC Toronto set course for the future by initiating a significant expansion of their on-site amenities: two new clubhouses, an event space and stay-and-play accommodations. Not only will these new additions help to enhance the customer experience, but they will help to raise TPC Toronto’s profile even further.
The facility is also currently renovating the North Course to deliver an even better on-course experience for golfers of all skill levels.
TPC Toronto and Golf Canada partnership
As if the renovation plans weren’t enough, TPC Toronto announced in 2022 that they would be partnering with Golf Canada on a bold new vision for the property. The partnership will see Golf Canada move their headquarters to TPC Toronto and create a new campus that will also include the headquarters for The First Tee – Canada as well as the Canadian Golf Hall of Fame.
With these plans in full swing, TPC Toronto is set to become a home for Canadian golf and a focal point for the game’s past, present and future in Canada.
Ambitious growth requires the right technology partner
We’ve spent a lot of time thinking about what to do here, planning what to do here, and all of that was done with a vision to ultimately build one of Canada’s great golf destinations.
– Chris Humeniuk, President, TPC Toronto
Given the growth and complexity of operations at TPC Toronto, President Chris Humeniuk knew that he needed a technology partner that could keep up and scale with the facility’s ambitious plans:
Their previous system used old, inflexible code, and the team at TPC Toronto needed software with an API that allowed them to customize and leverage more tools as the facility expanded
With customer experience at a premium, they wanted a platform that could help them understand their golfers better, communicate effectively to different audiences and deliver a seamless experience online and at the facility
Given that changing software and implementing a new system can be a challenge, Humeniuk wanted to go with a partner who would make the onboarding process simple, efficient and effective
Lightspeed delivered what TPC Toronto was looking for
What initially impressed Humeniuk most about the switch to Lightspeed was the ease of onboarding and customer support:
“Lightspeed sat right beside us all the way through the implementation process and really made it easy for our team to transition to a new system.”
From that point forward, Humeniuk recognized that Lightspeed can scale with the facility:
“With each phase of implementation, we’ve realized Lightspeed has the ability to grow with us.”
Simplifying operations, tending to the golfer experience
Lightspeed is a key part of TPC Toronto’s day-to-day operations. From tee sheet management, retail & restaurant POS and payment processing to business intelligence, sales, marketing and inventory management, the platform’s simplicity and versatility are major assets for the facility.
For Brian Decker, TPC Toronto’s Director of Marketing and Communications, Lightspeed’s data capture and reporting functionality make it far easier for TPC Toronto to understand its customers, communicate effectively and deliver the right experience, at the right time:
“Lightspeed has been great for providing us with a tremendous amount of data. When customers are on site, what do they spend their money on? What do they like to do? Where are they coming from? That data gives us a real checkpoint and helps us make smarter decisions throughout the business.”
The perfect partner for a period of growth and change
For a facility that prizes the customer experience and aims to set their staff up for success, TPC Toronto needed a technology partner that delivered on both sides of the register. During a period of growth and change, simplicity, functionality and efficiency are essential.
“This is a transformative time, and having a partner like Lightspeed that allows us to have all those different customer touch points and provide a seamless experience has been a really big priority for us. We really needed a partner who could help us transition from our early stage to the next stage.”
Ready to take your golf course to the next level?
TPC Toronto uses Lightspeed Golf because it can scale with their facility and for its ability to deliver on a day-to-day basis. If you’d like to learn more about how Lightspeed Golf can work for your golf facility, talk to one of our golf experts today.
7 Best URL Shorteners for WordPress to Track Links
Are you looking for a way to shorten your WordPress website links so you can track clicks when they’re shared?
If you have long and unreadable URLs on your website, then a URL shortener can reduce them to a few characters. This makes it easier to share them on any platform. You can also track how many times they’re clicked and more.
In this article, we will show you the best URL shorteners for WordPress to track links.
What is a URL Shortener and Why Use It on Your Site?
A URL shortener is a tool that helps convert long WordPress website links into short and shareable links. It simplifies complex URLs that are hard to read by reducing a few characters and turning them into small links.
When a user clicks the shortened URL, they’re redirected to the correct page. They use 301 redirects, which tell search engines that the link is permanent and not going anywhere. Using a 301 doesn’t affect your WordPress SEO.
Short URLs are really useful for sharing content on social media. Some social media platforms like Twitter offer a limited number of characters that you can use. If you have a lengthy link, then it can take up a lot of space.
Using a shortened URL helps save valuable character space that you can use to write compelling copy, get more clicks, and boost engagement. For example, on WPBeginner we use a custom short URL to share content on Twitter.
Besides that, you can use URL shorteners to convert affiliate links into more readable links.
Affiliate links are usually lengthy, hard to remember, and contain your affiliate ID or username. This makes them complex, and it looks something like this:
You can convert them into shareable and branded links using a URL shortener. Some tools even let you cloak affiliate links and make them look more professional, like:
https://wpbeginner.com/refer/productname
The best part about using URL shortener tools is that they also track the number of clicks. This way, you can see which link gets the most clicks.
That said, let’s look at some of the best URL shorteners for your WordPress website.
1. Pretty Links
Pretty Links is the best WordPress URL shortener plugin and the most popular affiliate link management tool. It helps shrink long and complex links into shortened URLs with your brand name.
You can use the plugin for links outside your website. For instance, you’ll be able to cloak affiliate links and turn them into readable URLs. This makes it a great tool for creating shareable links for different platforms, like social media.
When shortening a URL, Pretty Links gives multiple options for redirection. You can select 302 and 307 temporary redirects, 301 permanent redirects, and more.
Using Pretty Links, you can manage all your shortened URLs from the WordPress dashboard. In the premium version, there are options to group links into categories and tags.
The plugin offers other features as well, like an auto-linking feature. You can add affiliate links for certain keywords and the plugin will automatically insert them in the content.
Pretty Links also helps track the number of clicks for each shortened URL. It shows a report inside the WordPress dashboard, displaying the browser, operating system, timestamp, host, URI, and other data for each link.
Recommended For: Pretty Links is the best tool for anyone looking for a complete link management solution for their WordPress site. You can easily manage affiliate links, cloak and brand them, shorten any URL on your site, and track link clicks.
Pros:
Beginner-friendly plugin for creating custom links
Easily manage and organize your URLs from the WordPress dashboard
Cloaks complex affiliates links
Use the auto-linking feature to automatically add links to specific keywords
Offers social sharing buttons to easily share short links
Seamless integration with other plugins like MonsterInsights
Cons:
It doesn’t offer an automatic link uncloaking feature for Amazon
You cannot check if a link is broken before publishing it
Pricing: Pretty Links premium version prices start from $99.50 per year. However, there is also a free version of Pretty Links you can use to get started.
Bitly is one of the most popular URL shorteners in the market. It helps you create short links, QR codes, and link-in-bio pages. The tool is very easy to use, and you get started for free.
To shorten a URL, simply enter the link, and Bitly will create a short link for you. In the free version, you will get a URL with a ‘bit.ly’ domain name, and it will look like this: https://bit.ly/3YqTCEH.
If you upgrade to the premium version, then you add a custom domain and remove Bitly branding from the links. At WPBeginner, we also use Bitly to create custom short URLs for our site.
Bitly makes it very easy to track individual links and get analytics inside your account dashboard. For instance, the tool will show the link clicks, the technology used by your users to click on the short URL, and the location from where you get the most clicks.
There is also offers Bitly’s WordPress plugin. It is a free plugin that lets you shorten a link for selected post types. You can also view the number of clicks from your dashboard for each shortened URL.
Recommended For: Bitly is perfect for free users who want to give link-shortening a try, as well as enterprises that want a robust link-shortening and tracking tool. You can easily create short links and QR codes for your business. Plus, it offers detailed analytics and reports for link clicks, QR code scans, country-level data, and more.
Pros:
Create short and custom links in a few clicks
View link click reports from your Bitly account dashboard
Offers a free WordPress plugin
Lets you create QR codes for links
Offers 1 link-in bio page feature
You can connect a custom domain with Bitly
Cons:
The free version has limited features
It uses Bitly branding in short links in the free plan
You cannot schedule or auto-link URLs to keywords
Pricing: Bitly offers a free version that lets you create 10 short links and QR codes per month. However, there are paid plans that start from $8 per month.
ThirstyAffiliates is the best link management plugin for WordPress that lets you cloak your affiliate links. You can turn long, unshareable affiliate links into beautiful short URLs that are easy to read.
We’ve been using ThirstyAffiliates on our websites, including WPBeginner for over 5 years.
The plugin lets you manage all your links from your WordPress dashboard. You can easily create branded links, add them to your content, and arrange and organize links into categories.
The plugin even tracks your links and shows reports inside the WordPress admin panel. You get to see full statistics of how your shortened links are performing and see top-performing affiliates.
ThirstyAffiliates also integrates with MonsterInsights, so you can track them in Google Analytics. It also tracks geolocation and shows which region you get the most clicks from.
ThirstyAffiliates is more than just a URL shortener. You can use it to auto-insert affiliate links in the content, import links, check links with 404 errors, schedule affiliate links, and more.
Recommended For: If you’re an affiliate marketer or a blogger using WordPress, then ThirstyAffiliates is for you. It’s very easy to use, and you can shorten any URL in just a few clicks. ThirstyAffiliates is also a great alternative to Pretty Links. You can see our comparison on Pretty Links vs ThirstyAffiliates for more details.
Pros:
Very easy to use and shorten URLs
It lets you choose a prefix for your links
Easily manage all your links from a single place
Allows automatic keyword linking
Offers smart uncloaking feature for Amazon Associates links
It automatically checks links for 404 errors
Cons:
Dashboard reports are not that detailed
It doesn’t integrate with eCommerce plugins like WooCommerce
The free version is great but offers limited features
Pricing: ThristyAffiliates premium plans start from $79.50 per year. There is also a ThristyAffiliates free version you can use to get started.
URL Shortener by MyThemeShop is a free WordPress plugin that helps create short links for your website. It is a beginner-friendly plugin that’s lightweight and won’t slow down your website.
You can easily create a short version of your URLs and share them on social media. The plugin also helps trim long links of external sources. This makes your links more readable and shareable.
URL Shortener by MyThemeShop offers multiple redirection types to choose from. It lets you select between 301, 302, and 307 reductions. You can manage all your short links from your WordPress admin panel and also organize them into different categories.
The best part is that it also tracks all your URLs and shows the number of clicks. This is really useful if you have affiliate links and want to see which affiliate is getting the most clicks and generating revenue.
Recommended For: If you’re just starting a new website and looking for a free WordPress plugin to shorten URLs and track them, then URL Shortener by MyThemeShop is the best choice. It lets you customize your short link, pick a redirection type, and offers multiple features for free.
Pros:
User-friendly and lightweight plugin
Offers auto-linking feature in the free plan
Organize your links into categories
Open short links in a new tab or window
Add nofollow tags to your affiliate links
Cons:
Click tracking report shows limited information
Doesn’t integrate with analytics plugins like MonsterInsights
You don’t get a link scheduler or broken link checker
Pricing: URL Shortener by MyThemeShop is available for free.
URL Shortify is another free WordPress URL shortener plugin and is a great alternative to URL Shortener by MyThemeShop and Bitly’s WordPress plugin.
You can easily create short links from your WordPress dashboard, select redirection type and even group links into categories. The plugin also lets you enable the option to automatically add nofollow and sponsored tags to your links.
During our testing, what made URL Shortify stand out was its dashboard reports. It shows more details compared to other free options on your list.
For instance, you’ll see click history, top locations, referrers, devices, browsers, platforms, and more. The report also shows details of each click, so you know how your short URLs are performing.
Recommended For: URL Shortify is a good free solution for affiliate marketers, bloggers, podcasters, and anyone looking to manage links on their WordPress site. The biggest draw is for people who want detailed reports inside the WordPress admin area.
Pros:
Easily customize your short links using your brand
Automatically create short URLs for your posts and pages
Manage and organize links from the WordPress dashboard
Track link clicks and get details analytical reports
Integrates seamlessly with WooCommerce and Easy Digital Downloads
Cons:
There is no broken link checker in the free version
WP.me Shortlinks is a URL shortener by Jetpack. It lets you create short URLs from the WordPress content editor, so you can easily share them on different platforms.
Jetpack is a plugin suite that offers different features. However, its core focus is on performance, security, and marketing.
You’ll need to manually activate the WP.me Shortlinks tools from Jetpack settings. Once that’s done, you can access it from the content editor by clicking the Jetpack icon and heading to the Shortlink option. The tool creates short links using the wp.me domain.
While the tool is straightforward to use, it doesn’t offer a lot of features that you’ll find in other plugins on our list.
For instance, you don’t get a dashboard to manage your short links, select redirection type, add your custom domain to short links, remove wp.me branding from links, and auto-link URLs to specific search terms.
You also don’t get built-in dashboard reports to see link click stats. You’ll need to manually set up link click tracking in Google Analytics.
Recommended For: WP.me is a great tool if you’re already using Jetpack on your WordPress site. This way, you can quickly shorten URLs from the content editor.
Pros:
It comes prebuilt in the Jetpack plugin
With Jetpack, you get a whole suite of plugins along with a URL shortener
Easy to use and can be accessed from the content editor
You can use it for free
Cons:
It doesn’t offer a custom branding option for short links
No option to select the redirection type
You cannot set up auto-link to keywords
There is no dashboard to manage and organize short URLs
You don’t get built-in reports to track shortened URLs
Pricing: WP.me Shortlinks is available in the free version of Jetpack. However, there are also premium plans that start from $4.95 per month.
TinyURL is a URL shortener software you can use to create short links and QR codes. It is a great alternative if you don’t want to use a WordPress plugin or Bitly and just want to quickly condense long URLs.
The best part about the tool during our testing is that you can create unlimited short URLs in the free version. This makes a budget-friendly option for new websites and beginners. However, your links with TinyURL branding in the URL.
To add your own brand name in the links and access analytics, you’ll need to upgrade to the premium version. This will unlock reports where you can see URL click history, dashboard report, time chart of clicks over time, map of where people click your links, and more.
Recommended For: TinyURL is a budget-friendly option for businesses looking for a premium URL shortener. You can customize links using your domain or subdomain while tracking link clicks.
Pros:
Very easy to use and create short URLs
Short links don’t have an expiration date
Easily manage your links from the TinyURL dashboard
Affordable pricing plans
Cons:
The free version has limited features and functionality
No integration with WordPress plugins or analytical tools
You cannot auto-link, auto-cloak, or schedule short links
Analytical reports show basic information
Pricing: The base software is free to use. However, you’ll need a paid plan to remove TinyURL branding and view reports. The premium plans start from $9.99 per month (billed annually).
Which is the Best URL Shortener for WordPress?
After reviewing multiple plugins and tools, we recommend Pretty Links as the best URL shortener for WordPress.
It is packed with features and helps convert long and complex URLs into readable and shareable links. The plugin is super easy to set up and use.
You also get a handful of redirection types to choose from, use the auto-linking feature to automatically add links to your content, and manage all the short URLs from your WordPress dashboard.
Besides that, Pretty Links helps track link clicks. You can integrate it with MonsterInsights to track clicks in Google Analytics as well.
On the other hand, if you’re looking for an external tool that shortens links and also offers a WordPress plugin, then you can use Bitly.
FAQs about Best URL Shorteners
Here are some of the most common questions people have about URL shortener tools:
1. Which is the best free URL shortener?
From our testing, we recommend Pretty Links and Bitly as the best free URL shorteners. Pretty Links is great for WordPress sites looking to manage their affiliate links and track them. Bitly is great if you just want to shorten a few URLs.
2. Are URL shorteners good for SEO?
URL shorteners won’t impact your WordPress SEO and website visibility if they’re used wisely. Short links don’t pass the link juice entirely, so you shouldn’t use them as the main form of creating links for your website.
3. Do short URLs expire?
Some short URLs expire while others don’t. It usually depends on the URL shortener you’re using. For instance, custom links created using TinyURL don’t expire.
Elevating Your Customer Experience Journey – Blend Commerce
Picture this: You walk into your favourite coffee shop, and before you even place your order, the barista greets you by name and asks if you’d like your usual. You smile, feeling a sense of warmth and familiarity. That’s the power of a personalised experience—a feeling of being truly known and valued as a customer.
At Blend, exceptional customer experiences are the cornerstone of successful businesses. We understand that in today’s fast-paced and competitive world, connecting with your customers on a deeper level is not just a goal but a necessity. That’s why we can’t wait to introduce you to Jebbit, an innovative and game-changing partner set to create a more enriching & engaging customer experience journey alongside Blend.
What is Jebbit?
Jebbit is a robust platform that elevates customer experiences by providing interactive content and data-driven insights. Its versatile tools empower businesses to create engaging and personalised interactions, gathering valuable data for better audience understanding.
With quizzes, surveys, and more, Jebbit enhances lead generation and conversion optimisation while ensuring consistent engagement across multiple channels. Through targeted marketing and detailed analytics, businesses can refine their strategies, improve customer experiences, and foster brand loyalty, leading to substantial growth and success.
Key Features & Benefits of Jebbit
Interactive Content Creation:
Jebbit’s platform enables businesses to design interactive content, including quizzes, surveys, assessments, and polls. This dynamic approach moves beyond static content and encourages active participation, significantly enhancing engagement and creating memorable customer experiences.
Zero-Party Data Collection:
Gone are the days of solely relying on third-party data. Jebbit offers zero-party data collection, where customers voluntarily share preferences and information directly with businesses. This intentional sharing gives brands deeper insights into customers’ motivations, preferences, and buying behaviour, leading to more personalised and targeted interactions.
Personalisation at Scale:
Leveraging rich zero-party data, businesses can deliver hyper-personalised experiences at scale. Jebbit’s platform allows brands to tailor content and offers based on individual interests and behaviours, fostering a stronger emotional connection between customers and the brand. This drives customer loyalty and advocacy, enabling businesses to stand out in a competitive market.
Seamless Integration and Flexibility:
Jebbit integrates seamlessly with over 35 apps, popular CRMs, and marketing software. Businesses can then centralise their data and streamline operations– from lead generation to customer support and marketing campaigns. Jebbit’s flexible integration capabilities ensure that data flows seamlessly to where it’s most valuable, empowering businesses to make decisions backed by strong data.
Comprehensive Analytics and Reporting:
Jebbit’s platform provides in-depth analytics and reporting tools, offering valuable insights into customer interactions. Tracking engagement rates, conversion metrics, and other key performance indicators helps measure the success of interactive content. Data-driven insights equip businesses with the knowledge to optimise strategies, improve audience targeting, and refine content for better performance.
Launch Anywhere, Reach Everyone:
Jebbit allows businesses to launch interactive content wherever their audience is most engaged. Whether on their website, partner/retailer sites, mobile apps, packaging, or social media platforms, Jebbit ensures seamless accessibility for customers. This flexibility empowers brands to connect with their audience at various touchpoints, delivering memorable interactions wherever customers are.
The Journey to Customer-Centricity
Creating exceptional customer experiences starts with understanding customers at a deeper level. Jebbit’s robust data collection capabilities provide real-time insights into customers’ preferences, behaviours, and intentions. With this knowledge, businesses can make informed decisions, optimising strategies to align precisely with customer expectations.
Additionally, Jebbit empowers businesses to create personalised interactions that resonate with individual customers. By tailoring content and offers based on interests and behaviours, companies foster a sense of connection and relevance, driving increased customer loyalty.
Blend & Jebbit: A Powerful Partnership
At Blend, we believe in the power of collaboration to deliver unmatched value to our clients. Our partnership with Jebbit represents a significant milestone in our pursuit of excellence. We unite cutting-edge customer experience solutions with Jebbit’s interactive content platform, offering you a comprehensive toolkit to elevate your customer interactions.
Your customers deserve the best. Jebbit and Blend are here to make that possible. As you start working on improving your customer experience, rest assured that we will be with you every step of the way, helping you give your customers exactly what they need.
CVO is the way to do it. As CVO and Shopify experts, we work with large eCommerce brands like yours, increasing their metrics and revenue. Enquire today to find out how we can help you.
How to Supercharge Your Restaurant’s Online Reservations
As a restaurant operator, deciding which online reservation software to use can make a big difference for your business.
Read on to find out about what to look for in an online reservation platform. We’ll also outline some digital marketing tricks to help you translate site traffic into bookings.
Let’s dive in.
People still use their phones to book tables–only instead of calling a restaurant, prospective guests are likely looking at an establishment’s website or social pages. That’s where a restaurant reservation system comes in.
What’s a restaurant reservation system?
A restaurant reservation system is an automated Maître D. Instead of taking phone calls, it helps guests find a table in your restaurant, makes the booking and follows up before and after the booking.
What should you look for in a restaurant reservation system?
When deciding which online reservation system is the best fit, keep a few questions in mind:
Does your restaurant reservation system allow you to capture guest data?
Do you own your guest data?
Does the reservation system integrate with your point of sale (POS) system?
Is the online reservation system putting their branding front and center, or yours?
Will the system keep you fully PCI and GDPR compliant?
Are marketing tools that add value to your business included?
Is the reservation system easy to use, and does it come with practical training for your staff?
A lot of these questions focus on data and privacy. Let’s take a look at what these issues mean for your business.
Guest data: one of your most valuable assets
Having full visibility on your guest booking info allows you to create better restaurant marketing campaigns. In other words, you can reach more customers and get more people in your restaurant. Without access and ownership of this data, you’ll be left in the dust when it comes to engaging with your guests. Choose a restaurant reservation system that lets your site visitors book direct reservations and gives you full ownership of your guest data.
Capture more data by integrating with your point of sale
When comparing online reservation systems, knowing whether or not they integrate with your POS system is also an important part of the selection process. A reservation platform that connects to your POS means you can leverage all the guest data collected throughout the guest journey—from discovery and booking, to what they order and beyond.
Prioritize data security and PCI compliance
In addition to owning your guest data, having a fully PCI (Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard) and GDPR compliant system is the only way to stay ahead of the game when it comes to data security. Pick a system that helps you track, manage and store data—whether that’s credit card information or a guest’s phone number.
For 100% GDPR compliance, any data management system should offer the ability to export and delete personal guest data on request. And for PCI compliance, your system should store tokenized credit card details so your staff never has direct access to a credit card number on a guest profile.
Turn your data into action
Finally, make sure your reservation system has robust marketing and guest engagement tools so you can reconnect with your guests using more customized messaging. Look for the ability to automatically tag guest profiles, aggregate guest feedback across review platforms, and automate personalized email marketing campaigns.
Which restaurant reservation system is right for you?
There are lots of different restaurant reservation systems to choose from. Here are a few.
You may already know about Libro. This Software-as-a-Service (SaaS) platform lets restaurant owners manage reservations, reduce no-shows, engage customers and aims to elevate the guest experience. It’s used in over 3,000 locations across Canada, the US and Europe.
Libro lets you control your guests’ entire online reservation experience and retain customer information. And it doesn’t use the commission model that’s sometimes associated with third party sites.
Founded in San Francisco 25 years ago, OpenTable seats over a billion guests every year. It offers digital ordering, an online waitlist, loyalty programming and other tools that can help your restaurant attract, book and follow up on reservations.
Resy was “built by restaurants for restaurants.” It’s a cloud-based system. Updates are made in real time and it’s priced according to a variety of monthly plans. Over the last decade, the ResyOS system has become known among restaurant owners and managers for its functionality and flexibility.
Zenchef is a leader in independent online booking solutions. Independence here is key: Zenchef doesn’t charge commissions on bookings. In addition, customer data belongs solely to the restaurant. The platform also allows users to centralize bookings from different online portals. It’s currently used by over 8,000 restaurants.
Founded in 2015, CoverManager is an online reservation system that doesn’t charge a booking commission per seat. It also allows restaurants to book through direct channels (website, phone and social media pages).
Drive online restaurant reservations through social media
You’ve found your online reservation software. Now it’s time to put it to work for you.
By creating business pages for your Meta accounts—Facebook and Instagram—you’ve taken the first step in being able to capture online reservations. It’s an important part of your restaurant marketing strategy.
Next, give guests a chance to book directly with your restaurant by adding a reservation widget across your social channels. You can opt to use Meta’s “Book Now” feature. Or you can link your restaurant reservation software to your pages. Find out more about the Book Now tool and the different reservations that link to your social platforms on Meta’s website.
Don’t forget about TikTok
TikTok is quickly gaining ground as a search engine—particularly among younger users.
Gen Z and Millennials often turn to TikTok to decide where to eat. Many younger users use the app to find local restaurants. A recent survey showed that over half of users between the ages of 26 and 41 ordered from a restaurant they saw on TikTok.
You can advertise on TikTok or use the app to make short videos that showcase the different things that make your restaurant special.
Sounds too labor intensive? Pick a hashtag and encourage guests to use it in the short videos they make or pictures they take in your restaurant. Find out more about how to leverage their content in our blog post about making the most out of user-generated content here.
A note on third-party reservations
Note that if you use a third-party reservation widget on your socials, you might be unable to optimize their value because you might not be able to access your guest data. This can prevent you from offering patrons truly memorable experiences.
On top of that, you’re likely also paying acquisition costs for each reservation—even though guests are finding you directly. This adds up over time and is easily preventable!
Once your social media channels are ready, it’s time to promote your restaurant. You can do this in two ways: organic and paid socials.
Organic social
Organic social is, essentially, free. It involves building a community by sharing posts and responding to comments.
Organic social media posts mostly reach existing guests and followers. Your content should be authentic and aligned with your brand.
The rule of thirds is a good strategy for organic social media posts. Aim for one third of each:
Sales posts
User-generated posts
Brand posts
Sales posts
Are you selling tickets to a special dinner? Or want to include a box of pastries as an upsell for Mother’s Day? Just want to drive more reservations? These are sales posts. They’re created to drive more direct business to your restaurant.
User-generated posts
User-generated posts let you engage with your community. Sharing photos taken by your guests shows that you care about their experiences. It also highlights the unforgettable times guests will have at your restaurant, which builds brand loyalty.
Brand posts
Brand posts should directly reflect your unique brand, property and staff. A fun photo of a waiter showing off your latest burger creation or a behind-the-scenes shot of your chef in action during service—these posts show off what makes your restaurant unique.
Paid Social
Paid social is when you pay to display advertisements (whatever the format—text, image, video, carousel, etc.) or sponsored messages to social network users based on their user profile. You pay based on the type of ads you use.
Global social media advertising spending is estimated to reach a whopping $262 billion by 2028. With social media’s rise, organic reach isn’t what it used to be. A paid social strategy can bridge the gap.
But the biggest challenge is in 1) how to set up paid social 2) knowing how much to spend, and 3) figuring out what to share.
Setting up Facebook and Instagram ads
The first step to any campaign is getting Meta’s Ads Manager set up for your business page. This allows you to test, create, manage and track any ads you decide to run on Facebook, Instagram, Messenger or Audience Network.
And with the Ads Manager app for iOS and Android, you can manage your ads anytime, from anywhere. Find out more on Meta’s website, which includes step-by-step instructions on how to begin.
Once you push your ads live, you’re on your way to getting more reservations for your business.
Sharing paid social
One of the easiest ways to get more for your money on social media is to promote existing posts. It takes less than a minute to set up. Make sure your social accounts are set up as ‘business’ pages and simply go through the flows to push your promotion live.
Next, it’s time to boost your post to increase the number of Facebook and Instagram users that will see it.
Drive online reservations through Google Search
Google’s value in driving more direct reservations can’t be ignored.
Up to 30% of SevenRooms clients’ reservations are booked through Google—a steadily growing number, as consumers continue to use Google Search to find and book restaurant reservations.
Google Business Profile
A Google Business profile lets you show important information about your restaurant in a “knowledge panel” that shows up on Google Search and Maps. The knowledge panel includes your business’s address, hours, phone number, reviews and call to action buttons for ordering delivery or booking a reservation.
This is where your choice of online reservation software comes back into play. Be sure that:
Your reservation software integrates with Google. As it handles over 90% of global Internet searches, Google is an indispensable acquisition channel.
You can track which reservations come through Google.
Many third-party booking systems charge cover fees for bookings made through Google but don’t share important guest information. Your reservation partner should tell you which booking was made on Google and allow you to own 100% of your guest data—including email addresses, phone numbers and more.
Here are a few things to think about as you build out your Google Business listing:
Download the Google My Business app to make quick changes on the go
Add photos to your listing to display your brand, food and restaurant
Respond to all reviews—yes, even the negative ones—as this can be a big driver for return visits
Customize your reservation link with a tracking parameter to know which reservations are coming through Google
Edit your one-sentence description for guests who want to know more about your restaurant
Ensure all your restaurant information is correct—from phone number and address to hours of operation—so guests know exactly how to reach and visit you
Improve your SEO rankings
Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is the practice of increasing the quantity and quality of traffic to your website through organic search engine results. Moz’s Hierarchy of SEO Needs illustrates how Google rankings work and what you can do to rank higher on the Google search results page, more often.
For your website, it’s most important to remember:
Crawl accessibility (e.g. how easy it is for Google to access information on your website)
Compelling content (e.g. how closely your content addresses a search query)
Keyword optimization (e.g. content that is keyword loaded and ties back to your restaurant—for example, “Italian restaurant Manhattan”)
Great user experience (e.g. a website that’s fast, mobile-friendly, and easy to use)
Share-worthy content (e.g. more people referencing back to your website in their content—like Eater or other similar pages including a link back to your website in a story about your restaurant)
A robust digital strategy can improve SEO. Work with your in-house marketing and PR team or an external agency to ensure you have a mobile-friendly, easy-to-use website. This should include multiple pages that address key aspects of your restaurant (e.g. About, Menu, Reservations, Contact, Press, Delivery, Private Events, and Catering), and keyword-focused content and posts about your company.
Branded vs. non-branded Google Ads
Search Engine Marketing (SEM) is a type of paid online marketing associated with buying traffic through search engines to increase traffic and visibility. The easiest and fastest way to do this is by creating Google Ads.
With an estimated 3.5 billion searches performed on Google every day, Google Search Ads are a great way to get your restaurant in front of new guests to help fill seats. However, a Pay Per Click (PPC) model can make these ads expensive, especially if you’re competing for branded keywords vs. non-branded keywords.
Branded keywords
Branded keywords are any words or phrases that directly mention your restaurant or brand name. These could include:
[Your restaurant name] reservations
[Your restaurant name] NYC
[Your restaurant name] menu
[Your restaurant name] hours
[Your restaurant name] brunch
[Your restaurant name] delivery
[Your restaurant name] catering
[Your restaurant name] private events
[Your restaurant name] address
[Your restaurant name] phone number
Branded keywords are typically the cheaper of the two keyword options. You’ll compete with a much smaller audience to take the top ‘ad’ spot at the top of Google Search. Plus, these branded terms capture guests who are at the bottom of the funnel and close to converting. In other words, those who want to book a reservation ASAP.
Non-branded keywords
Non-branded keywords are “any keywords that do not reference a brand name or any part of it.” These could include:
Italian restaurant
Calzone NYC
Spaghetti near Times Square
Best pasta Chelsea
Michelin star dining NYC
Best NYC restaurants
Cacio e pepe Manhattan
Non-branded keywords capture a guest in the search and discovery phase. These guests might have never heard of your restaurant. That being said, they’re looking for a venue that aligns with their search (for example, best pasta in NYC). Non-branded Google Search ads can get very expensive. There will be much more competition on the word or phrase.
To put it another way, the phrase “best pasta in NYC” could compete with over 1,000 restaurants for the top ad spot!
Finally, remember to align your message and search terms with your audience. It probably doesn’t make sense for an NYC-based restaurant to be creating campaigns in Hong Kong, or for a French bistro to target taco-seeking diners in their search terms.
Making the most of online reservations
The pandemic’s effects on the hospitality industry are still keenly felt. Supply chain disruptions, staffing shortages and price increases are just some of the main challenges facing restaurant owners today.
Attract new customers with special offers
A recent industry report by Deloitte found that consumers still want to enjoy dining out despite shrinking household budgets. Guests are looking for great value like promotional offers and discounts.
If your restaurant reservation system allows you to collect consumer data, you can use this knowledge to develop targeted special menu items at reduced prices to ensure repeat visits.
Consider a no-show charge
Altered consumer behavior is another issue in a post-pandemic reality.
When restaurants reopened after COVID-19 lockdowns, bookings were mandatory and difficult to come by. Some diners got into the habit of booking multiple options, only to cancel all but one at the last minute—or worse, just never show up. According to Carbon Free Dining, up to 20% of diners in large cities simply don’t turn up.
A restaurant reservation system can help reduce no-shows and late cancellations by issuing reminders. Still, some of the world’s top restaurants now charge a fee to clients who either cancel on too short notice or don’t turn up.
It’s a delicate balance. Charging a no-show or a cancellation fee can reduce the cost burden associated with empty tables that were meant to be filled. However, it can also deter some guests from making a reservation in the first place.
That’s a wrap
Each of these marketing tools can be extremely powerful. However, it all starts with having the right online reservation system.
With the right technology in place, you can drive more traffic through social media, take your Google Search Ads to another level and collect valuable customer data from booking to bill.
Ready to take your restaurant to the next level? Find out more about Lightspeed’s unified point of sale and payments platform on our website.
The Managed WordPress Hosting Solution for Agencies
In today’s fast-paced digital landscape, finding the right hosting solution is paramount. Enter BionicWP, a leader in the realm of Managed WordPress Hosting solutions for Agencies. Specifically crafted to meet agencies’ unique needs, BionicWP’s Managed WordPress Hosting solutions empower agencies to deliver unparalleled services to their clients.
With a focus on performance, security, and reliability, these hosting solutions are designed to help agencies excel in both technical aspects and on-page metrics, positioning them for success in a competitive market. Whether you are an established agency or a growing freelancer, BionicWP’s Managed WordPress Hosting is engineered to propel your WordPress sites to new heights.
BionicWP is a relative newcomer to the Managed WordPress hosting solutions space. But they’re helping to change the way agencies manage websites. Founded by an agency owner frustrated by WordPress hosting options that didn’t meet their demands, BionicWP was born. It offers high-performance hosting powered by Google Cloud, automated security scans, and unique expert support options. All within an easy-to-use dashboard.
Before we get deeper into this BionicWP hosting review, it’s important to take a step back and talk a bit about how managed hosting fits into the hosting landscape as a whole.
Hopefully, this will help you see why using a managed WordPress hosting solution is a no-brainer for agency owners managing client sites.
Let’s start at the top.
There are three major categories of hosting:
Business hosting. Also known as shared hosting.
VPS hosting. This can be divided into self-managed, fully-managed, and managed WordPress hosting solutions.
Dedicated server hosting. You get a private server just for your site.
Now, to make sense of these, let’s pretend you’re on a ship.
Shared Hosting
You book a shared bunk with six other people. You don’t know them, but you’ve all agreed this is the best way to cut costs while still enjoying time on the ocean. Of course, you get your own bed and general use of the space, but that’s it.
This is shared hosting. With shared hosting, you’re sharing server resources, but there are policies in place to ensure everyone gets their fair share.
VPS Hosting
Now, you’ve outgrown sharing and decide it’s time for your own room. It’s bigger, more luxurious, and has a tiny window to see the ocean. It has some other goodies; you can change the bedding, paint the walls, bring in new furniture, and make it your own.
This is VPS hosting. With a VPS, you optimize your server to meet your specific needs. You gain access to increased server resources, and you can tailor the server modules to enhance your performance significantly.
Now, within this, you have a managed WordPress hosting solution. The server is 100% optimized to run WordPress. Since WordPress has unique requirements, this server setup will help get the best speed, performance, and security possible.
Dedicated Hosting
If you’ve outgrown your perfectly optimized bedroom, then there’s one more option available. Here, the entire ship is yours. Not only are you the captain, but you can turn the ship into whatever you want. A megayacht, an old-school galley, or even a warship.
This is dedicated hosting. Having this much control and freedom sounds nice, but it’s simply too much for most website owners. Yes, you get complete customization, but you also need to handle server setup, maintenance, and security.
Now that you understand why a managed WordPress hosting solution is so important let’s get back to BionicWP.
In our BionicWP hosting review, we’ll take an in-depth look at this new agency-oriented managed WordPress hosting provider.
Keep reading to learn more about what makes this WordPress host stand out, take a look at its hosting dashboard, see real performance data, and get pricing information.
Let’s dive in!
The Core Components of BionicWP
Before we dive deep into our hands-on look at BionicWP WordPress hosting, let’s briefly overview some of the most important features.
High-Speed Performance: You’ll find a server stack optimized for performance, a bundled CDN, and a server cache. Beyond this, there’s a page speed score guarantee and continuous monitoring to ensure you’re hitting these numbers.
Unmatched Security: Two robust security scanners regularly scan your website for malware, trojan horses, and other online risks. There’s also a Web Application Firewall (WAF) to protect your server from attacks like cross-site scripting and SQL injections.
Scalability for Growth: As your client’s sites grow in traffic, you need a host that can scale with you. Some hosts offer one-click scaling, while BionicWP scales automatically. Server resources are always available on-demand to help meet growing traffic or traffic spikes.
A Deep Dive into BionicWP’s High-Speed Performance
BionicWP takes speed very seriously. After all, the founders established this host primarily to prioritize speed and performance. Here’s a quick look at how it achieves this.
The Technology Behind the Speed
BionicWP uses Google Cloud network servers, creating a high-performance foundation. These are the same servers that Google uses for their own applications, so you know they’re fast.
On top of that, every plan can take advantage of the built-in CDN and Edge Cache features to improve your website speed and performance even further.
Also, ongoing speed monitoring ensures your site gets the fastest speeds possible. If your Google PageSpeed speed drops below 85 on desktop (80 on mobile), their team gets an alert and gets to work diagnosing and fixing the issue.
Real-World Performance Metrics
Now, all of that sounds great, but how does BionicWP perform?
To see how BionicWP performed in real-time, I used the Astra theme with an image-heavy demo site imported.
I used GTMetrix with the server location in Vancouver, CA to test. Then, I ran five separate tests and averaged the results.
Based on the average, the test site had a Largest Contentful Paint (LCP) time of 0.395 seconds, which is pretty fast.
Ensuring Security with BionicWP
With BionicWP, you get high levels of security that are designed to keep your site(s) safe. Let’s explore how this WordPress host handles security.
Proactive Security Measures
BionicWP takes a proactive approach to managing your website security. Doing what they can to stop a hack from occurring in the first place. Compare this to other security measures, which simply react to hacks after they occur.
With the highest-paying hosting plan, you get access to daily automated malware scans for all of your sites which MalCare and Wordfence power. Having two robust security tools ensures nothing slips through the cracks.
It also offers a Website Application Firewall (WAF), which helps to protect your website from malware and other attacks ever getting to your website.
Responding to Threats: BionicWP’s Approach
The last thing you want in a host is to be left on your own, trying to respond and recover from an online attack. That’s why BionicWP offers a free security fix guarantee.
If your website is compromised in any way from an outside source, they’ll fix the issue with the least amount of downtime possible. All for free.
You can think of your website as a castle. The WAF is the wall keeping out intruders, the daily security scans are the guards patrolling the wall, and the hack fix guarantee is their army, ready to fight off anyone who attempts to breach the castle wall.
Scalability and Flexibility: Growing with BionicWP
BionicWP combines easy-to-use features with flexibility. As the needs of your client’s sites change over time, you want a host that makes it easy to scale server resources. The last thing you want is a site you manage to go offline during a traffic spike.
Adapting to Your Agency’s Needs
No matter your hosting plan, deploying or migrating a new site is as simple as a couple of clicks. Scaling your server resources is even easier.
Since BionicWP actively monitors your website for speed, performance, and security, it receives alerts when traffic spikes occur or when you exceed server resources.
Then, the system automatically scales up your server to accommodate higher levels of traffic and bandwidth. It’s that simple.
Case Study: Scaling Success with BionicWP
There are pages of customer success stories on the BionicWP site. Taking sites with abysmal website speeds and performance and helping them get to an ‘A’ PageSpeed and YSlow scores.
For example, one site had a tragically slow page load time of 7.4 seconds. After optimizing their site, the new page load speed was 2.2 seconds. Not only that, but the PageSpeed Score jumped from a 37 to a 96. Plus, the Time to First Byte decreased from 0.7 seconds to 313 milliseconds.
This isn’t an outlier, either. If you’re having performance issues, then moving over to BionicWP could lead to the speed and performance boost you’re looking for.
Couple this with automatic server scaling, and you have an ultra-fast website that can handle as much traffic as you throw at it.
The BionicWP Advantage: Features That Set It Apart
Most managed WordPress hosting solutions offer a similar suite of features. After all, the process of hosting a website doesn’t change much on a technical level. However, BionicWP takes hosting a step further and becomes an integral part of your team.
Here are a few ways it stands out:
Your website speed will be monitored 3 times per week. If your speed falls below the threshold, then their team will fix any issues for free.
BionicWP uses two different malware scanning software. Plus, if your site gets hacked, they’ll fix it for free.
For a flat monthly fee, you get access to website edits. Their team will update blog posts, change images, install plugins, and more.
Server resources are always on-demand. So, when your site experiences a surge in traffic, the system automatically scales up the server resources.
Website backups are done daily. If you need to restore a client site to a previous version, all it takes is one click.
Some managed hosts offer server-level support; the rest is up to you and your team.
BionicWP takes this a step further, where they become like a partner in your site’s success. When you’re managing dozens of sites for clients, this can ease the burden of site management.
Their team will act as your hosting provider, system admin, and virtual assistant.
One great add-on feature is called Site Edits. With this feature, their team will make changes to your site for you.
You can have them handle tasks like:
Updating older content
Replacing images across your site
Changing out website banners and sliders
Installing and testing new WordPress plugins
Making small CSS tweaks
Currently, no other managed WordPress hosting solution on the market offers this feature. Of course, there are limits to this service, like you can’t ask their team to write custom code. However, it can be a very helpful add-on for overwhelmed agency owners trying to juggle multiple sites.
Pricing and Plans: Choosing Your BionicWP Package
BionicWP offers three different tiers for its WordPress hosting.
Each plan caters to different needs, so you’ll want to make sure that you’re choosing the right plan for you or your client’s websites.
All three plans include important features like a free SSL, daily automated backups, staging sites, uptime monitoring, and 24/7 support. The main differences are when it comes to speed and security.
Here’s how the two top-level plans compare:
The second cheapest plan includes managed core, plugin, and theme updates. Plus, daily virus scans powered by two WordPress security powerhouses MalCare and Wordfence.
The most expensive plan includes everything in the previous plans, plus Bionic Speed. This feature guarantees a 90+ on GTMetrix and Google PageSpeed Insights desktop. Plus, you get ongoing speed optimization.
You’ll probably want to go for either of the two top-level plans as an agency owner. Having automatic updates can be a huge time saver. Plus, the performance guarantee ensures your clients’ sites will be fast.
Here’s the full pricing breakdown:
Keep in mind that for our BionicWP WordPress hosting review, we’ve been using the Speed & Secure plan, which starts at $25.90 per month.
Beyond the price you pay for hosting, you have two additional add-on services, Unlimited Edits, and White Label Inbox Management. These are by no means required, but they can be worth the investment for agencies who want to outsource some of their workload.
Currently, the only plans available are on a monthly basis. According to their team, they’re working on yearly pricing, but there’s no set time when this will be available.
Also, the pricing you pay is per site per month. So, you will pay an additional monthly hosting fee for every site you manage.
If you go beyond your existing server resources, here are the additional payment guidelines:
You’ll pay $2 for every 1GB of additional disc space.
There’s an overage charge of $.10 for each GB of bandwidth used (over your 50GB plan limit).
If your site goes over 20,000 visits, then you’ll pay $1 for every 2,000 visits.
Getting Started with BionicWP: A Step-by-Step Guide
Getting started with BionicWP couldn’t be simpler. Once your account is set up you can launch your site directly from your hosting dashboard. The process of launching a new WordPress site is easy.
Click the Create One button in your dashboard.
Choose the hosting plan from the drop-down list.
Enter your site URL and choose your data center region.
Click Launch.
If you’re building a brand new WordPress site, then you can start building on your temporary domain name straight away. Then, all you need to do is point your real domain to the site when you’re ready for it to go live.
For those who have an existing WordPress site, BionicWP offers a free migration service. The entire migration process can take anywhere from 24 to 48 hours.
All you need to do is submit your website and registrar details. They also offer a secure form for submitting your account passwords.
Navigating the BionicWP Dashboard: A User’s Perspective
Navigating the dashboard couldn’t be simpler when you log in to your account. You’ll find an overview of your website performance, billing, and updates on the main screen. This is a quick way to see if any sites you’re managing need your attention.
You can click over to the Sites tab to see a list of every site you’re hosting. You can use the search feature to find specific sites.
Clicking on any website takes you to the Site Details settings screen. Here you’ll be able to do things like:
Switch your PHP version
View your SFTP/SSH login credentials
Restore or download website backups (for you or your clients)
Clear your website cache
View the server resources your site is consuming
Create a staging site to test site changes safely before pushing live
Clone an existing site
It’s also where you can enable the Edge Cache. Turning this on makes it so a cached version of your site will be served to visitors from the server location that’s closest to them.
Domain Management
Next, you have the Domain Management tab. Here you can manage all the domains that are associated with your website. You can easily add new domains with a couple of clicks.
WordPress Site Management
If you want a birds-eye-view of the plugins and themes the site is running, you can click over to the WordPress tab. You can update plugins and themes by clicking the update button.
Server and Activity Logs
BionicWP maintains real-time PHP logs, server logs, and searchable activity logs. If you have sites with multiple admin-level users, then this can help you see what actions have been taken on your site or server. It can also help spot errors and issues with your websites.
Site Sharing and Collaboration
BionicWP makes it easy to share all of your sites, or a single site, with your client or other team members. In the Collaborators tab, you have full control over the permissions of each user.
BionicWP Customer Support: Here When You Need Us
BionicWP is more than just a host; they’re a partner in your business. This extends to their customer support team too. Not only do they have 24/7 support, but their team is very responsive and helpful. Plus, they’re staffed by WordPress engineers, so you’re only dealing with WordPress experts.
To test the quality of their support, I asked a range of questions, from technical to basic account setup, during many different times of day. They responded within one minute and were able to answer all of my questions.
You can reach support by sending a support request inside your hosting dashboard or clicking the chat icon on every site page.
All of your support requests are automatically sent to your email as well, so you can respond from your email, if it’s easier.
Conclusion: Why BionicWP is the Comprehensive Solution Your Agency Needs
Overall, BionicWP is a solid choice if you’re an agency owner looking for a high-performing and easy-to-use WordPress host.
They performed well in the GTMetrix tests and offer guaranteed Google PageSpeed Insights scores on the highest-priced plan.
Beyond performance, their hack promise, regular website scans, and website edits addon show they really care about the success of your site and the sites you manage.
The dashboard isn’t the most advanced, but it offers everything you need to quickly deploy websites, manage your server, and get back to serving your clients.
Unfortunately, there is no money-back guarantee. But since you only have to pay for one month up-front, giving this host a test drive for your sites might be worthwhile. You can also stage a website and make edits or test plugins for free since you only pay once your site goes live.
Last year, we shared that we were evolving Shopify Unite to a series of events in cities around the world. We loved getting together with the community, but realized that we still couldn’t be in enough places to connect with everyone.
At the same time, we introduced Shopify Editions, where we brought together the biggest product updates for our ecosystem and put them all in a new digital experience, for everyone to interact with anytime, anywhere.
We want to do the same thing with Shopify Unite.
Instead of limiting the event to only a few cities, we want to open up the experience to reach even more developers. As part of its continued evolution, we’ll be moving to a virtual event in early 2024 where you’ll be able to deep dive with the Shopify team on the latest releases for our developer platform. There will be opportunities to interact with each other as well as the Shopify team through office hours and technical AMAs. Stay tuned for more updates.
And while virtual gatherings are great to make sure everyone can join, we know how much the community values in-person gatherings as well. So we’ll continue to share opportunities to connect IRL, starting with some new formats coming soon.
We can’t wait to continue building the future of commerce with all of you.
How Long it Takes to Process a Credit Card Payment
As a retailer, you likely take a number of credit and debit card payments every day—but have you ever wondered how long it takes to process a transaction from the time you take the payment until the funds are deposited in your business bank account? And why?
In this blog, we’ll answer:
Let’s dive in!
Choosing the right credit card processor
9 things to consider before signing on the dotted line.
How long does a credit card payment take to process?
Generally, it takes two to four business days for payments to be processed from the customer’s card, through the bank and to your account.
This means if you process a payment on Friday, you’ll receive the funds on Tuesday. Payments taken on weekends and bank holidays are sent along with the batch of payments collected on the next weekday—you’ll receive funds from Saturday, Sunday and Monday at the same time.
Some payment processors, like Lightspeed Payments, take less time on average, allowing for next-day payouts.
With both Lightspeed Payments and other third-party payment processors, these times are not set in stone—unusually large settlements may take longer to process, for example.
Other types of payments and how long they take to process
Not all payments are processed the same way, and as such, not all types settle at the same rate.
Debit card payments
Debit card payments generally settle within 24 hours.
ACH payments
Automatic Clearing House (ACH) payments are direct payments transferred electronically in the United States. They do not involve credit cards, cheques or cash. Businesses taking subscription payments may do so through ACH.
In Canada, Electronic Fund Transfer (EFT) payments take the place of ACH. EFT payments clear faster than ACH payments, typically within one to three days.
Peer2peer
Peer2peer (P2P) payments connect to a bank account or credit card and allow for fund transfers between customers of a P2P network.
Generally, P2P payments can be used immediately if used within the P2P network; transferring those funds out of the network and into a bank account can take a few days. Services like Zelle (in the US) and Interac e-transfer (in Canada) are the exception, as they deposit immediately.
Like inserted or swiped cards, contactless payments generally take two to four days to settle.
When are the transaction fees taken out of a payment?
Fees are automatically deducted from payments before they’re deposited into your account, so you don’t have to worry about paying them yourself every single time you process a transaction.
The exact amount deducted from your funds will depend on the fee structure you have with your payment processor. When you’re in the process of finding a payment processing provider, look out for hidden transaction fees.
If you’re working with an interchange plus fee structure, each transaction will have a different fee applied to it thanks to variables in card type, issuing bank, entry type and more—you have no way of knowing the final amount that will be deposited into your account.
If you’re working with a tiered fee structure, you’ll have a set percentage and transaction fee for each transaction tier. Typically, qualified transactions will have a favorable rate, while mid-qualified and non-qualified transactions will cost you a lot more. Unfortunately, you get no say over how your transactions are classified, and the majority of your transactions are likely to be processed with the less favorable rates.
If you’re working with a flat fee structure, you’ll have one fee for card-present (CP) transactions and one fee for card-not-present (CNP) transactions, no matter the card type. You can calculate the expected amount you’ll be paying on each transaction by applying the flat rate for that transaction type.
Flat fee structures can help you avoid unexpected hits to your revenue. Jewelry retailer Melissa Joy Manning ditched unpredictable fees with a flat percentage fee from Lightspeed Payments. “With credit card processing fees and bank fees, we’re always trying to lower them because that’s just money out the door.”
Why does it take so long for credit card payments to post?
Payment processors generally don’t process every single payment at once. They batch payments together and send them for processing all at the same time. This can happen as quickly as twice a day, or as rarely as twice a week.
There’s another reason for the delay: fraud detection. After the initial verification at checkout, the card issuers can take a day or two to investigate purchases. This is why bigger transactions take longer to clear—they have a bigger impact if they’re fraudulent, so the card issuer is incentivized to take their time.
Do credit card payments process on weekends?
No, credit card payments are not processed by banks on the weekends.
Once the payments have been batched and sent to process, they’re at the mercy of the card network and the bank. Banks don’t operate on 24/7 schedules, and instead only process payments during work hours.
How does payment processing work?
Payment processing happens in stages. The first stages, authorization and authentication, happen in-store when a customer buys something from you—these stages verify the payment. The steps involved in verification usually only take a few seconds in total.
A customer taps, inserts or swipes their debit or credit card at your point of sale. The information needed to verify the transaction is sent to your processor.
Your processor authorizes the payment with the card’s network, such as Visa or Interac.
After the payment has been authorized, it needs to be authenticated. The card’s network sends the information needed to confirm the card’s validity to the customer’s issuing bank.
The bank verifies that the card is being used legitimately and has access to the funds or credit card limit required to complete the sale, then either approves or declines the transaction. This is the end of the sale in your store.
Every transaction you make at your payment terminals is gathered together into a batch to be sent for processing. That batch is sent off to be processed in the third stage, settlement—this is the part that typically takes two days.
At a set time every weekday, your daily batch of authorized and authenticated payments are sent to your payment processor for settlement.
Your payment processor takes care of forwarding transactions in the batches to the appropriate card networks, who then request the funds from the issuing banks.
The funds are sent to you and your customers have the transaction added to their credit card bill or automatically debited from their account.
What’s the difference between payment verification and payment processing?
Payment verification involves the authentication and authorization stages and happens immediately. Authorization and authentication ensure the funds are available to be deposited in your account by placing a hold on them. Until the funds have been transferred to you through the settlement process, the money is effectively in limbo between you and the customer.
Payment processing involves the settlement stage and takes time to process. This moves the funds owed to you into your account as the payments are cleared. The money has been taken out of limbo and paid to you.
How do you track a transaction’s processing status?
If a payment is taking longer than two days to process, you may want to check in on its status.
You also want to track the breakdown of card types in your batches, particularly if you find you’re paying for expensive interchange plus fees.
How can a business get visibility on transaction processing status?
Unfortunately, there is no way to easily track the status or breakdown of a batch of payments through your acquiring bank or your customer’s issuing bank.
However, your payment processor may provide you with reports to check this data. While not all of the reports from all processors are easy to read, some–such as Lightspeed–have developed clear tools for Lightspeed Payments users to access with the click of a button.
If you’re using Lightspeed Payments, you can easily track the status of your settlements with the merchant portal. Let’s take a look at what information you could find.
Whenever you make a sale through your payment terminal, that transaction will be added to the merchant portal for easy reference. These transactions are batched together into settlements. Settlements marked as paid have been processed and had their funds forwarded to your bank from Lightspeed Payments.
The payments summary will show you transactions and their card types, such as American Express or Visa. You can also clearly see the fees you’re paying on the summary.
You can also check the details of a payment, including:
Transaction date and time
Payment Method
Processor ID
Timeline
Authorized amount
Captured amount
Fee
Device
User
Net amount
Payment ID
Order ID
Process transactions securely with Lightspeed Payments
Debit and credit cards, as well as mobile wallets and digital payments, are the overwhelming preferred payment method with customers, with cash consistently rated as the least preferred. By not opting to process debit and credit card transactions, retailers risk losing sales from cash-averse customers.
Rather than work with third-party payment processors and their notoriously complex contract agreements, consider using Lightspeed Payments, payment processing that’s embedded directly with your retail POS system.
We take the hassle out of taking payments, even when your customer wants to use their American Express card. Get built-in PCI compliance and stop worrying about third-party accounts—we’ll take care of that for you.
Make WordPress PDFing Simple, Easy, Fast & Flexible With Forminator’s New PDF Generator Addon
Meet Forminator’s powerful PDF Generator Addon…the simplest, easiest and most automated way to create, edit, and send out form-submitted PDFs without leaving your WordPress dashboard!
Forminator plugin users spoke to us about the challenges they face creating and sending out form-generated PDFs on the fly that seamlessly integrate with their business processes.
For example:
“I would like to send a PDF of our forms with email notifications using Forminator. But I don’t want to use the E2PDF method because it’s too limited for us.”
“We need to create a form for our user, and generate a PDF after they write on it, and give them the possibility to pay.”
“Does anyone know how I can generate a PDF from a form submission like Gravity PDF?”
Forminator users, we heard you!
Forminator Pro now gives you the ability to integrate, create, generate, and automate PDFs using our nifty new PDF generator addon!
Install with just one click and say goodbye to limited free 3rd-party plugins, costly upgrades, and unnecessary integrations!
In this post, we’ll cover the following areas:
PDF Generator Addon – Key Features
Built to make it easy for any user to create and customize a PDF file from form submission regardless of their technical level, here are some of the key features of Forminator’s PDF Generator Addon:
Easier PDF Generation
“I am working on a free course for artists who want to start their own websites. They fill out a form and then get a PDF download of their answers. This will serve as a ‘Scope of Work’ for their project.”
Forminator’s PDF Builder uses the same intuitively easy-to-use drag and drop visual interface as the Form builder, providing a seamless user experience with no additional learning curve required.
In fact, the PDF creation option is part of the Form Builder, so it only takes a couple of clicks to create a PDF file.
Customizable PDFs
Forminator gives users high flexibility by not only making it easy to customize the PDF form structure and layout using its form builder, but also customize PDF content using the Rich Text field, add additional form fields, and insert field tags (see “How to Use” section below).
Autogenerated PDFs
PDFs can be autogenerated from your existing form structure and form fields, so you don’t need to create your PDF from scratch.
However, Forminator is flexible enough so that if you want to design your PDF fom scratch, you can.
Attach Emails to PDFs
“It would be great if PDFs could be created of the form submissions and could be attached and sent over emails.”
You can send customized email notifications to admins and visitors with PDF attachments automatically. (see “How to Use” section below.)
Downloadable PDFs
Download the PDFs of the form submissions on the Submissions page.
Unlimited PDFs
No limits on usage of fields, number of pages, or number of PDFs.
PDFs and More PDFs
Create multiple PDFs on the same form.
PDF Templates
Generate PDF files for payment receipts, invoices, and quotations in seconds with easy-to-use pre-designed templates. (Coming soon!)
We also have loads more features coming soon (e.g. payment and quotation fields, more settings to customize PDF form appearance with colors and fonts, allowing form submitters to download PDFs after submission, etc.), so watch this space!
How to Use Forminator’s PDF Generator Addon
As mentioned earlier, one of the key features of Forminator’s PDF Generation Addon is that it works just like the plugin’s Form builder, so once you’ve installed it, configuring your PDF forms is so easy.
Note: This is a Pro feature, so make sure you have Forminator Pro installed, or consider becoming a WPMU DEV member if you are currently using our free Forminator plugin.
Creating PDFs
To create PDFs, first make sure to install the addon. You can do this from your WPMU DEV Dashboard plugin, or by going to Forminator Pro > Add-ons .
Install the PDF Generator from Forminator Pro’s Add-Ons section.
Note: to use the PDF Generator Addon, make sure that you have created at least one form on your site. Remember too, that you can generate multiple PDF files for the same form.
Once the add-on has been installed and activated, edit the form you want to attach a PDF to, and in the Edit Form > PDF section, click on Create New PDF.
Create a new PDF in Forminator’s Edit Form > PDF section.
Give your new PDF a filename and click the + Create button.
Give your PDF a name for internal identification purposes.
Next, choose a template for your PDF. Note: As we develop this feature further, we’ll be adding all kinds of new templates to this section for generating PDF receipts, quotations, etc.
After selecting your template, click the Continue button.
Forminator Pro users can choose from a range of professionally designed PDF templates.
The Preload PDF Content modal gives you the choice of preloading form fields into your new PDF file, or creating your PDF from scratch.
Choose an option and click the Continue button to proceed.
Forminator gives you the choice of preloading form fields or starting with a blank file.
Once your PDF file is created, you can edit it or continue the setup process.
Once your PDF file is created, you can edit it or continue building your form.
If you selected the Preload Form Fields in PDF File option, the fields in your form will load in your PDF file.
Editing PDFs
While the Page Header and Page Footer elements are static and cannot be moved, you can edit the settings and style for all fields by clicking on the gear icon to the right of the fields.
You can also rearrange non-static fields using drag and drop to fully customize the layout of your PDF.
Insert, edit, and preview your form fields.
As well as preloading form fields, you can insert additional fields to add custom text and labels, add page breaks to create multipage PDFs, insert payment and quotation fields, and more.
There are many PDF form field options to choose from.
Note: To add custom text in your forms, use the Rich Text field. Use either a label for the field, or hide the label and add your own text with formatting options like bold, italics, bullet points, and hyperlinks.
You can also insert form fields into the text area to create a customized PDF template that will autopopulate your form details when generated.
Use the Rich Text field to format and style your form field content.
Additionally, you can adjust the appearance of your PDFs using appearance options, which allow you to control how your PDFs will look and their layout.
The Page settings section lets you set the page size from a dropdown menu, with the recommended default being A4. The default page margin is 30 pixels, and you can change this under the Custom tab.
You can also enable the RTL (Right-to-Left) option to output your PDF in languages like Arabic, Hebrew, Farsi, Urdu, etc., and if you’re familiar with CSS, you can use the Custom CSS option to further customize your PDF. Many selectors are included to help you, and if you need further assistance, make sure to contact our 24/7 Live Support team.
After creating or editing your PDF, you can save it as a Draft to continue working on it at a later time. You can also preview, edit, or delete it, and publish or unpublish it.
A Forminator Form with a Forminator generated PDF.
Emailing PDFs
With Forminator’s PDF Generator Addon, attaching PDFs to emails is really simple and easy.
After creating your PDF form, go to Forminator > Edit Form > Email Notifications and select the PDF file(s) to attach to the email notification you have set up.
Select one or more PDFs to attach to the email.
Note: You can also set up conditional email rules to automatically send specific PDFs to specific users.
Use the power of conditional emails to send PDFs to specific users.
Downloading PDFs
You can download PDFs on form submissions from the Submissions page for forms with PDF templates. There are no restrictions on the number of PDFs you can download.
If you have more than one PDF template available for a single form, you can download the form submission PDF for each template separately or the PDFs of all the templates as a zip file.
Download PDFs for all submission forms.
For full details on using the PDF generator addon and all of its features refer to our Forminator documentation.
With Forminator Pro, You Can’t Go PDF’ing Wrong!
Forminator Pro’s new PDF generator allows you to generate an unlimited number of PDFs with your forms and form submissions, customize, edit, and style PDF templates, and a whole lot more.
If you are a WPMU DEV member, there is nothing else you need to purchase to start generating professional PDFs. Simply install the addon in Forminator, tweak the appearance and settings in your forms, and you’re all good to go.
If you’re not a member yet, consider choosing one of our risk-free membership options (Pro or Agency). You’ll not only get all of our Pro plugins, you’ll also get access to everything else you need to use PDFs effectively, including site management, client report, and client billing tools, white label and reseller options, 24/7 expert support on all areas related to WordPress, CSS, hosting, etc, and so much more!
Start using Forminator’s PDF Generator Addon today…it’s PDF’ing great!
36 Retail Quotes That Inspire Entrepreneurs (2023)
Owning a retail business can be rewarding. But wearing a thousand hats a day can lead to overwhelm and burnout.
On the days when you need a reminder about why you started your business in the first place, reading inspirational retail quotes can reignite the passion to grow your retail business.
At Shopify, we want to help inspire you. That’s why we’ve created a list of 36 uplifting retail quotes from successful retailers and leaders to help motivate you and your team.
Happy reading.
Unify your sales channels with Shopify
Only Shopify unifies your sales channels and gives you all the tools you need to manage your business, market to customers, and sell everywhere in one place.
Retail quotes to inspire every day
On mission
“People don’t buy what you do, they buy why you do it.” ―Simon Sinek
Key takeaway: The products or services you sell aren’t the reason you start a business. They’re a means to reaching a larger goal. When your team, suppliers, collaborators, and customers buy into that goal too, selling becomes the easy part.
Key takeaway: Don’t think about reasons not to do something, start by thinking about what you would do if there were no barriers in your way. How big would you go? What could you achieve?
On problem solving
“Everything is figureoutable.” ―Marie Forleo
Motivational speaker, life coach, and author
Key takeaway: No matter how big a problem seems, there’s always a solution. Don’t sweat the small stuff. Instead, focus on your options and your next steps.
On grit
“The most difficult thing is the decision to act, the rest is merely tenacity.” ― Amelia Earhart
Aviation pioneer and author
Key takeaway: Being a retail entrepreneur allows you the freedom of being your own boss and making your own choices, but it’s not all roses every day. It takes tenacity and grit to keep going, stay innovative, and keep on growing, even in the face of failures.
On giving back
“If you want to lift yourself up, lift up someone else.” ―Booker T. Washington
American educator, author, orator, and adviser to presidents of the United States
Key takeaway: Ninety-one percent of consumers are more likely to buy from a company that supports social or environmental issues. As well as being good for your brand, giving back can energize you and your team to reach your goals.
On passion
“The only way to do great work is to love what you do.” ―Steve Jobs
Co-founder of Apple
Key takeaway: The notion of loving what you do isn’t a novel concept, and yes, it’s slightly cliché. But it takes passion to be dedicated to your retail business, as it’s a 25-hour-a-day job. Steve Jobs was Apple, and Apple was Steve Jobs, and this quote has become even more impactful in light of Jobs’ death at the height of his career.
On happiness
“Instead of wondering when your next vacation is, maybe you should set up a life you don’t need to escape from.” ―Seth Godin
Bestselling author of 18 books, marketer, public speaker, and entrepreneur
Key takeaway: As a retail entrepreneur, you need to love what you do. Everyone needs a vacation once in a while, but if you’re passionate about what you’re doing, your day-to-day work will feel like a vacation. Isn’t that the ultimate dream?
On mindset
“Whether you think you can or you think you can’t, you’re right.” ―Henry Ford
Founder, Ford Motor Co.
Key takeaway: Often, thoughts can become a self-fulfilling prophecy. If you start by believing you can achieve what you want to achieve, you’ll keep pushing until you do.
On self-reflection
“Every action is an opportunity to improve.” ―Mark Graban
Key takeaway: No matter how good you think you are or how well you think you’re doing, there’s always space to do even better. Reflect, appreciate the great work, and look for an opportunity to improve.
Retail quotes for when you’re starting out
On first steps
“The only thing worse than starting something and failing is not starting something.” ―Seth Godin
Bestselling author of 18 books, marketer, public speaker, and entrepreneur
Key takeaway: All the planning in the world isn’t enough to be certain of success, but if you never start, you’ll never be successful. People often say they regret the things they didn’t do far more than the things they did, so on your mark, get set, go!
On consistency
“People like consistency. Whether it’s a store or a restaurant, they want to come in and see what you are famous for.” ―Mickey Drexler
CEO and chairman, J. Crew Group
Key takeaway: Building customer trust and loyalty takes time. They want to know what they’re getting and they don’t want an unpleasant surprise. It goes deeper than having the same products and services—it’s about how you communicate and how you make decisions.
On taking risks
“Be brave. Take risks. Nothing can substitute experience.” ―Paulo Coelho
Key takeaway: If you never try to do something, you’ll never gain the experience of knowing what works and what doesn’t. It’s good to calculate the risk-versus-reward ratio, but taking a chance usually delivers better results than retreating.
On innovation
“I learned to push the envelope when it comes to asking questions or making requests. And if you hear ‘that’s not possible,’ then ask ‘what is possible,’ instead of just saying thank you and leaving.” ―Emily Weiss
Founder, Glossier
Key takeaway: The “done” way isn’t always the best way. People often say things aren’t possible because they’ve never managed to succeed in making them work. If you see a way to do something differently, try it.
On curiosity
“Like most retailers, we don’t know exactly where we will land at the end of it, but our curiosity and willingness to create will be a guide for us.” ―Jesper Brodin
CEO, IKEA
Key takeaway: Sometimes you have an idea of what you want to achieve, but you’re not sure how to get there. Sometimes, you create purely for the sake of creating. Curiosity takes you to a place you didn’t even know you wanted to go.
On simplicity
“We have a very complex business where we make our own products that we manufacture, distribute, and sell across multiple channels in different markets across the globe. We need to introduce simplicity into our systems where we can.” ―Paul Stephens
Head of data and technology, Neal’s Yard Remedies
Key takeaway: Some parts of business and retail are complicated. There’s not much you can do about that, but where there are opportunities to make processes and other tasks simple, take them.
Start selling in-person with Shopify
Shopify POS is the easiest way to unify your sales channels and sell both online and in-person. Have all the tools you need to manage your business, market to customers, and sell everywhere in one easy-to-understand back office.
On setting goals
“Setting goals is the first step in turning the invisible into the visible.” ―Tony Robbins
Key takeaway: Seeing the place you want to get to can make you push harder to get there.
On action
“You can’t build a reputation on what you are going to do.” ―Henry Ford
Founder, Ford Motor Co.
Key takeaway: Planning and setting goals is important, but it’s not worth anything to anyone if they can’t see you do it. Instead of just thinking about it, go out there and do it!
On fundraising
“I approached fundraising as an opportunity to align myself with partners who have more varied experience and diverse backgrounds than I do to help bring Glossier to life.” ―Emily Weiss
Founder, Glossier
Key takeaway: Investment is sometimes seen as a purely financial remedy to a challenge. It can be, but there are also opportunities to bring in expertise from people who can support your business in other ways.
On partnerships
“The biggest sources of opportunity are collaboration and partnership. And today, with digital communication, there is more of that everywhere. We need to expose ourselves to that as a matter of doing business.” ―Mark Parker
CEO, Nike
Key takeaway: There are often valid reasons to be wary of social media and other forms of digital communication, but when you use them wisely, you create opportunities to collaborate with the brightest minds in every corner of the world.
On opportunity
“It has been my observation that most people get ahead during the time that others waste.” ―Henry Ford
Founder, Ford Motor Co.
Key takeaway: In the modern workplace, we understand the importance of breaks and work-life balance, but Henry Ford wasn’t wrong to suggest that there are moments of opportunity, where you can get ahead of your competitors. Do an extra 30 minutes of training, find solutions to speed up your processes, or even meditate—that’s both relaxing and productive.
Retail quotes to lead employees
On culture
“Businesses often forget about the culture, and ultimately, they suffer for it because you can’t deliver good service from unhappy employees.” —Tony Hsieh
CEO, Zappos
Key takeaway: A bad company culture doesn’t just affect employees. It leaks out to suppliers, collaborators, and ultimately customers. Keep employee satisfaction high for a better chance at keeping customer satisfaction high too.
On employee happiness
“Too many businesses today are based on driving prices lower by screwing over somebody: pounding suppliers or squeezing employees. We’re the opposite. We put our employees first. If you take care of them, they will take care of your customers better than anybody else.” —Kip Tindell
Co-founder, Container Store
Key takeaway: What happens internally makes a huge difference to what your customers see and feel about your company. Stick to your values and treat everybody in every corner of your business with respect and integrity.
On employee loyalty
“I believe that if they’re feeling good about the company, then they’re going to stay with me a long time. I’ve been in business 10 years, and I have staff who’ve been with me eight years. So that’s really important to me, because then they build up a clientele as well.” —Janet Wright
Owner, FloorPlay Socks
Key takeaway: You can’t do everything yourself, but having to constantly train new employees to replace old ones is just as hard. If you treat your employees well so they want to stay and do their best work every day, you can concentrate on making your wider business strategy a success.
On leadership
“When you look at the reasons people leave companies, it’s usually because their boss is a jerk or because they aren’t learning and growing. So we spend a lot of time developing leaders internally and creating learning opportunities.” —Neil Blumenthal
Co-CEO, Warby Parker
Key takeaway: Good leaders are able to quickly assess needs and support their staff in improving or reaching goals. Most employees don’t react well to being used like a blunt tool.
Retail quotes to delight
On standing out
“You walk into a retail store, whatever it is, and if there’s a sense of entertainment and excitement and electricity, you wanna be there.” —Howard Schultz
Former CEO, Starbucks
Key takeaway: Why do your customers keep coming back? They want that buzz, that energy, that va-va-voom. Make sure they get the core products that they love and then delight them with a little extra.
On customer experience
“People are always going to go shopping. A lot of our effort is just ‘How do we make the retail experience a great one?’” —Phillip Green
Chairman, Arcadia Group
Key takeaway: Although it’s unlikely that people will stop shopping, much of it will move online. So you need to compete to get people into a brick-and-mortar store, plus you have to find ways to stand out online. A lot of that comes down to the experience you provide before, during, and after a customer buys something.
💡 PRO TIP: Offering in-store pickup as a delivery method at checkout is a great way to get more online shoppers to visit your store. To get started, enable local pickup availability in Shopify admin to show online shoppers whether a product is available for pickup at one of your stores.
On store design
“My company is an extension of me, so when I designed my stores, I wanted people to feel that they were in my home.” ―Tory Burch
Founder and creative director, Tory Burch
Key takeaway: A brick-and-mortar store is much more than a location to sell. It’s a chance for brand marketing, to show the world your personality, and to build strong customer relationships.
On emotion
“Your customer doesn’t care how much you know until they know how much you care.” —Damon Richards
Key takeaway: Most people don’t remember conversations in full, but they do remember how moments made them feel. Sales is all about building relationships, so if you can delight your customer, they’ll be more willing to tune in to any logical arguments,
On connection
“Nobody in my shop’s allowed to stand behind the counter unless they’re actually ringing somebody up. It’s greeting, it’s listening. It’s a very traditional customer service approach.” —Cricket Newman
Owner, Cricket Newman Designs
Key takeaway: Connect with your customers and break down barriers. Standing behind a counter with your phone in your hand is not a great look. Give your customers space but be ready the moment they need you.
On trust
“Our brands—Nike, Converse, Jordan Brand, and Hurley—are loved by customers all over the world. But we never take that for granted. We know that every day we have to earn their trust—by serving them completely and adding real value to their lives through products and experiences.” —Mark Parker
Executive chairman, Nike
Key takeaway: It’s an old saying, but it doesn’t make it any less true: Trust is hard won and easily lost. That’s even more significant in business, and the consequences of losing trust can be devastating. Customers will stop buying from you, and in the modern, digital world, they’ll very quickly tell a lot of people about their bad experiences.
On staying customer-centric
“Retail is a customer business. You’re trying to take care of the customer, solve something for the customer. And there’s no way to learn that in the classroom or in the corner office or away from the customer. You’ve got to be in front of the customer.” —Erik Nordstrom
CEO, Nordstrom Direct
Key takeaway: Customers are at the heart of everything you do, so make sure every decision you make has them as your focal point. You can support your customers and you can learn from them too.
Retail quotes to save time
On memory
“You cannot run a successful retail business from memory.” —Josh Hartford
Key takeaway: There’s too much to remember in business to rely on memory alone. What happens when you’re not there or you have to change a process? Get the right tools to manage inventory and purchases, making it easier to operate from day to day.
💡 PRO TIP:Shopify POS comes with tools to help you control and manage your inventory across multiple store locations, your online store, and your warehouse. Forecast demand, set low-stock alerts, create purchase orders, know which items are selling or sitting on shelves, count inventory, and more.
On efficiency
“One order management system, one database, one inventory. Without these you will never seem seamless to your customer.” —Andy Laudato
COO of The Vitamin Shoppe
Key takeaway: Staying on top of multiple systems can become a job in itself if you’re not careful. If you can, add all of your tasks to one platform and use it as the basis of your work. It’ll make your business run much more smoothly.
On productivity and focus
“If it isn’t a clear yes, then it’s a clear no.” ―Greg McKeown
Author, Essentialism: The Disciplined Pursuit of Less
Key takeaway: If you have to rethink every decision a thousand times, you’ll never get anything done. Make sure you have a process in place for making decisions and choose where you want to focus. That way, you’ll be certain whether or not you want to say yes. If there’s even a slight doubt, say no.
On change and agility
“Change almost never fails because it’s too early. It almost always fails because it’s too late.” ―Seth Godin
Bestselling author of 18 books, marketer, public speaker, and entrepreneur
Key takeaway: It can be hard to make a change in business, especially if things are going well, but sometimes change is vital to keep up or to get ahead. If you see an opportunity for change, go through your decision-making process and say yes or no. Don’t say maybe and say yes later, because by that point, it’s usually too late.
“If you do what you’ve always done, you’ll get what you’ve always gotten.” ―Tony Robbins
Life and success coach, author of self-help books like Unlimited Power, Unleash the Power Within, and Awaken the Giant Within
Key takeaway: The essence here is that if you stick to the same formula and are afraid of change, then you are likely to get the same (average) results. It’s important to keep your finger on the pulse of your industry and be in tune with changing trends and the competition.
Take away the retail quotes that inspire you
There are many powerful retail quotes above and you can’t absorb them all. So take away the words of wisdom that inspire you the most. Look back at them when you need to lead, delight, save time, or simply make the most of every day.
Unify your sales channels with Shopify
Only Shopify unifies your sales channels and gives you all the tools you need to manage your business, market to customers, and sell everywhere in one place.
Retail quotes FAQ
What are some popular inspirational quotes that I can use to motivate my retail team?
We’ve shared many inspirational retail quotes above. Choose the ones that align with your team’s values and goals, and the culture of your store.
How can I display inspirational retail quotes in my store?
You can display inspirational quotes in various ways:
On walls or murals for customers and staff to see
On packaging or receipts to share with customers
In staff break rooms to motivate employees
On social media to engage with both customers and staff
The method you choose depends on your branding, space, and who you’d like to target with the message.
Can using inspirational quotes in my retail store really make a difference in sales or staff performance?
While the impact of inspirational quotes on sales might not be directly measurable, they can contribute to a positive atmosphere. This can boost employee morale, improve customer experience, and foster a community that values your brand. In turn, these factors may positively influence sales and staff performance.
Can I legally use famous quotes in my marketing materials?
Generally, using quotes in marketing is OK, as long as you attribute the quote to the person who said it. However, it’s always wise to consult with a legal professional to understand the specific legalities so you can make sure you’re complying with copyright laws and not infringing on someone’s intellectual property rights.
7 Best Practices To Catch Fraud and Theft In Your Restaurants
Restaurant owners have enough on their plates without adding fraud monitoring and theft prevention to their daily operations. Unfortunately, fraud and theft are alarmingly common in hospitality, accounting for a huge chunk of lost profit.
With high staff turnover, cash payments, and tons of consumable products, a fast-paced restaurant or bar is the ideal setting for scammers and thieves to go unnoticed.
To help you catch restaurant fraud and theft like a pro, we’re sharing seven quick and easy tips to stop these transgressions before they spiral out of control.
You’ll learn:
The future of hospitality
Find out how you can prepare your restaurant for short and long-term success this year.
What is restaurant fraud?
Restaurant fraud occurs when someone intentionally deceives or misrepresents information to gain something at the expense and harm of your restaurant.
External fraud is committed by customers, vendors, suppliers, and anyone else who isn’t your employee.
Internal fraud is committed by your employees. Restaurant turnover rates have recently climbed over 50%, creating a constant demand for labor. But vetting the trustworthiness of new hires may be more rushed as a result.
Fraudulent activities may range from vendor fraud to employees stealing your personal information to commit credit card scams or identity theft.
With the latter, a disgruntled employee may tap into your accounting screen to swipe sensitive information they can use to open new lines of credit in your name. And you wouldn’t even know until debt collectors started demanding payments.
What is restaurant theft?
Restaurant theft occurs when someone intentionally steals from your restaurant. These activities can range from employees stealing food inventory or undercharging friends to swiping proprietary recipes or pocketing cash payments.
According to statistics:
95% of businesses encounter problems with employee theft.
75% of employees say they’ve stolen from their employers at least once.
More than half (55%) of all embezzlement cases occur at small businesses with fewer than 100 employees.
Internal employee theft accounts for 75% of restaurant inventory losses and 4% of restaurant sales.
Employee theft in the restaurant industry costs businesses$3 to $6 billion annually.
Now that you understand what you’re up against, let’s talk about:
7 best practices to catch fraud & theft in your restaurants
To stop the potential for fraud and theft at your restaurant, always:
Synchronize your inventory and financial reports
Analyze void and comp reports
Watch average tab times
Verify potential thefts with recorded security footage
Implement blind closeouts
Check employee reports for time theft
Sign up for credit monitoring and identity theft alerts
1. Synchronize your inventory and financial reports
Get in the habit of proactive monitoring. Restaurant inventory management systems that integrate with your POS and accounting software quickly highlight discrepancies and inconsistencies.
A fully-integrated restaurant platform should provide:
Product reports, so you can see your top-selling products, orders, current stock, and all the information related to costs and taxes.
End-of-day reports and user reports. Scan an overview of your sales and your cash drawer activity. Check every transaction your staff processes and a list of receipts per user with tip information.
Accounting numbers. Don’t spend hours doing all the calculations yourself; get your restaurant accounting numbers automatically posted each day and view them for irregularities.
Cash drawers recap. Track all related activity and see a detailed breakdown of all the transactions.
Employees feel empowered to steal when they believe no one’s watching or cares. Performing these daily audits shows them you’re watching and invested, which adds a layer of accountability to their actions.
Having a clear overview of this intel will help you catch employees:
Eating or drinking without paying
Giving out free food or over-pouring drinks (to earn higher tips)
Taking food home after shifts
Undercharging (i.e., ringing a less expensive item into the POS and keeping the difference when a customer pays for the more expensive one)
Failing to report food waste
Performing too many voids or comps
To prevent employee food theft, provide a staff meal and break-room snacks. Then ensure your back-of-house doesn’t allow employees to graze on shift.
2. Analyze void and comp reports
When customers pay cash for their bills, employees may fraudulently void the entire order or items from the order in your POS and keep the money. Wrongful voids are easy to track in your POS and compare with your inventory.
So check your void reports daily to see which employees have higher void rates than others. You’ll also want to monitor your shift managers, as many restaurants require a manager to sign off on voided tabs.
Comps can be more challenging to spot. If customers are unhappy with their orders or the server keyed the wrong items into the POS, it’s good customer service to eat the charges. However, an abnormally high amount of comps per server could signal a problem employee.
3. Watch average tab times
In a scam known as “the wagon wheel,” employees move orders in the POS from one check to another and pocket the cash after the customer pays.
Let’s say a customer orders your famous lunch special, pays cash, and leaves. Rather than voiding the entire order, which would raise suspicion, the server moves the order to a new “ghost check” and keeps the customer’s money. Assuming there will be more lunch special orders, the server can keep the wheel churning for the rest of their shift.
To detect this scam, watch how long tabs are kept open, on average. Check server-specific tab averages too. Anything that’s more than a few hours old should be considered suspicious.
4. Verify potential thefts with recorded security footage
Automated video surveillance tools are necessary for recording robberies and burglaries. But they can also catch employees failing to key cash orders into your POS, voiding checks, and stealing inventory. They’re even helpful for times when servers claim customers walked out without paying their bills (aka, the dine-and-dash).
That’s why you should not only set up automated security cams in your restaurant, but get in the habit of checking them routinely.
According to one study, technology-based employee monitoring installed in ~400 restaurants helped:
Reduce employee theft by 22%
Increase total check revenue by 7%
Raise total drink revenue by 10.5%
Upgrade your camera with tools that record activity and leverage artificial intelligence (AI) to alert you to suspicious behavior. This perk saves hours of video scrub time by directing you to the exact timestamps to analyze.
5. Implement blind closeouts
A blind closeout is a money-counting protocol that requires employees to reconcile cash at the end of their shifts without knowing how much they’re expected to total.
If employees are artificially inflating or deflating sales and pocketing the difference, skimming cash from the register, voiding checks, etc., it’s nearly impossible for them to remember the final total they should have at the end of their shift.
Blind closeouts help you catch employees whose expected and actual totals don’t match up. Then it’s up to them to explain why.
6. Check employee reports for time theft
Time theft occurs when an employee is unproductive during work hours or not physically at work when they’re clocked in.
Time theft takes many forms, such as employees taking longer or unscheduled breaks, clocking in early or later than their shifts, or using their phones on the floor when they should be working. “Buddy punching,” asking another employee to punch in for you, is also common in restaurants.
Nearly half of employees (49%) admit to time theft. And while lax managers and owners may forgive small cases of time theft, statistics show these stolen hours add up:
Accountants say 92% of their clients have a problem with time theft — adding 5%, on average, to their gross payroll costs.
20% of every dollar earned is lost to employee time theft, costing US employers $11 billion annually.
Buddy punching costs US employers $373 million a year.
To catch time theft, check your end-of-day employee reports. Your fully-integrated restaurant platform should offer a complete overview of each employee’s day, from hours worked to sales, to gauge their productivity. Compare averages across employees and then against your surveillance footage to spot potential time stealers.
To prevent time theft:
Use restaurant scheduling software to create efficient employee schedules and incorporate appropriate breaks during off-peak times.
Enforce strict clock-in and out protocols to better understand actual work hours in your system.
Create a phone policy in your Restaurant Employee Handbook to let staff know when and where they can use their phones during their shifts. Ideally, the only phone your employees should use in a restaurant is your business phone system.
Catching time theft and preventing it in the future boosts profits and lowers your payroll expenses. Even better? It also raises employee morale. Your team knows who’s not pulling their weight despite receiving the same pay as those who work twice as hard.
7. Sign up for credit monitoring and identity theft alerts
Connecting your POS, inventory management, and accounting software makes your life easier. But it also presents opportunities for unscrupulous employees to access and steal sensitive financial information.
Rogue employees may know how to access your accounting screens to copy credit card numbers and bank account details. But it’s almost a guarantee that your managers access this information daily. And unfortunately, 85% of embezzlement cases were perpetrated by an employee at the managerial level or above.
The most popular types of restaurant fraud happen when employees:
Steal credit card numbers to make small fraudulent purchases that go unnoticed yet add up when made frequently.
Create phony vendor bills and pay themselves from your business account for products or services never rendered. A vendor payout for “new barware” may not raise red flags when you’re busy. But over time, these unaccounted-for expenses chip away at your bottom line.
Engage in check tampering. Employees can alter payer information in your system so that money will be deposited into their account rather than paid to a vendor.
Sell stolen personal information on the Dark Web. Credit card numbers, bank account details, employee social security numbers, and more can all be sold for hundreds of dollars on the Dark Web. Then cybercriminals can use this intel to exploit you and your staff.
Commit identity theft. Employees can find everything they need to open a new credit card account or take out a loan in your name in your system. They can get away with this for months before debt collectors come calling or they suddenly quit.
The more assets you have, the more you become a target for identity thieves. That’s why signing up for a credit monitoring service is the easiest way to automatically detect near real-time:
Changes to your credit reports or credit limits
Fraudsters applying for credit in your name
Fluctuations in your credit scores
Hard inquiries from lenders that you didn’t request
Unauthorized loans or credit card applications made in your name
The best identity theft protection should also provide $1 million in identity theft insurance to cover all the expenses associated with restoring your identity after it’s been stolen, such as the cost of legal fees, certified public accountants, replacing identification documents, and more.
To reduce security risks at your restaurant:
Customize employee profiles, permissions, and access. Only let each employee see what they need in your system. Restrict access to sensitive information and manage third-party access to your payroll, invoicing, sales data, etc. Make editing payment information password-protected so you’re the only one who can change these.
Use software with remote access to keep an eye on your establishment remotely and encrypt your emails You’ll always know what’s going on even when you’re away and employees may be more prone to hack into your systems.
Remember, it’s not just your personal information at risk, but your employees’ and customers’. Create a culture of data security, and you’ll scare away scammers looking for an easy target to compromise. Implementing these best practices is crucial for maintaining the integrity of your restaurant operations and enhancing your operational risk management process.
How can tech help you catch restaurant fraud & theft?
All the solutions we shared today to proactively catch restaurant fraud and theft happen much faster and easier with the right tech on your side. Restaurant management software helps detect inventory and POS discrepancies, employee time theft, and more, so you can focus on running your business.
With rising inflation trends in the hospitality industry and slimmer profit margins, you can’t afford to put off fraud prevention or look the other way on employee theft. Catching these transgressions ASAP may mean the difference between keeping your doors open for business and closing up your dream eatery for good.
Looking for a technology partner to help manage inventory, staff, operations, and more? Chat with one of our experts to learn how Lightspeed can help.
Are you looking for an honest web hosting comparison of Bluehost vs GoDaddy?
These are two of the most popular affordable hosting companies on the market. However, for beginners, it’s often not clear which one is better for their website.
In this guide, we will compare Bluehost vs GoDaddy with their pros and cons so that you can make the right decision.
Both are very popular. GoDaddy has a large market share and hosts over 40 million websites, while Bluehost is an official WordPress.org recommended hosting provider.
In this comparison, we will take a closer look into the pros and cons of Bluehost vs GoDaddy in detail. However, if you don’t want to go through the full comparison, here is a quick summary:
That being said, let’s compare each one of them and see how they stack up.
Bluehost Comparison
Bluehost is one of the biggest web hosting companies in the world and an officially recommended WordPress host. They offer WordPress-optimized hosting plans with faster servers and reliable performance.
Their shared hosting prices are lower priced when compared to other hosting companies. This makes them a good choice for beginners and small businesses on a limited budget.
Pros of Bluehost
Bluehost offers great value at a low cost, but what are some of their pros and cons? Let’s start with some of the benefits of using Bluehost as your hosting service:
Lower Costs – Bluehost’s entry-level plan allows you to get started with your website for a lower price, which is great value for new small businesses, bloggers, portfolios, and other types of websites.
Ease of Use – Bluehost has one of the most beginner-friendly hosting control panels that makes it super easy to install WordPress (one click) and manage your website.
Free Domain – They offer a free domain name, which saves you additional money on your start-up costs.
Free CDN + Free SSL – Bluehost offers a free CDN to speed up your website, and all plans come with a free SSL certificate to improve website security.
Website Speed – In our tests, we found that Bluehost performs well, with no performance optimization done on our test sites. You can also add WordPress caching plugins to unlock further speed improvements.
Staging Sites + Dev Tools – Bluehost plans come with staging site setup, automatic WordPress updates, the ability to change PHP versions, SFTP access, and more.
Cons of Bluehost
Obviously, there are some downsides to using Bluehost as well. Here are some of the disadvantages that you may want to know:
Higher Domain Renewal Price – Their free domain renewal price is higher than average. This does not have an immediate impact on most businesses, but it is something you may need to keep in mind.
Upselling Addons – You will see a lot of upselling during signup. Most beginners usually don’t need these products right away, so you can skip them.
Bluehost has a 5-star rating on WPBeginner based on over 300 user reviews and the high value they offer at low prices. We also ran our own performance and stress tests on their servers, which you can read all about in our detailed Bluehost review.
The best thing about Bluehost is that you get a free domain with all plans, unlimited bandwidth and SSD storage on their Plus plan, and great overall value for what you pay.
Plus, their eCommerce hosting plan for WooCommerce comes with over $1000+ in premium WooCommerce and WordPress extensions, which is a huge cost saving for online store owners.
GoDaddy Comparison
GoDaddy is a famous web hosting company and the world’s biggest domain registrar. They offer a huge variety of hosting plans for individuals and businesses of every size.
GoDaddy has a large market share in the website hosting space, and many popular websites use them. However, they are not always the best option when you are building a website, creating a blog, or starting a new business.
Pros of GoDaddy
GoDaddy is a popular low-cost hosting provider, but what are some of their pros and cons? Let’s start with some of the benefits of using GoDaddy as your hosting service:
WordPress-Optimized Hosting – GoDaddy’s managed WordPress hosting plans are run on servers optimized for WordPress for faster and more secure hosting.
Managed Hosting – GoDaddy handles some basic administrative tasks for you, such as installing WordPress, automated daily backups, WordPress core updates, and server-level caching. Bluehost shared hosting plans also include some of these tasks.
Free Domain – They offer a free domain name, which helps you save money on your start-up costs.
Free CDN + Free SSL – GoDaddy plans come with the Cloudflare CDN to speed up your website, and all plans come with a free SSL certificate to improve website security.
Affordable – GoDaddy has very reasonable prices for all the features they offer.
24/7 Support – No matter when you need help, GoDaddy support is available any time of day or night.
Monthly Billing Option – For those who prefer to pay month to month, there is a monthly billing option. However, you get a bigger discount if you pay for at least a year in advance.
Cons of Bluehost
Are there any downsides to using GoDaddy? Here are some of the disadvantages that you may want to know:
Addons – GoDaddy offers a huge variety of services. During the checkout process, many of these tools and features will be offered to you as addons. These are completely optional, but some users may find all the upsell offers to be too aggressive.
Controversial Ads – GoDaddy has come under fire several times over the years due to its controversial advertising. While this does not affect their hosting services, some users have moved away from GoDaddy in protest against their ads.
No Email Support – While still offering 24/7 support by live chat and phone, GoDaddy has discontinued email support.
GoDaddy Review
GoDaddy has a 5-star rating on WPBeginner, but this is based on 16 reviews compared to over 300 for Bluehost. You will find detailed information about their hosting in our GoDaddy review.
Like Bluehost, GoDaddy’s plans offer excellent value. You get one year of free domain registration, a free SSL certificate, SSD storage, and unlimited bandwidth with all plans. Plus, their hosting plans are managed, saving you some ongoing maintenance work.
However, GoDaddy’s overall onboarding experience is not as beginner friendly. And while they offer 24/7 support via live chat and phone, they no longer offer email support.
Bluehost vs GoDaddy – Which Is Better?
Now that we have compared different features of Bluehost vs GoDaddy, you may still be wondering which one of these hosting providers is better.
If you are looking for the most affordable hosting, then the best choice is Bluehost. They offer better pricing for small businesses. They also have better support, and their My Sites dashboard and overall onboarding experience is a lot more beginner-friendly.
But maybe you would prefer the convenience of managed hosting, where the routine maintenance work such as updates, backups, and more is done for you.
In that case, GoDaddy offers basic managed hosting plans at a very affordable rate. In fact, they are much cheaper than Bluehost’s managed hosting. However, GoDaddy’s managed hosting plans offer fewer features when compared with the best managed hosting providers.
Although it will cost you more, we recommend WP Engine for managed WordPress hosting. They are the best for scaling your website, and they can even offer custom cloud hosting using Amazon’s infrastructure and more.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) About Bluehost vs GoDaddy
Having helped thousands of users choose the best web host for their needs, we have answered quite a few questions. Here are some of the answers to the most frequently asked questions about Bluehost vs GoDaddy.
Which is better for beginners, Bluehost or GoDaddy?
Bluehost is the most beginner-friendly WordPress hosting company on the market. They automatically install WordPress for you when you sign up. They also have an easy-to-use control panel that allows you to manage your hosting account by yourself.
There is plenty of help available with detailed guides, video tutorials, and articles. You also have 24/7 access to their expert support via live chat and phone.
GoDaddy is also a good option for beginners, but their hosting can be more complex to use.
Does Bluehost or GoDaddy have the greater market share?
Over 4 million websites are hosted on Bluehost. Out of the top 1 million websites based on traffic, just 0.37% use Bluehost.
GoDaddy has a much bigger market share, hosting over 40 million websites. And when we look at the top 1 million websites based on traffic, 2.06% host their sites with GoDaddy.
Where are Bluehost and GoDaddy servers located?
Bluehost operates their own in-house data center located in Utah, US. It is a massive 50,000 square feet facility that serves as its primary data center.
GoDaddy has nine server facilities around the world, located in North America, Europe, and Asia. These facilities house over 37,000 servers in total.
Can I use subdomains for my site?
Yes, you can use subdomains on either Bluehost or GoDaddy.
Are there other hosting providers that you haven’t covered in this comparison?
We only compared Bluehost vs GoDaddy in this article because they are the most popular affordable WordPress hosting companies.
Do you have any special discounts for Bluehost or GoDaddy?
Yes, because WPBeginner is the largest WordPress resource site, our users can get special discounts on popular hosting providers as well as other WordPress plugins. You can see all 100+ WordPress deals here.
You can use our Bluehost coupon to get over 60% off + a free domain.
Shopify Editions Summer ’23: New Features & Improvements
Summer 2023 is an exciting time for Shopify with the much-anticipated debut of Summer Editions. This year we are seeing hundreds of changes, upgrades, and enhancements to the Shopify platform, all in one compact bundle that will enhance the merchant and shopper experience.
Shopify is on a roll this year with their release and announcement of Shopify Editions Summer ’23, a strong follow-up to Shopify Editions Winter ’23. Shopify is known for constantly evolving its powerful ecommerce platform, staying well ahead of the curve to elevate the experience of both shoppers and merchants alike. With Shopify’s release of their Summer ’23 Edition, we are going to go over 10 new and soon-to-be-released updates that we think are worth noting, including a redesign to the admin sections, AI integrations, and new and improved apps.
In the following sections, we break down the 10 different categories of updates showcasing the remarkable enhancements within Shopify’s Summer ’23 update:
Need help building your Shopify Plus website? You can view our Shopify Experts profile here to see our work or reach out to us by filling out this form.
1. Redesigned Admin
One of the improvements launched with Shopify Editions Summer ’23 is to the Admin, one of the most substantial updates to the Admin in the past several years. Shopify merchants, with stores of all sizes, put in countless hours every single day managing their businesses through the Shopify admin, so it goes without saying that improving the admin experience is crucial to running a better online business.
With this edition, Shopify has redesigned the admin, providing users with a fresh visual design and single-column layout for the home page, making everything appear more streamlined, focused, and functional. The new design eliminates distraction and is made to help you work with efficiency by simplifying everything to its core. With the update to the Admin, you’ll notice improved fonts, icons, and higher information density, a more efficient search bar.
2. Shopify Collective
This update introduces Shopify Collective, a new and exciting function that will allow merchants to expand their store catalog with new products through partnerships with other brands on Shopify.
A new tool to add to your online business, Shopify Collective allows you to form partnerships with other stores and gain access to products they sell that you wish to display and sell through your storefront. With Collective, you can curate new products from brands in the U.S. and add their products to your store.
These suppliers ship directly to your customers so you don’t need to store and manage the extra inventory and shipping, you’ll just be gaining new ways to boost your bottom line and increase customer order value.
Shopify Collective is free to use and is currently available to selected stores in the US. Interested in selling your products with other merchants on Shopify Collective? Learn how to become a supplier.
3. Shopify Bundles App
A newly launched Shopify App, Shopify Bundles allows you to create and sell product bundles through your store, making it another great way for stores to increase their order value by offering product groupings.
The Shopify Bundles App is currently in general availability and is free. The app can be integrated into your shop and can be used to create and launch product bundles of your choosing quickly.
The app is excelling for simple and fixed bundles, but for more advanced “mix and match” bundles, you can use the updated bundle apps in the Shopify App Store.
4. Shopify Subscriptions App
This summer Shopify is unveiling their Shopify Subscription App. Subscription services are a big trend in the ecommerce space, allowing merchants to essentially put customers “on repeat” when they sign up for a subscription for a recurring product purchase or service, like a monthly coffee subscription or pet food subscription.
While there are many recommended subscription apps on Shopify’s App Store, Shopify will be releasing its very own free subscription app for Shopify merchants. The soon-to-be-released Shopify app will help merchants set up and manage simple subscription offers. With the app, you can set up new customer accounts, and provide customers with the flexibility to pause or skip orders, update payment and shipping details, and more.
This summer’s update is really about expanding how and where you sell your products, and Marketplace Connect (formerly Codisto) is being launched on Shopify to expand your online sales to new platforms.
With Marketplace Connect, you can essentially connect your Shopify store and its product catalogs with other top marketplaces and global platforms like Amazon, Walmart, and eBay. This new Shopify app allows you to completely streamline the management of your marketplace listings, inventory, orders, and fulfillment—directly through one centralized Shopify app that keeps everything in sync. Marketplace Connect allows inventories to stay updated across channels in real-time and allows a world of possibilities when it comes to multi-channel sales.
6. Improved B2B Features
B2B (business-to-business) has grown significantly in recent years, and Shopify has been working to make the B2B experience even better with every Edition.
With the improved functionality of B2B on Shopify, you can easily manage selling B2B and D2C all from the same shop.
In this Edition, you can set Volume Pricing on your products to offer bulk discounts for your wholesale customers. However, Volume Pricing and quantity rules is currently exclusive to Shopify Plus stores.
When it comes to B2B payments, customers can now pay for orders using PayPal. Business customers can also use previously stored credit card information on draft orders at checkout or when paying an invoice with Credit Card Vaulting, a secure way to save credit card information.
An interesting new addition, Shopify has announced an AI-powered assistant aptly named Sidekick. Sidekick blends AI technology and Shopify data to provide personalized and helpful assistance to merchants for various functions ranging from shop development to marketing, and customer support.
Sidekick, your new AI commerce assistant, is conversational by design and was developed so that you can use everyday language to improve your store. The AI assistant can save you time by doing things like suggesting the best apps and can help answer questions and solve problems, so you can achieve more, a lot faster.
Sidekick will help merchants tackle repetitive tasks, research, workflows, and more. This new feature will be available for free to all Shopify merchants, regardless of the Shopify subscription plan you are using.
8. Improved Checkout
Shopify already has The Best Checkout Page of 2023 and the new Editions update is set to make it even better and more efficient at converting visitors into paying customers.
Shopify checkout has an impressive overall conversion rate that leaves the competition well in the dust, and it is better by up to 36% and by an average of 15%. Shopify is now making checkout even more efficient by streamlining everything into a one-page checkout experience. Shopify is also rolling out 17 new APIs and updates to help you create the best checkout experience for your business and unique business needs.
9. Editor- Flex Sections
The store editor is where merchants and designers spend much of their time crafting the look and feel of their online stores, and Shopify is rolling out a new update that will make store design easier, more intuitive, and customizable.
They are calling the new function on the store editor Flex Sections, a soon-to-be-released update that makes it easier than ever to create customized layouts for your online business. Shopify uses CSS Flexbox, which enables better multi-directional responsive layouts and easier content alignmentWith Shopify’s introduction of multi-directional and highly responsive block layouts, Flex Sections allows users to easily drag and drop, resize, group, and edit your store to make it uniquely yours.
10. Shopify Inbox
While we’ve had Shopify Inbox for a while now, there’s been another update that enhances the efficiency and productivity of your online store. If you aren’t already using a chat app in your store, Shopify inbox is a tool you can use to engage customers in real-time. What’s new and exciting about Shopify Inbox is that it has new AI capabilities that can help turn casual store browsers into buyers, by helping you manage customer conversations, create automated messages, and get insights on the chats that convert.
You can also save more time with AI-generated FAQs. With Shopify Inbox you can review and publish Pre-approved FAQs and answer where customers can select their question and quickly get answers.
Conclusion
We’ve gone over 10 new updates brought about by the release of Shopify Editions in Summer ’23.Shopify’s announcement for the next phase of their platform heralds a new age in ecommerce that provides a more flexible, innovative, and overall more streamlined experience to ecommerce.
You’ll notice that Shopify is staying up-to-date by embracing AI technology and introducing it to many aspects of the platform, they also continue to make multi-channel commerce easier, giving merchants more opportunities to make sales any time and place.
This new release and announcements made with Shopify Editions Summer ’23 deliver features meant to help you confidently and successfully achieve your brand goals, and we’re looking forward to the updates as much as you are.
At Ecommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful Shopify and Shopify Plus ecommerce businesses. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
In the hustle of today’s world, stress is a common visitor. This article delves into the depths of stress, explaining its sources, its effects on our well-being, its positive sides, and providing practical methods to manage it.
Defining Stress: What Is It?
Stress is our body’s ancient response, inherited from our ancestors. It’s like a built-in alarm system that gets us ready to face challenges.
This “fight-or-flight” reaction is a natural survival tactic that’s been with us for a long time.
What Makes Us Stressed?
Our modern lives have many triggers for stress. The pressures of work, constant technological presence, and the expectations society puts on us all add up.
These pressures can affect both our minds and our bodies.
Different Kinds of Stress
Stress can come from both outside and inside of us. Outside factors like money worries and what others think about us can pile on stress.
Inside, personal issues such as arguments within the family or health concerns can make stress even more overwhelming.
What Stress Does to Us
Stress doesn’t just make us feel bad mentally. It can lead to feelings of anxiety, sadness, and moodiness.
Beyond affecting our minds, stress also takes a toll on our bodies. It weakens our immune system, making us more susceptible to illnesses, and increases the risk of heart problems.
The Psychological and Physical Impact
Stress casts a wide net over our mental and physical health. On the psychological side, it can trigger more severe mental health issues like depression and anxiety disorders.
On the physical front, stress contributes to sleep problems, headaches, and muscle tension. This combination of psychological and physical distress can create a vicious cycle, where mental stress affects the body, which in turn amplifies mental strain.
The Positive Side of Stress
While stress is often seen negatively, it can have positive effects too. It can motivate us to perform better, boosting our productivity.
A moderate amount of stress can enhance our cognitive abilities, making us more focused and alert when facing challenges.
The Ripple Effect on Productivity
Stress doesn’t just affect us individually; it has a ripple effect on our productivity too. When stress takes hold, our ability to focus diminishes, and our decision-making skills become clouded.
This can lead to reduced efficiency at work or school, impacting our overall performance.
Additionally, stress can strain relationships, both personal and professional, further compromising our effectiveness.
Mindset Matters: Shaping Stress Perception
Understanding that stress can have positive sides is essential. Stress isn’t always bad. Some of it can actually help us – it’s called “eustress.”
Adopting a resilient mindset and learning effective coping strategies can help us manage stress constructively.
How to Manage Stress
Managing stress is a vital skill. Techniques like mindfulness and meditation create a path to inner calm. Engaging in physical activities, such as exercise, releases chemicals that counter stress’s effects.
Getting Help from Others
Building a support network is like having armor against stress. Friends and family can provide emotional refuge. If things become overwhelming, mental health professionals offer guidance.
Changing Our Lifestyle to Fight Stress
Our diet plays a role in stress management. Consuming foods rich in omega-3 fatty acids and complex carbohydrates contributes to emotional stability.
Prioritizing sleep and avoiding excessive caffeine, alcohol, and nicotine intake also help.
Time Management and Stress
Managing time wisely prevents stress from spiraling out of control. Making to-do lists, allocating time sensibly, and avoiding overloading ourselves are effective strategies.
Breaking tasks into smaller goals can prevent stress overload and enhance productivity.
Creating Calm Spaces
Our surroundings impact stress levels. Decluttering our physical space minimizes mental clutter. Using aromatherapy and incorporating soothing elements like colors from nature fosters relaxation and stress reduction.
Long-Term Ways to Fight Stress
Proactive measures fortify us against stress’s grip. Engaging in hobbies, learning new skills, and personal growth boost emotional resilience.
In Conclusion: Navigating Stress with Knowledge
You’ve now journeyed through the realm of stress. You understand its roots, its effects, its positive impacts, and how to manage it.
Armed with strategies like mindset shifts, seeking support, and leading a balanced life, you can navigate life’s challenges with newfound strength.
In the digital age, where online shopping has become the norm, the demand for a personalized and interactive shopping experience is at an all-time high. The STAGGS WooCommerce Product Configurator emerges as an innovative solution, bridging the gap between standard online shopping and a tailored experience.
STAGGS Product Configurator is a game-changer for WooCommerce stores. This comprehensive toolkit transforms regular product pages into fully functional product configurators, offering real-time updates, stackable image layers, and a multitude of features that enhance the user experience and boost sales.
Key Features of STAGGS WooCommerce Product Configurator
The Staggs Product Configurator is not just another plugin; it’s a comprehensive solution for businesses. Some standout features include:
Stackable Image Layers: Imagine being able to layer different product attributes seamlessly. With stackable image layers, customers can visualize combinations like never before.
Real-time Product Updates: No more waiting. As customers tweak and tune their products, they see changes in real-time, ensuring there are no surprises at checkout.
Dynamic Pricing: As customizations are added or removed, the price adjusts on the fly. Transparent and straightforward.
9+ Attribute Templates: Variety is the spice of life. With over nine attribute templates, the customization possibilities are virtually endless.
Request Invoices: A boon for B2B customers. They can request detailed invoices with a simple click, streamlining the procurement process.
Analytics: Knowledge is power. Dive deep into customer preferences and trends with robust analytics.
Hooks and Filters for Developers: For those who like to tinker under the hood, STAGGS offers a plethora of hooks and filters. Customize to your heart’s content.
PRO Features of STAGGS Product Configurator
3d product configurator for woocommerce
Elevate your online store to unparalleled heights with the PRO features of the STAGGS Product Configurator. By upgrading, you unlock a suite of advanced functionalities that enhance user experience and streamline operations, making it an indispensable asset for those serious about e-commerce success. Some standout features of the Pro include:
Conditional Step Display: It’s all about a clutter-free experience. Why overwhelm customers with irrelevant options? Based on prior choices, only pertinent customization steps are displayed.
Sharable Configurator Links: Word of mouth in the digital age. Happy customers can share their unique designs, driving traffic and potential sales.
3D Model Configurators: Beyond 2D visuals, the 3D models offer a 360-degree view, ensuring customers understand every facet of their customized product.
The STAGGS Advantage
STAGGS WooCommerce Product Configurator is a fusion of clarity and groundbreaking innovation. Its distinctive stackable image layers usher in a transformative era for e-commerce, empowering customers to envision their selected product with unmatched clarity.
The analytics feature is nothing short of a treasure trove for store owners. It provides actionable insights, paving the way for strategies that amplify sales and enhance profitability.
The introduction of 3D model configurators by STAGGS is revolutionary. It bridges the tactile gap in the digital realm, offering customers an immersive experience where they can virtually “touch” and “feel” their selections. Furthermore, the power of sharable links cannot be understated. In an era where personal recommendations are gold, these links harness the influential nature of peer-to-peer shopping advice.
But its effortless integration truly elevates STAGGS to a league of its own. Whether you’re navigating the waters of WooCommerce for the first time or you’re a seasoned pro, integrating STAGGS is a cinch. Couple this with its cost-effective approach, and it becomes abundantly clear: STAGGS delivers an unmatched return on investment in the digital shopping sphere.
Getting Started with STAGGS Product Configurator
How to build a configurable product with STAGGS Product Configurator.
Navigate to your website’s dashboard after installing the STAGGS Product Configurator plugin from its official download page. Then, confidently proceed by selecting the STAGGS option in your dashboard to access and design within the Configurator Builder. Embrace the heart of this transformative tool.
Start by defining custom product attributes. These can include color options, sizes, materials, and more. This step is crucial as it determines the customization options available to your customers.
If your product has multiple customization stages, use the Step Navigation feature. This allows you to split the configurator into multiple steps, guiding the customer through the customization process.
Head to the Customizer section to tweak the look and feel of your configurator. Adjust colors, fonts, and icons, and even add custom CSS to ensure the configurator aligns with your brand’s aesthetics.
Use the Conditional Logic feature to display certain attributes only when specific conditions are met. This adds a layer of interactivity and ensures customers only see relevant options.
Preview and Test:
Before going live, preview your configurator to ensure it looks and functions as expected. Test all features, from basic attribute selection to advanced functionalities like 3D model viewing.
STAGGS Product Configurator Pricing
STAGGS WooCommerce Product Configurator
All plans will get access to the latest plugin updates to stay safe and secure. However, newly added features may only be included in premium plans.
Conclusion
The Staggs WooCommerce Product Configurator Plugin stands out as a transformative tool for WooCommerce store owners. Its seamless integration ensures that transitioning to a more vibrant product display is hassle-free.
The PRO version takes shopping to another level, allowing customers to immerse themselves in 3D visualizations and Augmented Reality, making it feel as if the store has come alive in their own space. Furthermore, the plugin’s robust analytics module offers invaluable insights into customer preferences, ensuring businesses stay ahead of trends.
With a diverse array of templates, whether you’re a fan of the classic WooCommerce look or desire a comprehensive configurator page, Staggs promises to cater to every aesthetic preference. Truly, it’s a game-changer in the e-commerce realm.
The Top Apps for Driving Customer Lifetime Val – Blend Commerce
Are you tired of constantly chasing new customers only to see them disappear after just one purchase? At Blend, we understand the frustration of investing time and resources into acquiring new leads only to take advantage of the long-term value they could bring to your business. That’s why we’ve made Customer Lifetime Value (CLV) our top priority—and why you should too.
Discover the transformative world of Customer Lifetime Value and explore ten carefully selected apps that can turn one-time buyers into loyal, lifelong customers. These innovative tools empower your business with increased retention, thriving relationships, and a more robust bottom line. So, let’s dive in!
LoyaltyLion is a robust loyalty platform designed to cultivate lasting business-customer relationships. Using a points-based system, LoyaltyLion rewards customers for various actions, such as making purchases, writing reviews, or engaging with your brand on social media. As customers earn points, they unlock exclusive perks and benefits, creating a sense of appreciation and exclusivity.
LoyaltyLion encourages customers to stay loyal to your brand over time by incentivising customer engagement and repeat purchases. This increased loyalty translates into higher Customer Lifetime Value (CLV) as satisfied customers become devoted brand advocates, sharing positive experiences with others and attracting new customers through word-of-mouth referrals.
Yotpo – Personalisation and Social Proof:
Yotpo is a customer engagement platform that leverages personalisation and social proof to enhance customer retention and boost CLV. The venue showcases authentic customer reviews, photos, and videos, building trust and credibility for your brand. By offering personalised product recommendations based on each customer’s purchase history and behaviour, Yotpo creates a tailored shopping experience that resonates with individual preferences.
This personalisation level increases customer satisfaction and encourages repeat purchases, leading to higher CLV. Furthermore, Yotpo’s integration with social media allows customers to easily share their experiences, turning satisfied customers into brand advocates who attract new customers, further driving long-term growth and success.
Support & Subscription Management
Gorgias – Exceptional Customer Support:
Gorgias is an app that enhances customer support through automation and AI-powered chatbots. By analysing customer inquiries, Gorgias provides quick and efficient responses, resolving issues and concerns promptly. This level of exceptional customer support not only increases customer satisfaction but also reduces churn, as customers feel valued and supported. The improved customer retention, in turn, contributes to a higher CLV, as customers who have a positive support experience are more likely to remain loyal and make repeat purchases.
Recharge – Subscription Management Simplified:
Recharge is a subscription management app that simplifies the subscription experience for customers, leading to increased customer satisfaction and retention. The app streamlines the subscription process, making it easy for customers to subscribe, manage their subscriptions, and make changes as needed.
By providing a seamless and user-friendly subscription experience, Recharge ensures that customers stay committed to your subscription-based service while still having the option to make one-time purchases, leading to longer customer relationships and a boost in CLV. With improved customer retention, businesses can rely on a more stable revenue stream and capitalise on the long-term value of loyal subscribers.
Conversion Rate Optimisation
Tapcart – Mobile Commerce Made Easy:
Tapcart is an app designed to optimise the mobile commerce experience, leading to higher customer satisfaction and increased CLV from mobile users. With a user-friendly and visually appealing mobile storefront, Tapcart ensures customers have a seamless shopping experience on their mobile devices.
By providing personalised product recommendations and timely offers, Tapcart keeps customers engaged and interested, encouraging them to return for future purchases. The app’s focus on mobile commerce allows businesses to tap into the growing trend of mobile shopping, ultimately leading to higher CLV as more customers make repeat purchases from their mobile devices.
Penny Black – Personalised Packaging:
Penny Black offers an ingenious way to enhance Customer Lifetime Value by revolutionising the unboxing experience for your customers. By adding personalised notes and messages to each package, merchants can create a sense of genuine care and appreciation, strengthening the emotional connection with their customers. This personal touch leaves a lasting impression and increases the likelihood of repeat purchases and brand loyalty.
Moreover, Penny Black’s ability to suggest relevant upsells and cross-sells based on previous purchase behaviour can further drive revenue growth, as customers are more inclined to explore additional offerings tailored to their preferences. The app’s seamless integration into the packing process makes it scalable for businesses of all sizes, enabling them to efficiently implement this powerful strategy to increase CLV and cultivate a loyal customer base.
Automated Marketing
AdYogi LTV – Where Data Meets Marketing:
Experience the brilliance of AdYogi LTV, a data-driven marketing app that uses artificial intelligence to predict Customer Lifetime Value precisely. With this valuable information, craft targeted campaigns prioritising high-value customers and maximising your Customer Lifetime Value. Bid farewell to guesswork, as AdYogi LTV’s AI-powered algorithms meticulously analyse customer data, providing accurate forecasts of their lifetime value.
Identify and nurture the most valuable customers to focus your marketing efforts where they matter most. Optimise your CLV, leading to more significant revenue and overall success with AdYogi LTV’s data-driven marketing strategies.
Octane AI – The AI-Powered Shopping Companion:
Octane AI is an AI-powered platform that weaves personalised and interactive conversations with your customers through chatbots and SMS. Deliver tailored product recommendations, instant query responses, and unwavering support to elevate the customer experience, leading to higher retention rates and a significant increase in Customer Lifetime Value.
Octane AI’s AI-powered chatbots act as personalised shopping companions, carefully analysing each customer’s preferences to offer resonating recommendations. It also allows your brand to provide real-time support and promptly address customer inquiries and concerns to build trust and loyalty.
Empowering Your Business for Lifelong Success
Prioritising Customer Lifetime Value will transform your business and create loyal, lifelong customers. The carefully selected apps presented in this blog offer powerful tools to drive engagement, repeat purchases, and customer retention.
Utilise data insights from Gorgias and Recharge, enhance the mobile experience with Tapcart and personalise your packaging with Penny Black. Elevate loyalty with LoyaltyLion and Yotpo, and harness data-driven marketing with AdYogi LTV and AI-powered interactions with Octane AI. Empower your business with these apps and embrace a customer-centric approach for lasting success.
If you have any questions or need assistance implementing these strategies, feel free to contact us here at Blend. We’re here to help you navigate the world of customer engagement and tailor the best solutions for your business needs.
App integration software has become increasingly popular as a way for businesses to connect and interact with their customers. These software tools enable businesses to easily integrate their applications and services with other applications, enabling customers to access their data and services from any device. They also allow businesses to quickly and easily scale their services, as well as improve the user experience.
The market for best app integration software has been rapidly evolving over the past few years. With the introduction of cloud-based services, companies are able to easily deploy and manage their applications and services, as well as quickly scale them to meet changing customer demands. Additionally, as technology has become more sophisticated, companies are able to integrate their applications with more services, and entered the market, offering a wide range of products and services. Companies such as Amazon, Microsoft, and Google have all developed their own software solutions for app integration. This has allowed businesses to quickly and easily integrate their applications with a variety of services while keeping costs down.
As the market for app integration software continues to grow, companies are introducing new features and services to make their products even more useful. For example, some companies are now offering APIs that allow customers to access their applications and services from any device. Additionally, businesses are now able to integrate their applications with artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning technologies, allowing them to better understand user behaviour and provide more personalized services.
The future of app integration software looks bright, as the demand for these services continues to grow, creating a need for outsourced it services. As companies continue to develop more sophisticated solutions, customers will be able to access their data and services from any device, while businesses benefit from improved user experience and cost savings.
Source: Verified Market Research
Benefits of App integration software
Automation: App integration software allows businesses to automate processes and tasks, resulting in greater efficiency and productivity. Automation also reduces the need for manual labour, which can help businesses save time and money.
Data Integration: App integration software allows businesses to integrate data from multiple applications, allowing for more accurate and comprehensive decision-making. This allows businesses to make better decisions based on the most up-to-date information.
Improved Customer Experience: App integration software allows businesses to provide their customers with a better experience. Integration software allows businesses to integrate customer data across different applications, allowing customers to easily access the information they need.
Security: App integration software helps ensure data security. By connecting multiple applications and keeping data secure, businesses can protect their customers’ data and their own confidential information.
Cost Savings: App integration software can help businesses save money by reducing the need for costly software updates and maintenance. Integration software also reduces the need for manual labour, which can help businesses save time and money.
ZapUp is a powerful and user-friendly app integration software that helps you quickly connect and manage your business applications. It allows you to connect your existing apps and data sources to create automated workflows, or “Zaps,” that save you time and money. With ZapUp, you can easily connect popular cloud applications such as Salesforce, QuickBooks, Dropbox, and Google Apps.
Features of ZapUp:
Unlimited Zaps:Data can be mapped to equivalent fields in other applications and exchanged in any form inside one application, making it simple to transfer, classify, and analyze afterwards.
Application Management:
Utilize an intuitive dashboard to easily update, remove, or delete all of your app connections while keeping track of how your apps communicate with one another.
Real-time Logs: Real-time reporting can help you gain insightful information about your workflows and enhance your sales, marketing, and other key operations, which will boost efficiency and productivity.
Custom Connectors: By automating and simplifying processes, business apps can save time by reducing the need for manual data monitoring and accuracy evaluation. This helps to reduce human error.
Visual Builder: Boost productivity without the help of IT by giving your company the tools to remain ahead of the competition, strengthen workflows, and save time on manual process execution.
Cleo is an app integration software that helps businesses and organizations quickly integrate their applications and data across multiple platforms. It is designed to provide a seamless user experience for both developers and users alike. It provides a comprehensive set of tools to help businesses and organizations integrate their applications, data, and processes quickly and easily.
Features of Cleo App Integration Software:
Automated Data Processing: Cleo provides an automated data processing feature that helps users streamline their operations and reduce manual labour. It allows users to set up automated tasks for data extraction, transformation, and loading. This helps users save time and improve the accuracy of their data.
Data Visualization: Cleo also features data visualization tools that allow users to get an overview of their data. It provides interactive charts and graphs that make it easy to gain insights into their data. This helps users make better decisions and identify trends in their data.
Scalable Architecture: The software also features a scalable architecture that can accommodate the changing needs of businesses. It allows users to easily scale up or down depending on their current needs. This helps businesses save money and improve their efficiency.
Security: Cleo also provides a secure platform for users to protect their data. It utilizes advanced encryption techniques to ensure that data is safe and secure. This helps users maintain compliance and ensure that their data is secure.
Integration with Other Platforms: Cleo also features integration with other platforms such as Salesforce, SAP, and Oracle. This helps users quickly and easily connect their applications and systems. This helps businesses improve their efficiency and reduce manual labour.
MuleSoft is the leading integration platform for connecting software applications, data, and devices. With MuleSoft, users can quickly and easily integrate, manage, and monitor applications, data, and devices to create a unified digital experience.
Features of MuleSoft:
Powerful and Flexible Connectivity: MuleSoft provides powerful and flexible connectivity options that allow users to quickly and easily integrate applications, data, and devices.
Robust Security: MuleSoft offers a robust security platform that provides end-to-end protection for applications and data. It offers advanced authentication and authorization capabilities, as well as encryption and tokenization to ensure data is securely transmitted.
Advanced Analytics: MuleSoft provides advanced analytics capabilities that allow users to gain insights into their integration environment. It provides powerful analytics tools that allow users to track and monitor data flows, identify trends, and identify potential issues.
Scalability and Reliability: MuleSoft provides scalability and reliability features that allow users to quickly and easily scale their integration environment. It offers a wide range of options, including cloud-based deployments and on-premises deployments.
Software AG is a leading provider of enterprise-class integration software solutions. It enables organizations to quickly and easily integrate applications, systems, and data sources, enabling them to reduce costs, increase efficiency, and improve business agility.
Features of Software AG:
Integration Platform as a Service (iPaaS): Software AG’s iPaaS is a cloud-based integration platform designed to enable organizations to quickly and easily integrate their applications and systems.
API Management: Software AG’s API management solution enables organizations to create, manage, and monitor their APIs in a secure, compliant, and scalable manner. ]
Cloud Integration: Software AG’s cloud integration solutions enable organizations to integrate their on-premise applications and systems with cloud-based applications and services.
Data Integration: Software AG’s data integration solutions enable organizations to quickly and easily integrate their data sources and systems. It provides a range of data integration services, including ETL, data replication, data synchronization, and more.
Analytics: Software AG’s analytics solutions enable organizations to analyze and visualize their data in real time. It provides a range of analytics services, including predictive analytics, machine learning, and more.
Celigo is an app integration software that helps businesses automate their processes and connect their applications, databases, and other tech tools. With Celigo, users can build their own workflows and create custom integrations to streamline their business operations.
Celigo’s Features:
Celigo provides a number of powerful features that make it one of the most popular integration software solutions on the market. These features include:
Pre-built Integrations: Celigo has a library of pre-built integrations that make it easy to connect popular applications like Salesforce, NetSuite, Shopify, and more. This allows users to quickly and easily connect their applications and get up and running quickly.
Custom Integrations: Celigo also allows users to create custom integrations that are tailored to their specific business needs. This allows users to create the exact integration they need and to customize it to their exact specifications.
Automation: Celigo’s automation features allow users to automate their workflows and processes, eliminating manual efforts and saving time and money.
Data Synchronization: Celigo’s data synchronization features ensure that data is always up-to-date and accurate across all connected applications. This ensures that businesses always have access to the most up-to-date data.
Security: Celigo offers a number of security features that help protect users’ data and ensure that it is kept safe and secure.
Jitterbit is an app integration software solution that enables businesses to quickly and easily connect their applications and data sources into a unified platform. With Jitterbit, businesses can create a single, unified view of customer data across all systems, enabling them to make better decisions, increase efficiency, and improve customer experiences.
Key Features of Jitterbit App Integration Software:
Unified Platform: Jitterbit provides a unified platform for integrating multiple applications and data sources. This helps businesses reduce the complexity of managing multiple systems and makes it easier to access and share data across systems.
Automation: Jitterbit enables businesses to automate data exchanges between applications. This helps reduce manual data entry and saves time and money.
Cloud-based: Jitterbit is cloud-based, which means businesses can access their data from anywhere, at any time.
Customizable: Jitterbit is highly customizable, allowing businesses to tailor the integration process to their specific needs.
Security: Jitterbit provides secure data transfers, helping businesses protect their data from unauthorized access.
Support: Jitterbit offers 24/7 customer support to help businesses with any integration-related issues.
Scalability: Jitterbit is highly scalable, which means businesses can easily add more systems and applications as their needs grow.
WSO2 is an open-source application integration software platform that helps businesses integrate and manage applications, services, and APIs across multiple platforms. It provides an enterprise-grade, end-to-end solution that enables organizations to connect applications and data sources rapidly and securely.
Features of WSO2 Application Integration Software:
Comprehensive Integration Capabilities: WSO2 provides a complete set of integration capabilities for connecting applications and data sources. It supports a wide range of protocols and technologies, including SOAP, REST, JMS, AMQP, and more.
Robust Security: WSO2 offers extensive security features, including authentication, authorization, encryption, and access control. It also provides the capability to securely connect to external systems.
Easy-to-use APIs: WSO2 provides a range of easy-to-use APIs for developing and managing integrations quickly and efficiently.
Flexible Deployment Options: WSO2 can be deployed on-premises, in the cloud, or in a hybrid environment.
High Scalability: WSO2 can be scaled up to meet the needs of large enterprises, making it a suitable solution for large-scale integration projects.
SnapLogic is an application integration software designed to streamline the connection of data and applications across the enterprise. It allows businesses to integrate their applications quickly and effectively, allowing them to get more value from their data and applications. SnapLogic can help businesses to reduce costs, increase productivity, and improve customer experiences by providing an integrated and automated platform for data and application integration.
Features of SnapLogic:
SnapLogic offers a wide range of features to help businesses with their data and application integration needs. These features include:
Data Connectors: SnapLogic provides a wide range of data connectors to help businesses integrate their data from various sources, such as databases, flat files, and other applications.
Automation: SnapLogic provides automation capabilities to help businesses automate their data and application integration tasks. This helps to reduce the cost and time associated with manual integration tasks.
Security: SnapLogic provides a secure environment for businesses to ensure the security of their data and applications.
Monitoring and Reporting: SnapLogic provides real-time monitoring and reporting capabilities to help businesses track the performance of their data and application integration tasks.
Scalability: SnapLogic offers scalability options to help businesses scale their data and application integration needs as their business grows.
Workato is a cloud-based integration and automation platform that allows businesses to connect and automate their applications, data and processes. It is an all-in-one platform that enables users to quickly and securely integrate their apps, automate their business processes, and manage their data in real time.
Features of Workato:
Application Integration: Workato offers seamless integration between popular SaaS and on-premise applications. Users can easily sync data between applications and automate workflows across multiple apps.
Automation: Workato allows users to automate business processes such as customer onboarding and order fulfilment. It provides an intuitive drag-and-drop interface for creating automation workflows and allows users to quickly define and execute automated processes.
Real-Time Data Management: Workato allows users to manage their data in real-time. It provides powerful data transformation and enrichment features that enable users to quickly and easily transform their data into the format they need.
Security & Compliance: Workato provides secure and compliant integration solutions. All data is encrypted in transit and at rest, and the platform is compliant with industry standards such as HIPAA, GDPR, and SOC 2.
Reporting & Analytics: Workato provides detailed reporting and analytics features to track and analyze data from connected applications. This allows users to gain insights into their business performance and make informed decisions.
Boomi is an app integration software that allows users to quickly and easily connect applications, data, and devices from any cloud or on-premise environment. It provides a unified platform for real-time integration of data, services, and applications to streamline business processes.
Features of Boomi:
Drag-and-Drop Interface: Boomi’s drag-and-drop interface makes it easy to create and manage integration processes. Users can quickly and easily connect applications and services to each other, creating powerful connections between existing applications, services, and data sources.
Real-Time Monitoring: Bhoomi’s real-time monitoring feature allows users to monitor their integration processes in real time, ensuring that processes are running smoothly and efficiently.
Data Mapping: Boomi’s data mapping feature allows users to map data from one application or service to another, making it easy to integrate data from multiple sources.
Secure Connections: Boomi’s secure connections feature ensures that all data is securely transferred between applications, services, and data sources.
API Management: Boomi’s API management feature allows users to quickly and easily create, manage, and monitor APIs.
Scalability: Boomi’s scalability feature allows businesses to easily scale up or down their integration processes as needed.
Businesses should take advantage of the benefits of having a complete productivity suite along with ZapUp -app integration software. This integration software helps businesses to streamline their workflows and automate processes. With the help of this software, businesses can easily connect their existing software applications and start automating their tasks.
Businesses need a variety of suites to help them succeed in today’s competitive market. A marketing suite is essential to help businesses attract and retain customers, while a sales suite can help them develop and manage customer relationships. An HR suite can assist businesses with recruitment, onboarding, performance management and other HR-related tasks. Finally, a productive suite can help businesses streamline operational processes and maximize efficiency. By having all of these suites, businesses can gain a competitive advantage in the market and maximize their success.
Conclusion
Businesses have a great opportunity to benefit from 49+ applications by 500apps for just $14.99. Along with the applications, businesses can also take advantage of ZapUp – App Integration Software. With ZapUp, businesses can easily integrate their applications into one single system, making it easier to manage and organize data. This would enable businesses to improve their efficiency and productivity. By having access to a wide range of applications, businesses can easily customize their workflow and tailor their operations to their specific needs. This will result in increased efficiency and cost savings in the long run. With ZapUp, businesses can also benefit from additional features such as automated data collection, automatic updates, and cloud storage. All these features are essential for businesses to stay competitive and succeed in today’s market.
25 Free WordPress Troubleshooting Tools Our Support Experts Swear By
Looking for the best free tools for quick and easy WordPress troubleshooting? Here are 25 site-saving tools our support team use every day to troubleshoot and fix issues on thousands of WordPress sites.
WPMU DEV’s support team handles an average of almost 10,000 support requests each month from members via live chat and forums, and over 75% of all the support tickets we receive involve troubleshooting WordPress sites.
Given the volume of support requests we receive and the urgent need to resolve issues for our members as quickly and effectively as possible, our support team has built up quite a list of useful WordPress troubleshooting tools…and most of them are free to use!
Bookmark this handy and helpful resource – it will help you become your clients’ all-time WordPress hero!
Keep reading to learn about all these useful tools or click on a link to go directly to the tool’s description and link.
Use MxToolbox for troubleshooting email issues and improving email delivery.
MxToolbox offers a comprehensive set of tools to manage email configuration and troubleshoot email issues for improved email delivery.
The integrated tool provides diagnostics for MX records, DNS, blacklists, and SMTP. By inputting a domain name or IP address, you can access relevant tools and information, along with a chronological history of results.
The tool covers various checks, including reputation blacklists, SMTP server testing, MX records, SPF records, DNS A records, and more. Additionally, you can perform tasks such as domain registration lookup, IP address block information, TCP and HTTP connection verification, ping, trace route, and DNS server checks.
httpstatus.io is a bulk URL HTTP status code, header , and redirect checker.
httpstatus.io is a free tool for checking HTTP status codes, response headers, and redirect chains of a server in response to a URL request. It allows you to check bulk URLs and analyze and export the results.
The tool offers flexibility in modifying HTTP request settings, such as changing the User Agent, sending server authentication credentials, and adding custom headers, and helps troubleshoot issues like redirect chains, which can impact site performance, SEO, and user experience.
httpstatus.io also provides features like a redirect checker, customizable request headers, filters for sorting results, data export options, and identification of redirect latency issues.
The tool allows easy input of up to 100 URLs for checking status codes and redirect chains in one go, making it convenient for troubleshooting multiple WordPress sites.
Temp-Mail is a free throwaway email service that provides temporary and disposable email addresses.
Disposable email addresses are useful for troubleshooting sites, testing purposes, and protecting your business email from spam lists. They help keep your mailbox clean, protect against hacking attempts and spam, maintain anonymity, and are commonly used for registering on WordPress sites, forums, Wi-Fi networks, and online services.
Features of temp-mail.org include easy creation of temporary email addresses, no registration or personal information required, multiple email addresses available, temporary email storage for received messages, and the ability to generate random or choose specific email addresses.
Postman provides a comprehensive set of tools for designing, testing, documenting, mocking, and discovering APIs.
The Postman API client is a foundational tool that lets you explore, debug, and test your APIs. It supports various API request types, including HTTP, REST, SOAP, GraphQL, and WebSockets.
The API client automatically detects response language, links, and formats for easy inspection, provides built-in support for authentication protocols (e.g. OAuth 1.2/2.0, AWS Signature, and Hawk), lets you organize requests into reusable collections, include JavaScript code to connect requests or automate workflows, and use scripting capabilities to visualize API responses as charts and graphs for better analysis.
MailTrap simplifies email testing and provides in-depth analysis to help avoid email-related issues during WordPress troubleshooting.
MailTrap’s Email Testing tool makes a Sandbox SMTP server so you can use it to ‘send’ emails and they get ‘trapped’ by the SMTP server.
It creates individual testing environments for capturing and analyzing SMTP traffic, making it easy to test emails from staging and development environments.
Mailtrap also allows you to create individual inboxes, organize testing data, and manage email activity for different aspects of your WordPress site. The tool offers a Testing API for automating test flows and scenarios, and facilitates collaboration by enabling you to share test emails with your team, manage access to inboxes, and send selected test emails to whitelisted recipients.
You can view messages, check spam scores, validate headers, and analyze HTML support across different email clients for comprehensive email content and source analysis.
Mailhardener helps to ensure your domain meets all email security standards.
We use Mailhardener to test email-related DNS records, but there are many reasons to consider using this tool.
For example, Mailhardener enhances email security, prevents fraud, and improves deliverability for WordPress sites.
It also:
Maximizes email security standards to combat fraud, impersonation, interception, and censorship.
Enables management of policies for email senders, actively monitoring email traffic and blocking fraudulent activity.
Facilitates secure email transport through encryption and digital signatures.
Includes email security features to improve deliverability by increasing trustworthiness in the eyes of spam filters.
Provides visibility into email security results, helping identify areas for improvement and fine-tuning deliverability strategies.
Note: Mailhardener is a paid service, but it offers a free version for personal or evaluation use, allowing one domain with up to one month of data retention..
Use ipinfo.io to obtain detailed information about an IP address.
ipinfo.io consolidates IP data in one place, offering valuable insights for troubleshooting WordPress sites.
Key features of this tool include include geolocation lookup, IP range analysis, privacy detection, company lookup, ASN details, hosted domains, mobile carrier detection, abuse contact information, and IP Whois records.
Benefits of using ipinfo.io for troubleshooting WordPress sites include:
Streamlined analysis with a comprehensive suite of tools and APIs.
Enhanced security by identifying potential threats and taking appropriate measures.
Improved performance by optimizing network connectivity and addressing dependencies.
Personalization and targeting based on geolocation and mobile carrier data.
Reliable email deliverability through email security monitoring and improvements.
Efficient troubleshooting with access to accurate and comprehensive IP data.
ifconfig is another tool you can use to check IP addresses and get information, such as geolocation, country, ISP, or organization.
It’s also a helpful tool for uncovering network bottlenecks or connectivity issues, combatting spam comments, malicious registrations, and abuse on sites, making informed decisions on blocking or whitelisting specific IP addresses, and gaining insights into website visitor sources.
SQL Queries to Change WordPress Website Domain
Use SQL Queries when moving WordPress sites across different domains.
SQL Queries is a great time-saving tool is for moving WordPress websites from one domain to another. Just generate the queries and run them in MySQL.
DNSChecker
Use DNSChecker.org to ensure global accessibility of your website by performing comprehensive DNS propagation lookups.
Understanding DNS propagation is crucial, as it takes time for DNS changes to propagate worldwide.
DNSChecker offers a free DNS propagation check service to verify if DNS records have propagated across multiple DNS servers worldwide.
The tool collects data from over 100 global DNS servers and presents results in an easy-to-understand format. Results are visually represented on a map, with green ticks indicating availability of DNS records and crosses symbolizing unavailability.
DNSChecker.org supports checking A, AAAA, CNAME, and additional DNS records for their propagation status. It also allows customization by adding custom DNS servers and performing checks based on IP, continent, and country. Detailed DNS record lookups enable troubleshooting of specific record-related issues.
WhatsMyDNS is another DNS propagation checker you can use.
The tool lets you instantly perform a DNS lookup to check a domain name’s current IP address and DNS record information against multiple nameservers located in different parts of the world.
SecurityTrails
SecurityTrails.com is a powerful tool for troubleshooting and securing WordPress sites, and addressing malware-related concerns.
SecurityTrails helps prevent infrastructure hijacking, identify hidden information on websites, and track domain history.
Our support team uses it to view a site’s historical DNS records. For example, let’s say that when moving a domain from one nameserver to another you forget to copy over a DNS record. If the record is not masked (this is generally done by cloudflare on purpose), then it should be visible on securitytrails.com
Key features include DNS record history, domain historical WHOIS data, domain names database, website technologies identification, passive DNS datasets, instant IP and domain search, hostname information exploration, and tagging for efficient searches.
The tool provides an API for fetching domain, DNS, and IP-related data, real-time intelligence, and a user-friendly interface.
A free account shows you the full DNS history for any domain.
Other benefits of using this tool include:
Prevent hijacking of IT infrastructure through DNS manipulation.
Identify hidden information on websites.
Identify previous hosting companies using historical DNS information.
Check domains past nameserver & MX record history.
Find the real IP address of a website behind Cloudflare.
Note: some of the items listed above require a premium account.
For more details about this tool, go here: SecurityTrails
SSL Checker
Use the SSL Checker tool to check the validity of SSL certificates.
SSL Checker is a free tool from SSL Shopper that helps verify the correct installation, validity, trustworthiness, and error-free status of SSL certificates on web servers. This ensures that users’ browsers won’t display untrusted warnings, maintaining a seamless browsing experience.
The tool performs comprehensive SSL certificate verification, checking the SSL connection and providing clear results on the certificate’s status.
The SSL Checker tool confirms the correct hostname inclusion in the certificate, checks for other potential issues, such as outdated hash functions, to ensure SSL security is up to date, and includes an expiration date reminder feature to facilitate timely renewal.
Check for insecure issues in domains with Why No Padlock?
Why No Padlock? is an alternative to using the SSL Checker tool described above. It is a powerful tool that checks if SSL is valid, helps identify the source of insecure content elements on SSL pages in WordPress, and provides information about the issuing company of the SSL certificate.
The tool verifies SSL certificate validity, checks for proper installation of intermediate chain certificates to prevent false security indicators, and matches the URL with the certificate domain. It also generates a detailed report on insecure calls to images, CSS, and JavaScript, SSL certificate validation, secure resource loading, insecure calls with referrer information, and third-party SSL certificate validation.
WhyNoPadlock.com is compatible with various eCommerce platforms, including ShopSite, Magento, and WooCommerce.
GiftOfSpeed.com offers a range of tools to optimize WordPress site speed.
GiftOfSpeed provides tool to identify and help resolve speed-related issues.
Tools include compression tests, image optimization, caching evaluation, CSS and JavaScript compression, HTTP request checking, keep-alive testing, and more.
Benefits of using GiftOfSpeed.com’s tools for troubleshooting WordPress sites include:
Improved page speed and user experience.
Enhanced search engine rankings.
Reduction in file sizes without compromising quality.
Minimization of unnecessary elements and line breaks.
Identification and removal of broken links and unoptimized images.
Domsignal offers an extensive range of free tools to help you test, troubleshoot, and enhance the performance, security, and SEO of WordPress sites.
Testing tools include Secure Headers Test, TLS Scanner, Referrer-Policy Test, Secure Cookie Test, HTTP Strict Transport Security (HSTS) test, TTFB Test, HTTP Headers Checker, X-Frame-Options Test, MIME Sniffing Test, and many other powerful tools.
One tool we use in particular is Domsignal’s mixed content testing tool, which helps identify and locate mixed content issues in WordPress sites.
Domsignal’s Mixed Content Testing Tool helps to identify and resolve mixed content issues, improve site security, and provide a seamless browsing experience for site visitors.
Mixed content refers to web pages that request elements over non-secure connections despite being served securely. Mixed content can compromise website security and trigger browser warnings, leading to decreased trust and potential loss of web traffic.
Resolving mixed content involves updating URLs to use secure protocols (HTTPS) and contacting resource providers for HTTPS availability or alternatives.
This tool streamlines the troubleshooting process, enabling the maintenance of a secure and trustworthy website for visitors.
Check Gzip compression of your website to save bandwidth and improve render time.
GZIP Compression Checker is a fast and easy-to-use tool that provides detailed results on whether gzip compression is enabled on your web server.
Gzip compression reduces page size, leading to faster loading and display. The tool is free, with no hidden costs. Enabling gzip compression is straightforward, with default settings in Apache’s mod-deflate module or configurable options in IIS. Remember to back up server settings before making any changes.
xBrowserSync
We use XBrowserSync to sync bookmarks across different browsers.
xBrowserSync offers a privacy-focused alternative to traditional browser syncing services provided by tech giants like Google, Firefox, and Opera.
It prioritizes data control and privacy, allowing users to regain control of their data and ensure anonymity, enhances productivity by adding descriptions, tags, and an intuitive search interface to native browser bookmarks, and offers backup and restore functionality to prevent data loss.
The tool includes a desktop browser web extension and a mobile app for Android users.
Use Broken Link Checker to find and fix broken links on WordPress sites.
Broken links can harm SEO, user experience, and site health.
Broken Link Checker is a fast and accurate tool for WordPress that helps monitor and detect broken links, and resolve them quickly.
The plugin scans deeply and frequently, covering external and internal links, images, and redirects. It is 20x faster than other plugins and provides detailed results.
Broken Link Checker offers two link checking engines: a cloud-based engine for speed, unlimited scanning, and management of multiple sites, and a local engine that uses site/server resources. The plugin allows manual or scheduled scans, editing or unlinking broken links, detailed reports, email notifications, advanced search filtering, and export options.
WPMU DEV’s Uptime alerts you immediately if a site goes down.
Understanding if your site is down helps in troubleshooting and identifying potential issues like DNS problems, internet backbone failures, or network congestion.
Uptime can be accessed from The Hub. Our team uses Uptime reports to see how long a site has been offline when errors are reported.
Uptrends
Uptrends – free website uptime testing tool.
Uptrends provides a free website uptime tool that lets you check the availability of your website from over 40 worldwide locations. Each checkpoint sends a request to your site, tracks the response time, and generates a report.
The tool provides green or red tiles indicating site availability, along with test duration and detailed timing information. A red status across all checkpoints indicates significant problems like DDoS attacks, hosting provider outages, or hardware malfunctions.
New Relic (WPMU DEV Hosted Sites)
Use New Relic monitoring to diagnose performance-related issues on your WordPress site.
Our support team uses New Relic to quickly identify and address performance issues on WordPress sites hosted with WPMU DEV.
WPMU DEV hosting plans include free integration with New Relic and their free plan is sufficient for troubleshooting analysis.
Uploading Plugins To Hub Connected Sites
The Hub lets you upload plugins to sites using various methods.
Being able to upload plugins to any site connected to The Hub, even via ZIP or public/Dropbox/GDrive link, is useful, since the zip method allows for multiple plugin zips to be uploaded.
This method is useful for testing plugins if you have the latest version of a premium plugin .zip file but for some reason you are unable to update the plugin from the WordPress admin.
Payment Testing
Use sandbox accounts to test payment forms.
Sandboxes provide a testing environment that simulates the behavior of actual payment gateways without processing real transactions. Testing payment forms using Stripe and PayPal sandboxes ensures that integrations with payment gateways is functioning correctly.
We use Stripe and Paypal sandboxes to test payment forms (e.g. Forminator).
For more information about setting up sandbox accounts for Stripe and PayPal and instructions on integrating and testing payment forms with their sandboxes, go here: Stripe Sandbox | PayPal Sandbox
Gists
Use gists to create time-saving custom code snippets.
In addition to the above tools, we also use GitHub Gists to create custom snippets that help support team members save time running various scripts when troubleshooting WordPress sites.
Gists offer a convenient method for sharing code snippets with others. Each gist is a Git repository, allowing it to be easily forked and cloned. When you create a gist while logged in to GitHub, it becomes associated with your account and appears in your list of gists on your gist home page.
Gists can be either public or secret. Public gists are displayed in the Discover section, enabling people to explore recently created gists. They are also searchable, making them suitable if you want others to discover and view your work.
WordPress Site Troubleshooting – DIY Or Use WPMU DEV’s Support?
Hopefully, the list of tools we have provided here will help you diagnose and troubleshoot issues on your clients’ WordPress sites more quickly and effectively (remember to bookmark this article, so you have this list handy!)
These tools, however, are only a small part of what it takes to keep WordPress sites running error-free and without problems. Managing WordPress sites effectively requires continually and proactively staying on top of performance issues to ensure a smooth user experience.
If you are a WPMU DEV member, why not let our support team handle it all for you so you can focus on growing your business?
WPMU DEV’s all-in-one WordPress platform is designed to help WordPress developers better manage their client sites. This includes providing world-class and affordable hosting services with a built-in suite of professional plugins and tools to ensure optimal site performance, and 24/7 access to the expertise of an entire support team with the knowledge and skills to resolve problems on WordPress sites quickly and effectively.
Improving the Developer Experience on Shopify (2023)
Recently, we launched the Shopify Summer ’23 Edition, which was full of updates for developers. This Edition marks an ongoing evolution of Shopify’s developer platform: we’re simultaneously improving the development experience for building apps and storefronts, and making more of Shopify extensible. For public app developers, we’re also making it easier than ever for your apps to get into the Shopify App Store and be discovered by merchants.
For app developers and storefront developers alike, we’re making big improvements to the developer experience so you can build faster and more efficiently.
App development
From getting an app quickly spun up to deploying new versions, these improvements overhaul the process to getting your app live:
Remix app template: Our new Remix app template enables you to build highly dynamic apps with JavaScript. Now, building an app has never been simpler. Authentication is just a function call, GraphQL is a function you get after you authenticate, and webhooks are just a route.
Config as code: Use the shopify.app.toml file in your app’s root directory to manage all of your app configurations, enabling a streamlined, CLI-first workflow for more easily defining, testing, and collaborating on app configurations. Create multiple configuration files and quickly switch between environments while building your app.
App versioning and unified deployment: With app versions, you can now deploy your extensions together in a single package through the CLI, providing an end-to-end CI/CD workflow.
Get started more easily: Easily create a development store with a robust set of commerce data when you sign up for a Shopify Partner account. Take advantage of improvements to the dev docs for better learning, including a two-column layout in our structured tutorials to make onboarding more intuitive.
Storefront development
The DX improvements we’re making aren’t limited to app development. With the latest releases to our headless development solutions, you can build custom storefronts faster with optimized workflows and improved tooling:
Build faster with the CLI: Scaffold a full purchase journey in minutes, add your favorite styling library, configure language and currency settings, and error-proof your build with enhanced type safety support including built-in GraphQL codegen.
Remix-optimized workflows: Everything in Hydrogen from the cart, to product forms, to pagination is now designed to leverage the full power of Remix for even better performance, SEO, and UX.
Removal of rate limits on the Storefront API: Storefront API now serves all legitimate requests from both private and public clients without rate limits, so your store is never throttled and always protected against bot activity.
Customer Account API: Now available in developer preview, this new API can be accessed through the Hydrogen and Headless channels, providing developers with early access to authenticated buy-scoped data and new passwordless login for headless stores.
Customizing backend logic
Shopify Functions is our platform for building unique customizations that execute on Shopify’s global infrastructure. We’re introducing a better developer experience here, too:
More Functions APIs: Nine APIs are now available, with more rolling out in the coming months:
Versioning and rolling back: Functions can now be versioned and rolled back with your app, and can be developed and debugged faster by using the shopify app dev command to run functions in your local development environment.
App-owned metafields: Create and manage metafields that are specific and isolated to your app.
Cart data fields: More cart data fields are now available for building custom functionality like dynamic pricing.
Automating with Shopify Flow
Shopify Flow is an app and platform that allows merchants to customize their store through automation. Now we’re giving developers new ways to work with Shopify Flow:
Build, manage, and deploy Shopify Flow extensions from the CLI: You can now set up Flow actions and triggers from your app’s configuration files and manage their deployment via the CLI, instead of manually setting them up from the Partner Dashboard.
Shopify Flow return data: You can now build Flow actions that return data during execution for use in subsequent steps as input variables. Chain data together to create lookup tasks, exception handling workflows, and other powerful automations.
These improvements across the developer experience mean there’s never been a better time to build commerce apps and custom shopping experiences.
You can now build on more areas across Shopify
Among the biggest updates at the Summer ’23 Edition are the updates we’re making to expand the ways developers can customize and extend Shopify to build unique commerce experiences and manage business operations. These include:
Updates to checkout extensibility: We’re launching 17 new APIs and updates to checkout extensibility, including the ability for apps to offer customized delivery options and perform address validation, custom apps to inject server-side validation logic into the cart and checkout, and the ability to preview the one-page checkout, thank you page, and new customer account page directly in the checkout editor.
Introducing admin UI extensions: You can now integrate your apps with the Shopify admin to create seamless workflows for merchants. Make key app features accessible from a modal directly in the admin, so merchants don’t need to switch contexts or wait for your app to load, and display data and provide functionality within cards on specific admin pages.
New APIs: New APIs expand the ways you can customize Shopify for more audiences and geographies, including building for B2B with the Catalogs, Order, and Draft Order APIs, creating custom product bundle offerings with the Cart Transform Function, and tailoring stores for international shoppers with Shopify Markets.
POS UI extensions: New POS UI extensions allow you to build app extensions that seamlessly integrate with Shopify POS to customize and enhance in-person retail.
These updates provide developers with more tools to build great experiences for both shoppers and merchants, around the world, at every step of their journeys.
It’s easier to get your app discovered
The Shopify platform supports millions of merchants building their businesses, from entrepreneurs just getting started to global enterprise brands. Those merchants rely on apps to customize Shopify to their unique needs. That user base presents an unparalleled opportunity for developers to build solutions for merchants in infinite niches, and share those solutions using the Shopify App Store.
To support developers building apps for the app store, we’re introducing a number of improvements to help your app get discovered by the right merchants at the right time. These improvements include:
Built for Shopify: Built for Shopify is now available to merchants, meaning that high quality apps are now easy to spot with special badging and promotional placements. We have also updated our App Design Guidelines for clarified guidance on the trickiest parts of app design.
Simpler submission process: We removed lower value requirements so it’s easier for your app to get approved.
Improved reviews: We improved review rankings and added AI-powered review summaries to make it easier for merchants to make decisions.
Updated search results: Rankings now use merchant behavior so you can get higher quality installs.
Enhancements to ads: Ads in the App Store can now be geotargeted to users in the appropriate regions.
We’re making these updates to the Shopify App Store to make it easier for you to connect with the millions of merchants building on Shopify, and grow a successful business building commerce apps.
There are endless opportunities for building on Shopify
The developer updates rounded up in the Shopify Summer ’23 Edition encompass the whole development process: from developer experience updates that make building on Shopify faster and more intuitive, to more opportunities to build on the Shopify platform, to better ways of having your public app discovered in the Shopify App Store. The opportunity for developers on Shopify is massive.
Check out all of the developer updates at the Summer ’23 Edition, and imagine the possibilities for your business.
10 Content Planning Tool FAQs And The Answers You Must Know
Content Planning Software has evolved into a crucial element of any effective marketing plan in the modern digital environment. Businesses continuously produce and distribute content to engage their audience and provide results, including blog articles, videos, social media posts, and email newsletters. However, with so much content being created, it can be challenging to keep track of it all and make sure it complements your marketing objectives. Tools for content planning can help with it.
In this article, we’ll address some of the most common queries concerning it and describe how they can help organizations boost the effectiveness and efficiency of their content marketing initiatives. This article will give you the knowledge you need to select the ideal for your company, regardless of your level of experience with content marketing.
1. What is a content planning tool and how does it work?
A software program known as content planning aids companies and marketers in organizing, planning, and carrying out their content marketing initiatives. A content calendar, keyword research, SEO optimization, collaborative tools, analytics and reporting, and other capabilities are frequently included.
It works by providing a single location for all content marketing tasks, such as creating a calendar, choosing keywords, tracking their performance, and more. Additionally, users can assign tasks, set deadlines, and collaborate with other team members. Additionally, it can offer data and insights to users so they can assess how well their material is performing and adjust their strategy as necessary. A planning tool generally promotes efficiency and production.
2. How can a content planning tool help in improving content marketing strategy?
A content planning tool can help improve a content marketing strategy in several ways:
Content Calendar: Users can also establish an information calendar that specifies the timetable for producing disseminating, and promoting content with the use of a content planning tool. Users can use this to prepare ahead of time and make sure they consistently post high-quality content that supports their marketing objectives.
Keyword Research: Researching and Choosing Keywords: It can assist users in finding and choosing keywords that support their content marketing objectives. Users who do this can improve the search engine optimization of their content and boost traffic.
SEO Optimization: Meta tags and other on-page optimization options are common elements in content planning that assist users in optimizing their content for search engines. This may aid in raising their profile and increasing traffic to their material.
Collaboration: Using a planning tool, users may assign tasks to team members set deadlines, and monitor progress. This can increase productivity and guarantee that everyone on the team is working toward the same goals.
Analytics and reporting: Users can access analytics and reporting capabilities from a tool to better understand the effectiveness of their content. This can assist users in determining what is working well and what needs to be improved so they can make the necessary adjustments.
3. Can a content planning tool help with SEO and keyword research?
Undoubtedly, a content planning tool may aid in keyword and SEO research. Numerous content planning solutions come with functions that help users with keyword and SEO research.
When it comes to SEO, content planning software can assist users by offering capabilities like on-page optimization choices, meta tag development, and administration, and broken link monitoring.
A content planning tool can assist users in finding pertinent keywords that are consistent with their content marketing objectives. Additionally, it can offer consumers information on search traffic, competition, and trends that can assist users in choosing the best keywords to target.
4. How do I choose the right content planning tool for my business?
Choosing the right tool for your business can be a challenging task, but it is crucial to ensure that the tool aligns with your content marketing goals and is a good fit for your business. Here are some key factors to consider when choosing it.
Features: By considering the elements you specifically require, like a content calendar, keyword research, SEO optimization, collaboration tools, analytics and reporting, and more. Check to see if the tool has all the capabilities you require for effective planning and implementation of your content marketing strategy.
Integration: Determine whether the product can be used in conjunction with other programs and platforms that you already use, including social media, marketing automation software, and your website. By doing this, you can be confident that the tool will flow naturally into your current workflow.
Scalability: You can take into account whether the tool can be scaled to meet your business’s needs as it expands. It ought to be able to handle the growing amount of team members and content.
User-Friendliness: Assess the tool’s user interface to ensure sure it is simple to use and navigate. You want a product that is simple to use, intuitive and requires little training for your team members to use.
Budget: Take into account the tool’s price and make sure it is within your limits. Find a tool that provides a decent balance between functionality and price.
Support: Examine the degree of support provided by the tool’s manufacturer. Make sure they provide enough aid and support in case you run into any problems.
5. Can a content planning tool integrate with other marketing tools and platforms?
Yes, many ai writing generators can integrate with other marketing tools and platforms. This can help streamline your workflow and improve efficiency. Some examples of integrations that a tool may offer include:
Website: To automatically publish and schedule content, several content planning solutions can be integrated with your website’s CMS (content management system).
Marketing Automation: To send out newsletters and other email campaigns automatically some content planning platforms can link with marketing automation tools like MailChimp.
Social media: To automatically post and schedule social media content, certain content planning software can link with social media sites like Facebook, Twitter, and LinkedIn.
Analytics: You can get information on the performance and user interaction of your website by integrating some planning tools with analytics tools like Google Analytics.
CRM: Some content planning systems may interface with CRM platforms, like Salesforce, to give you details on the demographics, behavior, and purchasing patterns of your customers.
eCommerce: You can get data on your sales success, customer journeys, and purchasing patterns by integrating some content planning software with eCommerce platforms like Shopify or Appy Pie’s App Maker.
It’s crucial to keep in mind that the degree of integration may vary based on the tool you select, so before choosing one be sure to look into the precise integrations that each tool provides.
6. How much does a content planning tool cost?
A content planning tool’s price might differ significantly based on its features, scalability, and degree of support. Other content planning tools need a monthly or yearly subscription, while some are free or have a free version with fewer functionality.
Here are some examples of the pricing structures provided by some well-known content planning tools:
Free: A free version with fewer capabilities is available for several planning tools. Small organizations or individuals that are just getting started with content marketing might consider using these free versions.
Freemium: Some content planning software provides a basic version that is feature-limited for free but charges extra for more features or increased usage.
Monthly or yearly membership: Depending on the number of users or the volume of content you intend to manage, some content planning solutions are available for a monthly or yearly subscription.
Custom pricing: Based on the unique requirements of your company, several content planning solutions provide custom pricing.
7. How does content planning software help with content creation and editing?
A content planning tool can help with content creation and editing in several ways:
Content Calendar: Users can establish an information calendar that specifies the timetable for producing, sharing, and promoting content with the use of a content planning tool. Users can use this to prepare ahead of time and make sure they consistently post high-quality content that supports their marketing objectives.
Collaboration: By Using a planning tool, users may assign tasks to team members, set deadlines, and monitor progress. This can increase productivity and guarantee that everyone on the team is working toward the same goals.
Templates: A number of content planning platforms provide pre-made templates for various sorts of content, including blog posts, social media updates, and email campaigns. By doing this, users can save time and make sure the formatting and style of their content are consistent.
Workflow: Some content planning solutions have a feature called workflow that makes it simple for users to move information between stages of the development process, like drafting, editing, and publishing. By doing so, you may increase efficiency and guarantee that all information is authorized before it is published.
Version Control: Some content planning solutions offer version control features that let users monitor edits to a piece of content and roll back to earlier iterations as needed. Users can use this to make sure that only the most recent and accepted version of a piece of content is published.
8. What types of content can be planned and organized using a content planning tool?
A content planning tool can be used to plan and organize a variety of different types of content, including:
Blog Posts: Users can schedule and plan the writing, editing, and posting of blog posts with the use of a planning tool
Social Media Posts: Content planning software can assist users with scheduling and preparing text, image, and video social media updates.
Email Campaigns: A content planning tool can assist users with the construction of email templates and the scheduling of sends in email campaigns.
Videos: Users can plan and arrange the production, editing, and publication of videos with the use of a content planning software
Whitepapers and e-books: A content planning tool can assist users in organizing and planning the writing, editing, and publication of whitepapers or create free ebook.
Case Studies and Research Reports: Users can plan and organize the creation, editing, and publication of case studies and research reports with the aid of it.
Infographics: Users can plan and coordinate the development, editing, and publication of infographics with the use of a tool.
Podcasts: Users can plan and organize the production, editing, and publication of podcasts using a tool.
Webinars: Users can plan and organize the creation, editing, and publication of webinars with the use of a tool.
Landing pages: Users can plan and organize the production, editing, and publication of landing pages using a planning tool.
9. How can a content planning tool help with tracking and measuring ROI?
Content planning software can help with tracking and measuring the return on investment (ROI) of your content marketing efforts in several ways:
Analytics: A lot of content planning solutions offer analytics and reporting features that let users see how well their material is performing. Data on website traffic, user interaction, lead creation, and conversions are some examples of this. Users can utilize this information to determine which material is functioning well and which is not, and then adjust as necessary.
Link tracking: Some content planning solutions let users keep track of when certain links within their material get clicked. Users may learn which material is generating the most conversions and sales and which is not by doing this.
Goal-setting and conversion tracking are features that some content planning platforms offer their users. Monitoring the number of conversions can assist users in understanding the ROI of their content marketing efforts.
A/B testing: Using certain planning tools, users can test various iterations of a piece of content. Users can then make revisions based on their understanding of the content’s most effective components.
Lead scoring: Depending on how well leads interact with your content, certain content planning platforms let users give each lead a score. Users can utilize this information to prioritize leads by understanding which ones are most interested in their goods or services.
Custom metrics: Metrics that are specific to the user’s goals and objectives can be created using several content planning software. This can assist customers in tracking and calculating the ROI of their content marketing initiatives in a manner that is unique to their company.
10. How does content planning software help with creating and implementing a content strategy?
A content planning tool can help with creating and implementing a content strategy in several ways: Content Calendar: Using a content planning tool, clients can create an information calendar that outlines the timeline for creating, sharing, and promoting content. This allows users to plan ahead and ensure that they continually provide top-notch content that supports their marketing goals.
Finding and Selecting Keywords: Users can utilize content planning software to help them locate and select keywords that match their content marketing goals. By doing this, users can increase traffic and optimize their content for search engines.
Targeting: Using content planning software to target consumers can help users make their content marketing efforts more relevant and effective.
Workflow: A feature called workflow is available in some content planning tools, allowing users to easily move content between the various stages of content generation, such as drafting, editing, and publishing. In addition to ensuring that all content is vetted and evaluated before publication, this can boost productivity.
Collaboration: Users can set deadlines, monitor progress, and assign tasks to team members using content planning software This can boost output and ensure everyone in the team is pursuing the same objectives.
Analytics and reporting: To learn more about the efficacy of their content, users can access analytics and reporting features from content planning software. This can be used by users to identify what is working and what needs improvement.
Winding Up
Content planning tools are essential for businesses that want to effectively execute their content marketing strategy. They help users create a content calendar, conduct keyword research, target specific audiences, streamline the content creation process, collaborate with team members, and track the performance of their content.
When choosing content planning software, it is important to consider factors such as cost, integration with other marketing tools and platforms, and features such as analytics and reporting. With the right content planning tool like NinjaContent from 500apps, businesses can improve the efficiency and effectiveness of their content marketing efforts, and measure their return on investment. Whether you are a small business or a large enterprise, a content planning tool can help you create and implement a content strategy that drives results.
Do you want to make multiple search forms in WordPress?
By default, a search form will look through all your pages, posts, and media on your website. However, you can often improve the visitor experience by creating multiple forms that search specific categories, content types, and more.
In this article, we will show you how you can add and use multiple search forms on your WordPress site.
Why Use Multiple Search Forms in WordPress?
A search form can help visitors find what they are looking for, fast. However, if you have lots of content, then it might make sense to create multiple forms that search specific types of content.
By using different search forms in different locations across your site, you can help visitors get accurate and helpful search results, no matter how much content you have published. This will improve the visitor experience and reduce the bounce rate.
That being said, let’s show you how to create multiple search forms in WordPress.
Create a New WordPress Search Algorithm With a WordPress Plugin
The easiest way to add multiple search forms to your WordPress website is by using the SearchWP plugin. It’s one of the best search plugins for WordPress, used by over 30,000 sites.
With SearchWP, you can search content that WordPress ignores by default, including custom post types, PDF files, WooCommerce products, and categories. You can also create multiple different search forms and then add those forms to any page, post, or widget-ready area.
Setting Up SearchWP
The first thing you need to do is install and activate the SearchWP plugin. For more details, see our step-by-step guide on how to install a WordPress plugin.
Upon activation, go to SearchWP » Settings and then click on the ‘General’ tab.
With that done, just click the ‘Verify Key’ button.
Create a Custom Search Algorithm For WordPress
After entering the license key, it’s a good idea to fine-tune how SearchWP indexes, searches, and displays your content. You can think of this as creating a custom Google search algorithm that’s just for your WordPress blog or website.
These are the general settings that all search forms will use by default. You can override these settings for the individual search forms.
To get started, head over to SearchWP »Algorithm.
Here, you will see a section for the different content types that SearchWP searches by default, such as pages and posts.
You will notice that each item has an ‘Applicable Attribute Relevance’ scale. This is the weight (importance) that SearchWP will give to each attribute.
Content that matches an attribute with high relevancy will appear higher in the search results. By contrast, content that matches an attribute that has less relevancy will appear lower on the search results page.
To change the relevancy, simply drag the different sliders. For example, if you move the ‘Title’ slider to the left and the ‘Content’ slider to the right, then the content will carry more weight than the title.
You can even tell SearchWP to search content that WordPress ignores by default.
To do this, click on the ‘Sources & Settings’ button.
When you are happy with your changes, simply click on the ‘Done’ button.
This adds a new section for each content type. Once again, you can change the attribute relevance using the different sliders.
When you are happy with how the search algorithm is set up, just scroll to the top of the screen and click the ‘Save’ button.
SearchWP will now rebuild the index automatically. Depending on the speed of your Internet connection and your WordPress hosting provider, this may take a few minutes.
As soon as you see ‘Index Status 100%’, you will know that SearchWP has indexed all your content and settings.
Create Multiple Different Search Forms in WordPress
Now, you can create as many different search forms as you want.
To get started, head over to SearchWP » Search Forms and click the ‘Add New’ button.
This creates a new search form, ready for you to customize. For example, if you run a review website, then you might create a form that searches for product review posts and ignores other content like your blog posts and media.
To start, you will need to give the form a unique name by clicking on the small pencil icon next to ‘Search Form 1’.
You now type in a name for the custom search form.
Since you are going to make multiple search forms in WordPress, it’s important to use a name that helps you identify this form in the WordPress dashboard.
After that, you can choose a layout using the ‘Layout Theme’ thumbnails.
Some of these layouts are designed for specific search forms. For example, if you are creating a form that searches by category in WordPress, then we recommend selecting ‘Category Search’, as it already has many of the settings you need.
Simply click on the different themes to see a preview of how this form will look on your website. After making your decision, scroll to the ‘Custom Styling’ section.
The settings you see may vary depending on your theme layout. For example, if you selected ‘Quick Search’, then the ‘Quick Search’ setting will be enabled by default.
You can disable and enable the different options using their toggles. The live preview will update automatically as you make changes, so you can try different settings to see what works the best.
Depending on your layout and the kind of form you want to create, you may need to enable and disable some of the ‘Custom Styling’ settings.
Do you want to create a form that searches by category? Then you will need to enable the ‘Category Search’ toggle.
After that, find the ‘Select Category’ field and type in each category that you want to include in the search results. For example, if you run an online store, then you may want to create forms that search specific WooCommerce product categories.
If you want to allow visitors to filter their search results using factors like the author, post type, and tag, then you will need to click to enable the ‘Advanced Search’ toggle.
After that, scroll to the ‘Advanced Search Filter/s’ field. By default, SearchWP allows visitors to filter their results using Authors, Post Types, and Tags.
To remove any of these filters, just click on its ‘X’ button. If you want to add more filters, then simply type their names into the field.
Then, when the right option appears in the dropdown, give it a click.
By default, the form will search media, pages, and posts. If you have created custom post types, then you may want to include these in the search results.
To do this, find the ‘Type of search’ field and give it a click.
You can now type in the name of each custom post type.
When the right custom post type appears, click to add it to the search.
Do you want to exclude media, pages, or posts from the search results?
Then just click the small ‘X’ next to ‘Media’, ‘Pages’, or ‘Posts’.
When you are happy with the type of content that SearchWP will search, you may want to add some placeholder text to the search bar.
Here, we recommend letting visitors know how the search form works and the results they should expect to get. For example, if you have an online marketplace, then you may want to use text such as ‘Search for products’ or ‘Start shopping’.
By default, SearchWP will show a generic ‘Enter keyword and search’ message. You can replace this with your own messaging by typing into ‘Field Label’.
By default, the search form shows a magnifying glass and a blue ‘Search’ button.
To remove the ‘Search’ button, simply click to deactivate the ‘Search Button’ toggle.
When you are happy with these settings, scroll to the ‘Form Style’ section.
Here, you can choose between different form styles, add a border, and change the font size.
Under ‘Button Style,’ you can customize the ‘Search’ button that appears in the form.
Finally, when you are happy with how the form is set up, you can scroll to the top of the screen and click on ‘Save’ to store your settings.
To create more custom search forms with unique settings, simply repeat the exact same process described above.
Add Multiple Search Forms to Your WordPress Site
You can add multiple search forms to any page, post, or widget-ready area using either a shortcode or the Search Form block.
Since it’s the easiest, let’s start by looking at the block method.
How to Add Search Forms to a Page or Post
You may want to add a search form to a specific page or post or even show it inside the post content.
For example, you might add a search form to your FAQ page, documentation, help desk, knowledge base, or similar. This can improve the customer experience by helping users find answers and useful resources.
To get started, simply head over to the page or post where you want to add the form.
You can then click on the ‘+’ icon and type in ‘Search Form’.
When the right block appears, give it a click.
You can now open the ‘Select a Form’ dropdown and choose the form you want to show on this page or post.
When you are ready to make the search form live, just click on either ‘Update’ or ‘Publish’. Now, simply visit this page or post to see the search form in action.
How to Add Search Forms to a Widget-Ready Area
Another option is to add a search form to a widget-ready area, such as the sidebar or similar section. This is an easy way to show the same search bar across multiple pages on your WordPress website.
Go to Appearance » Widgets to see all the different areas where you can add widgets.
The options you see may vary depending on your WordPress theme. For example, if you are using the Astra theme, then the sidebar widget area is called ‘Main Sidebar’.
Simply click the ‘+’ block icon in the area where you want to add a widget.
Then, type in ‘Search Form’.
When the right block appears, click to add it to your website.
You can now open the dropdown menu and choose the search form that you want to use.
When you are finished, just click the ‘Update’ button to make the search form live.
Now, you can visit your site to see the improved search form.
How to Add Search Forms Using the Full Site Editor
If you are using a block WordPress theme, then you can add search forms using the full site editor. It includes areas that you can’t edit using the standard WordPress content editor. For example, you can add a search form to your 404 template in WordPress.
To get started, head over to Appearance » Editor in the WordPress dashboard.
By default, the full site editor shows your theme’s home template, but you can add a search form to any template.
In the left-hand menu, simply click on ‘Templates’ or Template Parts’ depending on where you want to add the search form.
You will now see a list of all the templates that make up your WordPress theme.
Simply find the template or template part that you want to edit, and give it a click.
WordPress will now show a preview of this template.
To go ahead and edit the template, click on the small pencil icon.
Now, click on the ‘+’ icon.
In the panel that appears, type in ‘Search Form’.
When the right block shows up, drag and drop it into your layout.
You can now open the dropdown menu and choose the search form that you want to use.
With that done, just click on the ‘Save’ button to make your changes live.
How to Add a Search Form to WordPress Using a Shortcode
Another option is to add a search form using its shortcode. This may be an easier option if you want to add the same search form to multiple pages, posts, or widget-ready areas, as you can simply paste the same shortcode into multiple locations.
To get a search form’s shortcode, head over to SearchWP »Search Forms. Here, find the search form that you want to show and copy the value in the ‘Shortcode’ column.
You can now add the shortcode to any page, post, or widget-ready area. For step-by-step instructions, please see our guide on how to add a shortcode in WordPress.
Monday Swimwear Launches its LA Pop-Up Store and Acquires New Customers with Shopify POS (2023)
When Australian entrepreneurs and best friends Natasha Oakley and Devin Brugman created their blog, A Bikini a Day, in 2012, they had no idea their passion project would eventually turn into a multimillion-dollar global brand.
Inspired by the success of their blog and a gap in the swimwear market, the duo launched Monday Swimwear in 2014. Monday’s swimsuits celebrate curves and the diversity of women’s bodies. The line also provides women with larger cup sizes with options that are both sexy and supportive, which is traditionally difficult to find in the swimwear space.
Fast-forward to 2023 and Monday Swimwear has become one of the leading direct to consumer (DTC) swimwear brands, growing its revenue exponentially year over year and selling to millions internationally via its Shopify site.
To engage with its growing community and introduce more people to the brand, Monday Swimwear partnered with Shopify to run its first ever month-long pop-up shop at The Grove, an iconic Los Angeles shopping destination. Customers could book appointments with fit specialists—Monday’s sales associates—to find the best swimwear for their bodies.
Anticipating heavy foot traffic, Monday Swimwear equipped its pop up with Shopify mobile POS terminal, POS Go, to ensure staff could offer shoppers a quick and seamless checkout experience, which resulted in:
60% of sales coming from new customers
An 8% higher spend from new customers
A 3.5x increase in social media impressions for pop-up related content
Challenge
Monday Swimwear’s LA pop-up was popular from day one, according to Director of Operations Ahna Tillmanns. “I couldn’t believe the foot traffic. It was nonstop from the time that we opened the doors until we closed up at night. It was just really busy all the time,” she says.
Nonstop foot traffic is a retailer’s dream, but it posed a challenge for Monday because of space limitations. “We needed a small POS system because with the pop-up footprint being so small and not having a dedicated checkout space, we couldn’t have a full computer set up,” Ahna says.
If fit specialists couldn’t checkout customers quickly, congestion would keep new shoppers away. Monday needed a portable POS system that could move customers outside of the shop and speed up checkout.
Our pop up was going to be a lot of shoppers’ first ever interaction with Monday Swimwear. It was essential that our POS system help provide a polished experience to shoppers. It needed to be portable, sync with our inventory, and capable of handling a full day of use.
Solution
To meet their needs, Monday equipped fit specialists with POS Go, Shopify’s handheld POS terminal. Complete with a built-in card reader, barcode scanner, and integrated POS software, POS Go allowed Monday Swimwear’s fit specialists to check stock availability and ring up sales all day.
“We set up a small desk outside of the shop and assigned a Fit Specialist there with a POS Go terminal,” Ahna explains”. “It was a great way to get people out of the really small pop-up space once they were done shopping, and bring them outside to clear that floor space for other browsing customers.”
Besides improving the shopping experience for customers, POS Go also made it easier for fit specialists, who were hired for the pop-up and new to the brand, to excel in their roles. “None of the ladies who were working with us are full-time Monday employees,” Ahna explains. “We had to give them a crash course on everything. POS Go was intuitive for them to learn in a really short period of time. Getting everybody up to speed was pretty easy.”
POS Go also enabled Fit Specialists assigned to the fitting room to check inventory availability fast. “The ability to look up inventory really helped the flow of our customer experience,” Ahna explains. “It saved Fit Specialists from having to run back and forth between the shop and the stockroom to check if a swimsuit was available. They just looked up inventory on-hand on POS Go and saw which models, colors, sizes were available for sale.”
POS Go is a really flexible device. We used it for checkout and for our customer service. It was really well suited for our needs for this pop-up.
Results
While Monday’s team expected the pop-up would attract customers who were already familiar with the brand, they couldn’t have predicted that 60% of sales would come from new customers. “We had a large number of new customers. Out of all the transactions processed at our pop up, the majority new to the brand, which is a testament to how great in-person experiences are for net-new acquisition.”
Not only were the majority of pop-up sales from new customers, but these new customers also ended up spending 8% more than existing customers. “A lot of our existing customers might have just been coming in looking for one thing because they have a bunch of our products already, whereas those new customers were coming in and not just buying one thing, they were literally just starting their Monday addiction,” Ahna says.
Monday has already been seeing this swimwear addiction play out in the weeks after the pop-up closed. “We have some customers that have made second, third, and even fourth purchases from us after buying for the first time at the pop-up,” Ahna says. “We’re retaining the customers we gained through the pop-up, and that relationship is continuing online.”
Beyond success at the pop-up, Monday Swimwear also surpassed expectations for social media promotion of the shop. “We made a series of videos in the pop-up that explained fit, measuring, and styles. On average we probably get 40,000 views on our reels. Most of the pop-up reels got between 180,000 and 200,000 views.”
If you’re already on Shopify, POS Go is probably the easiest way for you to serve customers and accept payments in-person. It provides so much information and functionality in that small package. POS Go is definitely worthwhile for any brand looking to open a pop up and offer shoppers a really modern experience.
Introducing Lightspeed Mobile Tap: Take Payments From Anywhere
It wasn’t so long ago that you could find yourself hunting for an ATM to pay your restaurant tab, and paying steep service fees for the privilege. Then along came technology—cue heavenly sound effect!—and fast, convenient restaurant payments became a reality. Very soon after that it became an expectation, then a requirement.
Today, there’s a dizzying number of payment methods and restaurants need a way to accommodate guest expectations when the bill comes. That’s why we’re excited to announce the new Lightspeed Mobile Tap—now, Lightspeed Restaurant (K-Series) users in the U.S. can accept swipe, tap, chip and pin and contactless payments from anywhere in the restaurant.
Ready to take more payments?
Find out if Lightspeed Mobile Tap is a good fit for your business.
What is Lightspeed Mobile Tap?
Lightspeed Mobile Tap is a powerful, portable payment device that allows restaurants to accept virtually all payment methods without spending a fortune on terminals.
Designed to look great on any counter, or slip comfortably into pockets and pouches, the Mobile Tap lets you turn an iPhone or iPad into a handheld payment terminal, allowing servers to take payments from anywhere — and look good doing it.
What payments can you accept with Lightspeed Mobile Tap?
Don’t let the size fool you—though she be but little, she is fierce. Lightspeed Mobile Tap accepts all swipe, tap, and chip and pinpayments. Guests can even pay with their mobile phone or smart watch.
Starting at only $89 USD, the Mobile Tap is a complete payment solution at an accessible price point.
How does Lightspeed Mobile Tap work?
With Lightspeed Mobile Tap hardware, a 1:1 Bluetooth connection lets you turn your POS device into a handheld payment terminal. One handheld POS (iPhone or iPad) + one Mobile Tap = one complete, end-to-end ordering and payment solution.
Fully integrated with Lightspeed Restaurant (K-Series), and designed with iOS-first restaurants in mind, the Mobile Tap is an easy and cost-effective way to boost your payment processing abilities without having to rethink or reorganize your operations. Simply pair it with your POS and start selling.
Armed with the Mobile Tap, servers can take care of the entire transaction from start to finish, without herding guests to a central service counter. Guests can settle their bills quickly so staff can turn tables faster. And because it uses Bluetooth, and not a hardwired terminal or Wi-Fi connection, you can say goodbye to service dead zones and connectivity issues.
Benefits of Lightspeed Mobile Tap
Take payments from anywhere
With Lightspeed Mobile Tap, you can serve and take payments from anywhere in your restaurant, which means no more herding guests and no more bottlenecks at the service counter.
Think of the last time you went into a busy restaurant or cafe. If there were dozens of people crowded around the service counter, did you stay? Or did you think “it’s too busy, the wait will be too long” and leave to find another place?
Spatial crowding around the entrance of your restaurant can be off putting for customers and can disrupt workflows, slowing down service and hurting your overall efficiency. With the Mobile Tap, guests can pay where they are, which means:
Better guest experience
Faster, smoother workflows
More efficient table turnover
Ability to serve more guests
Besides taking payments tableside, Mobile Tap makes it easy to manage high-traffic periods that require operational flexibility, like major sporting events, work mixers and special events.
Instead of trying to drive those World Cup soccer fans into tables—good luck, by the way—imagine if you could turn that chaos into organized chaos and frictionless sales? (Oh wait, now you can with Lightspeed Mobile Tap!)
Let your guests pay how they want
Letting your guests pay how they want doesn’t just improve the guest experience, it also improves your bottom line.
Remember the dark ages before cashless payments when what you had in your wallet was the maximum amount you could spend? You may have wanted to order another drink, or to get that dessert, but you had to stop yourself because you couldn’t pay the way you wanted to.
The same is true today (even if payment methods have changed a little). Lightspeed Mobile Tap helps you get rid of any barriers to spending, so staff can upsell, increase average checks, and get the most out of every cover.
Minimize disruptions with a reliable backup plan
If you’re a high-volume restaurant, we know the idea of something going wrong with your payment terminals keeps you up at night. While you can never predict a broken terminal, you can plan for it.
With Lightspeed Mobile Tap, busy restaurants can get a reliable, low-cost backup solution. Think of it as your reserve team. One of your “first team” terminals gets dropped one too many times? The Mobile Tap is ready to fill in. Way busier than usual? The Mobile Tap is ready to assist.
Ok, that’s enough sports analogies. Basically, should anything happen to your existing payment terminals, Lightspeed Mobile Tap is a complete payment solution, at a small price point, that can step in so you can keep on selling.
Lightspeed Mobile Tap features
Compact and stylish: Looks great on any service counter, or slips comfortably into pockets and pouches.
Takes all major payment methods: Accepts chip and pin, swipe, tap, contactless cards, Apple Pay, Google Pay and more.
Powerful and lightweight: Durable, lightning fast processor with a robust battery that lasts up to two business days.
Safe and secure: Processes all chip, swipe, tap, and mobile transactions with end-to-end data encryption.
Easy setup and integration: Fully integrated with Lightspeed Restaurant (K-Series), set up in seconds via the K-Series app.
Connects via Bluetooth: Won’t slow down other terminals or impact Wi-Fi bandwidth.
Availability
Any Lightspeed Restaurant (K-Series) user in the United States can use the Mobile Tap with a paired device (iPhone or iPad), provided they also have Lightspeed Payments.
How To Automate Abandoned Cart Recovery On Your WooCommerce Store?
You’ve put in the work to get shoppers to add items to their carts, but many abandon them before checking out. Ever wondered why that happens? As an eCommerce store owner, you know that recovering abandoned carts can greatly impact sales. The problem is manually reaching out to shoppers who bail at checkout isn’t scalable.
The solution? Automate your abandoned cart recovery. In this article, we’ll show you how to set up automated emails through WooCommerce that trigger when shoppers abandon their carts. You’ll learn how to design emails that actually get people to come back and complete their purchases and how to schedule them so you’re not bombarding your customers.
By the end of this guide, you’ll have an automated abandoned cart recovery process set up on your WooCommerce store and start seeing sales from carts you would have otherwise lost. Sounds good? Let’s dive in.
What Is Cart Abandonment In eCommerce?
Cart abandonment visual
So what exactly is cart abandonment? Simply put, it refers to visitors adding items to their cart but leaving your store before completing the purchase. This happens for many reasons, but the good news is you can win back many of these lost customers through targeted automation and personalization.
Cart abandonment is a huge problem in eCommerce, with an average of over 70% of visitors abandoning their carts. That means lots of lost revenue if you don’t take action. The key is setting up automated emails to re-engage visitors and encourage them to complete their purchases.
You’ll want to start by sending an automated email within a few hours of them abandoning their cart. This first email should express a friendly reminder of the items left behind, with a message like “We noticed you didn’t complete your recent order. We’re holding onto your cart in case you’d still like to purchase.” Include images of the products and a link for them to easily checkout.
A day or two later, send a follow-up email with a special offer or discount on their cart items. For example, “Your cart is waiting for you! If you complete your order within the next 24 hours, you will receive a 10% discount.” Scarcity and urgency are persuasive.
Finally, about a week after abandonment, send one last email with a final discounted offer. Mention the items will be released back to inventory soon. With progressively better offers, this multi-email drip campaign is very effective for recovering abandoned carts and lost customers. You can turn cart abandonment into sales recovery with the right tools and strategy.
The Main Reasons Behind Cart Abandonment In eCommerce
Abandoned carts are the bane of every eCommerce store owner’s existence. But why exactly do customers abandon their carts in the first place? There are a few major reasons you need to know.
The biggest reason is unexpected costs like high shipping fees or taxes added at checkout. No one likes surprise charges when they’re about to pay. Make sure your shipping and tax costs are clear upfront.
Some shoppers get distracted and forget to come back to checkout. Send an abandoned cart email reminder within a day or two to jog their memory. Studies show over 49% of shoppers will click and open your abandoned cart email if you send one.
The checkout process itself may be too complicated or time-consuming. Keep your checkout form short, only ask for necessary info, and allow shoppers to checkout as a guest. The easier you make it, the more likely people will complete their order.
Security concerns also deter customers. Ensure your site has an SSL certificate and security badges from services like Norton or McAfee. This verifies you take privacy and security seriously.
Product availability or long delivery times lead to abandoned carts too. Be upfront about inventory levels and delivery estimates. If something is back-ordered, give the customer an option to be notified when it’s back in stock.
In truth, you’ll recover more abandoned carts by optimizing your checkout, sending abandoned cart reminders, addressing security concerns, and being transparent about product availability.
The Impact Of Abandoned Carts On Sales And Revenue Of eCommerce Businesses
Abandoned carts are a huge problem for eCommerce businesses. Studies show that 69.23% of shopping carts are abandoned, resulting in lost revenue and missed sales opportunities.
For WooCommerce stores, automating abandoned cart recovery is key to recapturing revenue and boosting your bottom line. When customers abandon their carts, it often means they get distracted or forget to complete the checkout process. By automatically sending reminders, you give them another chance to follow through with their purchase.
According to research, cart abandonment emails have an average open rate of about 50% and result in 15-20% of recipients going on to complete their purchases. For a small to mid-size WooCommerce store with 1,000 abandoned carts per month, that could mean recapturing 75-100 sales that would have otherwise been lost, resulting in thousands of dollars of recovered revenue each month.
The impact of abandoned carts on revenue and sales is significant. You can rest easy by implementing an automated abandoned cart recovery campaign on your WooCommerce store!
The Importance Of Automating Abandoned Cart Recovery
Automating abandoned cart recovery is a highly effective strategy for maximizing sales and revenue in your WooCommerce store. The investment of time to set up these campaigns is minimal compared to the huge impact they can have on your business.
Recover More Lost Sales
You can capture many of those lost sales by setting up an automated abandoned cart campaign. Email automation allows you to send targeted emails to shoppers who left items in their cart but didn’t complete the purchase. These emails remind them about the items left behind and encourage them to checkout. For many stores, abandoned cart campaigns generate 15-20% of revenue.
Automation also means these emails go out promptly while the shopper still remembers what’s in their cart. The sooner you reach out, the more likely you are to recover the sale. Waiting even a day or two can reduce your recovery rate by up to 50%!
Save Time and Effort
Manually sending abandoned cart emails is extremely time-consuming and not scalable as your store grows. Automation handles this process for you, freeing up your time to focus on other important tasks.
Provide a Great Customer Experience
Quickly following up with shoppers who abandon their cart shows them you value their business. This kind of personalized communication helps build loyalty and trust in your brand. Shoppers appreciate when stores reach out to assist them in completing their purchases.
Optimize Your Campaign
Once you have an automated email campaign setup, you can start optimizing it to improve performance. Test different email content, layouts, subject lines, and schedules to see what resonates most with your customers. Make data-driven decisions based on open, click-through, and recovery rates.
In summary, automating your abandoned cart recovery and optimizing the campaign over time is one of the most effective ways to boost sales and create a great customer experience on your WooCommerce store.
Now that we’ve covered the basics of cart abandonment let’s look at how to automate the recovery process.
Automating Abandoned Cart Recovery On WooCommerce
Elex Abandoned Cart
If you want to automate WooCommerce’s abandoned cart recovery process, the ELEX WooCommerce Abandoned Cart Recovery with Dynamic Coupons plugin should be your go-to choice. With its robust capabilities, you can quickly set up automatic emails and discounts that will be sent out when a consumer abandons their shopping cart without making a purchase.
The plugin offers tons of functionality, such as:
See the complete graph-based report to understand better the total amount recovered, total amount abandoned, total conversion rate, and total bonus recoveries.
Create rules that consider various factors, including user roles, the overall sum, the number of items, and the product ID.
In the abandoned cart email, include dynamically generated discount coupons.
Select the order statuses that determine when an abandoned cart is recovered.
To avoid email spam, you may specify a timeframe after which the plugin automatically erases abandoned cart lists.
Allow registered users and guest users (unregistered) to recover their abandoned carts.
Use shortcodes to ensure the accuracy of customer and cart information.
As you can see, the plugin is packed with features! Now let us go ahead and customize the plugin’s settings.
Once the plugin is active, go to WooCommerce > ELEX Abandoned Carts > Settings in the admin area of your website to configure your abandoned cart settings. We will go through each of the tabs and understand them in detail.
Step 1: Configure the General Settings
Elex setup
To mark an order as complete, choose the WooCommerce order statuses that represent successful cart recovery, turn on the Enable Abandoned Cart feature, and modify the order status under General Settings to reflect a successful order.
You can also choose a point at which the recovery emails are stopped, and the cart is considered expired.
Enable the Capture Abandoned Cart for Guest User feature if you want to track abandoned carts for unregistered customers.
You can customize the content of the recovery email and notify the admin when a cart is recovered by turning on the Notification Settings option to Email Notification to Shop Owner on Cart Recovery.
Elex abandoned cart notifications.
Enter a message informing customers that your WooCommerce store is GDPR compliant under the GDPR Message Configuration parameters and the page on which it should be displayed.
GDPR notifications setup
Moving on to the Email Settings tab.
Step 2: Configure the Email Settings
You can adjust the rules for sending recovery emails, their templates, and the addition of the generated discount coupons by using the three sub-tabs found under Email Settings.
Elex defines email rules.
To create a new rule, click Add New Rule, enter a Rule Name, and choose the AND/OR Rule Type. Once you are done modifying the rules, click Add Filter.
Elex email templates
You may create, modify, and delete email templates in this section. This section is crucial if you wish to personalize the email and add dynamically generated coupon codes to it.
If you choose Add New Template, a new email template will be generated.
Elex email template
On the Edit Email Template tab, you may decide whether to upload a brand-new template or edit an existing one. Now, go ahead and add a template name, email subject line, and enter a coupon code.
Select the type of discount, the discount amount, and whether the coupon is valid just once or can be used multiple times. Finally, enter the promo code’s prefix. For example, SALE25, WINTER50, etc.
The discount code may also be linked to the products left in the customer’s abandoned cart or email address.
You may alter the email text and add default values like [customer_firstname], [customer_lastname], [cart_products], [cart_link], and [cart_unsubscribe] by using the provided shortcodes.
Once you’ve finished making changes to the template, send yourself a test email to see how it looks.
Elex email triggers
Under this sub-tab of the email settings, you can modify the recovery email’s triggers. You may turn triggers on and off or delete them completely. These triggers can be modified based on your specific requirements.
Finally, navigate to the Cart Details tab
Step 3: View the Abandoned Cart Details
Elex abandoned cart details
The Abandoned Cart Details tab allows you to view all information concerning abandoned and recovered cart data.
There you go! Within three simple steps, we’ve automated the entire abandoned cart recovery process on your WooCommerce store.
Best Practices For Efficient Abandoned Cart Recovery
Once your abandoned cart recovery workflow is set up in WooCommerce, it’s time to optimize it. Following some best practices can help increase your conversion rates and recover more lost sales.
Personalize the Experience
Use your customer’s name in the email subject line and message. Mention the items they left in their cart to jog their memory. This personal touch can go a long way in re-engaging them. For example, “Hey [Name], the [Product] you added to your cart is waiting for you. Want to complete your purchase?”
Send the First Email Quickly
Time is of the essence. Most shoppers will have moved on within a few hours of abandoning their cart. Send the initial email within 30 minutes to an hour of them leaving to have the best chance of recovering the sale.
Offer an Incentive
Give customers a reason to come back and complete their purchase. Offer a coupon code for 10-15% off their order or free shipping. Limited time scarcity can also motivate them to act quickly. For example, “The [Product] is only available for a limited time! Complete your order within the next 24 hours to get 25% off.”
Make it Easy to Buy
Include a prominent CTA, such as a “Complete Your Purchase” button that links directly to their abandoned cart. The fewer steps and clicks it takes to checkout, the more likely you’ll recover the sale.
Follow Up Appropriately
If you don’t get a response to your first email, send 1 or 2 follow-up emails over the period of a week. But don’t pester customers with too many messages. Gage their interest level and if they remain unresponsive, accept the lost sale and remove them from the abandoned cart campaign. You can always market to them again in the future.
With some fine-tuning, an efficient abandoned cart recovery strategy can significantly impact your bottom line. Focus on a great customer experience, optimized timing, incentives, and follow-up to turn more shoppers into buyers.
The more you know about combating cart abandonment, the better! The Learnwoo and ELEXtensions repositories are brimming with related content and resources. We have selected two additional articles to assist you with your cart abandonment problem. Check out 13 Best Free WooCommerce Abandoned Cart Recovery Plugins for a list of excellent abandoned cart recovery plugins and Abandoned Cart Coupons – Do’s and Don’ts for crucial advice on dealing with the problem.
Conclusion
So there you have it, the perfect guide on automating abandoned cart recovery on your WooCommerce store. With the right plugins and workflows in place, you can turn those lost sales into revenue again.
Set it and forget it – these tools will work in the background to re-engage customers and prompt them to come back and complete their purchase. Before you know it, you’ll see your abandoned cart rate start to drop, and your sales start to climb.
Automation is an eCommerce boon; use it to your advantage! Your customers will appreciate the reminder, and your bottom line will thank you.
We hope this post has helped you automate the abandoned cart recovery process on your WooCommerce store!
Shopify and Etsy are some of the two most popular ecommerce solutions you can choose from, and many merchants who started out on Etsy are now also using Shopify to grow their brand’s success and reach new heights with a multi-platform approach.
While you can sell goods on both ecommerce platforms and launch a business in a relatively short time, Etsy is a global marketplace for creative merchants who wish to sell handmade products. Many sellers on Etsy also sell vintage clothing, art supplies, and other unique products, but ultimately, the site is known for its handmade and creative goods. As a marketplace, Etsy has amassed a great number of eager buyers who comb the site for beautifully made handmade works.
However, as your business grows and you gain an audience of satisfied customers, you might find that you want more control over your business operations. You might even want to further develop your own brand and move beyond the Etsy marketplace to establish an online store that is truly your own space.
This is where Shopify steps in. While Etsy provides you with a marketplace with an audience of eager buyers, Shopify allows you to unleash your creativity further and build a memorable brand completely on your own terms.
In this article by Ecommerce Pro, we’re going to delve into selling on Etsy and Shopify simultaneously and the benefits of building your brand through Shopify. We’ll also dive into the success stories of online business owners who have used this multi-platform approach to reach a new level of success.
Need a Shopify Expert to help you build your Shopify website? You can view our Shopify Experts profile here to see our work or reach out to us by filling out this form.
Benefits of Selling on Etsy & Shopify
There are many benefits to the multi-channel approach of selling on both Etsy and Shopify. Below, we explore some of the advantages of using both platforms:
Access to Different Customer Bases:
Using both Etsy and Shopify will allow you to tap into two different customer bases, meaning you get to grow your audience and improve your sales volume.
Etsy already attracts a large community of dedicated buyers who are on the market to find unique handmade goods. With Shopify in the mix, you get to target a broader audience and expand your reach well beyond the Etsy marketplace. With this dual online presence, you’ll have a higher chance of attracting an even wider range of buyers than ever before.
Diversify Revenue Streams:
We all know that diversifying your revenue is important. In business, depending on one source of revenue and income can be a little risky, and revenue diversification lowers that risk, giving your brand and online business better financial stability, and vastly improves the marketability of your brand and the products you sell. Running your online brand on both Etsy and Shopify will help you not just protect your business, it might even help it thrive. The advantage of having a couple of revenue streams, like Etsy + Shopify, is that it helps you future-proof your business, helping you solidify your brand, and build personal brand relationships with your customers.
Improved Branding and Customization:
While Etsy provides merchants with the safety net of a ready-made audience and marketplace, Shopify offers something much more—an extensive customization experience that helps you build a unique brand and shopping experience.
Building a store on Shopify gives you your own website. Your business gets to own a unique URL, and you get complete control over your store’s design and branding elements, allowing you to create something unique. You’ll have a website with a shopping experience and look that fully lines up with your brand’s identity and core values.
One of the great advantages of establishing your brand presence that you should take note of is that it helps you grow customer loyalty to your brand, and less so to the Etsy brand.
Enhanced Marketing Capabilities:
Shopify offers many powerful marketing tools and integrations that can really boost your brand’s marketing and promotion, helping you reach an even larger audience. To increase traffic to your Shopify store, you may make use of many marketing channels that Shopify gives you better access to. This includes email marketing, social media advertising, and search engine optimization. Alongside Etsy’s current consumer base, you can expand your brand’s visibility and draw in more potential customers by using Shopify’s extensive marketing tools that help you more effectively use a multi-channel approach.
We also encourage you to look into Shopify POS, a point-of-sale function designed to help business owners sell their products in person and online. Shopify POS is great for creative merchants who wish to sell their handmade products not just on Etsy and on Shopify, but in person as well, in pop-up locations and their physical stores, helping you keep data like your inventory, customers, sales, and payouts across all channels in sync. Learn more about Shopify POS.
Learn more about Shopify and Shopify Plus’ top features from the top experts. Get in touch by filling out this form.
Success Stories: Highlighting the Benefits of Etsy + Shopify
Below we highlight 3 businesses that operate on both Shopify and Etsy, providing you with a link to each of their unique Shopify stores.
Floral Neverland is a charming online business founded by Olivia Wang. The brand specializes in preserving real flowers and turning them into exquisite accessories, with every unique piece meticulously crafted by hand.
The brand first began its journey on Etsy, until the founder realized she needed more flexibility to build her own brand up. While Floral Neverland’s Etsy store is still operational today, Olivia dedicates more time to her Shopify store and website, which helps her generate more sales. Floral Neverland is an example of just how important brand and building a dedicated community outside of Etsy can be in establishing a long-lasting, future-proof online business.
HaldeCraft is a creative little corner of the internet by Lorena Haldeman, a multi-talented artist and craftswoman, who creates unique pieces including ceramics, soap, handspun yarn, and more. HaldeCraft began online with an Etsy store, but as the product range grew, Lorena found herself faced with challenges when it came to organizing her wares on Etsy, prompting her to turn to Shopify for better product organization and categorization.
She was able to organize all of her wares into categories and subcategories on her Shopify site in a way that benefited both the shop and her consumers. Today, both Shopify and Etsy stores are kept open, used to leverage the exposure from Etsy that also helps customers find their way to the HaldeCraft Shopify store for Lorena’s exclusive offerings on the site.
Conquest Maps is a beautifully organized online store that sells custom travel maps that are made to help travelers set, track and achieve their own personal travel goals. Founded by Ross Worden who began his business journey on Etsy, he found Shopify to be a great fit for establishing a more direct and personal relationship with customers. Conquest Maps still operates on both Shopify and Etsy today, with Ross reporting a majority of sales through his Shopify store.
Bottom Line
While the decisions you make on the next steps to expand your business will always be dependent on what you feel is best for your brand, launching a Shopify store combined with Etsy may be the best course of action to grow your brand.
Combining the ecommerce potential of both Etsy and Shopify could be the key to unlocking multi-platform ecommerce success. By selling on both platforms, you can access a wider customer base, diversify your revenue, improve customization, and have access to advanced marketing capabilities.
What’s more is that with Shopify, you get to build your own unique website and brand experience, forming deeper connections with your audience than ever before.
Ready to take your Etsy business further with Shopify? Let’s build your Shopify online store together. Fill out our contact form to get in touch with Ecommerce Pro.
Get in Touch
At Ecommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful Shopify businesses. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
Optimizing Retail Operations: 14 Strategies for Efficiency and Success
In a retail landscape where margins are slim and competition is fierce, operational efficiency is the invisible engine driving success. The topic of retail operations may not be as sexy as the latest tech or marketing trend, but managing your stores successfully is a must if you want to maintain a healthy bottom line.
To that end, we’ve put together the top retail strategies to help you optimize every aspect of your operations—from back office to storefront—for a seamless and profitable experience.
We’ll cover:
Prep for the future of commerce
Download our free playbook and learn how to sell on different channels, boost loyalty and increase foot traffic with technology.
What are retail operations?
Retail operations are the daily activities and processes that a retail business undertakes to function effectively and efficiently. This encompasses many moving parts of your retail business, including inventory management, staffing, sales, marketing and more.
In essence, retail operations are the comprehensive set of tasks and functions that allow you, the retailer, to provide products or services to customers in a smooth and coordinated manner.
As you can imagine, the topic of retail operations is very broad, and staying on top of everything can be a challenge. But when you do it right, your business will reap incredible benefits in the form of increased profits, improved customer satisfaction and a stronger business overall.
Implement efficient inventory management and replenishment
Inventory or physical goods are the bread and butter of most retail stores, which is why it makes sense to start here, when you’re optimizing your retail operations. Below are some key inventory control tips to help ensure you’re stocking the right products at the right time.
Automate tedious and time-consuming inventory management tasks
Manual and tedious tasks not only take way too much time, they also lead to human error. That’s why if you’re looking to improve inventory management and store operations, one the lowest hanging fruits you can take lies in automation.
Identify manual and inefficient processes in your inventory management and find ways to put them on autopilot. For example, if you’re still manually tracking inventory quantities or generating purchase orders, you can use a retail platform that takes this job off your hands.
Lightspeed Retail makes this easy to do. You can set automatic reorder points—i.e., the level that a product’s quantity must get to before appearing on your “low stock” report.
Your reorder point is also the level that must be reached in order for the system to automatically populate an order with this item.
Leverage inventory reports to make smarter decisions
Analyzing inventory reports helps you identify best-selling products, seasonal trends and underperforming items, so you can make smarter decisions around:
what to stock
how much to order
what to put on sale
and more.
As such, it’s important to equip your stores with a robust inventory management software that offers reports on sales, product performance and stock movement, among other things.
Take Lightspeed Retail, which offers inventory reports that shed light on KPIs like items sold, sell-through, margins and more.
Centralize your inventory
If you sell across multiple retail stores and channels, having a centralized view of your inventory (and business performance) is a must. A unified view promotes consistency and accuracy in stock levels, while preventing overselling. It also makes it easier to transfer stock between locations, so you can move products across stores with ease.
We can see this in action in Melissa Joy Manning, who uses Lightspeed Retail to centrally manage her stores and products.
Lightspeed’s reporting and inventory management capabilities, in particular, allows Melissa to understand and compare product performance between her stores, so she can optimize stock levels accordingly.
“I’m in there weekly, looking at stock levels across stores. So if a product sells well in one location, but not in the other, I can then just send it over and they click “Receive” and then it’s in their inventory,” she explains.
“That’s really important for a brand of our size, especially because we hand make our products so we don’t hold a lot of excess inventory.”
Conduct physical inventory counts regularly
While managing inventory using digital tools is powerful, you still need to track the physical goods in your store. That way, you can ensure that the numbers in your inventory management system correspond to what you actually have in-store.
There are two main ways to conduct physical inventory counts. You can do a full count, which entails counting all items in your store; or you can do a partial inventory count (sometimes referred to as “cycle counting) which means physically counting small amounts of products on a continuous basis.
The right practice depends on your business, but we recommend conducting cycle counts regularly while doing a full inventory count at least once a year.
Note: you may be counting physical goods, but you can still modernize the process using an app like Scanner by Lightspeed.
Scanner turns your iOS or Android device into a powerful inventory management tool, so you can count products using your smartphone or tablet. Simply count items by scanning barcodes directly into the app and if you’re using Lightspeed, you can review and approve the product quantities in your POS.
The health and beauty retailer Neal’s Yard Remedies streamlines its inventory operations using Lightspeed Scanner.
“The stocktake process for us used to involve a lot of spreadsheets, and this wasn’t ideal because it leads to mistakes. Now with Lightspeed, people can use devices to scan easily and update the stock record,” says Paul Stephens, Head of Data & Technology at Neal’s Yard Remedies.
Build strong supplier relationships
Collaborating closely with suppliers can lead to better terms and smoother replenishment processes. As such, treat your vendors just like how you’d like to be treated. This means:
Ensuring honest and open communication.
Adhering to payment terms and schedules.
Providing clear and concise feedback on products and services.
Recognizing and appreciating their efforts and successes.
Working together in problem-solving and creating win-win solutions for both parties.
Having solid vendor relationships means you and your retail team can enjoy more favorable terms and conditions, have the flexibility to adapt to market changes and maintain a more efficient and resilient supply chain.
Streamline store operations, navigation and flow
A big part of optimizing your overall retail operations lies in streamlining your day-to-day processes. In addition to the tactics mentioned above (i.e., leveraging automation and reporting), you should also ensure that your team and customers can navigate your stores efficiently.
Depending on what the store looks like, this could mean:
Utilizing clear signage
Creating intuitive pathways
Being strategic with product placement
Taking these steps can encourage smooth movement and discovery, ultimately leading to improved customer satisfaction and increased sales.
Organize your stockroom and back office
Improving a store’s flow, navigation and operations isn’t just about optimizing the customer-facing aspects of the location. Each store’s “behind the scenes” spaces—including your stockroom and back office—must be organized as well.
Here are some ways to do just that.
Implement clear labeling and shelving systems to quickly locate items.
Utilize space efficiently by using vertical storage and modular shelving.
Establish routine cleaning and maintenance schedules to prevent clutter.
Train staff on organization protocols to ensure consistency.
Create dedicated zones for specific functions to streamline workflow.
Keep essential supplies readily available and organized for quick access.
Implementing these practices will help improve the efficiency and effectiveness of your store’s back-end operations, so you can enhance the overall retail experience.
Unify point of sale system with your payment processor
No retail store is complete without a solid POS and payments platform. Your point of sale system enables you to ring up sales, while your payment processor allows you to accept payments and ensure that the funds hit your bank account in a timely manner.
Opt for embedded payments
And since your POS and payment systems are so tightly connected, the best way to ensure that they operate seamlessly is to opt for embedded payments. An embedded payment system means the payment process is fully incorporated or “embedded” within the user experience, so there’s no need to leave your point of sale platform.
Embedded payments can sometimes be confused with integrated payments, but they actually have some key distinctions.
Integrated payments involves connecting or “integrating” a payment processor with your POS system. Unlike embedded payments, which enable you to complete transactions on the same app, integrated payment systems require you to connect to a third party.
This creates a disjointed payment experience, which can then impact your retail operations.
Opting for embedded payments can often lead to a smoother, more cohesive customer experience at checkout. You also benefit from better payment reports, more streamlined reconciliation processes and increased security measures.
We can see the power of embedded payments in Melissa Joy Manning. Prior to Lightspeed Payments, her stores would often run into issues like payment terminal crashes, difficulties generating reports and a lack of transparency around fees.
Fast forward to today, and Melissa Joy Manning enjoys smoother payment processing with Lightspeed Payments.
The new payment terminals crash less often, giving customers a much smoother checkout experience. “Now it’s much easier for us to close the sale and have the customer on their way happy with what they purchased and the purchasing process,” says Melissa.
“With Lightspeed, we’re saving a lot of time in the reconciliation process. We’re also saving a lot of money in fees, and it’s made the business much faster, much easier and so much cheaper to operate on that end,” she adds.
Implement effective employee management
Sales associates make the retail store go round, which is why it’s crucial to invest in your team’s skills, knowledge and happiness. This is where retail employee training and staff wellbeing programs come into play.
Invest in employee training
Comprehensive training programs not only enhance employees’ abilities to serve customers effectively but also foster a positive work environment, ultimately contributing to increased sales, customer satisfaction and retention within the team.
While the right training approach or program will vary from one retailer to another, here are a few general best practices to keep in mind.
Tailor the training to individual roles and responsibilities.
Pair seasoned members with new employees, having the latter shadow the more experienced staff members.
Incorporate hands-on practice and real-world scenarios for effective learning.
Provide continuous feedback and opportunities for growth and development.
Leverage technology, such as e-learning platforms, for flexible and consistent training.
Encourage a culture of continuous learning that values and supports professional development.
Monitor and evaluate the effectiveness of training to make necessary improvements.
Jane Wright, owner of Floorplay Socks, knows full well just how important well-trained employees are. She credits the success of their business in part to having a strong team.
“My staff are well trained and well versed in every product we have. For example, one brand of stock we have, every pair has a built in arch support. They don’t have toe seams. They have all sorts of attributes. So my staff know everything about it,” she says.
“My staff are educated in our products, and their job is to educate our customers.”
Make staff happiness a priority
Happy workers are a lot more productive; plus, they tend to stick around longer so you won’t have to deal with high turnover and staffing gaps (which curtail store operations).
As Janet puts it, “I believe that if they’re feeling good about the company, then they’re going to stay with me a long time. I’ve been in business ten years, and I have staff who’ve been with me eight years. So that’s really important to me, because then they build up a clientele as well.”
Set the right sales targets
Another great way to improve employee performance is to set sales targets. That way, you’re creating clear and measurable goals that align with the overall business objectives.
This fosters a sense of purpose and direction, motivates employees to strive for excellence and provides a tangible benchmark to monitor progress and achievements.
Setting and tracking sales goals is simple with a platform like Lightspeed Retail.
You can set daily, weekly and monthly targets for your users and monitor overall performance right from your home screen.
Deliver exceptional customer experiences
Retail success isn’t just about selling great products; it’s increasingly about delivering amazing customer experiences that keep shoppers coming back. That’s why optimizing the customer experience goes a long way in improving your retail operations.
Streamline customer marketing
We all know how important personalization is to the shopping experience, but manually gathering data is tedious, and it’s certainly not optimal for your operations. That’s why it pays to invest in a marketing and loyalty solution that can put certain activities on autopilot.
For instance, rather than collecting customer data using a spreadsheet or paper form, digitize your process by collecting them using your POS (such as Lightspeed).
Once you’ve done that, put your customer data to good use by communicating regularly. Leverage channels like email and SMS so you can stay top of mind and drive traffic to your website and store.
Pro tip: You can do all of this and more with Advanced Marketing. Learn more.
Continuously gather feedback
Not sure what else you can do to improve your operations? Ask your customers. Make it a point to gather feedback using surveys, product reviews or even just face to face interactions. Doing so helps you gain more insights into what you’re doing right and any areas of improvement, so you can take action accordingly.
Connect your in-store and online retail operations
Achieving retail success in today’s modern and competitive landscape requires you to be there for your customers no matter where or how they’re shopping. This means selling in-store, online and everywhere in between.
Centrally manage all your sales channels
We’ve alluded to this earlier, but it’s worth repeating: to smoothly sell across multiple channels, it’s best to manage everything on one platform. So, choose a retail solution that enables you to oversee multiple channels and makes it easy to view performance, transfer stock, fulfill orders, etc.
Take for example, Lightspeed. In addition to having built-in ecommerce capabilities, our solution also connects to leading solutions (including BigCommerce and WooCommerce). This means you can manage both offline and online sales from Lightspeed, and fulfill orders on the same platform.
When you use Lightspeed eCom, any orders that come through your website will automatically show on the Fulfillments page in your Lightspeed account. This capability also works with Lightspeed’s integrations with platforms like BigCommerce and Woocommerce.
That way, you can quickly easy which orders you need to pack and prepare for shipping or in-store pickup.
Ready to optimize your retail operations?
Optimizing retail operations is a crucial element in achieving success in today’s competitive retail landscape. While it may not be as glamorous as the latest tech or marketing trends, efficient and well-managed stores are essential for maintaining a healthy bottom line.
The good news is with a tool like Lightspeed Retail, managing your stores is a breeze. Watch a demo and discover how our POS, payments, inventory and reporting tools can keep your retail operations running smoothly.
21 Little-Known Ways to Use Expiring Posts in WordPress
You may already know that WordPress lets you schedule posts to publish at a later date, but did you know that you can also schedule posts to automatically unpublish after a set time period?
In a previous article, we looked at the best post scheduling plugins for WordPress. Depending on the nature of your content, however, you may also want posts to automatically unpublish after having served their purpose.
In this article, we look at practical ways to use expiring posts in WordPress and plugins that will help you automate this.
We’ll cover the following areas:
21 Ways to Use Expiring Posts
Here are 21 ways to improve your content and marketing strategy using expiring posts in WordPress:
1. Time-Sensitive Promotions
If you run time-limited sales announcements, promotions, offers, or contests on your website, scheduling expiring posts lets you automatically remove or update those posts once the promotional period has ended.
Scheduling posts to automatically expire at the end of a promotional campaign ensures that visitors and customers are not presented with outdated offers or information, preventing confusion and avoiding disappointment, and helps to maintain your brand’s credibility.
For example, let’s say you have a retail store or an eCommerce website and are planning to run a week-long flash sale on selected items. You could create a series of posts promoting different products and schedule them to automatically expire at the end of the sale period, ensuring that customers only see your active promotions.
2. Seasonal Updates
Scheduling expiring posts can be really useful if your business has seasonal products, services, or events.
Automatically expiring posts that contain seasonal content, such as holiday greetings, seasonal sales, or event announcements (e.g. festivals, growers markets, etc.) helps to keep your website’s content aligned with the current season and relevant throughout the year, and avoids showcasing outdated products or information.
This is not only useful for businesses that offer seasonal products or services, such as gardening supplies or holiday-specific decorations, but also seasonal offers or services.
For example, if you have a holiday-specific campaign, you can schedule the corresponding posts to expire once the holiday is over, saving you the effort of manually having to remove or update content every season.
Or, let’s say your client runs a travel agency and wants to showcase different holiday destinations throughout the year (or promote destinations that match discounted airfares from different airlines). They could create posts highlighting specific locations and set them to automatically expire once the corresponding season ends, keeping their website content aligned with the current season.
3. Event Management
Setting expiration dates for event-related posts ensures that outdated event details are automatically removed, maintaining accurate and up-to-date information for attendees.
For example, if your company organizes events, you can schedule posts to expire after the event has taken place. This helps manage event-specific content, such as registration details, agenda updates, or speaker information, and ensures that your website stays relevant before and after the event.
Similarly, if your business organizes conferences, you could create posts promoting each session and speaker and then schedule these to expire after the session has taken place, ensuring that outdated session details are automatically removed.
4. Limited-Time Offers
Promoting exclusive deals or discounts by scheduling posts to expire when the offer period ends creates a sense of urgency for visitors and encourages customers to make timely purchases.
This is ideal for online retailers planning to launch a one-day or weekend sale with posts featuring discounted products.
By scheduling posts to automatically publish when the event kicks off and then setting the posts to expire at the end of the sale, they would not only create a sense of urgency but automate the entire process so they wouldn’t even have to monitor it (think of all those limited-time sales that end at midnight…you could be sleeping and still be making money!)
5. News and Updates
When you have important announcements or releases that need to be shared at a specific time, such as product launches, press releases, or scheduled events, scheduling expiring posts ensures that the information becomes available and expires automatically according to your desired schedule.
Scheduling your news articles, press releases, or industry updates posts to automatically expire when the information loses its relevance or becomes outdated after a certain period helps to keep your website current, maintains a current and accurate representation of the news landscape, and ensures that readers are always presented with the latest news stories.
6. Product Launches
Scheduling posts to expire after a product launch prevents outdated information about previous releases from cluttering your website.
If you are a technology company planning to release a new version of its software, foir example, you could create a series of posts providing information and updates about the upcoming release, then schedule these to expire shortly after the launch to prevent users from accessing outdated software details.
7. Temporary Notices or Alerts
Displaying time-sensitive notices or alerts, such as maintenance notifications or temporary closures, that automatically expire once the issue or event has passed, ensures that visitors no longer see the closure notice.
For example, a small business could display a notice on its website about a temporary closure due to personal reasons (e.g. owners travelling overseas or a death of a key business team member), and schedule the post to expire once the business reopens.
8. Membership or Subscription Expiration
Automatically expiring posts that are accessible only to members or subscribers after their membership or subscription period ends, encourages them to renew or upgrade.
A good example of this is where a membership-based website grants access to premium content for a specific subscription period and sets users’ access to posts and resources to automatically expire at the end of their subscription.
9. Course or Lesson Availability
Controlling access to course or lesson content by scheduling posts to expire based on the duration of the course or availability of the material encourages students to progress through the course within a designated timeframe.
For example, an online learning platform could provide access to course materials for a limited duration with each lesson post scheduled to expire after a certain number of days.
10. Contest or Giveaway End Dates
Setting posts to expire when a contest or giveaway ends ensures that the information remains accurate and helps to avoid confusion for participants.
A practical use of this could be where a social media influencer runs a giveaway and promotes it through posts on their website. The posts are then scheduled to expire at the end of the giveaway, ensuring that participants can no longer enter after the specified deadline.
11. Archiving Outdated Content
Automatically expiring and archiving posts that are no longer relevant or useful keeps your website clutter-free and ensures a better user experience.
For example, suppose your company blog features posts about past product releases. As new products are launched, the corresponding posts are then scheduled to expire and automatically move to an archive section, keeping the main blog focused on current offerings.
12. Regulatory Compliance
If you need to comply with specific regulations regarding the removal or expiration of certain types of content, scheduling posts to expire can help you meet those requirements.
An example of where setting posts to expire once a required duration has passed to ensure compliance with regulations would be where a financial-related institution publishes posts with legal disclaimers that must be displayed for a specific time period.
13. Legal Compliance
Similar to the above, you can automatically expire posts that contain time-limited legal disclaimers, privacy policies, terms of service, or cookie notices to ensure compliance with changing regulations.
For example, let’s say that an online service provider includes a cookie notice on their website. The post containing the notice can be scheduled to expire after the required consent duration, ensuring compliance with data privacy regulations.
14. Expiring Downloads or Resources
You can also schedule posts to expire when downloadable files, resources, or documents are no longer available or have been updated.
Scheduling posts related to older versions to expire once new updates are released ensures that users access only the most recent and relevant resources and prevents them from accessing outdated information.
15. Scheduled Content Updates
Plan ahead by scheduling posts to expire and automatically trigger updates or new content, ensuring a consistent publishing schedule and reducing manual intervention.
So, if you run a magazine-style website publishing articles on a weekly basis, you could schedule posts to automatically expire at the time of each new publication, allowing for seamless content updates without manual intervention.
16. A/B Testing
Using expiring posts to test different versions of content or design elements by setting expiration dates lets you compare performance and make data-driven decisions.
For example, suppose you run an e-commerce website and want to test two different versions of a product description. You could create two posts, each featuring a different description, and schedule them to expire after a set period. You can then analyze the metrics and determine which version performs better.
17. Content Rotation
Automatically cycling through a set of posts by scheduling them to expire and publishing new content allows you to create a dynamic and ever-changing website experience.
Suppose an art gallery website wants to showcase different artists. They could schedule posts featuring different artists’ works to automatically expire and publish new posts showcasing other artists, providing a constantly changing selection for visitors.
18. User Engagement
Encouraging regular visits to your website by regularly expiring and replacing content helps to entice users to return for fresh information and increased engagement.
An example of this would be where a lifestyle blog regularly features “Tip of the Week” posts. Each post is scheduled to automatically expire after a week, encouraging readers to return for fresh tips.
19. Content Freshness
By scheduling non-evergreen posts to expire, you ensure that your website or blog remains up-to-date with fresh content. This is particularly important if you publish time-sensitive information, such as news, promotions, or event announcements on a regular basis.
Once a post expires, it can automatically be removed or replaced with new content, keeping your website content fresh and relevant.
20. Content Cleanup
Schedule posts to expire and be removed from your website’s public view to maintain a clean and organized content repository.
For example, suppose your blog includes guest posts or paid posts that are only relevant for a limited time. You can schedule guest posts to expire and be removed from your website after the agreed-upon period, keeping your content repository well maintained, clean, and focused.
21. Editorial Workflow
Scheduling expiring posts allows you to plan your content publishing in advance. This can help streamline your content creation process and manage your editorial calendar more effectively.
By pre-scheduling expiration dates, you can focus on creating new content rather than constantly monitoring and manually updating old posts.
This is useful for businesses with news-like websites that follow an editorial calendar. They can schedule posts to expire according to the planned publication schedule, ensuring a steady flow of new content while seamlessly removing outdated articles from the website.
Why stay up all night to unpublish posts when you can set these to automatically expire?
Expiring Post Plugins for WordPress
Here are some post expiration plugins for WordPress you can use to publish a post for a limited time and have your posts be automatically unpublished after the period has expired:
PublishPress Future
PublishPress Future lets you automatically unpublish posts in WordPress.
PublishPress Future (formerly Post Expirator) is a simple and easy-to-use plugin that not only lets you automatically unpublish posts, pages, and other content types in WordPress, but also delete your post, change its status, update the post categories, or make other changes.
With PublishPress Future installed, you can:
Choose expiry dates for content in any post type.
Select expiry dates in the right sidebar when editing posts.
Modify, remove or completely delete content when the expiry date arrives.
Modify expiry dates using “Quick Edit” and “Bulk Edit”.
Receive email notifications when your content expires.
Show expiry dates in your content, automatically or with shortcodes.
After installing and activating the plugin, you will see the plugin’s editor block (if using the Block Editor) or settings panel (Classic editor) when creating or editing a post, giving you flexibility and control over when your content will expire.
Simply enter the date and time that you want your post to expire using the intuitive interface…
Use the plugin’s editor block to set your post’s expiry date and time.
And choose what should happen to the post when it expires by selecting an option from the “Action To Run” section…
Choose what happens to your post after it expires.
You have various options for future actions on expired posts.
For example, you can:
Change the status to Draft, Private, or Trash.
Delete the post.
Keep all existing categories, and add new categories.
Remove all existing categories, and add new categories.
Keep all existing categories, except for those specified in this change.
Enable the “Stick to the top of the blog” option.
Disable the “Stick to the top of the blog” option.
Move the post to a custom status (Pro version)
PublishPress Future gives you complete control of scheduling and managing post expirations via its extensive settings panel. A Pro version of the plugin is available offering additional features and support.
The plugin puts you in complete control of your post expiration’s settings.
The PublishPress Future plugin includes the following additional features and functionalities:
Quick and Bulk Edit
Use the convenience of the plugin’s “Quick Edit” and “Bulk Edit” options to make changes to expiry dates. and manage a large number of posts.
Set posts to expire using the plugin’s convenient Quick Edit and Bulk Edit options.
Email Notifications
Receive notifications when your posts are due to expire so you can stay informed about your content’s expiry and never miss a critical update.
Display Expiry Dates in Your Content
PublishPress Future allows you to automatically show expiry or action dates within your articles. This feature adds a date stamp at the bottom of your post.
Display the post expiry status to provide transparency to your audience.
You can also use customizable shortcodes to display the expiration date inside your posts, tailoring the format to meet your specific needs.
Expiry Defaults for Post Types
The plugin not only lets you customize default expiry options for each post type within your WordPress site, but you can also configure default expiry settings for all of your content.
Automate your content scheduling even further by configuring default post expiry options.
Advanced Features & Detailed Logs
The Pro version of the plugin offers additional functionalities, such as moving posts to a custom status upon expiration and keeps a comprehensive log of all changes made to your posts.
Seamless Cron Job Integration
WP-CRON is a built-in feature of WordPress used to schedule recurring tasks, such as publishing scheduled posts or processing queued tasks in plugins.
PublishPress Future uses custom cron jobs to execute expiration events efficiently, reducing server overhead for busy websites. To fully leverage the plugin’s capabilities, make sure that WP-CRON is properly set up and functional on your web host.
Note: When using plugins that require WP-CRON, it’s essential to monitor the performance and resource usage of your site, as WP-CRON can consume significant resources when running heavy or frequent tasks.
If you notice performance issues, you may need to optimize the plugin settings, offload tasks to external services, or use a real server-side cron job to improve efficiency and prevent performance degradation on your hosting account.
For the best experience running plugins that require WP-CRON functionality, consult the WPMU DEV support team to ensure your website is running optimally on your selected hosting plan.
Auto Post Expiration
Manage post lifespan in WordPress with the Auto Post Expiration plugin.
Auto Post Expiration is another plugin you can use to easily set expiration dates for your posts in WordPress.
With just a few clicks, you can schedule posts to automatically change to “draft” status, ensuring they are no longer visible on the front end of your site.
Key features of this plugin include:
Set Post Expiration Date and Time
The plugin provides an intuitive feature that lets you easily select the desired date and time for your posts to expire and transition to the “draft” status.
Admin Column Display
Auto Post Expiration shows the expiration date and post status directly in the admin column, making it easy to stay organized and keep track of when posts are scheduled to expire.
Gutenberg and Classic Editor Support
The plugin seamlessly integrates with the block and classic editors, so you can use your preferred editing interface when creating or editing posts.
The plugin also offers a Pro version that lets you unlock advanced features, such as setting expiration dates for single posts, pages, products, and custom post types, WooCommerce Support (set expiration dates for your WooCommerce products), and email notifications for Admin.
Hopefully, this article has inspired you to use expired posts. Auto expiring posts can help you streamline your content management processes, control the lifespan of your content, and keep your website current, fresh, and relevant to enhance user experience.
For complete WordPress automation, consider becoming a WPMU DEV member. Our all-in-one WordPress platform is ideal for web developers and agencies and includes robust site management tools and Pro plugins that will automate all aspects of your WordPress sites.
Selecting the Ideal Shopify Theme – Blend Commerce
Have you ever wandered into a massive bookstore, entirely captivated by the endless possibilities yet unsure which book to pick? Well, choosing the best Shopify theme can feel just like that – a delightful but bewildering experience. With thousands of themes to explore, it’s no wonder you might feel a little lost in the enchanting realm of Shopify design. But fear not! In this blog, we’ll be your trusty guides, providing essential tips and tricks.
Let’s dive in and discover the Shopify theme that will make your store shine brighter than a bestseller on the shelves!
How to Choose a Shopify Theme that Wows: Define Your Style Goals
Every successful journey starts with a clear destination in mind. Before diving into the theme store, take a moment to define your theme goals:
Product Focus: Take a close look at your product range. If you have an extensive catalogue with various product types, prioritise themes that offer robust search functionality and easy-to-use filters. This ensures that customers can easily find what they’re looking for. For stores with a more limited selection, opt for themes that emphasise visuals and storytelling. Showcase high-quality product images and highlight key features to capture customers’ attention.
Visual Presentation: Your store’s visual appearance plays a significant role in attracting and retaining customers. Consider your brand identity and the look you want to portray. Look for themes that allow customisation of colours, fonts, and other design elements, enabling you to align the theme with your brand’s aesthetics seamlessly.
Customisation Skills: Be honest about your technical expertise in theme customisation. While some entrepreneurs may feel comfortable making extensive modifications, others prefer a more user-friendly theme. Choose a theme matching your skill level to avoid frustration and ensure your store looks its best.
Desired Features: Identify the essential features your store needs to deliver an exceptional shopping experience. Popular features include size charts, mega menus, product image zoom, and related product recommendations. Prioritise themes that offer these functionalities so you don’t have to rely on third-party apps or custom development.
Navigating the Shopify Theme Store: Finding Your Ideal Fit
With your goals in mind, let’s embark on a treasure hunt through the vast Shopify theme store. You can now utilise the available filters to zero in on themes tailored to your needs—just filter by product type, industry, and layout style to find themes that match your business’s character.
As you explore themes, focus on the structure and organisation of their demo stores. Look for intuitive navigation that guides customers seamlessly through your products and content. Consider how the theme showcases your product images and descriptions. Make sure it’s what you’re looking for and what you imagined for your site—Remember, crisp, clean, and informative displays go a long way in winning over potential buyers.
Additionally, reading customer reviews can be highly valuable during theme selection. Learn from other merchants’ experiences with the themes you’re interested in, as they can provide insights into the theme’s strengths and weaknesses and the level of support offered by the theme provider.
Exploring Shopify Demo Stores: Test Driving Themes
Time for a test drive! Access the demo stores of the shortlisted themes to experience their functionalities firsthand. Click around, add products to the cart, and simulate the checkout process. Ensure everything flows smoothly, with no hiccups or confusion along the way. Pay attention to how the theme handles customisations; this will significantly align the theme with your branding and photography.
Focus on the theme’s responsiveness on different devices, especially mobile phones and tablets. As mobile traffic continues to soar, a mobile-friendly theme is essential, so ensure the themes adapt flawlessly to other devices so that customers can enjoy your store from anywhere, which will increase positive user experience and optimal search engine rankings.
Prioritising Theme Support: Ensuring a Smooth Experience
While you’re on the hunt for the perfect theme, consider the level of support provided by the theme developer. Shopify offers support directly for free themes, while premium themes may come with dedicated support teams. Read customer reviews and seek feedback from fellow store owners to gauge the quality of support and responsiveness.
Additionally, a high-performing theme is vital to a successful online store. Page load speed significantly impacts user experience and search engine rankings. Choose a theme optimised for performance to ensure speedy page loads and smooth navigation.
Top Quick Tips to Remember
Trust Your Instincts: Customer reviews are helpful, but go with what feels right for your store.
Check Developer’s Style: Peek at the developer’s other themes to see if their style matches your taste.
Stay Updated and Supported: Choose a theme with regular updates and reliable support.
Mix and Match: Customise elements from different themes for a unique look.
Speed Matters: Test load times for a speedy shopping experience.
Mobile-Friendly is a Must: Ensure your theme looks great on all devices.
Future-Ready Theme: Pick a theme that can grow with your business.
Global Reach: Consider translation support for international customers.
Connect with Other Store Owners: Join Shopify communities for ideas and support.
Try Before You Buy: Make the most of free trials to find your perfect fit.
With these top tips, you’ll be a theme-picking pro and set up a Shopify store that’s simply irresistible!
In conclusion, finding the perfect Shopify theme involves a thoughtful and thorough process. By considering your store’s goals, visual presentation, customisation needs, and desired features, you can select a theme that reflects your brand’s essence and elevates your customers’ shopping experience. With a suitable theme as your secret ingredient, your store will be destined for success and boost your sales to new heights!
Feel free to contact us here at Blend. Our team of experts is here to help you with any questions or queries!
Want to soar above your competitors?
CVO is the way to do it. As CVO and Shopify experts, we work with large eCommerce brands like yours, increasing their metrics and revenue. Enquire today to find out how we can help you.
Farm-to-table Fast Food: How Maynard is Making it Happen
The concept is simple—fresh, local ingredients prepared with love and attention—yet the execution is anything but. Brodie Somerville spent years working in some of the most prestigious restaurants in the world. Within the walls of Michelin-starred restaurants, he honed his craft, but he never lost his passion for the farm fresh, home cooked food he grew up with.
Now, he’s bringing elevated plant-based comfort cuisine to the masses with Maynard, a fast casual vegetarian and vegan restaurant in Montreal’s Plateau neighborhood.
Looking for a new POS?
In today’s competitive hospitality landscape, you need tools that support your business as it grows. Ask these 11 questions to find the right POS for your restaurant.
Not your typical burger joint
A vegetarian since 2008, Somerville was getting bored of eating the same ‘brand name’ veggie burger and french fries, when looking for a take-out or speedy sit-in option. While vegetarian and vegan options have greatly improved over the years, it’s still wildly underrepresented in quick service.
“I wanted quality plant-based comfort food, and it just didn’t exist,” says Somerville. “I realized that if I wanted it and was looking for it, other people probably were too. And I come from that world of just do it, make it happen…So that’s what I did.”
At Maynard, Somerville applies the same philosophy and the passion-bordering-on-fanaticism he developed working in fine dining to comfort food like their Impossible Smash Burger and Tofu Nashville. “We use the same techniques, suppliers, and high-quality ingredients that are used in fine dining, but in a format and price point that’s accessible to everyone.”
High quality ingredients
For Somerville, farm-to-table, or buying as locally and direct as possible, was non-negotiable. Maynard is the first vegan restaurant to be recognized under the Aliments du Québec Au menu Program—more than 80% of all produce and products they use come from within 75 kilometers of the restaurant.
Gaining in popularity, the farm-to-table movement is all about sourcing fresh, seasonal ingredients from local farmers and producers. Besides getting the highest quality ingredients, the model helps support local farmers and economies, and comes with a lower carbon footprint. While it’s gained widespread acclaim, farm-to-table is not without its challenges—like juggling half a dozen suppliers for a single ingredient.
A juggling act
Just the idea of juggling a dozen suppliers would give many chefs nightmares—or having to change the menu every three weeks because that local ingredient went out of season. For Somerville, it’s just part of the game with farm-to-table. Despite having as many as 6 suppliers for one ingredient, there are still times when he “just can’t get the thing” because it didn’t grow properly, or grow as much as expected.
“The menu reflects what we can get our hands on,” explains Somerville. “It’s a bit more of a juggling act. Sometimes I feel bad for my staff because the menu could change three times in a week if we couldn’t get what we wanted, or if we found a way to make it better. Because if we find a better way, it will change. Our first priority is to put the best product we can on the plate every day.”
To simplify operations, Somerville uses Lightspeed’s one-stop restaurant management platform to keep track of suppliers, streamline ordering and payment processes, and get out-of-the-box delivery integrations.
Just come on home
Maynard, named after Somerville’s hometown, is his first solo project and he’s gone in with a bang. From savory sauces and fresh bread to crispy, hand-cut fries, Somerville and his team take pride in making as much as possible in-house. By all accounts, they don’t cut corners on anything and they certainly don’t make it easy on themselves. Offering traditional brunch fair like hash browns, breakfast burritos and their very own Tofu & Waffles—a veggie friendly twist on chicken and waffles—they also have a full menu of traditionally meat-centric comfort goodies like wings, poutine, pogos and chili for vegetarians and vegans alike.
“The inspiration for the restaurant is southern diner meets your grandma’s kitchen,” he explains. “When you come in, we’re going to take care of you, we’re going to take care of your family. That was the feeling I wanted for Maynard… The idea is to welcome you into our home.”
To find out more about how Lightspeed provides fast casual restaurants with best-in-class tools that streamline their business and help them reach their goals, talk to one of our experts.
How to Redirect Your 404 Page to the Home Page in WordPress
Do you want to redirect your 404 page to your home page in WordPress?
Redirecting the 404 ‘Not Found’ page to your website’s home page can help reduce your bounce rate and allow your users to discover other useful content on your website.
In this article, we will show you how to redirect your 404 page to your home page in WordPress.
Why Redirect Your 404 Page to Your WordPress Home Page?
When a user tries to visit a page that doesn’t exist on your WordPress website, WordPress will show them a 404 error page instead.
The wording and appearance of this page can vary depending on the theme you are using.
Most users who land on the default 404 page will leave your site quickly. This can increase your overall bounce rate and negatively impact your search engine rankings.
That’s why you should take the time to create a custom 404 page. However, until you do that, you can take the shortcut in this tutorial and redirect users to the homepage.
That being said, let’s look at how to redirect all 404 errors to your home page. We will cover two methods and also show you how to create custom redirects for individual pages:
Method 1: Redirect All 404 Errors to the Home Page in WordPress
For this method, we will be using All in One SEO for WordPress (AIOSEO). It is the best WordPress SEO plugin that allows you to set up redirects, optimize your content for search engines, and more.
The first thing you need to do is install and activate All in One SEO (AIOSEO). For more details, see our step-by-step guide on how to install a WordPress plugin.
Note: There is a free version of All in One SEO, but we will be using the Pro version since Redirect is a Pro addon.
Once the plugin is activated, you need to go to All in One SEO » Redirects.
If you haven’t set up redirects yet, then you must click the ‘Activate Redirects’ button.
This will install All in One SEO’s Redirects module.
Next, you will need to click on the ‘Settings’ tab at the top of the page. This page allows you to configure redirects in AIOSEO.
You need to scroll down the page until you find the ‘Advanced 404 Settings’ section. Enable this section by simply clicking the toggle button so that it turns blue.
Now you will be able to see some more settings. You should toggle the ‘Enable default 404 redirect’ button to the on position. After that, make sure that the ‘Home Page’ option is selected.
Notice that there’s also a ‘Custom URL’ option. This allows you to redirect 404 errors to any post or page. Don’t forget to click the ‘Save Changes’ button at the top or bottom of the page to store your settings.
Now when your visitors try to visit a URL on your website that doesn’t exist, they will be taken to the home page instead of seeing the default 404 page.
Method 2: Redirect All 404 Errors to the Home Page Using Code
If you prefer not to use a plugin, then you can use a simple code snippet to redirect all 404 pages to the homepage.
First, you will need to create a new file in your WordPress theme folder and name it 404.php. If your theme already has a 404.php file, then you must edit that file instead.
To edit this file, you need to connect to your WordPress hosting account with an FTP client or their file manager tool.
Once you are connected to your website, you will be able to see the 404.php file in your WordPress themes folder.
You need to add the following code as the first line in your 404.php file:
<?php
header("HTTP/1.1 301 Moved Permanently");
header("Location: ".get_bloginfo('url'));
exit();
?>
Next, save the 404.php file and reupload it to your theme directory using FTP or your hosting control panel.
Now, when a page is not found, instead of seeing a 404 page, visitors will be redirected to your WordPress home page.
Bonus: Set Up Custom 404 Page Redirects With AIOSEO
The best and most SEO-friendly way of handling 404 errors is to redirect visitors to the most relevant page, not just your homepage.
The All in One SEO plugin’s Redirects feature can also track all 404-page errors and let you set up smart 404-page redirects in WordPress.
If you installed and activated AIOSEO when you followed Method 1, then all you need to do is navigate back to the All in One SEO » Redirects page and click on the ‘Settings’ tab.
Next, scroll down until you see the ‘Logs’ section. Your 404 logs are a record of URLs that your visitors have tried to use to visit pages that no longer exist on your site.
Make sure the ‘404 Logs’ is toggled on so that it looks blue. You can also choose how long you want the plugin to record your logs by selecting the time period from the dropdown menu.
Don’t forget to click ‘Save Changes’ before moving on.
After that, you can click the ‘404 Logs’ menu option to see the last accessed 404 page.
Remember, since you just enabled logging, it may not display anything right away. You might need to wait up to 24 hours before you see any useful insights there.
The ‘URL’ column will show you the pages users tried to visit but don’t exist.
You can redirect any of these URLs to an existing page by clicking the ‘Add Redirect’ link in the ‘Redirect’ column. This will open a dropdown where you can enter your redirect information.
For best results, you need to enter the most relevant page for the original query in the ‘Target URL’ box and then click ‘Add Redirect’.
For example, if you deleted a tutorial on how to start a WordPress blog and then wrote a new one, then it’s best to redirect that old URL to the new blog post rather than your homepage.
To add multiple 404-page redirects, simply follow the same steps as above.
Remember, generally, you don’t want to redirect your 404 page to your home page forever. It’s a great temporary solution until you create a custom 404 page design that will convert better or set up individual redirects that take users to a relevant page that does exist.
Build a personalized headless experience with Customer Account API (2023)
Customer accounts are an important part of any storefront. They allow customers to view their past orders, manage their personal information, save their favorite products, and even tailor their shopping experiences based on their preferences and shopping habits.
In the past, Shopify has provided management access of customer accounts through our Storefront API. This enabled headless storefronts to authenticate customers using a password, and expose very basic information like addresses and orders.
Today, we’re excited to introduce a more advanced solution with our new Customer Account API. This new API takes customer account management to the next level, offering improved data consistency, a more developer-friendly interface for authentication, and paving the way for enhanced features like returns, subscriptions and B2B in the future. It’s designed with a deep understanding of the needs of both developers and end-users, providing a seamless and efficient way to handle customer accounts. We believe that our Customer Account API is not just an upgrade, but a significant step forward in managing customer accounts on a headless storefront. We’re confident that you’ll find it to be a superior tool for creating personalized and engaging customer experiences.
This release is part of a dev preview, meaning you can start experimenting with the API today. We plan to make adjustments based on the feedback from our developer community. We recommend using this API in your development storefronts for now, and suggest waiting for GA release before using it in production.
The Customer Account API is a robust GraphQL API, specifically designed for the self-management of customer data. It introduces a brand new customer authentication system, and our aim is to progressively incorporate more of Shopify’s core features within it, all scoped to an individual customer.
Although we’re publicly launching it now, it’s worth noting that the API has been successfully operating in production for over a year and a half. It has been the driving force behind the B2B features, and since the beginning of this year, it has been powering the new customer accounts experience. We’re excited to open it up to developers to help create amazing custom experiences – now accessible via both Hydrogen and Headless channels. We made the decision to release it as unstable as we want to focus on the ease of use of the API, so we’ll revamp some parts of the schema based on feedback from our developer community.
Let’s explore two of the major benefits of using the Customer Account API: passwordless login and authentication built on industry standards.
Passwordless login: a better approach to authentication
Passwordless login offers several advantages over traditional password-based authentication:
Enhanced security: by eliminating the use of passwords, it removes the risk of password breaches. It also prevents the situation where users reusing their passwords across multiple sites, and protects against attackers guessing or stealing passwords.
Improved user experience: removes the challenge of remembering numerous complex passwords and making it easier for users to access their accounts, whether they have one or not. All of this leads to a simpler login process.
Reduced support costs: significantly reduces the number of support requests related to forgotten passwords, saving merchants time and resources.
Increased conversion rates: the ease and simplicity of passwordless login can lead to higher conversion rates, as users are more likely to sign up and continue using a service that doesn’t require them to remember another password.
Prevention of phishing attacks: since there are no passwords to be phished, users are less likely to fall victim to phishing attacks.
We’ve received very positive feedback on using passwordless login in our new customer accounts headed experience and we want to extend this to headless storefronts.
How OAuth2 enhances passwordless login
Passwordless login is based on OAuth2, the industry-standard protocol for authorization. Using this standard brings several significant advantages:
Security: provides a secure and reliable environment for data access and manipulation by using access tokens rather than credentials, minimizing the risk of exposing sensitive user data.
Scalability: designed to support applications of all sizes, from small applications to large-scale headless storefronts, it will be able to grow with the merchant’s user base.
Interoperability: used by many large-scale digital platforms, including Google, Facebook, and Twitter, it ensures compatibility and easy integration with various platforms and services.
Integrated user experience: allows developers to create applications that can interact with other services seamlessly, providing customers with a more integrated and convenient experience.
To authenticate a customer, a developer needs to redirect them to our hosted login experience using the Authorization Code Grant. This abstracts the authentication process from the headless storefront, which receives an access token once the authentication process is complete. With that token, developers can start making calls to the Customer Account API. Here’s what it looks like from the context of the headless storefront:
This approach simplifies the implementation process for developers. Instead of spending time implementing various authentication-adjacent features like password reset, email validation, signup flow, etc., developers can focus on the core of the storefront experience: selling products. OAuth2 abstracts the complexities of the login away and developers can leverage existing OAuth2 client libraries that exist for just about any programming language and framework out there.
Just look at how simpler the experience of authenticating a customer becomes:
Classic Customer Accounts refers to the customer authentication found within the Storefront API, using an email/password combination. New Customer Accounts refer to the new customer authentication we are releasing today.
Since the login page is hosted by us, customers enjoy the convenience of a single authentication throughout their entire journey, irrespective of the number of applications they interact with. This benefit extends across multiple platforms – whether they’re navigating through headless storefront(s), the Online Store, checkout, or various other apps, customers will only need to authenticate once. This streamlined process significantly enhances the user experience, making navigation smoother and more efficient.
The use of OAuth2 in passwordless login not only enhances security but also improves scalability, interoperability, and simplicity, making it an excellent choice for modern storefronts.
The Storefront API enables developers to view products and collections, add products to a cart, and check out. In contrast, the Customer Account API provides information about customers, and allows for actions based on that data.
The existing customer queries and mutations in the Storefront API will continue to function, providing access to the classic customer account features.
The Customer Account API offers access to new customer account features, including passwordless login, single sign-on with checkout, and API access to personal information, orders, drafts, payments, fulfillment, discounts, refunds, and metafields (shop, order, customer).
Note that both authentication systems can’t be used together: it’s not possible to access the Customer Account API using an access token generated by customerAccessTokenCreate, and it’s not possible to access the customer part of the Storefront API using an access token generated by our new customer authentication. New customer accounts is not an incremental change over classic, but rather a re-imagination of what it should be. This means we had to make breaking changes at a foundational level, starting with the authentication itself.
In the future, we plan to enhance the integration between the Storefront API and the new customer authentication system. Specifically, we aim to enable some of the queries and mutations in the Storefront API to work with the new customer authentication, primarily focusing on the cart buyer identity and B2B use cases. However, these enhancements will not extend to customer account management. The Customer Account API will continue to be the primary tool for new storefronts to manage customer accounts, offering a dedicated and robust solution for this purpose.
Seamless authentication with single sign-on for headless storefront and checkout
The most significant pain point of developing a headless storefront on Shopify is the inability to keep the customer authenticated as they navigate from a headless storefront to checkout. While Plus merchants have had the ability to work around this issue using Multipass (our solution for 3rd party authentication), developers without access to Plus have been left without a viable solution. This creates a disjointed experience for customers and a hurdle for developers aiming to provide a seamless shopping experience. Recognizing this, we’ve been committed to finding a solution that is accessible to all developers, regardless of their plan or resources.
We’re thrilled to announce that as of today, we’re introducing single sign-on as a native feature for new customer accounts. To use it, you’ll need to enable new customer accounts in your store. With this feature, all merchants, regardless of their plan, will be able to maintain the authenticated state of their customers as they navigate to checkout. This major improvement will streamline the shopping experience for customers and make the development process more efficient for developers.
Here’s a code sample of a headless storefront built with Hydrogen. This is the cart page, which links to checkout using the new single sign-on feature.
Looking ahead, we plan to further simplify the process by abstracting the query parameter when you obtain the URL from the cart in the Storefront API, provided it’s done in the context of an authenticated customer.
Leverage metafields to personalize the customer experience
Metafields are a powerful tool for customizing the Shopify platform experience to your specific needs. You can store any kind of information on many of Shopify’s primitives like Customer, Order, or Shop. Using the Customer Account API, you can retrieve those to build features that rely on custom data not supported natively on Shopify, eliminating the need for your own database. What’s more, other parts of the Shopify platform like Shopify Functions and the Admin API can also access them, making it the perfect solution for your headless storefront.
In the following code sample, we’ve built a customer preference page using Hydrogen to show the customer’s previously set preferences stored in a metafield. That metafield is linked to the customer record in this case.
Building an order history page
Customers expect to see their recent order history in their account. This feature is crucial for all customers, whether they are first-time buyers or loyal customers placing orders on a weekly basis. It provides them with a comprehensive view of their previous purchases, allowing them to check the status of their recent orders, reorder their favorite items, and track their spending.
Building this feature into your headless storefront can easily be done with the Customer Account API. This API provides the necessary endpoints to retrieve a customer’s order history, including details about each order such as the items purchased, the order date, and the total amount spent.
By leveraging the Customer Account API, you can create a personalized and user-friendly order history page that meets your customers’ expectations and enhances their shopping experience. This is just one of the many ways the Customer Account API can be used to build a more engaging and efficient storefront.
In this last example, we’ve built an order history page using Hydrogen to show the customers’ recent orders.
Building a new API is a monumental task, but for us at Shopify, this is just the beginning. With the public release of the Customer Account API, we are already planning to introduce more features such as returns, subscriptions, and full B2B support. These additions will empower you to build entirely custom experiences in your storefront, enhancing user engagement and satisfaction.
We are also focusing on improving the integration between the Customer Account API and the Storefront API. We plan to enable the Storefront API to accept the access token generated through the new customer authentication system. This enhancement will unlock two significant use cases:
Developers will be able to associate the identity of a customer with a cart. This will automatically trigger the checkout single sign-on flow, streamlining the checkout process and improving the overall shopping experience by default. A faster checkout improves conversion rates.
For the first time, developers will gain access to B2B contextualized pricing. This will enable merchants to build a headless experience for B2B customers, providing them with a more personalized and efficient shopping experience.
Last but not least, we’re developing a Hydrogen abstraction to further simplify the developer experience, based on this example. This enhancement will enable you to kickstart your projects swiftly, going from zero to a functional “Hello World” in just a matter of minutes. Our aim is to allow you to focus more on building your unique storefront and less on the intricacies of integration.
We are excited about these upcoming enhancements and look forward to seeing how you leverage them to create unique and engaging storefront experiences. We invite you to try out the new Customer Account API and share your feedback with us. Your comments will help us continue to improve your experience. For more information and resources, visit our Customer Account API documentation. Stay tuned for more updates and feel free to reach out to us on the ShopifyDev discord channel!
How to Streamline Restaurant Operations: 20 Tips for Success
What makes for a successful restaurant? There are so many factors involved in keeping your restaurant running smoothly that it’s easy to get bogged down in the minutiae of the day-to-day. With this article, we aim to help you find ways to simplify your daily tasks and streamline your overall restaurant operations.
Maintaining efficiency in all your restaurant workflows is key, from front-of-house and back-of-house operations to the systems you use to run your business. The less efficient your restaurant operations, the harder it will be for you to stay profitable–and ultimately, keep your doors open.
Optimizing restaurant operations
One report on Canadian restaurants found that 43% more restaurants have closed this past year, compared with the amount that have opened. That’s a disheartening figure, and no restaurant owner wants to see the business they poured their capital, time, and passion into shut down before its time.
There are plenty of things you can do to avoid this outcome. Here’s what we’ll cover in this article:
The future of hospitality
Find out how you can prepare your restaurant for short and long-term success this year.
How to optimize front-of-house operations
The guest experience starts with front-of-house operations. Guests form their first impressions of your restaurant as soon as they walk in–and the little things make up the big picture. For instance, think about how much of a difference there will be in their initial impression if they walk in and there’s a host ready to assist, versus walking in and seeing an empty host stand with no one to greet them. Let’s delve into the tips for making your front-of-house processes more efficient.
1. Use the right tech to manage reservations, waitlist and table turnover
Table turnover rate is crucial to your restaurant’s bottom line. It’s fairly simple to track. The more tables you serve, the higher your profits will be. Of course that doesn’t mean rushing guests–quality service comes first. It means knowing how to effectively manage reservations, walk-ins, and your waitlist.
Gone are the days of using a manual computer system (or worse, a notebook) to manage reservations and tables. Using a POS system that integrates with reservation software can easily cut down time spent figuring out reservations and updating your waitlist, helping to eliminate no-shows, which can improve revenue.
Your front-of-house staff will have a much easier time seating guests and managing reservations when the information is clear and easy to access through the right software.
2. Reassess how you’re taking orders and payments
Are you using the right system to take orders and make payments? An embedded system will do wonders for your restaurant. That means your POS and payments work as one to ensure your staff can seamlessly take orders and close tables from the same platform.
An embedded system is more user-friendly than its non-embedded counterpart. Servers and bar staff can easily take orders and trust that when it comes time to checkout, the checks are automated–they don’t have to input information manually to check out.
A POS system should be able to keep up with the demands of your restaurant. Choose a system that allows you to configure your menu, workflows and floor plan so your staff can easily take orders and view tables. Automatic, real-time transaction data and order updates should be fully accessible within your POS.
Your staff will also thank you if your POS and payments system includes online ordering capabilities. Streamlining all sources of revenue into one platform can do wonders for staff efficiency and happiness. A POS system that offers integration capabilities with delivery services will cut down time spent so staff can focus on providing customer service and other tasks.
Let’s talk about what this looks like in action. Lightspeed customer Kotsu Ramen & Gyoza uses Lightspeed Restaurant POS and Payments to keep staff and guests happy. The system matches their workflows and helps them simplify complex orders.
“One of the things we do, for example, is design our POS set up on each individual item, ensuring we’re asking the right questions of our guests to deliver that optimum guest experience,” says chief concept officer Grant Macdonald.
3. Ensure outstanding customer service
The importance of properly training staff
When you go to a restaurant, what stands out most to you? Food is the obvious answer, of course. But customer service is a close second, or can even tie for first. Sometimes inadequate service can sour even the most delicious meal.
Strong customer service is key for a restaurant’s success. Not only does outstanding customer service provide you with a competitive edge in your market, but it can fuel positive online reviews and word-of-mouth recommendations.
Importantly, the experience should be consistent every time. Provide regular training to your entire team, especially as new hires come on board. There are plenty of customer service training programs online that staff have to complete in order to work on the floor, for example. Create an employee handbook with service guidelines that staff can follow. Include protocols for what to do in certain situations, such as when a customer has severe dietary restrictions.
How to keep improving
Loyal customers can keep your business successful. Focusing on your existing customer base is just as important as bringing in new customers. And even though you’re confident in your service strategy, you need to hear feedback from the most important player: the customer.
Conduct surveys and send emails asking guests to provide feedback on their experience. You can even plan focus groups to gain insight into what you could be doing better. Keep track of online reviews to inform your customer service strategy. Make improvements as necessary. For example, if you notice a trend of customers waiting too long for their drinks to arrive, dig deeper. Assess bar staff workflows and make changes to address the issue.
You can also take to social media to ask for feedback. Showing your customers you are open to feedback and you care about what they think can only contribute to positive impressions.
The more you listen to your customers to help improve your customer service, the better your operations will run.
Have you ever applied for a job with a clear set of responsibilities, only to find that once you got the job, the role required you to do things outside your scope–tasks that were never mentioned in the job description? That’s a common occurrence among restaurants. Sometimes servers are asked to act as hosts, bar staff have to work the floor, and more. A lack of clearly defined roles can lead to overall disorganization, burnout, resentment among staff and high employee turnover.
So how can you avoid this?
Of course it’s normal from time to time for employees of different jobs to help each other out–that’s not what we’re referring to. The danger comes in when there’s no proper hierarchy, from general managers to server assistants. Each person should have a clearly defined set of responsibilities so that they can be as efficient and effective as possible.
Ultimately the goal for everyone is to provide customers with the best food and experience. You can only do that when servers can focus on serving, bar staff can focus on bar duties, and hosts can seat customers and oversee tables. It’s key to running a well-functioning establishment.
If employee roles change, communication is key–don’t just expect people to do things outside their scope without any reason. Discuss expectations from the start with new hires, and ensure that there are employee guidebooks and operational manuals available that contain such information.
5. Have a backup plan for all contingencies
This includes being short staffed, for when people call in sick, for when it’s a rainy day and the patio has to be closed, and any other unexpected (or unwanted) situation arises. Laying out guidelines for what you and your staff need to do in unfortunate circumstances is the best way to prevent the situation from spiraling.
How to optimize back-of-house operations
Back-of-house operations include the kitchen, managerial office and communal break space. Front-of-house and back-of-house operations must work in harmony for a restaurant to be successful. In this section, we’ll discuss how you can streamline your behind-the-scenes workflows.
6. Implement standardized recipes
Standardizing your recipes makes for a much more consistent experience for your guests and a more organized kitchen. Even if you have a rotating menu, try to ensure all your recipes are standardized. Standardization includes naming the recipe, detailing the ingredients and their measurements, and providing thorough instructions along with other information including serving size and plating instructions.
Here’s a guide on how to standardize your recipes. When kitchen staff can reference these recipes, workflow will improve. Plus, it’s great for training purposes and can help inform the way you purchase and manage your inventory, potentially saving you money.
7. Keep an updated production schedule
One of the main duties of the kitchen manager is to create a production schedule. These schedules cover all the food preparation and planning for the week, including daily ingredient and recipe prep and assign different foodservice workers to complete these tasks. Production schedules are crucial for overviewing food preparation and assessing the resources that are required for dishes.
8. Utilize kitchen display systems
One way to manage orders effectively is by using a kitchen display system (KDS). It can save you time, money and space. A KDS allows kitchen staff to easily view orders, removing the need for kitchen printers, paper orders and tickets. An effective KDS reduces clutter and streamlines orders so the kitchen can manage them more efficiently. Servers can send orders via the POS right to the kitchen and focus on spending time with customers, while kitchen staff can complete orders in a timely and organized way.
Did you know? Lightspeed Restaurant’s Kitchen Display System allows you to group items by order and digitize your production centers.
9. Establish food safety and hygiene practices
Since you run a restaurant, you already abide by federal and state health and safety regulations. However, it never hurts to make sure you’re up to date on all food safety and hygiene practices. For instance, the Federal Drug Administration (FDA) releases a new Food Code model every year outlining food safety standards and how to establish proper protocol at your establishment. Food safety involves properly storing, preparing and handling food to decrease the risk of foodborne illnesses.
Train staff on hygiene practices and compliance
For US businesses, this FDA document is an excellent guide on how to follow and establish proper hygiene practices in your restaurant. Both BOH and FOH staff should be regularly trained on hygiene practices and how to comply to ensure you’re up to standard and that your restaurant isn’t presenting safety risks to customers. There are standardized online training programs you can implement to achieve this.
10. Conduct regular inventory audits
You probably already do this. But how efficient is your system for conducting inventory audits? An effective inventory audit can help you maximize inventory and cut costs. Usually these audits are conducted as part of your overall financial audit to ensure that physical inventory aligns with records. But overall, having a proper inventory management system can do wonders for your restaurant’s bottom line, and if you’re reading this article, it’s probably time for you to reassess. The system can help you avoid food wastage, spoilage or theft.
Did you know? Lightspeed’s inventory management feature can help you track and automate your inventory to eliminate manual stock counting and minimize food wastage.
11. Analyze menu profitability
To cut costs and streamline your menu, an in-depth analysis is key. Here’s what you should calculate as part of your analysis:
Portion costs of menu items
Food cost percentage
Menu item selling price
Markup margin
Projected food cost
All of these will provide you with enough information to determine the profitability of your menu items. You can adjust your offerings accordingly as a result, potentially saving money and resources in the process.
How to leverage technology to streamline restaurant operations
In this section, we’ll highlight some of the systems you can implement in your restaurant to streamline your operations.
12. Use a good point of sale system
Modern POS systems offer many benefits over legacy systems.
A POS system should be able to keep up with the demands of your restaurant. Choose a system that allows you to configure your menu, workflows and floor plan so your staff can easily take orders and view tables. Automatic, real-time transaction data and order updates should be fully accessible within your POS. It’s even better if servers can tap orders into the system right from the table using handheld devices rather than having to wait to input orders at a fixed POS.
Innovative POS systems allow employees to easily split bills and input orders by seat. Integrations like inventory management, analytics tools and kitchen display systems can make it easier than ever to manage your restaurant, from one system.
Lightspeed Restaurant delivers all these features, and more. Lightspeed merchant Recess, which serves up to 5000 customers on a Saturday, needed a POS that would help them keep up with consumer demand.
“The majority of our staff already have iPhones, so to train them on iPads takes no time at all. And knowing that there’s never a stop gap within the operation of the venue is a priceless return that they give to us. Lightspeed has done a great job of helping us overcome challenges by just creating a simplified product where we don’t have things we don’t need,” says associate director of operations Andrew Ketcham.
13. Simplify revenue streams with online ordering and delivery
Consumers nowadays have lots of choice when it comes to ordering food. There are so many delivery options at their fingertips, from UberEats to DoorDash. One way you can diversify your revenue streams while keeping your workflows simple is by using online ordering and delivery integrations. This involves syncing your menu with major delivery apps so you can easily expand your reach and increase revenue via new channels.
For example, with Lightspeed Delivery, orders from UberEats, DoorDash and more are sent straight to your POS.These types of integrations allow you to easily manage orders and track deliveries.
14. Utilize data analytics to make better business decisions
Data can be the driving force of profitability in your restaurant. A great POS and payments system will provide you with insights on menu performance, preferred payment methods, employee performance, popular items and much more. You can use these insights to fuel business decisions to make informed decisions. That includes doing things like prominently featuring popular menu items, implementing rewards programs and more.
These insights will allow you to analyze operational performance and areas for improvement. For example, if there’s one staple item on your menu that just hasn’t been performing well, you can save money on inventory by cutting the item and replacing it with something else.
How to create a strong team of employees
Your employees are the beating heart of your business. In this section, we’ll discuss tips for improving staff training and communication.
15. Implement ongoing training and development programs
When you implement new technology, take the time to train staff thoroughly. The same goes for any new procedures or processes that you’re putting in place, whether that’s about customer service or their workflows. Your staff should be up-to-date on any new procedures. As we mentioned earlier, updating your operational manual will also help with training.
It’s also important to nurture your employees’ skills. If they show interest in taking on more responsibilities and eventually moving to a new role, schedule them for a shadowing shift. You can even hold workshops with outside experts to teach employees new skills, such as new techniques in bartending. Talk to your employees about what they want out of their roles and what they’d like to achieve. Many people see the restaurant industry as a temporary place for themselves, but others are the opposite.
16. Make sure you’re communicating effectively
In any job, employees should feel safe expressing concerns and asking questions about their responsibilities. Working in hospitality can be overwhelming for both back-of-house and front-of-house staff, leading to high rates of burnout. The restaurant turnover rate continues to rise, and 62% of restaurant operators say they don’t have enough staff to meet customer demands, according to the National Restaurant Association.
Although it can be unavoidable in the industry, it’s important to listen to your employees about any issues they’re experiencing with workload, customer demand, scheduling and other aspects of the job. Promote open communication and take the time to hear out concerns. That can include through surveys, anonymous questionnaires, or by conducting constructive performance reviews that go both ways.
Open communication can go a long way in solving many of the problems you may be facing in your restaurant. By hearing out your employees, you can be proactive in addressing any identified problems. Doing this can only improve morale and incentivize staff to stay on the job longer.
How to keep improving and stay adaptable
As a business owner, you’re probably constantly checking the vitals of your business. Here are a couple of tips on how to keep improving as consumers and market trends change.
17. Conduct regular performance evaluations
Keep a strict schedule for monitoring your key performance indicators (KPIs) every week and month. Maintain detailed records of these indicators so you can compare your financial performance month-to-month. KPIs include:
Cash flow
Total sales
Cost of goods sold (COGs)
Profit margin
Employee turnover rate
All of this data, and any other operational metrics you calculate, will help you understand where your business is at any given point in terms of financial health.
18. Encourage staff input
Your staff are on the floor and in the kitchen every single day. They have the greatest insight into what day-to-day operations truly look like. Encourage them to provide feedback and ideas for improvement. This encourages an environment of openness and collaboration that benefits everyone.
19. Adapt to changing consumer tastes
Customer preferences change constantly. There’s no way to meet the needs of every customer, but it can certainly help to tap into market trends and make sure you’re in tune. Listening to customers is one way to stay competitive. Knowing how to adapt can benefit your business greatly, and usually you can find ways to stay true to your brand and offerings while ensuring you’re listening to customers.
20. Embrace innovation and new tech
We’ve talked a lot about technology throughout this post. Streamlining your operations is all about embracing the right technology in order to further your business. Legacy systems just don’t cut it anymore, and you’re doing your restaurant a disservice by sticking to old and outdated practices. In addition to saving you money, adopting better software and hardware will make your workflows much more efficient–and your employees will thank you for it.
Run your business better
We’ve covered a lot in this article. If you’ve made it this far, congrats! We hope you’ll find even just one of these tips useful for streamlining your day-to-day restaurant operations. If you run a successful restaurant, you’ve probably learned how to implement at least some of these recommendations already–but for a growing business, there’s always plenty to learn.
Are you looking for a system that can make your workflows more efficient? Talk to an expert about Lightspeed Restaurant POS and Payments today.
However, if you are looking for something more secure/powerful/managed and WordPress-specific, I would look elsewhere. Managed WordPress hosting offers distinct advantages over traditional shared web hosts.
These companies have in-house WordPress experts and have built their hosting system tailored to a WordPress site’s specific needs.
Let’s take a look at what the top-managed WordPress hosts offer:
WP Engine
Managed WordPress Hosting Compared wp engine
WP Engine is often described as the WordPress-managed hosting company everyone else wants to beat. They have a great following and an army of happy customers who sing their praises daily.
Here at WP Mayor, we currently host with Servebolt but have hosted many of our important sites with WP Engine and always worked well with them. Read our WP Engine review to learn more about our experience with WP Engine.
WPEngine is one of the earliest pioneers in WordPress-focused/specialized/optimized hosting and is still the largest in that category.
They offer features specifically for your basic WordPress needs. These include:
24/7 chat support on the basic plan (24/7 phone support for more advanced plans).
Automated SSL certificates & Global CDN.
Automated backups, one-click restores, and staging areas.
WPEngine also has a lot to offer on the enterprise tier. Run your website on Google Cloud Platform (GCP) and Amazon Web Service (AWS), as well as a dedicated clustered environment with redundant data centers, multi-zone availability, and load-balancing.
Brands like SoundCloud and WPBeginner rely on WPEngine for their hosting needs.
WP Engine Pricing Structure
Prices for signing up with WP Engine start at $35/month (for 1 site and up to 25,000 visits per month), which is a great deal when you consider all the goodies that deal packs. The Growth plan (previously known as the Professional plan) is an even better value at $115 (which includes hosting for 5 sites and maximum 100,000 visits per month), bringing down the cost per site drastically. WP Engine also offers a fantastic 60 day money back guarantee, which is the longest guarantee of its type that you can get from any managed WordPress host at the moment.
WP Engine has been a constant recommendation here on WP Mayor. Every website we have hosted with them has been smooth sailing all the way. Get 4 months free all annual (or 20% off monthly) shared…Show More
WP Engine has been a constant recommendation here on WP Mayor. Every website we have hosted with them has been smooth sailing all the way. Get 4 months free all annual (or 20% off monthly) shared hosting today. Starting at just $20/mo. Show Less
Some of our sites are hosted by Kinsta and the experience with them so far has been excellent, both in terms of hosting and support.
Although Kinsta is a relative newcomer in the market (started in 2013), it has quickly made a name for itself thanks to its affordable pricing and great overall performance. These features successfully attracted top clients such as Buffer, Ubisoft, and TripAdvisor.
Kinsta is well-suited for just about any type of hosting need because of basic must-haves that include free migrations, daily backups, state-of-the-art security, and a dashboard where you can view important website information at-a-glance, manage users, and access analytics.
All plans come with 24/7 expert support and staging environments where you can test out plugins and themes.
Kinsta offers enterprise hosting with the most affordable plans for this tier. Their most affordable enterprise hosting plan starts at $675/month, which includes 60 WordPress installs, 1 million visits, 100GB disk space, and unlimited bandwidth. Of course, you don’t have to be an enterprise business to benefit from all of the features that Kinsta has to offer.
Kinsta Pricing Structure
When using Kinsta as your web host, you’ll also have access to a range of add-ons that include Cloudflare Railgun, Elasticsearch, Redis, extra backups, and Nginx reverse proxy, among others. Note that Kinsta charges overage fees for when you exceed a certain number of website visits, or hit your CDN limits.
BionicWP is more than just a comprehensive managed WordPress hosting service; it’s a dedicated partner and an integral part of your team. This fully managed WordPress hosting platform is designed to cater to the needs of agency owners, freelancers, and businesses, providing a comprehensive suite of services that go beyond traditional hosting.
BionicWP’s mission is to take the burden of technical site management off your shoulders, allowing you to focus on your core business operations while they handle the rest.
One of the standout add-on features of BionicWP is the provision of unlimited edits. This unique service transforms BionicWP from a simple hosting provider into a bona fide team member. With unlimited edits, BionicWP takes on the role of a dedicated webmaster, handling everything from updating blog posts to swapping out images.
This means you can focus on creating great content and growing your business, while BionicWP takes care of the technical aspects of site maintenance. Speaking of technical aspects, take a look at the features below, it is obvious that BionicWP has you covered.
Site Management: BionicWP keeps your site’s core, theme, and plugins up-to-date through a manual process with verification, ensuring optimal performance and security.
Speed Optimization: The platform monitors site speed three times a week. If the site speed drops below its threshold, the BionicWP team jumps in and fixes it.
Security: BionicWP uses two different malware scanning software to keep your site safe. If your site ever gets hacked, they fix it for free.
1-Click Login: You can always log in via their platform, eliminating the need to remember client passwords.
On-Demand Resources: BionicWP offers scalable RAM & PHP Workers, ensuring your site is never restricted, even during peak traffic times.
Backups: The platform provides hourly and daily backups kept in the cloud on two different solutions, ensuring your data is always safe.
Unlimited Edits: BionicWP offers unlimited site edits for a flat fee, taking care of everything from blog updates to image swapping.
BionicWP offers a range of pricing options to cater to different needs and budgets. Here’s a summary of their pricing plans:
Lite Plan: Priced at $11.90 per month, the Lite Plan includes:
One Site per container
Daily Backups
Free SSL
Managed Updates
Daily Malware Scan
Bionic Speed
Speed Monitoring / Management
Speed & Secure Plan: Priced at $25.90 per month, the Speed & Secure Plan includes everything in the Lite Plan, providing enhanced speed and security features.
Secure Plan: Priced at $18.90 per month, the Secure Plan also includes all the features of the Lite Plan, with a focus on security.
All plans come with unlimited free hosting migrations and absolutely no hidden charges. They also provide 24/7 round-the-clock support, ensuring that you are never stuck with an issue that you cannot immediately work to resolve.
BionicWP’s pricing structure is designed to be flexible and affordable, allowing you to choose a plan that best fits your needs and budget. Whether you’re growing your business or just have one site, BionicWP has a plan for you.
BionicWP Pricing Structure
In essence, BionicWP is more than just a hosting provider. It’s a partner that works alongside you, helping you manage and grow your online presence. With BionicWP, you’re not just getting a place to host your website; you’re getting a dedicated team member committed to your success.
Since it was founded in 1997, Liquid Web has been a leader in managed VPS hosting, managed cloud hosting, and dedicated server hosting.
Liquid Web positions itself as a premium service in that it takes care of everything WordPress-related for you, down to the little details you may miss. From automatically issuing you SSL certificates and compressing your images to keep your site efficient, to automatic daily backups that can be stored off-site for safety and speed, Liquid Web has got you covered.
Not only that, Liquid Web supports both Linux and Windows servers, allowing you to oversee multiple sites at once. Liquid Web also includes WordPress site staging and quick 24/7 support (called “Heroic Support”).
Liquid Web Pricing Structure
On the downside, Liquid Web does not offer unlimited storage and monthly data transfers. Liquid Web does not offer any shared hosting plans because they target SMBs with sites, stores and applications, as well as websites for designers and developers. It’s no wonder that Liquid Web is used by top brands such as Home Depot, National Geographic, FILA, and Motorola.
Pricing plans for Managed WordPress hosting start at $19/month.
Like Kinsta, Pantheon is a relative newcomer on the scene. It started in 2010, and has built up an impressive list of clients including MIT, SendGrid, and Patagonia. According to their website, Pantheon is both your WordPress host and sysadmin all rolled into one — anything you need to build a WordPress site, they have and will take care of, for you.
Their enterprise-level solution claims to be the fastest and most scalable in the market due to its container-based infrastructure. Add to the fact that Pantheon is a “multi-tenant platform-as-a-service” where all client sites run on the same platform infrastructure via the Google Cloud Platform. They used to only offer hosting for Drupal websites but now offer Managed WordPress hosting, as well.
Pantheon’s strengths lie in their ‘dev’, ‘test’ and ‘live’ environments, and how they’re set up. These allow for direct development and version control, which allows you to perform accurate tests and ensures that the code you’re releasing performs consistently across all three stages. You can even manage security by controlling who on your team can push the website ‘live’, one of the tools on their Pro Dev Tools for Teams.
Pantheon Pricing Structure
All of Pantheon’s plans include:
Managed HTTPS.
Global CDN.
Automated backups.
24/7 chat support.
Managed site migrations.
Version control and workflow.
Pantheon’s hosting plans start at $29/month but prices can go as steep as $10,000 per year, depending on your needs. You can use their price calculator to determine your needs and related costs.
After thoroughly reviewing the offerings of all these WordPress managed hosting companies, I find at the most basic level, both WP Engine and BionicWP come highly recommended. However, if you’re seeking a hosting provider that goes beyond the basics and acts as a true team player or a reliable right hand, BionicWP stands out as the top choice.
WP Engine undoubtedly offers a great deal and is a well-known, tried and trusted option. On the other hand, BionicWP surpasses traditional hosting by offering a comprehensive suite of services tailored to agency owners, freelancers, and businesses. With BionicWP, you don’t just get a hosting provider; you gain a dedicated partner fully invested in your success.
The other companies also offer very good packages, so I recommend contacting each of the hosts above and asking any questions you may have to make an informed decision.
Their responses will give you a good idea of the level of support you can expect when you sign up. Each of these hosting options offers a different mix of features, providing you with a variety of choices.
What are your experiences with the hosts mentioned in this review?
WP Engine has been a constant recommendation here on WP Mayor. Every website we have hosted with them has been smooth sailing all the way. Get 4 months free all annual (or 20% off monthly) shared…Show More
WP Engine has been a constant recommendation here on WP Mayor. Every website we have hosted with them has been smooth sailing all the way. Get 4 months free all annual (or 20% off monthly) shared hosting today. Starting at just $20/mo. Show Less
Inventory is one of the largest expenses retailers incur. However, if you only think about the price of your inventory, you have an incomplete picture of how much you’re spending to stock up. To understand inventory costs, you need to factor in all the expenses related to ordering, storing, and managing stock.
But where do you start?
In this article, you’ll learn what inventory costs are and how to accurately calculate them to get a realistic overview of your inventory-related expenses. You’ll also learn the different types of costs associated with managing inventory, how to reduce inventory costs, and some common inventory cost mistakes to avoid.
What are inventory costs?
Inventory costs are the costs associated with ordering and holding inventory.Evaluating these costs is important to determine how much inventory should be kept on hand.
Inventory is the largest expense retailers have. For every dollar US retailers make, they have $1.40 of inventory in stock. When you have a holistic understanding of your inventory costs, you can control them more easily.
“Knowing inventory costs is extremely important because they affect the majority of decisions one makes as a retailer,” says Abir Syed, co-founder of ecommerce accounting firm UpCounting. “They influence pricing decisions because that affects your margin. They influence purchasing decisions because they affect how much cash you need to purchase a certain volume of inventory.”
Manage your inventory with confidence
Only Shopify POS helps you manage warehouse and retail store inventory from the same back office. Compare inventory costs to revenue, see which items are selling out or sitting on shelves, forecast demand, and more.
Types of inventory costs
Purchase costs
Ordering costs
Holding costs
Shortage costs
Inventory costs more than the product’s purchase price. You also need to factor ordering, holding, and shortage costs into the equation.
Purchase costs
Purchase cost is the price a supplier charges you to buy its products. For example, if you’re buying 100 pairs of sneakers from a footwear wholesaler at $12 a pair, your purchase cost is $1,200. This figure excludes expenses like processing, shipping, and handling fees.
Ordering costs
“Ordering costs include the labor expenses for the buying department, including wages, related taxes and benefits, and the costs of transporting and receiving inventory,” according to Frances Gunn, associate professor at Toronto Metropolitan University’s Ted Rogers School of Retail Management.
Let’s look at an example:
Imagine you own a fashion boutique that carries a line of designer handbags. The process of ordering these bags from your supplier would involve a series of expenses, all of which can be classified as ordering costs.
Purchasing department costs. If you have a buyer or an assistant who helps with purchasing products for your retail store, the salaries, benefits, and taxes associated with these employees would form a part of your ordering costs.
Transportation costs. The costs oftransporting the handbags from your supplier’s location to your store could involve charges such as freight or courier fees, import duties (if applicable), and insurance costs to protect against any damage or loss during transportation. These are all factored into ordering costs.
Receiving and inspecting costs. When the handbags arrive at your store, there are costs associated with receiving and inspecting the inventory. Your staff needs to spend time checking the delivered items against the purchase order, examining the quality, and arranging for any returns if necessary. The labor costs involved in these activities would also be included in your ordering costs.
Ordering costs vary depending on the retailer, but they encompass the expenses involved at every step of the procurement process, from placing an order with your supplier to receiving the items in your store. For this example, you could use the following formula:
Total ordering costs = Purchase department costs + [Number of orders per month x (Transportation costs + Receiving and inspecting costs)]
Let’s say you place five orders per month and your costs are as follows:
Purchase department costs = $3,000
Transportation costs = $200
Receiving and inspecting costs = $75
Total ordering costs = $3,000 + [5 x ($200 + $75)] = $4,375
It’s crucial to accurately account for these costs when calculating total inventory costs, as they can represent a significant portion of overall expenses.
Holding costs
“Holding costs include the cost of the space where inventory is held, the interest cost related to the inventory purchase funds, and the cost of inventory which is not used or damaged,” Frances explains.
This includes warehouse or storage rental costs and obsolescence costs related to liquidating inventory.Let’s use an example of a furniture store to illustrate inventory holding costs:
Storage costs
Let’s say your furniture store has a warehouse where you store your inventory. You rent this warehouse for $5,000 per month. This rental fee is a part of your holding costs.
Interest costs
Suppose you took out a business loan to purchase your inventory. The interest you pay on that loan is also a part of your holding costs. If the annual interest on your inventory loan is $2,400 (i.e., $200 per month), this is another component of your holding costs.
Inventory damage or obsolescence costs
Over time, some of your inventory might get damaged or become obsolete. For example, a chair could get scratched during handling, or a particular style of table might go out of fashion, forcing you to sell it at a discounted price. If you find that you lose an average of $1,000 per month to damaged goods and another $1,000 per month to discounts on obsolete items, these costs also contribute to your holding costs.
Adding all these costs together, your total holding costs would be:
Total holding costs = $5,000 (Storage) + $200 (Interest) + $1,000 (Damage) + $1,000 (Obsolescence) = $7,200 per month
Note: This is a simplified example. In reality, inventory holding costs might also include costs like insurance, taxes, and utilities associated with storing the inventory, and costs might fluctuate from month to month. But this gives you a basic understanding of how holding costs work in a retail environment.
Shortage costs
There are also expenses incurred when you don’t have enough inventory in stock. Any costs related to managing stockouts, such as payroll for your customer service team or expenses related to reordering, are considered shortage costs.
Let’s consider an example of an electronics store that sells high-demand items like smartphones. Shortage costs would come into play when there’s a stockout situation.
Customer service costs
Let’s say a new smartphone model launches, and you run out of stock due to high demand. As a result, your customer service team spends a lot of time answering customer inquiries, managing complaints, and updating customers about when the product will be back in stock. If you have two customer service employees who each spend an extra 10 hours a week dealing with stockout-related issues, and they earn $20 per hour, the additional customer service costs due to the stockout would be: 2 employees x (10 hours/week x $20/hour) = $400 per week.
Reordering costs
Additionally, you might incur rush shipping fees to replenish your stock as quickly as possible. If the rush shipping fee is $200 per order and you have to place two rush orders due to the stockout, that’s an additional $400 in costs.
Lost sales
This isn’t a direct cost, but it’s a significant consequence of stockouts. If you estimate that you lost 10 sales of the smartphone because of the stockout, and each smartphone would have given you a profit of $100, then you missed out on $1,000 in profits.
Adding these up, your total shortage costs would be:
Total shortage costs = Customer service costs + Reordering costs + Lost sales
Plugging in the numbers from the example:
Total shortage costs = $400 (Customer service) + $400 (Reordering) + $1,000 (Lost sales) = $1,800 per week
Note: This is a simplified example and doesn’t account for indirect costs like potential damage to your brand reputation or lost customers who may have switched to a competitor. But it does provide a basic understanding of how shortage costs can impact your retail business.
💡 PRO TIP: Try ship-to-customer order fulfillment to lower shortage costs associated with stockouts. Rather than being limited to selling products you have in stock, you can sell products in-store and ship them to customers from your warehouse or another store location that has inventory.
How to calculate inventory costs
The formula for calculating inventory costs at any given period is:
Calculating inventory costs is simple once you’ve gathered all these data points. Not sure where to find these figures? Check reports from your POS system, inventory management software, and payroll provider.
Note: While it’s not the formula we’re focusing on in this article, another inventory cost calculation that you may have seen is:
Let’s pretend you run a sneaker store and need to reorder inventory after a stockout during your anniversary sale.
Purchase costs
You need 100 pairs of sneakers. The supplier charges $12 per pair, which makes your purchasing costs $1,200.
Ordering costs
Your wholesaler is in China and charges $100 for express shipping to North America, which you need to fill backorders.
You need to hire a truck to transport the shipment from your store to your warehouse. Truck rental for three hours costs $60.
According to reports, payroll costs associated with recording this inventory totaled $200.
Combine all of those figures together and your total ordering costs are $360.
Holding costs
You pay $800 each month for your warehouse. This sneaker order represents one-tenth of your total inventory, and your inventory days on hand is 30 days. Therefore, your holding costs are $80.
Shortage costs
This shipment is a reorder because you sold out of these sneakers during your sale, so there are shortage costs associated with it. Your main expense was payroll for your customer service and marketing teams, who fielded customer questions about the stockout. That cost your business $400.
When we add our purchase costs ($1,200), ordering costs ($360), holding costs ($80), and shortage costs ($400) together, we discover that our total inventory costs for this shipment of sneakers is $2,040.
“When continuously monitored, inventory costs can be adjusted, thereby reducing their impact on profits,” Frances says.
The better you understand your inventory costs, the more control you have over them, and the more you can improve your margins. You can follow these tips to reduce your total inventory costs:
Leverage data for accurate forecasting
When you rely on data and demand forecasting, you’ll be able to avoid overstocking and stockouts and their associated costs.
“With the new data analytics tools that we have available, you can do a very good job of understanding how demand works,” says Javad Nasiry, associate professor at McGill University’s Desautels Faculty of Management.
Find the right balance between purchasing, ordering, and storage costs
Finding the sweet spot between purchasing, ordering, and storage costs can help you reduce inventory costs.
One way to reduce purchasing and ordering costs is to order larger volumes of inventory.
“If you make bigger purchases, that will usually lead to volume discounts. And bigger purchases can often mean big savings on shipping too,” Abir says.
Think about it: As a consumer, you can usually get free shipping by spending a minimum amount or by committing to a subscription. Suppliers can offer retailers similar discounts.
There are other ways to save money on inventory.
However, it may not always be in your best interest to order a high volume of inventory from a supplier.
“When you are buying inventory, your money is tied to inventory that is sitting in the warehouse,” Javad says. “You are paying something to buy these products, and your customers are going to later pay you for those products.”
Javad suggests using a strategic plan to purchase only the inventory you need so you can use money that would otherwise go toward purchasing and storing inventory for other projects that will grow your business.
With more inventory, your storage costs go up. So you need to find the sweet spot between how much inventory you order and how much you keep in storage.
If you’re ordering inventory from halfway around the world, there are additional considerations. “You will have to arrange for either air freight or maybe an ocean container, so your ordering cost may be high, Javad says. “The higher that cost is, the more you will be inclined to order a higher volume, because you want to avoid incurring that cost again and again.”
However, Javad says that if the supplies are produced nearby, they may have a lower inventory ordering cost. That might push you to order more often. So, in this scenario, you’ll spend less on ordering costs and more on storage costs.
5 Free Templates to Better Understand Your Inventory
Calculate your businesses cost of goods sold, sell through rate, inventory turnover, saftey stock, economic order quantity, or reorder point with ease using these custom templates. (No math required!)
Get your Inventory Templates delivered right to your inbox.
Almost there: please enter your email below to gain instant access.
We’ll also send you updates on new educational guides and success stories from the Shopify newsletter. We hate SPAM and promise to keep your email address safe.
Thanks for downloading. You’ll receive your free templates soon. In the meantime, start building your store with a free 3-day trial of Shopify.
Optimize storage costs
“Inventory costs can also be reduced by ensuring that inventory space is not in a costly location, is well-organized, is efficiently used, and is properly maintained to reduce obsolescence costs,” Frances says.
Instead of choosing a warehouse that’s near your store, consider using one in a more affordable area, even if it’s a half an hour away. Justify the distance by making fewer trips.
If you follow best practices for storing your inventory, you’ll be able to reduce the risk of spoilage.
Leverage auto replenishment
“I am a huge proponent of auto replenishment,” says Nilesh Mehta, founder of Independence Bridge Consulting. “By defining products that need to remain stocked and associating the minimum quantity available, businesses can save themselves headaches and save valuable time by putting reordering on auto-pilot.”
To take advantage of auto replenishment, calculate reorder points for your inventory and set up recurring orders. If your vendors only accept manual orders, consider switching to one that lets you automate repetitive processes.
💡 PRO TIP: Want to take the guesswork out of restocking? Set reorder points in Shopify Admin to get low stock notifications and ensure you have enough lead time to replenish inventory of a product before quantities reach zero.
Increase your inventory turnover rate
The longer you hold onto inventory, the more you need to spend on storage costs. Calculate your inventory turnover rate to better understand how quickly you’re selling inventory. Knowing this figure can help you set benchmarks and help you gauge which products are performing well and which ones are struggling. Use this data to make decisions about pricing, promotions, and inventory order volumes.
For example, let’s say you run a bike store. After calculating inventory turnover rate for all of the bike models you sell, you realize that children’s bikes sell more slowly than adult bikes. With these insights, you decide to pause orders on new kids’ bikes and create family bike bundles to incentivize sales of your existing stock.
Get rid of dead stock
If you calculate your inventory turnover rate and find some products just aren’t selling, you have dead stock on your hands. Get rid of dead stock by discounting it or making an in-kind donation in exchange for a tax write-off.
You can deduct up to half the difference between the selling price and cost of goods sold (COGS), as long as it doesn’t exceed twice the COGS.
Let’s say you purchase a piece of inventory for $10 and sell it for $30. The difference between the COGS ($10) and selling price ($30) is $20. Because half of $20 is $10, which doesn’t exceed it twofold, you can deduct $20 for the item for tax purposes.
Making an in-kind donation can help you reduce losses on dead stock.
10 inventory cost mistakes to avoid
Miscalculating carrying costs: Carrying costs, including expenses like storage, insurance, and depreciation, are frequently underestimated by retailers. When they’re miscalculated, the total inventory cost can be significantly skewed, which can lead to poor decision making. Diligently calculate carrying costs, considering all the associated factors and regularly update these figures, as costs may fluctuate.
Ignoring the cost of dead stock:Dead stock—items that have been in inventory for a long period without being sold—can silently drain your finances. Paying to store and manage these items, only for them not to generate any income, leads to increased inventory costs. Regularly reviewing your inventory and identifying products that are not moving can help avoid this mistake.
Neglecting supplier cost variations: In the retail business, it’s common for supplier costs to vary. Neglecting to account for these fluctuations can result in inaccurate inventory cost calculations. Regular communication with suppliers and keeping track of price changes are crucial steps for accurate inventory management.
Overlooking the cost of damaged goods: Goods can be damaged during handling, storage, or transport, and failing to account for these losses can lead to significant cost mistakes. Make sure you have a proper system in place for tracking and recording damaged goods, ensuring these costs are accounted for in your total inventory costs.
Inaccurate stock counts: Retailers sometimes underestimate the importance of accurate stock counts. Any discrepancies between actual and recorded inventory can lead to miscalculations in inventory costs. Regular physical counts and reconciliations with recorded inventory can help avoid this mistake.
Failing to factor in the cost of stockouts: Stockouts, or instances where you run out of a particular product, have indirect costs that are often overlooked. These costs can include lost sales, tarnished reputation, and increased administrative work. It’s important to factor these costs into your inventory management strategy.
Overstocking: While having enough inventory is crucial, overstocking can lead to increased costs through extra storage, handling, and potential spoilage or obsolescence. Inventory forecasting and just-in-time (JIT) strategies can help prevent overstocking.
Not considering seasonal fluctuations: Seasonal fluctuations can significantly impact inventory costs, and failure to account for these can result in mistakes. Adjust your inventory forecasts and stock levels according to seasonal demand patterns to ensure accurate cost calculations.
Ignoring shrinkage costs: Shrinkage, the loss of products due to theft, fraud, or error, can considerably affect inventory costs. Retailers often overlook this aspect, leading to significant cost miscalculations. It’s crucial to implement strategies for shrinkage reduction and factor these costs into inventory cost calculations.
Inefficient inventory management systems: An outdated or inefficient inventory management system can lead to numerous errors and increased costs. Inaccurate data, missed sales opportunities, and poor forecasting are all potential outcomes of a poor system. Invest in modern, comprehensive inventory management systems to ensure cost-effective inventory handling.
💡 PRO TIP:Shopify POS comes with tools to help you control and manage your inventory across multiple store locations, your online store, and warehouse. Forecast demand, set low-stock alerts, create purchase orders, know which items are selling or sitting on shelves, count inventory, and more.
Get control of your inventory costs
Inventory costs comprise more than just purchasing costs. When you know your ordering, holding, and shortage costs, you should have a holistic understanding of the true price of storing and managing stock. This knowledge can help you gain control over this major business expense.
Additional research and content from Alexis Damen.
Unify your inventory management with Shopify
Only Shopify POS helps you manage warehouse and retail store inventory from the same back office. Shopify automatically syncs stock quantities as you receive, sell, return, or exchange products online or in store—no manual reconciling necessary.
Inventory costs FAQ
What is the meaning of inventory costs?
Inventory costs refer to the expenses associated with holding and storing inventory. These costs include the cost of materials, labor, handling, and storage of inventory, as well as any taxes, financing, and insurance associated with inventory.
Why are inventory costs important?
Inventory costs are critical, as they directly affect the profitability of your retail business. Proper management of inventory costs can help maintain healthy cash flow, increase profits, and avoid stockouts or overstock situations.
How can technology help manage inventory costs?
Technology that has inventory management features (like Shopify POS), can help you accurately track inventory levels, forecast demand, automate reordering processes, and provide valuable data insights, helping to optimize inventory costs.
What are the 4 inventory costs?
Acquisition costs: These are the costs associated with purchasing and receiving inventory items.
Holding costs: These are the costs associated with storing and maintaining inventory items.
Ordering costs: These are the costs associated with ordering and preparing inventory items for sale.
Stockout costs: These are the costs associated with not having the inventory items available when customers want them.
22 Restaurant KPIs to Track: A Guide on Restaurant Metrics for Owners and Managers
The right ingredients to running a successful restaurant aren’t just on your menu—they can also be found by tracking the right metrics, aka your key performance indicators (KPIs).
Restaurant KPIs are something that every owner and or manager should keep an eye on. Identifying and monitoring the right metrics enables you to make smarter business decisions that ultimately lead to more streamlined operations and a higher bottom line.
In many cases, tracking your restaurant metrics can alert you of potential problems before they become bigger issues.
The question is, which KPIs for restaurants are the right ones for your business?
In this article, we’ll shed light on some of the most important restaurant KPIs to keep an eye on. From restaurant profit margins to customer satisfaction and employee productivity, we’ll break down each metric, their significance and how to effectively track them.
The future of hospitality
Find out how you can prepare your restaurant for short and long-term success this year.
Revenue and profitability metrics
Tracking revenue and profitability metrics provide a clear snapshot of your restaurant’s financial health, indicating its ability to generate income and manage costs. These metrics help identify profit-drivers and expense leaks, paving the way for strategic decision-making and sustainable growth.
1. Gross profit margin
Gross profit margin is the percentage of total sales revenue that your restaurant retains after direct costs of producing the goods or services (like food and labor costs). A higher gross profit margin indicates a more financially efficient operation.
How to calculate gross profit margin
The formula for gross profit margin is: Gross Profit Margin = (Gross Profit / Total Sales Revenue) * 100
This means you need to first subtract the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) from your total sales revenue. This will give you the Gross Profit. Next, divide this Gross Profit by the Total Sales Revenue.
2. Net profit margin
Your restaurant’s net profit margin shows how much of each dollar earned is converted into profit after all expenses. This restaurant KPI incorporates not just the cost of food and labor, but all operational costs—making it an essential tool for understanding your true bottom line.
How to calculate net profit margin
The formula for net profit margin is: Net Profit Margin = (Net Profit / Total Sales Revenue) * 100
Subtract Total Expenses (which includes COGS, labor costs, overhead costs and other operating expenses) from Total Sales Revenue. This gives you the Net Profit. Then, follow the formula above to find your net profit margin.
3. Average covers
Average covers represent the average number of customers served per day or per service (like breakfast, lunch, or dinner). Tracking your covers enables you to identify traffic trends and demand patterns. That way, you can staff your restaurant and manage your inventory in a way that maximizes service quality and profitability.
How to calculate average covers
The formula to use is: Average Cover = Total Sales / Total Number of Customers Served
By dividing your total sales by the total number of customers served, you gain insight into spending patterns and can better strategize menu pricing, promotional activities and upselling techniques to boost revenue.
The Sales > Covers report shows your cover data to specific time periods, so you can get an idea of the average party sizes at your restaurant.
You can also check out the Servers > Covers report, which can help you see how your employees’ performance ranks across shifts, positions and menu category types based on the average amount an employee has sold per cover.
4. Cost of goods sold (COGS)
COGS would be the direct costs associated with producing the goods sold by a restaurant—typically, food and beverage costs. Keeping an eye on COGS helps you manage restaurant inventory efficiently and price menu items profitably.
How to calculate COGS
Calculating the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) for a restaurant can be done with the following formula: COGS = Opening Inventory + Purchases – Closing Inventory
Here’s a breakdown of the terms:
Opening Inventory: The value of your stock (food and beverage) at the beginning of the accounting period.
Purchases: All additional stock bought during this period.
Closing Inventory: The value of the stock that remains unsold at the end of the accounting period.
5. Food cost percentage
Another key profitability indicator, food cost percentage represents the portion of total sales revenue spent on food ingredients. If you’re looking to assess the cost-effectiveness of your menu items and keep your pricing strategy in check, this is a key metric to monitor.
How to calculate food cost percentage
The formula is: Food Cost Percentage = (Food Cost / Selling Price) * 100
For example, if a dish costs $5 to make and is sold for $20, the Food Cost Percentage would be (5 / 20) * 100 = 25%. This percentage helps you determine if a dish is priced appropriately considering the cost of the ingredients.
6. Cash flow
Cash flow is the net amount of cash and cash-equivalents moving in and out of your restaurant business. This restaurant KPI is crucial for assessing your business’ liquidity, solvency and overall financial health.
How to calculate cash flow
The general formula for cash flow is Cash Flow = Cash Inflows – Cash Outflows
In other words, it’s money in minus money out. If the result is positive, your business has a positive cash flow, which means more cash is coming into the business than going out. If it’s negative, the business has a negative cash flow, indicating that more cash is going out than coming in.
That being said, cash flow is not the same as profitability. A profitable business can still struggle if their cash flow is negative due to timing differences between inflows and outflows. That’s why it’s so crucial to monitor this restaurant metric.
7. Prime costs
Prime costs encapsulate the two most significant expenses for a restaurant: the cost of goods sold (COGS) and labor costs. Closely monitoring your prime costs allows you to manage goods and labor more effectively, so you can ensure that you become (and stay) profitable.
How to calculate prime costs
Calculating Prime Costs involves adding up two major expense categories: the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) and Total Labor Costs.
Here’s the formula: Prime Cost = COGS + Total Labor Costs
COGS includes the costs of all the ingredients used in preparing the food and beverages sold. Total Labor Costs include all costs related to your employees, such as wages, benefits and payroll taxes.
8. Average check size
Also known as average ticket size, the average check size measures the average amount spent by customers on each transaction at your establishment. This restaurant metric provides insight into customer spending behavior and menu pricing effectiveness. By analyzing and optimizing the average check size, you can strategically implement upselling or cross-selling techniques to drive more revenue per customer.
How to calculate average check size
Calculating the Average Check Size is pretty straightforward.
Here’s the formula: Average Check Size = Total Sales / Number of Transactions
In this equation, Total Sales refers to the total revenue your restaurant has generated in a specific period, while the number of Transactions is the total number of bills issued to customers during that same period.
9. Break-even point
The break-even point is a critical financial metric indicating the minimum amount of revenue your restaurant needs to cover its total costs—both fixed and variable. It offers a clear target for financial sustainability, informing restaurateurs of how much they need to sell to start making a profit.
How to calculate break-even point
Here’s the formula for calculating the break-even point:
Break-Even Point (in units) = Total Fixed Costs / (Selling Price per Unit – Variable Cost per Unit)
Let’s say you own a restaurant, and you’ve calculated the following costs:
Total Fixed Costs per month (like rent, insurance, salaries): $10,000
Average Selling Price per meal: $20
Average Variable Cost per meal (like food ingredients, utilities): $5
This means you need to sell approximately 667 meals in a month to break even. Any meals sold beyond this number would generate a profit.
Operational and performance metrics
The best restaurants are the ones that run like a well-oiled machine, and achieving that entails monitoring the right operational metrics. Restaurant KPIs like RevPASH, table turnover, food waste, etc. can show you how efficient you are with your time and resources. This, in turn, will help you streamline your restaurant operations.
So, let’s take a closer look at these operational and performance metrics and how you can improve.
10. Revenue per available seat hour (RevPASH)
RevPASH measures the revenue generated for each seat in your establishment per hour. Tracking RevPASH makes it easy to understand your efficiency in turning tables and optimizing seat utilization, ultimately helping you maximize sales, improve service delivery and enhance customer experience.
How to calculate RevPASH
Revenue Per Available Seat Hour is calculated using the following formula: RevPASH = Total Revenue / (Number of Seats x Opening Hours)
Here’s what each component means:
Total Revenue refers to the total sales your restaurant has generated in a specific period.
Number of Seats is the total seating capacity of your restaurant.
Opening Hours would be to the total number of hours your restaurant was open and serving customers in the same period.
Here’s an example: suppose your total revenue for a day was $20,000, your restaurant has 50 seats, and it was open for 10 hours, then: RevPASH = $20,000 / (50 seats x 10 hours) = $40
This means that each seat in your restaurant generated an average of $40 per hour on that day.
11. Turn time or table turnover
Turn time, also known as table turnover, measures the average amount of time a customer spends at a table from the moment they’re seated until they leave.
This KPI is a must for understanding how your restaurant manages its seating capacity.Turn time also impacts the number of covers served and how much revenue you generate.
How to calculate table turnover
The formula for table turnover or turn time is:
Turn Time = Total Dining Time of All Parties / Number of Parties
For instance, if over the course of an evening you had 20 parties dine at your restaurant and the total combined dining time was 40 hours, then:
Turn Time = 40 hours / 20 parties = 2 hours
This means, on average, each table is turned over every 2 hours.
12. Inventory turnover ratio
Inventory turnover refers to the number of times inventory is sold or used over a given period. A high turnover can indicate solid menu engineering and waste control, Meanwhile, if your turnover is low, it could mean facing overstocking or issues.
How to calculate inventory turnover ratio
You need two pieces of information to calculate your restaurant’s inventory turnover ratio: the Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) and the Average Inventory value.
Here’s the formula: Inventory Turnover Ratio = COGS / Average Inventory
For instance, if your COGS for a month was $20,000 and your average inventory value for that month was $5,000, then: Inventory Turnover Ratio = $20,000 / $5,000 = 4
This means you sold and replaced your inventory four times during that month. The higher the ratio, the more frequently you’re selling through your inventory, which is generally positive as it indicates fresher ingredients and lower holding costs.
Just note that if the ratio is too high, you may be at risk of running out of items and losing sales, so it’s all about finding the right balance for your specific restaurant.
13. Total sales by server
This restaurant KPI tracks the total revenue generated by each server in your restaurant. Tracking sales by server makes it easy to spot top performers. It also helps you identify additional training needs.
When you understand the sales abilities of each server, you and your managers can better assign shifts, balance workload and design incentive schemes to motivate staff and maximize sales.
How to calculate total sales by server
Like the other metrics in this guide, most POS systems can track this for you. However, if you need to calculate it manually, you can use the formula:
Total Sales by Server = Sum of All Sales Made by a Specific Server
For instance, if Server A worked 3 shifts in a week, and they made $500 in sales in the first shift, $600 in the second and $700 in the third, then: Total Sales by Server A = $500 + $600 + $700 = $1800
This means Server A generated $1800 in sales for that week. By comparing this to the sales made by other servers, you can identify who your top performers are, as well as who may need extra employee training.
If you’re looking for better ways to gain insights into the performance of your servers, you can use a solution like Lightspeed Restaurant, which offers several server-centric reports that you can filter and compare.
A commonly used report is the Checks report, which sheds light on employees performance across shifts, positions, and menu category types based on the average amount an employee has sold per check.
You can even filter the report by shift, menu item category, or position and drill down on specific restaurant metrics.
14. Food waste
Restaurant food waste tells you the amount of food that’s purchased but ends up not being consumed by customers. This can be due to spoilage, over-preparation, or plate waste.
How to calculate food waste
Calculating food waste in a restaurant can be a bit tricky, as it requires tracking various elements from kitchen waste to plate waste. You’ll need to consider the following factors:
Kitchen waste
Plate waste
Spoilage
Once you’ve tracked these elements over a certain period, you can add them together to get your total food waste:
This should give you a clear starting point to determine how you can reduce waste in your restaurant. Doing so not only saves money but is also an important part of running a sustainable restaurant.
Customer and guest metrics
Aside from tracking your financial and operational metrics, you’ll also want to look into customer-centric KPIs for your restaurant. That way, you can understand your restaurant’s performance from your patrons’ perspective.
15. Foot traffic or guest count
Want an easy way to measure your restaurant’s popularity? Then your foot traffic (or guest count) is a good KPI to start with.
This KPI also helps you identify busy times, so you can schedule the right staff at the most optimal periods. Plus, your foot traffic or guest count offers insights into the effectiveness of marketing campaigns and seasonal trends, so you can plan and forecast accordingly.
How to calculate foot traffic or guest count
In some cases, your POS can track this for you. You can also consider people counters to track your foot traffic. However, if you’re doing it manually, you or your staff will need to count the number of customers who come into your restaurant over a specific period (a day, a week, a month, etc.).
For example, if you had 75 customers come in on Monday, 85 on Tuesday and 90 on Wednesday, your foot traffic for those three days would be:
From there, you can choose to compare it with previous time periods (such as the same period last year) and get an indication of whether your traffic is improving or not.
16. Customer satisfaction score (CSAT)
CSAT isn’t a restaurant-specific metric, but it’s a good KPI to track nonetheless. That’s because it tells you where your customers are at in terms of satisfaction with your restaurant.
How to calculate CSAT
To calculate the Customer Satisfaction Score (CSAT), follow these steps:
Survey your customers, asking them to rate their satisfaction with your restaurant on a scale. Typically, this is a scale from 1 to 5 or 1 to 10, with higher scores indicating greater satisfaction.
Collect the scores from all the respondents.
Determine the percentage of customers who gave a score of 4 or 5 (if using a 5-point scale), or 9 or 10 (if using a 10-point scale).
The formula to calculate CSAT is:
CSAT (%) = (Number of Satisfied Customers (4 and 5 ratings) / Total Number of Survey Responses) * 100
For instance, if 80 out of 100 survey respondents gave you a score of 4 or 5, your CSAT score would be:
CSAT (%) = (80 / 100) * 100 = 80%
This means that 80% of your customers reported being satisfied with their experience.
17. Walk-ins vs. reservations
If your restaurant takes reservations, comparing the ratio of walk-ins vs. reservations can provide insights into your business’ operations and customer behavior. It can shed light on partners around dining preferences and can even inform decisions around staffing, table management and marketing strategies.
How to calculate walk-ins vs reservations
An easy way to surface this restaurant KPI is to:
Add up the number of customers who made reservations and dined at your restaurant in a specific period (a day, week, month, etc.).
Add up the number of customers who walked in without a reservation in the same period.
Then to calculate the ratio, divide the number of walk-ins by the number of reservations:
Walk-ins vs. Reservations Ratio = Number of Walk-Ins / Number of Reservations
For instance, if you had 60 walk-ins and 40 reservations on a given day, the ratio would be:
Walk-ins vs. Reservations Ratio = 60 / 40 = 1.5
This means you had 1.5 walk-ins for every reservation. This data can come in handy for forecasting staffing needs, adjusting reservation policies and optimizing table turnover.
18. No-shows
Another metric for restaurants that take reservations, the no-shows metric tracks the number of customers who made a reservation but didn’t turn up. A high rate of no-shows can significantly impact your restaurant’s operations and revenue, as you could have turned away potential customers expecting the reserved seats to be filled.
Depending on your no-show rate, you can consider policies around deposit requirements or try overbooking strategies to mitigate the impact of no-shows.
How to calculate no-shows
To calculate the No Show Rate, you can use the following formula:
No Show Rate (%) = (Number of No Shows / Total Number of Reservations) * 100
For example, if you had 100 reservations in a week, and 10 of those resulted in no-shows, your No Show Rate would be:
No Show Rate (%) = (10 / 100) * 100 = 10%
This means that 10% of your total reservations for that week were no-shows.
19. Cancellation rate
While not as bad as no-shows, a high cancellation rate can mean potential loss in revenue and disruption in planning. That’s why you’ll want to keep a close eye on this restaurant metric. It enables you to better manage your reservations, reevaluate booking policies and anticipate fluctuations in service demand.
How to calculate cancellation rate
The formula for cancellation rate is
Cancellation Rate (%) = (Number of Canceled Reservations / Total Number of Reservations) * 100
For example, if you had 200 reservations in a month, and 20 of those were canceled, your Cancellation Rate would be:
Cancellation Rate (%) = (20 / 200) * 100 = 10%
This means that 10% of your total reservations for that month were canceled.
Technology and digital metrics
Tracking tech-related and digital metrics is vital if you want to adapt to the digital landscape and meet the expectations of modern guests. When you add these metrics to your list of restaurant KPIs, you can optimize your online presence, improve the customer experience and stay competitive in the digital era.
20. Online reservation rate
The online reservation rate measures the percentage of reservations made through online booking platforms or your restaurant’s website. It helps you evaluate the effectiveness of your online reservation system, assess customer preferences and make data-driven decisions to optimize the booking process.
How to calculate the reservation rate
Calculating the reservation rate involves comparing the number of reservations made to the total number of available seats or tables in a given period. Here’s how to calculate it:
Reservation Rate = (Number of Reservations / Total Number of Available Seats or Tables) * 100
For example, if you had 50 reservations made for 100 available seats in a day, the reservation rate would be:
Reservation Rate = (50 / 100) * 100 = 50%
So essentially, about half of your available seats were reserved for that day.
21. Sales from online ordering
If you have your own online ordering system or you’re on platforms like DoorDash and Uber Eats, you’ll want to keep an eye on the revenue generated through these digital platforms. It helps you evaluate the success of your online/mobile ordering channels, measure customer adoption and optimize your ordering processes to capture a larger share of the market.
How to calculate sales from online ordering
Calculating sales from online ordering involves summing up the total revenue generated through online orders over a specific period.
Here’s how to calculate it: Sum up the total revenue generated from these online orders.
This total revenue represents your sales from online ordering. So, if your online ordering platform recorded $5,000 in sales during a month, then your sales from online ordering for that month would be $5,000.
22. Online ratings and reviews
Tracking your restaurant’s ratings and reviews across platforms like Yelp and Google allows you to monitor your reputation, gather customer insights and address feedback.
From there, tally the number of ratings and reviews received within a specific period, such as a week, month, or year. Next, analyze the overall rating based on the average score or star rating given by customers.
This can be calculated by summing up all the ratings and dividing by the total number of reviews.
For example, if you received 50 reviews with an average rating of 4.5 stars, your overall rating would be 4.5 stars.
Final words on restaurant KPIs and and tracking restaurant metrics
Embracing a data-driven approach empowers you to adapt to changing market dynamics, meet customer expectations and position your establishments for long-term success in the competitive hospitality industry.
Remember, you can’t make great decisions without the right info and the only way to get that intel is to track your restaurant metrics, aka restaurant KPIs.
Need help doing just that? Lightspeed Restaurant offers Advanced Insights that go beyond traditional sales reports. Advanced Insights turns data into actionable steps that help you make better business decisions.
How did WPMU DEV compare against other WordPress leaders in the areas of Managed Hosting, Web Hosting, and WordPress Site Management for the Spring 2023 quarter?
Managed Hosting user satisfaction rankings (Spring 2023)
Summary
WPMU DEV, along with Kinsta, tops 3 of the 5 G2 user satisfaction categories shown above, including an amazing 99% for Quality of Support, which we’re pretty chuffed about.
Web Hosting user satisfaction rankings (Spring 2023)
Summary
WPMU DEV and Kinsta each ranked highest for the various G2 user satisfaction categories shown above. Notably, WPMU DEV topped Quality of Support here with another 99% score.
WordPress Site Management overall grid rankings (Spring 2023)
User satisfaction rankings (Spring 2023)
WordPress Site Management user satisfaction rankings (Spring 2023)
Summary
WPMU DEV is the clear winner in all of G2’s WordPress Site Management categories shown above. Not much more to say, other than to brush the non-existent dust off our shoulders.
We take our members’ feedback and suggestions seriously and we provide 24×7 expert support to deal with any issues you may experience.
If you are unhappy with any aspect of our services or have suggestions for improvement, please tell us. And if you are delighted, please leave a review.
To see how our performance stacks up against other WordPress leaders, go here: How We Compare
To see what new and exciting WPMU DEV developments are coming up next, check out our roadmap.
Not a WPMU DEV member yet? Then experience our award-winning services and become a member today…it’s 100% risk-free!
An ecommerce platform that enables you to build, manage, and grow an online business, Shopify has quickly become one of the top ecommerce solutions out there. The top player in the ecommerce field is known for its easy-to-use user interface, robust ecommerce capabilities, and extensive theme and app selection, making it the ideal choice for entrepreneurs that want a website that can give their brand a strong online presence.
However, simply building a Shopify website doesn’t always guarantee success. To maximize your online brand’s potential on Shopify, you must stay on top of your site’s performance and conversion rate. This is where CRO or Conversion Rate Optimization Audits come into play.
In this article, we’re going to introduce to you the concept of Conversion Rate Optimization and the benefits of auditing and optimizing your online business for better conversions.
At Ecommerce Pro, we help online businesses scale. Get your website audited by Trusted Experts within just 48 hours. Learn more about Website Audits.
What is a Conversion Rate Optimization Audit?
A Conversion Rate Optimization Audit, also known as a CRO audit, is a totally comprehensive evaluation of your website and the consumer experience as they go through the sales funnel. An audit’s objective is to locate any technical or usability issues that might be impeding your website’s ability to convert more customers.
CRO audits are conducted in order to find systematic ways in improving your website’s performance based on data. The findings of a CRO audit are made to enhance your online store’s performance and increase the percentage of site visitors who convert or take desired actions, such as completing a purchase, downloading your ebook, or signing up for your newsletter.
By taking data-driven steps to optimize your conversion rates, you’ll be able to maximize the value of your existing site traffic and enhance the overall profitability of your Shopify website.
A CRO audit is a valuable step to improving the performance of your Shopify store. Below we get into detail regarding the benefits of a thorough website audit:
1. Determine Conversion Barriers
The primary reason for Shopify store owners to turn to CRO audits is that it helps you uncover the less obvious obstacles that prevent your site visitors from converting into paying customers. By using your site’s data, we can identify barriers, and make highly targeted and effective changes that remove friction and increase conversion rates, ultimately optimizing your online store, and making it far more profitable.
2. Data-Driven Decision Making
Without analyzing data, you end up making decisions for your website blindly. A CRO audit provides you with valuable insight into your website’s performance using your site’s data. The audit will not only analyze your site visitor’s behavior on the surface level but will also identify trends, helping you understand further how visitors are interacting with your Shopify website at every turn and stage of the buyer’s journey. This will enable you to determine points of friction and where improvements can be made.
The data that comes from a CRO audit is what you will use to make informed decisions that will change your website for the better, optimizing it for overall user experience and improved conversion rates.
3. Improve Marketing Efforts
Not only does a CRO audit improve your website, but it also optimizes your marketing efforts by assessing how effective your campaigns, landing pages, and offers are. Ultimately, the goal here is to completely align your marketing efforts with your conversion goals and ensure a cohesive customer journey that leads to better conversion rates for your online business as a whole.
4. Build Customer Trust
Building a relationship based on trust and confidence between customer and brand is invaluable for every online business, and a CRO audit can help brands identify these trust-building opportunities. By determining the necessary gaps in trust-building, and integrating customer evaluations, trust badges, safe payment methods, transparent return policies, and other methods, you can dispel any doubts harbored by customers that is stopping them from converting and easily persuade them to complete a purchase with you.
5. Continuous Improvements
At the end of the day, the biggest benefit that a CRO audit can give you is a chance for continuous, data-driven improvements. A CRO audit is not just a one-time process, instead, it is the foundation for a roadmap to ongoing improvements that will help you continuously optimize your Shopify store and online brand, helping you stay ahead and adapt to the needs of your online customers.
The Bottom Line
The process of improving conversion rates starts with a thorough Conversion Rate Optimization audit.
A website audit’s main objective is to identify first and foremost any unknown issues that might be costing you sales rather than to immediately enhance conversions. Once these barriers have been identified, you can move forward in improving your website with data-driven decision-making.
When it comes to CRO audits, data is the single most crucial element for a conversion optimization campaign to be effective. After the shortcomings of your site are determined, you can then prioritize the issues that need to be fixed to enhance the user experience and, ultimately, to improve the conversion rate and profitability of your online store.
Learn more about our website auditing checklist from our article by Ecommerce Pro, Shopify Experts.
Ecommerce Pro Shopify Website Audit
Want to improve your Shopify store’s conversion rates? Get your website audited by Shopify Experts, Ecommerce Pro. Our team of experts will identify any barriers in your online store’s ability to convert customers, before helping you make the informed decisions that will change your website for the better. Our team will implement these data-driven changes for a fully optimized and more successful Shopify website and online store.
Get in Touch
At Ecommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful Shopify businesses. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
Ready to take your Shopify business to the next level? Let’s work together. Fill out our contact form to get in touch with Ecommerce Pro.
A restaurant’s menu is one of it’s most important sales tools even if it’s oftentimes only quickly glanced at.
A Gallup poll found that the average customer spends only 109 seconds studying a menu. During that time, they scan the menu, read descriptions and check prices before making a decision.
To make the most of that time, a restaurant menu needs to be concise, well-organized and thoughtfully laid out. Most importantly, each dish and drink featured needs to be profitable.
To do that, there are some menu engineering tricks and analysis restaurateurs do to inform the decisions they make for their sit-down and delivery menus.
Make use of our free menu designs
Download your free customizable restaurant menu template today. Tweak it, change colors, add menu items, and adjust costs. It’s that simple.
What is menu engineering?
Menu engineering is a way to evaluate a restaurant’s menu pricing by using sales data and food costs to guide which dishes to feature and their menu price. Equipped with that data, menu engineering involves categorizing menu items based on their popularity (sales volume) and profitability.
To properly engineer a menu, you need to have a firm grasp of each menu item’s prices and food costs per serving and contribution margin. With that, restaurateurs can categorize menu items and see which items contribute more profit and which aren’t pulling their weight and either need to be rethought or removed from the menu altogether.
In a nutshell: Menu engineering is a series of exercises that assure each dish and drink featured on your restaurant’s menu is profitable, popular or both.
What’s the primary goal of menu engineering?
The primary goal of menu engineering is to maximize a restaurant’s profitability by strategically analyzing and optimizing the menu using specific tactics. Menu engineering involves identifying high-profit and popular items, adjusting pricing, and strategically placing dishes to influence customer choices. By understanding the cost and revenue of each item, and customer behavior, menu engineering aims to increase overall sales and enhance the dining experience.
What are the benefits of menu engineering?
Menu engineering offers several significant benefits to restaurants that go beyond just designing an attractive menu.
Maximize profitability
Menu engineers can help restaurants maximize profitability by identifying high-margin and popular dishes. By strategically positioning them on the menu and using eye-catching descriptions and visuals, customers are more likely to be enticed to order these profitable items, increasing overall sales and revenue.
Cost management
Menu engineering makes restaurants take a better look at their costs, by analyzing the cost of ingredients and preparation for each dish. Restaurants can identify dishes with high food costs and low-profit margins, either adjust their pricing, rework the recipe to improve profitability or remove altogether.
Improved customer experience
By showcasing popular dishes prominently and ensuring clear and appealing descriptions, customers can make choices more easily and enjoy their meal without feeling overwhelmed or confused by the menu options.
Reduction of food waste
With a well-engineered menu, restaurants can plan ingredient quantities more accurately, leading to fewer unsold perishable items and ultimately minimizing waste.
Innovation
Menu engineering can also encourage innovation and seasonal menu updates. Regular analysis of menu performance allows restaurants to experiment with new dishes and update their offerings to match changing customer preferences, keeping the menu fresh and exciting.
Drawbacks to menu engineering
While menu engineering is ultimately a positive process for any restaurant, it can come with drawbacks when it’s not done properly. Focusing solely on profit might neglect customer satisfaction and menu variety. The complexity of implementation and inflexibility could hinder creativity and experimentation. Pushing high-margin items excessively may disappoint customers, affecting long-term trust. How often you edit your menu is also something you consider. While changing the menu seasonally could bring excitement and innovation into the mix, changing the menu weekly could create confusion and could turn customers away. To succeed, restaurants must strike a balance between profitability and customer experience, periodically reviewing the menu and considering customer feedback.
How to engineer a menu and maximize profits
While the time it takes will vary based on the size of your menu offering, menu engineering can be broken down into five broad steps.
First thing’s first, you need to select a time period to analyze. For restaurants that switch up their menu based on the seasonality of produce, it makes sense to do this at the same time as they craft new seasonal menu items. For restaurants that rarely make adjustments to their menu, they can revisit their menu less frequently.
Don’t make the mistake of never revisiting your menu pricing, though. Food costs fluctuate and your menu prices need to reflect that. If your food costs grow while your menu price stays the same, your gross profit margin shrinks and you make less money on the sale.
2. Cost your menu
The three important metrics that you need to measure menu item profitability are food cost percentage and contribution margin.
That information should be readily available in your restaurant POS system, but if it isn’t, you can calculate them manually using these formulas:
How to calculate food cost per serving
To find your food cost per serving, you need to list the ingredients used to make a dish, how much of the ingredient you use and how much that costs. Include everything down to the seasonings and garnishes.
Here’s a look at calculating food cost per serving in action.
Let’s say you sell hamburgers and pay $19 for five pounds of ground beef. It takes you 8 ounces of beef to make a single burger, which brings the cost of ground beef per serving to $1.90.
Perform that same exercise for each ingredient and you get something like this:
8 ounces of ground beef = $1.90
1 sesame seed bun = $0.25
1 tbsp. of sauce = $0.10
2 slices of cheeses = $0.90
2 slices of tomatoes = $0.50
Add the values for each ingredient used to make one burger and you get a food cost per serving of $3.65.
How to calculate contribution margin
Your contribution margin (or the profit from that individual menu item) is the difference between an item’s selling price and its cost.
Let’s say your hamburger’s menu cost is $14.40 and your food cost per serving is $3.65.
Contribution margin = $14.40 – $3.65
Subtract the $3.65 food cost per serving from the $14.40 menu cost and you get a contribution margin of $10.75.
Using analytics to determine menu item popularity
Understanding your menu’s performance using data fed by your point of sale will give you an edge when the time comes to update your menu. Most POS systems have reports that show how much you sold of a menu item over a period of time. Getting tangible insights that you can take action on is key when redesigning your menu and understanding what works and what doesn’t. With Lightspeed’s Advanced Insights (available in North America) you can take a deeper look at customer behavior with unique guest profiles and order tracking. This gives you access to how much specific customers spend and which items they order most. You also get access to a detailed breakdown of your menu performance, with insights on best and worst performers.
Along with concrete data, sit down with your servers and bartenders and hear from them. Are there certain dishes that they sell often? They’re on the front line talking with customers every shift and can give valuable insight. With clear data to back up your decisions, share insights with your employees and to come up with a plan on how to move forward.
Create your menu in minutes
You don’t need to be a designer (or hire one) to create a beautiful menu. Download your free, easily-customizable menu templates today.
3. Categorize menu items based on profit and popularity
Once you know how much of each menu item you sold over a certain period of time and its contribution margin, you can categorize them based on popularity and profitability in a menu matrix.
Menu items will fall into one of four menu engineering categories: Cash cows, stars, duds or puzzles. Once completed, a menu matrix gives you a clear understanding of which menu items are responsible for your profits, which aren’t and which need to be reworked or removed from your menu altogether.
Plowhorses: Low profitability, high popularity
Plowhorses are popular menu items whose food costs are more expensive. The objective with menu items that fall into this category is to make them more profitable either by raising its menu price, lowering food costs, reworking the recipe with different ingredients or pairing it with high-profit sides and cocktails.
Also, pay attention to the portion size of your plowhorses. If you’re noticing that customers rarely finish their plate, it may be wise to serve slightly smaller portions, reducing food waste and food cost per serving in the process.
Stars: High profitability, high popularity
Stars are your menu’s most popular, profitable items. They’re inexpensive to make and your guests order them often. Rather than rework these menu items, it’s best to leave them as they are and promote them in any way you can.
Make sure your menu design draws special attention to them, increasing the likelihood that you sell more of your Stars and maximize profits per service.
Puzzles: High profitability, low popularity
Puzzles are menu items that are profitable, but not a popular choice. Try to pinpoint why they aren’t selling. Are they noticeable on your menu? Could they benefit from a more compelling description? Should you promote the dish on Instagram? Is the menu price too high?
Any of these can have an effect on a menu item’s popularity. Try experimenting with them and measuring the results of the changes you make on their sales.
Duds: Low profitability, low popularity
Duds are the menu items that are expensive to make and aren’t popular. They take up valuable space on your restaurant menu, distract your guests from your stars and puzzles.
You have several options for what to do with duds. You can remove them from your menu entirely, de-emphasizing them on your menu or reworking the price or ingredients based on customer feedback. If you choose to rework a dud and both its sales and contribution margin remain low, consider removing it from the menu altogether.
4. Redesign your menu
Now, it’s time to use your menu matrix to rethink which dishes to include in your new menu design and layout.
Along with the quantitative data, it’s also important to gather qualitative data and feedback from your servers and customers.
Ask your servers which dishes they typically sell the most, which ones they have a hard time selling and which dishes get negative feedback from guests. Consider sending a Typeform survey to your customers or members of your loyalty program. What do they love about your restaurant? What would they like to see improve? Which dishes are their favorite and least favorite? Do they think there are enough options?
The only way to know is to ask. Use both the quantitative data from your menu matrix and the anecdotal information from your surveys and conversations with staff to further inform which menu items make the final cut for your re-engineered menu.
Here are some things to keep in mind as you redesign your menu:
What is menu psychology?
Menu psychology focuses on how patrons interact with menus and how menus can be designed to motivate customers to take a specific action (like ordering more and spending more). Everything from the number of items in the menu, the categories, how the dish price is displayed, to the colors and placement is analyzed in menu psychology.
Why should restaurants leverage menu psychology?
Restaurants should leverage menu psychology because it can be a tool to enhance the overall dining experience and boost profitability. By understanding the psychological factors that drive decision-making, such as color, layout, pricing, and item placement, restaurants can optimize their menus to encourage higher spending, increase customer satisfaction and drive repeat business. Descriptive language and tantalizing imagery can make dishes more appealing while grouping high-profit items strategically can increase their chances of being ordered. Highlighting popular or signature dishes can also create a sense of social proof and encourage customers to try those items.
Choose the ideal menu configuration
Not all menu configurations are created equal. According to Gregg Rapp’s menu engineering methodology, the effectiveness of your menu engineering efforts is dependent on how many panels your menu has.
One-panel menus: Although customers make decisions faster with one-panel menus, they don’t order as much, which results in lower profits per customer.
Two-panel menus: This is the best menu configuration according to Rapp. It evokes the feeling of a full dining experience while being easy for customers to read.
Three-panel menus: If you have a lot of menu items and need the space, a three-panel menu is a valid option, however, two-panel menus are easier for guests to read.
Many-panel menus: The more panels your menu has, the less control and influence you have over the decisions customers make.
Write awesome menu descriptions
A study published by The Association for Consumer Research found that menu items sell up to 27% better when accompanied by a well-written menu description.
Rather than simply listing ingredients, a great menu description uses descriptive adjectives without being too long-winded. Mentioning an ingredient’s origins, freshness, texture or how it’s prepared are all great ways to write evocative descriptions—just remember to keep it short.
Emphasize your stars and puzzles
Place eye magnets (graphic elements like an outline, icon, photo or splash of color) next to the menu items you want to sell the most. That graphic element will draw customers’ eyes and have them focus their attention on the menu items you want them to try.
Just don’t overdo it with the graphics. If you use too many, each of the highlighted items won’t stand out. Rather, they’ll get lost in a sea of graphics, which defeats the purpose. Rapp says that featuring just one graphic element per page can increase sales of that menu item by as much as 30%, but the more visual cues you add, the lower the impact.
When using eye magnets to draw attention to your stars and puzzles, remember that less is more.
Consider eye movement patterns
People’s eyes tend to focus on certain areas of a menu depending on whether it’s a one-panel, two-panel, three-panel or many-panel menu. Rapp suggests placing the dishes you want to draw attention to in the areas where people’s eyes tend to focus on.
Beware of the burden of choice
When confronted with too many options to choose from, customers have a harder time deciding what they want and are more likely to be unsatisfied with the choice they end up making. But good news, preventing customers from feeling FOMO (the fear of missing out) is possible.
If you have an extensive menu that includes your breakfast/brunch and dinner options, it may be wise to split that into several different menus, swapping them in and out as one service begins and the other ends.
If the issue is that you have a large selection, consider refining your menu. Cost each menu item and see if there are any duds that you can remove from your offering altogether.
Train your staff
When we think of menu engineering, we often think about the behind-the-scenes strategy that goes into crafting a restaurant menu, but a restaurant’s staff also has the power to influence what guests buy.
They’re the ones interacting with guests each day. Teach them which menu items to push and they can help guide customers towards choosing those profitable dishes.
5. Measure your new menu’s impact
Once you’ve finished your menu redesign and it’s been live for a month or so, look at your sales data to see if the tweaks you made have had a financial impact. Did you sell more of your puzzles and stars? Did you net more profits that month than in previous months? Were your food costs lower?
Depending on what you find, you could continue tweaking old and testing new dishes and rethinking your layout. The funny thing about restaurant menus is that there’s always room for improvement.
As you test, track your results so you know what worked and what didn’t.
With Lightspeed Advanced Insights you could look even deeper into menu performance. With its comprehensive data analytics tools, you can easily track and analyze key performance indicators related to the menu, such as sales trends, item popularity, and profitability.
By understanding which dishes drive the most revenue and garner the highest customer interest, restaurant owners and managers can make data-driven decisions to optimize the menu for greater profitability and customer satisfaction. This data-driven approach empowers restaurants to identify strengths, weaknesses, and opportunities within their menu offerings, ultimately leading to a more successful and engaging dining experience for customers.
With Lightspeed Restaurant, Grant Macdonald, the Chief Concept Officer for Kotsu Ramen & Gyoza, can see how much they’ve sold of a particular item and which ones are driving repeat business. “You can look at the item and say, ‘I love this item. It sells really well. But you know what? People come here and they try it and then they don’t come back. Or this item I didn’t think was a big deal. But the customers that come for this, they love it. They come back over and over again’. That kind of data drives really good decisions about what needs to be on our menu, what belongs there, and what makes sense,” adds Macdonald.
The science behind a profitable menu
Menu engineering can feel like a daunting task, but it doesn’t have to be done overnight. Select a timeframe, cost your menu, categorize each dish based on its popularity and profitability, redesign your layout (either by hiring a designer or using our handy menu templates) and measure the impact of the changes you make.
By following these steps and building a menu the right way, you’re setting each sit-down, takeout or delivery order to be a profitable one.
Looking for data and insights to back up your menu revamp? Talk to one of our experts to find out how Lightspeed can help.
How to Get Quick Feedback on Your Articles in WordPress
Are you looking for a way to get quick feedback on your articles in WordPress?
Feedback will help improve content quality by identifying any areas of improvement for your WordPress articles. It can also help build trust, leading to increased engagement on your website.
In this article, we will show you how to easily get quick feedback on your articles in WordPress.
Why Ask For Quick Feedback on Your WordPress Posts And Pages?
Most WordPress websites encourage users to leave comments and provide feedback on blog posts and articles.
However, fear of judgment, lack of time, or preferring to use social media prevents many users from doing this. Readers may also not know what exactly to say in their comments.
By using ‘was this helpful’ WordPress plugins, you can enable users to easily give their feedback on whether your content was useful to them.
These plugins usually display a thumbs-up/thumbs-down or a Yes/No button at the end of your WordPress post or pages that visitors can use to rate your content.
You can even use WordPress survey plugins to create a quick survey so that visitors can provide feedback.
This helps increase user engagement on your WordPress blog and shows the user that their feedback is valued. It also shows that you, as the website owner, are actively working to improve the user experience.
Using feedback plugins can also improve your website’s SEO rankings by reducing bounce rates, as users are more likely to stay on a website that has useful content.
Having said that, let’s see how you can easily get quick feedback for your WordPress articles. We will cover two methods in this post, and you can use the quick links below to jump to the method you want to use:
Method 1: Add Quick Feedback Using a Plugin (Easy)
If you are looking for an easy way to add quick feedback to your WordPress posts and pages, then this method is for you.
Upon activation, the plugin will automatically start working out of the box and add a ‘Yes’ and ‘No’ option next to the ‘Was this article helpful?’ question at the end of your posts and pages.
Users visiting your site can now easily rate your content using these buttons.
To view the feedback on your WordPress posts, you will need to visit thePosts » All Posts page from the WordPress admin sidebar.
Once there, you will see the ‘Helpful’ column added to the right side of the screen.
From here, you will be able to monitor the ratings for your content and find out the number of people who have clicked the Yes and No buttons on your posts.
Method 2: Add a Survey for Quick Feedback Using UserFeedback (Recommended)
If you want to add a quick survey to your pages and posts to collect feedback, then this method is for you.
Note: The UserFeedback plugin also has a free version that you can install. However, we will be using the Pro version for this tutorial to unlock more features.
Upon activation, you need to head over to the UserFeedback » Surveys page from the WordPress admin sidebar and click the ‘Create New’ button.
This will take you to the ‘Select a Template’ page.
From here, you can use any of the pre-made templates as surveys on your website, including restaurant menu surveys, eCommerce store surveys, phone lead forms, post-purchase reviews, and more. You can also ‘Start From Scratch’ and design your own survey.
For this tutorial, we will be using the Content Engagement template because we want to add a quick feedback survey on our site asking people how we can improve our content.
Just click on the survey template. This will direct you to a new page where you can start creating your survey.
By default, the Content Engagement template already comes with a question asking users if they found the content engaging.
However, you can easily change this by typing a question of your choice, like ‘Did you like this article?’ into the ‘Question Title’ field.
Once you have done that, you need to choose an answer mode for users from the ‘Question Type’ dropdown menu.
For instance, if you want users to provide a star rating for your article, then you can choose the ‘Star-Rating’ option.
You can also display checkboxes, radio buttons, email capture options, single text fields, long answers, and Net Promoter Scores as modes of answers.
If you choose the radio button or checkbox, you will have to provide the different answers for the survey question under the ‘Possible Answers’ option.
After that, scroll down to the next question that already comes in the Content Engagement template, asking users the kind of content they’d like to see created.
You can change that question to ask users to provide their feedback on the article they just read. This way, users will first get to rate your content, and then they can provide any feedback that they may have for the article.
For this question, make sure to choose the ‘Long Answer’ option from the ‘Question Type’ dropdown menu so that users can easily provide descriptive feedback on your website.
Once you have done that, just click the ‘Preview’ button at the top to customize the survey widget. From here, you can select the background color, text color, and button color.
Once you are done, you need to click the ‘Next Step: Settings’ button to move forward.
This will take you to the ‘Settings’ page, where you can start by scrolling down to the ‘Targeting’ section. From here, you can select the device types where the survey will be displayed, including desktop, mobile, and tablet.
After that, you must choose the pages where the survey will be displayed. If you select the ‘All Pages’ option, then the quick feedback survey will be shown across all posts and pages on your website.
However, if you want to limit the survey to certain pages, then you can select the ‘Advanced’ option.
Once you do that, you must specify the conditions for the survey display from the dropdown menu.
For instance, if you want to only display the survey on posts, then you can select the ‘Post type is’ option from the dropdown menu on the left. After that, pick the ‘Post’ option from the dropdown menu on the right.
Now your quick feedback survey will only be displayed on WordPress posts.
Next, scroll down to the ‘Behavior’ section. Here, you can configure the display timing and length of your survey.
You can even schedule a run time for your survey by selecting the month and date you want the survey to end.
After you are done, simply click the ‘Next Step: Notifications’ button to move ahead.
On the next screen, you can start by toggling the ‘Send Email’ switch to active if you want to receive an email notification every time a user provides feedback on your website.
Next, you need to provide the email address where you want to receive the notifications and click the ‘Next Step: Publish’ button.
On the new screen, simply scroll down to the ‘Publish’ section and switch the ‘Survey Status’ to ‘Publish’.
If you want, you can also schedule your survey for later by toggling the ‘Schedule for Later’ switch to active and providing a publication date and time.
Finally, click the ‘Save and Schedule’ or ‘Save and Publish’ button to store your changes.
Now, you can visit your website to check out the quick feedback survey in action.
Once your survey has been published, you can see its results by visiting the UserFeedback » Results page from the admin sidebar.
From here, you will be able to check out the number of responses, impressions, and all the answers provided by your visitors.
This can help you improve the overall content of your WordPress website.
Understanding Customer Needs with Jobs to Be Done – Blend Commerce
In today’s fast-paced and competitive business landscape, understanding customer needs is crucial for success. As a merchant, you need to go beyond surface-level demographics and delve into the underlying motivations that drive customers to choose your products or services. This is where Jobs to be Done (JTBD) research comes into play. In this blog, we will explore the significance of JTBD research and how we at Blend leverage this framework to uncover customer needs, enhance product development, and deliver exceptional experiences.
At its core, Jobs to be Done is a framework that helps businesses understand the fundamental reasons customers use a product or service to accomplish a specific “job” in their lives. It goes beyond superficial features or benefits and focuses on the progress customers aim to make in particular circumstances or situations. JTBD research aims to uncover the deeper motivations and desired outcomes that influence customer behaviour.
Traditional demographic or psychographic data provides only surface-level insights into customer preferences. JTBD research, on the other hand, enables businesses to grasp the true motivations behind customer choices. By understanding the jobs customers want to accomplish, businesses can align their strategies, product development, and customer experiences to address those needs directly. This customer-centric approach not only improves customer satisfaction but also fosters long-term loyalty and drives business growth.
Implementing JTBD research can bring numerous benefits to a merchant like you:
Uncover hidden opportunities
By using the JTBD framework, you can identify unmet customer needs and discover gaps in the market. This empowers you to develop innovative solutions that cater to those needs and positions your business as a pioneer in meeting evolving customer expectations.
Targeted product development
Understanding the jobs customers are trying to accomplish allows you to align your product development efforts with customer needs. By prioritising features and improvements that directly address those jobs, you can create products that resonate with customers and provide a seamless experience.
Enhanced marketing and messaging
JTBD research provides deep insights into the language, motivations, and triggers customers associate with specific jobs. You can leverage this knowledge to craft compelling marketing messages, position your products effectively, and communicate the unique value proposition to potential customers.
Improved customer satisfaction
By aligning your offerings with customer needs, you can deliver products and services that better fulfil customer expectations. This leads to increased customer satisfaction, reduced churn, and positive word-of-mouth, ultimately driving growth and success.
So what does JTBD research look like at Blend? Well, if we were to conduct this type of research for your business, this is typically what it would entail:
Customer interviews and surveys
We’d help you conduct structured interviews and surveys to gather qualitative and quantitative data directly from customers. These insights help identify the jobs customers use your business for and uncover their desired outcomes.
Data analysis and synthesis
We’d then analyse the data collected from customer interviews and surveys to identify patterns, themes, and customer segments. This analysis forms the basis for developing personas and understanding the key jobs customers need your company to address.
Iterative product development
Armed with customer insights, we would guide you through an iterative approach to product development. By having prioritised features and improvements based on their impact on job completion, we could help you continuously refine your offerings and align them with customer needs.
Ongoing feedback loops
We’d then establish feedback loops with customers through various channels, such as customer support, user testing, and post-purchase surveys. This feedback provides continuous validation and ensures that your business stays in tune with evolving customer needs.
Embracing Jobs to be Done research empowers businesses like yours to gain a deeper understanding of customer needs, develop products that truly resonate, and create exceptional experiences. By understanding the jobs customers want to accomplish, you can build stronger customer relationships, drive business growth, and maintain a competitive edge in the market. Don’t believe us? Check out what we achieved for a beauty client using the Jobs to Be Done framework. It involves a 56% increase in Owned Revenue.
If all of this sounds overwhelming, it doesn’t have to be – not when you have Blend. Get in touch with us today and let us help you.
Want to soar above your competitors?
CVO is the way to do it. As CVO and Shopify experts, we work with large eCommerce brands like yours, increasing their metrics and revenue. Enquire today to find out how we can help you.
Understanding Customer Needs with Jobs to Be Done – Blend Commerce
In today’s fast-paced and competitive business landscape, understanding customer needs is crucial for success. As a merchant, you need to go beyond surface-level demographics and delve into the underlying motivations that drive customers to choose your products or services. This is where Jobs to be Done (JTBD) research comes into play. In this blog, we will explore the significance of JTBD research and how we at Blend leverage this framework to uncover customer needs, enhance product development, and deliver exceptional experiences.
At its core, Jobs to be Done is a framework that helps businesses understand the fundamental reasons customers use a product or service to accomplish a specific “job” in their lives. It goes beyond superficial features or benefits and focuses on the progress customers aim to make in particular circumstances or situations. JTBD research aims to uncover the deeper motivations and desired outcomes that influence customer behaviour.
Traditional demographic or psychographic data provides only surface-level insights into customer preferences. JTBD research, on the other hand, enables businesses to grasp the true motivations behind customer choices. By understanding the jobs customers want to accomplish, businesses can align their strategies, product development, and customer experiences to address those needs directly. This customer-centric approach not only improves customer satisfaction but also fosters long-term loyalty and drives business growth.
Implementing JTBD research can bring numerous benefits to a merchant like you:
Uncover hidden opportunities
By using the JTBD framework, you can identify unmet customer needs and discover gaps in the market. This empowers you to develop innovative solutions that cater to those needs and positions your business as a pioneer in meeting evolving customer expectations.
Targeted product development
Understanding the jobs customers are trying to accomplish allows you to align your product development efforts with customer needs. By prioritising features and improvements that directly address those jobs, you can create products that resonate with customers and provide a seamless experience.
Enhanced marketing and messaging
JTBD research provides deep insights into the language, motivations, and triggers customers associate with specific jobs. You can leverage this knowledge to craft compelling marketing messages, position your products effectively, and communicate the unique value proposition to potential customers.
Improved customer satisfaction
By aligning your offerings with customer needs, you can deliver products and services that better fulfil customer expectations. This leads to increased customer satisfaction, reduced churn, and positive word-of-mouth, ultimately driving growth and success.
So what does JTBD research look like at Blend? Well, if we were to conduct this type of research for your business, this is typically what it would entail:
Customer interviews and surveys
We’d help you conduct structured interviews and surveys to gather qualitative and quantitative data directly from customers. These insights help identify the jobs customers use your business for and uncover their desired outcomes.
Data analysis and synthesis
We’d then analyse the data collected from customer interviews and surveys to identify patterns, themes, and customer segments. This analysis forms the basis for developing personas and understanding the key jobs customers need your company to address.
Iterative product development
Armed with customer insights, we would guide you through an iterative approach to product development. By having prioritised features and improvements based on their impact on job completion, we could help you continuously refine your offerings and align them with customer needs.
Ongoing feedback loops
We’d then establish feedback loops with customers through various channels, such as customer support, user testing, and post-purchase surveys. This feedback provides continuous validation and ensures that your business stays in tune with evolving customer needs.
Embracing Jobs to be Done research empowers businesses like yours to gain a deeper understanding of customer needs, develop products that truly resonate, and create exceptional experiences. By understanding the jobs customers want to accomplish, you can build stronger customer relationships, drive business growth, and maintain a competitive edge in the market. Don’t believe us? Check out what we achieved for a beauty client using the Jobs to Be Done framework. It involves a 56% increase in Owned Revenue.
If all of this sounds overwhelming, it doesn’t have to be – not when you have Blend. Get in touch with us today and let us help you.
Want to soar above your competitors?
CVO is the way to do it. As CVO and Shopify experts, we work with large eCommerce brands like yours, increasing their metrics and revenue. Enquire today to find out how we can help you.
Empowering Ethical and Sustainable Fashion: How Retailer Melissa Joy Manning Sparks Industry-Wide Change
Say hello to Melissa Joy Manning, the founder of the namesake fine jewelry brand known for its focus on sustainability and social responsibility.
Melissa started the company 25 years ago with just $500, knocking on doors of stores she liked and asking them to carry her designs.
She has since expanded her business across multiple channels and locations. Today, her brand has grown to include two physical stores, a robust ecommerce site and several wholesale partners worldwide.
Melissa is also an active voice in the realm of sustainable and socially-conscious fashion, having pioneered meaningful conversations around ethical industry practices.
We recently caught up with Melissa to discuss her entrepreneurial journey and her continued commitment to sustainability and social responsibility.
Prepare your business for the future of commerce
Download our free playbook and learn how to sell on different channels, boost loyalty and increase foot traffic with technology.
A sustainable and socially-conscious brand right from the start
The uniqueness of the Melissa Joy Manning brand lies in its commitment to sustainable, environmental and social manufacturing. Every piece of jewelry is handmade, using very few machines and creating a distinct handprint of the artisan. They use recycled metals, 14k gold, sterling silver and responsibly sourced stones.
Melissa Joy Manning has been a sustainable and socially-conscious business from day one. As Melissa puts it, her brand has been implementing eco-friendly practices when “sustainability wasn’t even a buzzword in fashion.”
Leaning into nature and the power of personal responsibility
Melissa’s upbringing played a major role in her decision to start and run a sustainable business. She grew up in an environment that fostered creativity, sustainability and personal responsibility, and these values undoubtedly shaped her views and decisions.
“There’s a strong history of craft and design within my family. My grandmother was a master quilter, and so were my aunts. I’ve just always grown up around that.”
She continues, “I was also raised immersed in nature; my grandparents had a farm in the Sierra Nevada foothills, so I spent a lot of time outside collecting rocks, bugs, you name it.”
Melissa was raised just outside Berkeley, California, which is known for its progressive and counterculture spirit. This exposure to progressive ideas—especially about sustainability and personal responsibility—influenced her business philosophy and laid the groundwork for the ethical practices she would later implement.
Case in point: Melissa’s commitment to ethical and on-shore manufacturing.
“When I started my business, I was really interested in making sure that other artists had jobs,” says Melissa.
“So my commitment to responsibility started with my community. This was post NAFTA when everyone was making things offsite. There were very few jewelry brands at the time making things in the United States.”
In fact, Melissa recalls people telling her that it wasn’t possible to remain competitive without taking things offshore.
She proved them wrong by designing a production model that emphasized craftsmanship and respect for the environment. Melissa’s work kept jobs within the community and promoted sustainable manufacturing practices.
“I realized that if this was possible for a brand of my size, then it meant that it was possible for other businesses. So, why wasn’t anyone else doing it?”
Melissa wanted to make a bigger impact. “If I could drop a pebble in the pond, maybe we could create some other waves and bring new ideas that would transform the way we work.”
Enacting greater change across the fashion industry
One of the first things Melissa did as a member of the CFDA was raise the topic of ethical and sustainable fashion.
“I stood up on my first day as a CFDA member in this huge room of 350 of the United States’ most influential designers. I asked what our industry’s plans for sustainability were. And they looked at each other and said none.”
Melissa continues, “So for a year I worked behind the scenes with some key collaborators in order to launch the CFDA Sustainability Committee. And we were able to start a conversation and a movement that has really impacted fashion.”
Melissa’s work with CFDA underscores the importance of starting conversations and bringing people in to enact change.
“As a small brand, I can affect a small amount of change, but I can’t affect enough change that we need in terms of a global crisis; not only from climate, but from workers’ rights and ability for people to live in non-emergent ways,” says Melissa.
“So to have more people join this idea and embrace these tenants and philosophy of business means that it’s a cumulative effort. And within that, we’ll see the most traction.”
Powered by Lightspeed
At Lightspeed, we’re proud to power game-changing retailers like Melissa Joy Manning. Lightspeed’s POS and payments platform enables Melissa and her team to seamlessly manage stock, track sales and engage with customers.
Lightspeed’s reporting and inventory management capabilities, in particular, allows Melissa to understand and compare product performance between her stores, so she can optimize stock levels accordingly.
“I’m in there weekly, looking at stock levels across stores. So if a product sells well in one location, but not in the other, I can then just send it over and they click “Receive” and then it’s in their inventory.”
“That’s really important for a brand of our size, especially because we hand make our products so we don’t hold a lot of excess inventory.”
Lightspeed Payments also helps Melissa gain business insights and be more efficient.
She appreciates Lightspeed Payments’ instantaneous reporting, along with its simple and transparent pricing.
Melissa Joy Manning’s previous payments processor would “always have different fees for different kinds of cards,” whereas Lightspeed Payments provides a straight percentage, which helps the business be more cost-effective.
Payments is “something that we’re really looking at because the market has gotten so much more competitive and the cost of business has gone up in many myriad of different ways. With credit card processing fees and bank fees, we’re always trying to lower them because that’s just money out the door.”
Discover how Lightspeed can help you be the best in your business
Melissa Joy Manning is one example of the thousands of leading retailers powered by Lightspeed.
Built for driven and ambitious retailers, Lightspeed has the tools you need to run a thriving business. Manage inventory, suppliers, teams and stores from one retail platform. From easy-to-use POS and ecommerce tools to advanced reporting, Lightspeed is here to help you scale and succeed.
Are you a book hound? Do you get excited about sharing your favorite books with your audience? Or maybe you’re considering bringing in extra income by selling books through your website. Either way, you need to create a WordPress books gallery.
Using WordPress, you could use a combination of Gutenberg blocks to create a gallery of books. Using a page builder like Elementor gives you even more flexibility in designing your gallery layout. And if you have the know-how, you could also code your own custom post types to get the job done.
But why go DIY when you could use a plugin that sets all of this up for you? The developers at WordPress Books Gallery have built a plugin that makes it easy. I’ll show you what it’s all about and how to create your own book showcase in this article.
The Books Gallery Plugin
Showcasing your books on your website is a whole lot easier — and prettier — with the Books Gallery plugin. It helps you display your book collection neatly on the page, with download or purchase links if you like. The single book view also gives your visitors detailed info about the book. The plugin provides fields for everything from title and author to ISBN and recommended reading age. The level of detail is entirely up to you.
Books Galley
If you want to sell books and generate some passive income, there are a couple of ways to do it. If you’re part of an affiliate program such as Amazon, you can set up links where visitors can buy the books in your gallery. You earn your affiliate commission for every book sold. The other option is to sell the books directly through your site using WooCommerce and a cart plugin.
There are plenty of powerful features in the Books Gallery plugin. Here are just a few:
Create a Clean, Modern & Responsive Book Showcase
Import Books via API From Google Books and Open Library
Sell eBooks Directly From Your Website
Earn Affiliate Commission for Every Book Sold
Set Multiple Sale Sources
Import Books From CSV
Fully Customized Search Panel
Multiple Ways to Display Book Details
Multiple Ways to Display Book Gallery Page
Books review and rating
Detailed author page
and more.
Books Gallery is a feature-rich plugin that’s not bloated with unnecessary options. It provides an easy way to showcase your book collection and lets you choose how it looks on the site.
How to use Books Gallery
The WordPress Books Gallery plugin is easy to use, there are just a few things you’ll need to set up before your books will be displayed on your site. Let’s get started!
Step 1: Install
Install Books Gallery as you would most other WordPress plugins. In your WordPress dashboard, navigate to Plugins>Add New. Search for the keyword Books Gallery. Then, click the Install Now button and Activate.
Now you should see “WBG Books” in your left-side dashboard menu.
When you activate the Books Gallery plugin, it automatically starts you at the Usage & Tutorial section. It’s worth taking a couple of minutes to watch the video.
Step 2: Getting started
You might be itching to add some books, which is understandable. I recommend adding some book categories first, as this will make it easier when you begin adding your book details.
In Books Gallery, you add Book Categories the same way you would add categories for WordPress posts. In the WBG Books menu, click on Book Categories. The menu screen will appear; you can add as many categories as possible.
You can add more categories later in the Book Categories menu or when you add new books.
Step 3: Adding books
When you’re ready to start adding books, click Add New in the WBG menu. You can also add books from the All Books or main WBG Books menus.
Like categories, adding new books is super easy. Start by entering the title and short description of the book.
The form fields are ready for you; you can add as many or as few details as you want.
If you plan to sell your books, there are fields for Regular Price, Discount Price, Item Weight, Cost Type, and Buy From Link. You can also enter the Download Link and File size to make your book available as a digital download.
On the right of the Add New screen are options to enter or select:
Book Categories
Book Formats
Book Series
Reading Age
Grade Level
Author
Book Cover Image
Since you’re taking the time to build a great-looking books gallery, you’ll probably want to add book cover images. There are two places to do this: One in the Book Cover Image area of the right-side menu and another in the center section in the Book External Image URL field. This field allows you to use an image hosted outside your website.
Step 4: Designing your gallery
While the out-of-the-box design of Books Gallery is nice enough, you may want to tweak some things to match your site’s branding. You also need to set up a few things in advance, such as the Gallery Page Slug.
General Settings
In the WBG Books menu, navigate to General Settings. Here, you’ll set the Gallery Page Slug. It’s initially set to “books,” but you’ll want to change that to something like “my-books” to make it work correctly. Then make sure you create a page with the same slug.
You can also choose other options such as adding an affiliate code, Preferred, Author, and Download When Logged-in.
Gallery Settings
There are two tabs under Gallery Settings: Content and Styles. Under Content, you can determine how many columns will be displayed on both desktop and mobile. There are also settings for things like image width, book sorting, title word length, and more.
There’s also a cool feature that adds a little movement to your gallery. You can select an Image Animation type, and when visitors hover over the cover image, it will flip or rotate.
The Styles tab is where you can change your gallery’s default colors, font sizes, and margins. You can also set the container width here, although you’ll want to change the template in your theme to allow wide or full-width blocks.
Search Panel Settings
The Books Gallery plugin lets you display a search panel above your gallery, a handy feature if you have an extensive catalog of titles.
Under the Content tab, you can choose what fields to display for searching and determine how the results are sorted. You can select custom colors for the panel, fields, and buttons in Styles.
Book Detail Settings
There are a plethora of choices under Book Detail Settings. For every field in the Add New book section, there’s a choice here to display it — or not.
Like in other settings, you can use styles to match colors and font sizes to your site’s branding.
API Import
This is a handy tool that saves a lot of typing. All you need is the ISBN 10 number of the book you want to import. The importer brings in all the book details from the Open Library Internet Archive. You can add multiple ISBNs at once, separated by a comma.
Additional settings under the WPG Books menu include Author, Reading Age, Grade Level, Book Series, and Tags. You can create taxonomies to use anywhere on your site in those areas.
Step 5: Display your gallery
It wouldn’t be very useful to go through all of these settings and not have an easy way to display the gallery. First, you should have a page to match the slug you chose in General Settings. Navigate to the editor for that page. Then, using the shortcode block, enter [wp_books_gallery]. Update the page and view. If you’ve entered a few books already, you should see something like this:
Then, clicking on a book, you’ll see the book detail page:
That’s it! Now you can go back over the styles and settings to tweak your gallery as you see fit.
Books Gallery Pricing
Installing and using the Books Gallery plugin is free. With yearly subscription plans, you get more features and increased support.
Books Gallery Pricing
There are three tiers:
Basic — $49.99/year
Basic includes all the free features and add-on pagination, support for multiple currencies, book formats, series, and more.
Professional — $79.99/year
At the Professional level, you get all the features included in Free and Basic. You also get Priority/Chat support, the ability to display books and galleries in a slider or grid view, and drag & drop sorting for search panel items from the admin panel. You also have External Image URL capability for your book covers. A long list of features in the Professional tier lets you add more detail to your book pages.
Enterprise — $179.99/year
The Enterprise tier is all about increased support. There’s a free setup service and small free customization if you need it.
There are also options for lifetime purchases in all tiers.
Easily create your online book library with Books Gallery
The Books Gallery plugin is easy to install and set up. The interface is familiar, using custom post types to enter information. There’s no new system to learn; you’ll be right at home in your usual WordPress environment.
Whether you want to display your personal book library on your website for kicks or generate revenue by selling books, the WordPress Books Gallery plugin will help you do it.
Can I sell books directly with WordPress Books Gallery?
Yes, if you are an author or publisher with books to sell, you can sell them directly from your site using WordPress Books Gallery. It offers an easy and quick setup with WooCommerce.
What are the key features of WordPress Books Gallery?
WordPress Books Gallery allows you to create an online book store, engage in easy affiliate marketing, and sell books directly. It also offers a clean, modern, and responsive books gallery, multiple sale sources, and the ability to import books via API from Open Library.
Can I import books from Open Library using WordPress Books Gallery?
Yes, you can use ISBN-10 to import books from Open Library instantly. This feature saves you time by importing accurate book information from a library of 3 million books.
What are the customer reviews for WordPress Books Gallery?
WordPress Books Gallery has received positive reviews from its customers. It has a 5/5 rating from over 70 ratings, with over 3000 active installs and 40000+ downloads.
As merchants scale and grow with Shopify Plus, their needs become more complex and specific. This creates an opportunity for Shopify app developers to step up and help address those advanced needs.
But standing out to these brands can be challenging. Plus merchants need to know that your app can handle their specific requirements, and you need a way to prove that your product can manage their complex needs. This is why we’ve introduced the Shopify Plus Certified App Program—a program for developers who provide a level of product quality that meets the advanced requirements of Shopify Plus merchants.
Let’s jump into what this means for you.
Build apps for Shopify merchants
Whether you want to build apps for the Shopify App Store, offer custom app development services, or are looking for ways to grow your user base, the Shopify Partner Program will set you up for success. Join for free and access educational resources, developer preview environments, and recurring revenue share opportunities.
The Shopify Plus Certified App Program is for best-in-class technology solutions chosen for their quality and alignment with Plus merchant needs. Each app is formally reviewed by the Shopify App Review and Quality Assurance Team, to ensure it meets advanced requirements in the areas of proven usefulness, infrastructure + performance, merchant support, security, and privacy.
Apps that meet the application requirements are then added to the Shopify Plus Certified App Partner Directory and a dedicated collection within the Shopify App Store. This lets Shopify Plus merchants easily identify which apps are best suited to solving their specific needs.
Being a Shopify Plus Certified App Partner comes with a number of benefits for developers. In addition to being included in exclusive Shopify Plus directories, you’ll also gain access to special channels to help support you on your business journey. These include:
Strategic partnership managers: Every Shopify Plus Certified App Partner will be connected with a strategic partnership manager at Shopify. This person will act as your day-to-day contact and will help you identify, nurture, and realize opportunities.
Technical consultations: Certified app partners will gain exclusive access to our developer success team, who will share updates on our roadmap, help with technical enablements, and guide you through enhancements to our API and platform capabilities.
Greater visibility: Certified app partners will be provided with an exclusive program badge to be used across their online and offline assets. These badges give partners heightened visibility to Plus merchants.
More referrals: Being a part of the Shopify Plus Certified App Program means that your app will be recommended more often to merchants by internal Shopify teams.
This program will require that all partners provide the following:
Support: 24/7 access to app partner support
Security and privacy: Trusted and secure information and data handling
Performance: Advanced app performance and integration standards
Innovation: Leading edge adoption of our latest product developments
In particular, we’re looking for partners who have a record of success with Shopify Plus merchants, and who complement Shopify’s platform. Your app should introduce or enhance existing capabilities. We’re inspired by developers that focus on doing one thing very well, giving merchants new ways to start, sell, and scale together.
As an example of the kind of capabilities we’re looking for in applicants, take a look at our current certified app partners and the kind of solutions their apps provide.
We will be certifying new app partners in the most important and innovative technology categories in commerce. Designed with merchants and partners at the forefront, the Shopify Plus Certified App Program is a new approach that will continue to keep pushing the boundaries of commerce.
If you’re a Shopify Partner building technology solutions, join us in building for some of the biggest brands in the world.
Apply to the Shopify Plus Certified App Program
Applications are now open to join the Shopify Plus Certified App Program. Demonstrate your dedication to performance, security, privacy, and support and be included in our exclusive Shopify Plus directories.
How to Improve Customer Service in Retail: 27 Actionable Tips
Have you ever seen a customer walk away from your store or website after a bad experience? Besides offering great products, stellar customer service might be the difference between repeat, loyal customers and people walking out the door or leaving your website for good. When the retail world is changing so much, offering consistently great customer service is your way into the hearts and pockets of your customers.
Keeping your service standards high, online and off, with a top-notch, trained team will help you pave the way to creating longtime connections with your customers.
In this post, we’ll look at the ways you can start leveling up your retail store customer service for the future.
We cover:
Prep for the future of commerce
Download our free playbook and learn how to sell on different channels, boost loyalty and increase foot traffic with technology.
1. Offer consistent customer service across all channels
The customer buying journey isn’t a simple process of visiting a store and buying a product anymore. 73% of customers use multiple channels during their shopping journey. Odds are, your customers might make multiple pit stops along the way before actually making a purchase.
Making sure you provide consistent customer service and a unified feel of your physical store, online shop, social channels, emails and any other touchpoints you have with your customers is key in providing a successful omnichannel experience.
When Her Hide Out decided it was time to set up their eCommerce shop, they wanted to make sure they stayed consistent. For Stephanie Fontaine, one of the store owners, “it was really important that the vibe of our eCommerce shop matched the vibe of our store.”
They also realized the importance of linking their online store to social channels like Facebook and Instagram where they extend their customer service and reach new customers. “We’ve been able to see the tie between someone that’s on our Insta account and goes to our website and buys a product.” Creating this unified experience with customer service to match has allowed them to replicate the same connection they offered to customers in store, online.
2. Make customer service everyone’s job
Have you ever been in a store and asked for help, only to be told, “That’s not my job?” Whether you’re a manager, a sales representative or even an intern, customer care is everyone’s responsibility.
If a manager considers customer service beneath them—well, maybe they’re not the right people for your business. And if your team needs to bone up on their customer service skills, get them training.
3. Keep your whole sales crew up to date
Another way to offer a consistent service across channels is constant product training and updates.
When you bring in new products, make sure everyone behind the counter gets to check them out before you offer them to your customers. For more complex products, you might need to employ different types of training content like streaming video, in-person demos from experts and more. That way, your sales staff on the floor or online can all explain just how the bagel cutter works or what kind of accessories will pair well with your new line of sweaters.
4. Equip staff with a customer service script
According to Jerry Han, Chief Marketing Executive at PrizeRebel, a great way to help guide staff is by training them and preparing a script. For Han, “Retailers can improve customer service by training their team to use positive and reaffirming language. The script shows the best way to deal with customers by suggesting word choices that help induce a positive customer experience.”
Some customers might not be familiar with or might be reluctant to adhere to new rules, so training your staff on how to handle different situations beforehand, and providing them with scripts they can fall back on, will help mitigate what could be uncomfortable situations and negative customer experiences. Making sure your staff is equipped with different soft skills will make them better prepared to handle all types of situations.
5. Talk to your customers on a regular basis
Whether you’re informing store visitors of new opening hours and services offered at your store, or if you’re letting them know of upcoming deals on your website, it’s never been more important to communicate with your customers on a regular basis. The best way to ensure a great experience is to let customers know details of any changes in the way you operate, ahead of time.
For example, if you decide to offer appointment shopping, make sure to email customers and display information prominently on your website. Before their visit, email them with any relevant information they might need before arriving.
6. Personalize the customer experience
Personalizing your customer service is a trend that won’t be going away any time soon. 80% of customers are more likely to purchase from companies that offer some type of personalized experience or customer service. If you’re working with customers, a surefire way to create long-lasting relationships is to get to know them.
Some customers might want to talk to sales associates in store, but a great way to keep track of customer preferences and purchases is through an omnichannel loyalty program. 62% of consumers expect personalized offers based on their preferences. With a loyalty program, you can keep track of your customers’ buying habits, brand and product preferences and offer them relevant rewards.
According to Tori Erickson, owner of Loyal Tee Boutique, her customers are faithful to their loyalty perks. “I have multiple customers that use their rewards every day. They look forward to it. They say, ‘I got the text, I get $10 off today,” says Erickson.
Lightspeed’s Advanced Marketing capabilities enables you to strengthen your customer relationships and streamline your marketing initiatives. The built in loyalty program lets you reward shoppers whenever they make a purchase. You can also automate customer communications like welcome message, “We miss you” emails, and more.
Myself Lingerie uses Advanced Marketing runs their loyalty program, an automated win-back program and can also send email marketing campaigns for sales, promotions and product launches. Since launching, Myself Lingerie has seen a staggering ROI of 70x on Advanced Marketing costs.
“Beyond saving us time and money, I would say the greatest value is in the tools and add-ons Lightspeed offers. The integrated ecommerce is really helpful, and we love how Advanced Marketing works,”says Rachel Rosenthal, Co-owner of Myself Lingerie.
Giving customers exclusive offers isn’t the only way you can personalize their experience. Below are some simple ways your employees can take personalization into their day-to-day:
Give your customers contactless options
Focus on the customer in front of you
Introduce employees and customers by name
Celebrate your customers’ birthdays
Go the extra mile
Put yourself in your customers’ shoes
7. Give your customers contactless options
The way customers are shopping is changing. One of the biggest trends making its way through the retail industry is offering contactless options throughout the shopping journey. Whether that’s curbside pickup, or contactless payments, customers need to know you have their interests and safety in mind. Train your staff on how to interact with customers and make sure to offer sufficient options for pick up and shipping.
8. Focus on the customer in front of you
We have all been there. The phone is ringing, you may have online orders to fill, and there’s a line of folks that need to be checked out at the register. Juggling responsibilities comes with the territory when you own a small business.
That said, no one is more important than the customer waiting to be attended to in your shop. All it takes is a few angry customers and negative Yelp reviews to dent business sales. So when in doubt, put the phone caller on hold and focus on delivering a stellar in-store experience.
9. Introduce employees and customers by name
In today’s retail world, you literally have seconds to connect with customers and make a good impression. If you need to turn over a customer to another employee, introduce your co-worker by name and make sure you use your customer’s name as well. Referring to others by name during a sales interaction makes the experience feel personal, building a connection that’s hard to break.
10. Celebrate your customers’ birthdays
An easy way to win customers is to help them celebrate their special days. Have customers sign up for a birthday club with the month and day of their birth, and make a note of this in your POS system or loyalty program so that you’re alerted when the time comes. You can send them an email or postcard thanking them for their patronage, offer a gift waiting at your store or treat them to a discount during the month of their birth.
11. Go the extra mile
If your customer wants something that they can’t find in your store, offer them options. Head to that back room to look for those cute boots in size 8, even if you’re pretty sure they’re not there. Offer them a rain check or the opportunity to order now and enjoy free delivery when the item restocks. Even if they turn you down, most customers will remember the extra effort. They might even share their experience with friends and family, or on social media, helping to spread the word about your business.
12. Put yourself in your customers’ shoes
Understanding what your customer is feeling is key to forging the kind of bond that invites them to come back to your shop and gives them a truly personalized experience. Is your customer stressed because they need an outfit for a special occasion or a job interview? Are they exhausted from a long day? Excellent people skills are essential when running a retail business. The more you relate to your customers and their emotional needs, the better experience they’ll have.
13. Make your checkout process is seamless
Nobody likes waiting in line and they shouldn’t! There are many ways to make your checkout process as painless as possible.
From scheduling customers for appointment shopping to making sure customers respect social distancing and having enough staff ready, the way you handle check out says a lot about your store to your customers. Keep your checkout line clearly marked, and add appropriate distancing so customers know where to stand without disrupting others. If you have a cloud-based POS, equip staff members with iPads so they can help customers check out wherever they are.
The same goes for your online checkout. Skip the lengthy process and make sure to keep your checkout short and sweet. Better yet, allow customers to finalize their shopping as a guest without having to make an account. Another great tip? Make sure your checkout section has information readily available regarding shipping, payment information and other FAQs so your customers can have all their questions answered in one place without having to look around.
The checkout experience is your last chance to finalize a sale and might also set the tone for any future visits to your store or website.
Here are some tips on how your staff can make the best impression possible at checkout:
Tell every customer your policies
Give paying patrons a gift
Be discreet if a customer’s card is declined
Ask for feedback
Also, remember that the checkout process provides a great opportunity to collect customer data. Of course, you want to make this experience as seamless as possible, which is where a good POS system comes into play.
A solution like Lightspeed makes it easy to capture customer information at checkout, so can create shoppers profiles and further personalize their shopping experience.
Take for example, the jewelery store Melissa Joy Manning. According Melissa, she decided to switch to Lightspeed in part because of the our platform’s ability to collect customer data.
“What we were using was archaic,” recounts Melissa. “We were looking for more custom customer information. A lot of the things that we were looking at did not store customer information.”
Fast forward to today—Melissa and her team can capture shopper information efficiently at the checkout counter.
Switching gave her stores the access to the CRM capabilities they needed—now every time a customer checks out, they can capture contact information and purchase history notes, enriching their marketing campaigns.
14. Tell every customer your policies
Make sure every customer who makes a purchase understands what your exchange and return policies are. If you also sell online, see to it that your privacy policy is super clear. If they leave under the impression that they can return an item, and then learn that they can only exchange it, they can end up feeling frustrated and angry.
15. Give paying patrons a gift
Another way to end the checkout experience on the right foot is by giving out freebies. People love free stuff and humans naturally feel indebted to those who have done something for them, so by offering them something free of charge you implicitly trigger the part of them that feels indebted to you. Whether it’s a cold drink on a hot day, a candy jar full of treats by the checkout counter or a plate of free samples, do something to tap into your customers’ mental desire to reciprocate.
16. Be discreet if a customer’s credit card is declined
Unfortunately, sometimes things don’t go as planned, and when it comes to shopping, very little is as embarrassing or stressful as having a credit card or debit card declined in public.
Think how you would feel, and respond in a way that doesn’t draw too much attention to the situation. Inform the customer that there is an issue with their credit card and ask them if they would like to opt for another payment method. This combination of good customer service and basic human empathy are a sure way to turn a bad experience into a good or neutral one.
17. Ask for feedback
Your job as a retailer is to meet your customers’ needs—and how will you know what they need if you don’t ask? It’s easy to link online surveys to codes on checkout receipts so you can provide a small gift when your customers opt-in, or ask if they can fill out a quick hard copy survey right there in the store.
18. Say “Thank you”
Of course, you want to thank customers when they complete a purchase. But that’s not the only time you should be saying “thank you.” Show your appreciation to everyone who visits your establishment, whether they make a purchase or not. Did one of your customers recently make a huge purchase? Send them a personal thank you email, or drop a thank you note (with a discount for future purchases) in their bag or mailbox.
19. Stay present without hovering
As a retailer, you have to strike a careful balance between being helpful and being overzealous. It’s one of the more nuanced customer service skills. Customers want you to be available to answer questions, open a dressing room or ring up a purchase the second they’re ready—but they don’t want you hovering over them as they browse.
The secret? Keep yourself busy straightening shelves, and use your peripheral vision to wait for that moment when your customers start looking around.
20. Never turn away from an approaching customer
There’s no excuse for turning away from a customer. It doesn’t matter if the phone’s ringing, you’re about to start your lunch break, or you really need to run to the restroom. If a customer is approaching you, smile, greet them and offer your services. If you absolutely have to step away, make sure they’re clear on who else is around to support them or how they can get your attention when ready.
21. Smile
No one wants to be waited on by a grumpy or condescending salesperson. As tough as the job might be, the same goes for your customer service representatives. According to a study on the hidden benefits of smiling, waitresses who smiled made more tips than non-smiling waitresses. If you make smiling a priority in your retail shop, you’ll create a welcoming atmosphere for your customers.
22. Establish procedures for dealing with unhappy customers
Not every sales interaction might start out on a good note, making it all the more important to empower your sales staff to treat angry customers well. Establish written procedures to help employees know what to do if a transaction goes south, and train them in the customer service skills needed to always make unhappy customers feel valued.
Give them the authority to issue returns, make exchanges or provide extra merchandise without having to ask for approval from higher-ups.
23. Encourage patience
Yes, certain customers can be challenging to deal with—but what if those very shoppers are your most profitable? Establish a storewide attitude of patience. Consider rewarding salespeople not just for hitting sales numbers but also for dealing with demanding customers successfully.
24. Never say, “I Don’t Know”
When you say, “I don’t know,” your customer hears “I don’t care.” Instead, when you truly don’t know the answer to your customer’s question, say, “Let me look into that”—and then do whatever it takes to find the right answer or to turn your customer over to someone with the answer.
25. Don’t make promises you can’t keep
Promotions are great for attracting new and repeat customers, but nothing is more frustrating than offers with lots of fine print and multiple strings attached. Be honest and upfront about what your business can offer and deliver.
Also, if you send out a flyer with an offer that forgot to mention the expiration date, honor it. Clickbait offers might attract a lot of foot traffic, but they can also run your reputation to the ground if you’re not careful.
26. Create a comfortable break room for employees
You might be wondering how this has anything to do with excelling in customer service—the happier employees are, the more productive they are likely to be. Your employees work hard, and they’re on their feet for hours at a time. They deserve to take their breaks in a space that’s comfortable and truly relaxing. Small changes like providing a comfortable chair or two and stocking snacks to keep your staff’s blood sugar from dropping, can reenergize an employee who’s having a tough day.
27. Stay positive
When customers try on a zillion outfits and leave them all over the dressing room floor without buying a thing or when you spend an hour demonstrating software or appliances and your customer decides they’re going to make their purchase on Amazon, staying positive can be difficult.
That said, developing and maintaining a positive mental attitude is essential for any business that relies on consistent sales. Train staff to be solution-focused and efficiently manage negative emotions when they come up.
What are some examples of good customer service?
This article just offered several tips to help you level up your customer service. Now, let’s take a look at some real life examples of good customer service in retail, to help inspire your efforts.
The sales employee who takes the time to find the perfect fit
Earlier this year, I swung by the Sunglass Hut location in SoHo, as I needed a new pair of sunglasses. The associate manning the store was super friendly and offered to help after noticing that I was unsure of what to buy.
She took the time to find out what I needed and what my preferences were, and then she walked me through the different brands they had. She then hand-picked pairs of sunglasses that best fit the shape of my head, and even brought out an eyewear tray so we could easily compare different products.
It was a great experience and I appreciated the employee’s sincere effort.
Emulate this example by exerting more effort to help your customers in need. This could mean different things, depending on your store. For example, you could accompany a shopper to the shelf where an item is located instead of just saying “It’s in Aisle 4.” Or, like the associate above, you could bring out different products to help the shopper compare items.
The retailer offering a sincere apology
Things don’t always go your or your customer’s way, and it’s during times like these that your customer service is really put to test. While the “right” way to deal with unpleasant situations will depend on your circumstances, often you’ll fare a lot better if you apologize and try to compensate for what happened.
DSW offers a great example of the right way to deal with mishaps. According to Mikaela Kornowski, Marketing & PR Executive at OFFPRICE Show, “Lost packages, website glitches, and other unforeseen issues are always going to plague retailers, but excellent customer service in light of those mishaps will be rewarded with loyal shoppers.”
“DSW’s website crashed this fall, leaving many shoppers like myself stranded mid-checkout. The next day I received an apology in my inbox with a note letting me know their flash sale was extended because of the mishap. And guess what? I bought the shoes… and a few more pairs since then!”
Keep this example in mind the next time there’s a mishap at your store. Remember that even if the situation isn’t necessarily your fault, saying sorry that a customer is having difficulties can go a long way. And if there was an error on your end, do your best to own the mistake and make it up to the customer. Is there a way to reverse the error? Can you offer a discount instead? Find a way to make it up to the customer and go from there.
The retailer who makes an effort to upsell and educate customers
Think upselling is sleazy or bad for customer service? Not if you do it right. If you take the time to educate customers before they purchase and tailor your recommendations to their needs, the customer will likely leave happy.
Case in point: a while back, I took my toddler shopping at our local shoe store for kids. We encountered a great associate who helped him select and try on different pairs of shoes.
The associate then came up to me and said, “I noticed your son’s feet were a bit sweaty. What types of socks is he using?”
I told him we just used standard cotton socks.
“Cotton isn’t ideal for sweaty feet,” he replied. Do you want me to show you some of the socks we have that can help?”
He proceeded to tell me about the various types of socks they carried, the materials they were made out of, and which ones would work best for my son. I ended up buying a couple of pairs, and I was thrilled with my purchase because it did wonders for my son’s feet.
The key takeaway? Train your associates to upsell and cross-sell. Encourage them to pay attention to each customer and determine any potential needs or wants they may have. In the example above, the associate took note of the fact that my son had sweaty feet, and then made the right call by recommending the right type of socks for him.
It’s also important that associates educate your customers. Upselling or cross-selling shouldn’t just be about pushing products. See to it that shoppers know the benefits of the products you’re pitching and why they should buy it.
The online merchant who sends personalized video message to each new customer
Sending welcome messages to new customers is a common practice in online retail, but here’s something you don’t see every day: a personalized video message thanking the customer for making their first purchase.
Magic Mind, the maker of the popular productivity drink, is doing just that. When I made my first purchase with the company, I was pleasantly surprised to receive a personalized video message from Rebecca, one of Magic Mind’s team members.
Not only did she mention me by name, but she took the time to tell me a bit more about the brand and the results that Magic Mind customers have achieved.
Try to do something similar in your business by coming up with personalized ways to welcome new customers. Like Magic Mind, you could opt to record personal videos to really make shoppers feel welcome. In some cases, a tailored note or phone call might be a better fit.
Get creative. See what your competitors are doing to engage new customers, and ensure that your strategy is better.
The online store that proactively addresses shipping issues
When you’re selling online, problems with shipping and delivery come with the territory. Between missed deliveries, damaged shipment, and supply chain delays, there are a host of problems that could arise.
And while these issues technically aren’t your fault, you are still responsible for the customer experience.
That’s why it’s important to closely track customer orders and ensure their products get to their hands safely and on time. In the event that something goes wrong, stay ahead of the situation by immediately getting in touch with shoppers (rather than waiting for them to contact you) and aim to rectify the situation.
That’s what the food delivery service Yumble did when its courier was experiencing delays in delivering the meals. Instead of doing nothing or waiting until shoppers got in touch, Yumble proactively emailed customers about the problem and even issued a $10 credit to make up for the inconvenience.
The retailer who finds a way around stockouts
While the best way to deal with out-of-stocks is to avoid them altogether, you can turn an unpleasant stockout situation into a positive one with the right customer service.
Here’s a cool example from Real Canadian Superstore. A customer decided to use the store’s click-and-collect service by ordering her groceries online and then opting to pick up her purchases at the store.
According to her Instagram post, some of the products she ordered were unavailable, so one of Superstore’s employees called her up and offered substitutes.
The whole experience was smooth and efficient, and the customer was so happy with Real Canadian Superstore’s service, that she raved about them on social media.
The cashier who forges a local connection with shoppers
This particular instance isn’t strictly about retail, but it’s still a great example of notable customer service.
I was purchasing a drink from a local cafe, and the cashier behind the counter noticed I had a business card from a nearby eyebrow threading place.
“Oh, you go there too? Aren’t they the best?” she said.
We then had a quick chat about why we love the business and our experiences with their services.
It was a brief encounter, but certainly a memorable one. I loved that the cashier established a connection by referencing something local that we both liked.
That effort didn’t take much, but it went a long way as far as customer service goes. Why? Because so few people do it. The majority of cashiers just ring up sales and spout impersonal lines like “How was everything?” or “Have a nice day.”
Don’t be one of them. Make the checkout process as pleasant as you can by making an effort to connect with the customer. Doing so could be just the thing that keeps you top of mind and gets them to come back.
Creating connections through customer service
Customers have become accustomed to a certain level of service. With so much competition, the bar for customer service is high, and will likely keep increasing as retail stores continue innovating the way they do business.
Having a highly trained team that understands customer needs and is equipped with great technology to support them, will help you build long-term relationships between your store and the customer. By allowing staff to focus on the people rather than worry about the nitty-gritty of inputting manual information, they’ll be able to create connections with customers that go past a simple sale and will pave the way to future purchases.
Find out how Lightspeed can help your staff focus on what matters most: great customer service. Watch a demo today!
Cloud Broken Link Checker Repairs Broken Links Faster and Supercharges Your SEO
WPMU DEV’s free all-new and improved Broken Link Checkerplugin saves you the time and tedious hassle of handling crucial link management tasks across all your WordPress sites.
“I have been looking to find an easier way to check for broken links. Thank you for making this tool so accessible.” Dena, WPMU DEV Member
Broken links are a negative indicator of site health and can have a major impact on your PageRank and your reputation. Staying on top of your site links is an essential and crucial aspect of good WordPress site management.
But… manually checking your content for broken links is time-consuming and tedious excruciating, especially if you manage multiple WordPress sites.
“This is potentially going to save a ton of time! Before now I’ve always done a manual check on all sites I create.” TNT Systems, WPMU DEV Member
This article shows you how to use our powerful link checking tool on unlimited WordPress sites – completely re-engineered with a top user-requested feature and a new API that works 20x faster, to deliver better and more accurate results, prevent negative SEO performance issues, and improve user experience.
We also include a comprehensive guide covering all you need to know about why link management is important and how to effectively manage broken links on all of your sites.
We’ll cover the following topics:
Let’s jump right in and take a look at the only tool you’ll ever need to check and repair broken links on unlimited WordPress sites.
Broken Link Checker is now even better and faster at finding broken links on WordPress sites.
WPMU DEV acquired Broken Link Checker many years back from ManageWP, and since then have implemented many tweaks and fixes to improve its capabilities, growing its popularity to 700K downloads and its user satisfaction to 4/5 stars.
[NB: Special shoutouts to Patrick Walker, Team Lead at WP Engine’s Customer Experience Operations Team for his hard work in collaboration with our engineers to get our plugin removed from WP Engine’s and Flywheel’s block list and to Kinsta for recommending our cloud-based service.]
While we plan to continue maintaining and improving the old plugin version for the thousands of users who are still currently using it, starting from versions 2.0 and onward, we’ve also introduced a new cloud-based link checking plugin for WordPress.
Note: We’ll focus the rest of this article on our Cloud Link Checker. For more information on using the old (Local) BLC plugin, visit the plugin download page on WordPress.org.
Why Two Different Link Checking Engines?
The old Broken Link Checker plugin (we now call this version Local Link Checker) is a great tool currently used and loved by thousands of WordPress users to keep their URLs healthy.
If you love it, feel free to keep using it. Keep in mind, however, that it depends on your site’s resources to run scans, which can be affected by your hosting plan’s available resources, and, depending on what plugins are installed on your site, could cause conflicts or WP/PHP errors.
Our latest innovation — a cloud-based plugin — takes things to a whole new level and opens the door to an entirely new scope of possibilities that we couldn’t achieve before by integrating the best of the Local BLC plugin with cloud capabilities directly into The Hub (our all-in-one WordPress platform), all at no additional cost to users.
For example, some of the benefits of the new cloud-based BLC include:
Scalability: Cloud Link Checker runs on WPMU DEV’s engines not the individual site where the plugin is installed, so you can run broken link scans on sites of any size and server type.
Blazing Fast Scans: Being cloud-based means any dependencies on the performance of your server are eliminated, giving your scans a massive speed increase.
No Risk of Blocklisting: Pinging external sites repeatedly from your website raises suspicious flags with internet service providers and puts your site at risk of being blocklisted. Cloud BLC doesn’t use your site’s IP address, so there’s no risk of your site(s) being blocklisted.
Faster Updates and Instant Improvements: No more waiting for plugin version releases or worrying whether you site’s resources can handle the changes. We test, fix, and improve everything on the cloud and your site benefits instantly as soon as we deploy the changes and improvements to our engine..
Eliminate WordPress and PHP Errors: Our cloud-based link checker doesn’t run on your site’s resources, so you won’t experience site resource errors using the plugin.
Crawl Everything: Cloud Link Checker follows the same logic as search engine crawlers, so no URLs are missed on all standard pages and posts, menus, category pages, etc. Even better, use scheduled reports to discover broken links before the search engines see them.
WPMU DEV’s Cloud-based Link Checker provides better performance and faster speed.
Cloud BLC scans your site from top to bottom, monitoring external and internal links in your posts, pages, comments, blogroll – even custom fields.
It detects links that don’t work, as well as missing images and redirects. It will then notify you via the Broken Link Checker section of the Hub, or you can view a summary of the results in the plugin dashboard of your WordPress site.
“Love this new tool, especially since it runs off-site and doesn’t hog server resources.” Levi, WPMU DEV Member
Whether you’re an existing Broken Link Checker plugin user or new to the tool, setup is a breeze.
You can set up the plugin from the WordPress dashboard plugin and from WPMU DEV’s Hub.
Let’s look at both methods.
From the WordPress Dashboard
Cloud Link Checker activation in the WordPress dashboard.
Install and activate the plugin.
Go to the Link Checker menu and select Cloud.
If you’re logged into WPMU DEV, click ‘Enable Cloud Engine’ (otherwise, the button will say ‘Connect to WPMU DEV’), and you’ll be taken through The Free Hub onboarding process, as well as the broken links checking tool component. This will lead you directly to the BLC service tab in The Free Hub.
From here, run a new scan. You’ll get a notification once the scan completes, so feel free to look around The Free Hub while you wait.
Once you receive notification that the scan is complete, you can view the results in the Broken Link Checker section of The Free Hub.
From The Hub
Broken Link Checker activation in The Hub.
After logging into The Hub, you’ll see Broken Link Checker listed as a new service in the menu (top & sidebar).
Activate this to install the plugin on the site.
Run a scan to see your results.
However you choose to install the Cloud Link Checker, the WordPress dashboard will display the Summary Report, while The Hub will have the Full Report – including the list of broken and dead links.
Scan results in the WordPress dashboard.
Click View Full Report to see the full scan report in The Hub.
The Hub displays a detailed list of your broken URLs after scanning.
Aside from locating your broken links, missing images, and redirects, the plugin has additional functions that let you schedule scans, send reports by email, search (with built-in filters), and export your lists for download.
Edit/Unlink Broken Links
Our members spoke…and we listened!
One of the most requested features for this tool was the ability to edit and unlink broken links.
We’re thrilled to announce that in addition to ignoring and reporting links as not broken, you can now also easily edit and unlink broken links from The Hub.
Simply click on the vertical ellipsis (3 dots) to the right of any link listed in the Hub’s scan report and select one of the available options.
Edit, Unlink, Ignore, or Report links as Not Broken.
Select Edit Link to point the link to a new URL, Unlink to remove the link and change it to plain text, or select one of the other options to ignore the link or to report false positives (note: we use Not Broken reports to improve BLC’s engine).
Note: New scans are temporarily disabled while the system is performing editing or unlinking operations. You can run a new scan after these processes have completed.
Also, to keep reports manageable, if the scan detects multiple instances of the same broken link URL, the report only displays the first 10 instances and notifies you how many other instances there are.
Scan reports are kept manageable by displaying only the first 10 URLs for the same broken link.
You can choose to edit or unlink only the first 10 visible links, or perform the operation on all instances of that same link.
Edit (or unlink) only the first 10 links or all links.
Note that the tool does not scan hardcoded links written in php files (eg template files, shortcodes, etc.).
Run Manual Scans
You can run a manual scan any time, in both the WordPress dashboard and The Hub. Just hit the blue Run Scan button. This can be helpful if you’ve done some clean up, and want to refresh your view of the list.
Schedule Scans & Send Reports by Email
Scheduling scans is done from the Broken Link Checker plugin section in the WordPress dashboard.
Schedule new scans for broken link checks in your WordPress dashboard.
At least one recipient must be added to schedule reports, so that it can be sent to a party via email.
Click on the cog icon to see the menu options for scanning.
From the Schedule Scan section, click Configure. Check that you are on the Schedule Date tab from the top menu.
Choose the Frequency, from Daily, Weekly, Monthly.
Select desired time, day, or date from the dropdown options; then click Save.
The plugin provides many options for scheduling scans.
Now we will add recipients (at least one), so the report has a destination to be sent to:
Click on the Add Recipients tab.
You can either Add Users, from the list of those you’ve already added to the site, or Add By Email, for anyone at all. Remember to Save Changes.
Adding recipients to get scan reports via email is fast and easy.
You can deactivate the scheduled scan or change the sending schedule, as well as who it goes to, at any time.
Search
To easily locate your URLs, search results can be filtered from within The Hub.
From the summary screen, you can use the dropdowns to filter by Status or Domain.
Use the built-in filters to locate items more easily in your Broken URL list.
Export Lists
You can export your broken URL lists anytime in CSV format.
To do this, simply click the Export as CSV button from the summary screen in The Hub.
And … that’s it! You’re now a BLC pro.
Keep your site’s links healthy with the best free broken link checker tool for WordPress.
“I love this! Offsetting the resources to the cloud will help so many sites!” PTaubman, WPMU DEV Member
“But I’m happy with Local BLC and I don’t run multiple sites…”
If you want to keep using the older plugin, you don’t have to switch to Cloud Link Checker. Local BLC will keep working just fine and you can easily switch to the cloud version at any time inside your WordPress admin.
You can switch between cloud and local link checker inside the WordPress admin.
Just keep in mind that you can only activate one engine at a time, so if the Cloud engine is running, Local Link Checker will be inactive and vice-versa.
Switch link checker engines inside your WordPress dashboard.
Note: if you run a multisite installation, BLC cloud version will only be available on the main site when network-activated. Due to the complexity of scanning multisite, subsites will continue to use the BLC Local version.
Cloud Link Checker – Perfect For Agencies
Being able to manage all of your sites from one place (The Hub) and send clients white labeled reports makes Cloud Link Checker the perfect solution for agencies, freelancers, and anyone running multiple WordPress sites.
Clients will love you even more when they see you’ve taken care of their broken links.
You can also use the tool with a customized report as a way to generate new clients for your agency and upsell WordPress maintenance services to existing clients.
Use BLC with whitelabel reports to generate new clients and upsell maintenance services.
Compare our plugin with other broken link checking tools and you will quickly see why WPMU DEV’s cloud-based link checker is a no-brainer.
For example, here’s one of our competitors’ offering:
Free version limitations:
Only one website allowed.
Only 200 links checked per month.
Only internal links are checked.
Links are checked once every 3 days.
Cost: $30/month (credit card required to sign up).
Whereas, with WPMU DEV’s Cloud Link Checker…
No limitations:
Unlimited number of websites.
Unlimited number of links.
Internal and External links are checked (Local and Cloud versions).
Set your own schedule (Local and Cloud versions).
Manually check all your sites anytime.
Cost: Free (priority support included for members only).
No credit card required to sign up.
To get the full picture of what our broken links checker can do, see the plugin documentation.
Now that we’ve shared the good news with you about a powerful WordPress troubleshooting tool every web developer (and user) should have in their site management toolbox, let’s take a closer look at the harm broken links can cause if left unchecked and why you need a tool like Broken Link Checker.
How Broken Links Affect SEO
High-quality, relevant, and authoritative links are crucial to a website’s SEO and reputation. Broken links can have several negative impacts on search engine optimization, including:
1. Crawling and Indexing Issues: Search engine crawlers follow links to discover and index web pages. In fact, Google cites good working links as a best practice. When a crawler encounters a broken link, it cannot access the linked page and may struggle to navigate through your website effectively. This can prevent certain pages from being indexed, making them invisible to search engines and reducing their chances of appearing in search results.
2. Increased Bounce Rates: Bounce rate measure how long users spend time on a particular web page before “bouncing” to another one. Visitors who stumble upon broken links may abandon a site altogether. When visitors repeatedly choose to leave a web page almost immediately after landing on it, this leads to a high bounce rate, which sends a “low-quality” signal to search engines about the site.
3. Decreased Search Engine Rankings: Search engines aim to deliver the best user experience by providing relevant and high-quality search results. Websites with broken links may be considered less reliable and valuable by search engines, leading to lower rankings in search results. This can result in reduced organic traffic and visibility for your website.
4. Impact on Internal Link Structure: Broken links disrupt the internal link structure of your website. Internal linking helps search engines understand the relationships between different pages and establishes a hierarchy of importance. When broken links exist within this structure, it can confuse search engines and weaken the overall SEO structure of your website.
5. Lost Backlink Opportunities: Backlinks are an important factor in SEO, as they indicate the authority and relevance of your website. If other websites link to broken pages on your site, it can negatively impact your backlink profile. Broken links may deter other webmasters from linking to your site, reducing your chances of acquiring valuable backlinks.
To mitigate the negative impact of broken links on SEO, it is crucial to regularly monitor and fix them. Conducting regular website audits, using tools to identify broken links like BLC, and implementing redirects or updating links can help improve user experience, maintain search engine rankings, and enhance the overall SEO performance of your website.
Broken Links Can Also Harm Your Business
In addition to impacting your site’s SEO, broken links can also cause serious damage to your business and its reputation. This includes:
1. Poor User Experience: Studies show that 89% of consumers will shop with a competitor after having a poor user experience on a site. Broken links create a negative user experience by leading visitors to dead-end pages or error messages. Users expect links to provide relevant information or resources, and encountering broken links can be frustrating. This can decrease user engagement, increase bounce rates, and ultimately harm your website’s reputation.
2. Negative Impact on Revenue: Broken links can sometimes cause roadblocks in your sales conversion process. Investing money and time into marketing efforts to get potential customers to your site then losing sales because they cannot reach conversion pages means wasted time and lost revenue.
3. Security Vulnerabilities: Broken links can also lead to malicious attacks on your site, phishing scams, and broken links hijacking (see below)
What is Broken Links Hijacking (BLH)?
Broken Links Hijacking (BLH) refers to the practice of exploiting expired, unlinked, or inactive external links found within a webpage.
It involves malicious actors taking advantage of resources or third-party services that are no longer available or valid, such as due to expired domains. These attackers can seize control of these links to carry out various harmful activities, including defacement through acquiring expired domains, impersonation, or even cross-site scripting.
Attack Scenario and Security Risks
Let’s imagine a scenario where a business shuts down or forgets to create a social media page but still has the link to that page on its website. In this case, an attacker can simply create an account using the same name and then proceed to post offensive content or launch phishing attacks while pretending to be the business.
Illustrative Scenario
To illustrate this further, let’s consider a website called thewebsite.com that mentions a LinkedIn page URL but hasn’t actually created the page yet. As a result, when users try to visit the LinkedIn page using the URL (e.g., https://www.linkedin.com/company/the-website/), they encounter a “404 page not found” error.
Exploiting this situation, an attacker creates a fake LinkedIn page and customizes the URL to resemble “the-website.” Consequently, when a regular user accesses the company’s LinkedIn page through the URL, they unknowingly get redirected to the attacker’s controlled LinkedIn page.
What Causes Broken Links?
There are several factors that can lead to broken links. Some of the most common causes include:
1. Typo: Mistakes made when writing the link can result in broken links. This could be a simple error in typing or copy-pasting the URL incorrectly.
2. Deleted Pages: When a page is deleted from a website, any links pointing to that page will become broken. This can happen when content is removed or when a website undergoes restructuring.
3. Renamed Pages: If URLs are changed or pages are renamed without implementing proper redirects, the old links pointing to those pages will no longer work and lead to broken links.
4. Domain Name Change: When a website changes its domain name, any links pointing to the old domain will become broken unless appropriate redirects are in place.
Best Practices to Fix Broken Links
To fix broken links, it is important to follow these best practices:
1. Check Links with a Broken Link Checker (BLC): Use a reliable tool to identify broken links on your website. This will provide you with a list of broken links that need to be addressed.
2. Prioritize High Authority Pages: Start by addressing broken links on pages with high authority or those that receive significant traffic. Fixing these links will have a greater impact on your website’s overall performance.
3. Redirect to Relevant URLs: If a page has been deleted or its URL has changed, set up proper redirects (such as 301 redirects) to automatically send visitors to the relevant new URL. This ensures a seamless user experience and avoids 404 error pages.
Steps to Avoid and Fix 404 Pages
To prevent and resolve 404 pages (page not found errors), consider the following steps:
1. Preserve and Update Content: Instead of deleting pages outright, consider updating or refreshing the content. This helps avoid unnecessary 404 pages caused by removing content that other pages have linked to.
2. Implement 301 or 302 Redirects: If a page’s content still exists but its location or URL structure has changed, use 301 or 302 redirects to redirect visitors to the new page. This ensures they can still access the desired content without encountering a 404 error.
3. Reach Out to Webmasters for Updated Links: If a 404 error occurs due to an external website incorrectly linking to your content, you can try contacting the website’s author or web administrator. Requesting an update to the erroneous link can help resolve the issue, or alternatively, suggest changing the link altogether.
Fixing Broken Links: Manual vs Automated Methods
Fixing broken links has long been considered an essential practice among SEO practitioners. Broken links should be fixed quickly.
Google understands that broken links are a natural happening. However, SEOs know that taking time to correct these issues can significantly impact the site’s performance in search engines.
For these reasons and more, it’s clearly important to keep tabs on all of your site links. A small site with minimal content can easily handle checking for broken links manually. However, the more content your site has, the more difficult it becomes to conduct manual scans of your links.
Fixing broken links manually on a website and using automated methods each have their own benefits:
Benefits of Using Manual Methods to Fix Broken Links
1. Accuracy: When fixing broken links manually, you have full control and can ensure that each link is checked and corrected accurately. This allows for a more precise and tailored approach to resolving broken links.
2. Customization: Manual fixing allows you to review each broken link individually and determine the best course of action. You can update the URL, remove the link, or find alternative resources as needed.
3. Quality control: By manually fixing broken links, you can ensure that the replacement URLs are relevant, trustworthy, and provide value to your users. It allows for a more thorough evaluation of the content being linked to.
4. User experience: Manually fixing broken links allows you to consider the user experience in the process. You can choose appropriate anchor text, update navigation menus, and ensure a seamless browsing experience for your visitors.
5. Content review: While fixing broken links manually, you can review the content surrounding the broken links. This presents an opportunity to update outdated information, improve the overall quality of the content, and enhance the SEO performance of the page.
Benefits of Using Automated Methods to Fix Broken Links
1. Time-saving: Automated tools can scan your website and identify broken links quickly, saving you time and effort compared to manually checking each link individually.
2. Efficiency: With automated methods, you can fix broken links in bulk rather than addressing them one by one. This can be especially useful for large websites with a high volume of broken links.
3. Scalability: Automated tools can handle the detection and fixing of broken links on websites of any size. They can efficiently process a large number of links, ensuring comprehensive coverage.
4. Regular monitoring: Automated methods allow for regular and scheduled scans of your website, ensuring that new broken links are promptly identified and addressed.
5. Consistency: Using automated tools ensures a consistent approach to fixing broken links across your entire website. This helps maintain a unified user experience and prevents oversight of any broken links.
The choice between using manual and automated methods depends on your specific needs, resources, and preferences. The good news is, all of the risks associated with bad links are easily avoided if you make sure they are kept in proper working order.
Even better, is using a quality, automated dead link checker tool like Broken Link Checker removes the tedious and time consuming task of manually tracking and manging your broken links.
Over 700,000 WordPress users depend on Broken Link Checker to keep their sites free of errors and performance issues caused by outdated and non-working URLs.
Our new cloud-based plugin version offers even more incredible value — enhanced speeds, no PHP/DB errors, ability to schedule scans and send email reports (including white labeled), plus the ease of managing unlimited sites from one central Hub – all while still (and always) remaining free.
Don’t let your site’s SEO and user experience take an unnecessary hit. Especially when a practical solution is directly within your reach.
Connect, scan, schedule, and fix broken links quickly and easily and keep your sites running optimally with the new Cloud-based Link Checker. Get it for free or as a WPMU DEV member.
Last mile delivery services are costly and complicated aspects of retail logistics, but also have the most visible impact on the customer journey and consumer satisfaction.
As consumers turn to ecommerce for more and more of their shopping needs, last mile delivery causes trouble in urban areas around the globe. Increasing parcel volumes means an increase in delivery vans entering cities and adds to an already staggering array of logistical and environmental nightmares.
What can a retailer do to deliver items as fast as possible and provide an excellent customer experience while staying profitable? This article will walk you through final mile delivery and how to optimize it for your retail business.
What is last mile delivery?
Last mile delivery includes everything associated with getting a product from the closest hub or warehouse to the customer. It’s not really only the last mile; it is a broad term used to describe the last leg of the delivery journey.
How much does last mile delivery cost?
Multiple delivery routes, packing requirements, waiting times at dispatch, and low load sizes are factors that influence both cost and speed of delivery. Last mile costs vary, with estimates citing between $10 and $50 per package—trending toward the higher end for heavy items. For comparison, failed deliveries cost an average $17.20 per instance.
Last mile delivery process
The last mile delivery process is simple in theory, but challenging to execute. Here are the main five steps in the process:
1. Customer places an order
The whole process is kicked off when a customer places an order, usually on your website but also in-store. This order is sent to your centralized order system, which processes and organizes the order accordingly. It’ll automatically route the order for last mile delivery, based on your parameters. Associated order data includes the customer address, products ordered, and shipping preferences.
2. Products arrive at your warehouse or distribution center
Your suppliers or manufacturers then ship the products in the order to your warehouse or distribution center. This is where the items are sorted, organized, and prepared for dispatch to their respective destinations.
3. Staff designates the order to delivery personnel
Your or your team then assigns the order to the appropriate delivery personnel. Delivery location, shipping preferences, delivery schedule, and the capacity of each vehicle are factored into this process.
4. Items are scanned onto the delivery vehicle
Before departing for their destination, the items are loaded onto the delivery vehicles. Each product is scanned and accounted for—you can often use real-time tracking to monitor exactly where the items are in their journey. It also syncs with your other systems to maintain accurate inventory management and minimize the risk of errors or lost shipments.
5. Courier receives proof of delivery from the customer
The delivery personnel completes the delivery. Here, they obtain a proof of delivery from the customer, either in the form of an electronic signature or a physical document.
Try Shopify POS for omnichannel selling
Bring your in-store and online sales together with Shopify POS. Gain insights about your business from one view so you can work smarter, move faster, and think bigger.
Challenges of last mile delivery
Slower travel speeds
Lost deliveries
Returns
Environmental factors
Reducing the cost of last-mile delivery is a prime objective of retailers.
Slower travel speeds
Delivery points vary greatly in distance and drop size. Customers may be spread several miles apart, with only one or two items being delivered at each location. In urban areas, drop-off points may be closer together, but more subject to traffic congestion and delays.
As ecommerce has grown, the volume of deliveries has gone up at an exponential rate. This has compounded the complexity and amplified the inefficiencies.
💡 PRO TIP:Shopify local delivery is a set of flexible tools that let you offer shoppers local delivery options at checkout. Set delivery zones, add pricing conditions for each zone, manage and prepare orders for delivery, and create optimized delivery routes for drivers from Shopify.
Lost deliveries
Deliveries fail when people aren’t at home or at the final destination to accept delivery. Failed deliveries are expensive: time, energy, and resources are wasted. Business customers aren’t always able to accept delivery outside agreed time windows or without appointments.
When deliveries arrive late, customers complain and are likely to take their business elsewhere. When deliveries do arrive on time as promised, consumers are rarely notified of when to expect their package, creating frustration.
Returns
Reverse logistics is a major contributor to last-mile costs; the number of product returns is growing, especially in apparel, books and electronics.
The last mile logistics will still take place as usual, but then be repeated in reverse order, doubling the cost. Many retailers are using third parties to aggregate and batch their returns to reduce the number of trips.
💡 PRO TIP: With Shopify POS, you can accept exchanges for purchases made online or at another store location and your inventory will be updated instantly—no manual reconciliation required.
Environmental factors
Environmental issues are becoming a major concern for conscious consumers. Operating a transport fleet means there is pressure to reduce air pollution, noise emissions, and traffic congestion. This applies equally to a retailer’s own fleets, courier companies, and third-party logistics partners (3PL).
Compliance with regulations and achieving sustainability goals is vital, but it costs money. The trend toward alternative modes of freight transport such as electric and hybrid vehicles and smaller transit vans is growing. This should positively impact fuel costs and efficiency.
Optimizing last mile delivery
Let’s look at some ways to optimize last mile delivery for your store:
Rather than worry about last mile delivery costs and shipping times, shoppers can pick up their order for free on their own time. It’s also profitable for retailers. When athleisure brand Gym+Coffee implemented a click and collect program during the pandemic, it saw 350% year-over-year growth.
💡 PRO TIP: Set up local pickup in Shopify to start offering in-store pickup as a delivery option at checkout. Pay less on last-mile delivery, speed up fulfillment times on local orders, and drive more foot traffic to your stores.
Route planning
Route planning refers to creating cost-effective ways to get from one location to the next. Computing optimal routes manually is difficult, so route planning software solutions that combine multiple inputs are used to find the best delivery routes.
They take into account customers’ delivery windows, truck capacity, traffic congestion, and even weather, to minimize driving time and fuel spend. Drivers are directed to take the most efficient route possible, using real-time alerts.
Route planning software uses historical data, including the number of successful and failed deliveries, idle time, distance covered, time per delivery, and fuel used to identify inefficiencies and waste. Routes planned in advance can decrease the number of dispatchers needed and reduce the number of necessary drivers—both are cost savers.
The best routing app for Shopify merchants. This app connects right into your Shopify admin and lets you create routes, dispatch routes, and keep customers informed about their orders. EasyRoutes is free for up to 50 orders per month. The Lite plan starts at $15 per driver, per month.
Routific is a great route planning software for beginners. It features automated planning, live tracking, and route customization. Routific pricing starts at $49 per vehicle per month.
Route4Me is a good route management system for teams. It offers easy collaboration between members, real-time tracking, and route optimization. Pricing for Route4Me starts at $199 per month.
Proof of delivery
No matter how good your supply chain is, there’s always the chance a package won’t make it to the customer. Proof of delivery (POD) confirms that the customer received the package in good condition.
POD can be done two ways:
Digital. Where customers provide an electronic signature upon receiving an order.
Paper. Where customers sign a physical document after getting the package.
Digital PODs are evolving and go beyond the standard e-signature. Today, customers can “sign” for a packaging using:
Implementing proof of delivery options is a good way to reduce returns and save money. It also upholds your legal requirements as a retailer and ensures piece of mind for your delivery partner and the customer.
Crowdsourced delivery
Crowdsourcing is a new method of last mile delivery. Stores who crowdsource delivery services hire contractors to deliver packages. Using their own vehicles, drivers pick up and deliver packages to your customers from your warehouse or order fulfillment center.
The benefits of crowdsourcing delivery services include:
It offers a quick and easy way to offer same-day or on demand delivery.
You can scale up or down as needed.
You don’t need to build a delivery operation.
It satisfies shoppers’ desire for quick and convenient service.
Data shows that 8% of retailers already use crowdsourced delivery partners, and one-in-four plan to use them in the future. You can start by sourcing delivery service providers through apps like Postmates or TaskRabbit and test crowdsourcing for yourself.
Local delivery services
Another way to optimize last mile delivery is by offering local delivery services. When customers place an order on your website, someone from your store will bring it to their doorstep. It’s become a popular alternative to working with 3PLs or traditional couriers like FedEx or USPS.
Retailers from fashion stores to ice cream shops can offer local delivery, setting their own times and minimums to keep deliveries profitable.
The local delivery feature in Shopify makes it easy for you to offer local delivery at checkout. You can set your own delivery zones with separate pricing conditions, manage orders for delivery, and create optimized routes for drivers.
If you really want to optimize your last mile delivery process, you’ll want to get the technology to support it. In addition to the route planning software mentioned above, you might consider the following tools and platforms.
Onfleet
Onfleet is a last mile delivery management platform with features designed to streamline the entire delivery process, ensuring efficiency, transparency, and customer satisfaction. Optimize delivery routes, assign tasks to drivers, and track deliveries in real time through an intuitive dashboard. The platform also has route optimization features. Onfleet also has a customer-facing tracking page, which you can customize for your branding. Pricing starts at $500 per month.
TOSHI is your self-proclaimed “hyper-local last mile partner.” It works on ecommerce sites and in brick-and-mortar stores, with features to help you provide a great customer experience. Shoppers can select a scheduled one-hour delivery window to receive their package, and you can add other TOSHI services to the experience. It leverages electric vehicles and public service infrastructure for carbon neutral deliveries. It also has a TOSHI Shopify app.
XpressRun is another last mile delivery provider to help you execute these workflows. It combines logistics management tools and integrations for a comprehensive platform to help manage orders and deliveries. It works with multiple carriers to provide same-day and next-day delivery options, partnering with platforms like DoorDash, Frayt, Roadie, and SkipCart. XpressRun also has a Shopify app for easy integration.
Last mile delivery trends
Opening retail locations
Robots and drones
Micro warehousing
Opening retail locations
As shipping costs continue to rise, online retailers are moving toward opening pop-up shops or space in other stores. Traditionally, online brands like Allbirds and Warby Parker, have been experimenting with traditional retail for years.
The New York Timesreports that smaller, direct-to-consumer brands are taking advantage of the trend, securing short-term leases and building brand awareness in specific neighborhoods. A retail store gives you more opportunities to cut back on last mile supply costs by offering flexible purchasing options like BOPIS.
💡 PRO TIP: Get funding within days with Shopify Capital and avoid lengthy application processes, paperwork, and credit checks. Get the funds you need to open a retail store and invest in staff, inventory, and marketing, and pay it off as a flexible percentage of your sales.
Robots and drones
Automation is one last mile trend that everyone is thinking about, particularly the use of robots and drones. Last mile drone delivery is expected to be worth $9.8 billion by 2030, with retail goods delivery as the most common use case. In the future, 16% of retailers anticipate using drones for delivery.
Economies of scale will lower costs compared to hiring human delivery drivers, and increase efficiency. Work with logistics partners that are thinking seriously about how to integrate autonomous vehicles and robots into their distribution networks.
Micro warehousing
Micro-warehousing, or micro-fulfillment, refers to using a network of small fulfillment centers in densely populated areas to reduce delivery times and improve sustainability. A multi-billion dollar industry, micro-fulfillment is poised to change the supply chain landscape, making it easy for retailers to offer ultra-fast delivery and simple store replenishment.
Whether that’s delivering from stores, building out your own network, or partnering with a 3PL that specializes in micro-warehousing, you’ll be able to reduce costs while enhancing customer satisfaction.
Improve costs of your last mile delivery
Customer expectations for same-day deliveries are at an all-time high, thanks to services like Amazon Prime. While businesses and individuals are enjoying fast-paced service, fulfillment and logistics companies are feeling the pressure.
There’s a constant push to make the increased volumes of “last-mile” deliveries both practical and profitable. By following the strategies in this article, you’ll be well on your way to improving the delivery experience and customer satisfaction in your store.
Sell online and in-person with Shopify
Shopify POS is the easiest way to unify ecommerce and store sales and data. Have all the tools you need to manage inventory, track performance, understand customers, and sell everywhere in one easy-to-understand back office.
What is last mile delivery? FAQ
What is meant by the last mile delivery?
Last mile delivery refers to the movement of goods from a transportation hub to their final destination. It is the last step of the delivery process, and it ’s often the most complex and costly part of the supply chain. Last mile delivery often involves delivery to residential areas, where access can be difficult and traffic can be congested.
How is last mile delivery done?
Last mile delivery refers to the process of getting a product from a distribution center or warehouse to its final destination, usually the customer’s home. It’s typically the most expensive part of the delivery process, since it can involve multiple stops. Last mile delivery can be done in a variety of ways, such as using a fleet of company-owned delivery vehicles, contracting out to third-party delivery companies, or using a combination of both. In some cases, last mile delivery can be done via public transportation or bike couriers.
How long does last mile carrier take to deliver?
The exact time frame for last mile delivery will depend on the carrier, the type of delivery, and the distance that needs to be traveled. Generally speaking, last mile delivery can take anywhere from one to three days.
Inventory shrinkage is the bane of retailers everywhere. Even a moderate amount of shrinkage can have a big impact on your business, which is why it’s important to get your shrinkage rates as low as possible.
Don’t worry, though—we’re here to help you out. In this post, we’ll go over:
How well do you know your inventory?
Learn how an accurate, well-structured inventory management system can help you increase turnover, reduce markdowns and improve customer service.
What is inventory shrinkage?
Inventory shrinkage is when you lose inventory due to factors other than sales. It can generally be defined by the difference between your inventory levels on paper and your actual inventory levels.
If your inventory management system says you have 10 pairs of shoes in stock, but you actually have 9 on hand, and you can’t account for that lost pair through sales, your inventory has experienced shrinkage.
Shrinkage hurts retailers in two key ways:
Lost cost: when your inventory is lost to shrinkage, you’ve thrown the expenses involved in acquiring that stock out the window.
Lost profits: inventory represents more than just its cost to acquire. All of the stock on your shelves is potential cash flow waiting to be freed up by a sale. If your inventory shrinks, you have less assets available to acquire new inventory, pay sales staff and grow your business.
What factors contribute to or cause inventory shrinkage?
Inventory shrinkage doesn’t have one singular cause. The best way to combat shrinkage is to know where yours is coming from.
Some common inventory shrinkage causes include:
Shoplifting: shoplifting is more than straightforward theft. Price tag swapping also falls into this category, where a shoplifter pays less than what an item is worth because a different item’s SKU is recorded in the sale. The NRF’s National Retail Security Survey 2020 found that the average dollar loss per shoplifting incident has decreased compared to previous years, but shoplifting is still a key contributor to shrinkage.
Employee theft: employee theft is a significant contributor to shrinkage. Theft, fraudulent returns and neglecting to scan items for friends and family lead to mismatches in your inventory levels and can add up to big losses for your business.
Human entry error:poor inventory management isn’t just frustrating. It can lead to shrinkage as well. On its own, shrinkage due to administrative errors doesn’t necessarily mean lost cost—but it does mean lost profit, as you were likely forecasting more revenue than your actual inventory numbers can b0ring in.
Vendor error and theft: vendors can be subject to the same administrative errors as retailers, which can contribute to shrinkage. Some dishonest vendors can steal from you by not delivering a full order, though this is, by far, not the way the majority act. Vendor theft is not a very large contributor to shrinkage, and many retailers will not fall prey to it.
Damage:accidents happen! Sometimes goods are broken without any theft or administrative error being at fault.
How to calculate inventory shrinkage
Every time you sell an item, the value of your inventory on hand is reduced by the price of that item. Conversely, whenever you place a new order of stock, the value of your inventory increases by the amount you ordered. Your shrinkage is whatever discrepancies arise between the sales and orders you have recorded and the actual value of the inventory you have on hand.
Let’s say you have $200,000 worth of inventory according to your records. You do an inventory count and find you actually have $197,000 on hand. Your inventory has shrunk by $3,000.
So to calculate retail shrinkage, we follow this formula:
Retail value of recorded inventory levels – retail value of actual inventory levels = retail shrink
To better understand the impact of shrinkage, we can calculate it as a percentage in relation to your total sales. If we want to express retail shrinkage as a percentage, we follow this formula:
Total losses ÷ total sales = retail shrink percentage
What is an acceptable inventory shrinkage rate?
According to the National Retail Security Survey 2020, the retail industry’s average shrink rate has risen to an all-time high recently, after years of holding steady.
So if retailers are losing more than ever to shrinkage, what’s the shrink rate at? What is this all-time high?
1.62%.
It doesn’t take much shrinkage to make a noticeable impact on your business. An average shrink rate of 1.62% translates to $61.7 billion in losses across the industry.
As such, an acceptable inventory shrinkage rate is as small as possible.
How to control inventory shrinkage
Unless you find a way to completely eliminate accidental damage, you’ll always have some inventory shrinkage over the course of your business’s lifetime.
However, there are things you can do to get your shrinkage rate as low as possible.
Employ frequent cycle counting
If you’re not keeping an eye on your inventory levels, you’re vulnerable to being blindsided by shrinkage rates that you never even knew were a problem. However, full physical inventory counts are prohibitively time consuming—there’s a reason most retailers only count their entire stock once or twice a year.
Good stock management practices will help you keep on top of inventory shrinkage, though, so implement frequent cycle counting practices instead.
Cycle counting refers to the practice of counting a small amount of your inventory on an ongoing basis. You might do a weekly count of 10 different SKUs, for example, or you might pick 20 particular SKUs to count weekly for a month to monitor stock level changes for those products.
Either way, here’s how the process works:
Pick a section of your store to focus on.
Count the SKUs in that section of the store.
Compare the count to the stock levels in your inventory management software.
The goal is to always be on top of your inventory reconciliation to catch shrinkage as it happens. If you have inventory that’s at particular risk for theft, such as batteries or low-cost accessories, consider focusing multiple cycle counts in a row on those SKUs.
Cycle counting is more of a warning system than an inventory shrinkage deterrent in and of itself, however. It helps you pinpoint where shrinkage may be happening and if you need to invest more in your loss prevention strategies.
Implement anti-shoplifting measures
Shoplifting is a serious contributor to shrinkage, so it’s worth it to take the time to invest in anti-shoplifting measures.
Your sales staff can be an important shoplifting deterrent. They should never put themselves in harm’s way, but greeting every customer and making it clear employees are alert can discourage potential shoplifters.
In addition to training your staff, loss prevention tools include:
Electronic security tags: these are those plastic tags that can only be safely removed by staff at the front counter. They can either sound an alarm when the tagged merchandise is carried out of the store or ruin the product in some way, such as with ink, when tampered with.
Security cameras: security cameras installed throughout your store are a powerful anti-shoplifting deterrent. To avoid alerting potential shoplifters of blindspots in your store’s security system, consider hidden cameras with signage indicating shoppers are being recorded. If any shoplifting does happen, you can consult your camera footage for visual evidence. Security cameras are also effective in lowering employee theft.
Because sales staff who steal may do so because of external life stress or internal strife, one of the easiest ways you can cut down on theft is by having an open line of dialogue with your employees. Trust and high morale can go a long way.
In addition, you could consider:
A buddy system: there should always be at least two employees working at all times. Ensure voided sales and refunds require another employee, preferably a manager, to be present.
An anonymous tip line: whether you do this by email, phone or online form (such as a Google form), make sure employees have a way to remain anonymous. Employees who witness theft may be more willing to report it if they won’t be found out by their co-workers.
Use an all-in-one system for less admin errors
One of the best ways to cut down on human entry error is to remove the human entry part. With a fully connected inventory management and point of sale system, you can worry less about mismatched numbers.
An integrated system makes decisions about what to do about shrinkage easier, too, because you have a lot of the information you need on hand for easy reference.
If you’re using a POS system like Lightspeed, you can check your inventory levels and past cycle counts at a glance, making it simpler to monitor potential shrinkage rates. Cycle counts also take less time, because you can scan inventory levels directly into the system—which cuts down on potential administrative errors entering the counts.
How to Properly Add Images in WordPress (Step by Step)
Are you looking for the right way to add images to your WordPress website or blog?
By adding images in WordPress correctly, you can improve the visual appeal, accessibility, and SEO of your website. You can even allow users to upload their own images and use them on your site or in your competitions.
In this article, we will show you how to properly add images in WordPress.
The Importance of Correctly Uploading Images in WordPress
Sometimes, users directly copy an image from the source and paste it into their website content. Unfortunately, this can cause problems like slow pages, poor user experience, and poor SEO.
When you add images to your WordPress website, it’s important to do it properly. This means using the right file format, file name, and alt text.
We recommend naming your images with descriptive words separated by dashes. For example, you might use the file name ‘bali-vacation-photo.jpg’ for an image on your travel blog.
Properly adding images also means resizing your images so that they load quickly and look good on all devices. For example, some image formats like JPEG, are more compressed than others, which means that these images will take up less space on your server and will take less time to load.
By using these formats, along with an image compression plugin for the images on your WordPress blog, you can improve the user experience of your website.
Similarly, by using the Image block in WordPress and properly optimizing your images for SEO and alt text, you can make it easier for search engines to index your images.
That being said, let’s see how to properly add images in WordPress. We will cover several methods, and you can use the quick links below to jump to the different sections of our tutorial:
First, you need to open the existing or new page/post where you want to add an image.
Once you are there, click the ‘+’ button in the top left corner of the screen to open the block menu. From here, you must find and add the Image block to the post or page.
Once you have done that, click the ‘Media Library’ button to launch the ‘Select or Upload Media’ prompt on the screen.
From here, you can switch to the ‘Upload Files’ tab if you want to upload an image from your computer.
However, if you want to add an image from the media library, then you can also do that by switching to the ‘Media Library’ tab.
Upon adding an image, you will need to add alt text for it in the left column. This alt text is crucial for image SEO as it helps search engines understand the context of the image. It also allows people with screen readers to see this information about your images.
You can also add a title and caption describing the image in the right column. Captions are the visible text descriptions of your images, while the title will appear when a user hovers their mouse over the image.
First, you need to visit the page or post where you want to add the image from the WordPress dashboard. Once you are there, just click the ‘Add Media’ button to launch the media library.
After that, you can switch to the ‘Upload Files’ tab to upload an image from your computer.
Alternatively, for adding an image from the media library, just switch to the ‘Media Library’ tab.
Upon adding an image, you will need to add alt text and a title for it. You can also add a description and caption if you wish.
You can simply describe the image for all these options. This will help search engine index your image and increase your website’s visibility.
Next, go ahead and click the ‘Insert into Post’ button.
Now, the image will be added to your WordPress post or page.
From here, you can change its alignment by using the alignment icons above the image. You can also further edit an image by clicking on the pencil icon.
This will open the ‘Image details’ prompt on your screen, where you can change the size and add image title attributes, CSS classes, alignment, and more.
Once you are done, just click the ‘Update’ button to save the changes you made.
After that, simply click the ‘Publish’ or Update’ button to save your post.
How to Add Images in the Media Library
If you want, you can also directly add an image to the media library. Keep in mind that after adding an image to the media library, you will still need to open a post or page and insert the Image block.
To add an image from the media library, you must visit the Media » Add New page from the WordPress admin area.
Once you are there, click the ‘Select Files’ button to upload an image from your computer. Then, click the ‘Edit’ link next to the image.
This will take you to the ‘Edit Media’ page, where you can start by changing the title for the image. After that, you can add alt text, a caption, and a description by scrolling down.
Once you have done that, you can also click on the ‘Edit Image’ button.
This will direct you to another page, where you can crop, scale, rotate, or flip the image according to your liking. For detailed instructions, please see our beginner’s guide on how to do basic image editing in WordPress.
Once you are satisfied, just click the ‘Update’ button to save your changes.
This will take you back to the ‘Edit Media’ page, where you have to click on the ‘Update’ button again to store your settings.
You have now successfully added an image to the media library.
Next, visit the post where you want to add this image from the WordPress admin sidebar. Once you are there, click the ‘+’ button to add an Image block to the post.
Next, you need to select the ‘Media Library’ button.
This will launch the ‘Select or Upload Media’ prompt on your screen, where you will notice the image that you uploaded in the media library at the top.
On selecting the image, you will see that its title, alt text, caption, and description have already been added to it from the media library page.
Now, simply click the ‘Select’ button to upload the image to the block editor.
Finally, click the ‘Publish’ or ‘Update’ button to store your settings.
How to Optimize an Image for WordPress SEO
Once you have added an image to a post/page, it is also crucial to optimize it for search engines. Unfortunately, WordPress does not offer any built-in advanced SEO features for images.
Next, head over to the All in One SEO » Search Appearance page from the WordPress admin sidebar and switch to the ‘Image SEO’ tab.
After that, scroll down and click the ‘Activate Image SEO’ button to unlock the feature.
You will now be able to see the Image SEO settings. Here, you will notice different tabs for the title, alt text, caption, description, and filename.
Configure Automatic Image Titles
Once you switch to the ‘Title’ tab on the Image SEO page, you can start by creating a title format for your images using smart tags.
These smart tags will then automatically generate title attributes for your images. This is what a visitor will see when they hover their mouse over your images.
For example, if you want each image title attribute to use the image title and the site title, then you can add these smart tags in the ‘Title Format’ field.
After that, you can also enable the Strip Punctuation option if you want AIOSEO to automatically remove some characters when creating an image title from the filename.
For example, if you use dashes when saving an image file like ‘an-example-image’, then you can choose the ‘Dashes (-)’ option in the ‘Characters to Convert to Spaces’ section.
Once you do that, AIOSEO will automatically remove these dashes and turn them into spaces, making the image title ‘an example image’.
After that, scroll down to the ‘Casing’ section.
From here, you can choose a casing option for your title. We recommend picking sentence case or title case to make your titles more readable.
Configure Automatic Alt Tags
After configuring title settings, switch to the ‘Alt Tag’ tab from the top.
From here, you can use the smart tags next to the ‘Alt Tag Format’ option to automatically generate alt text for all your images.
After that, you can also enable the Strip Punctuation setting if you want characters like dashes (-) or underscores (_) to be converted into spaces.
Similarly, if there are characters like numbers or plus signs (+) that you don’t want AIOSEO to strip when creating the alt text, then you can check the boxes for these options in the ‘Characters to Exclude from Being Stripped’ section.
You can also select a casing for your alt text.
Configure Automatic Captions and Descriptions
To generate automatic captions for your images, switch to the ‘Captions’ tab.
From here, make sure that the ‘Autogenerate Caption on Upload’ option is enabled. You can then select the smart tags that will be used to generate captions for your images.
Next, you can also use the Strip Punctuation feature to exclude or include characters in the captions and choose a casing for them.
Once you are done, you need to switch to the ‘Description’ tab from the top.
From here, make sure that the ‘Autogenerate Description on Upload’ option is enabled. You must also select the smart tags you want to use for generating automatic image descriptions.
Next, you can also use the Strip Punctuation feature to include/exclude characters like underscores, apostrophes, or numbers in the description.
After that, simply select a casing for your image descriptions.
Configure Automatic Filenames
As we mentioned earlier, we recommend giving your image files SEO-friendly file names. You can do this before uploading your images, or AIOSEO can do it for you automatically.
Once you switch to the ‘Filename’ tab from the top, you will notice that AIOSEO has already configured the Strip Punctuation setting for you.
However, if there are any more characters that you want AIOSEO to delete from your image filenames when creating titles or alt text, then you can type those characters into the ‘Words to Strip’ box.
After that, you can also select a casing for your filenames.
Once you are done, don’t forget to click the ‘Save Changes’ button to store your settings.
You have now successfully optimized your images for SEO, and AIOSEO will automatically generate titles, alt text, captions, and descriptions for all your images.
You may also want to allow your users to upload their own images to your WordPress website. This can come in handy if you are hosting a contest or running a photography website that accepts user-generated images.
For this, you can use WPForms, which is the best contact form plugin on the market. It comes with a drag-and-drop builder that makes it super easy to create any kind of form you want, including an image submission form.
Upon activation, head over to the WPForms » Add New screen from the WordPress dashboard to launch the form builder.
From here, you need to type a name for your form and then click the ‘Use Snippet’ button under the ‘Simple Contact Form’ template.
This will load the form template in the form builder, where you will notice its preview on the right and the available fields in the left column.
From here, go ahead and drag and drop the File Upload field onto the form and click on it to further customize its settings.
From here, you can change the label and description of the field and even specify the extensions that are allowed.
For example, if you want to allow JPEG and PNG files only, then you must type these options into the ‘Allowed File Extensions’ field. Keep in mind to separate each extension with a comma.
After that, you can also configure the maximum image file size and number of uploads in the left column.
Once you are done, just click the ‘Save’ button to store your settings.
Next, open the page/post where you want to add the image upload form. Once there, click the ‘+’ button in the top left corner of the screen to open the block menu
From here, you need to add the WPForms block to the page/post.
Just choose the image file upload form that you created from the dropdown menu.
Finally, click the ‘Update’ or ‘Publish’ button to store your settings. Now, you can visit your WordPress site to view the form in action, and visitors will be able to submit their images using the form.
What to Know Before Purchasing Shopify 2.0 Themes?
Are you considering getting a worthwhile ready-made solution for your online store? With so many alternatives, it is critical to make the right decision before investing in Shopify 2.0 themes. Many of them have additional functionality, superior customization options, and improved performance, making them an appealing choice for many eCommerce firms. However, there are some criteria to examine and ensure that you select the proper theme that resonates with your brand. You need something that satisfies your unique objectives and delivers a smooth shopping experience for your clients, right? In this post, we will go through the key elements that you should be aware of when purchasing Shopify 2.0 themes.
Design Elements
Your brand identity is your company’s visual expression. So, it should be matching across all touchpoints, including your online project. Colors, typefaces, and graphics should be consistent with your brand’s individuality, principles, and intended audience. Design consistency helps to strengthen your brand identity and produces a unified and competent appearance for your company.
For this reason, make sure to compare different Shopify 2.0 themes, color schemes, and other elements. Remember that consistent design aspects help with brand awareness. Customers should be ready to identify your brand through the aesthetic elements on your site the moment they visit it. A clear and identifiable design promotes trust, consumer loyalty, and subsequent visits and sales.
Customization Capabilities
Every business has its distinct branding characteristics. Various customization possibilities allow you to personalize the site according to your brand’s identity. The ability to change colors, fonts, logos, and other aspects guarantees that your online store represents the character of your company. Then, it will assist you in creating an unusual and special character.
In addition to this, customization provides flexibility and adaptability to match your business requirements. When it comes to the style, functionality, and design of their online stores, various businesses have specific needs and tastes. Customization enables you to update and adjust your Shopify 2.0 themes to meet your demands and respond to developments in your business over time.
If you are wondering how to customize a Shopify theme, there is no need to be stressed. Shopify 2.0 themes are perfect for those who have no coding experience.
Need a Shopify Expert to help you build your Shopify website? You can view our Shopify Experts profile here to see our work or reach out to us by filling out this form.
Speed and Performance
Websites that load quickly give a more satisfying user experience. When your site loads immediately, visitors may more easily navigate around your store, view items, and complete payments. Slow-loading websites irritate users, resulting in greater bounce rates and potential revenue loss. A quick and easy purchasing experience promotes client satisfaction, involvement, and sales.
Furthermore, with the advent of mobile shopping, it is vital to have a quick and adaptable website. Everyone expects pages of website design templates to load quickly. So, sluggish Shopify themes ecommerce on mobile devices can result in a negative user experience. Since mobile-friendliness is also a ranking criterion in search engines, a slow website may have a detrimental influence on your organic traffic.
eCommerce Functions
By making it less complicated for customers to search, browse, and communicate about items, eCommerce functions contribute to a better user experience.
Filters enable customers to sort their search based on certain criteria, allowing them to identify goods that meet their tastes.
Customers can see product information without leaving the current page, thanks to a product quick view.
The wishlist capability allows users to bookmark items for future reference or purchase, improving engagement and conversions.
Customers are free to inspect product features with product zoom, increasing their confidence in purchase selections.
Search Engine Optimization
A well-optimized Shopify theme is ready to help your site rank higher in search engine results. Search engine rankings are influenced by multiple factors, including:
site speed;
mobile-friendliness;
structured data;
meta tags;
and content relevancy.
You may improve these criteria and raise your chances of ranking better by applying SEO best practices inside your unique Shopify themes. It will result in increased exposure and more potential visitors.
For example, it is possible to optimize on-page features like meta titles, meta descriptions, headers, and URLs with well-designed Shopify 2.0 themes. These features are crucial in communicating the significance of your pages to search engines and users.
Integration With Shopify Apps
Many Shopify applications have features that help to simplify your store’s operations. These include inventory management, order tracking, delivery automation, customer assistance, and other services. You may automate and improve numerous operational procedures by integrating these applications with your Shopify 2.0 themes, saving time and enhancing efficiency. It guarantees that your ready-made solution and applications function in tandem. As a result, you will offer a smooth and simplified experience for both you and your consumers.
Documentation of Shopify 2.0 Themes
Documentation is vital for Shopify 2.0 themes since it explains how to install, configure, customize, troubleshoot, and update your ready-made solution. It enables you to fully utilize the capabilities of your theme, guarantees a seamless installation procedure, and supports continuing maintenance. Clear and extensive documentation improves your entire experience and allows you to build a successful online business.
Support
While documentation is beneficial, there may be times when you need further clarification or have unique queries. Support can assist clear up any misunderstandings or give further context to make sure you completely grasp the theme’s power, settings, and customization possibilities. They can simplify complicated topics and provide real-time instruction.
Moreover, support gives technical support if you run into problems or have extra queries. Having access to competent assistance guarantees that you can receive rapid accurate solutions, whether it is a compatibility problem, a bug, or a customization issue. It allows you to overcome barriers, saving time and reducing interruptions to your business operations.
Reviews & Ratings
Reviews and ratings provide vital feedback and insights into the performance, features, usability, and customer support of Shopify 2.0 themes. Users frequently share their experiences, emphasizing both the positive and bad aspects. The information provided could help you in making a sound decision about whether it fulfills your unique needs and corresponds with your business objectives. It gives you information about possible strengths and limitations, allowing you to assess the theme’s viability for your company.
A Few Words in Conclusion
Choosing the best Shopify 2.0 themes for your online store is a critical choice that has a big influence on the profitability of your business. You can guarantee that the theme you pick matches your brand, delivers an amazing user experience, and supports your company’s goals. In this case, you need to pay attention to different design elements, customization capabilities, speed and performance, SEO, integration with apps, documentation, and support. A thorough analysis of these variables will enable you to make an informed decision while avoiding potential traps. If you want to know where to buy Shopify themes or download free Shopify 2.0 themes, TemplateMonster Digital Marketplace is a great source. Thanks for reading!
Get in Touch
AtEcommerce Pro, we help entrepreneurs and business owners build better and more successful Shopify businesses. Have a question or a project in mind? Get in touch with us today!
Ready to take your Shopify business to the next level? Let’s work together. Fill out our contact form to get in touch with Ecommerce Pro.
Back to School Promotions for Retailers: 9 Ways to Prepare for the Boom
Back to school is one of the biggest sales periods of the year for retailers. Sales for both back to school and back to college have steadily increased over the last few years, and 2023 looks to be no exception.
That means a spending blitz is set to happen. Have you planned how you’re going to take advantage of the back to school boom?
In this post, we’ll go over:
11 ways to turn window shoppers into buyers
Check out these techniques to help your business capture back to school shoppers and discount seekers.
Back to school 2023 is shaping up to be big
According to the National Retail Federation, total expected spending will be $890 per US household for back to school shopping in 2023, for a total of $41.5 billion. Back to college looks to be even more lucrative at $1367 per household for a projected total of $94 billion. That means there’s a total of $131.5 billion in revenue up for grabs this year.
But what are these shoppers looking to buy? Electronics top the list for most wanted purchases with both back to school and back to college shoppers. Both groups will be looking to spend big on clothing and accessories, as well. Back to school shoppers will also be focused on shoes, while back to college shoppers look to spend big on furniture for their dorms.
One note of caution: shoppers have noticed higher prices in their top categories, and they’re modifying their behavior accordingly. The NRF’s research shows that shoppers are planning to:
Do more comparative online shopping, which means you’ll need to have your products online with detailed product descriptions and locally targeted ads to be in the running.
Look for more sales, so make sure you advertise your deals loudly and often.
Buy generic store brand products, which presents the biggest hurdle for retailers offering premium products—make sure customers know why spending a little more on something is worth it in the long run.
Nine things to consider for a successful back to school
With 2023 shoppers being budget-conscious, if you aren’t already holding sales, now is the time to start.
From new clothes to school supplies, electronics and even home goods for college students, you’ll need to be strategic if you want to be a part of the rush. Here are nine ways you can make your back to school sale season a success.
1. Make your back to school season shift schedules (and do it quickly)
Hours spent pouring over schedules? The last thing you need most of the time, let alone during a busy shopping boom. Integrating automated shift scheduling software into your point of sale (POS) will cut the time you spend making schedules so you can focus on other important prep for your back-to-school sale.
To get really efficient, add in an element of data analysis to know when you need more employees in the store. Scheduling enough employees during peak sales periods will keep lines down and cater to customers who have gotten used to not having to wait to pay after years of ecommerce growth.
First, you’d use Advanced Reporting to determine your staffing needs. This can be done by running a Sales History report to identify what days and time periods see the most activity. By default, this report will show data from the last three days; you can adjust the filters to sales by the hour to see specific activity peaks. To keep up with how the back to school season is evolving, re-run the report every week.
Once you know how many people you want scheduled and when, head over to Planday and plug in the desired shifts, as well as employees’ availability. Tada—the schedules are planned, with an extra side of revenue data versus labor cost data from Planday.
2. Make sure you’re stocked on the essentials
Back to school shoppers are busy—they want stocked shelves and good deals, and if they can’t find both, they’ll move on. At the same time, you don’t want to be left with too much unsold inventory after the back to school season, so you need to be careful about just how much you order.
It’s crucial that every location of your business has an ordering plan catered to the shopping patterns they see.
Instead of guessing what you need to restock and when, turn to data for help. For example, Lightspeed Advanced Reporting’s replenishment report tells you what you have on hand, items sold and how long until your stock runs out. It can suggest order numbers based on historical demand, so you can be prepared for a bump in numbers of laptops or kid’s shoes sold.
Also, make sure you have a contingency plan if you run out of something halfway through the month and don’t have a way to quickly get more. Can you offer dropshipping online, transfer inventory from other stores or substitute in a similar product that will ship faster?
3. Prepare your discounts
For most customers, the best part of back-to-school sales are the sales, of course. Having favorable discounts available could mean the difference between you and a competitor for budget-conscious back-to-school shoppers.
A platform like Lightspeed lets you set discounts so they are automatically applied at checkout. Consider offering a mix of sales and discounts, such as:
Clearances. The tried and true 25% off—or more, or less—sales. Consider running some reports on overstock and surplus inventory that, while useful for back to school, might not be the latest styles of shoes or notebooks. You can discount these and leave your newer inventory full price.
Buy one, get one… discounts. Back to school shopping often means buying supplies in bulk. If a customer can get four packs of pencils, or two pairs of gym shoes, for a buy one get one half off deal, they might use their savings to keep shopping in your store.
Bulk discounts. You could use these as an alternative to BOGO discounts, or use them in tandem for different goods. Let’s say you’re an apparel retailer—remember how half of parents have school kids excited for new clothes? You could set a bulk discount for $5.00 off $20.00 t-shirts if they buy 5 or more.
Tip: You can use promotion rules from Lightspeed to set BOGO and bulk discounts. They’ll be automatically applied at checkout without any extra work from your sales associates.
4. Let customers know about your back to school promotions
With your employees scheduled and your sales set up, it’s time to let your customers know they should visit you for their back-to-school needs.
You could send an email or make a post on social media—and you might as well, because the more reach, the better. But in addition to those methods, try sending SMS messages (texts) to let your loyal shoppers know what you’ve got in store for them.
SMS messages are your secret marketing weapon. They have an 82% open rate (far above email open rates) which means you know for sure you’ll be reaching your customers.
Don’t squander your customers’ goodwill, though.
Using a CRM program like Lightspeed Advanced Marketing, set up one or two messages—one for now, one for near the end of the back to school season—with your best sales. That way, you entice customers without annoying them. You can also have your top customers sign up for a VIP customer type through Loyalty so they receive special deals and discounts through SMS.
5. Be found by local back to school shoppers
SMS messaging helps you connect with customers who already know who you are. What about all the back-to-school shoppers who don’t know about your business?
Google is a driving force in the shopping experience—one survey found that 59% of shoppers use the search engine to research products before they buy. With back-to-school promotions ramping up all around them, potential customers will be heading to Google to find the best deals.
By using Pointy ads by Google, you can be one of the top results they see… through advertising at the top of their searches. If someone within a set radius searches for backpacks near me, and you carry backpacks, your inventory will be among the results they see.
Historically, managing local targeted ads has been a hassle because of the inventory setup time. Managing them through Lightspeed cuts down on the set up time so you can get your ads up and running for the back-to-school season sooner rather than later.
6. Cater to customers who want to shop online but get their goods fast
Buy online, pick up in store (BOPIS) options remain popular amongst shoppers—almost one third of online shoppers in the US picked up their purchase in store last year.
BOPIS represents the best of both worlds for busy back-to-school shoppers trying to beat long lines: they don’t need to wait to purchase school supplies or wait on delivery times.
To make sure you can handle curbside pickup and BOPIS orders without causing confusion, make sure that you:
Have an eCom inventory system that automatically syncs with your in-store inventory. You don’t want to accidentally sell the same item twice, after all.
Train your employees on how to monitor and close online orders for pickup, including procedures for setting items in the orders aside.
Give customers a contactless way to pay at pickup. Lightspeed retailers in the United States can use Mobile Tap to take payment anywhere, from the front counter to outside at the curb.
7. Offer one-on-one service for bigger purchases through appointments
In addition to apparel and school supplies, electronic devices—and other, more niche purchases, like musical instruments—are going to be on many back-to-school lists this year.
However, these are expensive purchases. Parents and college students may want to get the right advice before making their final decision. That’s where appointment shopping comes in; customers commit to shopping local (with you!) and get an expert opinion before spending their money.
Using automated appointment-booking tools can help you manage shopping appointments without adding extra work to your day.
Legendary musical instrument retailer Virtuosityuses appointment shopping modules to automatically send reminder emails, and Lightspeed to collect and store customer contact information. With a similar setup in your store, you can be sure appointments are kept and that you can follow up with customers after the back to school season is over.
8. Have a way to keep in contact with back to school shoppers
Throughout the back to school season, your sales associates might need to get in contact with customers, be it for shopping appointments, repairs, pickups and deliveries and more.
Calling to leave a message takes up valuable time, and in a busy store, they might not be able to communicate clearly.
Try texting customers instead. Remember, texts have a high open rate, making them ideal for communicating useful information as well as marketing. Your sales associates can send messages to multiple customers in quick succession and then get back to helping shoppers in the store.
When it comes to communicating with customers during the back to school season (and beyond), Lightspeed retailer Riverdale Mac’s tool of choice is Ikeono, an integration that embeds texting into their point of sale.
“Since we do a lot of computer repair, timely reporting and timely messaging makes us much more reliable to our customers,” said Myles Kesten, President of Riverdale Mac. “They really want quick communications and integrating the texting with Ikeono has really made a huge difference. You can really see it in our Google reviews; in the past 12 months we’ve gotten a lot of five star reviews.”
9. Clear out your back to school inventory to make room for the holidays
As you near the end of the back to school season, be proactive in clearing out your inventory. After all, inventory that doesn’t sell is inventory that holds you back—fresh holiday gifts are more exciting than back-to-school clearances that extend into the fall!
Identify what back-to-school stragglers you have left in your inventory (your POS should be tracking this—Lightspeed users can use the built-in inventory reports to check their levels quickly). Give them an impressive promotion—not so much that you’re giving them away for free, but enough that you won’t be holding on to that inventory for too long.
As a bonus, check your sales figures and identify your biggest back-to-school sellers; Lightspeed Advanced Reporting can find these through the Sales History report. While back to school 2024 will almost certainly be different from 2023 yet again, you can use these insights to make a few educated guesses at what you should be stocking up on next year.
Back to school 2023 is here. Are you ready?
With the 2023 back to school shopping boom about to kick it into high gear, there’s no time to wait—the sooner you get started on your promotions, the better.
Cron jobs can be a technical subject, but with the nature of WordPress as it is today, it’s a crucial aspect of your WordPress website’s health and something you may have to get involved in from time to time.
Specifically, in this short tutorial, we’re going to discuss how to find and remove obsolete or discontinued cron jobs from your WordPress site.
This guide aims to simplify the process, even if you have no development experience.
First, let’s understand what a Cron Job is.
What Are Cron Jobs?
In WordPress, Cron Jobs are scheduled tasks that your website runs at specific intervals. These tasks include actions like publishing scheduled posts, checking for updates, or sending notifications.
Cron jobs as viewed in the WP Crontrol plugin on a WordPress website.
However, not all Cron Jobs remain useful forever. Some of them, especially those created by plugins that you no longer use, can become obsolete and clutter your website, potentially slowing it down.
Now that we understand what Cron Jobs are, let’s learn how to find them.
How to Find and See Cron Jobs
To see the Cron Jobs currently running on your WordPress site, you’ll need a plugin like WP Crontrol, Advanced Cron Manager, or any similar plugin that allows you to control and edit the Cron events in your schedule.
WordPress cron plugins in the WordPress plugin repository.
Here’s a general step-by-step guide on how to do this:
Install and activate your chosen Cron management plugin from your WordPress website’s Plugins page.
After activating the plugin, navigate to the plugin’s section in your WordPress dashboard. For WP Crontrol, for example, you can go to Tools > Cron Events.
You’ll see a list of all the Cron Jobs currently scheduled on your site. They’ll be listed with details like hook names, schedules, and the next run time.
It’s crucial to mention that you should be cautious when dealing with Cron Jobs. Accidentally deleting or modifying an essential Cron Job can lead to unexpected behavior on your website.
If you’re not confident making these changes, it’s best to either speak to your hosting provider or reach out to a developer for help.
How to Remove Obsolete Cron Jobs
The process of removing obsolete Cron Jobs is not complicated, but it should be done with care.
Here’s a step-by-step guide on how to do this:
Identify the obsolete Cron Jobs. These are typically associated with a plugin or theme that you no longer use. The hook name usually gives you an idea of which plugin created the Cron Job.
From your list of Cron Jobs (in WP Crontrol, this will once again be under Tools > Cron Events), locate the obsolete Cron Job.
Once located, click on the ‘Delete’ button next to it. This action will remove the Cron Job from your schedule.
Confirm the deletion in the popup warning. Be sure that you are deleting the correct Cron Job as this action is irreversible.
Repeat this process for all the obsolete Cron Jobs on your site.
Remember, if you’re unsure about a Cron Job, it’s better to leave it alone than to delete it and potentially cause an even bigger issue on your site.
That’s It
Removing obsolete Cron Jobs from your WordPress site is an excellent way to clean up unnecessary clutter and optimize your site’s performance.
However, this process should be handled with care to avoid accidentally removing essential tasks.
Always ensure you have a full backup of your site before making such changes, and don’t hesitate to consult with a professional if you’re unsure. Better safe than sorry.
I hope this guide has shed some light on managing and removing obsolete Cron Jobs from your WordPress site.
If you have any questions, feel free to drop them in the comments below.
How to Design a Shopify Store for Conversion Rate Optimisation – Blend Commerce
Starting your website design on a blank canvas isn’t always helpful—just like starting with an overcrowded template will distract you from what your brand stands for, a blank canvas will have you questioning your every design decision. Designing your Shopify store isn’t just about making it look pretty; it’s about ensuring that your customers know exactly what they’re getting and where they should go—it’s about boosting your Conversion Rate Optimisation.
For example, if your store was written in Elvish, would everyone know exactly what products or services you offered just by looking at your landing page?
When we’re conducting a Shopify web design at Blend, we ensure to focus on enhancing the customer journey while also taking into account the crucial design aspects you should never leave out. While we always talk about Customer Value Optimisation and how you should focus on the overall view of your eCommerce store and not just Conversion Rate Optimisation, today we’re talking about what you should keep in mind when designing your Shopify store to enhance your conversion rate optimisation.
Let’s start with the design elements before moving on to design hierarchy.
The 6 Important Design Elements for Your Shopify Store
There are many elements to ensure you have in your design, but as this is just one minuscule blog, you’ll have to deal with a quick crash course in design elements and the ones you need to focus on when it comes to designing your Shopify store (or redesigning your Shopify store if you’re looking to shake things up). We’re going to focus on the 6 most important design elements for your Shopify store: your headline, the use of imagery and videos on-site, the features and benefits communicated, the amount of credibility displayed, your expectation managers, and lastly, your call-to-action (CTA) buttons.
While we are talking design, it’s important not to forget about your copy. Many feel that it’s a battle of tug-of-war between designers and copywriters, but the truth is that you can’t have one without the other and teaming up is the best solution to increase conversion rates on your Shopify store.
1. Designing Your Headline for Your Shopify Store
One of the most crucial things is to communicate with your customers the second they enter your site. So ensuring that your headline communicates your value proposition in the correct manner is something to keep an eye on. You’re looking for bolded fonts with contrasting colours that stand out and hold the attention of the reader. Make sure you have enough spacing around your headline to make it easy to read as well.
2. Using the Correct Imagery on Your Shopify Store
Ensuring you have relevant imagery and videos on your Shopify store is of the utmost importance. Remember, if your store is in a completely different language to the reader’s home language, they should still immediately be able to know exactly what products or services you offer. Your imagery should also support the copy nearby. For example, an image near your headline should support and convey your value proposition.
3. Communicating the Benefits of Your Ecommerce Brand
Like with your headline and imagery, all design communicates with your customers—not only the copy. Ensure to communicate why customers should choose your brand over others for the same products or services. This could be communicated within a clever value proposition or a checklist below the fold. Either way, it’s good to think about the questions customers may have when entering your Shopify store and deciding whether or not you are answering these questions efficiently.
4. Make Your Shopify Store Credible
These days most things are done online, but that doesn’t mean that customers blindly trust everything on the internet. While many search their medical issues on Google instead of visiting a doctor, customers looking to purchase your products will likely question whether or not they can trust your brand at least once while on your site. Increasing the credibility of your Shopify store can be anything from the logos of companies that your eCommerce brand has partnered with in the past to social proof like reviews or testimonials from other customers. Ensure the copy is in a bolded font with sufficient space between the lines to draw the eye and hold the attention of the reader (make sure these come from real people with first names to prove that they’re not just something you made up).
5. How to Manage Customer Expectations on Your Shopify Store
Managing the expectations of customers visiting your eCommerce store is vital to ensure you don’t surprise them at checkout, causing them to bounce. Customers like to be given all information almost simultaneously. This can be communicated quickly and simply by pulling in your copywriter buddy and ensuring whatever important information is communicated, like 30-day guarantees, cost of shipping, shipping times, and packaging choices (among many, many more things that you may need to communicate).
6. Enhancing Your Call-to-Action Buttons
Remember that this is the entire goal of your site—to get them to press that button. Whether it’s ‘Buy Now’, ‘Sign Up’, or ‘Add to Cart’, the design of your CTA will either encourage your visitors to purchase or be completely lost on them. Ensure that there’s only one. Having a page littered with buttons to click makes for a confusing customer journey, so stick to one main goal. Ensure the colour of your CTA matches your brand while standing out on your page, and make sure the copy in your CTA directly communicates what will happen when they press it. Don’t take them through repetitive loops to get to where they need to go.
Now that we’ve had a quick look at the 6 elements of design on your Shopify store, we want to take you through another 6 items, but this time it’s about visual hierarchy.
The 6 Aspects of Design Hierarchy for Your Shopify Store
Visual hierarchy is in what order certain elements should appear on your site, in your email marketing, etc. The correct visual hierarchy will pull the reader’s eyes to where you want them to be and guide them to what you want them to do—like clicking that ‘Buy Now’ button.
Essentially, you want your website to say, ‘look here’, ‘now look here’, ‘look here’, ‘good job, now click this’. Your site should not only be easy on the eye but also informative and, well, not boring. So let’s get into the 6 most important aspects of design hierarchy for your Shopify store: size, space, font, colour, contrast, and direction.
1. Why Size is Important in Your Site’s Visual Hierarchy
Size is important because, as humans, we automatically put different-sized items in a hierarchy of their own—we feel some are more important than others based on their size. Like this, for example.
You may be inclined to say the largest circle is the most important, and you’d be in the overwhelming majority of people who would choose that one. Size allows you to have something specific stand out above the rest. The most important part of your site should be the largest, with secondary elements being medium and the least important being smaller.
2. How to Effectively Use Space in Your Shopify Store
To be quick about it, you don’t have to fill every single space available on your site. It just makes it confusing and overwhelming for the visitor, and they won’t know where to look. Many may feel that what we call ‘white space’ is wasted real estate, but it’s important to have at least some level of white space on your site. Space allows your customers to breathe while visiting your store and easily find where they should go next.
3. Using the Right Fonts on Your Shopify Store
The third item on the list is the fonts you use and how you use them. Ensure that you don’t try to be too fancy with drop shadows and different coloured fonts—it’s not your school Word project. Make it easy to read. One of the greatest pieces of advice is to use san serif, a font without ‘feet’. They’re clean and very easy for customers to scan. And remember that your size hierarchy also comes into play with your fonts. Make the most important sections of your copy, like your value proposition, stand out. A general guideline is 32 to 40 pixels for your primary headline and 20 to 24 pixels for the body copy. It’s not recommended to go smaller than 16 pixels (keep those with seeing disabilities in mind here).
4. How to Use Colour in Your eCommerce Store
Colour is like an arrow pointing customers to where they should go. Let’s do a test with our circles again. In this image, all circles seem equal. While looking, you will likely just scan across them without knowing exactly where to look.
Now let’s add just one splash of colour (Blend’s colour, obviously).
You knew exactly where to look, right? You didn’t even have to try. It was instantaneous. Your brain did it all by itself without any effort. This is the kind of impact that the correct use of colour on your Shopify store can have on your conversion rate. Simply guiding your customers with the correct use of colour will boost your conversation rate for your eCommerce store.
5. How to Use Contrast on Your Shopify Store
There’s not much to say on this one. Why? We just displayed the impact of contrast in our colour section. The simple contrast of the colour versus the lack of colour immediately drew your eye to where it should be. Using contrast in conjunction with colour, you’ll be able to not only increase the conversion rate on your Shopify store but also make the customer journey as easy as possible.
6. What Direction Means for Your Shopify Store
Direction is our last aspect of visual hierarchy, and it’s an interesting one. Your content should point the customers to where they need to be. For example, the CTA on this site is clearly the orange button, but the people in the background are drawing a substantial amount of attention and are looking where? Away from the CTA.
Ensure your graphics and design hierarchy are all pointing in the same direction.
How Blend Uses Design to Increase Conversion Rate Optimisation
At Blend, we focus on all these elements and aspects and more, including who your target audience is, where they are in their customer journey, what your brand stands for, and more to boost the overall metrics of your store—not just conversion rate. Our Customer Value Optimisation approach is unique in that it focuses on the big picture of all your metrics, including AOV, CLV, CR, and more.
If you’re looking for the perfect team to implement these changes to your Shopify store design, get in touch with Blend today and let’s start brainstorming.
Lightspeed + NetSuite Help Imagine Exhibitions Gather Data
Downton Abbey, Titanic, Tutankhamun and Dinosaurs. What do all of these things have in common? Aside from being cultural phenomena that have captured the public’s interest, these icons are just some of the exhibits produced and managed by Imagine Exhibitions.
A company that launches and runs exciting experiences all over the world, Imagine Exhibitions operates in all types of venues—from museums and science centers to zoos and resorts. These exhibits also have a retail component to them, as they typically sell merchandise and souvenirs through gift shops.
Lightspeed powers Imagine Exhibitions’ retail business operations by providing a powerful point-of-sale (POS) and inventory management solution. The company uses Lightspeed to streamline their retail operations, track sales and gain actionable business insights.
We caught up with Michael Slagle, Vice President of Retail Operations at Imagine Exhibitions, and asked him to share his team’s experience with Lightspeed. In our conversation, we cover:
Imagine Exhibitions’s process for setting up exhibits efficiently
The value of integrating their POS and ERP systems
How they make smart decisions quickly with real time data
An efficient set up process that eliminates human error
Imagine Exhibitions is an incredibly dynamic business, and exhibits are constantly being set up and moved to different locations. As such, having a smooth and efficient set up process is key.
To that end, Imagine Exhibitions designed a methodical set-up process to keep teams accountable and on track.
“We utilize a checklist system which outlines the process of rolling out the POS and setting it up. We do it in a way where managers have to sign off on what’s been done,” explains Michael.
“And when we train employees, we go through a series of training checklists with cashiers and sales associates on how to use the system. Then we train managers on how to do returns and exchanges.”
Michael says that their checklists and processes outline what needs to be done in black and white, to “erase the gray areas as much as humanly possible.”
How long does it take?
The duration of the set up process varies depending on the exhibit. Michael says the team usually spends a day training cashiers on product knowledge and systems. Of course, it helps that they have a solution (i.e., Lightspeed) that’s powerful, yet easy to understand and use.
“Lightspeed, as a tool, is very comprehensive. I think it’s one of the best ones with the touchscreens. It’s very smooth, very easy. Cashiers generally pick it up in five minutes,” remarks Michael.
Ironing out the hardware side
All Imagine Exhibitions registers use iPads and Bluetooth scanners, and this setup allows teams to be more agile in-store. They can ring up sales with just a few taps and without needing to rely on clunky equipment.
“We wanted something that was flexible and simple to set up on the cash desk,” states Michael. “We have iPads with Bluetooth scanners, and that clean setup has been really good for us.”
It’s also easier to open up new registers when needed, giving in-store teams the ability to adapt to busy times seamlessly.
Integrating their POS and ERP
Imagine Exhibitions’s portfolio is all about variety. In addition to having exhibits across multiple locations, each exhibition is distinct in its design, experience and product catalog. And in some cases, exhibits have different business models altogether.
As Michael puts it, “there is a really wide spectrum.”
One thing they’ve done to tie everything together is to have all of their financial accounts payable under one ERP, which is NetSuite. The company then integrated Lightspeed with NetSuite to ensure all the necessary retail data flows smoothly between the two systems.
In doing so, Imagine Exhibitions created a cohesive infrastructure that facilitates better control and visibility across their exhibition portfolio.
“We’re fairly well-integrated. We’re live on our POS so we have information updating immediately. Our buyers know the sell through ratios and ship to sales numbers right away. We’re able to react really, really nicely,” remarks Michael.
Real time data leads to fast and smart decision-making
Speaking of which, Michael says that having access to metrics like sales and sell-through in real time enables him and his teams to make data-driven decisions and take proactive actions.
“Lightspeed’s reporting apparatus is really good already. I’ve been very impressed with that.”
He continues, “If you don’t have the ability to have a financial, back office system from which you can generate reports for analysis, you’d be okay with Lightspeed. You can really see sales numbers. You can export to Excel and drive those reports and filter any way you want to.”
NetSuite + Lightspeed keeps the company’s retail leaders in the loop
According to Michael, Lightspeed and NetSuite have helped Imagine Exhibitions’ teams to automate their reporting, so they can focus more on high-level activities. These automations also ensure that key members of the team know how the business is performing.
As Michael explains, “We’re pulling all the number numbers into NetSuite and we have built our own reports that are automated to email out to the managers. And so everyone’s pretty much aware of what trends are happening.”
Empowering in-store teams to make decisions
In-store managers and their teams also reap tremendous value from Lightspeed’s reporting capabilities.
They “don’t have to go to NetSuite; they can use it for top of the line analysis immediately if something comes up,” says Michael.
“If we notice a trend or something happens the day before and we’re like, ‘what happened on that?’ We can find out quickly with the system.”
He adds, “We can get that data fast without having to go into a broader, bigger analysis. That’s one of the things that we all like about Lightspeed. That, in my opinion, is better than any of the other POS that we’re using right now.”
“I can go on my phone and get what I need to do. I can be in an airport or something and I can just get onto my phone and see things immediately. And that’s pretty cool.”
Bringing it all together
Imagine Exhibitions Retail Operations has successfully harnessed the power of Lightspeed to enhance their dynamic exhibit experiences and streamline their retail operations. From a meticulous and efficient setup process to real time data-driven decision-making, Lightspeed has proven to be a valuable tool for the company.
Plus, the integration with NetSuite facilitates better control and visibility for the business. With access to instant sales metrics and seamless reporting, Imagine Exhibitions’ retail operations teams are empowered to make smart decisions and provide exceptional customer experiences.
At Lightspeed, we’re all about powering high-performing businesses like Imagine Exhibitions. Ready to learn more? Watch a demo and discover the tools and features that will drive your business forward.
How to Optimize WordPress Site Performance Using Delay JavaScript Execution
Looking for ways to further optimize your WordPress site’s performance? Easy…switch on Hummingbird‘s new Delay JavaScript Execution feature!
Delaying JavaScript file execution can provide an immediate boost to site optimization.
Most sites nowadays are laden with JavaScript files and inline scripts, which can be resource intensive and affect site performance and PageSpeed scores in areas like site rendering and load time.
As you will learn in this article, delaying the execution of JavaScript files to prioritise the load of more critical elements first can keep the overall load time of your site in check and improve your PageSpeed scores.
Even better, we’ll show you how to automate the whole process with just one click using our WordPress optimization plugin, Hummingbird (note: this is a Pro feature only).
In this article, we’ll look at:
Let’s jump right in…
Results After Enabling Hummingbird’s Delay JavaScript Execution
Before we explain why delaying JavaScript execution helps to optimize site performance and how to do this, let’s show you just some of the results our users obtained using Hummingbird Pro’s new feature.
Our users and testers found that their site’s performance scores improved across most PageSpeed benchmarks simply by enabling the feature.
Before and After PageSpeed score results.
Enabling delaying JavaScript execution on sites improved PageSpeed performance scores for both desktop…
Before and After PageSpeed score results (desktop).
…and mobile results.
Before and After PageSpeed score results (mobile).
Now that you know what you can expect, let’s understand why and how to use this feature.
Why Delaying JavaScript Execution Helps To Optimize Site Performance
As mentioned earlier, sites nowadays are loaded with 3rd-party scripts for serving advertisements, tracking engagement, security verification, etc., which can block pages from rendering quickly on users’ browsers and affect your site’s user experience and search engine rankings.
Holding these scripts off from loading on your site until there’s actual user interaction with the page can significantly improve areas of your site’s performance like:
1. Improved Rendering Performance
Browser rendering engines need to download and execute JavaScript wherever it’s found before they can continue to parse the rest of the page content. Delaying JavaScript execution until after users interact with the page helps the browser render the page more quickly and efficiently. This means users can see and interact with the web page sooner.
2. Increased Conversions
By delaying the execution of JavaScript files until users interact with the page, web pages load faster, allowing users to access and interact with the site more quickly. This can help improve user experience and increase user engagement & conversions.
3. Higher Google PageSpeed Insights Score
Google considers page speed as a ranking factor for search results, and delaying JavaScript execution can improve your site’s PageSpeed Insights score, potentially leading to better search engine rankings.
Improving PageSpeed Score Recommendations
Want to improve your PageSpeed Insights score? Try delaying JavaScript file execution.
Delaying JavaScript execution on your site can improve your Google PageSpeed score by addressing the following recommendations:
Remove unused JavaScript
This recommendation suggests eliminating unused or unnecessary JavaScript code from your web pages. Unused JavaScript can increase your page’s load time, as the browser has to download, parse, and execute the code even if it’s not being used.
By removing any unused JavaScript code, you can decrease the file size and improve your website’s overall performance.
Total blocking time
Total blocking time is a metric that measures the amount of time between the First Contentful Paint (FCP) and the Time to Interactive (TTI) during which the main thread was blocked for long enough to prevent input responsiveness.
In simple terms, it quantifies the duration when the page becomes unresponsive due to processing heavy JavaScript tasks. Lowering the total blocking time makes your website more responsive and improves user experience.
Minimize main thread work
The main thread is responsible for executing JavaScript, style calculations, layout, and other tasks required to display a web page. Minimizing main thread work refers to the process of optimizing the code and reducing the time the main thread spends on heavy tasks. This can be done by removing unnecessary JavaScript, splitting long tasks into smaller chunks, and optimizing the code’s execution.
A lighter workload on the main thread results in faster page loading, improved rendering, and enhanced user experience.
Time to interactive (TTI)
This performance metric measures the time it takes for a web page to become fully interactive and responsive to user input. A page is considered interactive when the main thread is free from heavy tasks, and users can interact with the elements on the screen, such as clicking buttons or scrolling.
Improving the TTI by optimizing JavaScript, splitting large tasks, and reducing render-blocking resources ensures a better user experience by allowing users to interact with the page more quickly.
Reduce JS execution time
Reducing JavaScript execution time involves optimizing the code to execute faster and use fewer resources. This can be achieved through techniques such as code minification, removing unused JavaScript, and optimizing algorithms.
Reducing the execution time leads to faster rendering, decreased total blocking time, and better responsiveness, providing a better user experience.
First Contentful Paint (FCP)
This is a performance metric that measures the time it takes for the browser to render the first visible element (text, image, or other content) of a web page. A faster FCP equates to a quicker initial page load, providing users with a visual feedback that the page is loading. Improving FCP requires optimizing critical rendering paths, delaying non-critical JavaScript execution, and prioritizing the loading of visible content.
A faster FCP significantly contributes to a better user experience and improved web page performance.
Delaying JavaScript Execution Methods
While faster page load times, reduced render-blocking, and prioritized content loading provide many benefits to users and can deliver higher PageSpeed scores, the actual methods available for delaying JavaScript execution on WordPress sites can be challenging for users without technical knowledge or web optimization skills.
For example, these methods can include:
Implement async or defer attributes: This requires you to manually add async or defer attributes to your JavaScript files in the HTML header, which tells the browser not to block the page rendering while processing the JavaScript files.
Combine JavaScript files: Use online tools or WordPress plugins to combine multiple JavaScript files into a single file, helping to reduce the number of HTTP requests and speed up page loading times.
Minify JavaScript files: Use online tools or WordPress plugins to reduce JavaScript file size, which helps to improve page loading times.
Prioritize critical JavaScript: Identify the critical JavaScript that needs to be loaded immediately to ensure proper functionality, and then load the remaining JavaScript files after the page content has been rendered.
While there are a few WordPress plugins available that can handle some of these tasks for you and help you to delay or defer JavaScript execution, our Hummingbird plugin does all of the above and more with the click of a button.
How to Use Hummingbird’s Delay JavaScript Execution Feature
The new optimization feature of Hummingbird delays the loading of all JavaScript files and inline scripts until there is user interaction on the page (e.g. mouse movement, keyboard action or screen tap) and improves all of the PageSpeed recommendations described earlier.
To enable this feature, make sure that Hummingbird is installed and activated on your site, then navigate to Hummingbird > Asset Optimization > Extra Optimization in your WordPress admin and switch on the Enable Delay Javascript toggle button in the Tools > Delay Javascript section, then click Save Changes.
Enable Hummingbird’s Delay JavaScript feature to improve your site’s performance.
Alternatively, you can enable the feature from the plugin’s main dashboard.
Enable Delay JavaScript Execution from Hummingbird’s dashboard.
Once the Delay JavaScript Execution feature has been enabled, it automatically goes to work, delaying the loading of any non-critical JavaScript files on your page that are not required above-the-fold.
The feature’s settings give you access to options like being able to specify a timeout for the scripts to load if no user interaction is detected, and the option to exclude critical JavaScript files from from being delayed on load by specifying their URLs or keywords.
Hummingbird delays the loading of JavaScript files until a set timeout limit is reached or a user interacts with the page.
If enabling this feature breaks something on your site and you identify additional critical Javascript resources which are essential to render the page, simply add them to the Excluded JavaScript Files area to exclude them from being delayed.
If there is no user interaction on the page beyond a set threshold, the JavaScript assets are forced to load. The default timeout is set to 20 seconds, but you can select a different value from the Timeout dropdown menu (currently ranging between 5-30 seconds).
Select a timeout option from the dropdown menu.
Notes
Enabling JavaScript Execution will automatically disable the Combine Compression option to ensure that your site’s scripts are loaded in their correct order.
The feature will only work when you’re connected to The Hub, as it pulls the list of continuously updated predefined exclusions from the API.
You can easily reverse any changes made by this feature by simply disabling the toggle and clicking save.
How to Ensure Critical Files Are Not Being Delayed
Hummingbird automatically excludes a predefined list of critical JS files, which are updated continuously through the API.
There is an option for manual exclusion of other files that may be critical for your specific sites.
Additionally, files served via a CDN can be excluded using their Script IDs (see screenshot below).
Exclude files served via a CDN using their Script IDs.
Delay JavaScript and Speed Up WordPress
Hummingbird’s Delay JavaScript feature is available as a Pro feature only. We recommend enabling this feature and testing your site using the PageSpeed Insights tool.
If you experience any issues using Hummingbird, check out the plugin’s documentation or contact our 24/7 support team for immediate expert support.
What’s New for Partners and Developers at Shopify (2023)
Welcome to our monthly product newsletter for Shopify Partners and Developers. Read on for important updates and new features.
We’ve recently launched updates to checkout UI extensions to make it easier to build customizations for Shopify’s checkout. These updates include:
Tune into an insightful webinar where you’ll discover the power of Shopify’s B2B APIs, and gain valuable insights into best practices for building custom solutions. Stay ahead of the curve with a sneak peek into upcoming B2B API releases, and hear from the Shopify team as they answer burning B2B API questions submitted by merchants and partners.
That’s all for this month. To stay up to date with changes that impact the Shopify platform and app development, subscribe to the Shopify developer changelog for real-time updates as they happen. And if you’re not already subscribed to our monthly What’s New for Developers at Shopify newsletter, do so below so you never miss a thing.
June 2023
Introducing POS UI extensions
Introducing Shopify POS UI extensions, a new way to build point-of-sale customizations that look and feel native to Shopify with significantly faster load times. POS UI extensions will help your POS app development process with:
Highly-integrated workflows that boost user engagement
New and creative point-of-sale workflows
Better app performance with faster load times
Learn more about POS UI extensions and the opportunities with building for point-of-sale in our blog post.
Theme developers can now add color schemes to themes
This update adds clarity and flexibility to the theme editing experience by allowing theme-defined and merchant-defined color schemes, adding a visual preview that enables merchants to more easily and predictably update theme colors, and allowing merchants to implement theme changes at the global, section, and block level within their theme.
A solution which will enable theme developers to specify how to migrate merchants’ theme data during the update process when introducing architecture changes (ex: changing scope of settings, modifying schema structure in other ways, and more) will be available later this summer.
Quickstart development stores for new Shopify Partner organizations
When a new Shopify Partner organization is created, Shopify automatically creates a development store called Quickstart. This store is a non-transferable development store that’s populated with generated test data. You can immediately use this store to test apps, themes, and custom storefronts.
You can access the Quickstart store from the stores list in Shopify CLI, or by logging into your partner account and finding the store on the Stores page. If you sign up for a Shopify Partner account with a verified business email address, then the Quickstart store is created automatically. Learn more in our developer documentation.
The Plus Wholesale Channel will be deprecated on April 30, 2024
With the release of over a dozen new features since launch, B2B on Shopify is the future of selling wholesale on our platform. As a result, we are deprecating the Plus Wholesale Channel effective April 30, 2024. Impacted merchants received communications on June 6 and 7, 2023, with information about our new B2B features and plans to sunset the wholesale channel, along with details about the migration process and a self-serve migration tool.
We ask that you reach out to your clients using the Plus Wholesale Channel and begin the conversation around migrating to B2B on Shopify.
Drive better performance for your merchants’ digital ads with custom audience lists powered by Shopify’s commerce insights and machine learning. The latest algorithm is now 63% better at driving conversions at a lower cost. Learn how you can leverage Shopify Audiences to help your merchants reach the right buyers and reduce ad costs.
In this webinar, Shopify’s engineering team provides a deep dive into Shopify’s B2B APIs, best practices for building custom solutions, and upcoming B2B API releases, and answers questions submitted by partners and merchants.
Shape Hydrogen’s future and enter to win a gift card
We value your opinion and would like to invite you to participate in a 15 to 20 minute unmoderated usability test to help us improve our product, Hydrogen. You can take the test at your convenience without the need to interact with anyone. By participating, you’ll be contributing to creating a better experience for you and your fellow developers.
You’ll also stand a chance to win a gift card worth $100 USD or $50 USD (or the equivalent in your local currency). Your contribution can make a significant impact, even if you have limited experience with Hydrogen.
We’ve added new DatePicker and Disclosure checkout UI components. DatePicker will help you build customizations to select specific delivery dates, while the Disclosure component will help with UX patterns that progressively disclose information, like the long list of line items in a bundle.
Additionally, checkout branding now supports custom fonts. Checkout, accounts, and UI extensions inherit these fonts making experiences consistent across surfaces.
Together these capabilities will help merchants upgrade to checkout extensibility.
Checkout validation and product bundle apps powered by Functions will soon be generally available to merchants, which means now’s the time to start building these tools if you want to capitalize on the new opportunities presented by Functions.
Changes to support requests for app charge refunds
As of May 3, 2023, merchants will be required to contact partners directly if they want to request a refund for an app. Shopify Support will no longer reach out to partners on behalf of the merchant to facilitate their request.
This change will streamline the refund process, as refunds are at the partners’ discretion and partners have the ability to issue most refunds themselves. The exception is still reversals to pending charges. In these cases, we highly encourage partners to issue application credits, which Shopify Support can then apply to the invoice.
Please contact Partner Support with any questions about this change.
We’re making it easier for merchants to install apps in context. App developers can now generate a deep link that takes merchants to the theme editor, where a desired app block will be added automatically for the merchant to preview and adjust prior to saving.
Deep linking simplifies your app’s installation flow, because merchants won’t need to navigate to the theme editor, find the block, and then act on it. Instead, your app does the work for them. Because merchants can preview the block, you’re providing them with control over what they include in their storefront.
To keep the Shopify App Store safe and secure and to better serve our partner community, we will begin enforcing partner email verification.
Your contact information allows us to share important information and updates related to your business. It also enables us to make sure that every account is created by a real person with real contact details, which helps us keep the app store safe for all users.
Account owners, please use the banner in the partner dashboard to verify your email as soon as possible to avoid restrictions to your dashboard access.
Shopify Foundations Certification: Introduction to POS and Retail
Shopify’s Point of Sale gives merchants access to everything they need to sell in person, backed by everything they need to sell online. Level up your skills and be one of the first developers to get certified in the features, benefits, and positioning for Shopify’s POS system.
Take this course as part of Shopify’s Foundations Certification series, designed to empower partners who support merchants.
Now any app, big or small, that meets our highest quality bar can apply to stand out with an easy-to-spot badge, search boost, and promotion opportunities in the Shopify admin and Shopify App Store content.
Select your app in the Partner Dashboard and click on Distribution to see if it meets the requirements to apply. If not, follow the criteria checklist and start unlocking achievements along the way.
Shopify is extending support for API version 2022-04 to June 30, 2023. All public and custom apps using API resources no longer supported in API versions 2022-04 and 2022-07will stop working as intended after this date. Existing apps must migrate to API version 2022-10 or later by June 30, 2023 to avoid any interruptions.
Below are a few important breaking changes:
Deprecated properties on the Order resource in the REST Admin API—see details here
Some Fulfillment API endpoints and mutations relating to managing fulfillments via an order have been deprecated
You can now create Shopify Functions with Javascript
Good news—Shopify Functions written in JavaScript can now be deployed in production environments. Going forward, Rust and JavaScript will be our first-class languages for Shopify Functions. However, you can still write Functions in any WebAssembly-supported language that meets our requirements.
If this is your first time experimenting with Functions, welcome! Functions are a powerful set of Shopify backend extensibility APIs used to meet unique merchant business needs. Watch our intro video to learn why Shopify developers are excited about it.
Have questions? We’re hosting a text-only Discord AMA on April 13 at 11am EST. Test it out and attend to ask us any questions or point out any issues you’re facing. Accept the invite now and don’t miss a thing.
This month, we are running a promotion in which we give merchants credit to the Shopify App Store to show them the power of apps and how using them can help their business thrive.
You may see new traffic and installs as a result of this promotion. Ensure your app is eligible for future promotions by integrating the Shopify Billing API.
Google is sunsetting Universal Analytics in July 2023, and replacing it with Google Analytics 4 (GA4), which is Google’s next-generation measurement solution. Universal Analytics will continue to collect data until it is sunset in July 2023, and data will remain accessible for at least 6 months afterwards.
Visit our documentation for next steps to migrate your app listing tracking from Universal Analytics to the new Google Analytics 4 or to set up tracking for the first time.
In the Admin GraphQL API version 2023-04, appUsageRecordCreate now supports an optional parameter idempotencyKey which ensures the merchant will not be charged twice for the same intent. When idempotencyKey is provided, the mutation will return the same response as any previous appUsageRecordCreate mutations with identical idempotencyKey for the intended shop and requesting app, rather than creating a new record and charging the merchant again.
Creating app charges using the merchant’s billing currency
In the Admin GraphQL API version 2023-04, the Billing API will now allow developers to create app charges using currencies that match the merchant’s local billing currency.
Previously, app charges could only be created using USD and were converted to the merchant’s local currency using the exchange rate at the time the invoice was issued. By creating app charges in the merchant’s billing currency, app developers can provide merchants with better price predictability and set pricing that is proportional to the purchasing power of their local billing currency.
Introducing Shopify Certifications: Start learning now
Introducing Shopify Certifications: Foundations, our new self-paced course designed to help you accelerate your knowledge of Shopify solutions and expand your customer reach.
Complete all eight courses and earn the Shopify Foundations Certification. Let customers know about your expertise by displaying certification badges across your website and your marketing assets.
Explore all our available courses at the link below.
From helping merchants build bespoke checkout experiences to developing public apps, there are huge opportunities for you to capitalize on checkout extensibility.
Get started with our new education series: Upgrade Shopify Checkout. In this two-part series, you’ll learn about checkout extensibility, the checkout.liquid deprecation, and how to upgrade merchants. Earn a badge when you complete both courses to show your expertise.
The Winter ’23 Edition launched on February 9, and was full of products to help speed up your development process and further customize your commerce builds. Announcements included:
Get caught up on all the news by visiting the Editions website, or dig into the developer announcements with our roundup on the Partners Blog.
Introducing the Mock Shop API for prototyping storefronts
We are introducing Mock.Shop, a free prototyping tool to build a proof-of-concept storefront without having to set up a shop or run any server-side code. Use the Mock Shop API and AI-powered text-to-GraphQL generator to query live commerce data such as sample products, variants, and carts to help you quickly prototype commerce storefronts.
Mock.Shop is publicly available—no server or access tokens required.
The search algorithms we use on the Shopify App Store now incorporate more data on how merchants engage with results after they search. In other words, apps that merchants find most relevant, given what they’re searching for, will rank higher overall.
We’re always optimizing our automated systems to show the most useful results possible.While term matching will still inform results, this update will reduce the impact of keyword stuffing.
We are excited to announce that Google Analytics 4 will be launching natively through the Google channel app on Shopify in March. This upgrade will enable merchants to seamlessly take advantage of Google Analytics 4’s enhanced real-time, multi-channel tracking and privacy controls. Universal Analytics will continue to process data until July 1, 2023 (July 1, 2024 for Analytics 360 properties) and merchants will be able to continue to access previously processed data for at least six months after that date.
On April 20th, 2023, we will sunset the Transporter data migration app. All merchants with the Transporter app installed were notified on February 20th, and have been encouraged to instead use the third-party Matrixify app for their data migration needs. Matrixify has in-depth documentation and tutorials, and supports the Transporter CSV export format for common data types.
If you have any questions about the Transporter app sunset, please reach out to Shopify Support. Or, learn more about Matrixify in the Shopify App Store.
Shopify has spent nearly two decades building the components that form the world’s most powerful commerce platform. Now, we’re opening those components to the biggest retailers in the world with a new offering: Commerce Components by Shopify.
Commerce Components is a modern, composable stack that lets retailers choose the modular components they want, integrate them with their existing services, and create incredible customer experiences built for conversion. It’s designed for the unique requirements of enterprise retailers generating over $500 million USD in annual revenue.
This is an exciting evolution in Shopify’s journey to make commerce better for everyone.
Build custom wholesale solutions to help Plus merchants easily scale and grow their DTC and B2B stores from one platform. It is important to ensure your current B2B apps are up to date with these new APIs.
This release includes metafields for Company and Company Location so you can create custom data fields such as order quantity requirements. It also includes Checkout UI extensions based on B2B buyer identity, allowing you to build performant and upgrade-safe apps for B2B checkout experiences—such as hiding, reordering, or offering custom shipping and payment options using the Delivery and Payment Functions. It also supports importing non-Shopify B2B orders via REST API, automatic payment reminder emails to companies, and setting ‘due on fulfillment’ as a payment term.
To learn more about building B2B apps, visit our developer docs.
Delivery and payment customizations are now available in Developer Preview
The Functions APIs for delivery customizations and payment customizations are now available in a developer preview. With these new APIs you can hide, reorder, or rename delivery and payment options to help merchants increase conversions and stand out from the competition.
To learn more about building with delivery and payment Functions, visit our developer docs.
Test webhook topics and streamline webhook failure emails
You’ll now be able to trigger a webhook test payload to a specified destination directly from the CLI. Previously, developers needed to create a dev store and manually click around with an app installed in order to test their app logic. This new feature allows you to more easily test subscriptions for each topic, so you can see what the payload will look like before your app is in production.
We’re also reducing the number of emails sent each time a webhook delivery fails. Previously, there was one email sent per attempt, which could quickly add up and become ineffective for monitoring. Now, only one email will be sent for each one-per-consecutive string of failed attempts, over a two-day period, in order to keep your inbox clean and actionable.
If you have any questions about these changes, contact Partner Support or check out the dev docs below.
Quickly format your code with our new Prettier plugin
Format your code instantly with our Liquid Prettier plugin (1.0.0) for consistent code styles so you can avoid discussing styles and focus on what matters. Available both in-admin and locally in your favorite code editor.
Shopify Community is an active channel of 900,000 Shopify merchants, partners, and developers from around the world, ready to share their expertise and experiences. In this community, you can connect with your peers, get support, and engage in meaningful conversations about working with Shopify. Check it out below, and add your voice to important conversations about APIs, SDKs, Shopify Functions, Online Store 2.0, and more.
Share your thoughts about monitoring and observability when hosting your app
This is your chance to help shape the future of Shopify. We’d like to understand better what you need for monitoring and observability when it comes to hosting your application. How do you know your app is healthy? And how should we alert you to potential issues? Your feedback will help shape Oxygen so it better meets your needs. This survey should take no more than 20 minutes to complete. Thanks for your time, and we look forward to hearing your feedback.
Schedule workflows and fetch data with Shopify Flow
We have exciting news about our ecommerce automation solution, Shopify Flow. You and your merchants can now schedule workflows to run at a specific time and date, without needing a commerce event to kick things off. You can also leverage the new ‘get data’ action to fetch specific Shopify data needed for daily reports. When combined, these new features will help your merchants solve more tasks and get more done with automation. Please note that Shopify Flow is currently only available in English.
In today’s fast-paced world, having a clear sense of direction and purpose is essential for personal and professional success. A personal vision statement serves as a guiding light, providing clarity, motivation, and a sense of purpose.
This article aims to guide you in creating a unique and impactful personal vision statement that aligns with your aspirations and drives you towards fulfillment.
Understanding the Power of a Personal Vision Statement
Before creating a vision statement of your own, it’s important to understand what constitutes such a statement and how it can benefit you.
Defining a Personal Vision Statement
A personal vision statement is a concise declaration that articulates your long-term goals and aspirations. It goes beyond mere goal-setting, encapsulating your core values, beliefs, and passions.
While often confused with mission statements and goals, a personal vision statement focuses on the broader purpose and vision that drives your life.
Benefits of a Personal Vision Statement
Crafting a vision statement offers numerous benefits. Firstly, it serves as a roadmap for personal growth and success, providing direction in decision-making and actions.
Moreover, a well-defined vision statement instills a sense of motivation and inspiration, fueling perseverance in the face of challenges.
It acts as a compass, ensuring that your life’s endeavors are aligned with your deepest desires.
Elements of an Effective Personal Vision Statement
You understand the basics and the benefits of a vision statement. But before you look at trying to create one for yourself, let’s look at some of the basic elements your personal vision statement should include.
Self-Reflection and Self-Awareness
To create an impactful personal vision statement, introspection is crucial. Take the time to delve into your inner self, reflecting on your values, passions, and aspirations.
Engage in activities like journaling, meditation, or seeking feedback from trusted individuals. Developing a deeper self-awareness will provide the foundation upon which your vision statement can be built.
Long-Term Goals and Aspirations
Your individual vision statement should encompass your long-term goals and aspirations. Consider the areas of life that are important to you, such as career, relationships, personal growth, or contribution to society.
Identify and prioritize the goals that resonate most deeply with your values and aspirations.
Core Values and Beliefs
Core values and beliefs are the pillars upon which your vision statement rests. They define who you are and what you stand for.
Take the time to identify and define your core values, such as integrity, compassion, or creativity. Aligning your personal vision with these values will bring a sense of authenticity and fulfillment.
Unique Skills and Talents
Recognizing and leveraging your unique skills and talents is essential when crafting your personal vision statement. Consider the abilities and strengths that set you apart.
How can you utilize these talents to make a meaningful impact? Integrating your unique skills into your vision statement will empower you to embrace your full potential.
Crafting Your Personal Vision Statement
You understand what your vision statement is, why you need one and what elements such a statement must contain. Now let’s get down to the work of creating a vision statement of your own.
Writing with Clarity and Purpose
When writing your personal vision statement, aim for clarity and purpose. Use simple and concise language to express your vision. Craft sentences that are easy to understand and resonate with emotion.
By doing so, you will inspire and connect with others who read your statement.
Structure and Format
A suggested structure for your personal vision statement includes an introduction, a concise statement of your vision, and a closing that reinforces your commitment.
Use action-oriented language to convey a sense of determination and motivation. Additionally, visualize your desired outcome as you write, allowing your words to paint a vivid picture of your future.
Revising and Refining
Crafting a personal vision statement is an iterative process. As you grow and evolve, your vision may also transform. Regularly revisit and refine your statement to ensure it remains aligned with your aspirations.
Embrace change and adapt your vision accordingly.
Putting Your Personal Vision Statement into Action
With your personal vision statement in hand, it’s now time to get to work. Here’s how to put that brand new vision statement into action for you.
Goal Setting and Action Planning
Transform your vision statement into actionable steps by setting specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and time-bound (SMART) goals.
Break down your long-term vision into smaller milestones that can be achieved along the way. Create a detailed action plan outlining the steps you need to take to reach each goal.
Regularly review and adjust your plan as necessary to stay on track.
Visualization and Affirmation
Visualization is a powerful tool to manifest your personal vision. Spend time each day visualizing yourself living your vision. See yourself accomplishing your goals, experiencing success, and embracing fulfillment.
Additionally, incorporate positive affirmations that reinforce your belief in your vision. Repeat affirmations that resonate with your vision and empower you to overcome obstacles.
Living Your Personal Vision
Putting your new personal vision statement into action is all very well. And it’s an important first step in the journey. But how do you continue to live and benefit from that vision statement every day?
Accountability and Support Systems
Accountability plays a crucial role in staying committed to your personal vision. Share your vision with trusted individuals who can support and hold you accountable for your actions.
Seek guidance from mentors or coaches who can provide valuable insights and help you stay focused on your vision.
Overcoming Challenges and Obstacles
Along the journey towards your personal vision, challenges and obstacles are inevitable. Develop resilience and maintain motivation by reframing setbacks as opportunities for growth.
Embrace a problem-solving mindset, seeking creative solutions to overcome obstacles. Learn from failures and use them as stepping stones to propel you closer to your vision.
Crafting a compelling personal vision statement is a transformative process that empowers you to live a life of purpose, success, and fulfillment.
By understanding the power of a vision statement and incorporating elements such as self-reflection, goal-setting, and leveraging your unique skills, you can create a vision that aligns with your values and aspirations.
Through clear and purposeful writing, regular revision, and putting your vision into action, you can turn your vision into reality.
Embrace accountability, overcome challenges, and live your personal vision with passion and determination. Start today, and unlock the remarkable potential within you.
Often, you will find custom fields mentioned in various WordPress tutorials around the web. Still, you will likely not see the custom fields option on your site, especially if you recently started your WordPress blog.
In the past, custom fields were visible by default on the post editing screen of all WordPress sites.
However, the WordPress core development team decided to hide it by default for all new users since it is an advanced feature.
They also made it easy for anyone to make the custom fields visible with just a few clicks from within the post editing screen.
Simply create or edit an existing post/page, then click on the three-dot menu in the top right corner of the screen.
At the bottom of the menu, click on the ‘Preferences’ option.
This will bring up the block editor ‘Preferences’ popup. From here, you need to switch to the ‘Panels’ tab and switch the toggle next to the ‘Custom Fields’ option.
Note: If you don’t see the Custom Fields option on your site, then please scroll to the troubleshooting section below in this article.
WordPress will then tell you that a page reload is required to enable Custom Fields.
Simply click on the ‘Enable & Reload’ button to continue.
The editor screen will then reload, after which you can scroll down to the bottom of the page and find the ‘Custom Fields’ box there.
WordPress remembers your display choice and will continue to display the custom fields box whenever you edit posts or pages on your WordPress website.
You can now use the Custom Fields box to add, edit, and delete custom fields and their values.
What Are Custom Fields? What Can You Do With Them?
By default, when you write a new post, page, or any content type, WordPress saves it into two different areas. The first part is the body of your content that you add using the block editor.
The second part is the information about that particular content. For example, title, author name, date/time, and more. This post information is called metadata.
Apart from the default post metadata, WordPress also allows you to save custom metadata by using custom fields.
WordPress developers use custom fields to store custom post metadata for your posts. For example, the All in One SEO plugin uses custom fields to store SEO settings for your posts.
However, plugin developers usually create custom meta boxes instead of using the default custom fields box. This makes it easier for users to input information.
If you want to create a custom meta box to easily input custom metadata, then see our guide on adding custom meta boxes in WordPress.
Troubleshooting Custom Fields in WordPress
Recently one of our readers came to us with a problem where the Custom Fields option was missing from the block editor preferences. After some investigation, we were able to find the cause of the issue.
If your WordPress site is missing the Custom Fields option under the ‘Preferences’ menu, then you need to check if you have the Advanced Custom Fields (ACF) plugin installed and activated on your website.
In ACF version 5.5.13, they added a setting to remove the default WordPress custom field meta box. This speeds up the load times on the post editing page. The idea is that you shouldn’t need the default meta box since you are using ACF.
However, if you want to enable the default WordPress custom field meta box, then you need to add the following code to your WordPress theme using the functions.php file or WPCode:
We hope this article helped you fix the custom fields not showing issue on your WordPress site. You may also want to see our ultimate list of the most useful WordPress tips, tricks, and hacks and our expert picks for the must have WordPress plugins to grow your website.
If you liked this article, then please subscribe to our YouTube Channel for WordPress video tutorials. You can also find us on Twitter and Facebook.
All retailers with physical locations need a point-of-sale (POS) system to accept payments and keep accurate sales records. However, a furniture store with 50 locations will have different needs from a small jewelry business running its first pop-up shop.
When you’re deciding on the bestPOS systemfor your small business, it’s important to think about which features match your current needs and future goals.
This post is designed to help you find out what features aPOS system for small businessshould have, and how to choose the right point-of-sale system for your business.
What is the best POS system for small business?
Shopify POS: Best retail POS with seamless integration for online and in-person sales
Shopify POS on counter in retail store.
Shopify POSintegrates seamlessly with Shopify’s ecommerce platform, allowing small businesses to manage both online and in-person sales efficiently and effectively.
With Shopify POS Go, you can sell anywhere your customers are. You can look up inventory, check customer profiles, and create a more tailored shopping experience while interacting with a customer.
Shopify POS helps you run up to 1,000 physical stores and your ecommerce store, all from one platform. You can understand where products are by location and availability when making a sale.
Screen showing inventory availability on Shopify Mobile POS.
Monthly fee:Paid Shopify plan required for POS use.
Square: Versatile all-in-one solution for small businesses
Square offers a user-friendly interface, affordable pricing, and a range of features, making it an option for small businesses looking for an all-in-one solution.
The free version has sales tracking and reporting, and the ability to accept payments without Wi-Fi. Square also offers services like payroll that integrate with the POS system.
Features:
Customer accounts
Third-party integrations
Inventory management
Mobile access
Shift scheduling
Loyalty program
Employee management
Electronic payments
Payment processing fee:In person: 2.6%, plus 10¢; Online: 2.6%, plus 30¢.
Monthly fee:$0.
Lightspeed Retail: Robust inventory management for retail businesses
Lightspeed Retail provides robust inventory management capabilities. It’s an option for small businesses with complex inventory needs, such as retail stores or multi-location businesses. Lightspeed Retail offers one-on-one onboarding and an account manager with every plan.
Features:
Inventory management
Multi-store capabilities
Sales reporting and analytics
Employee management
Ecommerce integration
Point of sale (POS)
Loyalty program
Purchase order management
Hardware integration
Payment processing
Payment processing fee:In person: 2.6%, plus 10¢; Online: 2.6%, plus 30¢.
Monthly fee:Starts at $69 per month.
Toast: Designed for foodservice industry with menu management and tableside ordering
Toast is specifically designed for the foodservice industry, with features like menu management, tableside ordering, and kitchen display systems. It’s a choice for small restaurants and cafés.
Toast offers management of multiple locations, so you can publish different menus and set different prices at each location. Features like online ordering and the customer loyalty program cost extra depending on the plan you choose.
Features:
Online ordering
Inventory management
Kitchen display system (KDS)
Reporting and analytics
Digital menu boards
Gift cards management
Employee management
Delivery tracking
Tableside ordering
Loyalty programs
Mobile ordering
Multi-location management
Payment processing fee:With monthly hardware payment: 2.99%, plus 15¢; Buy hardware upfront: 2.49%, plus 15¢.
Monthly fee:$0.
Vend: Cloud-based POS system for businesses with multiple locations
Vend is a cloud-based POS system that works for small businesses with multiple locations. It provides centralized inventory management and real-time reporting across stores. You can choose your own payment processor, or use the integrated one, which is Lightspeed Payments.
The Lean plan gives you an account manager and 24/7 customer support via phone, live chat, or email. You also get integrated payments and cloud backup. For integrations with Shopify or accounting software like QuickBooks, you’ll need a more advanced plan.
Features:
Multichannel selling
Inventory management
Payments and security
Sales tracking
Mobile POS
Stock control
Promotions and discounts
Offline selling
Refund management
Supplier management
Payment processing fee:2.6%, plus 10¢.
Monthly fee:Paid plans start at $69 per month, billed annually.
Clover: Versatile POS system with industry-specific solutions
Clover POS provides solutions tailored to different industries, with features like inventory tracking, customer management, and integration with various payment processors. It’s a versatile option for small businesses in different sectors.
Clover and third-party vendors sell Clover hardware bundles and components. On the back end, Fiserv, which owns Clover, processes payments, but you can choose your own service provider.
Features:
Mobile payments
Employee management
Inventory management
Order tracking
Online ordering
CRM integration
Multi-location support
Security and fraud protection
Real-time reporting
Ecommerce integration
24/7 customer support
Bar code scanning
Table layout and management
Digital menu board
API access
Payment processing fee:In person:2.3%, plus 10¢ for most plans.
Monthly fee:Starts at $14.95 per month.
Revel Systems: Feature-rich POS system for the hospitality industry
Revel Systems is a POS system that offers functionalities like CRM, loyalty programs, and online ordering. It’s suitable for small businesses in the hospitality industry, including restaurants, bars, and cafés.
Revel POS offers digital outdoor display hardware for drive-thrus, and delivery tools like driver tracking and text message updates. It can be expensive to install, and you must purchase a minimum of two terminals.
Features:
Cloud-based point of sale (POS)
Quick service POS
Self-service kiosk
Inventory management
Real-time reporting
Enterprise management
Loyalty programs
Payment processing
Offline mode
API integration
Accounting integrations
Labor management
Hardware solutions
Tableside ordering
Split bill functionality
Customizable user permissions
Ecommerce integration
Payment processing fee:2.49%, plus 15¢.
Monthly fee:Starts at $99.99 per month, per terminal.
Types of POS system
Retail POS system
Omnichannel POS system
Mobile POS system
As your small business grows, so will your need for a POS system that can handle increasingly complex retail operations and systems.
Here are three different types of POS systems for small businesses.
Retail POS system
Retail POS systemslet you accept payments in-person, monitor inventory, track sales, and manage team members. They’re usually anchored to a checkout counter and are designed for merchants who sell from physical locations likepop-up shops, events, festivals, and permanent brick-and-mortar stores.
Shopify POS being used in retail store.
They do the hard work for you, including maintaining accurate sales and inventory data. Whenever you buy, sell, return, or exchange a product, your sales data and inventory levels are updated in real time.
Omnichannel POS system
Omnichannel POS systems can help unify your online and offline sales.
Only Shopify POS unifies your online and retail store data—customer data, inventory, sales, and more—into one back office. Vieweasy to understand reportsto spot trends faster, capitalize on opportunities, and jumpstart your brand’s growth.
Mobile POS system
Mobile POS systemsare handy hardware and software systems that process payments. They are similar to traditional retail POS systems but they don’t need to be attached to one checkout counter.
Retail store owner using Shopify mobile POS.
Using a mobile POS system, you can downloadPOS softwareonto your mobile device and process payments wherever your customers are. That means your physical location doesn’t need to have one fixed checkout counter, which is helpful if you’re selling at festivals and events.
Justyna Sylwia, the owner ofIsle Wilde, says that having amobile POS systemhas been great for jewelry festivals.
“Having a system that turns your phone into a POS system is a godsend,” Justyna says. “Shoppers feel more secure purchasing products via professional tools. It gives customers more confidence in who they’re buying from.”
Why does a small business need a POS system?
Small businesses that want to accept payments in person, track sales, and manage inventory need a point-of-sale system.
Although you could accept only cash payments and manually track your sales on a spreadsheet, it would be hard to satisfy customer payment preferences and challenging to accurately manage your inventory. Let’s review all the benefits of investing in a POS system for small business.
Accept payments
With a POS system for small business, you can accept multiplepayment methodsin-store. Depending on the POS software and hardware you choose, you may be able to take and record payment from mobile or tablet devices, as well as traditional checkout counters.
Track sales and manage inventory
The best POS systems for small businesses automatically track all sales. They also store key product information like:
Wholesale price
Retail price
Gross profit
Net profit
Your POS system automatically updates inventory and sales data any time you buy, sell, return, or exchange a product, in-store or online.
Manage inventory from one back office
Shopify POS comes with tools to help you manage warehouse and store inventory in one place. Forecast demand, set low stock alerts, create purchase orders, know which items are selling or sitting on shelves, count inventory, and more.
What features should a POS for small business have?
Accept multiple types of payments
Inventory tracking
Customerprofiles
Sales reports
Staff management
A solid POS system for small business lets you process payments securely and comes with software to help you handle administrative tasks more easily.
The kind of business you manage and the types of sales you make will help you determine which features your POS system needs to have. For example, a small business POS system that works well for a brick-and-mortar florist may not work so well for an online beauty retailer running their first physical pop-up shop.
Here are the top five POS system features you should look out for.
Accept multiple types of payments
Statistaprojects that by 2024, digital and mobile wallets like Apple Pay and Google Pay will surpass card and cash payments — taking nearly 35% of the payments market share.
Graph showing leading POS payment methods worldwide.
As a result of the pandemic and increasing payment options like mobile wallets, customers want the convenience of choosing from multiple payment types.
Your POS system should make accepting in-person and online payments simple. Most modern POS systems let you accept popular payment types like:
Contactless payments:These can includemobile walletpayments using Apple Pay or Google Pay andchip cards.
Magstripe cards:Which let customers swipe their card in your card reader.
Card not present transactions:When a shopper pays with their card without the card being physically present. These payments usually take place when a customer makes a purchase over the phone.
Gift cards:Digital or physical cards that can be redeemed for online or in-person purchases.
Amazon and Facebook pay options:This allows customers to pay using their Amazon or Facebook accounts.
📌 GET STARTED:Shopify Paymentsis the fastest way to start accepting payments in-person, online, and on-the-go. It’s included in all Shopify POS plans, so you can skip lengthy third-party activations and go from setup to selling faster.
Inventory tracking
The best POS system for small business can help track and manage in-store inventory, but most don’t let retailers track inventory across multiple channels like their online store, physical locations, and storage units.
US retailers are sitting on an average of$1.40 in inventoryfor every dollar of sales they make. Successfully tracking and managing inventory can help lower these costs and ensure you’re not tying too much capital in inventory.
Using POS systems that track your inventory across multiple channels will help you order enough stock to meet customer demand, while preventing frustratingstockouts, expensiveoverstocks, and inventory shortages.
💡 PRO TIP:Want to take the guesswork out of restocking? Setreorder pointsin Shopify admin to get low stock notifications and ensure you have enough lead time to replenish inventory of a product before quantities reach zero.
Maggie Owens, a Shopify merchant and owner of party supply and gifts shopPresley Paige, uses a POS system that seamlessly communicates between her online store and physical location. This helps her know exactly how much stock she has, so she can help customers find the product they’re looking for in-store.
“Offering store pickup for online purchases and managing them through our POS has been extremely helpful,” says Maggie. “Being able to track inventory in-store and send saved carts to customers who call in and want to put something on hold is useful too. This allows our in-store team to send customers items they didn’t purchase in-store, but mentioned wanting to purchase at a later date.”
💡 PRO TIP:Encourage store staff tosend the carts they saveby email at the end of their shift. This is an accessible way to recover abandoned store sales and attribute more revenue to your store–even if the transaction happened online.
Justyna Sylwia, owner of Isle Wilde, says her point-of-sale systems takes care of inventory tracking, letting her focus on other priorities.
“When selling numerous small items, it’s difficult to keep track of what’s available and how much of it,” Justyna says. “Having a system that does inventory for you allows you to focus on the more creative parts of running a business.”
Customer profiles
According to a recent study,60% of consumerssay they will become repeat buyers after a personalized shopping experience with a retailer. By personalizing your offering to customers, you can improve brand loyalty and revenue.
A POS system that’s connected to your online store will help you gather, track, and manage customer data more easily.
For example, with Shopify POS, you can create customer profiles and view their entire purchase history, including details like:
Everything they’ve bought at your store or online
How much they’ve spent to date
The number of times they’ve ordered
How long they’ve been a customer
All of thiscustomer dataupdates in real time and is located in one place. This helps customers, since your staff has more context and can serve them better. You can also use data to segment customer profiles and build email lists to keep customers engaged and increase repeat purchases.
Sales reports
Look for a POS system for small business that compiles sales reports from data collected at both your physical locations and online. That way, you get a complete picture of how your business is performing.
“Having sales reports is extremely helpful and makes tax season a literal breeze,” says Sylwia. You can download reports in just a few seconds. Also, it’s a great tool to understand how your business is doing and when you need to pump up the marketing.”
💡 PRO TIP:With Shopify, it’s straightforward to track sales by channel, store location, or product over time. To get started, viewSales reportsin Shopify admin.
Staff management
Your POS system should help you manage your team members as you grow and scale your business.
Look for management features like permissions and staff roles to make it easier to lead your staff. Using these features you can set boundaries for what actions team members can do without supervisor permission, for example, refunding a customer or applying a discount to a product.
It’s also helpful to have visibility on staff’s performance, like their average transaction values, median units per transaction, and daily sales.
💡 PRO TIP:With Shopify POS, you can assign differentroles and permissionsand set boundaries on what store staff can do in your POS system without manager approval—like changing a product’s price or applying a custom discount to a sale.
How to choose a POS system for your small business
For any business, thecost of a POS systemwill be a determining factor. The POS system you choose needs to match your budget.
When reviewing the cost of POS systems for small business owners, there are three factors to consider:
POS software fees:There are usually monthly or annual fees, with different plan tiers and corresponding prices. Higher-tier plans usually come with more advanced features, like advanced reporting and analytics.
Hardware costs:These depend on the payment types you want to accept, the number of stores and staff you have, and the overall functionality you need.
Payment processing fees:Every time you process a sale, your payment processor charges a fee. This fee is usually charged per transaction and taken as a percentage of the overall transaction amount. Sometimes the amount you pay per transaction depends on the credit card the customer uses.
Account for inventory management
Effectiveinventory managementusually starts with a POS system that automatically updates your inventory levels as you sell, return, or exchange products in both physical and online retail settings.
When you manage inventory from one platform, you can ensure accurateinventory reportingand simplify your overall management system. That way, you’ll spend less time manually counting andreconciling inventory, as well as reduce the likelihood of human error.
💡 PRO TIP:When you use different platforms to run your online and retail stores, inventory discrepancies are more likely to happen. This can lead to more frequentinventory countsto reconcile differences and ensurestock levelsare accurate.
Consider online and in-person selling
Nearly50% of brandssay that unifying their online and in-store operations and data is their biggest challenge.
The best POS systems unify online and in-person selling. They don’t just connect to your online store via an API, but collaborate with it and have built-inomnichannel selling features.
Even if you sell exclusively in online or physical settings today, you may want to give customers the option of both shopping channels in the future. Ensure the POS system you choose can support your business as it evolves.
Get started with a POS system for small business
A small business POS system helps you accept more payment methods, accurately manage inventory, run sales reports, and more. Consider your unique needs as a growing small business. What might suit some retailers might not be right for you. So think about which POS system features are most important to have, your budget, and your future business goals.
Sell the way your customers shop
Only Shopify POS unifies online and in-store sales and makes checkout seamless. Get all the tools you need to break free from the counter and sell wherever your customers are without worrying about your tech stack, integrations, or fragmented sales reports.
POS systems for small business FAQ
What should be included in a POS system?
Point of Sale (POS) terminal: This is the main computer that connects to the payment processor and maintains the inventory and sales records.
Barcode scanner: This is used to read barcodes on items and quickly enter them into the system.
Credit card reader: This is used to process credit and debit card payments.
Receipt printer: This prints customers’ receipts.
Cash drawer: This is used to store and secure cash payments.
Inventory management software: This is used to manage the inventory and keep track of sales.
Customer display: This is used to show customers the items they are purchasing and their total cost.
Security measures: These may include cameras, motion detectors, and other measures to protect against theft.
Do I need a POS system for my small business?
It depends on the type of business you operate. If you run a retail store, a POS system is essential for tracking sales and inventory. If you run a service-based business such as a restaurant, a POS system can help you manage orders and payments. If you run an online business, a POS system is not necessary, but can still be beneficial for tracking sales and managing inventory.
What is needed for a POS system?
A successful POS system needs hardware (barcode scanners, cash registers, receipt printers, payment terminals) and software for efficient transactions. Must-have features for POS systems include inventory management, sales reporting, customer relationship management, employee management, and secure payment processing.
Crafting an Impactful Vision Statement: Your Roadmap to Success
A compelling vision statement serves as a guiding force for organizations, fueling their growth and success. It provides a clear picture of the future, aligns teams, and inspires action.
In this article, we will explore a practical step-by-step guide to help you write an impactful vision statement for your organization.
By following these proven techniques, you can create a vision statement that resonates with your core values, motivates your team, and propels your organization towards its desired future.
Step 1: Reflect on Your Organization’s Core Values
Before diving into crafting your vision statement, take time to reflect on your organization’s core values. These values are the fundamental principles that define your organization’s identity and guide its actions.
By aligning your impactful vision statement with these core values, you ensure consistency and authenticity.
To identify and define your core values, engage your team in brainstorming sessions or surveys. Look for common themes and beliefs that emerge.
Consider what your organization stands for, its ethics, and the principles it upholds. Remember, core values are the compass that steers your organization’s decisions and actions.
Step 2: Define Your Organization’s Purpose
The purpose of your organization forms the foundation for your vision statement. It represents the reason why your organization exists and the impact it aspires to make in the world.
Defining your purpose helps you align your impactful vision statement with your organization’s broader mission.
To discover and articulate your organization’s purpose, reflect on the problems you aim to solve or the needs you aim to fulfill. Consider the positive change you seek to bring about in your industry or community.
A strong purpose should resonate with your team and ignite their passion for the work they do.
Step 3: Envision the Future
Crafting a compelling vision statement requires envisioning the future you want to create. Picture the ideal state of your organization, visualizing the impact it will have on stakeholders, customers, and society as a whole.
Allow yourself to dream big and think long-term.
Incorporate long-term goals into your vision statement, outlining the milestones you aim to achieve over time. By including these aspirations, you provide a sense of direction and purpose for your organization’s growth and progress.
Step 4: Be Specific and Measurable
Clarity and specificity are crucial when writing an impactful vision statement. Avoid vague or generic language that can be interpreted in multiple ways. Instead, be precise about what you aim to accomplish and the outcomes you desire.
Incorporate measurable elements into your vision statement to ensure accountability and track progress. Use quantifiable metrics, such as revenue targets, customer satisfaction ratings, or market share goals.
This helps your team understand what success looks like and provides a clear benchmark for evaluation.
Step 5: Inspire and Motivate
An impactful vision statement should ignite inspiration and motivation among your team. Use aspirational language that evokes emotions and paints a vivid picture of the future. Appeal to their sense of purpose, igniting their passion and commitment.
Consider the impact your organization’s success will have on people’s lives, industries, or the environment. Craft your vision statement in a way that captures the hearts and minds of your team members, compelling them to strive for greatness.
Brevity is the key to an effective vision statement. Keep it concise and to the point, avoiding unnecessary jargon or complex language. A short and memorable vision statement is easier to internalize and communicate across your organization.
Final Thoughts on Crafting an Impactful Vision Statement
Craft a vision statement that can be easily recalled and repeated. Use simple and straightforward language to ensure clarity and understanding.
This allows your team members to embrace and align themselves with the vision, reinforcing its impact on their daily work. Crafting an impactful vision statement is a crucial step towards guiding your organization towards success.
By following the step-by-step guide outlined in this article, you can create a vision statement that truly captures the essence of your organization’s values, purpose, and aspirations.
Remember to reflect on your core values and define your organization’s purpose as the foundation for your vision statement.
Envision the future you want to create, incorporating specific and measurable elements that inspire and motivate your team. Keep your vision statement concise and memorable, ensuring it resonates with everyone in your organization.
Implementing your vision statement requires effective communication and integration into daily operations. Regularly monitor progress and make adjustments as needed to stay aligned with your vision.
Furthermore, optimizing your vision statement for search engines can enhance its visibility and reach.
A well-crafted vision statement has the power to align teams, inspire innovation, and drive long-term success. Embrace the transformative impact of a clear vision, and encourage your team members to embrace and embody its principles in their work.
By taking the time to write an impactful vision statement, you are setting your organization on a path towards achieving its goals, making a positive impact, and realizing its full potential.
Embrace the power of vision, and watch as your organization thrives in the pursuit of its purpose.
Creating an Omni-Channel Retail Strategy with WooCommerce
In the rapidly evolving retail industry, the lines between digital and physical shopping experiences are becoming increasingly blurred. This has led to the rise of a new retail model known as omnichannel retailing. Omni-channel retailing, an integrated sales approach, provides a seamless shopping experience across different platforms, merging digital and physical interactions. In today’s dynamic retail landscape, where customers expect consistency and convenience, an omnichannel strategy is key to staying competitive.
At the heart of this omnichannel revolution is WooCommerce. From selling physical and digital products to appointment bookings and even subscriptions, WooCommerce can handle it all. With an extensive ecosystem of plugins and themes, it allows for limitless possibilities to create an unparalleled, integrated shopping experience across various customer touchpoints. In this article, we’ll delve deeper into how to leverage WooCommerce in creating an effective omnichannel retail strategy.
Steps to create an omnichannel retail strategy with WooCommerce
There are a number of steps you can take to create your omnichannel retail strategy, which we’ll outline in the following sections.
Omnichannel Retailing
Define your customer’s journey
The first step towards creating an effective omnichannel retail strategy with WooCommerce is to define your customer’s journey. Understanding the journey your customers take from their initial contact with your brand to the final purchase is crucial. This will enable you to provide a seamless and consistent experience across all platforms and channels.
Every interaction a customer has with your brand, whether online or offline, is a touchpoint. This could range from visiting your website, receiving an email newsletter, interacting with your social media accounts, to stepping into your physical store if you have one.
You can map the customer journey by listing all possible touchpoints a customer may encounter during their interaction with your brand. Pay attention to where your customers are coming from, which channels they prefer, and where they are most likely to make a purchase. It’s also worth noting that a customer’s journey isn’t always linear; they may move back and forth between channels before making a purchase.
The next step is to identify areas where you can create omnichannel integrations. Look for opportunities where you can connect these touchpoints to provide a unified and seamless experience for your customers.
For instance, if a customer views a product on your website but doesn’t purchase it, you could use email marketing to send them a reminder or offer related to that product. If a customer adds items to their shopping cart on your website but abandons it, consider sending a push notification to their mobile device reminding them to complete their purchase.
Another key aspect to consider is how your WooCommerce store can be integrated with your physical store if you have one. For example, you could allow customers to check product availability online and opt for in-store pickup. By linking online and offline experiences, you can provide your customers with the convenience they need, which is at the heart of an omnichannel retail strategy.
Develop an effective product presentation strategy
Once you have a comprehensive understanding of your customer’s journey, the next step is developing a strategic product presentation strategy. This is vital because the way your products are presented can significantly impact sales. One particularly effective method of enhancing product presentation is through showcasing related products.
Displaying related products can be a powerful tool for boosting sales. It works by encouraging customers to explore more of what you offer, increasing the likelihood of additional purchases. The related products could be similar items, complementary goods, or products often bought together. For instance, a customer browsing for a laptop might also be interested in laptop cases, a mouse, or even software packages.
Implementing this method also improves the customer’s shopping experience by saving them time and effort in searching for related items. Moreover, it gives you an opportunity to personalize their shopping experience based on their browsing behavior and purchase history.
WooCommerce has built-in functionality to display related products. By default, it uses product categories and tags to suggest related items. However, for a more personalized approach, consider using additional plugins.
Leverage educational content and webinars
Educational content, specifically webinars, can be a powerful tool for engaging customers and driving sales in your omnichannel strategy. Webinars are online seminars that provide valuable content to your audience, ranging from product demonstrations and tutorials to expert discussions. They can help you establish authority in your field, build trust with your audience, and gently guide them down the sales funnel.
Webinars not only offer valuable content but also serve as an opportunity to showcase your products or services. For instance, a webinar could demonstrate how to use a particular product, effectively acting as a sales pitch that doesn’t feel like one. Moreover, the interactive nature of webinars allows for real-time engagement with potential customers, addressing their queries and concerns instantly.
Selling webinars through your WooCommerce store can be achieved using various plugins. One such plugin is “WooCommerce Paid Events” or “WooCommerce Bookings”, which allows you to create and sell tickets for webinars. After installing and activating your chosen plugin, you can create a new bookable product (your webinar) from your WooCommerce dashboard. You can set the date, time, price, and other details for the webinar. Once published, customers can purchase webinar tickets directly from your WooCommerce store.
Integrating webinars into your WooCommerce store connects them to your wider omnichannel strategy. For instance, you can use your various channels to promote the webinar, send reminders to attendees via email or SMS, and follow up with a recording of the webinar and additional resources afterward. This way, webinars become another touchpoint in your customers’ journey, reinforcing the seamless shopping experience that is the hallmark of a successful omnichannel retail strategy.
Choose the right plugins
WooCommerce’s extensive ecosystem of plugins is a major factor in its ability to support a successful omnichannel strategy. Plugins are additional software that you can add to your WooCommerce store to extend its functionality.
When selecting plugins for your WooCommerce store, consider your specific business needs and goals. Every business is unique, so the right set of plugins will depend on your products, target audience, and overall strategy. You may want to consider the following points:
Functionality: Does the plugin provide the functionality you need? Ensure that the plugin can perform the tasks you require for your omnichannel strategy.
Compatibility: Is the plugin compatible with your current version of WooCommerce and other plugins you are using? Avoid plugins that may cause conflicts.
Support and updates: Does the plugin developer provide adequate support and regular updates? This is crucial for maintaining the security and performance of your website.
Reviews and ratings: What do other users say about the plugin? Reviews and ratings can provide valuable insight into the plugin’s performance and reliability.
Remember, while plugins can greatly enhance your store’s capabilities, it’s important not to overload your site with unnecessary plugins, as this could impact your site’s performance. Choose the plugins that best align with your business needs and omnichannel retail strategy.
Social media platforms play a pivotal role in successful omnichannel retail strategies. They are not just marketing channels but are also becoming popular platforms for discovery and commerce. Thus, integrating your WooCommerce store with social media platforms can provide a seamless shopping experience, driving customer engagement and conversions.
Leveraging social media integrations primarily involves two aspects – social media marketing and social commerce. Social media marketing helps you reach and engage with your customers on these platforms. It involves sharing engaging content, responding to customer queries, and even running paid campaigns. On the other hand, social commerce involves selling directly through social media platforms.
Various WooCommerce plugins enable social media integration. For instance, “Facebook for WooCommerce” allows you to connect your WooCommerce store to your Facebook page, enabling you to sync your product catalog and add Messenger to your site.
When integrating with social media platforms, it’s crucial to ensure a consistent brand experience across all platforms. Your branding, messaging, and customer service should be consistent whether customers are interacting with your brand on your WooCommerce store, Facebook page, Instagram profile, or any other platform.
Leverage multi-channel marketing
In an omnichannel retail strategy, each marketing channel must work together seamlessly to provide a consistent customer experience. This includes channels such as email marketing, content marketing, SEO, social media marketing, and more. Fortunately, WooCommerce’s versatility and array of plugins make multi-channel marketing easier to manage.
Email marketing: Email is a powerful tool for maintaining customer relationships and driving sales. WooCommerce, when integrated with email marketing services like Mailchimp or SendinBlue, can automate various email campaigns. For instance, you can send personalized product recommendations, cart abandonment reminders, or post-purchase follow-ups.
Content marketing: Content is king in the digital marketing world. With WooCommerce’s WordPress integration, you can seamlessly combine your eCommerce store with a content-rich website. This allows you to use blog posts, tutorials, webinars, and other content to drive traffic to your products.
SEO: WooCommerce is built with SEO best practices in mind, and with the aid of plugins like Yoast SEO, you can optimize your product pages, categories, and tags to rank higher in search engine results.
Other forms of digital marketing: WooCommerce supports various other marketing channels. For example, plugins like “WooCommerce Google Ads” and “WooCommerce Social Media Share Buttons” enable you to leverage Google’s advertising network and social media platforms for promotion.
To integrate these channels for a seamless customer experience, it’s crucial to ensure your messaging is consistent across all channels. For instance, the promotional email a customer receives should match the messaging on your website, social media, and other marketing channels.
Furthermore, consider your customer’s journey across these channels. For instance, a blog post on your website could direct readers to related products in your WooCommerce store, while an email campaign could promote a recent blog post.
Streamlining inventory management across channels
Managing inventory across multiple sales channels can be a complex task. However, it’s a critical aspect of an omnichannel strategy as customers expect product availability to be consistent across all channels.
WooMultistore
WooCommerce, with the right integrations, can help you maintain real-time inventory tracking. That’s why it’s important to take the time to research plugins, such as WooMultistore, that allows you to sync your inventory across different sales channels, automatically updating stock levels as sales are made. Tools like this can also facilitate dropshipping or selling products from third-party vendors, which adds another layer to inventory management.
Remember, real-time inventory tracking prevents overselling and stockouts, improving customer satisfaction and maintaining the seamless shopping experience crucial to an omnichannel retail strategy.
Implement seamless customer service
Customer service is a key pillar of an effective omnichannel strategy. Consumers today expect swift and efficient customer service, no matter which channels they choose to engage with your brand. With WooCommerce, there are various tools and techniques to help integrate customer service across channels.
A help desk plugin, such as WPHelpDesk or Help Scout Desk, integrates a customer service platform directly into your WooCommerce store. It allows customers to raise tickets and helps you manage and respond to these tickets efficiently.
Live chat plugins can provide instant support to customers while they are shopping in your store. Similarly, chatbots can automate responses to common queries, providing instant support even outside of business hours.
For social media queries, tools like Buffer or Hootsuite can help you manage all your social media interactions in one place, ensuring no customer queries are missed.
To truly integrate customer service across channels, consider a holistic customer service platform like Zendesk or Freshdesk. These platforms pull in customer interactions from various channels – email, social media, live chat, and phone calls – into one dashboard, making it easier to manage and respond to customer queries efficiently.
Manage WooCommerce invoices
Proper invoicing and record keeping are critical components of a successful business operation, playing a key role in accounting, customer service, and legal compliance. Efficient invoice management can help track sales, manage refunds, assist with tax preparation, and provide valuable insights into your business. With WooCommerce, managing invoices can be simplified through its built-in features and additional plugins.
WooCommerce has built-in functionality to create and manage invoices for every order placed on your store. These invoices include vital details such as product information, customer details, taxes, and more. They can be accessed from your WooCommerce dashboard, making it easy to keep track of your sales.
However, if you need more advanced features to generate an invoice, like custom invoice templates, automated invoicing, or PDF invoice generation, there are various plugins that can enhance WooCommerce’s default invoicing functionality.
Time to get your omnichannel up and running
Creating an effective omnichannel retail strategy with WooCommerce is essential for businesses aiming to thrive in the modern retail landscape. By leveraging WooCommerce’s features, integrations, and plugins, you can provide a seamless shopping experience for your customers across multiple channels.
By implementing the strategies discussed in this article, you can create a powerful omnichannel retail presence with WooCommerce, reach customers wherever they are, provide personalized experiences, streamline operations, and drive sales. With WooCommerce’s flexibility and the support of various plugins and tools, it’s never been easier to adapt and evolve your omnichannel strategy to meet the changing demands of customers and stay ahead of the competition.
What is omnichannel retailing?
Omnichannel retailing is an integrated sales approach that provides a seamless shopping experience across different platforms, merging digital and physical interactions.
How can WooCommerce support an omnichannel retail strategy?
WooCommerce supports omnichannel retailing by offering features and plugins that allow for the integration of various customer touchpoints, from physical and digital products to appointment bookings and subscriptions.
How can an omnichannel retail strategy help businesses thrive in the modern retail landscape?
An omnichannel retail strategy can help businesses provide a seamless shopping experience for their customers across multiple channels. By leveraging WooCommerce’s features, integrations, and plugins, businesses can adapt and evolve their strategy to meet the changing demands of customers and stay ahead of the competition.
How can invoices be managed in WooCommerce?
WooCommerce has built-in functionality to create and manage invoices for every order placed on your store. For more advanced features, there are various plugins that can enhance WooCommerce’s default invoicing functionality.
How can customer service be integrated across channels in WooCommerce?
With WooCommerce, there are various tools and techniques to help integrate customer service across channels. This includes help desk plugins, live chat plugins, chatbots, and holistic customer service platforms like Zendesk or Freshdesk.
Getting Your Shopify Store Ready for Black Friday 2023
Every year, on the Friday after Thanksgiving, Black Friday takes place. Black Friday is a shopping holiday marked by some of the year’s best sales, and it runs from Black Friday through Cyber Monday, the Monday following Thanksgiving.
Although Black Friday is largely an American shopping holiday, it has become a well-known and highly anticipated global event, largely through the massive role that ecommerce now plays during this shopping holiday.
If you are wondering where to get started in prepping your Shopify business for Black Friday 2023, then you have come to the right place. In this article by Ecommerce Pro, we are going to be talking about what you need to do to get ready for the Black Friday holiday rush in 2023.
When it comes to ecommerce Black Friday sales, there’s a clear upward trend. Last year’s Black Friday set a remarkable milestone as we saw U.S. online retail consumers spend a record $9.12 billion. As astounding as those numbers are, we’re expecting 2023’s Black Friday sales to be even bigger, especially in the ecommerce space.
Driven by inflation and a challenging economic climate, American customers shopped for better deals on Black Friday. On November 25, online retail sales in 2022 actually topped 2020’s pandemic-driven record by achieving a new high of $9.12 billion, seeing an increase of 2.3% from $8.92 billion in 2021.
This year, Black Friday falls on Nov 24, 2023. With plenty of time to prepare, it’s best to get started as early as possible for a Black Friday 2023 you won’t be forgetting any time soon.
In the following sections, we’re going to give you tips and highlight areas of your online business to focus on in preparation for a remarkable holiday rush:
Get ready for Black Friday 2023 with Ecommerce Pro, your Shopify Expert agency. Get in touch now and let’s maximize your profits.
1. Improve the Mobile Experience
While this is a recurring tip we give to all stores, especially during Black Friday and other holiday shopping seasons, it’s important to pay just as much attention to the desktop experience as the mobile experience as mobile is only getting more popular over time.
It is worth noting that 78% of online traffic in last year’s Black Friday sales was generated by mobile devices, which play an increasingly significant role in consumer behavior. Mobile purchases on Black Friday amounted to 48% of internet sales, up from 44% in 2021.
The reason why optimizing your Shopify store for mobile is so important is because, unlike laptops and computers, consumers can whip out their phones anywhere and more searches today are performed on mobile phones than on desktops and tablets.
While Shopify stores are already optimized for the mobile experience, there are still a few improvements you can make, including minimizing your use of text on product pages and using sticky navigation and buttons.
2. Double Down on Social Media Presence
In relation to the importance of mobile devices in online shopping, it’s also important not to neglect your social media presence.
During the lead-up to Black Friday, social media can be a potent tool for building relationships with your customers if used properly. Positive reviews may be used in posts to increase demand and foster trust, or inspiring images can be used to draw in viewers, generate buzz, and encourage users to share their experience with your brand to others.
In the U.S. and throughout the world, social media platforms accounted for 12% of all mobile traffic during Black Friday, a 22% increase from 2021. Up to 65% of consumers plan to purchase online during the holiday season, and 36% of them will use social media to find offers.
In the weeks leading up to the event, be sure to publish often and make use of trends and hashtags to boost exposure to your posts. Moreover, you should consider enabling shoppable posts so you can sell directly on platforms like Facebook and Instagram.
Get in touch with Ecommerce Pro to learn how you can make your Shopify online store optimized for mobile.
3. Plan Your Discounts & Deals Early
It’s important to remember that while Black Friday buyers are searching for big discounts, they are also ready to spend more money than at any other time of the year. These bargains and discounts are what motivate consumers to get enthusiastic about Black Friday, so plan out your sales strategy in advanced.
Planning for a sale takes time, so don’t wait until the last minute to start organizing. For Black Friday, you must select the products you wish to provide a discount on, then plan the start and end dates of the sales.
When planning a sale, consider your products, profitability, and inventory. To make things easier, create a sales map in Excel and include start and end dates, selling prices, and product details. You can also manage promotions with the aid of Shopify discounts to make things easier and automated.
Black Friday discounts typically range from 20 to 25 percent. Although there can be discounts of up to 80%, the majority of prices are around 25%, allowing businesses to actually turn a profit than when prices are kept at regular levels due to a high increase in the average purchase value.
4. Market Your Black Friday Deals
Once you have your discount strategy down, consider how you will market your Black Friday deals to your customers. Many online brands will be doubling down on their marketing strategies leading up to Black Friday and you should, too. You can begin by informing your email subscribers and followers on social media several weeks or even months beforehand. By doing this, you can launch your deals to an audience that is already interested and in anticipation of your sale.
Interestingly, online customers are using social media to get inspiration and to find out about the best sales, promoting brands to use social media as a powerful marketing tool. Customers are increasingly clicking through to the discounts they find on social media, resulting in a slowly rising form of revenue. Here are some potential marketing strategies to use on Black Friday to get customers excited for the big sales to come:
Give email subscribers or social media followers special early access to Black Friday deals.
Promote your Black Friday sales in advance by informing your customers and followers that you will be sharing long-awaited sale soon.
Announce free shipping during Black Friday weekend.
5. Provide Exceptional Customer Support
During busy shopping days like Black Friday,more questions and problems may emerge. Because of this, its important to make sure your customer support team is ready to manage any concerns or issues presented by your customers.
You need to provide a variety of ways for consumers to contact you, including live chat, email, and phone support. During Black Friday, you may even want to consider hiring extra help to get you through the shopping holiday. Having a customer support representative can be pretty handy because you will be dealing with more people and more sales. If you can’t handle your customers’ queries, problems, and messages in a good and timely manner, then it’s time for you to hire a customer support representative, even for just a couple of months to help you handle the influx of people.
Alternatively, you can turn to AI chatbots or revisit your FAQ page to make improvements pertinent to the Black Friday rush
6. Use Cross-selling and Up-selling Tactics
Consider using upselling and cross-selling strategies to improve the success of your Shopify business on Black Friday in 2023. You can raise the average order value and increase total sales during the Black Friday rush by carefully displaying these recommendations on product pages and throughout the checkout process. Additionally, to encourage customers to make greater purchases, you can create unique bundle deals that pair different products at steep discounts.
You can improve the upselling and cross-selling process by utilizing data-driven recommendations and offering incentives like stacked discounts. This will give